diff options
| author | Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org> | 2006-01-09 00:49:07 +0000 |
|---|---|---|
| committer | Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org> | 2006-01-09 00:49:07 +0000 |
| commit | 007f67a693e4d031fd3d792df8e4d5f43e2cb2e7 (patch) | |
| tree | 90d17e00e572ecb1e24764b6f29c80e098b08d29 /Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base | |
| parent | 950209b26f70aa87ed07c54f82a95b6f03b7c3a0 (diff) | |
doc/latex
git-svn-id: svn://tug.org/texlive/trunk@84 c570f23f-e606-0410-a88d-b1316a301751
Diffstat (limited to 'Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base')
93 files changed, 36856 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/00readme.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/00readme.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..baa863bfc57 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/00readme.txt @@ -0,0 +1,121 @@ + LaTeX Distribution Guide + + 2003/12/01 + + +WELCOME TO LaTeX! + +This file contains a brief distribution guide for the latest standard +version of the LaTeX document preparation system. + +This system is maintained by The LaTeX3 Project Team. + + ******************************************************** + * Please read this file carefully because it gives * + * important information about other documentation * + * provided with the LaTeX system that will help you * + * in installing and using it. * + ******************************************************** + + ******************************************************** + * The files ltnews*.tex (and ltnews*.dvi, .ps, .pdf) * + * contain the LaTeX newsletters, the highest number * + * being the most recent. * + * * + * Please print this latest edition and distribute it * + * to all users ... and to anyone else who may be * + * interested. * + * * + * It normally fits onto a single sheet, so it can be * + * displayed as a poster. * + ******************************************************** + + +The LaTeX system is described in: + + * LaTeX: A Document Preparation System; Leslie Lamport, Addison-Wesley + + * The LaTeX Companion, 2ed; Mittelbach and Goossens with Braams, + Carlisle and Rowley, Addison-Wesley + + * Guide to LaTeX 4ed; Kopka and Daly, Addison-Wesley + + +This distribution is described in the files ending with .txt. You +should read install.txt before starting to install LaTeX. + +Here is a brief description of some of these files: + + * 00readme.txt is this file. + + * manifest.txt lists all the files in the LaTeX distribution + with one line information about their contents. + + * install.txt describes how to install LaTeX. + + * tex2.txt contains important information for users of extremely + old versions of TeX (pre 1990). + + * autoload.txt describes a variant of LaTeX that is no longer supported. + + * unpacked.txt lists all the files in the unpacked LaTeX distribution. + + * legal.txt and lppl.txt describe the LaTeX copyright, warranty and + copying restrictions. + + * patches.txt describes the update policy and how important changes + will be distributed between release dates. + + * texpert.txt contains information about the installation that is + useful for TeX experts. + + * bugs.txt describes how to submit a bug report for LaTeX. + + +Other documentation files include files with names of the form: + + <xxx>guide.tex + +You will probably need to update your system before you can typeset +these files. Each file needs three LaTeX runs. + + +The following files also contain useful information: + + * ltx3info.tex gives you some information about the LaTeX3 project. + + * the other files ltnews*.* are the news files from previous releases: + these contain useful information but be warned that some of it may + be out-of-date as these files are never changed. + + * manual.err lists errata in: + LaTeX: A Document Preparation System; Leslie Lamport, Addison-Wesley + + * compan.err lists errata in: + The LaTeX Companion; Goossens, Mittelbach and Samarin, Addison-Wesley + + * begleit.err lists errata in: + Der LaTeX-Begleiter; Goossens, Mittelbach and Samarin, Addison-Wesley + + * grphcomp.err lists errata in: + The LaTeX Graphics Companion; Goossens, Rahtz, and Mittelbach, + Addison-Wesley + + * handbuch.err lists errata in: + Das LaTeX-Handbuch; Leslie Lamport, Addison-Wesley + + * webcomp.err lists errata in: + The LaTeX Web Companion; Goossens and Rahtz, Addison-Wesley + + +In general you are not allowed to change the files in this +distribution unless you rename them, *except* for certain +files such as the configuration files, ending with .cfg. +Please see the licence (in lppl.txt) for further details. + + +Please do not request updates from us. Distribution is done only +through the CTAN archives. + + +--- Copyright 2003 the LaTeX3 project. All rights reserved --- diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/amiweb2c.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/amiweb2c.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..3b11952efee --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/amiweb2c.txt @@ -0,0 +1,306 @@ + + + LaTeX installation instructions for AmiWeb2c TeX + + 15 March 1998 + + +SUMMARY +======= + +This file contains instructions on how to install LaTeX for Web2c TeX +on the Amiga (aka AmiWeb2c). Before reading this file, you should read +install.txt, which will explain how the LaTeX installation works, and +web2c.txt, which describes the Unix version of this TeX system. + +This file describes: + + * How to save any old version of LaTeX. + + * How to configure LaTeX. + + * How to unpack the LaTeX distribution. + + * How to install the LaTeX files. + + * How to create the LaTeX format. + + * What to do if you have any problems. + + +REQUIREMENTS +============ + +In addition to the LaTeX distribution files, you will also need the +following: + + * the file `/texmf/tex/generic/local/hyphen.cfg' coming with the source + distribution of AmiWeb2c, loading hyphenation patterns for US English + (hyphen.tex aka ushyph1.tex) and UK English (ukhyphen.tex), and German + (ghyph31.tex). In the commentary section of `hyphen.cfg' a list of + many other languages is given together with references to pattern + files. Feel free to modify `hyphen.cfg' as you need (or replace it + with your own version). + + +SAVING ANY OLD VERSION OF LATEX +=============================== + +Nobody should ever have installed LaTeX 2.09 with AmiWeb2c (which was +first released in April/May 1995), so there is no need for a special +treatment of such an old version of LaTeX. + +Updating installations of LaTeX2e is completely similar to a generic +LaTeX installation. This simply amounts to replacing all files with +their new versions and recreating the LaTeX format file `latex.fmt'. + + +CONFIGURING LATEX +================= + +During the installation procedure, it may be easiest to set some +temporary device names. + +The LATEXINPUTS: directory is where the LaTeX base packages and classes +will finally be installed. In the `TeX Directory Structure' assumed by +AmiWeb2c this defaults to: + + assign LATEXINPUTS: HD:AmiWeb2c-<version>/texmf/tex/latex/base + +The LATEXFORMAT: directory is where the LaTeX format is stored: + + assign LATEXFORMAT: HD:AmiWeb2c-<version>/texmf/web2c + +The LATEXDIST: directory is where the LaTeX distribution is stored: + + assign LATEXDIST: HD:AmiWeb2c-<version>/texmf/source/latex/base + +You should put all files coming with the base distribution of LaTeX in +the LATEXDIST: directory. After the successful installation procedure, +you can safely remove the complete LATEXDIST: directory. + +If you started with the ready-to-use binaries, I suggest that you get +Norbert Püschel's `DOSPrefs' commodity from the Aminet at + + Aminet:/util/misc/DOSPrefs31.lha + +This program patches the AmigaOS to enable the Unix notations `.' and +`..' for the `current' and the `parent' directory respectively. There +are similar tools for this purpose, but AmiWeb2c was only tested with +`DOSPrefs'. For your convenience, "DOSPrefs 3.1" is included with the +AmiWeb2c distribution. + + +UNPACKING THE DISTRIBUTION +========================== + +To unpack the LaTeX distribution, you should: + + cd LATEXDIST: + tex --ini unpack.ins + +This takes about 15 minutes on a 50 MHz 68030, but considerably longer +on a standard 7.19 MHz 68000 (most likely several hours). Why don't you +just go and make a good cup of tea? [Personal note: on a P5/133 running +the Linux operating system the very same task takes about half a minute, +so I have my tea ready before I install a new version of LaTeX.] + + +PUTTING THE FILES WHERE LATEX CAN READ THEM +=========================================== + +How was your tea? To install the LaTeX files created in the previous +step, you should: + + cd LATEXDIST: + copy latexbug.tex testpage.tex lablst.tex idx.tex ltxcheck.tex + + nfssfont.tex small2e.tex sample2e.tex docstrip.tex + + #?.cls #?.clo #?.sty #?.fd #?.def #?.ltx + + LATEXINPUTS: + +(The `+' character means that you should type this as a single command.) + +WARNING: This single command line most certainly exceeds the maximum +length the AmigaOS is able to cope with! Please, make sure that ALL +these files are correctly installed in `LATEXINPUTS:'. And make sure +that all these files are copied "as is", the file lookup mechanism of +AmiWeb2c won't find files with incorrect uppercase/lowercase spelling, +e.g., OT1enc.def (old) versus ot1enc.def (new). + +If you have MakeIndex installed or intend to do so, copy #?.ist to the +MakeIndex inputs directory, which should be in TDS notation: + + /texmf/makeindex/ + + +CREATING THE LATEX FORMAT +========================= + +After the unpacked files of the LaTeX distribution are installed at +the appropriate place, you have to create the LaTeX format proper. +This will conveniently be done by the following commands: + + cd LATEXFORMAT: + tex --ini --progname=latex latex.ltx + +Thus the format file latex.fmt will be created at the correct place and +also the correctness of the installation will be tested, because the +necessary files will be read from the appropriate paths. A useful +shortcut to invoke LaTeX is `alias latex="tex --progname=latex"'. + +If you intend to use any of the advanced features provided by `e-TeX' +(`enhanced TeX'), like left-to-right typesetting, you should instead +use the commands + + cd LATEXFORMAT: + etex --ini --efmt=elatex *latex.ltx + etex --ini --progname=elatex latex.ltx + +to create the format file and set `alias elatex="etex --progname=elatex"' +and `alias latex="etex --progname=latex"'. (Note the asterisk in front of +`latex.ltx'; this invokes a special feature of the etex binary, i.e., the +`extended mode of e-TeX'.) + +If you intend to produce output in Portable Document Format (PDF) from +your LaTeX sources, you may additionally use the command + + cd LATEXFORMAT: + pdftex --ini --progname=pdflatex latex.ltx + +together with `alias pdflatex="pdftex --progname=pdflatex"'. + +If you intend to use the 16-bit UniCode version of TeX, aka Omega, you +may additionally use the command + + cd LATEXFORMAT: + omega --ini --progname=lambda lambda.tex + +together with `alias lambda="omega --progname=lambda"'. + + +GETTING A WORKING LaTeX +======================= + +As soon as the format file `latex.fmt' is created in the proper place, you +are set for using LaTeX. Either use `alias latex "tex --progname=latex"' +or `makelink from latex to tex' to conveniently set up a `latex' call. + +Oh, and don't forget to remake the ls-R database! + + +CHECKING THAT THE INSTALLATION WORKED +===================================== + +To check that the installation worked, you should: + + cd LATEXFORMAT: + latex ltxcheck + +This will perform a number of tests, which should all report `OK', +except for the "\@currdir" part (and, depending on your installation, +the "DC/EC" font stuff). According to the LaTeX check routine, all +files come from the current working directory, contrary to the common +installation. Due to the limitations of the Amiga implementation of +file lookup, which is inherently very Unix-prone, there seems to be +no remedy to this situation. Press "return" to skip the warnings. + + +PROBLEMS +======== + +`texsys.cfg': Due to technical limitations of the Amiga port of the + Kpathsea library it is necessary to "\let\@currdir=\@empty" in this + file. The LaTeX test suite "latex ltxcheck" will issue a warning + message when checking the current directory syntax. Proceed. + +`File missing': As long as the default search paths of AmiWeb2c are + correctly set up and used, you won't encounter this message. + +`Font missing': Some of the fonts, i.e., tfm files, required by LaTeX + are missing. In addition to the 75 standard fonts of the `Computer + Modern' family, several additional fonts are needed. Run MetaFont + on the respective font drivers and install the tfm files in the + `texmf/fonts/tfm//' directory structure. You may choose to ignore + the warning about the missing `EC' fonts issued by the LaTeX + check suite. + +`Out of memory': The memory configuration file `texmf.cnf' coming with + the source distribution of AmiWeb2c in `texmf/web2c/' was used for the + installation of LaTeX on my system, so it should be appropriate for + your machine too. Since AmiWeb2c is directly descended from the Unix + Web2c distribution, its binaries are designed for a BigTeX setup. If + you really want to install it on machines with less than 4 MB of RAM, + you will most likely have to restrict yourself to a single language in + `texmf/tex/generic/local/hyphen.cfg' and comment the value for `triesize' + in `texmf/web2c/texmf.cnf' in order to start IniTeX. Please do not + request a SmallTeX version of AmiWeb2c, it just can't be done. + +If you have any other problems with the LaTeX installation, see the +`PROBLEMS' section in install.txt. + + +CLEARING UP +=========== + +You may now be wondering what to do with all the remaining files that +are not needed to run LaTeX. This is, of course, a matter of personal +taste and availability of disk space but here is some guidance. + + * The files with extension .dtx, together with source2e.tex, can be + used to typeset the documented source code (see texpert.txt for + further information). + + * The files with extension .fdd contain the documented sources for the + font definition files. + + * The files ltnews<xx>.tex and ltnews<xx>.ps both contain the lastest + LaTeX newsletter. + + * The file ltx3info.tex contains information about the LaTeX3 project + and how you can support it. + + * The files with extension .txt contain information about (amongst + other things) copyright, installation, patches and bug-reports; + and those with extension .err contain errata lists for various + publications: see 00readme.txt for further details. + + * The files with names of the form <xxx>guide.tex contain reference + information convering only those features new to this version of + LaTeX: they are not intended to be either a user guide or a + complete reference. + + * The files with extension .ltx, together with latexcheck.tex, are + used to create and test the format; therefore you should keep these + together with the installed LaTeX system in the LATEXINPUTS: + directory if you expect to remake the format before getting the next + full distribution. + + * The files with extension .ins are used to unpack the code from the + .dtx and .fdd files. + + * We recommend that you keep, in the LATEXFORMAT: directory, the + transcript file latex.log that was produced whilst creating the + format. + +If you don't need the documentation or if you are lacking enough disk +space to permanently keep the LaTeX distribution files, you can now: + + delete LATEXDIST:#? + + +SYSTEM-SPECIFIC SECTIONS +======================== + +As the maintainer and distributor of AmiWeb2c I'm interested in feedback +about problems with the application of this TeX system for the Amiga. +Please report difficulties installing and/or using LaTeX that are +clearly related to any (mis)feature of AmiWeb2c to + + Andreas Scherer + Rochusstraße 22-24 + 52062 Aachen, Germany + <andreas.scherer@pobox.com> + + + --- Copyright 1995, 1998 Andreas Scherer and the LaTeX3 project. --- + --- All rights reserved. --- diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/autoload.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/autoload.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..8e3e242a19f --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/autoload.txt @@ -0,0 +1,138 @@ + IMPORTANT NOTICE + This variant of LaTeX is now UNSUPPORTED but we have left its + description in this file for posterity ... enjoy! + + LaTeX on small systems: auto-loading + + 21 November 1995 + + +On some small systems (perhaps most noticeably emTeX for PCs if your +machine is unable to use the TeX386 version) LaTeX uses up a large +amount of the memory available to TeX, leaving very little for storage +of any further commands, complex text (such as tables), floats or +cross references that may occur in a typical document. Note that +these limits are built into the TeX executable and do not directly +correspond to any physical memory that your machine has installed. + +In order to help with this problem, we have produced an *experimental* +configuration of LaTeX in which certain functions are not predefined +in the format, but are loaded automatically from a style file the first +time they are used. This saves a lot of memory in the case that a +document does not use these features. + +In this release two environments are `auto-loaded' in this way, +`picture' and `tabbing', as are various bits of internal code used in +error handling, font loading and advanced page makeup. + + +MAKING THE AUTOLOAD FORMAT +========================== + +NOTE: Before you can proceed any further you *must* unpack the standard +version from unpack.ins. + +Process the file autoload.ins (with plain TeX or LaTeX, not iniTeX). + +This will produce six files: + + latexa.ltx source file for the smaller format + + And the following five package files: + + autopict.sty source for picture mode + autotabg.sty source for tabbing environment + autoerr.sty texts of most LaTeX error commands + autofss1.sty little used internal font selection commands + autoout1.sty source for \enlargethispage and related commands. + +The `latexa' format should then be made by running iniTeX on the +file `latexa.ltx'. + +To do this, follow the instructions in install.txt (and emtex.txt +etc) but replace: + `latex.ltx' and `latex.fmt' +by + `latexa.ltx' and `latexa.fmt'. + +Finally, the five files `autoxxxx.sty' should be moved to the +directory in which the other LaTeX .sty files have been placed. + + +USING THE FORMAT +================ + +The resulting format should normally be used in exactly the same way +as standard LaTeX. + +Picture mode can be used without any special commands. Since picture +mode is not pre-defined, you will notice TeX loading the `autopict' +package the first time you use \begin{picture} (or \thicklines) in a +document. This takes some time (and the name of the file being loaded +appears on the terminal) but otherwise the behaviour should be just as +with standard LaTeX. + +For instance, processing usrguide.tex (which has a picture on page 23) +produces the following terminal output: + + This is TeX, Version 3.1415 (C version 6.1) + (usrguide.tex + LaTeX2e (autoload version) <1995/06/01> + ) + (ltxguide.cls + Document Class: ltxguide 1994/12/14 Standard LaTeX class + (article.cls + Document Class: article 1995/06/05 v1.3d Standard LaTeX document class + (size10.clo))) (usrguide.aux) (OMScmr.fd) (usrguide.toc [1]) [2] [3] + [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16] [17] [18] + [19] [20] [21] [22] (autopict.sty) [23] [24] [25] [26] [27] [28] [29] + [30] (usrguide.aux) ) + +(The output may differ on your machine due to different path names for +the files.) + + +POSSIBLE PROBLEMS +================= + +Sometimes you need to redefine a command before it is used. Clearly, if +the command is not initially defined, it cannot easily be redefined! + +As a real example, the popular `epic' package redefines some picture +mode commands, therefore to use epic it is necessary to force +picture mode to be loaded by explicitly putting in your document +\usepackage{autopict} before \usepackage{epic}. + +If a document containing \usepackage{autopict} is sent to a site using +the `full' version of LaTeX (which has picture mode defined in the +format) then this \usepackage will be silently ignored and the +document will still work correctly. + +A note to package writers: if your package depends on the picture +environment being loaded then you can avoid the user needing to add +the extra \usepackage to documents by adding \RequirePackage{autopict} +to the beginning of your package file. + +Similar comments apply to `tabbing' and the `autotabg' package. + + +INTERNAL INTERFACE +================== + +Most new features added in LaTeX2e that were not in LaTeX2.09 have a +consistent interface of commands \WithMixedCase names. + +If you inspect the implementation of this auto-loading feature you will +not find any such interface, but rather an ad hoc collection of low- +level TeX commands. + +This situation may change as more practical experience is gained with +the auto-loading feature. In future releases it may be possible to +auto-load more parts of LaTeX (so making an even smaller `base' format) +and an interface for producing the auto-loaded files may be defined. + +However, for the user, the nature of the implementation should not +matter too much since in the normal case the loading of the file is +`invisible' and happens automatically the first time it is needed. + +--- Copyright 1995 the LaTeX3 project. All rights reserved --- diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/begleit.err b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/begleit.err new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..8829e269cf1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/begleit.err @@ -0,0 +1,2164 @@ +Errata Liste f"ur: + +@book(A-Wgerm:GMS94, + author = {Michel Goossens and Frank Mittelbach and + Alexander Samarin}, + title = {Der {\LaTeX}-Begleiter}, + publisher = {Addison-Wesley}, + address = {Bonn; Paris; Reading, Massachusetts}, + year = 1994, + pagenums = {554 + 34}, + bibliography = {yes}, + index = {yes}, + isbn = {3-89319-646-3}, +) + +Weitere Fehlermeldungen bitte an: + + Frank.Mittelbach@Uni-Mainz.de + +(Wenn m"oglich bitte im Format + + * Seite <X>, Zeile <X> (<Kuerzel>) + Text + +Danke) + +Version: 30 Apr 1999 +-------------------- + +Neuste Version dieser Liste ist Teil der LaTeX Distribution + + +*********************************** +* * +* Fehler in der 1. Auflage * +* * +*********************************** + +Ein Teil der Fehlerbeschreibungen sind in Englisch (da im Companion +gefunden und noch nicht "ubersetzt), die Seitenangaben sind aber +korrekt. + +========== Allgemein ============== + +-* Allgemein (MSc) + Ersetzte LaTeX3 Projekt durch LaTeX3-Projekt + + * Kapitel"uberschriften (FMi) + Alle Kapitel"uberschriften wurden beim Druck um vier bis f"unf + Zeilen zu hoch plaziert. Dies ist im Nachdruck korrigiert. + + * Optischer Randausgleich bei Bindestrichen (MiB, FMi) + Bei W"ortern mit Bindestrich, die am Bindestrich getrennt wurden, + ist der optische Randausgleich in vielen F"allen aufgrund eines + Fehlers in der Programierung nicht korrekt ausgef"uhrt. + +=================================== + + * Seite iii, copyright notice (BDe) + True copyright symbol provided by Lucida Bright should be used. + +========== Zur deutschen Ausgabe == + +-* Seite vii, 2. Absatz, 1.Zeile (VSc) + ersetze: Wesentlichen durch wesentlichen + +========== Vorwort ============== + + * Seite ix, Absatz 2, Zeile (MCl) + Das "-" in Natur- h"angt nicht. + +-* Seite xiv, 2. Zeile (VSc) + erg"anze hinter: 90\% "der" englischsprachigen Ausgabe + + * Seite xv, 2.Absatz, 6. Zeile: (TQ) + streiche: Allerdings ist TeX ist auf + ^^^ + * Seite xv (FMi) + Add a section entitled "Verwendung der Beispiele" and describe the + need for a) \makeatletter ... for commands with @ in their name, ie + something like the explanation on Seite 15 and b) that people have + to watch out for the packages they need, something that might be + explained a little earlier on in the same section. + + * Seite xvi, 2.Zeile: (TQ) + F"uge Leerzeichen ein hinter "Kapitel 7." + +========== Kapitel 1 ============== + + * Seite 1, 1. Absatz, 7. letzte Zeile (VSc) + korrigiere: werden die Vorteile des generischen Ansatzes erl"autert. + ^ +-* Seite 2, 6. Zeile (ADe) + Entferne Komma: "im TeX-Format wird, dem Computer" + ^ +-* Seite 2, 7. Zeile (VSc) + ersetze hinter: auszusehen haben"." durch "," + + * Seite 3, Kapitel 1.1.3, 1. Zeile (LSD) + f"uge "-" ein: Anzahl von TeX- und insbesondere von LaTeX-Anwendern + ^ + Seite 4, Absatz 2, Satz 2 (SSl) + der Satz enthält 2x "und", Vorschlag: ein "und" durch ein Komma ersetzen. + + * Seite 4, Absatz 2, Zeile 4 v.u. (TLa) + Entferne Komma: book, slides und letter + ^ + * Seite 4, 5. Absatz, 5. Zeile (VSc) + l"osche Leerzeichen: TeX positioniert seine (Zeichen-) Boxen mit + ^ + * Seite 4, 5. Absatz, 6. Zeile (VSc) + korrigiere Ligatur: mit einer Auf"|l"osung statt Aufl"osung + +-* Seite 6, 3. Absatz, 5. Zeile (VSc) + f"uge ein hinter: von BiBTeX" "gelesen + +-* Seite 6, Kapitel 1.2.2, 1. + 2. item (VSc) + korrigiere Ligatur: Auf"|l"osung statt Aufl"osung + + * Seite 6, Dritter Listeneintrag in 1.2.2 (MCl) + Es hei"st "X Window System" oder einfach "X", nicht + "X Windows". + + * Seite 6, Dritter Listeneintrag in 1.2.3 (MC) + Es hei"st "X Window System" oder einfach "X", nicht + "X Windows". + + * Seite 7, 1. Absatz, 5. Zeile (LSD) + l"osche Komma: Modern, LaTeX, American Mathematical Society und Euler + ^ +-* Seite 7, Kapitel 1.3.1, 2. Absatz, 3. Zeile (VSc) + korrigiere Trennung, statt "Mar-kup" setze "Mark-up" + + * Seite 8, 2. Absatz, 7./8. Zeile (LSD) + Ersetze: Das Formatieren (visuelle Darstellen) der Komponenten + ^^ ^^ + * Seite 8, letzter Absatz, 2. Zeile (LSD) + l"osche Komma: Brian Reids Scribe System entwickelte + ^ +-* Seite 8, letzter Absatz, 13. Zeile (VSc) + l"osche Komma hinter: Einf"uhrung in SMGL"," siehe [33,113]. + + * Seite 9, Kapitel 1.3.3, 1. Absatz, 2. Zeile (LSD) + f"uge "-" ein: Elemente in der Dokumenten-Pr"aambel generisch + + * Seite 9, Kapitel 1.3.3, 1. Absatz, 2. Zeile (VLS) + l"osche 'n': gesetzt werden, sollten man neue + ^ + * Seite 9, Kapitel 1.3.3, 2. Absatz, 7. Zeile (LSD) + f"uge "-" ein: Umgebungen in der Dokumenten-Pr"aambel. + +========== Kapitel 2 ============== + + * Seite 13, 4.Zeile: (TQ) + F"uge Komma ein hinter " M"oglichkeiten" + + * Seite 13, Kapitel 2.1.1, 1. Absatz, 7. Zeile (SSl) + oder eines einzelnen Pakets + ^ +* Seite 14 und Seite 91 (MCl) + Soll das "\varepsilon" von \LaTeXe wirklich so weit in den + Rand h"angen? + + * Seite 20, Tafel 2.2, 2. Zeile (SPi) + Ersetze durch + \section[toc_eintrag]{titel} ja toc_eintrag titel + ^^^^^ + * Seite 24, Beschreibung des Arguments "name" (BRa) + Add something like: + The \emph{name} must be non-empty. \@startsection internally + calls the command \\emph{name}mark with one argument to produce + the running head if necessary, see pages 93ff. For this reason one + has to define such a command for completely new sectioning + commands. Similarily, a command with two arguments (title and + page number) and the name \l@\emph{name} must exist to format any + table of contents entries properly, see pages 34ff. + + * Seite 25, letzer Absatz, 1.Zeile (CLa,FMi) + Entferne: + "Die Abbildungen 2.6 und 2.7 auf der naechsten Seite..." + ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + da nicht klar ist ob es sich auf 2.6+2.7 oder nur 2.7 bezieht + + * Seite 25, description of "nachabstand" (CRo) + boundary condition is wrong. + replace: nachabstand \geq 0 by nachabstand > 0 + and + replace: nachabstand < 0 by nachabstand \leq 0 + + * 26, Abb. 2.7; Markierung des Nachabstandes (TLa) + Ersetze: (<) ... auch hier durch (\leq)! + ^^^^ + * Seite 28, 4.Zeile in Abbildung (TQ) + Setze ""Uberschrift" f"ur ""uberschrift" + + * Seite 34, 26. Zeile (SPi) + Dadurch, da\ss + ^ + * Seite 35, 2.4.2; Absatz 3, Zeile 1 (TLa) + Entferne Komma: toc, lof oder lot + ^ + * Seite 41, 11. Zeile (SPi) + ..., die Umgebungen (Klammer ueberfluessig) + + * 41, 2.5; Absatz 3, 3. Zeile (TLa) + Entferne Komma: die Umgebungen equation, + figure, table und die theorem-Familie ... + ^ +-* Seite 41, 3. Absatz, 6. Zeile (VSc) + l"osche hinter: Dies wird anhand "von" des folgenden Beispiels + + * Seite 42, 2.5.1; Absatz 3 von unten, Zeile 3 v.u. (TLa) + Erg"anze: Numerierungssystem + ^ + * Seite 43, Fussn. (SPi) + ...das Paket flafter verwenden, das in Abschnitt ... + ^^^ + * Seite 44, 9.Zeile: (TQ) + F"uge ein "e": in beide Argumente eintr"agt + ^ +-* Seite 45, 2. Absatz (VSc) + "Andere Definition von \reftextcurrent zu: + \newcommand{\reftextcurrent} + {auf dieser Seite} + +-* Seite 46, Kapitel 2.5.2, 2. Absatz, 2. Zeile (VSc) + f"uge ein hinter: das Paket xr" "in der + + * Seite 46, Absatz 2, Zeile 4 v.u. (TLa) + Entferne Komma: hat oder da"s + ^ +========== Kapitel 3 ============== + + * Seite 49, 5 Zeile von unten (SPi) + ...des Marquis de Sade mitgespielt. (kein Ausrufezeichen) + +-* Seite 50, Z.15 (FMi) + Ersetze "Lmcsxspace" durch \xspace. + + * Seite 52, Z.11 (SPi) + ... Anwendungen, bei denen... + ^ +-* Seite 53, Kapitel 3.1.5, Tafel 3.1 (Vsc) + Plazierung der Tafel (bottom float) besser vor Kapitel 3.1.6 + + * Page 53ff (PvO) + An alternative to picinpar is the pickins package which provides + sophisticated picture inclusion (with and without caption, with + frames etc.) into a paragraph. Main drawback perhaps: the + documentation is very good but right now only available in German. + +-* Seite 54, Abbildung 3.2 (MSc) + Die Umlaute "u usw. sind nicht korrekt formatiert. + +-* Seite 54, Abbildung 3.2, Bildunterschrift (VLS) + Anf"uhrungszeichen nicht formatiert ("`, "') + +-* Seite 57, 3. Absatz (VSc) + Einf"ugen der Kommata: Der Pr"afixbefehl \@enumi"," der f"ur + Querverweise verwendet wird"," hat als ... + + * Seite 57, Absatz 1 von unten, Zeile 2 v.u./3 (TLa) + Erg"anze: III. Forschungsantrag + ^ + Erg"anze: \item \textbf{Forschungsantrag} + ^ +-* Seite 58, 1. Absatz, enumerate-Beispiel (VSc) + Einr"ucken der 2. Zeile des letzten \item-Textes: + \begin{enumerate} + \item Listentext, weiterer Listentext, + Listentext, \label{w1} + : + \item Listentext, weiterer Listentext, + ......Listentext, weiterer Listentext. + \end{enumerate} + +-* Seite 59, 2. Absatz, \label und \ref Beispiel (VSc) + die Label "EX i.", "EX ii." und "A-1" befinden + sich alle auf unterschiedlicher Einr"uckungstiefe. +F"uge folgenden Absatz ein: + Die Einr"uckungstiefe wird durch den Stil, in dem der Z"ahler + dargestellt wird, beeinflu"st. Bei \Lit{i} wird \zB{} soviel Platz + reserviert, da"s die Zahl 8 (viii) dargestellt werden kann. Aus + diesem Grund sind die Einr"uckungstiefen im nachfolgenden Beispiel + unterschiedlich. + +-* Seite 64, code \Lentrylabel (FMi) + Change the line + \begin{verbatim} + {\makebox[0pt][l]{\textsf{#1:}}\\}}% + \end{verbatim} + to + \begin{verbatim} + {\makebox[0pt][l]{\textsf{#1:}}\\\mbox{}}}% + \end{verbatim} + to avoid an underfull hbox message. + +-* Seite 67, Abbildung 3.6 (VSc) + F"uge Leerzeichen ein hinter: Mit" "`\(\backslash\)input\{foo\}' + + * Seite 67, 3.3.2; Absatz 1 von unten, Zeile 1 v.u. (TLa) + Erg"anze: "ubergeht, zur Verf"ugung. + ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ +-* Seite 68, 1. Absatz, 3. Zeile (VSc) + streiche in: Einige "wenige" solcher Erweiterungen wurden + +-* Seite 69, \verbatimtabinput (VSc) + "ubersetze Inhalt von "testtab.out" + +-* Seite 71, \listinginput (VSc) + "ubersetze Inhalt von "testtab.out" + +-* Seite 71, Kapitel 3.4, 3.Zeile (VSc) + ersetze Text: w"ahrend in Kapitel 6 ab Seite 143 Gleitobjekte + ^^ +-* Seite 72, 1. Absatz, Fu"snoten (VSc) + die Abst"ande nach den Fu"snotensymbolen sind unnat"urlich gro"s, + so als ob sich in die Definition ein Leerzeichen eingeschlichen hat: + \renewcommand{\thefootnote}{\fnsymbol{footnote}~} +FMi: Hat sich nicht. Allerdings ist vielleicht an anderer + Stelle ein Fehler. Im Text ist der Abstand jedenfalls zu weit. + Am Fu"s der Seite ist Absicht. +FMi: bug in changebar.sty + + * Seite 72, Z -2 (OBa) + footnoterule should be \footnoterule + +-* Seite 73, Z. 3 (GGr) + footnoterule should be \footnoterule + +-* Seite 75, letzter Absatz von 3.4.2 (GGr,FMi) + Ersetze durch: + Der Stil von Marginalien wird durch drei Parameter festgelegt: + \marginparwidth, \marginparsep und \marginparpush. Ihre + Voreinstellungen findet man in Tafel 4.2 auf Seite 87. + +========== Kapitel 4 ============== + +-* Seite 87, Tafel 4.2 (FMi) + The table shows the value for the document styles of LaTeX + 2.09. The class files of LaTeX2e have slightly different values: + two-sided one-sided + 10pt 11pt 12pt 10pt 11pt 12pt +\oddsidemargin 35pt 29pt 17pt 62pt 55pt 39pt +\evensidemargin 89pt 80pt 62pt -- -- -- +\marginparwidth 121pt 113pt 95pt 94pt 88pt 73pt +\topmargin 16pt 21pt 17pt 16pt 21pt 17pt +\textheight 46 40 38 46 40 38 (in lines) + +-* Seite 85, Abbildung 4.1 (VSc) + f"uge Komma ein: Paket \texttt{layout} (von Kent McPherson, + ^^ + * Seite 85, Abbildung 4.1 (RHa) + die Bezeichnungen sollten uebersetzt werden: Body=Textkoerper,... + + * S. 85, Abbildung 4.1 (TBo) + Erste Zeile der Bildunterschrift: "Andere `mit Hilfe das Befehls' in + `mit Hilfe des Befehls'. + +-* Seite 88, 1. Absatz (VSc) + l"osche Wort: um den Schriftgrad auf auf die im Dokument verwendete + ^^^ +-* Seite 90, 2. Absatz, 3. Zeile (VSc) + Komma entfernen: + wie man die horizontalen Seitenlayoutparameter unter + Ber"ucksichtigung des normalen Schriftgrades des Dokumentes und des + ein- oder zweiseitigen Drucks, berechnet: + ^ +-* Seite 92, 1. Absatz (VSc) + Ersetze Satz: + Die erste Seite von "Uberschriftsbefehlen ... + durch: + Die erste Seite von "Uberschriftsbefehlen der h"ochsten Gliederungsebenen + (wie \verb|\part| oder \verb|\chapter|, aber auch \verb|\maketitle|) + wird in den Standardklassen von \LaTeXe{} hingegen mit dem Befehl + \verb|\thispagestyle{|plain\verb|}| gebildet. + + * Seite 92, Absatz 2, Zeile 2/5 (TLa) + empty/plain in \thispagestyle{..} nicht in \ttfamily + + * Page 92 l. 5 (BDe) + Replace "pagestyle{empty}" with "\pagestyle{empty}". + + * Seite 96, Absatz 2, Zeile 3 (TLa) + Erg"anze Komma: \chaptermark, sondern ... + ^ +-* Seite 92 Z. 14 (EPi) + Ersetze "thispagestyle{empty}" durch "\thispagestyle{empty}". + +-* Seite 95, 3. Absatz (VSc) + Ersetze Absatz durch: + Beim Seitenstil \textsf{headings} verwenden die Gliederungsbefehle + automatisch \verb|\markboth| und \verb|\markright| zur Erzeugung + von Kopfzeilen, siehe hierzu Tafel 4.3 auf der n"achsten Seite. + + * Seite 96, Abschnitt 4.3.2 (SWi) + Im vierten Punkt der Aufz"ahlung ist das Semikolon direkt an das Wort + Fu"szeilen zu setzen. + +-* Seite 98, 6.-8. Zeile von unten (VSc,FMi) + ersetze: \sl durch \slshape + \rm durch \normalfont + + * Seite 100, Absatz 1, Zeile 1/2 (FMi) + Entferne Klammern: (F"ur diesen ... dar.) + ^ ^ + * Seite 101 (FMi) + Add a warning that \enlargethispage only modifies the + main part of the page: running headers and footers stay + unchanged. This means that it is possible to overprint + information in the footer if the main text gets too large. + +========== Kapitel 5 ============== + +-* Seite 103, 3. Absatz, 2. Zeile (VSc) + f"uge Komma ein: f"ur die Grundumgebungen \texttt{tabular} und + \texttt{array}, die mit dem Paket + ^ + * Seite 103, Absatz 4, Zeile 2 v.u. (TLa) + Erg"anze Komma: automatisch, sobald ... + ^ +-* Seite 103, 5. Absatz, 2. Zeile (VSc) + korrigiere: Dabei geht es im einzelnen um + ^ + * Seite 106, 5.2.1; Absatz 1, Zeile 1 v.u./2 (TLa) + Korrigiere: Index erzeugt (Wenn ... werden.). + ^ ^ ^ +-* Seite 107, Tafel 5.1 (CMi,VSc) + ersetze: p{width} durch p{breite} + ersetze: \parbox{width} durch \parbox{breite} + +-* Seite 108, letzter Absatz, 1. Zeile (VSc) + l"osche Komma: In Spalten, die mit \texttt{p}, \texttt{m} oder + \texttt{b}, erzeugt wurden, betr"agt der + ^^^ + * Seite 111, Absatz 3, Zeile 1 (TLa) + Korrigiere: Wenn vertikale ... und nach den ... + ^ +-* Seite 112, \doublerulesep (VSc) + ersetze: + Abstand zwischen Linien, die durch zwei aufeinanderfolgende + |-Zeichen in der Tabellenpr"aambel oder + ^ +-* Seite 114, 2. Absatz, 2. Zeile (VSc) + f"uge ein: F"ur den Fall, da"s eine bestimmte Spaltenspezifikation + ^ + * Seite 115, 5.3.4; Absatz 1 von unten, Zeile 1 v.u. (TLa) + Erg"anze: Paket, wohl aber ... ...colsep{\fill}}}. + ^ + * Seite 116, 2. Absatz, 6. Zeile (VSc) + F"uge ein: welches dann zu der \texttt{tabularx}-Pr"aambelspezifikation + ^ + * Seite 116, Absatz 3 von unten, Zeile 4 (TLa) + Erg"anze: dings nicht mit Hilfe der >-Syntax ... + ^ + * Seite 117, Absatz 1, Zeile 1 (TLa) + Erg"anze Komma: legt zwei Spalten fest, bei denen ... + ^ +-* Seite 119, 1. Absatz, letzter Satz (VSc) + ersetze letzten Satz durch: So wurden f"ur das Beispiel von Seite 117 + folgende Werte ausgegeben: + + * Seite 121, 5.4.1; Absatz 3, Zeile 2 v.u. --> \tablehead{...} (TLa) + Erg"anze Komma: al, das zwischen Zeilen ... \hline), enthalten. + ^ +-* Seite 122, 1. Absatz, 3. Zeile (VSc) + korrigiere Trennung: Positions-argumente + + * Seite 124, 5.4.2; Absatz 1 von unten, Zeile 1 v.u. (TLa) + Korrigiere: unterschiedlichen Spaltenbreiten einer Tabelle auf den ... + ^^^^^2^^^^^^^-------1---- + * Seite 124 5.4.2. zweiter Absatz Zeile 6 ff (DKa) + Mit Version 4.00 von longtable wird \setlongtables nicht mehr + ben"otigt. Damit entf"allt die Beschreibung: + Diese Funktion muß zunächst mit dem Befehl |\setlongtables| + ... + bis zum Ende des Absatzes auf Seite 125. Ebenso sollte + \setlongtables aus der Tabelle auf Seite 126 und der Beschreibung + auf Seite 127 verschwinden. + + Vorschlag von David als neue Beschreibung: + + |longtable| unterteilt die Tabelle in mehrere `chunks', die + hintereinander gesetzt werden. Da die Tabellenbreiten in späteren + chunks die in vorhergehenden nur über den Umweg der |.aux|-Datei + beeinflussen können, sind unter Umständen mehrere \LaTeX-Läufe + notwendig, bis das Aussehen der Tabellen konvergiert (sollten weitere + \LaTeX-Läufe nötig sein, wird dies von \LaTeX\ mitgeteilt). Frühere + Versionen machten die Verwendung des |\setlongtables| Befehl zur + Steuerung dieses Verhaltens nötig, dies entfällt seit Version~4.00. + + Weiterhin hat longtable seit 1996/12/01 noch zusätzliche Befehle + der Art \pagebreak und so erhalten, und unterscheidet mittlerweile + \\ und \\* (was ja in nicht umbrechbaren Tabellen die gleiche + Bedeutung hat). + +-* Seite 124, Bekannte Schwierigkeiten, 3. Punkt (VSc) + ersetze: + Diese F"alle sind in der (dokumentierten Version des) + Paketes beschrieben. + durch: + Diese F"alle sind in der Dokumentation des Paketes beschrieben. + +-* Seite 124, Kapitel 5.4.2, 2.-3. Zeile (VSc) + Ersetze Text: + mehrseitige Tabellen, bei denen man eine gleichbleibende Tabellenbreite + f"ur mehrere Seiten einstellen m"ochte, das + durch: + mehrseitige Tabellen, bei denen man eine gleichbleibende Tabellenbreite + einstellen m"ochte, das + + * Seite 129 in Abbildung (JKn) + su sudanese should read su sundanese (2 times) + te tegulu should read te telugu (2 times) + + * Seite 130, Abb. 5.5; Absatz 1 von unten, Zeile 8 v.u. (TLa) + Erg"anze: ...\small\slshape ... + ^^^^^ + * Seite 132, Absatz 2, Zeile 3 (TLa) + Erg"anze Komma: maltrennzeichen wird ... zentriert), breiter ist ... + ^ +-* Seite 132, 2. Absatz, 3. Zeile (VSc) + korrigiere: Dezimaltrennzeichen + ^ + * Seite 137, multirow; Absatz 1, Zeile 4 v.u. (TLa) + Entferne Komma: sonders gro"s sind, ... verwendet wurden oder ... + ^ + * Seite 137, multirow; Absatz 2, Zeile 3 (TLa) + Erg"anze Komma: 3pt voreingestellt ... verwendet wird, um ... + ^ +-* Seite 137, multirow, 2. Absatz (VSc) + entferne Komma: + die auf 3pt voreingestellt ist, und verwendet wird um + ^ + * Seite 139, Absatz 3, Zeile 2 (TLa) + Korrigiere: man \firsthline ... (zwei besondere Versionen von + ^ + * Seite 141, 5.6.6; Absatz 1, Zeile 4 (TLa) + Erg"anze Leerzeichen: zw"olf die gleiche ... multirow wird der ... + ^ +========== Kapitel 6 ============== + + * Seite 143, 6.1; Absatz 1, Zeile 3 (TLa) + Erg"anze Leerzeichen: wie ">nicht mehr als \dots"< ... Platz \dots"< + ^ ^ +-* Seite 144, \dblfloatpagefraction (VSc) + ersetze 0,5 durch 0.5 in: (voreingestellt ist 0.5) + + * Seite 145, Absatz 2 von unten, Zeile 2 v.u. (TLa) + Erg"anze Leerzeichen: Dieser Proze"s erzeugt so lange ... + ^ + * Seite 145, Absatz 2 von unten, Zeile 3 (TLa) + Ersetze: Gleitobjektseiten, d.h. ... befinden, enthalten. + ^ + * Seite 146, 6.2; Absatz 1 von unten, Zeile 2 v.u. (TLa) + Korrigiere: tuationen am ... F"ur diesen Zweck ... + ^ +-* Seite 151, Abbildung 6.1 (VSc) + Ersetze: \floatname{algorithm}{Algorithm} + ^^^^^^^^^ +-* Seite 151, Abbildung 6.1 (VSc) + F"uge Leerzeichen ein: + Definition neuer Gleitumgebungen -- \texttt{Program} und + ^^ + * Seite 152 Letzter Absatz (FVi) + Replace this para with: + Newer releases of the \textsf{float} package (v1.2 and higher) + integrate the functionality of the package \textsf{here} by David + Carlisle completely. With older versions one had to first issue + \restylefloat{table} and/or \restylefloat{figure} to be able to use + the H specifier with the standard LaTeX environments. + + * Seite 153, 6.4.1; Absatz 1 von unten, Zeile 1 (TLa) + Ersetze: Das Paket floatfig ... + ^^^^^^^^ +-* Seite 155 (ADu) + In the wrapfig example the "boxit" environment is used but never + explained. better use \begin{fminipage}[3in]. + + * Seite 155, Absatz 5 von unten, Zeile 2 (TLa) + Erg"anze Komma: list) verwendet ... in einem, mit twocolumn ... + ^ + * Seite 155, Absatz 1 von unten, Zeile 1 (TLa) + Erg"anze Komma: Es ist am einfachsten, den Befehl ... + ^ + * Seite 155, Wrapfig-Beispiel, vorletzte Zeile (VLS) + Streiche Klammer: Die Umgebung \Lmenv{wrapfigure}} ist + ^ +-* Seite 155, vorletzte Zeile (VSc) + korrigiere Trennung: Zeilen-umbruch + + * S. 156, Absatz 4 (TBo): + In Z. 1/2 wird gesagt, da"s eine `tabular' Umgebung verwendet + wird, um die Bilder in Abb. 6.4 auszurichten. Dies ist jedoch + nicht richtig. + +-* Seite 158, \@makecaption and \@isucaption example (JvM,FMi) + In both cases is a closing brace missing: + \ifthenelse{\lengthtest{\wd\tempbox > \linewidth}}% + %%% ^ closing brace + +========== Kapitel 7 ============== + +-* Seite 159, 2. Absatz, 7. Zeile (VSc) + korrigiere Ligatur: Auf"|l"osung statt Aufl"osung + + * Seite 159, 7.1; Absatz 3, Zeile 1 (TLa) + Erg"anze Leerzeichen: Im Entstehungsjahr von TeX (1979) ... + ^ +-* Seite 160, 3. Absatz, 2.Zeile (VSc) + 7. Absatz, 5.Zeile + vereinheitliche Schreibweise: PostScriptfonts <=> PostScript Fonts + +-* Seite 162, 2. Absatz, 8.Zeile (VSc) + f"uge ein: Blocksatz wirkt + ^ + * Seite 163, Fu"snote 1; Absatz 1, Zeile 1 v.u. (TLa) + Ersetze: beschlo"s Knuth, ... einen anderen Namen ... + ^ + * Seite 164, Absatz 2 von unten, Zeile 1 (TLa) + Erg"anze: Indem einige METAFONT-Parameter auf ganz ... + ^ +-* Seite 166, 2. Absatz, 5.+9.+11. Zeile (VSc) + korrigiere 3x Ligatur: Auf"|l"osung statt Aufl"osung + + * Seite 166, Absatz 3 von unten, Zeile 3 v.u. (TLa) + Entferne Komma: die Punktgr"o"sen 7, 8, ..., 30 und 36 ... + ^ +-* Seite 167, 2. Absatz, 2.Zeile (VSc) + korrigiere: die Wenigsten durch die wenigsten + + * Seite 168, 7.3.1; Absatz 1, Zeile 1 (TLa) + Erg"anze Komma: Die Schrift, die man f"ur ... + ^ +-* Seite 169, vorletzte Absatz, letzte Zeile (VSc) + korrigiere Ligatur: Auf"|l"osung statt Aufl"osung + + * Seite 170, Absatz 4, Zeile 2 (TLa) + Korrigiere: man am besten ... mittels der + Low-Level-\fontseries-Deklarationen ... + ^ ^ ^ ^ + * Seite 170, Absatz 3 von unten, Zeile 2 (TLa) + Entferne Komma: \textit und \textsc, die ... Kursivschrift bzw. ... + ^ +-* Seite 171, letzte Zeile (FMi) + Ersetze \lowercase durch: \MakeLowercase + +-* Seite 172, erste Zeile (FMi) + Ersetze: wird der Plain-TeX-Befehl \lowercase + durch: wird der \LaTeX2e-Befehl \MakeLowercase + + * Seite 173, Absatz 1, Zeile 3 (TLa) + Erg"anze: ge, angefangen mit ... \Huge als gr"o"stem ... + ^^^^ + * Seite 173, 7.3.2; Absatz 1 von unten, Zeile 7 (TLa) + Korrigiere: \sffamily zuerst die ... medium 10pt, geladen, ... + ^ ^ + * Seite 173, 7.3.2; Absatz 1 von unten, Zeile 8 (TLa) + Erg"anze Komma: die serifenlose Schrift, breitfett 10pt, und nach ... + ^ + * Seite 174, Fu"snote (GRo,FMi) + Ersetze: + Alle Pakete, die den \catcode eines in der \nocorrlist benutzten + Zeichens "andern, m"ussen ... + + * Seite 175, 7.3.4; Absatz 1 von unten, Zeile 2 v.u. in Ein- und Ausgabe (TLa) + Entferne Komma: anderem die Zeichen ... \S und \symbol{32}, ... + ^ + * Seite 176, Zeile 10 in Tafel 7.3 (TCo) + ersetze \itseries durch \itshape + + * Seite 177, Abschnitt 7.3.5; Absatz 3, Zeile 3 (TLa) + Erg"anze Komma: fehl \bfseries ... nicht breitfett, was die ... + ^ +-* Seite 177, 3. Absatz, 5. Zeile (VSc) + korrigiere Trennung: mitt-le-rer + + * Seite 179, 7.4.1; Absatz 1 von unten, Zeile 1 v.u. (TLa) + Korrigiere: einem einzelnen ... Wort) besteht, welcher in einer ... + ^ ^^^^^^^ + * Seite 180, Absatz 1, Zeile 1 (TLa) + Korrigiere: Schrift gesetzt werden soll ,\zB + ^^ + * Seite 181, Absatz 2, Zeile 4 v.u. (TLa) + Korrigiere: dern Sans Schriftfamilie ... und schr"aggestellter ... + ^^^^^^^^^^ + * Seite 181, Absatz 5, Zeile 2 (TLa) + Erg"anze Komma: werden. Jedesmal, wenn dieser ... + ^ + * Seite 183, Absatz 1, Zeile 5 (BBe, FMi) + F"uge ein "aufrechte" in: + ... sondern den Alphabetbefehl \mathbf f"ur aufrechte + alphanumerische Zeichen bzw. + + * Seite 183, 2. Absatz, 2. Zeile (VSc) + F"uge ein: Gegebenenfalls + ^^ + * Seite 183, 3. Absatz, 1. Zeile (VSc) + korrigiere: was mit den Alphabetbefehlen + ^ + * Seite 183, letzter Absatz, 3. Zeile (VSc) + f"uge ein: \SetMathAlphabet-Deklarationen + ^ + * Seite 184, 7.5.1; Absatz 1 von unten, Zeile 1 v.u. (TLa) + Erg"anze Leerzeichen: gen Fontdateien (\zB die .tfm- und .pk-... + ^ + * Seite 185, Absatz 1, Zeile 4 (TLa) + Erg"anze: An der Universit"at Bochum wurden die Computer ... + ^ + * Seite 185, 2. Absatz, 1.Zeile (CLa) + Ersetze: + "Wenn man nach dem Befehl \documentclass das Paket t1enc angibt, + wird ..." + durch: + Wenn man die Zeile \usepackage[T1]{fontenc} in die Pr"aambel + einf"ugt, wird ... + + * Seite 185, Absatz 2, Zeile 2 v.u. (TLa) + Entferne: k"onnen ebenfalls mit der der Cork-Kodierung ... + ^^^^ + * Seite 185, Absatz 2 von unten, Zeile 1 (TLa) + Entferne: Daneben gibt es ..., da"s nicht nur ... + ^ +-* Seite 187, Ende erster Absatz (FMi) + F"uge ein: Umlaute und \ss{} werden bei diesen Zeichens"atzen durch + Ligaturen mit dem Zeichen " erzeugt, z.B. "s, "a usw. Dies + funktioniert nicht korrekt, wenn man das babel- oder german-Paket + geladen hat. + + * Seite 188, Abschnitt latexsym (NBe) + Ersetze letzten Satz durch: + Bei Bedarf k"onnen diese Symbole durch Angabe des Pakets latexsym + geladen werden. + + * Seite 189, 1. Absatz, 2. Zeile (VSc) + l"osche Komma: z.B. in "Uberschriften, oder auf Folien + ^ + * Seite 189, 2. Absatz, 2. Zeile (VSc) + f"uge Leerzeichen ein/l"osche Komma: 14.4pt, 17.28pt, 20.74pt, und 24.88pt + ^ + * Seite 191, 1. Absatz, 3. Item: infoshow (VSc) + l"osche Wort: erscheinen normalerweise auch auf dem Bildschirm. + ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + * Seite 191, Beschreibung von debugshow (FMi) + Add: This option might change the typesetting of material in + certain circumstances. For this reason it should not be turned + on when producing camera ready copy. + + * Seite 191, 2. Absatz, 2. Item: loading (VSc) + Ersetze Satz: Zeichens"atze, die ... + durch Zeichens"atze, die schon im Format oder in der + Dokumentenklasse geladen wurden, werden bei dieser + Option nicht mit angezeigt. + + * Seite 191, letzter Absatz, 3. letzte Zeile (VSc) + l"osche Satz: wird \init eingegeben; um den Test zu beenden; \bye oder + ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + * Seite 191, Fussnote 8: fuege ein (HPV) + ... Standardnamen auch zu verwenden. + ^^ + * Seite 192, 7.6; Absatz 3, Zeile 2 (TLa) + Entferne Komma: ">Kodierung"<, ... ">Form"< und ">Gr"o"se"<. + ^ + * Seite 192, 7.6; Absatz 1 von unten, Zeile 2 (TLa) + Erg"anze Komma: Font mit der gew"unschten ... (d.h., ob ... + ^ + * Seite 192, 3. Absatz: ersetze (HPV) + Intern ... richtig unterstuetzt werden [koennen] kann, wenn ... + ^^^^^^^^^ ^^^^ + * Seite 192, 4. Absatz, 2. Item (VSc) + f"uge Leerzeichen ein/l"osche Komma: \fontfamily, \fontseries, \fontshape,und + ^ ^ + * Seite 194, Tafel 7.10, caption (VSc) + f"uge ein: Ist einer "der" Werte m (Medium), wird er weggelassen; + + * Seite 194, letzter Absatz, 1. Zeile (VSc) + f"uge ein: Der Schriftgrad wird nach dem Befehl \fontsize{<gr"o"se>}{... + ^ + * Seite 194, letzter Absatz, 4. Zeile (VSc) + ersetze: "traditionellerweise" durch "traditionell" + + * Seite 194, Absatz 1 von unten, Zeile 1 v.u. (TLa) + Erg"anze Komma: doch eine Gummil"ange ist, d.h., wenn er ... + ^ + * Seite 195, 2. Absatz, vorletzte Zeile (VSc) + f"uge ein: Gr"o"senkorrektur + ^ + * Seite 196, letzter Absatz, letzte Zeile (VSc) + f"uge ein: Schriftform + ^ + * Seite 198, Absatz 3, Zeile 2 (TLa) + Entferne: eine Standard-Schriftform zugeordnet ... + ^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + * Seite 198, 7.6.4; Absatz 1 von unten, Zeile 1 v.u. (TLa) + Korrigiere: Teile des Dokumentes ... keinen \fontfamily-Befehl ent... + ^ ^ ^ + * Seite 198, Abschnitt 7.6.4; Absatz 2, Zeile 1 (TLa) + Entferne Komma: Wenn m"oglich sollte auf ihren ... + ^ + * Seite 198, 7.7.1; Absatz 1, Zeile 1 (TLa) + Entferne Komma: Neue Zeichens"atze ... einzubinden bedeutet, ... + ^ + * Seite 198, Fu"snote 10; Absatz 1, Zeile (TLa) + Korrigiere: Ungl"ucklicherweise ist die \$/\pounds-Vertauschung ... + ^ + * Seite 199, Kap. 7.7.2, 1. Absatz, 4. Zeile (VSc) + l"osche Komma: Das dritte Argument ist + ^ + * Seite 199, 7.7.2; Absatz 1 von unten, Zeile 3 (TLa) + Korrigiere: ersten vier bezeichnen ... die Familie , die ... + ^ + * Seite 200, Absatz 1 von unten, Zeile 1 (TLa) + Erg"anze: Wie in den vorangegangenen Beispielen ... + ^^ + * Seite 201, Absatz 2, Zeile 1 v.u. (TLa) + Erg"anze Komma: sind als 10pt, und <12-> f"ur alle ... + ^ + * Seite 202, Die Funktion >leer<, 4. Zeile (VSc) + f"uge ein: minimalem Speicherbedarf.) Bei + ^ + * Seite 202, Die Funktion ">leer"<; Absatz 2, Zeile 2 v.u. (TLa) + Erg"anze Komma: 10pt ausgelegt ist (... in 10pt), werden ... + ^ + * Seite 203, Die Funktion >gen<, 2. Zeile (VLS) + l"osche Komma: cmtt8, cmtt9, und cmtt10 + ^ + * Seite 203, Die Funktion >gen<, 4. Zeile (VSc) + l"osche Komma: 8, 9 und 10pt + ^ + * Seite 203 (FMi) + There is now also a genb function that generates names for the ec + font naming conventions eg <10.95> genb * ecmr -> ecmr1095 + and there is, of course, a silent variant sgenb. + + * Seite 203, Absatz 1, Zeile 1 (TLa) + Erg"anze: tes gibt die leere ... Benutzer davon in Kenntnis ... + ^^^ +-* Seite 205, Zeichensatz-Ladeoptionen, 3.Absatz, 2. Zeile (VSc) + korrigiere Trennung: Type-wri-ter + + * Seite 205, Die Funktion ">fixed"<; Absatz ^ ^3 (TLa) + Entferne Komma: Wenn vorhanden, gibt das optionale ... + ^ + * Seite 205, Die Funktion ">sfixed"<; Absatz ^ ^2 (TLa) + Erg"anze: wird \zB verwendet, ... die gro"sen mathematischen ... + ^ + * Seite 205, Zeichensatz-Ladeoptionen; Absatz 2, Zeile 2 v.u. (TLa) + Erg"anze Komma: anderen Zeichensatz umschaltet. Dadurch, da"s ... + ^ +-* Seite 206 Z. 11 (PBL) + Ersetze {dcmr} durch {cmr} + + * Seite 207, vorletzter Absatz, 7. Zeile (VSc) + erg"anze Komma: Zeichensatz verbundene, Parameter zu "andern. + ^ +-* Seite 208, Zeile 17 (ADe) + Ergaenze Komma: m"oglich wird, W"orter, die Akzente enthalten, korrekt + ^ + * Seite 209, Absatz 2, Zeile 3 v.u. (TLa) + L"osche Klammer: stehen die g"ultigen Standardwerte ... + ^ + * Seite 209, Absatz 2, Zeile 2 v.u. (TLa) + Erg"anze: serie und die Schriftform, die f"ur die Fontersetzung ... + ^^^^ + * Seite 209, 7.7.5; Absatz 1, Zeile 3 (TLa) + Erg"anze Komma: mentes oder dynamisch innerhalb des Dokumentes, wenn ... + ^ + * Seite 209, 7.7.5; Absatz 2 von unten, Zeile 2 v.u. (TLa) + Erg"anze Komma: lie foo im Kodierschema ... NFSS erwartet, die folg... + ^ + * Seite 209, Kap. 7.7.5, 2. Absatz, letzte Zeile (VSc) + l"osche Klammer: (Erweiterung (.fd), deklariert sein, + ^ + * Seite 209, Fu"snote 11; Absatz ^ ^1 (TLa) + Erg"anze Komma: Es ist m"oglich, die Generierung ... + ^ + * Seite 211, Absatz 4, Zeile 1 (TLa) + Entferne: Die Symbolfonts werden ... Namen angesprochen ... + ^ + * Seite 212, Absatz 4 von unten, Zeile 2 (TLa) + Erg"anze Komma: dos. Es beschreibt ... d.h., ob es sich um ... + ^ + * Seite 214, Absatz 3, Zeile 3 v.u. (TLa) + Entferne: \Set...-Befehl ge"andert werden. ... + ^ + * Seite 215, 7.7.7; Absatz 1, Zeile 2 v.u. (TLa) + Erg"anze Komma: kann (d.h., da"s er entweder ... + ^ + * Seite 218, shape <...> tried; Absatz 2 von unten, Zeile 1 (TLa) + Entferne: NFSS hat eine andere ... geladen, weil es die gew"unschte ... + ^^^ + * Seite 219, Item: "Math version <name> is not defined", 3. Zeile (VSc) + l"osche Komma: falsch geschrieben oder das Formellayout wurde + ^ + * Seite 219, Redeclaring math symbol <...>; Zeile 2 (TLa) + Entferne: wurde mit einer neuen Deklaration ... + ^^^^^^ + * Seite 220, This NFSS system isn't set up properly; Absatz ^ ^3 (TLa) + Erg"anze: eine \DeclareFontSubstitution- oder die ... + ^ +========== Kapitel 8 ============== + + * Seite 222, 2. Absatz, 5./6. Zeile (VSc) + ersetze: unterst"utzt von Michael Downes, der in der technischen + Abteilung von AMS arbeitete. + durch: unterst"utzt von Michael Downes aus der technischen + Abteilung von AMS. + + * Seite 222, 1. Absatz, letzte Zeile (VSc) + korrigiere Satz: auf Datentr"ager eingereichte Manuskripte akzeptiere. + + * Seite 222 letzte Zeile in 8.1 (FMi) + Replace "you should load the amstex package" + by "you should load the amsmath package" + + Note that 1.2 release of amslatex introduced amsmath as the + successor to amstex. Starting with this release the package amstex + should only be used in compatibility mode, i.e., in old documents + using \documentstyle. Nearly all documentation in this chapter is + nevertheless still valid (if amsmath is used). Exceptions are + hopefully all documented in the errata by now. Sorry for the + inconvenience but this incompatible change happened after the LaTeX + Companion was printed and making a second edition for that reason + would look silly in my eyes. + + * Seite 222 first two paragraphs of 8.2.1 (BBe) + Replace "amstex" by "amsmath" + + Replace the first sentence of the second paragraph by + In the amsmath package, \boldsymbol is to be used for individual + bold math symbols and bold Greek letters---everything in math + except for bold upright letters (where one would use \mathbf). + + To the list of examples in the second sentence, after "pi", add + a bold italic A, and insert "\boldsymbol{A}," in the appropriate + place in the code list. + + * Seite 223, letzter Absatz, 1. Zeile (VSc) + korrigiere Label/Reference: Die Tafeln 8.13 auf Seite 226 bis 8.18 auf + ^ ^ + * Seite 223, letzter Absatz, 5.-7. Zeile (VSc) + ersetze Zeilen durch: kann das \textsf{amsfonts}-Paket zusammen + mit dem in Abschnitt 7.7.6 erl"auterten Befehl \verb=\DeclareMathSymbol= + verwendet werden. + +-* Seite 224, Tafel 8.1 4. Eintrag (ADe) + Ersetze "Versions" durch "Versionen" + +-* Seite 225 Tafel 8.5 (KSi) + \simeq shows a wrong symbol. the correct one should look like a tilde + on top of a minus. The symbol shown seems to be only available in the + Lucida fonts where it is call "lessmuch". + + * Seite 225, Tafel 8.9, \caption (VSc) + Vorschlag statt: Logarithmus"ahnliche Symbole + : Funktionsnamen + + * Seite 226, Table 8.13 (GFe) + Remove the \dashleftarrow and \dashrightarrow entries, because they + do not belong to the AMS-Fonts. (only in the lucida fonts) + Add a \Rrightarrow entry. + Remove one of the two \rightrightarrows entries. + Add an entry for \restriction as synonym for \upharpoonright. + + * Seite 226 table 8.13 (FMi,PNu) + \rightleftarrows are shown twice at entries (7,1) and (7,3) + + * Seite 227, Table 8.15 (GFe) + Add an entry for \llless as synonym for \lll. + Add an entry for \gggtr as synonym for \ggg. + Add an entry for \Doteq as synonym for \doteqdot. + + * Seite 228, Table 8.17 (GFe) + Add an entry for \doublecap as synonym for \Cap. + Add an entry for \doublecup as synonym for \Cup. + + * Seite 228, Table 8.18 (GFe) + Remove footnote. + + * Seite 231, Kapitel 8.3.7, 4. Zeile (VSc) + f"uge Punkt ein: nach links bzw. nach oben + ^ + * Seite 232, 8.3.10; Absatz 2 von unten, Zeile 1 (TLa) + Erg"anze Komma: Wenn jedoch nicht nur das Ableitungssymbol, sondern ... + ^ + * Seite 233, 1. Absatz (VSc) + Empfehlung zum besseren Verst"andnis statt: \sideset{_*^*}{_*^*}\prod_k + besser: \sideset{_a^b}{_c^d}\prod_k + + * Seite 233, Kapitel 8.3.11 (VSc) + warum ist im linken mathematischen Ausdruck (\smash[b]{\lambda_j} nicht + nur die Tiefe, sondern auch die H"ohe geringer ?? Beschreibung besagt + etwas anderes. +FMi: Weil TeX ein anderes Wurzelzeichen verwendet. In beiden F"allen ist +das \lambda innerhalb der Wurzel. Bei \smash oder \smash[t] w"urde der +Querstrich der Wurzel durch das \lambda verlaufen. + + * Seite 235, 1. Absatz, 4. Zeile (VSc) + korrigiere Kommasetzung: verwendet wird, die im Text eingebettet sind. + ^ ^ + * Seite 235, Kapitel 8.3.15, 1. Zeile (VSc) + l"osche Zeichen: verf"ugt \textsf{amstex} "uber x\dfrac + ^ + * Seite 239, example on top (GRo) + "\dots" should be replaced by "\hdotsfor 2" in the first two rows + of the matrix (lines 2 and 4 of the input) to align the last column + of the matrix. + + * Seite 239, Section 8.4.3 The Sb and Sp Environments (MMu) + In amsmath.sty these environments no longer exist. + Use \substack instead as in + \sum_{\substack{0\le i\le m\\ 0<j<n}} P(i,j) + Note, that there is also slightly more general environment + subarray, which allows for greater control over horizontal + positioning. + + * Seite 240, letzte Zeile (ARo) + ersetze: 'funktionen' durch 'funktionieren' + + * Seite 240, Absatz 2 von unten, Zeile 1 (TLa) + Erg"anze: Bei L"angspfeilen wird ... und zweiten >- oder ... + ^ + * Seite 242, Absatz 1, Zeile 1 v.u. (TLa) + Entferne: eine bin"ares Relationssymbol. + ^ + * Seite 245, Kapitel 8.5.7, 1. Absatz, 11. Zeile (VSc) + ersetze: ohne er da"s dadurch empfohlen + durch: ohne da"s er dadurch empfohlen + + * Seite 246, Kapitel 8.5.8, 5. Zeile (VSc) + l"osche: und nach dem dem Einschub wieder + ^^^ + * Seite 248 (GZi) + The commands @, and @! (supposedly they yield 1/10 of \, and \!) + are not any longer supported with the amsmath package. + + * Seite 248, letzte Zeile von 8.6.3 (ARo) + ersetze: 'Feinstellung' soll wohl 'Feineinstellung' hei"sen (jedenfalls + lautet es f"unf Zeilen sp"ater so) + + * Seite 249, nosumlimits (VSc) + optische Senkrechte: der Divis von "ober- und unterhalb" ragt + nicht in den Rand hinaus. + + * Seite 249, Option nonamelimits (ARo) + l"osche: anstatt von ober- und unterhalb + ^^^ +-* Seite 250, Abschnitt 8.6.6 Zeile -3 (ADe) + Ersetze "KLassen" durch "Klassen" + + * Seite 250, 8.6.6; Absatz 2, Zeile 2 v.u. (TLa) + Korrigiere: s"atzlicher Optionen: ... + ^ + * Seite 250, vorletzte Zeile von 8.6.6 (ARo) + setze Komma: und nomath, welche verhindert + ^ +-* Seite 252, 3 Zeile des Codes (FMi) + it should be: g(\xi,t) not g(x\i,t) + (that typo was now caught by the recent LaTeX release which detected + and the \i in math mode (where \imath should be used)) + + * Seite 255, 4. und 5. letzte Zeile (VSc) + korrigiere Einr"uckung: + \begin{gather} + : + : + \begin{align*} + : + ...\end{align*} + ...\end{gather} + + * Seite 256, Gleichung 8.59 + unnumerierte Version (VSc) + das Kerning f"ur den Subscript "j" f"uhrt zu einem zu gro"sen Abstand + (z.B. bei U_ju_j) zum "U" und zum kleinen Abstand zum "u". +FMi: Font Fehler (reported) + + * Seite 257, Abschnitts"uberschrift (ARo) + l"osche: Erweiterungen zur der theorem-Umgebung + ^^^ + * Seite 257, Kapitel 8.8, 2. Absatz, vorletzte Zeile (VSc) + ersetze: Remark + durch: Bemerkung + + * Seite 257, Kapitel 8.8, 2. Absatz, 5. Zeile und 3. Absatz 3. Zeile (MC) + Die Trennung von "Theorem" in diesen beiden Zeilen ist ein sch"oner Beleg + f"ur die im Vorwort zur deutschen Ausgabe gemachte Einschr"ankung, da"s + es zur Zeit keine verl"a"sliche M"oglichkeit zum optischen Randausgleich + in \TeX{} gibt. + + * Seite 259, Abschnitt 8.8.1; Absatz 3 v.u., Zeile 1 v.u. (TLa) + Erg"anze: k"onnen daher plus- und minus-Anteile ... + ^ + * Seite 261, Abschnitt 8.8.3; Absatz 1, Zeile 1 v.u. (TLa) + Entferne: geben: \... \bfseries} erfolgen. + ^^^^^^^^^ + * Seite 261, Abschnitt 8.8.3; Absatz 1 v.u., Zeile 2 (TLa) + Erg"anze: Auf diese Weise ... ben"otigten Zeichensatzinformationen ... + ^ + * Seite 262, 4. Absatz, Formel (VSc) + sollte es nicht b_0 statt b^0 hei"sen?? + + * Seite 262, 5. Absatz, 1. Zeile (VSc) + sollte es nicht a^0 statt b^0 hei"sen resp. b_0 statt b^0 ?? + + * Seite 262, 5. Absatz, 1. Zeile (VSc) + korrigiere: wobei die 0 in S gesetzt wird. + ^^^ + * Seite 263, Forrmel (VSc) + sollte es nicht a^0 statt b^0 hei"sen resp. b_0 statt b^0 ?? + + * Seite 263, Kapitel 8.9.2, 2. Absatz, 5. Zeile (VSc) + korrigiere Zeichensetzung: linksb"undig setzte. + ^ + * Seite 263, Kapitel 8.9.2, 2. Absatz, 6. Zeile (VSc) + l"osche Wort: mu"s man leqno angegeben werden + ^^^ + * Seite 263, Kapitel 8.9.2, Item: \mathindent, 1. Zeile (VSc) + f"uge ein: von abgesetzen Formeln bei Verwendung der + ^^^ + * Seite 264 (FMi) + Add (somehow): the parameters \abovedisplay... and \belowdisplay... + depend on the current font size. For this reason one can't modify them + in the preamble of a document using \setlength but need to change + the definition of \normalsize etc. + +========== Kapitel 9 ============== + + * Seite 265, 9.1; Absatz 1, Zeile 4 (TLa) + Entferne: panisch, Koreanisch, ... Vietnamesisch, mit verschiedenen ... + ^^^^ + * Seite 266, Absatz 1, 1. Item (TLa) + Erg"anze: Anpassung aller Programme ... spezielle(n) Sprache(n): + ^^^ + * Seite 266, 1. Absatz, 2. Item, 1. Zeile (VSc) + l"osche: "Ubersetzungen f"ur Elementennamen des Dokumentes, + ^^ + * Seite 266, vorletzter Absatz, 6. letzte Zeile (VSc) + ersetze: mit dem Versendung von Mails + durch: mit dem Versenden von Mails + + * Seite 266, Absatz 2 von unten, Zeile 2 v.u. (TLa) + Erg"anze Komma: Eingabekodierung k"onnen ... neue Standards, wie ... + ^ + * Seite 267, 1. Absatz, 8. Zeile (VSc) + ersetze: in Englisch und der in Zielsprache enthalten. + durch: in Englisch und der Zielsprache enthalten. + + * Seite 267, 9.1.1; Absatz 1, Zeile 4 (TLa) + Entferne Komma: zu definieren. Sie ... Zeichen (\zB Zeichen ... + ^ + * Seite 267, 9.1.1; Absatz 1, Zeile 2 v.u. (TLa) + Entferne Komma: Sprache angepa"st sind (... Kodierung bzw. sp"ater ... + * Seite 269, 2. Absatz, 2. Item, 2. Zeile (VSc) + Trennung: Pos-TeX + + * Seite 267, Abschnitt 9.1.1; Absatz 1 v.u., Zeile 2 (TLa) + Entferne: physikalischen Sinne ... kann die an es gestellten ... + ^^^^^^ + * Seite 270, Fu"snote 1 (SWi) + Am Ende der ersten Fu"snote fehlt der Satzendepunkt. + + * Seite 271, Fu"snoten, 2. Zeile (VSc) + das von DANTE koordiniert wurde und von Bernd Reichle gepflegt wird. + l"osche: ^^^^^ + + * Seite 273, 4. Abschnitt, 1. Zeile (SWi) + Ersetze 'alle zus"atzliche' durch 'alle zus"atzlichen'. + + * Seite 274; Absatz 2 v.u., Zeile 1 (TLa) + Korrigiere: S"amtliche zus"atzliche ... zusammen mit den ... + ^ + * Seite 275, 2. Absatz, 5. Zeile (VSc) + jetzt besser: german ghyph31.tex % German + ^^ + * Seite 275, Kapitel 9.3, 2. Absatz, 2. Zeile (VSc) + korrigiere: werden interne \LaTeX-Definitionen modifiziert; + ^^ + * Seite 276, Abbildung 9.2, 6. letzte Zeile (VSc) + Ligaturtrennung: Handbuch (2. Auf"|lage)} + ^^ + * Seite 277, wie Source oben: 3. letzte Zeile (VSc) + Ligaturtrennung: Handbuch (2. Auf"|lage)} + ^^ + * Seite 281, Table 9.4 (DMa) + entries in the column "French input" should be set in verbatim mode, + instead of ttfamily, in order to properly illustrate the user input. + Ie the spaces (indicated by _ below) should be removed: + point-virgule_; + Il dit_: oui + Mon Dieu_! + Pourquoi pas_? + + * Seite 282, Abschnitt 9.3.3, Zeile 2 (SWi) + Ersetze 'einigen' durch 'einige'. + + * Seite 284, Zeile -10 (AzS) + Ersetze: per Definition durch: nach Definition + +========== Kapitel 10 ============= + + * Seite 283, Fu"snote 1; Absatz 1, Zeile 2 (TLa) + Entferne Komma: Umst"anden \LaTeX eine ... verschafft bzw. durch ... + ^ + * Seite 284, Punkt 4; Zeile 3 (TLa) + Entferne Komma: lung der Bilder ... verwenden [34] oder bereits ... + ^ + * Seite 284, Absatz 1 v.u., Zeile 3 v.u. (TLa) + Ersetze: die Erweiterungen zu ..., mit denen qualitativ hochwertige, ge- + ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + * Seite 287, untere Aufz"ahlung; Punkt 1, Zeile 1 (TLa) + Erg"anze: Bcenter, Bflushleft ... eine center-, flushleft- + ^ ^ + * Seite 287, untere Aufz"ahlung; Punkt 2, Zeile 1+2 (TLa) + Erg"anze: Bitemize, Benumerate ... eine itemize-, enumerate- bzw. ... + ^ ^ + * Seite 288; Absatz 2, Zeile 2 (TLa) + Entferne: der folgende Code: + ^ + * Seite 291; Beschreibung von \branch (TLa) + Ersetze: branchid durch zweigid + + * Seite 292, \setdepth; Zeile 1 (TLa) + Entferne: Dies definiert ... ein 3 D-Balkendiagramm + ^ + * Seite 292 (MDa) +The commands `\legend' appears outside of the `barenv'. This is +contradictory to the explanations on pages 284-285 which start with +"Inside a `barenv' environment..." + + * Seite 293 (MDa) +The description of the command `\setyname' has the argument "x-label" +which I presume should be "y-label" (cf. the command `\setxname'). + + * Seite 295; Absatz 2, Zeile 1 (TLa) + Entferne: Manch einer ... eine 3 D-Darstellung ... + ^ + * Seite 295, Eingabe letztes Bsp.; Zeile 5 (TLa) + Entferne: \setdepth{10}% 3 D-Ansicht + ^ + * Seite 295, Eingabe letztes Bsp.; Zeile 7 (TLa) + Ersetze: \setnumberpos{up}% Wertangabe oberhalb der Balken + ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + * Seite 296, 2. Absatz, 4. Zeile (VSc) + l"osche Klammer: (Abbildung 10.2 auf Seite 298)). + ^ + * Seite 296, Abschnitt 10.2.5; Absatz 1 v.u., Zeile 1+2 v.u. (TLa) + Entferne: als 2 D-Balkendiagramm ... und dann als 3 D-Diagramm ... + ^ ^ + * Seite 296, Aufz"ahlung; Punkt 3 v.u., Zeile 1 (TLa) + Erg"anze: Unabh"angige Skalierung von Kurvenabszissen ... + ^ + * Seite 297, Abb. 10.1; Eingabe, Zeile 9 (TLa) + \setstyle{\bfseries} steht im Widerspruch zur Ausgabe?! + Kommentar FMi: wirkt wohl nur auf Achsenbeschriftung deshalb + ohne Bedeutung? --- ueberpruefen + + * Seite 297, Abb. 10.1; Bildunterschrift (TLa) + Entferne: ... Balkendiagramm -- 2 D-Ansicht + ^ + * Seite 299, \curve...; Zeile 1 (TLa) + Erg"anze: Dieser Befehl ... die angegebenen Koordinaten. ... + ^^ + * Seite 301, Abschnitt 10.2.7; Absatz 1, Zeile 3 (TLa) + Erg"anze: dosprache, die auf ... die verschiedenen Partikelbah- + ^ + * Seite 301, Abschnitt 10.2.7; Absatz 1 v.u., Zeile 2 (TLa) + Erg"anze: bolen f"ur \LaTeX s \texttt{picture}-Modus ... + ^^^^^^^^ ^ + * Seite 303; Absatz 2, Zeile 1 (TLa) + Entferne Komma: Der h"aufig verwendete Low-Level-Befehl ... + ^ + * Seite 303, Aufz"ahlung; Punkt 3, Zeile 1 (TLa) + Erg"anze: "Ubersetzung der ... ein ($x$,$y$)-Koordinatenpaar ... + ^ ^ ^ ^ + * Seite 303; Aufz"ahlung, Punkt 4, Zeile 2 (TLa) + Entferne Komma: derholung der Schritte 1 und 2, ... + ^ + * Seite 303, letzter Absatz, 3. Zeile (VSc) + erg"anze "\": wie der \line-Befehl implementiert ist + ^ + * Seite 304, Abschnitt 10.3.1; Absatz 1, Zeile 2 v.u. (TLa) + Erg"anze: Nummern entlang der $x$-Achse ... + ^ ^ + * Seite 304, letzter Absatz, 1. Zeile (VSc) + erg"anze "-": "Aquivalent des \LaTeX-Befehls + ^ + * Seite 306; Absatz 2, Zeile 4 (TLa) + Ersetze: duziert; dehn < 0) wird. Wenn dehn gleich null ... + ^^^^ + * Seite 308, 3. Zeile (SWi) + Ersetze: "verschieden" durch "verschiedene". + + * Seite 308, \putfile...; Absatz 1, Zeile 5 v.u. (TLa) + Ersetze/Erg"anze: Datei mu"s f"ur jede Zeile ein + ^^^^^ + ($x$,$y$)-Koordinatenpaar ... + ^ + * Seite 308, \putfile...; Absatz 1, Zeile 3 v.u. (TLa) + Ersetze: als Kommentarzeichen ... nach dem $y$-Wert min- + ^^^^ + * Seite 308, \putfile...; Punkt 1, Zeile 1 (TLa) + Erg"anze: Erstellung einer Datei mit den ($x$,$y$)-Koordinaten ... + ^ + * Seite 308, 3. Absatz, 4. Zeile (VSc) + korrigiere Trennung: Flie"skomma-arith-me-tik + ^ + * Seite 308, Kapitel 10.4, 3. Zeile (VSc) + l"osche: gestrichtelten und gepunkteten Linien erweitert wird. + ^ + * Seite 309; Absatz 2, Zeile 3 (TLa) + Verschiebe [23] 2 Zeilen h"oher hinter "`Programmiersprache pic"' + + * Seite 310, Zeile 1, (RHa) + Syntax des oval-Befehls: + teil ist optionales Argument, also muss es in eckigen Klammern stehen + \oval(x-wert,y-wert)[teil] + ^ ^ + * Seite 310, 1. Absatz, 2. Zeile (VSc) + erg"anze "-": gew"unschten \TeX-Wert + ^ + * Seite 311, \filltype...; Zeile 1 (TLa) + Erg"anze: Der \filltype-Befehl ... f"ur die \circle*- und + ^ + * Seite 315, \begin{bipartite} (VSc) + Teile der Parameter und Argumente sind "ubersetzt, andere nicht + so leftwd, gapwd, rightwd, gapht, labelwd, leftnode, rightnode + + * Seite 316, 2. Absatz, 1. Zeile (VSc) + l"osche "'": \textsf{epic}'s + ^ + * Seite 317, 1. Beispiel (VSc) + die "bundle" sind im Beispiel nicht untereinandergesetzt; + deshalb hat \vspace{1cm} auch keine Auswirkung +FMi: \par fehlt vor \vspace! + +========== Kapitel 11 ============= + + * Seite 319, Fu"snote 1; Zeile 1 (TLa) + Erg"anze: ghostscript ist f"ur die verschiedensten Computerplattformen ... + ^ + * Seite 321 (und m"oglicherweise an anderen Stellen) (BDe) + Replace "Bezier" with "B\'ezier" + + * Seite 320, 1. Absatz, 1. Zeile (VSc) + korrigiere Ligatur: auf"|l"osungsunabh"angige statt aufl"osungsunabh"angige + + * Seite 320, 2. Absatz, 1.+3.+4 Zeile (VSc) + korrigiere Ligatur: auf"|l"osungs- statt aufl"osungs- + korrigiere 2x Ligaturen: Auf"|l"osung statt Aufl"osung + + * Seite 321, 1. Subitem (2. Zeile) (VSc) + korrigiere Ligatur: auf"|l"osungsunabh"angig statt aufl"osungsunabh"angig + + * Seite 321, Aufz"ahlung; Punkt 3, Zeile 2 (TLa) + Erg"anze: in jeder Auf"|l"osung und ... + ^^ + * Seite 321, letztes Item, 1. Zeile (VSc) + setze Komma: wie z.B. JPEG und LZW, zur Verf"ugung, + ^ + * Seite 323, 1. Absatz, letzte Zeile (VSc) + korrigiere: durch das Textformatierungsprogramm + ^ + * Seite 323, 1. Absatz, letzte Zeile (VSc) + l"osche Komma: festgelegten Seitenaufbau, hervorrufen. + ^ + * Seite 323, Abschnitt 11.1.2; Absatz 3, Zeile 5 v.u. (TLa) + Erg"anze: Die vier in ... sind die $X$- und $Y$-Koordinaten ... + ^ ^ ^ ^ + * Seite 324, 1. Absatz, 5. Zeile (VSc) + l"osche: auf eine nat"urlichen Weise + ^ + * Seite 324, 3. Absatz, 6. Zeile (VSc) + f"uge ein: mit \TeX\ zu verwenden, + ^^ + * Seite 325, Tafel 11.1 (VSc) + korrigiere Ligaturen: + D # Auf"|l"osung statt Aufl"osung + X # Auf"|l"osung statt Aufl"osung + Y # Auf"|l"osung statt Aufl"osung + + * Seite 326, 2. Absatz, 7. Zeile (VSc) + l"osche Klammer: mit dem Befehl \epsfig{file=cm.eps,height=3mm}) erzeugt) + ^ + * Seite 327, 2. Absatz, 1. Zeile (VSc) + korrigiere Trennung: Bound|ing|box-Parameter + ^^ + * Seite 326, Description bbllx; Zeile 1 (TLa) + Erg"anze: Die $X$-Koordinate der unteren linken Ecke der \texttt{BoundingBox} + ^ ^ ^^^^^^^^ ^ + * Seite 326, Description bblly; Zeile 1 (TLa) + Erg"anze: Die $Y$-Koordinate der unteren linken Ecke der \texttt{BoundingBox} + ^ ^ ^^^^^^^^ ^ + * Seite 327, Description bburx; Zeile 1 (TLa) + Erg"anze: Die $X$-Koordinate der oberen rechten Ecke der \texttt{BoundingBox} + ^ ^ ^^^^^^^^ ^ + * Seite 327, Description bbury; Zeile 1 (TLa) + Erg"anze: Die $Y$-Koordinate der oberen rechten Ecke der \texttt{BoundingBox} + ^ ^ ^^^^^^^^ ^ + * Seite 327, Description clip; Zeile 2 (TLa) + Erg"anze: seiner \texttt{BoundingBox} ausgegeben ... + ^^^^^^^^ ^ + * Seite 327; Absatz 1, Zeile 1+2, 5, 6 (TLa) + Erg"anze: ... \texttt{BoundingBox} + ^^^^^^^^ ^ + * Seite 327, Abschnitt 11.3.1; Absatz 1 v.u., Zeile 1 v.u. (TLa) + Erg"anze: Abbildung 11.2 ... von 3~cm hat. + ^ + * Seite 329, Kodierung (ADe) + Ersetze "1991" durch "1990" + + * Seite 330, 4. Absatz, 6. Zeile (VSc) + korrigiere: von Absatzdrehungen vorgenommen werden. + ^^^^^^ + * Seite 333, Abb. 11.3; Eingabe, Zeile 5 v.u. (TLa) + Korrigiere: \begin{rotate}{-90}\hspace*{8mm}Formatklassen + ^^ + * Seite 333; Absatz 1, Zeile 2 v.u. (TLa) + Erg"anze: zu dem \tabcolsep-Wert von 2~mm + ^ + * Seite 337, vorletzte Zeile (VSc) + l"osche Komma: einen schwarzen Balken ergibt, und 100 zur Ausgabe von + ^ + * Seite 338, Abschnitt 11.5.3; Punkt 4, Zeile 4 v.u. (TLa) + Entferne: sei die Folge ... + ^ + * Seite 338, Abschnitt 11.5.3; Punkt 4, Zeile 3 v.u. (TLa) + Korrigiere: ein Zeilenumbruch erfolgt ... unkorrekterweise um ... + ^^ + * Seite 338, Kapitel 11.6, 1. Absatz, 3. Zeile (VSc) + erg"anze: Um die PostScript-Befehle dieses Paketes zu initialisieren + ^ + * Seite 338, Abschnitt 11.6; Absatz 1 v.u., Zeile 3 v.u. (TLa) + Korrigiere: det werden k"onnen, ... siehe die nachfolgenden + ^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + * Seite 338, Abschnitt 11.6; Absatz 1 v.u., Zeile 2 v.u. (TLa) + Korrigiere: Beispiele). Das ... \TeX-material wird ... + ^ + * Seite 339, Abschnitt 11.7; Absatz 1 v.u., Zeile 1 (TLa) + Erg"anze: In Analogie zu ... \textcolor-Befehl, dessen + ^ + * Seite 340, \fcolorbox, 1. Zeile (VSc) + entweder: Dieser Befehl "ahnelt \colorbox, nur wird + oder: Dieser Befehl "ahnelt dem \colorbox-Befehl, nur wird + + * Seite 340, letzter Absatz, Item: rgb (VSc) + italic correction fehlt (warum??): Spezifikation \textit{spez}\/ist eine + ^^ + * Seite 342, 2. Absatz, 1. Zeile (VSc) + besser: Die meisten, h"aufig sogar alle Zeichens"atze in Tafel 11.6 auf + + * Seite 342, Abschnitt 11.9.1; Absatz 1 v.u., Zeile 2 v.u. (TLa) + Erg"anze: reduziert. Die ... der Computer-Modern-Fonts wurden ... + ^ ^ + * Seite 342, Abschnitt 11.9.1; Absatz 1 v.u., Zeile 1 v.u. (TLa) + Erg"anze: Sky Research ... die \LaTeX-, \AmS- und Euler-Fonts ... + ^ ^ ^ + * Seite 342, 3. Absatz, 11. Zeile (VSc) + korrigiere Ligatur 2x: Auf"|l"osung oder Drucker. Dadurch wird besonders + bei hoher Auf"|l"osung + + * Seite 343, table 1.6 letzte Zeile (FMi) + Zapf Chancery is only available in italic thus the shape column + should show "it and not "n". + + * Seite 343, 1. Absatz, 1. Zeile (VSc) + f"uge ein: wahrscheinlich nur eines der Pakete + ^ + * Seite 343; Absatz 1, Zeile 3 (TLa) + Ersetze: text-Fonts durch eine oder ... serifenlosen bzw. Typewriter... + ^^^^^ ^^^^ + * Seite 343, 2. Absatz, 2. Zeile (VSc) + f"uge ein: (normalerweise die Basisschrift eines Dokumentes), + ^ + * Seite 343; Absatz 1 v.u., Zeile 3 (TLa) + Entferne/Korrigiere: ter-Schrift aufgef"uhrt, ausgenommen die Pakete + ^ ^^ + * Seite 344, Abschnitt 11.9.2; Absatz 1, Zeile 2 (TLa) + Erg"anze: che Lucida-Bright-Schriftfamilie ... die Karl-Berry-Namen ... + ^ ^ ^ + * Seite 344, Abschnitt 11.9.2; Absatz 1 v.u., Zeile 3 (TLa) + Erg"anze: cida-Math-Fonts ... + ^ ^ + * Seite 344, Abschnitt 11.9.2; Absatz 1 v.u., Zeile 5 (TLa) + Erg"anze: meln ohne Verwendung von Computer-Modern-Schriften ... + ^ ^ + * Seite 344, Abschnitt 11.9.2; Absatz 1 v.u., Zeile 6 (TLa) + Erg"anze: man auch das Lucida-Bright-... das lucidbrb-(lucidbry-)Paket + ^ ^ ^ ^ + * Seite 346, Abschnitt 11.9.4; Absatz 1, Zeile 3 (TLa) + Erg"anze: fontname den (kurzen Karl-Berry-) Namen ... + ^ + * Seite 348, Abschnitt 11.9.5; Absatz 1, Zeile 1 (TLa) + Entferne: Entsprechungen zu Hilfe nehmen ... + ^ + * Seite 349, Abschnitt 11.9.7; Absatz 2, Zeile 1 v.u. (TLa) + Erg"anze: bildung 11.9 ... mit Computer-Modern-Schriften. + ^ ^ + * Seite 349, 2. Absatz, 3. Zeile (VSc) + l"osche: von \textsf{NFSS2} zur"uckgreifen, siehe + ^ + * Seite 349, Abschnitt 11.9.7; Absatz 1 v.u., Zeile 3 (TLa) + Erg"anze: binieren dies mit den Computer-Modern-Schriften ... + ^ ^ + * Seite 350, Z.11 (FMi) + Das Paket hei"st mathptm nicht mthptm. + + * Seite 350, Abschnitt 11.9.7; Absatz 3, Zeile 2 (TLa) + Erg"anze: da-Bright- und ... + ^ + * Seite 350, Abschnitt 11.10; Absatz 1, Zeile 1 (TLa) + Erg"anze: Die Adobe-PostScript-Fonts ... + ^ + * Seite 350, Abschnitt 11.10; Absatz 2, Zeile 2 (TLa) + Entferne: derjenigen, die im ... betrachte als ... + ^^^^ + * Seite 351, Tafelunterschrift 11.11 (TLa) + Erg"anze: Original Adobe-Font-Kodierschema ... + ^ + * Seite 351, Tafelunterschrift 11.12 (TLa) + Erg"anze: DC \TeX-Font-Kodierschema ... + ^ + * Seite 352, Bildunterschrift 11.9 (TLa) + Erg"anze: Beispiel ... den Computer-Modern-Fonts ... + ^ ^ + * Seite 353, Formel (3) (MWi) + Das Summenzeichen ist von the CM-Fonts nicht von den + Euler-Fonts (in den Euler-Fonts hat es keine Serifen) + + * Seite 353, Bildunterschrift 11.10 (TLa) + Erg"anze: Beispiel ... den Euler-Math-Fonts ... + ^ ^ + * Seite 354, Abb. 11.11 (TLa) + Typewriter f"allt aus dem Rahmen ... ?! + + * Seite 354, Bildunterschrift 11.11 (TLa) + Erg"anze: Beispiel ... den Mathtime-Fonts ... + ^ + * Seite 355, Abb. 11.12 (TLa) + Typewriter f"allt aus dem Rahmen ... ?! + + * Seite 356 (FMi) + Aus unerfindlichen Gr"unden sind beim Drucken alle Klammern, + Symbole und Integralzeichen auf dieser Seite verschwunden. + Sie sind im PostScript file noch vorhanden! + Dies ist im Nachdruck korrigiert. + + * Seite 356, Bildunterschrift 11.13 (TLa) + Erg"anze: Beispiel ... den Lucida-Math-Fonts ... + ^ ^ +========== Kapitel 12 ============= + + * Seite 357, 2. Absatz, 6. Zeile (VSc) + l"osche: auseinandersetzen. [35,7,117,8,24,101,102]. + ^ + * Seite 357, 3. Absatz: nur eins von beiden (HPV) + Abschnitt ... geht dabei naeher [mehr] auf die Formate ... + ^^^^^^ ^^^^^^ + * Seite 360, 1. Absatz, 5. Zeile (VSc) + korrigiere: im obigen Beispiel auf die style-Eintr"age auf Seite 14 + ^^^^^ + * Seite 361 Bestimmung der Darstellungsform (MSc) + Unter(unter)eintr"age k"onnen eigene Schl"ussel haben: + \indexentry{aa@\textit{aa}!bb@\textit{bb}!cc@\textit{cc}}{10} + Wird zu + \item \textit{aa} + \subitem \textit{bb} + \subsubitem \textit{cc}, 10 + Dies ist nicht explizit gesagt. + + * Seite 361, Kapitel 12.1.4, 5./6. Zeile (VSc) + Abstand/italic correction hinter: + Der \textit{schl"ussel} legt dabei die + ^ + * Seite 361, Kapitel 12.1.4, Beispiel Zeile 2 (RSc) + Im Index ist das "\delta" nicht zu sehen. + + * Seite 361, Kapitel 12.1.4, 1. Absatz, 4.+5. Zeile (VSc) + warum ist das '"u' in kursiv wesentlich fetter als die restlichen + Buchstaben?? Fehler im Font??? In diesem Kapitel sind alle Umlaute + fetter als die restlichen Buchstaben (siehe auch 10.letzte "a, + 7.letzte "u, 3.letzte "o). + + * Seite 362, Abschnitt 12.1.5; Absatz 1, Zeile 4 v.u. (TLa) + Erg"anze: kiert ein nicht maskiertes "-Zeichen ... + ^ + * Seite 362, Abschnitt 12.1.5; Absatz 1, Zeile 3 v.u. (TLa) + Entferne: Teil eines \"-Befehls. ... + ^ + * Seite 364, Abschnitt 12.1.7; Absatz 3, Zeile 2 v.u. (TLa) + Entferne Leerzeichen: sogar einen Schritt weitergehen ... + ^^ + * Seite 364, (MDa) + The example definition + \newcommand{\Indextt}[1]{\texttt{#1}\index{#1@\texttt{#1}} + lacks a further closing brace. + + * Seite 364, letzter Absatz, vorletzte Zeile (VSc) + italic correction: \index{\texttt{schl"ussel}} und \index{schl"ussel} + ^ ^ + + * Seite 365, Abb. 12.3, Absatz 2, 1. Zeile v.u. (TLa) + Erg"anze: in der Pr"aambel des Dokumentes angegeben wurde. + ^^ + * Seite 365, Abb. 12.4, Absatz 2, 1. Zeile v.u. (TLa) + Erg"anze analog zu vorhergehender Korrektur. + + * S. 366, Kapitel 12.2.1 bzw. 12.2.2 ("Uberschrift) (SWi) + Index oder Indexes, (obwohl beides richtig ist). + + * Seite 368, Option -p nr, 12. Zeile (VSc) + erg"anze Dot: vorhanden sein oder die .log-Datei nicht + ^ + * Seite 367/368 Option -g (MSc) + ab MakeIndex 2.13: + -g setzt `+' als quote, kein Stil mehr erforderlich + + * Seite 368, Option -p nr, 5. Zeile v.u. (TLa) + Vereinfache: der Protokolldatei nach der letzten in der Datei + ^^ ^^^^^^^ + * Seite 370, Abschnitt 12.3.2; Absatz 1 v.u., Zeile 3 v.u. (TLa) + Erg"anze: Conflicting entries ... auf zwei verschiedene + ^ + * Seite 371, Tafel 12.1, quote (VSc) + statt: '<< + richtig: '"' + + * Seite 371, Tafel 12.1, page_compositor (TLa) + Erg"anze: "--" + ^^^ + * Seite 372, Tafel 12.2; headings_flag (TLa) + Erg"anze: Gro"s-/(Klein)buchstaben ... + ^ + * Seite 372, Tafel 12.2; headings_flag (TLa) + Entferne: headings_prefix und headings_suffix ... + ^ + * Seite 373 Tafel 12.3 (MSc) + suffix_p2 mu"s suffix_2p lauten. + suffix_p3 mu"s suffix_3p lauten. + suffix_pm mu"s suffix_mp lauten. + Im Beispiel auf Seite 378 sind die Namen korrekt. + + * Seite 374, Absatz 4, Zeile 3 (MiB) + korrigiere: ...die Option -p, die auf Seite 368 beschrieben ist). + ^^^ + * Seite 377, Abschnitt 12.4.5; Absatz 3, Zeile 2 (TLa) + Entferne: betrachtet, und ... Buchstaben. Dies bedeutet + ^ + * S. 377, 3. Absatz, 5. Zeile (SWi) + ersetze 'Bearbeitung obigen Indexeintr"age' + durch 'Bearbeitung obiger Indexeintr"age'. + + * Seite 378, 1. Absatz, 2. Zeile (VSc) + l"osche: A--11, und B--5. + ^ + * S. 378, 3. Zeile (SWi) + ersetze 'Nach einen Durchlauf' durch 'Nach einem Durchlauf'. + + * Seite 380, Abbildung 12.7, 15. Zeile (VSc) (ditto Abb. 12.8) + l"osche: k"onnen Benutzer Daten in mehrere Stichwortverzeichnisse Indizes + ^^^^^ + * Seite 382, Abbildung 12.9, nach 2. Zeile (VSc) + f"uge ein: \usepackage[german]{babel} + + * Seite 382, Abbildung 12.9, 5. Zeile (VSc) + "andere: \newindex{not}{ndx}{nnd}{Notationsliste} + ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ (siehe 12.11) +========== Kapitel 13 ============= + + * Seite 387, code middle of the page (GGr,FMi) + First example is missing a closing brace: + +\renewcommand{\@cite}[2]{% + [{#1\ifthenelse{\boolean{@tempswa}}{,#2}{}}]} + ^ + Second example would nowadays be better done with \textsuperscript: + +\renewcommand{\@cite}[2]{% + {\textsuperscript{#1}\ifthenelse{\boolean{@tempswa}}{,#2}{}}} + + * Seite 387, vorletzter Absatz, 2. Zeile (VSc) + ersetze: sortiert die "Seitennummern" -> "Nummern" + + * Seite 389ff (MSc) + Die Definition des BibTeX-Logos ist fehlerhaft (fehlt ein \textnormal) + wie man an den Kolumnentiteln leicht sehen kann. + + * Seite 389, Kapitel 13.2, 1. Absatz, 4. Zeile (VSc) + italic correction: \cite{sschl"ussel\/} + + * Seite 390, Abbildung 13.1, 4.Item, 2. Zeile (VSc) + korrigiere Ligatur: Auf"|l"osung statt Aufl"osung + + * Seite 393, Abschnitt 13.2.2; item alpha (TLa) + Hinweis auf Sortierung nach Labeln (s. a. S. 398, Abb. 13.6) + + * Seite 396 (FMi) + Extend the source of example to include abstract and keyword field + which then can be shown in output of printbib auf Seite 410 + + * Seite 399, Abbildung 13.7, Typ: apalike, (VSc) + warum erscheint hier als "Uberschrift "References" statt "Literatur" ? + + * Seite 401, Abbildung 13.8, 6. Zeile von unten (VSc) + f"uge ein: \section{Beispiel f"ur Verweise in einem mit \texttt{include} + ^^^ + + Seite 402, Abbildung 13.9, Resultat von Text oben + + * Seite 407, 1. Absatz, 3. Zeile (VSc) + erg"anze: so da"s die Wahl des einen oder anderen + ^^ + * Seite 407, Abschnitt 13.4; Absatz 2 v.u., Zeile 1 (TLa) + Ersetze: Eine Reihe von ... verf"ugbar. Die + ^^ + * Seite 409, Zeile 5 (RSc) + In dem Wort schl"ussel-Argument ist der Umlaut als "u dargestellt. + + * Seite 409, bibkey-Item, 10. Zeile (VSc) + erg"anze: nach mehreren Schl"usselw"ortern: + ^ + * Seite 409, printbib-Item, 1. Zeile (VSc) + erg"anze: C-Shell-Script + ^ + * Seite 409, Abschnitt 13.4; item bibclean (TLa) + Erg"anze: BiBTeX-Literaturdatenbank ... auf + UNIX-, Vax-/VMS- und MS-DOS-Plattformen + ^ ^ ^ ^ + * Seite 411, vorletzter Absatz, letzte + 3.letzte Zeile (VSc) + korrigiere 2x Ligatur: Auf"|listung statt Auflistung + + * Seite 412, Zeile 21; Abschnitt 13.5.1, Zeile 5 (WJu) + Ersetze in schl"ussel das Anf"uhrungszeichen-u durch echten + Umlaut. + + * Seite 412, Kapitel 13.5.1, Beispiel (VSc) + Update??: @book{lamport94, .... year=1994} + + * Seite 412, vorletzter Absatz (PVi) + Say explicitly that quotes or braces *must* be omitted around + abbreviations like the month names. + + * Seite 417, Abschnitt 13.5.2; Absatz 2, Zeile 3 v.u. (TLa) + Ersetze: gesamten Eintrag begrenzen). Um ... + ^ + * Seite 419, 3. Absatz, letzte Zeile (VSc) + korrigiere Ligatur: auf"|f"uhrt statt auff"uhrt + + * Seite 423, Item: article + book, jeweils 1. Zeile (VSc) + Satzendepunkt fehlt (article nur im Sinne der Allgemeinheit, + da eigentlich kein Satz. Es sollte alternativ nur ein Satzendepunkt + bei den Items book, misc, unpublished). + + * Seite 423, Tafel 13.2 (VSc) + italic correction vor allen Doppelpunkten, die den Worten + "Zwingend" und "Optional" folgen. + + * Seite 425, Tafel 13.3, edition-Item, 1. Zeile (VSc) + korrigiere Ligatur: Auf"|lage statt Auflage + + * Seite 425, Tafel 13.3, edition-Item, 1. Zeile (TLa) + Erg"anze: Die Auf"|lage eines Buches, z.\.B. ">Zweite"<. Sie ... + ^ + * Seite 425, Tafel 13.3, type-Item, Zeile 2 v.u. (TLa) + Vertausche: man anstelle ... chapter = "1.2", + ^^ + * Seite 428, Tafel 13.5, if$-Funktion (TLa) + Erg"anze: F_1 ausf"uhren, wenn ... + ^ + * Seite 431, Abschnitt 13.8.1, FUNCTION fin-entry, Zeile 6 (TLa) + Entferne: skip$ + ^ + * Seite 433, vorletzte und letzte Zeile (VSc) + korrigiere 2x Ligatur: Auf"|lage statt Auflage + + * Seite 434, 1. Zeile (VSc) + korrigiere Ligatur: Auf"|lage statt Auflage + +========== Kapitel 14 ============= + + * Seite 439, Fu"snote 1, 2. Zeile (VSc) + setze Komma: des Basissystems zu erhalten, mu"s man lediglich die Datei + ^ + * Seite 440, Kapitel 14.2.1, 2. Absatz, ab 4. Zeile (VSc) + statt: Benutzerkommentare k"onnen durch Eingabe des ^^A-Zeichens + eingegeben werden. + besser: Kommentare m"ussen durch ein ^^A-Zeichens eingeleitet werden. + + * Seite 444, Tafel 14.1, Item: \DeleteShortVerb (VSc) + erg"anze: \DeleteShortVerb{\zeichen} + ^^^^^^^^^^ + * Seite 444, Tafel 14.1, Item: \MakeShortVerb (VSc) + erg"anze: \MakeShortVerb{\zeichen} + ^ + * Seite 444 table 14.1 (FMi) + We should also describe the LaTeX counters IndexColumns (number of + columns in the index) and GlossaryColumns (number of columns in the + history listing). + + * Seite 444, Z.-6 (FMi) + Satzendepunkt fehlt. + + * Seite 445, Tafel 14.1, Item: \actualchar (VSc) + l"osche: Zeichen zur Trennung des >>Sortierschl"ussels und des + ^^ + oder: Zeichen zur Trennung des >>Sortierschl"ussels<< und des + ^^ + richtig: Zeichen zur Trennung des "Sortierschl"ussels" und des + ^ ^ + * Seite 446, \endfoot (VSc) + Linienst"arke verdoppelt durch Zusammentreffen von Seitenumbruch + direkt vor einer \hline f"ur neue "Uberschrift, deshalb f"allt + \hline von "Uberschrift mit \hline von \endfoot zusammen. + Automatische Abhilfe ? (w"u"ste ich auch gern, da ich immer manuell + korrigiere !) + + * Seite 447 table 14.1 (MDa) + In the last section of this table, "Layout and typestting parameters", + the commands `\tt' and `\sl' appear. (Cf. your own remark in the + errata file regarding page 350.) + + * Seite 449, Kapitel 14.2.8, 1. Absatz, 1. Zeile (VSc) + korrigiere Zeichensetzung: Es ist relativ einfach, eine .doc-Datei + ^ ^ + * Seite 449, Kapitel 14.2.8, 1. Absatz, 2. Zeile (VSc) + ersetze wegen Wortwiederholung: da"s sie allein durch Umbenennen der + ^^^^^^ ^^ + * Seite 449ff Kapitel 14.3 (FMi) + Seit LaTeX2e 95/12/01 ist docstrip in der Lage auch mehr als eine + Datei parallel zu erzeugen. Diese erweiterte Funktionalitat ist + momentan nur in der dokumentierten Fassung des Codes beschrieben + (d.h. docstrip.dtx). + + * Seite 450, Abbildung 14.1, links, letzte Zeile (VSc) + f"uge "!" ein wegen (rechts, 8. Zeile von unten}: + \textbf{Sch"on, Sie verwenden doc!} + ^ + * Seite 450, Abbildung 14.1, rechts, 11. Zeile von unten (VSc) + ist das "'" absichtlich dort? : + \changes{v2.2}{17 Nov 94}{"uberfl"ussiges 'item entfernt} +FMi: ja alte konvention \ darzustellen :-) + + * Seite 450, Abbildung 14.1, rechts, Absatz 3, Zeile 3 v.u. (TLa) + Erg"anze: \newcommand{docsamplecmd}[1]{\texttt{doc:}... + ^ + * Seite 451, Abbildung 14.2, links, Abschnitt 2, Zeile 2 v.u. (TLa) + Erg"anze: nen Text in kursiver ... verwenden doc! + ^ + * Seite 451, Abbildung 14.2, links, Abschnitt 3, Zeile 3 (TLa) + Erg"anze: 3 \newcommand{docsamplecmd}[1]{\texttt{doc:}.. + ^ + * Seite 453, Abschnitt 14.3.1, Absatz 2 v.u., Zeile 4 v.u. (TLa) + Entferne: gabe von \keepsilent ... wird ein gro"ser ... + ^^ + * Seite 453, Abschnitt 14.3.1, Absatz 2 v.u., Zeile 2 v.u. (TLa) + Erg"anze/Ersetze: hinaus stehen ... zur Verf"ugung --- N"aheres ist ... + ^ ^ + * Seite 454, Kapitel 14.4, 1. Absatz, letzte Zeile (VSc) + erg"anze: da"s weitere Aktionen des Benutzers n"otig werden. + ^ +========== Anhang A ============== + + * Seite 459, Kapitel A.1, 4. Zeile (VSc) + l"osche: Vorteile der Konsistenzspr"ufung von + ^ + * Seite 460 (FMi) + As a general comment we should remark that when nesting command + definitions, eg a \renewcommand inside a \newenvironment one has to + double the # characters denoting the arguments when refering to the + arguments of the inner definition, eg + + \newenvironment{foo}[1] + { ... #1 % argument of environment foo + \renewcommand\bar[2]{ ... + ##1 % argument of command \bar + #1 % argument of environment foo + ##2 % argument pf command \bar + }% + ... #1 % argument of environment foo + }{...} + + * Seite 460 following (FMi) + \newcommand and \renewcommand do now support a star form which make + it illegal to use \par (or an empty line) in the argument(s) of the + command being defined. This can be helpful for tracking down errors + of missing closing argument braces and can be used if a command is + intended to be used only within paragraphs. + + * Seite 460, Abschnitt \newcommand{\EPsI}; Absatz 5, Zeile 1 v.u. (TLa) + l"oesche: \index{\Ps!Encapsulated}}\index{EPs}} + ^ + * Seite 462, 1. Absatz, 2. Zeile (VSc) + l"osche: verwendet, so da"s damit wird das gleiche Resultat + ^^^^ + * Seite 462, 3. Absatz, 6. Zeile (VSc) + f"uge Leerzeichen ein: >>unsichtbare Linie<<, da"s die + ^ + * Seite 463, 3. Absatz, 4. Zeile (VSc) + f"uge ein: Zusammenfassung in einer quote-Umgebung. + ^^ + * Seite 468, Abschnitt A.1.3; Absatz 1, Zeile 3 (TLa) + Erg"anze: \newcommand{\labelenumiii}{... + ^^ + * Seite 468, Abschnitt A.1.3; Absatz 1, Zeile 4 (TLa) + Erg"anze: \newcommand{\labelenumiv}{... + ^ + * Seite 468, Abschnitt A.1.4; Absatz 'stretch', Zeile 2 v.u. (TLa) + Entferne: Positionierung von Text vorzunehmen bzw. ... + ^ + * Seite 469, Z. 4 (EPi) + Entferne Akzent von: Did\^ot. + + * Seite 469; Absatz dd (TLa) + Entferne: ... eines franz"osischen Zolls = ... + ^ + * Seite 472, Zeile -5 (UMa) + Ersetze: + von TeX dar, und zur Umsetzung ... + durch: + von TeX dar. Zur Umsetzung ... + + * Seite 472, Zeile -1 (UMa) + Boxen k"onnen nach oben, unten, links und rechts ... + ^ + * Seite 473, Abschnitt Rule; Zeile 1 v.u. (TLa) + Entferne: der Kolumnentitel vom Haupttext. + ^ + * Seite 474, Zeile 7 (UGo) + The optional arguments to \raisebox are exchanged: "height" comes + before "depth". + + * Seite 476, Abschnitt parbox-Beispiel; Absatz 3 v.l., Zeile 3 v.u. (TLa) + Erg"anze: lich ist, den Text + ^ + * Seite 476, Abschnitt parbox-Beispiel; Absatz 4 v.l., Zeile 2 v.u. (TLa) + Erg"anze: oft unm"oglich ist, den Text + ^ + * Seite 479, Abschnitt A.2.2; Absatz 3, Zeile 3 v.u. (TLa) + Erg"anze: zu erreichen. In ... Benutzers, n"otigenfalls ... + ^ + * Seite 480, Zeile 10 (UMa) + Kein Komma vor und: + ... in den der gesetzte Text abgespeichert und + + * Seite 482, Zeile 15 (WJu) + Ersetze YYYY/MM/DD durch JJJJ/MM/TT. + + * Seite 483, Tafel A.4; item \NeedsTeXFormat, Zeile 2 (TLa) + Erg"anze/Entferne: Ben"otigt Format ... einem Versionsdatum nicht ... + ^ ^ + * Seite 485, 2ter Absatz, Zeile 4 (UMa) + ... das sp"ater mit \usepackage geladen wird. + ^^^^^^^ + * Seite 485, Abschnitt A.3.3; Absatz 2 v.u., Zeile 2 v.u. (TLa) + Erg"anze: gekn"upft werden. ... beispielsweise, Dateien + ^ + * Seite 486, Abschnitt A.3.4; Absatz 3 v.u., Zeile 3 v.u. (TLa) + Ersetze: tionen werden ignoriert. ... wird der in + ^ + * Seite 486, Abschnitt A.3.4; Absatz 1 v.u., Zeile 3 v.u. (TLa) + Korrigiere: bearbeiten, in der sie ... + ^^ + * Seite 487, Abschnitt A.3.6; Absatz 1 v.u., Zeile 2 v.u. (TLa) + Ersetze: tionen, die von der ... dem entsprechenden + ^ + * Seite 490, Abschnitt A.3.8; Absatz 1, Zeile 3 (TLa) + Entferne: zur Erzeugung der ... (welche die gesetzte + ^ + * Seite 493, 2.Zeile: (TQ) + Ersetze "s: einfache Beispiel (das einen ...) + ^ + * Seite 494, Zeile 1 (TLa) + Erg"anze: Dieses Beispiel erzeugt ... + ^ + * Seite 495; Absatz 2 v.u., Zeile 1 (TLa) + Ersetze: Zum Vergleich von ... Verf"ugung. In seinem + ^ + * Seite 495; Absatz 2 v.u., Zeile 2 (TLa) + Entferne: test-Argument k"onnen ... explizite Werte wie 20cm ... + ^ + * Seite 496, 2ter Absatz, Zeile 3 (UMa) + Ersetze ; durch , + + * Seite 496 (FMi) + Add a remark that one can't use \isodd to directly test \value{page} + and expect correct information because the value of this counter + isn't always correct due to TeX's asyncronous output routine. + + * Seite 498 (ASc) + The host pit-manager.mit.edu has changed its name to rtfm.mit.edu. + + * Seite 498; Absatz 2 v.u., Zeile 3 v.u. (TLa) + Ersetze: nach einem Benutzernamen und Passwort ... + ^ + * Seite 498, Zeile 7 von unten (SWi) + korrigiere Trennung im Wort 'Ziel-adresse'. + + +========== Anhang B ============== + + * Seite 500, Z. 1 (MSc,FMi) + Es mu"s: Der Befehl cd ctan: hei"sen (mit Doppelpunkt) + ^ + * Seite 500; Absatz 3, Zeile 2 (TLa) + Entferne: en mit xspace im Namen ... + ^^ + * Seite 502; Absatz 5, Zeile 2 (TLa) + Entferne: anschauen, bevor man entscheidet ... + ^^^^^ +========== Literatur ============== + + * Seite 505, [1], 11. Zeile (VSc) + korrigiere: Addison-Wesley, 1992 + ^ + * Seite 505, [2], 6. Zeile (VSc) + korrigiere: Encapsulated PostScript beschrieben. + ^ + * Seite 506, [10], Zeile 3 v.u. (TLa) + Erg"anze: analysiert. Das Programm ... von Initialisierungsdateien ... + ^ + * Seite 507, [17], Zeile 3 (TLa) + Korrigiere: Eine Beschreibung ... von sprachspezifischen ... + ^^ + * Seite 509, [30], 10. Zeile (VSc) + "ubersetze: ibidem -> ebenda + besser: Diagrams with TeX von Michael Ramek, S. 227-258. + + * Seite 509, [34], Zeile 3 v.u. (TLa) + Entferne: schriften von ... METAFONT Fonts ... + ^ + * Seite 509, [35], Zeile 2 v.u. (TLa) + Korrigiere: Die Beschreibung des Bourne-Shell-Skripts latexindex zur ... + ^ ^ ^ + * S. 510, Literaturstelle 41, 3. Zeile von unten (SWi) + korrigiere Silbentrennung von 'kur-zen'. + + * Seite 510, [41], Zeile 4 (TLa) + Erg"anze: zifiziert dessen ... f"ur einen 32-Bit-Zeichencode, ... + ^ + * Seite 512, [56], Zeile 5 (TLa) + Entferne: wicklung von TeX, METAFONT und Computer Modern ... + ^ + * Seite 512, [60], 3. Zeile (VSc) + korrigiere Ligatur: Neuauf"|lage statt Neuauflage + + Update: "Ubersetzung ins Deutsche -> Referenz [??] + + * Seite 513, [69], Zeile 3 v.u. (TLa) + Entferne: neue Benutzerkreise erschlie"sen bzw. Probleme ... + ^ + * S. 515, Literaturstelle 80, 5. Zeile (SWi) + korrigiere Silbentrennung von 'Benutzer-oberfl"ache'. + + * Seite 515, [81], Zeile 2 v.u. (TLa) + Entferne: Ein detaillierter "Uberblick "uber verschiedene Wege ... + ^ + * Seite 517, [98], Zeile 2 v.u. (TLa) + Erg"anze: Es benutzt die ... diagonale Pfeile, oder man ... + ^ + * Seite 517, [105], Zeile 2 v.u. (TLa) + Erg"anze: Aufs"atze aus verschiedenen Schaffensperioden ... + ^^ + * Seite 517, [107], Zeile 3 (TLa) + Korrigiere: Seit 1906 ist das ... Chicago Press die Standardreferenz ... + ^^ +========== Index ================= + + * Seite 519--554, pauschal (TLa) + Es fehlen etliche Bindestriche: *-Fonts, *-Option, *-Paket, *-Programm, + *-Klasse, *-Umgebung, *-L"ange, *-Farb*, *-Z"ahler, etc. + + * (JKn) + I suggest to index the table 5.4 (page 129) under `language' + and the table on bottom of page 141 under `SI'. + + * Seite 523 (FMi) + Bindestrich + siehe auch Silbentrennung + + * Seite 526, Indexeintrag dd (MCl) + Ersetze Di\^{o}t durch Didot + + * Seite 527, Indexeintrag Didot (MCl) + Ersetze Di\^{o}t durch Didot + + * Seite 550 (SSl) + table Umgebung: fett 143f nicht 104 + + * Seite 531 (MSc,FMi) + Indexeintrag f"ur Geviert sollte 61 und nicht 62 sein; + ditto f"ur Durchschu"s (Seite 528) und Ausschlu"s (Seite 521). + + * Seite 553 (ARo) + Indexeintrag f"ur \vector sollte 300 und nicht 301 sein + +========== Zur Entstehungsgeschichte + + * Seite 555, 2. Absatz, 4. + 7. Zeile (VSc) + korrigiere 2x Ligatur: Auf"|l"osung statt Aufl"osung + + * Seite 555; Absatz 3, Zeile 3 (TLa) + Korrigiere: -Side Studios. Frank ... in eine \LaTeXe-Klassendatei ... + ^^ + * Seite 555, 5. Absatz, 1. Zeile (VSc) + korrigiere Trennung, statt "Mar-kup" setze "Mark-up" + + * Seite 555, 5. Absatz (VSc) + dieser Absatz enth"alt 6 aufeinanderfolgende Zeilen mit Trennung + + * Seite 556; Absatz 3 v.u., Zeile 1 (TLa) + Entferne: Ein harter Seitenumbruch ... jeder zehnten Seite ... + ^ + +================================================== + +Ein Dankesch"on an alle, die Fehler entdeckt und gemeldet haben. +Namentlich aufgef"uhrt sind alle Personen, die einen Fehler zuerst +gemeldet haben. + +ADe Andre Deparade +ADu Alain Dupuis +ARo Andreas Rotterdam +ASc Andreas Schwab +AzS Axel zur Strassen +BBe Barbara Beeton +BDe Bernard Desruisseaux +BRa Bernd Raichle +CLa Claus Langhans +DKa David Kastrup +EPi Eric Picheral +CMi Christel Mittelbach +FMi Frank Mittelbach +FVi Frode Viste +GFe Gabriel Valiente Feruglio +GGr George Graetzer +GRo Guenter Rote +GZi Georg Zimmermann +HPV Hans-Peter Vetter +JKn Joerg Knappen +KSi Kimmo Sipila +LSD Luzia S. Dietsche +MiB Michael Brade +MCl Matthias Clasen +MDa Mats Dahlgren +MMu Martin C M"uller +MSc Martin Schr"oder +MWi Marcus Wissmann +NBe Nelson Beebe +OBa Øyvind Bakke +PBL Peter Busk Laursen +PNu Peter Nuechter +PVi Philip A. Viton +PvO Piet van Oostrum +RHa Ralph Hangleiter +RSc Ralf Schoenstein +SSl Schorsch Slickers +SPi Stefan Pichel +SWi Stefan Wilkes +TBo Tilmann B"o"s +TCo Tobias Conrad +TLa Thomas Lauke +TQ Thomas Quintus +UGo Ulrich Goldschmitt +UMa Ulrich M"anz +VLS Volker Solinus +VSc Volker RW Schaa +WJu Werner J"urgens diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/bugs.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/bugs.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..a72ba3400d2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/bugs.txt @@ -0,0 +1,135 @@ + LaTeX Error Reports + + 12 January 1999 + +ERROR REPORTS + +Before you report an error please check that: + + * Your LaTeX system is not more than one year old. New LaTeX + releases occur at 6 monthly intervals, thus your problem may + have already been fixed. + + * The error is not already fixed by a patch added recently to the + current distribution. If you have access to a CTAN archive then + you can easily check whether there is already a patch that fixes + your problem; so please do so. The patches are described in the + files patches.txt and ltpatch.ltx; these are in the current + distribution. This check is especially important if you are using + a distribution that is more than one month old. + + * The error is not already mentioned in the documentation of the + distribution, e.g. in a .dtx file (in this case it is a feature :-). + + * The error has not already been reported. If you have WWW + access, you can search the LaTeX bugs database using this URL: + + http://www.latex-project.org/bugs.html + + * The error is not caused by software other than the core LaTeX + software that is produced and maintained by the LaTeX3 project + team (please report problems with other software to the authors + or suppliers of that software). + + * The error is not caused by using an obsolete version of any file or + of other software. + + * You are using the original version of all files, not one that has + been modified elsewhere. + +If you think you have found a genuine bug in a recent version of the +core LaTeX software, please report it in the following way: + + * Prepare a *short* test file that clearly demonstrates your + problem; see below for a discussion of `short'. + + * Run this file through latex to obtain the transcript file + (often .log) since you will need to submit this file also. + + * Generate a bug report template by running the file + latexbug.tex through LaTeX. + + * Fill in the spaces in the generated template file. Please note that + the reporting language is *English* irregardless of the fact, that + the address you are sending the bug report to, might not be in an + English speaking country. Reports received in a language other than + English might not be understandable for the person currently + looking at bug reports! + + * Include all necessary information, especially a complete input + file, a complete transcript file, and all other files used (if they + are not standard). + + Please check carefully to ensure that any non-standard files are + essential to the bug; and remember that we cannot debug files not + supplied by us. + + Any such non-standard files should be included in a `filecontents' + environment at the start of your input file! This allows us to + run your test file without a lot of manual preparation; this is + essential since we have to deal with many reports, not just with + the one written by you. + + * Please note that it is important to make the input file as short + as possible since this will enable us to find and fix the error + quickly. It also helps us because then we can often use it as a test + file for future releases. + + We would expect most files to be less than 60 lines, and very + rarely to be longer than 100 lines. + + This can often be achieved by defining a command to be some + arbitrary text and using this several times if it is necessary to + generate longer bits of text. + +Error reports concerning UNCHANGED versions of CORE LaTeX files +which are less than one year old should be sent by E-mail to: + + latex-bugs@latex-project.org + +You will receive an acknowledgement by E-mail containing at the +beginning of its subject line a problem reference of the form +category/number, e.g. latex/1234. Please use this subject line in ALL +further E-mails concerning the problem. Otherwise your reply will be +categorized and filed separately. + + +LAYOUT PROBLEMS + +If you think you have found a bug or some problematic behavior that +has been present in LaTeX for a long time (e.g., it was already in +LaTeX 2.09) you are, of course, equally welcome to report this, using +the above procedure. However, please note that we will normally not +change layout decisions made in the LaTeX standard classes (which are +derived from their 2.09 counterparts); nor will we change layout +decisions or the behaviour of core commands, even when these are +questionable from a typographic point of view, since such changes +would make thousands of documents invalid. See also the file +ltnews07.tex with regard to this policy. + + + +DOCUMENTATION ERRORS + +If you find an error in one of the following books: + + TITLE Author Errata File + + The LaTeX Manual Lamport manual.err + The LaTeX Companion Goossens, Mittelbach, Samarin compan.err + The LaTeX Graphics + Companion Goossens, Mittelbach, Rahtz grphcomp.err + Das LaTeX Handbuch Lamport handbuch.err + Der LaTeX Begleiter Goossens, Mittelbach, Samarin begleit.err + The LaTeX Web Goossens, Rahtz webcomp.err + Companion + +then please check first whether it is already mentioned in the errata +file for that book (these files are part of the LaTeX distribution). +If this is not the case then please report the error to the address +given in that corresponding errata file. + +Please *do not* send such reports to the latex-bugs address. + + +--- Copyright 1997,1998 the LaTeX3 project. All rights reserved --- diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/cfgguide.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/cfgguide.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..fc6c0501688 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/cfgguide.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/cfgguide.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/cfgguide.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..9e734529ea9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/cfgguide.tex @@ -0,0 +1,561 @@ +% \iffalse meta-comment +% +% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 +% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere +% in this file. +% +% This file is part of the LaTeX base system. +% ------------------------------------------- +% +% It may be distributed and/or modified under the +% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 +% of this license or (at your option) any later version. +% The latest version of this license is in +% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +% version 2003/12/01 or later. +% +% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". +% +% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is +% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional +% information. +% +% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution +% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with +% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. +% +% \fi +% Filename: cfgguide.tex + +\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/12/01] + +\documentclass{ltxguide}[1995/11/28] + +\newcommand{\filesection}[1]{\subsection{\sffamily{#1}}} +\newcommand{\iniTeX}{ini\TeX} + +\setcounter{secnumdepth}{0} + +\title{Configuration options for \LaTeXe} + +\author{\copyright~Copyright 1998, 2001, 2003 \LaTeX3 Project Team.\\ + All rights reserved.} + +\date{14 February 2003} + +\begin{document} + +\maketitle + +\tableofcontents + +\newpage + +\section{Configuring \LaTeX} + +Since one of the main aims of the new standard \LaTeX{} is to give all +users the freedom provided by a reliable document processing system +linked to a highly portable document format, the number of +configuration possibilities is strictly limited. The reasons for this +are explained in more detail in the article +\textit{Modifying \LaTeX{}} in the file \texttt{modguide.tex}. +An important consequence of this is that any document that relies on +any extension package must declare this package within the document +file; this helps to ensure that the document will work at a different +site, where the \LaTeX{} system may be configured differently. + +Local configuration options are, by convention, placed in +`configuration files', which have extension |.cfg|. This document +describes the possibilities for configuration in this release of +\LaTeX; it also explains how to configure the font definition files to +take advantage of the available fonts. + +The last section considers briefly how to proceed if you require +further customisation of the formatter. + + +\section{System configuration} + +\filesection{texsys.cfg} + +This is the only configuration file that \emph{must} be present. +During installation, if \LaTeX\ cannot find a file with this name +then a default file |texsys.cfg|, consisting entirely of comments, is +written out and used. Note that, until this file has been read, +\LaTeX{} is not able to test reliably whether a given file exists on +the system. + +The contents of the file |texsys.cfg| allow \LaTeX{} to cope with +various differences between the behaviours of different \TeX{} systems, +mainly in relation to file handling. The default version of this file +contains, in its comments, possible settings that may be needed for a +range of \TeX{} systems. For more information, typeset the file +|ltdirchk.dtx|. + +If you have copied your \LaTeX{} installation from a computer that +used a different operating system then you may well have a version of +|texsys.cfg| that will make it difficult to install \LaTeX{} on your +system. If this happens then start the process again with an empty +|texsys.cfg| file; this will produce an installation that should, at +least, allow you to typeset the documentation. However, it is +possible that \LaTeX{} can still find only those files that are in the +current directory; in this case you must set the macro |\input@path| +correctly for your system. + + +\section{Configuring the \LaTeX\ format} + +There are four configuration files that enable personal preferences to +be incorporated into the \LaTeX{} format file |latex.fmt|. The range +of preferences that can be configured by these files is strictly +limited as this helps to ensure document portability. + +All four files work in the same way: if the file \m{file}|.cfg| is +found, it will be input by \iniTeX; otherwise a default file +\m{file}|.ltx| will be input; this is sometimes done via a +minimal \m{file}|.cfg| that simply inputs \m{file}|.ltx|. Thus, +providing your own version of any of these |.cfg| files can completely +override any settings in the corresponding default standard |.ltx| +file. + + +\subsection{Font configuration} + +Before you even think about configuring the font declarations by +producing a file |fontmath.cfg| or |fonttext.cfg|, you should +read the documented file |fontdef.dtx|. This is the source file from +which the default files |fonttext.ltx| and |fontmath.ltx| are +produced; it contains information concerning the +contents of the default files and what sort of customisation is +possible. In particular, it describes in detail the effects of +individual customisations on document portability including: which +customisations can be made without endangering the ability to exchange +documents with other sites (even if the formatting differs); and which +things should be left untouched because they will make your system so +different from others that the documents it produces will be +non-portable. + +\textbf{WARNING } Please note that use of either of these font +configuration files has the following consequences. + \begin{itemize} + \item Since the content of the file |fontdef.dtx| \emph{might} + change in the future, anyone writing a font configuration file + must be prepared to update it for use with future releases. + \item Documents produced on your system are likely, at best, to be + portable only in the sense of being processable at a different + site---the actual formatting will not be the same if different + fonts are used. + \item The \LaTeX3 project team will not be able to support you in + diagnosing problems if these cannot be reproduced with a format + that does not use any configuration files. + \end{itemize} + +\filesection{fonttext.cfg} + +The file |fonttext.cfg| can contain declarations relating to the use +of fonts in text modes. + +If it exists, it defines which font shapes, families and encodings are +normally used in text mode, as well as the behavior of font attribute +commands such as |\textbf| etc. + +It could be used, for example, to produce a \LaTeX\ format that, by +default, typesets documents using Times fonts. Be warned, however, +that such customisation can have unfortunate consequences; so please +read carefully this section and the file |fontdef.dtx| below if you +are thinking of doing this. + +Please note carefully the above \textbf{warning}. + +\filesection{fontmath.cfg} + +The file |fontmath.cfg| can contain declarations relating to the use +of fonts in math mode. + +If it exists, it defines which fonts in which sizes are used in math +mode, and how they are used. It also defines all the math mode +commands that `are likely to' depend on the choice of math fonts used +(e.g.~commands that depend on the position of a glyph in a math font). + +The main reason for the existence of this file is to provide for future +updates when a standard math font encoding is available. Right now we +do \emph{not} encourage the use of this configuration file other than +for special applications. Writing a proper configuration file for math +mode needs expert knowledge! + +Please note carefully the above \textbf{warning}. + +\filesection{preload.cfg} + +The contents of the file |preload.cfg| can control the preloading of +commonly used fonts. Preloading fonts speeds up the processing of +documents but, because fonts cannot be `unloaded', you should not +preload too many; otherwise you may be unable to process documents +requiring unusual font families. + +The default file |preload.ltx| is produced from |preload.dtx|. It +loads only a few fonts and these are a good choice if you normally use +documents at the default, 10\,pt, size. If you normally use 11\,pt +or~12\,pt then the time for \LaTeX\ to startup may be noticeably +decreased if you preload the corresponding fonts for the sizes you +use. Similarly, if you normally use a different font family, for +example Times Roman (|ptm|) then you may want to preload fonts in this +family rather than the default Computer Modern fonts. + +\subsection{Hyphenation configuration} + +\filesection{hyphen.cfg} + +In order to hyphenate text, \TeX{} must have hyphenation patterns and, +since these patterns can be loaded only by \iniTeX, the choice of +which patterns to load must be made when the format is created. + +The hyphenation patterns for American English are stored in the file +named |hyphen.tex|; \LaTeX~2.09 always loaded this file when its +format was made. + +With \LaTeXe{} it is possible to configure which hyphenation patterns +are to be loaded into the format. When \iniTeX{} is processing +|latex.ltx|, it looks for a file called |hyphen.cfg|; this file can +be used to control which hyphenation patterns are loaded. If a file +|hyphen.cfg| cannot be found then \iniTeX{} will load the file +|hyphen.ltx|. + +The file |hyphen.ltx| loads the file |hyphen.tex| if it can find it; +otherwise it stops with an error since a format with no hyphenation +patterns is not very useful. It then sets |\language=0| and it sets +the values |\lefthyphenmin=2| and |\righthyphenmin=3|, which are +needed for American English. + +Thus, if you want any other patterns to be loaded then you should +create a file |hyphen.cfg|. For each language for which you wish to +load hyphenation patterns this file should: +\begin{itemize} +\item set |\language=|\m{number}; +\item load the file which contains the hyphenation patterns for that + language. +\end{itemize} +If the patterns you use require some definitions or assignments then +a group should be used to keep such changes local to their file. + +\textbf{Note.} The hyphenation files that are read in should \emph{only} +set the hyphenation tables for the language, using the commands +|\hyphenation| and |\patterns|. In particular they should make no +assignments to the lowercase/uppercase tables (|\lccode| and +|\uccode|) and should not make any global command definitions to be +used after the file has been read. Unfortunately some older +hyphenation files do contain such settings; thus they are +\emph{incompatible} with the mechanisms \LaTeX\ uses to ensure +independence of input and output encodings. + +After this the file |hyphen.cfg| should: +\begin{itemize} +\item set |\language| to its default value; +\item set |\lefthyphenmin| and |\righthyphenmin| to the correct values + for this default language. +\end{itemize} + +There are packages available, such as `french', that can help you with +this configuration. The `babel' collection contains many examples of +setting up a multi-lingual \LaTeX{} format. The documentation in +|lthyphen.dtx| (the source file for |hyphen.ltx|) also contains some +useful examples. + +[We intend in a future release of \LaTeX{} to provide a set of +standard commands for use in configuring hyphenation.] + + +\section{Configuring the font definition files} + +If you have special fonts available (or if some fonts are unavailable) +at your site then you may need to produce customised versions of the +font definition files; these have extension \texttt{.fd} and are read +by \LaTeX{} to obtain information about the font files installed at your +system and when to load them. + +Although we do not encourage such customisation, you will find +information about the content of these files and its syntax in the +documented source file \texttt{cmfonts.fdd} and +\textit{\LaTeXe{} font selection} in the file \texttt{fntguide.tex}. +[We hope to be able to provide further information and examples on +this subject at some time in the future.] + +Please note that the use of customised font definition files has the +following consequences. + \begin{itemize} + \item Documents produced on your system will, at best, to be + portable only in the sense of being processable at a different + site---the actual formatting will not be the same if different + fonts are used. + \item The \LaTeX3 project team will not be able to support you in + diagnosing problems if these cannot be reproduced with a format + that does not use any customised font definition files. + \end{itemize} + +Please also note that the whilst licence conditions on the standard +font definition files allow you to produce a customised version for +your own use, they do not allow you to distribute such a customised +font definition file under the original file name! + + +\subsection*{Note to system administrators} + +If you install a version of \LaTeX{} with a locally configured font +set-up then this system is likely to produce documents that are no +longer `formatting compatible'; for example, the use of different +default fonts will most likely produce different line and page breaks. +If you do install, on a multi-user system, a system that is configured +in such a way that it is not `formatting compatible' then you should +consider carefully the needs of users who need to create portable +documents. A good way to provide for their needs is to make +available, in addition, a standard form of \LaTeX{} without any +`formatting incompatible' customisations. + + +\section{Configuring compatibility mode} + +When processing documents that begin with |\documentstyle|, \LaTeXe{} +tries to emulate the old \LaTeX~2.09 system as far as possible. + +\filesection{latex209.cfg} + +Whenever a \LaTeX{} document starts with |\documentstyle|, rather than +with |\documentclass|, \LaTeX{} assumes that it is a \LaTeX~2.09 +document and therefore processes it in `compatibility mode'. This +does the following: +\begin{itemize} +\item sets the flag |\@compatibilitytrue|; +\item inputs the file |latex209.def|; +\item inputs the file |latex209.cfg| if it exists. +\end{itemize} + +The \LaTeX~2.09 set-up allowed the format itself to be customised. +When making the format with \iniTeX, the process ended with this +request: +\begin{quote}\tt + Input any local modifications here. +\end{quote} + +If your site did input any modifications at that point then the +\LaTeXe{} `compatibility mode' will not fully emulate \LaTeX~2.09 +\emph{as installed at your site}. In this case you should put all +these `local modifications' into a file called |latex209.cfg| and put +this file in the default input path at your site. These `local +modifications', although not stored in the format, will then be loaded +before any old-style document is processed. This should ensure that +you can continue to process any old documents that made use of this +local customisation. + + +\section[Configuration files for standard packages and classes]% + {Configuration files for standard packages\\ and classes} + +Most of the packages in the distribution do not have any associated +configuration files. The exceptions are listed here. + +\filesection{sfonts.cfg} + +The file |sfonts.cfg| can contain declarations relating to the use of +fonts in the slides class. +If it exists, it is read instead of the file |sfonts.def|. + +Please note that use of this configuration file has the following +consequences. + \begin{itemize} + \item Since the font set-up for slides has not yet been revised to + fit modern usage, the content of this file should be completely + updated sometime. Thus anyone writing such a configuration + file must be prepared to update it for use with future releases. + \item Documents are portable only in the sense of being processable + at a different site---the actual formatting will not be the same + if different fonts are used. + \item The \LaTeX3 project team will not be able to support you in + diagnosing problems if these cannot be reproduced with a format + that does not use this configuration file. + \end{itemize} + + +\filesection{ltnews.cfg} + +The file |ltnews.cfg| can be used to customise some aspects of the +behaviour of the \textsf{ltnews} class; this class is used to typeset +the the one page newsletter accompanying every \LaTeX{} distribution. +If this file is present then it is read in at the beginning of the +file |ltnews.cls|. + + +\filesection{ltxdoc.cfg} + +The file |ltxdoc.cfg| can be used to customise some aspects of the +behaviour of the \textsf{ltxdoc} class; this class is used to typeset +the documented code in the |.dtx| files. If this file is present then +it is read in at the beginning of the file |ltxdoc.cls|. + +As this file is read before the \textsf{article} class is loaded, you +may pass options to \textsf{article}. For example the following line +might be added to |ltxdoc.cfg| to format the documentation for A4 paper +instead of the default US letter paper size. +\begin{quote} +|\PassOptionsToClass{a4paper}{article}| +\end{quote} +You should note however, that even if paper size options are specified, +the \textsf{ltxdoc} class always sets the |\textwidth| parameter to +355\,pt, to enable 72 columns of text to appear in the verbatim code +listings. If you really need to over-ride this you could use: +\begin{quote} +|\AtEndOfClass{\setlength{\textwidth}{ ...}}| +\end{quote} +To set the |\textwidth| to your desired value at the end of the +\textsf{ltxdoc} class. + +By default, most of the |.dtx| documented code files in the +distribution will produce a `description' section followed by full +source listing of the package. If you wish to suppress the source +listings you may add the following line to |ltxdoc.cfg|: +\begin{quote} +|\AtBeginDocument{\OnlyDescription}| +\end{quote} + +The documentation of the \textsf{ltxdoc} package, which may be typeset +from the file |ltxdoc.dtx|, contains more examples of the use of this +configuration file. + +\filesection{ltxguide.cfg} + +The class \textsf{ltxguide} is used by the `guide' documents, such as +this document, in the \LaTeX\ distribution. A configuration file +|ltxguide.cfg| may be used with this class in a way very similar to +the customisation of the \textsf{ltxdoc} class described in the +previous section. + +\section{Configuration for other supported packages} + +The `graphics' bundle of packages needs two configuration files, +primarily to specify the driver used to process the |.dvi| file that +\LaTeX{} produces. More documentation on these files comes with the +graphics bundle but we mention them here for completeness. + +\filesection{graphics.cfg} + Normally this file just specifies a default option, by calling + |\ExecuteOptions|, for example |\ExecuteOptions{dvips}| or + |\ExecuteOptions{textures}|. + + This file is read by the \textsf{graphics} package, and so affects + all the packages in the bundle that are based on \textsf{graphics}: + \textsf{graphicx}, \textsf{epsfig}, \textsf{lscape}. + +\filesection{color.cfg} + Normally this file is identical to |graphics.cfg|. It specifies the + default driver option for the \textsf{color} package. + +\section{Non-standard versions} + +If you feel the need to make a version of \LaTeX{} that differs from +the standard version in ways that are not possible using the above +configuration possibilities, then you should first read +\textit{Modifying \LaTeX{}} in the file |modguide.tex|; this +will probably make you realise that you do not have any such need. + +Thus we are sure that you will never need to create a non-standard +version and, even if you do create one, we hope that you will not +distribute such a version. Nevertheless, you are permitted to do this +provided you take great care to do the following: +\begin{itemize} +\item +respect the conditions in legal.txt and individual files regarding +modification of files and changing the name; + +\item +change all the relevant `|\typeout| banners': i.e.~those produced by +all the non-standard files in your version and by the format; + +\item + ensure that the method used to run your version is clearly + distinguished from that used to run standard \LaTeX{}; e.g.~by using + a command name or menu entry that is clearly different from + \texttt{latex} (or \texttt{LaTeX} etc). +\end{itemize} + +\subsection{Examples} + +Since we have been prompted, despite our misgivings, to document how +to do this by members of the League for Programming Freedom, it seems +appropriate to describe here a possible modification of \LaTeX{} to +produce a system called fsf\TeX. + +To do this, you should create a file called \texttt{fsftex.tex} and +then run it using \iniTeX{} and the standard \LaTeX{} format. + +The contents of the file \texttt{fsftex.tex} should be as shown on +page \pageref{fsfcode}. The particular changes to the \LaTeX{} kernel +that you wish to make need to be added to the file at the position +indicated. You can also choose the extensions you want to use for the +class and package files in your system. + +\newpage +\label{fsfcode} + +\begin{footnotesize} +\begin{verbatim} +% fsftex.tex +% +% iniTEX Source code to make a `fsftex' format. +% +% To make this format on Unix: +% +% initex \&latex fsftex +% +% Then to run the format on file.tex: +% +% tex &fsftex file +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% *** VERY IMPORTANT!!! *** +% Change the typeout banner so users know that they +% are NOT running Standard LaTeX. +\everyjob{\typeout{fsfTeX 1.0 based on LaTeX2e \fmtversion}} +\makeatletter + +% fsfTeX changes some LaTeX internals: +% ... put what you like here ... +\def \fsf@xxxx {Some arbitrary \emph{freely modifiable} code goes here} + +% fsfTeX class files have extension .fcl (this week): +\def \@clsextension {fcl} + +% fsfTeX package files have extension .fsy: +\def \@pkgextension {fsy} + +% Change the file handling so that when a fsfTeX package or class +% is not available, the standard LaTeX file will be read. +% +% For example, \documentclass{article} will load article.fcl if such +% a file exists, but article.cls otherwise. This allows arbitrary +% processing on `article' documents without changing the standard +% article.cls file. + +\let\fsf@missingfileerror\@missingfileerror + +\def\@missingfileerror#1#2{% + \ifx #2\@clsextension + \InputIfFileExists {#1.cls}% + {\wlog {fsfTeX: loading #1.cls rather than #1.#2.}}% + {\fsf@missingfileerror {#1}{#2}}% + \else + \ifx #2\@pkgextension + \InputIfFileExists {#1.sty}% + {\wlog {fsfTeX: loading #1.sty rather than #1.#2.}}% + {\fsf@missingfileerror {#1}{#2}}% + \else + \fsf@missingfileerror {#1}{#2}% + \fi + \fi +} + +\makeatother +\dump +\end{verbatim} +\end{footnotesize} + +\end{document} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/changes.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/changes.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..70a65970980 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/changes.txt @@ -0,0 +1,8994 @@ + +This lists changes to the LaTeX2e files in reverse chronological order. + +NOTE: This file is based on the developers' personal change-log files +and is provided for convenience only. It therefore makes no claims to +completeness or accuracy and it contains some references to files that +are not part of the distribution. + +======================================================================= + + +2004-02-24 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltplain.dtx: added \loggingall and \loggingoutput as variant of + \tracingall and \showoutput (write only to transcript) + + * manifest.txt: added lppl-1.2.txt to the distribution since we + are now at version 1.3 + +2004-02-22 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx: changed warning text for oldstyle digits + +2004-02-20 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltdefns.dtx: docu fix (pr/3620) + +2004-02-16 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * classes.dtx (section*{\indexname}]): Moved setting of \columnsep and + \columnseprule later to avoid affecting the wrong page (pr/3616) + +2004-02-15 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltspace.dtx + + Added better \nobreakdashes + +2004-02-13 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * fixltx2e.dtx: fix for \@Esphack forgotten (pr/3498) + +2004-02-11 Rainer Schöpf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * pict2e.inx/.dtx: Removed. + +2004-02-10 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * doc.dtx (subsection{Macros for generating index entries}): + environment names incorrectly sorted in index (pr/3615) + +2004-02-09 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * utf8ienc.dtx: no newlines in error messages allowed + (due to inputenc) + space in the wrong place "\count @64" + added commands already defined in the kernel (found by BG) + added test file pr/3480 + +2004-02-04 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx: coding change, to follow bug fix by DEK in + plain.tex in OT4 (pr/3469) + + * inputenc.dtx: Added ISO 8859-16 Latin10 (pr/3568) + +2004-02-02 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutput.dtx + + Small fix for \enlargethispage, pr/3528 + +2004-02-02 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dtx + + Tidied up a bit more of the code + +2004-02-02 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * fontdef.dtx + + Many math things made robust + + Added two `bigtriangle synonyms' for compatibility with the + stmaryrd symbols package + +2004-02-02 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx + + Added \textbigcircle to OMS + + Fixed bad bug in \DeclareTextSymbol as per Heiko + in pr/3563 + +2004-02-02 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * Makefiles + + Lots of minor fixes + +2004-01-31 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltclass.dtx (section{Implementation}): internal kernel version + of \@ifnextchar used in some places, see next entry (pr/3501) + + * ltdefns.dtx: internal kernel version for \@ifnextchar added + to prevent the amsmath package to highjack this command in random + places, this is really a bug in amsmath which should finally be + fixed there (pr/3501) + +2004-01-28 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltvers.dtx: warning for old latex 5 years grace (pr/3601) + + * latexbug.tex: warning for old latex 5 years grace (pr/3601) + +2004-01-23 Rainer Schöpf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * fixltx2e.dtx: Replace the double dangerous bend sign by a + huge double exclamation mark. This is to mark important + bits in the documentation. + +2004-01-04 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltbibl.dtx: Changed error message for \nocite + +2004-01-03 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Use \ooalign for \k (pr/3532) + Added \textogonekcentered (pr/3532) + Added composites \k{o} and \k{O} (pr/3532) + +2003-12-30 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltpictur.dtx: issue warning if circle size can't be met + + * nfssfont.ins: support for nfssfont.dtx + +2003-12-29 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dtx: fixing a typo in \DeclareInputText recently + introduced. + +2003-12-16 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutput.dtx: Ensure that \@elt has a defined + state in \@makecol (pr/3586) + +2003-12-11 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * doc.dtx: added support for \MakeShortVerb* as suggested by + Hubert Gaesslein <hubertjg@open.mind.de> + +2003-12-08 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * source2e.tex: changed typeout message + +2003-11-16 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dtx: docu changes for latin 4 (pr/3585) + + * ltplain.dtx: docu fixes (pr/3584) + +2003-10-13 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfinal.dtx: Added extra \lccode for \- and \textcompwordmark + to allow hyphenation in the remainder of the word + +2003-10-09 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutput.dtx: docu fixes (pr/3575) + +2003-09-19 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * fixltx2e.dtx: No hyphenation in first word after float + environmentb (pr/3498) + Allow \emph to produce small caps + +2003-09-14 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * docstrip.dtx: removed surplus dot from error message + +2003-08-27 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltpictur.dtx (section{Picture Mode}): + check for \cs{@linechar} being empty (pr/3570) + (subsection{Curves}): added missing displacement (pr/3566) + +2003-05-18 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltbibl.dtx: raise an error is \nocite is used before begin + document (until now it simply failed) + +2003-05-09 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx: new implementation of textcomp with options and + subencodings + +2003-05-04 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * fixltx2e.dtx: incorporated new definition for \@fnsymbol to use + text symbols if available (pr/3400) + +2003-04-26 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * fixltx2e.dtx: incorporated fix-cm.sty by Walter Schmidt + +2003-02-04 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx: added a number of options to textcomp to enable + only some characters since most of the chars are ont generally + available. + +2003-01-12 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * nfssfont.dtx: added interactive support to allow font spec via + nfss classification. + +2002-12-13 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltbibl.dtx (section{Bibliography Generation}): + Added \leavevmode in case citation is at start of paragraph (pr/3486) + +2002-11-06 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dtx: Added cp858 (cp850 with euro symbol) (pr/3464) + +2002-10-28 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx: coding change for \r{A} in OT1 to follow bug fix + by DEK in plain.tex, but it is still a hack! + (better solution: do not use OT1 encoded fonts) (pr/3469) + + * ltlists.dtx: Check for math mode when ending a list to + give a better error message than "perhaps a missing item" (pr/3437) + First change to this part of LaTeX since 1997! + +2002-10-25 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dtx: Added cp1257 (Baltic) + +2002-10-02 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfssbas.dtx (section{Macros for setting up the tables}): Adding + \LastDeclaredEncoding introduced a bug in + \DeclareFontSubstitution. Instead of the real encoding name the + token \LastDeclaredEncoding got into the internal lists causing + havoc. (pr/3459) + +2002-10-01 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfloat.dtx: Use braces around \itshape to keep font change + local in \thempfootnote; bug introduced 7 years earlier + (pr/3460) + +2002-07-28 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dtx: Added code 128 (texteuro) for cp1250 + +2002-07-08 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dtx: added \texteuro for ansinew (pr/3423) + +2002-06-18 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latexbug.tex: actually complained when format are older than 18 + months (now we accept 30) + + * ltvers.dtx: error message still talked about 1 year old sources + being too old (though in fact it is 30 months) + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Corrected \cs{c} for T1 (pr/3442) + Added \cs{textbardbl} (pr/3400) + Definition of \textexclamdown changed (pr/3368) + Definition of \textquestiondown changed (pr/3368) + Changed def for \textregistered to avoid small caps (pr/3420) + +2002-06-16 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dtx: added macce (pr/3433) + added code points to 1252 (pr/3441) + +2002-04-18 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * oztex.txt: new version added + +2001-08-26 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltclass.dtx: readded lost catcode setting for space in + ProvidesFile (pr/3353) + +2001-07-12 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dtx: + + Added latin9.def (from Karsten Tinnefeld) + +2001-07-12 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltnews.cls: + + Added eTeX logo + +2001-06-04 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltvers.dtx: check for old format disabled --- perhaps we have + reached the last release of 2e already? + + * inputenc.dtx: Added \textkra, \texttstroke and + \textTstroke to latin4 (pr/3336) + + * ltpictur.dtx: Don't warn if \line or \vector command + has zero length argument pr/3318 + + * fontdef.dtx (subsubsection{Arrows}): Guard against math active + = and math active | in \Relbar and \models (pr/3333) + +2001-06-03 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * format.ins: added default cfg files that are simple + wrappers for fonttext.ltx, fontmath.ltx, and preload.ltx (pr/3264) + + * fontdef.dtx: added default cfg files that are simple + wrappers for fonttext.ltx, fontmath.ltx, and preload.ltx (pr/3264) + +2001-06-01 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfssini.dtx: some docu changes + +2001-05-28 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx + + Added \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[2000/06/01] to .def + files, pr/3255 + + Made compatible T1 and OT1 accents (on i and \i), pr/3295 + +2001-05-28 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * usrguide.tex + + Described short-form for guillemets in T1 encoding, pr/3192 + +2001-05-28 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltxguide.cls: + + Added some definitions + +2001-05-25 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dtx: extended NEXT encoding (pr/3281) + suppress all spaces for horizontal mode (pr/3273) + + * minimal.cls: added \pagenumbering{arabic} to define \thepage + (pr/3275) + + * ifthen.dtx: Added \AND, \OR and \NOT as boolean operators as + alternative to the lower case versions (pr/3297) + + * ltdirchk.dtx: Explicitly set \endlinechar to 10 (pr/3334) + + * ltclass.dtx: Explicitly set \endlinechar to 10 (pr/3334) + + * classes.dtx: Replaced all tilde chars used with \nobreakspace + (pr/3310) + +2001-05-18 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * doc.dtx: partly support docstrip's ``verbatim'' + directive, at least ensure that it can be processed without and + error message (pr/3331) + +2001-04-23 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx: added missing \section to docu + +2001-04-21 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * classes.dtx (section*{\contentsname): initialize \@tempdima + within \l@part so that \numberline can be used pr/3327 + +2001-04-16 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltnews14.tex: added + +2001-02-16 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltxref.dtx (subsection{Cross Referencing}): Added an extra level + of grouping to \@newl@bel as suggested in PR3250 by + Harald Hanche-Olsen <hanche@math.ntnu.no> + +2001-01-07 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutput.dtx (subsection{Floats}): reset @newlist flag in output + routine (pr/3286). This was done before (pr3231) but the code + ended up in the wrong place by mistake. + +2001-01-06 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * classes.dtx: Moved \@mkboth out of heading args for + thebibliography and \listof... command as this can fail with the + slightly strange definition for \chapter in twocolumn mode (pr/3285) + +2000-09-24 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * fixltx2e.dtx: for some unknown reason the version of fix2col + integrated was not the latest one --- so a number of bugs already + corrected crept up again (1.1d fixes those) + + Don't change \setlength if it isn't the kernel default any longer + + \addpenalty fix proposed in 3073 was not sufficient if the command + was used when \prevdepth=-1000pt (ie after \nointerlineskip) + +2000-09-01 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfinal.dtx: finally moved emptying \errhelp to a place + after its last use (pr/449) + +2000-08-30 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx + + Much editing but no code changes + +2000-08-24 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfinal.dtx: + + Fixed typo in warning message + +2000-07-31 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutput.dtx: + + Changed handling of space above footnotes. + +2000-07-29 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latexbug.tex: complain about old LaTeX only after 18 months + + * ltvers.dtx: changed distribution check to yearly distribution + +2000-07-19 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutput.dtx: locally reset \if@newlist so that + list structures in head/foot don't interfere with + lists in the MVL. internal/3231 + +2000-07-18 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltnews13.tex: update to ltnews13 + +2000-07-12 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutput.dtx: Ensure that rule between column is in \normalcolor + (it did depend on the color in the text at the column break!) + +2000-07-11 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltmiscen.dtx: fix typo in warning message + +2000-07-04 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * doc.dtx: ... and another fix for (pr/3170), sigh + +2000-07-01 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dtx: incorporating latin4.def contributed by + Hana Skoumalov\'a + + * inputenc.ins: incorporating latin4.def contributed by + Hana Skoumalov\'a + +2000-06-10 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * doc.dtx (subsection{Bells and whistles}): extending (or say + fixing?) change for (pr/3170) + +2000-06-01 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltpage.dtx: + + Changed grouping method in \markboth and \markright + (see also pr/3203) + + Less expansion by using token register in \markboth + and \markright + +2000-05-26 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx (subsubsection{Declaration commands}): + reimplemented \UseTextSymbol and \UseTextAccent to support + reference over more than one level (pr/3160) + +2000-05-22 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * doc.dtx: + + Less obscure wording at start of index? (pr/3202) + + * inputenc.dtx: + + Added latin2 option for textdegree (pr/3207) + Updated documantaion + + * ltpage.dtx: reimplementation of \markboth and \markright to + avoid problem with expanion at wrong point in time in some cases + (pr/3203) + +2000-05-21 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * doc.dtx (subsection{Bells and whistles}): new implementation + for \meta command (pr/3170) + +2000-05-19 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * classes.dtx (subsubsection{Parts}): Only add empty page after + part if twoside and openright (pr/3155) + + * ltmiscen.dtx: Reset \AtEndDocument for latex/3060 + +2000-04-30 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * manifest.txt: ltnews13.tex added + +2000-01-30 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx: added \hmode@bgroup as shorthand for + \leavevmode\bgroup use \hmode@bgroup...\egroup instead of + \leavevmode{...} where applicable in most cases \leavevmode was + missing before (pr/3160) + + * ltfntcmd.dtx: use \hmode@bgroup...\egroup instead of \leavevmode{...} + +2000-01-27 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dtx: allow \inputencoding also in hoizontal mode (or rather + make it do something there --- it was allowed before (pr/2888)) + +2000-01-24 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dtx: fix error message for undefined code points + (pr/3158) + +2000-01-07 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltmiscen.dtx: Disable hyphenation in verbatim even if the font + allows it. + +1999-12-19 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltnews12.tex: final adjustments + +1999-12-11 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltnews.cls: fixed a curious bug lurking in the class since its + beginning: putting a list directly after a paragraph would make the + paragraph before(!) the list justified (while the rest of the document + was set ragged right) + + * ltnews12.tex: added fixltx2e section + +1999-12-08 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx (subsection{The fontenc package}): + Changed \cs{CYRRHOOK} and \cs{cyrrhook} to + \cs{CYRRHK} and \cs{cyrrhk} as name changed in the cyrillic + bundle for naming consistency with other ``hook'' glyphs. + +1999-12-01 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltnews12.tex (section{Outcome of TUG '99 (Vancouver)}): + added text on TUG 99 and other bits + +1999-11-08 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltx3info.tex: Typo corrected. + + * emtex.txt: Correct name of file ltxcheck.tex. + +1999-11-06 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltx3info.tex: fixed typo + +1999-10-28 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx (subsubsection{Declaration commands}): + Give \accent@spacefactor a default definition to prevent horrible + death in case or incorrect input (pr/3084) + +1999-10-26 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * fixltx2e.dtx: added first version + + * manifest.txt: added draft ltnews12.tex + + * inputenc.dtx: removed left over beta test message + +1999-10-10 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutput.dtx: Reset definition of active math ' to + \active@math@prime within the output routine. + + * ltmath.dtx: Introduce macro \active@math@prime for the active + prime character in math mode. + +1999-09-24 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * usrguide.tex (subsection{Definitions}): show syntax of all + declaration commands (pr/3102) + +1999-09-17 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * doc.dtx: removed extra change entry. + + * classes.dtx: found two changes entries claiming to have been done + in 1955 (exactly 40 years too early :-) + + * makeindx.dtx: fixed two changes entries (arg order wrong) + + * syntonly.dtx: updated changes entry to have four digits years + + * classes.dtx: update of label names in docu + + * ifthen.dtx: make this a proper LaTeXable package + + * pict2e.dtx: make this a proper LaTeXable package (even if not containing code) + + * ltxdoc.dtx: also accept .fdd files in DocInclude (code by M Schroeder) + +1999-09-10 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * classes.dtx: renamed a few labels to support production of general docu + + * ifthen.dtx: changed driver file + +1999-09-07 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dtx: did some spellchecking of docu after noticing + a few glaring typos + +1999-09-03 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * lppl-1-1.txt: added LPPL 1.1 under this name to the distribution. + + * DEFAULT.pre: updated for LPPL 1.2 + + * DEFAULT.hea: updated for LPPL 1.2 + + * copyfd.pre: updated for LPPL 1.2 + + * copycfg.pre: updated for LPPL 1.2 + + * copyins.hea: updated for LPPL 1.2 + +1999-08-27 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * lppl.txt: fixed minor glitches found by Matt and Eberhard + This is probably going to be LPPL 1.2 + +1999-07-10 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * lppl.txt: final changes to LPPL 1.1 + +1999-07-09 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * updated headers to reflect LPPL 1.1 + updated legal.txt to say that use of LaTeX is unrestricted + +1999-06-24 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltnews11.tex (section{Fontenc package peculiarities}): + document the special behaviour of fontenc + + * ltclass.dtx: document that fontenc pretends it wasn't loaded + +1999-06-12 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx (subsection{The fontenc package}): + ensure that \@uclclist is extended only once (if at all) + +1999-06-10 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx: ensure that fontenc doesn't load encodings from + previous calls again (pr/2888) + +1999-05-28 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * bugs.txt: Added reference to webcomp.err. + + * readme.txt: Added reference to webcomp.err. + + * manifest.txt: Added reference to webcomp.err. + +1999-05-28 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * webcomp.err: file added + +1999-05-27 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltnews11.tex: updates + +1999-05-25 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * cmfonts.ins: removed "fd" guard since never used these days + +1999-05-09 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * cmfonts.fdd: docstrip `nowarn' guard was the wrong way around + for font OT1/cmr/bx/ui (pr/3036) + +1999-04-04 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * docstrip.dtx: fixed typo in documentation (pr2973) + +1999-04-02 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dtx + + Corrected cp852 for pr/2992 + + * ltboxex.dtx + + Made robust the flag in \@iiiparbox: pr/2975} + + * ltdefns.dtx + + Fixed new version of \@yargdef: pr/3013 + + * usrguide.tex + + Added to documentation of uc/lc list + +1999-03-22 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * doc.dtx: Correct last change. + +1999-03-12 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * clsguide.tex + + Added to documentation of options + + * cyrguide.tex: + + Further editing + +1999-03-08 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * cyrguide.tex: Use \URL command. + + * ltxguide.cls: Added \URL command. + +1999-03-04 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * usrguide.tex: Refer to cyrguide.tex. + + * ltxguide.cls: Added \cyrguide. + + * All copyright headers and preambles: updated for lppl.txt. + + * 00readme.txt: Refer to lppl.txt, add new LaTeX books. + +1999-03-03 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltxguide.cls: + + Added some definitions + +1999-03-01 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltdefns.dtx: Remove change from 1999-01-08 internal/2967 + + * lppl.txt: minor rewordings after comments from + Arnoud Engelfriet and John Hasler. + +1999-03-01 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * handbuch.err: Added. + + * install.txt: Add link to truetex.txt and vtex.txt. Remove + timings for slow computers. + +1999-02-27 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * doc.dtx: temp fix for pr/2968 + +1999-02-24 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx (subsection{The fontenc package}): + + Corrected cyrillic uc/lc list + +1999-02-23 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltnews.cls: + + Added some definitions + +1999-02-12 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * legal.txt: refer to LPPL + + * lppl.txt: more fiddling + +1999-02-12 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfssini.dtx: changed \oldstylenums to use \rmdefault instead of + cmm hardwired. This doesn't change much in standard cases but allows + other font sets to work without redefining \oldstylenums as long as + the right .fd files are available (pr/2954) + + * truetex.txt: Updated version. + +1999-02-10 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * letter.dtx: Reset footnote counter for every new letter (PR + 2957). + +1999-02-09 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * cyrguide.tex: + + Major editing (new file) + + * usrguide.tex (section{Commands}): + + Updated + + * minimal.cls: + + Small reordering to better support the documented method of use + + * cfgguide.tex (section{System configuration}): + + Clarification and emphasis changed re fontdef.dtx cfgs + +1999-02-09 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltdefns.dtx: catch \newcommand[10] or \newcommand[X] + +1999-02-05 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * cyrguide.tex: small updates + +1999-01-18 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltdefns.dtx: new go faster \newcommand implementation /2942. + +1999-01-13 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * fntguide.tex (subsection{Selection commands}): added documentation + for \linespread (pr/2891) + + * ltnews10.tex: updates + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Simplified solution for pr/2930 + +1999-01-08 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltdefns.dtx: two more \long in \@ifnextchar for latex/2902 + +1999-01-08 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * fntguide.tex (subsection{Encoding definition file commands}): + Added documentation about \LastDeclaredEncoding + +1999-01-07 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ifthen.dtx: \isundefined for /2824 + + * latexbug.tex: cyrillic + + * latexbug.el: cyrillic + +1999-01-07 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltdefns.dtx: add extra braces and \long declartions so + [{]}] and [\par] work. latex/2896. + +1999-01-07 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * bugs.txt: Added description how to follow up a problem report. + + * latexbugs.tex: Added description how to follow up a problem + report. + + * classes.dtx: Added check of @noskipsec switch in \part for + article class. + +1999-01-07 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Hackery to support reading in fontenc.sty several + times (really the wrong interface and needs changing) + + Hackery to support cyrillic uc/lc update --- that will definitely go + somewhere else in a later release + +1999-01-06 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * emtextds.txt: Added to distribution. Installation procedure for + Walter Schmidt's emTeX/TDS for OS/2. + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Minor documentation fix (PR 2939). + +1999-01-06 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfssbas.dtx: Added \LastDeclaredEncoding to support cyrillic + integration (pr/2988) + + * ltoutput.dtx: Added negative vskip, as when processing outputbox + as suggested by Fred Bartlett pr/2892 + + * classes.dtx: Check \if@noskipsec in \part see pr/2889 + + * ltoutenc.dtx: New impl of \@text@composite and \@text@composite@x + (pr/2930) + +1999-01-05 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * fontdef.dtx: Need special protection for character + \texttt{\char62} in \cs{changes} entry, as this is the makeindex + actualchar. + +1998-12-28 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * doc.dtx: The case-changing trick in the definition of + \short@macro didn't work, as the category code was changed inside + the macro replacement text, not during the definition. + +1998-12-27 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * doc.dtx (subsection{Macros for generating index entries}): Use + \string, not \protect in argument of \special@index. + +1998-12-20 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * doc.dtx (subsection{Macros for generating index entries}): + Correctly handle second index entry for \SpecialMainEnvIndex + by using \special@index not \index (pr/2928) + +1998-12-01 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * nfssfont.dtx: cosmetic change: \documentstyle -> \documentclass + Program still would need a major user interface upgrade + ... one day (pr/2915) + +1998-11-13 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * lttab.dtx: prevent an endless loop from incorrect input like + \begin{tabular}{l|l{11.5cm}} (pr/2884) + +1998-09-19 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx: added \string to definition of \a so that \a' + works even if ' is active at that time (pr/2878) + + * classes.dtx: redefine \thesection, \thechapter and \@chapapp + globally (using \gdef) in \appendix so that these redefinitions + survive even if \appendix is used within an environment such as + multicols + +1998-09-17 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * cfgguide.tex (section Configuration files for + standard packages and classes]): + added info about ltnews.cfg (pr/2875) + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Explicitly set \spacefactor after \accent in + OT1 type accents like \`A (pr/2877) + +1998-08-22 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * doc.dtx: Correction for PR 2563: doc.dtx produces incorrect + index entries for some single character control sequences + (like <). + +1998-08-17 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * (Various source files): Replaced old form `commandname by + \cs{commandname} in changes entries. + + * (Various source files): Replaced \cmd{\commandname} by + \cs{commandname} in changes entries. + + * ltfssdcl.dtx: Corrected documentation glitch in changes entry. + + * ltmiscen.dtx: Corrected documentation glitch in changes entry. + + * latexsym.dtx: Corrected documentation glitch in changes entry. + +1998-08-01 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dtx (section{Announcing the files}): + + Corrected version number + +1998-07-04 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dtx: give better error message if source document contains + a character which is not defined by current input encoding (pr/2845) + +1998-06-19 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * clsguide.tex (subsection{Identification}): Explicitly warn that + the optional date argument of \Provides... must be in the format + yyyy/mm/dd and will produce low-level errors otherwise + +1998-06-17 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dtx: + + Spanish ords changed to text chars, pr/2579 + + Fixed typo in `next' + + * lttab.dtx: + + Enhanced documentation + + * ltoutenc.dtx: + + Fixed \textcircled + Fixed wrong code in \t + Added masc/fem ords defaults + Swapped acutedbl and gravedbl in TS1 + Renamed macron in TS1 + + * pict2e.dtx: + + Wording changed, and "documentation" + +1998-06-12 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * slifonts.fdd: fix provides files for T1* (Bernard Gaulle) + +1998-06-04 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltboxes.dtx: support calc expressions in \rule command + (that one was forgotten or so it seems) + +1998-05-26 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfinal.dtx: + + Set-up lccodes (and uccodes) before reading in + hyphenation files + +1998-05-19 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * doc.dtx (section{The Description of Macros}): + reinit ^^A as comment char at beginning of document to allow use + of inputenc with doc since inputenc disables ^^A (pr2581) + +1998-05-18 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltnews09.tex more text + +1998-05-16 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * doc.dtx (subsection{Macros surrounding the `definition parts'}): + small change that defers freezing of \MacroFont until after the + preamble so that people can change its definition in the preamble. + As we have been on 1.9z this is now 2.0a but it isn't really + something exciting ... :-) + + * ltxref.dtx: added documentation about extending the + \ref mechanism as suggested in pr2801 + + * ltcounts.dtx: small documentation updates + +1998-05-13 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltspace.dtx: + + Documented lots of bugs and problems with the present code, + and even some solutions + + * latex209.dtx: + + Added experimental long typeout about abuse of + compatibility mode to possibly avoid prs like 2807 + +1998-05-13 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * lttab.dtx Use \setlength to set size of p-column and for + argument of tabular* environment, so that the benefits of the + calc package apply. + +1998-05-10 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * letter.dtx: removed space at the right of address (pr2794) + +1998-05-09 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * classes.dtx: + + Reverted openany change to \mainmatter + +1998-04-28 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * docstrip.dtx (IMPORTANT NOTICE): renamed \orginaldefault to + \originaldefault + +1998-04-18 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * fontdef.dtx: some fixes for pr2662 + +1998-04-16 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * fntguide.tex: explain new \DeclareMathDelimiter syntax (pr2662) + +1998-04-15 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * fontdef.dtx: use new \DeclareMathDelimiter syntax (pr2662) + + * ltfssdcl.dtx: allow \DeclareMathDelimiter to always use 6 args + (pr2662) + +1998-04-11 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * fontdef.dtx: added \mathring accent (pr2785) + +1998-04-03 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * distrib.txt: Update from 1994 version with a view to adding + to june release, better late than never. + + * docstrip.dtx: CHANGE to default header placed on extracted + files, to allow extracted files to be distributed as long as + sources also distributed. This does not affect any .ins files that + explicitly set a preamble with the docstrip \preamble or + \usepreamble commands. If you currently distribute a package and + want to keep the old preamble, add \usepackage\originalpreamble + to your .ins files. Note that the old text forbids inclusion of + the package on `ready to run' TeX distributions such as TeXLive + or tetex. + + + +1998-04-03 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * distrib.txt: Update from 1994 version with a view to adding + to june release, better late than never. + + * docstrip.dtx: CHANGE to default header placed on extracted + files, to allow extracted files to be distributed as long as + sources also distributed. This does not affect any .ins files that + explicitly set a preamble with the docstrip \preamble or + \usepreamble commands. If you currently distribute a package and + want to keep the old preamble, add \usepackage\originalpreamble + to your .ins files. Note that the old text forbids inclusion of + the package on `ready to run' TeX distributions such as TeXLive + or tetex. + + + +1998-03-30 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + +1998-03-30 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + +1998-03-27 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * cmfonts.fdd: added substiution for cmss/bx/sc to produce + cmr/m/sc; much better would be to have the real thing --- + anybody cares to contribute those to the ec fonts? (pr2586) + +1998-03-20 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * bugs.txt: say that reports have to be in English + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Documentation added about removing declaration + of encoding specific commands (pr/2783) + Command \UndeclareTextCommand added (pr/2783) + Added \UndeclareTextCommand declarations to textcomp.sty (pr/2783) + + * ltdefns.dtx: \@thirdofthree added for \UndeclareTextCommand + +1998-03-19 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Added documentation about the best order of + declarations for encoding specific commands. + Also moved loading ofts1enc.def after declaring the defaults + for such reasons. + +1998-03-15 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * bugs.txt: added info about not changing established (mis)behavior + +1998-03-11 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * miktex.txt: Added to distribution. + +1998-02-06 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dtx: fixed typo iso-8859-5 should have been iso-8859-9 + (pr/2748) + +1998-01-31 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltx3info.tex: + + Updated + +1998-01-23 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * install.txt: small updates such as isbn numbers + +1998-01-19 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * docstrip.dtx: adding \nopreamble and \nopostamble + and making sure that \usepreamble\empty really doesn't write + anything to the stripped file (pr/2726) + + * ltclass.dtx: make \& locally safe in \ProvidesFile /2702 + fix up pkgindoc.sty which probably hasn't worked since + {v1.0p}{1995/05/25}{Delete \cs{filec@ntents} after preamble} + +1998-01-16 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Fix \t for latex/2734. + + * ltclass.dtx: make \& locally safe in \ProvidesFile /2702 + fix up pkgindoc.sty which probably hasn't worked since + {v1.0p}{1995/05/25}{Delete \cs{filec@ntents} after preamble} + +1998-01-16 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Fix \t for latex/2734. + +1998-01-13 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * multitex.txt: New version from Markus Kohm latex/2721 + +1998-01-13 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * multitex.txt: New version from Markus Kohm latex/2721 + +1998-01-10 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * cmfonts.fdd: + + Added large sizes for ec fonts only + Removed long lines + +1998-01-06 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx: added missing braces and \upshape for \textcircled + +1998-01-01 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * emtex.txt: small clarification as suggested by Heinz + +1997-12-31 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * fntguide.tex: + + Corrections to math font declarations + Tidying + Added new encoding information + + * ltoutenc.dtx: + + Documentation correction + +1997-12-31 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * grphcomp.err: added further errate entries, updated cls file + +1997-12-30 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx: fixed header info for textcomp.sty + (missing \ProvidesPackage) + +1997-12-22 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx + + Added textcomp package + Corrections and additions to documentation + Removed all octal and hex codes + Added \textperthousand and \textpertenthousand to T1 + Added \leavevmode at start of \c in T1 + + * inputenc.dtx + + Made next encoding consistent with others + Consistently used math-or-text command when + available: THIS MAY CHANGE + Changed \mathdegree to \textdegree + \inputencoding now works only in vmode + Temporarily fixed \IeC + Merged latin1 code with ansinew/cp1252 + Changed `\k{}' to `\k\ ' + Added textcomp package + Corrections and additions to documentation + + * fontdef.dtx + + Added documentation + + * ltnews08.tex + + Added stuff + +1997-12-18 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * doc.dtx: Fix small documentation glitch. + + * ltpatch.ltx: Replace reference to ,,June'' release by ,,last'' + release. + +1997-12-17 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latexbug.tex: expl3 + + * latexbug.el (ltxbug-categories): expl3 + +1997-12-17 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * fntguide.tex: Removed obsolete \setbox construct. + +1997-12-15 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * clsguide.tex (section{Upgrading \LaTeX~2.09 classes and + packages}): Added documentation for \if@compatibility switch + (supplied by Barbara Beeton). + +1997-12-11 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * usrguide.tex (subsection{\LaTeXe---The new \LaTeX~release}): + Improved the sentence about formerly separate formats. + + * ltoutput.dtx: Documentation fixes. + + * ltlogos.dtx: Documentation fix. + +1997-12-06 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutput.dtx (subsection{Floats}): + + Removed incorrect error code in \output + + * ltnews08.tex: + + Revised text + + * ltnews.cls: + + Added definition environment + +1997-11-23 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dtx: Use \textperthousand not \textpermill. /2673 + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Use \textperthousand, \textpertenthousand and + \textfractionsolidus not \textpermill, \textpertenmill and + \textfraction. /2673 + +1997-11-20 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfssdcl.dtx: inline \stepcounter /2669/2661 + +1997-11-19 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutput.dtx: reindent \@xtryfc and friends (no code change). + + * ltfloat.dtx: missing percent in @footnotetext. /2670 + +1997-11-18 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * manifest.txt: ltnews08 + + * ltnews08.tex: first attempt. + + * source2e.tex: ltcounts and ltlength before NFSS /2669/2661 + + * format.ins: ltcounts and ltlength before NFSS /2669/2661 + +1997-11-18 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * compan.err: rewrote that file to be processable by LaTeX + + * grphcomp.err: rewrote that file to be processable by LaTeX + +1997-11-13 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfssdcl.dtx: Fix \DeclareSymbolFont so it updates \group@list + for latex/2661. + Remove duplicate (unused) definition of \stepcounter. + Add a few macro envs to the documentation. + +1997-11-03 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ifthen.dtx: Documentation fix. + +1997-10-28 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfiles.dtx: Minor documentation fixes. + +1997-10-23 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.ins: Unpack ts1enc.def. + +1997-10-21 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfssbas.dtx: Added \makeatletter to \nfss@catcodes (and removed + it from \try@load@font@shape). + + * ltdefns.dtx: Change \renew@command to use \begingroup/\endgroup + for grouping, to avoid generation of empty math atoms. + +1997-10-20 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfinal.dtx: Removed \aa and \AA from \@uclclist as these are + macros. + + * slifonts.fdd(ullasy.fd): Removed superfluous pair of braces at + end of \DeclareFontFamily command. + +1997-10-17 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfntcmd.dtx: Moved check for vertical mode from + \DeclareTextFontCommand to \check@nocorr@. + +1997-10-14 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfiles.dtx: back out \today change. + + * install.txt: --release--date--goes--here-- + + * ltpatch.ltx: --release--date--goes--here-- + + * patches.txt: --release--date--goes--here-- + + * Makefile: install.txt patches.txt ltpatch.ltx + --release--date--goes--here-- + +1997-10-11 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltclass.dtx: Check for text before or after \end{filecontents} + latex/2636 + +1997-10-10 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * classes.dtx(\l@part): Removed setting of \@tempdima as + this macro does not use \numberline to set the toc line. + +1997-10-10 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dtx: renamed \perthousand to \textpermill as this is the + TS1 name (and it wasn't available before) (pr/2622) + added code page 1250 (pr/2515) + +1997-10-09 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfiles.dtx: Move expansion of \today here from document class + files. latex/2620 + + * classes.dtx: use \def not \edef for \today. latex/2620 + +1997-10-08 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltlogos.dtx: Simplified macro \LaTeX: use only \check@mathfonts + to force loading of fonts suitable for the letter `A'. + +1997-10-06 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltcounts.dtx: Replaced \@Roman by a new version that is fully + expandable, so that the correct sequence of letters is written to + files. + +1997-09-30 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * slides.dtx (subsection{Date}): Use \edef to define to + in order to save space; following change to classes.dtx, dated + 1995/08/16. + + * letter.dtx (subsection{Date}): Use \edef to define to + in order to save space; following change to classes.dtx, dated + 1995/08/16. + +1997-09-15 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltpictur.dtx: warn if \line etc is too small to get printed. + (pr/2524) + +1997-09-09 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltdefns.dtx: Use \begingroup \endgroup instead of { ... } + to avoid generating math ords if used in math mode. (pr/2573) + +1997-09-08 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dtx: added decmulti input encoding for DEC Multinational + Character Set (pr/2599) + +1997-08-19 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dtx(latin2.def,cp852.def): Replaced \dh and \DH by \dj + and \DJ. + + * inputenc.dtx(ansinew.def): Exchanged codes for \textendash and + \textemdash. + + * inputenc.dtx: Enclosed all encoding definition files by + \makeatletter/\makeatother. + +1997-08-15 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * slides.dtx: Added initialization of \leftmargin to \@listi + (obviously forgotten and never noticed before). + +1997-08-05 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Corrected order of arguments in \UseTextSymbol + example (PR latex/2572). + +1997-07-31 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * cfgguide.tex: Put braces around argument of \sffamily, + to keep latex2html happy. + +1997-07-20 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * docstrip.dtx: support compiling docstrip without statistics + (pr/2429) + + * fntguide.tex: documentation updates (pr/2550) + +1997-07-16 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latexbug.el: Use default name and address from user-... + and make current directory setting more robust. + Both fixes from Andreas Schwab, latex/2547. + +1997-07-15 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * manifest.txt: Replaced slides.fdd by slifonts.fdd. + + * ec.ins: Replaced slides.fdd by slifonts.fdd. + + * slides.ins: Replaced slides.fdd by slifonts.fdd. + + * slides.fdd: Renamed to slifonts.fdd, there is a name clash with + slides.dtx when run through LaTeX. + + * truetex.txt: New version by Richard Kinch. + +1997-07-09 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * classes.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab + <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>. + + * doc.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab + <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>. + + * exscale.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab + <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>. + + * fontdef.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab + <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>. + + * ifthen.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab + <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>. + + * inputenc.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab + <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>. + + * latex209.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab + <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>. + + * latexsym.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab + <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>. + + * letter.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab + <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>. + + * ltboxes.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab + <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>. + + * ltclass.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab + <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>. + + * ltdirchk.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab + <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>. + + * lterror.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab + <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>. + + * ltfinal.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab + <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>. + + * ltfloat.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab + <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>. + + * ltfssbas.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab + <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>. + + * ltfssdcl.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab + <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>. + + * ltfssini.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab + <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>. + + * ltfsstrc.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab + <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>. + + * ltlists.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab + <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>. + + * ltmath.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab + <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>. + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab + <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>. + + * ltoutput.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab + <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>. + + * ltpictur.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab + <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>. + + * ltplain.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab + <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>. + + * ltsect.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab + <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>. + + * ltxdoc.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab + <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>. + + * makeindx.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab + <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>. + + * newlfont.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab + <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>. + + * oldlfont.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab + <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>. + + * slides.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab + <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>. + + * cmextra.ins: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab + <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>. + + * clsguide.tex: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab + <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>. + + * lablst.tex: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab + <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>. + +1997-06-17 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * fntguide.tex: + + Changed information about fontname + .fd filenames to lowercase + Removed long lines, and a few typos + +1997-06-17 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * emtex.txt: Updated by Heinz Kusnier. + + * web2ctex.txt: Updated by David Outteridge. + + * manifest.txt: Added truetex.txt. + + * truetex.txt: New file by Richard Kinch. + +1997-06-16 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfntcmd.dtx (section{Introduction}): Documentation fix. + + * ltdirchk.dtx: Documentation fixes. + + * exscale.dtx: Documentation fix. + + * classes.dtx: Documentation fixes. + + * ltfloat.dtx: Documentation fix. + + * alltt.dtx: Documentation fixes. + +1997-06-11 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * readme.txt: + + Added information re ltnews files + + * usrguide.tex: + + Updating information: fonts, addresses, CD-ROMs + + * clsguide.tex: + + Added information: normalsfcodes, policy on chnages + to standard styles + +1997-06-11 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltxcheck.tex: Change texts referring to dc/ec fonts. + internal/2513 + + * latexbug.tex: Fix save stack problem, internal/2514, and + other minor improvements. + +1997-06-02 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * cmfonts.fdd: add bold sc fonts for latex/2497 + +1997-05-26 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * slides.fdd: Removed spaces in and around arguments to + \DeclareFontShape. + + * cmfonts.fdd: Removed spaces in and around arguments to + \DeclareFontShape and \EC@family. + +1997-05-22 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltlogos.dtx: Added \m@th to definition of \LaTeXe so that + the logo works with non-zero values of \mathsurround. + + * ltfsstrc.dtx (section{Handling Options}): Replaced \\ by + \MessageBreak in Option `pausing' (suggested by Donald Arseneau). + +1997-05-10 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dtx: + + Corrected typo in cp852.def + +1997-05-08 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.ins: + + Split up \generate for PC + +1997-05-07 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dtx: + + Added latin3.def + Some rearrangments + Removed long lines + + * ltspace.dtx + + Made \newline robust + + * ltoutenc.dtx + +1997-04-30 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.ins: Added generation of latin5.def. + + * inputenc.dtx: Latin5 encoding added. + +1997-04-24 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltbibl.dtx: add \@empty to \@citex for latex/2432. + +1997-04-22 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * cmextra.ins: Remove concrete fd file generation. + +1997-04-18 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * usrguide.tex: bm package. + +1997-04-16 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * letter.dtx: remove hidden math from itemize labels latex/2419 + + * ltnews07.tex: first draft. + +1997-04-15 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * texpert.txt: default install uses ec. + + * install.txt: default install uses ec. + + * readme.txt: 1997/06/01 + + * unpack2e.ins: include ec.ins not newdc.ins by default. + + * ltpatch.ltx: 1997/06/01 + + * patches.txt: 1997/06/01 + + * Makefile: 1997/06/01 + +1997-04-14 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutput.dtx: normalsfcodes latex/2404 (from patch file) + + * ltfiles.dtx: \normalsfcodes latex/2404 (from patch file) + +1997-03-26 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * amiweb2c.txt: update from Andreas Scherer. + +1997-03-21 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltcounts.dtx: Use \mathsection and \mathparagraph in \fnsymbol + latex/2445 + + * inputenc.dtx: Use decimal rather than hex to avoid active + character problems. latex/2451 + +1997-02-25 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * cmfonts.fdd: typo fixed in ot1cmvtt \ProvidesFile latex/2394 + + * slides.fdd: typo fixed in cccsc10 latex/2395 + +1997-02-21 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * patches.txt: patch level 1 + + * ltpatch.ltx: /2414 fix. + + * ltlists.dtx: Support \noindent after \item. latex/2414 + +1997-02-05 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * doc.dtx (subsection{GetFileInfo}): missing % latex/2404. + + * ltpatch.ltx: had to happen. + + * ltclass.dtx: missing % in last g@addto@macro change. + +1997-01-15 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * install.txt: ec fonts. + + * ltnews06.tex: ec fonts. + + * ec.ins: add slitex fonts + + * slides.fdd: ec fonts. + lowercase fd file \input. + + * ltxcheck.tex: ec fonts. + +1997-01-14 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * manifest.txt: ec.ins. + + * Makefile: ec.ins. + + * ec.ins: new file. Alternative to newdc.ins + + * cmfonts.fdd: Add ec fonts + +1997-01-08 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * fontdef.dtx: Use \DeclareMathDelimiter and \DeclareMathSymbol + On remaining cases using primitive assignments. + + * ltfiles.dtx: reset \deadcycles in \include for latex/2365. + + * ltmath.dtx: Remove spurious space tokens from \root. + General cleanup of the docs, lots of macro envs added. + +1997-01-07 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * letter.dtx: modify \\ in \startbreaks for /2341. + +1997-01-06 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltnews06.tex: minor edits. + +1996-12-20 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltsect.dtx: \nobreak added to \@dottedtocline for latex/2343 + +1996-12-18 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * modguide.tex: Fix spelling for latex/2345 + +1996-12-17 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltclass.dtx: Use \begingroup so \g@addto@macro does not make + a \mathord. + +1996-12-13 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * docstrip.dtx: Fix for /2340 (From Marcin). + +1996-12-09 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfloat.dtx: Call \@setminpage if needed. latex/2318. + General doc improvements (add macro envs, indent code, etc). + +1996-12-06 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * fontdef.dtx: *** + + * ltfssini.dtx: *** + + * ltvers.dtx: ***. + + * ltdirchk.dtx: Remove *** from messages. internal/2338. + +1996-11-28 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latexbug.tex: documentation changes. + + * ltvers.dtx: Check for old format modified again. /2319 + +1996-11-25 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltnews06.tex: document fd file change. + +1996-11-20 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latexbug.tex: change documentation of release schedule /2319 + + * ltvers.dtx: Check for old format modified. /2319 + + * ltxcheck.tex: lowercase fd and *enc.def filenames. /1044 + + * fontdef.dtx: lowercase fd and *enc.def filenames. /1044 + + * slides.fdd: lowercase fd file names. /1044 + + * latexsym.dtx: lowercase fd file names. /1044 + + * latexsym.ins: lowercase fd file names. /1044 + + * slides.ins: lowercase fd file names. /1044 + + * cmfonts.fdd: lowercase fd file names. /1044 + + * cmextra.ins: lowercase fd file names. /1044 + + * newdc.ins: lowercase fd file names. /1044 + + * olddc.ins: lowercase fd file names. /1044 + + * cmfonts.ins: lowercase fd file names. /1044 + + * ltoutenc.ins: lowercase fd and *enc.def file names. /1044 + + * ltoutenc.dtx: lowercase fd and *enc.def file names. /1044 + + * ltfssbas.dtx: lowercase fd file names. internal/1044 + +1996-11-09 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltmath.dtx: Reinstate \ensuremath as \long /2104. + +1996-11-07 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dtx: resend patch from Sept 11 + + Added ts1enc.def (but it is not unpacked) + Changed copyright, underscore (\_) and registered + Added \leavevmode to compwordmark + Added hex index tabs (experimental) + +1996-11-05 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfiles.dtx + + Added standard nobreak check to the write used for \nofiles case + +1996-11-04 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltlists.dtx + + Added test for no \item between an inner and + outer list + + * ltplain.dtx: + + Use \hbox to in \dotfill + + +1996-11-04 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * lterror.dtx (autoload version): Move \@nodocument into kernel, + so that it can be \let to \relax in \begin{document}. + +1996-11-01 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * docstrip.dtx: Change MW address. + + * cmfonts.ins: split up \generate (again) for PC. + +1996-10-31 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfinal.dtx + + Added \lccode for \oe in OT1 + + * classes.dtx: + + Changed numbering of figures, tables and equations outside chapters + in book and report (pr/2178) + + Removed math-mode from itemize labels + + * ltspace.dtx + + Reimplemented \(no)linebreak + Reimplemented \\ and \newline + + * ltsect.dtx: + + Documentation changes + +1996-10-28 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx + + Removed defs of \aa \AA + Removed \@strip@args (no longer used) + Corrected documentation + + * inputenc.dtx + + Added cp865.def + Added \textasteriskcentered + Removed \aa \AA as internal forms + Other minor additions and corrections to .def files + + * ltplain.dtx + + Removed math from \dotfill + Added \aa and \AA + Updated and corrected documention + +1996-10-25 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltlists.dtx: + + Added explicit flag resetting to \endtrivlist + + * ltoutput.dtx + + Added documentation + +1996-10-24 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltboxes.dtx: + + Added local settings of flags in + \@arrayparboxrestore: dangerous! + Used \@setminipage in minipages + + * ltfloat.dtx: + + Prevent floats in preamble + \@setnobreak no longer used in resets (but see above) + + * ltoutput.dtx + + Changes when nobreak is true + Prevent \twocolumn in preamble + Added error code to \newpage + +1996-10-24 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * unpack2e.ins: Remove redefinion of \Ask and add \askonceonly + (which is the same thing, but looks nicer). + + * docstrip.dtx: Change MDW's address. Add \askonceonly. + +1996-10-23 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltlists.dtx + + Use \setboz\z@ to remove parindent in \@item + Set \clubpenalty correctly in \@item + Do not reset \@nobreak unconditionally + Added documentation + + * ltsect.dtx + + Use \setboz\z@ to remove parindent in \@xsect + Added documentation + +1996-10-23 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * docstrip.dtx: Delay setting the `current directory syntax' + commands so that a configuration file can reset them if + necessary. + +1996-10-22 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * autoload.ins: add \usedir + +1996-10-21 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * lttab.dtx + + Small change in tabbing to make the later change in items + (see pr/2211) work properly + + Moved some code \@array, to make this environment more robust + (pr/2183), uncovering an interesting feature of the original + code; changed to use \set@typeset@protect + + Made \multicolumn \long + +1996-10-18 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * Makefile (DSTS): add format.ins + + * manifest.txt: add format.ins + +1996-10-17 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ds/docstrip.dtx: merge in Marcin's latest. + More DPC changes: + Make missing batchfile an error + Change name of config file to docstrip.cfg. + Add \endbatchfile. + Change all the .ins files for new style. + +1996-10-11 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ds/docstrip.dtx: Add initex support, and + auto setting of \batchfile from \jobname to the new + `TDS' version from Marcin. + +1996-10-09 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * manifest.txt: Add ltxcheck.tex + +1996-10-08 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfntcmd.dtx + + Fixed bug in \text.. commands (pr/2157) + +1996-10-05 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfiles.dtx + + Added setting of \@clubpenalty + + * classes.dtx (chapter*{\bibname): + + Added setting of \@clubpenalty + +1996-10-04 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * Makefile: remove testdist.dtx, add ltxcheck.tex + + * unpack2e.ins: Remove \testdistribution. internal/2251 + + * ltxcheck.tex: New version independent of ltdirchk + Add checking for files `unpacked; during LaTeX install. + + * ltdirchk.dtx: Remove ltxcheck.tex. internal/2251 + + * Makefile: 1996/12/01. + + * ltclass.dtx: Reset \@unprocessedoptions in + \RequirePackageWithOptions for internal/2269. + +1996-09-29 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltsect.dtx + + Added documentation + + * ltfiles.dtx + + Added disabling of \@nodocument to \document + Tidied up documentation + + * ltoutput.dtx + + Checks for noskipsec and inlabel added to \newpage + + * ltmiscen.dtx: + + Moved \@xobeysp to ltspace.dtxx + + * ltspace.dtx + + Added \@xobeysp linked to \nobreakspace + +1996-09-26 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * cmfonts.ins: Added guard `nowarn' to generation of OT1cmtt.fd + file, to avoid annoying substitution messages if a bold typewriter + font is selected (as, for example, in section headings). + + * newdc.ins: Added guard `nowarn' to generation of T1cmtt.fd file, + to avoid annoying substitution messages if a bold typewriter font + is selected (as, for example, in section headings). + + * cmfonts.fdd (subsubsection{Computer Modern Typewriter}), Added + silent substitutions for T1 bold extended typewriter fonts (new + version). + +1996-09-21 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutput.dtx: + + Change to using \@parboxrestore in \@outputpage + +1996-09-16 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * classes.dtx: Quote > in changes entry (from 1994/10/29:-) + as it is special due to setting in gglo.ist. + +1996-09-11 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dtx: Fix loop for latex/2257 + +1996-09-09 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * classes.dtx, letter.dtx, slides.dtx (subsubsection{Itemize}): + replace \endash with \textendash (stupid typo) + +1996-08-25 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * letter.dtx (subsubsection{Itemize}): Replaced -- with \endash + in the definition of \labelitemii. (saves a token) + + * slides.dtx (subsubsection{Itemize}): Replaced -- with \endash + in the definition of \labelitemii. (saves a token) + + * ltpatch.ltx: Add the characters ', `, and " to \nfss@catcodes as + they might be active while LaTeX processes an .fd file. + + * ltfssbas.dtx (subsection{Macros for loading fonts}): Added the + characters ', `, and " to \nfss@catcodes as they might be active + while LaTeX processes an .fd file. + +1996-08-24 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * classes.dtx (subsubsection{Itemize}): Replaced -- with \endash + in the definition of \labelitemii. (saves a token) + +1996-08-05 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dtx: swap mathordxxx in cp850. latex/2203 + +1996-07-27 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfssbas.dtx: + definition of if@inmath switch removed (see below) + + * ltfsstrc.dtx: + removed if@inmath switch and replaced with inline code + \init@restore@glb@settings saving space macro names and + execution time + + * ltfssdcl.dtx: + removed ifrestore@version switch and replaced with inline + code \init@restore@version + +1996-07-26 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltdefns.dtx: + make third arg of \@reargdef implicit + replace {} args by \relax + use \noexpand instead of \string in error message + + * ltoutput.dtx: + set if@test always globally + add some missing percent signs in \clearpage + + * ltboxes.dtx: + set if@minipage always globally + + * ltmath.dtx: + set if@ignore always globally + + * ltmiscen.dtx: + set if@ignore always globally + add user command \ignorespacesafterend to be used in env defs + + * ltfloat.dtx: + set if@nobreak always globally + set if@minipage always globally + + * ltspace.dtx: + fix typo in doc. + set if@nobreak always globally + + * ltlists.dtx: + set if@nobreak always globally + set if@minipage always globally + + * ltsect.dtx: + set if@nobreak always globally + + * ltclass.dtx: + made \@classoptionslist and \@unusedoptionlist only preamble + to save space + + * ltfssbas.dtx: + removed unnecessary \relax (6 times) in \nfss@catcodes + use faster \if$#3$ test in \@DeclareMathsizes + + * ltalloc.dtx: + don't set a default for @tempswa -- nobody can rely on that + + * ltplain.dtx: + removed setting of \vsize and \hsize (done later) + changed \dimen\z@ to \dimen@ to save space (and time) + +1996-07-19 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * patches.txt: latex/2197 + + * ltpatch.ltx: Use char0 not @ for \lowercase trick: latex/2197 + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Use char0 not @ for \lowercase trick: latex/2197 + + * patches.txt: add ltxcheck.tex to list of changed files. + + * ltpatch.ltx: add ltxcheck.tex to list of changed files. + + * ltdirchk.dtx: Check for unauthorised cmr10 changes. + +1996-07-18 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltspace.dtx: + + Added commentary on some known problems + +1996-07-10 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * Makefile: Add vtex.txt + + * manifest.txt: Add vtex.txt + + * ltpatch.ltx: pl1 + + * patches.txt: pl1 + + * ltfinal.dtx: Free up token registers /2213 + +1996-07-09 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * pastex.txt: Update (Lars Hecking/Christian Bauernfeind) + +1996-06-25 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latexbug.tex: Fix to give correct error with plain TeX. + +1996-06-24 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltnews05.tex: (Barbara Beeton) Wrong attribution for IPA fonts + +1996-06-17 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * classes.dtx: spelling... J"org Knappen /2176 + +1996-06-14 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * lttab.dtx: Change \hskip\z@skip to \hskip1sp in for /2160 + + * syntonly.dtx: Fix \GetFileInfo usage in documentation /2174 + +1996-06-13 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * clsguide.tex: + + Updated for new release + General minor edits + +1996-06-13 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltdirchk.dtx: doc improvements, mainly from /2174 again. + + * ltdefns.dtx: doc improvements J"org Knappen /2174 + + * ltcounts.dtx: doc improvements J"org Knappen /2174 + + * ltalloc.dtx: doc improvements J"org Knappen /2174 + + * inputenc.dtx: doc improvements J"org Knappen /2174 + +1996-06-12 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltdirchk.dtx: Fix Checksum Ulrik Vieth /2171 + +1996-06-11 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutput.dtx: + + Added resetting of \everypar in the output routine + +1996-06-10 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltnews04.tex: typo: \ProcessOptions not \ProcessOption. + + * ltnews05.tex: Advertise Mainz copy of GNATS. + + * ltnews.cls: Add extra line in lw35fonts option. + Make font scaling messages `s'. + + * ltboxes.dtx: use \@@par not \endgraf. + + * ltsect.dtx: use \@@par not \endgraf. + +1996-06-07 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltnews05.tex: + + Revised text + + * ltnews.cls: + + Changed fonts for lw35 option, for logical and aesthetic + reasons + Added support for T1 encoding with lw35 option + Corrected grammar in footer + + * fntguide.tex: + + Updated for new release + +1996-06-06 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltspace.dtx: doc improvements Donald Arseneau /2166 + + * ltpage.dtx: doc improvements Donald Arseneau /2166 + + * latex209.dtx: doc improvements Donald Arseneau /2166 + + * bugs.txt: remove duplicate line J"org Knappen/2165 + +1996-06-04 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltdirchk.dtx: modify vms suggestion slightly (J"org Knappen) + +1996-06-04 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltmiscen.dtx: \verbatim@noligs@list now processed after + \dospecials (PR 2138). + +1996-06-03 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * install.txt: + + Changed reference from texpert.txt to cfgguide.tex + +1996-06-03 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltdirchk.dtx: Look for dcfonts release 1.3 in ltxcheck + +1996-05-28 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltnews05.tex: more changes. + +1996-05-26 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * classes.dtx : Make the commands \frontmatter, \mainmatter and + \part react to [openany] in the same way as \backmatter and + \chapter do. (PR 2106) + +1996-05-24 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latex209.dtx: Redid \(@)normalsize checks. internal/2153 + Reinstated old definition of \nofiles. latex/2146 + +1996-05-23 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx + + Extra documentation + + * ltoutput.dtx + + Changed test for a text page full of floats + Tidied documentation + +1996-05-23 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Preset accent arguments in a box to stop font + loading interfering with accent position. latex/2133. + +1996-05-22 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltnews05.tex: needs more work, but... + +1996-05-21 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltsect.dtx: CHANGE: Allow commands with arguments (eg + \MakeUppercase) to be used in the `style' argument of + \@startsection. The section heading text including any number + etc will be supplied as the argument of this + command. internal/2148 + +1996-05-20 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * minimal.cls: Documentation improvements. + +1996-05-19 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * cmfonts.fdd: + Added Computer Modern Variable Typewriter family. + +1996-05-18 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx: + Produce better error message when encoding is misspelled. pr/2054 + +1996-05-17 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * fontdef.dtx + + Removed \@@sqrt + + * slides.dtx + + Removed \@@sqrt + +1996-05-17 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * slides.fdd: Force \hyphenchar of OT1 fonts to 45, in case + \defaulthyphenchar has changed. + Remove some spurious extra empty arguments to \DeclareFontFamily + + * cmfonts.fdd: Force \hyphenchar of OT1 fonts to 45, in case + \defaulthyphenchar has changed. + Remove some spurious extra empty arguments to \DeclareFontFamily + + * ltfiles.dtx: Add \write\m@ne{} to \nofiles so that + \label (and other things) don't change the vertical spacing when + \nofiles is used. latex/2146 + +1996-05-09 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfntcmd.dtx + + Made more robust to errors + + * slides.dtx + + Made \include mechanism work + +1996-05-09 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dtx: Enable activation of codes below 32. latex/2071 + Add warning if nothing defined by the encoding file latex/2136 + +1996-05-09 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * unpacked.txt: + added cp852.def. pr/2081 + +1996-05-08 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * legal.txt: Modify `rename changed files' clause to explicitly + forbid `double renaming' back to the original names. + +1996-05-08 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfsstrc.dtx: + Changed \begingroup to \bgroup to match a change to the kernel + done in 1994!!! It took a long time to find that one. pr/2100 + + * inputenc.dtx: + Added encoding definitions for cp852 contributed by Petr Sojka. + pr/2081 + +1996-05-07 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltnews05.tex: make a start at this .... + +1996-04-24 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfiles.dtx: reset \AtBeginDocument inside \begin{document} + for latex/1297. Small documentation improvements. + +1996-04-23 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltmiscen.dtx: Documentation improvements. + + * ltcounts.dtx: Documentation improvements. + +1996-04-22 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * Makefile: perl -p -e s#--release--date--goes--here--#1996/06/01# + spring is in the air.... + + * ltspace.dtx: documentation improvements. + + * lttab.dtx: add extra \hskip to preserve tabcolsep in empty + l columns. latex/2122. + Small documentation improvements. + +1996-04-18 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltpage.dtx: Minor documentation improvements. + +1996-04-18 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * doc.dtx (section*{Index}%): + Definition of \printindex removed because no longer needed. + pr/2095 + +1996-04-11 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dtx: ansinew 09f is \"Y not \"y, latex/2119 + +1996-03-25 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltmath.dtx: Modify \ensuremath for amslatex/2104 + +1996-03-22 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ifthen.dtx: latex/2105 fix: dont leave mathord {} groups. + +1996-02-29 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * multitex.txt: Update from Markus Kohm, latex/2051 + +1996-02-14 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dtx: Cedilla (\c\ ) rather than (\c{}) latex/2077 + 0F0 corrected in cp850 latex/2080 + 0B2 corrected in latin2 latex/2079 + +1996-01-31 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * slides.dtx: fixed \cline which wasn't updated after internal + interface change pr/2067 + +1996-01-27 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * doc.dtx (subsection{Macros surrounding the `definition parts'}): + support doc files also in compatibility mode (so far doc did typeset + the code in cmr instead of cmtt in compat mode) + +1996-01-20 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltidxglo.dtx: + turn \makeindex and \makeglossary into noops after use to avoid + problems with combinations of \PageIndex \makeindex etc. pr/2048 + + * letter.dtx: + Made redefinition of \vspace robust. pr/2049 + Nevertheless, they syntax used in the pr is considered + incorrect! + + * ltspace.dtx: + Made \vspace robust. Enhancement suggested by pr/2049 + +1996-01-11 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * doc.dtx: + Changed default text preceding the index so that it depends on + the use of code line numbering. + + * ltxdoc.dtx: + Removed \star since useless. pr/2039 + +1996-01-10 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfiles.dtx: latex/2024 ensure setting \input@path does not + change behaviour of ##1 in \IfFileExists. + +1996-01-03 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * bugs.txt: + Added a comment about where to send errata entries for the books. + +1995-12-29 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * doc.dtx (subsection{Bells and whistles}): + Added \AlsoImplementation as a counterpart to \OnlyDescription + pr/2040. + + * texpert.txt: + clarified info about warnings happening when using makeindex. + + * doc.dtx (section*{Index}%): + Turn \PrintIndex into noop after use. pr/2038 + (section*{{Change History}}%): + Turn \PrintChanges into noop after use. pr/2038 + +1995-12-27 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latex209.dtx: + Corrected printout of index. pr/2028 + + * ltmath.dtx: + Corrected printout of documentation. pr/2030 + + * ltfntcmd.dtx: + Corrected changes entry. pr/2029 + +1995-12-20 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * cmfonts.fdd: Ulrik Vieth /2017: fix up T1cmfib.fd file. + +1995-12-13 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * copypre.txt + + New version, removing long lines + + * copyins.txt + + New version, removing long lines + + * copyhead.txt + + New version, removing long lines + + * bugs.txt + + Additions, updates and corrections + + * autoload.txt + + Additions, updates and corrections + + * texpert.txt + + Additions, updates and corrections + + * ltnews.cls + + Removed long lines + Changed capitalisation + + * cmfonts.fdd + + Removed long lines + + * slides.fdd + + Removed long lines + + * olddc.dst + + New preambles + + * newdc.dst + + New preambles + + * cmextra.dst + + New preambles + + * cmfonts.dst + + New preambles + + * latexsym.dst + + New preambles + + * autoload.dst + + New preambles + + * unpack2e.ins + + New preambles + + * slides.dst + + New preambles + + * legal.txt + + New version + + * readme.txt + + New version + + * ltclass.dtx + + Documentation added + + * fontdef.dtx + + Documentation added + + * latex209.dst + + Smaller batches for old emtex + + * modguide.tex + + Additions, updates and corrections + + * cfgguide.tex + + Additions, updates and corrections + + * clsguide.tex + + Additions, updates and corrections + + * fntguide.tex + + Additions, updates and corrections + + * ltx3info.tex + + Additions, updates and corrections + + * usrguide.tex + + Additions, updates and corrections + + * ltxguide.cls + + Corrected cfg loading + + * inputenc.dtx + + Detailed corrections + + * ltdefns.dtx + + Added documentation + +1995-12-13 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * install.txt (NOTE): add info to run olddc.ins. + +1995-12-12 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dtx: Modify \IeC and add missing % in + \DeclareInputText. + +1995-12-11 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltdirchk.dtx: (Bernd Raichle) Check for dcfonts 1.2 patch + level 1. Latest TeX is now 3.14159. + + * ltoutenc.dtx: TEMPORARY \copyright fixes. + + * amiweb2c.txt: new version from Andreas Scherer. + +1995-12-08 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latex209.dtx: Switched off \@inmathwarn. + +1995-12-07 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfloat.dtx: Move \m@th out of \ensuremath in \textsuperscript + + * ltbibl.dtx: restore \G@refundefinedtrue + + * ltxref.dtx: restore \G@refundefinedtrue + + * ltnews04.tex: new input encodings. + +1995-12-06 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * docstrip.dst: Remove writing of \@currdir by .ins file. + + * ltfssbas.dtx: reset catcode of ^ in fd files. + +1995-12-06 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * encguide.tex: Added examples of new \text* commands. + + * usrguide.tex: Added documentation for new \text* commands. + +1995-12-05 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * cstex.txt: New file (from Markus Kohm) + + * multitex.txt: New file (from Markus Kohm) + + * ltfiles.dtx: add \ignorespaces to \begin{document} latex/1933 + + * ltdefns.dtx: Remove \@unexpandable@noexpand (never used) /1733 + + * ltfloat.dtx: \textsuperscript in math mode. latex/1984 + +1995-12-05 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Changed text of \TextSymbolUnavailable. + +1995-12-04 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * lthyphen.dtx: minor doc edits for /1989 + + * preload.dtx: 12pt OMS and OML preloads added /1989. + + * fontdef.dtx: minor doc edits for /1989 + + * cmfonts.fdd: upright italic and tt small caps re-added. /1989. + + * modguide.tex: edits for /1989 + +1995-12-04 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dst: Added cp437de.def. + + * inputenc.dtx: Added \@tabacckludge commands to the Next encoding. + Replaced ~ by \nobreakspace. + Added a `test version' to the \ProvidesFile. + Made <pounds> and <uumlaut> text char in cp437. + Made <fraction> a math char in Next. + Made <cdot> and <bullet> text chars in all encodings. + Added cp437de (cp437 but with ss rather than beta). + +1995-12-01 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * cmfonts.fdd: Dont force \hyphenchar=127 on T1 fonts /1853 + Documentation changes and some font shapes modified + Ulrik Vieth /1989, + +1995-12-01 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dtx: Removed extraneous {} from the <superior> glyphs. + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Made \SS a default command rather than making the + OT1 definition the default. + +1995-11-30 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * proc.dtx, classes.dtx (section{Identification}): Added the date + of the LaTeX format to the optional argument of \NeedsTeXformat in + order to signal newer class files being used with an old format + (PR1971). + +1995-11-30 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * cfgguide.tex: dont change uc lc tables... + +1995-11-29 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * clsguide.tex: Minor edits. + + * cfgguide.tex: minor edits. + + * ltxguide.cls: modify verbatim slightly. + + * cmextra.dst: Use concurrent features for speed (/1985 again) + + * oldlfont.dtx: Remove duplicate driver code (/1985 again) + + * newlfont.dtx: Remove duplicate driver code (/1985 again) + + * ltoutput.dtx: add \ProvidesFile to flafter.sty (/1985 again) + +1995-11-29 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Added \textless, \textgreater, et al. + + * inputenc.dtx: Replaced \textsterling with \pounds. + Added default error-message definitions for \textyen et al. + Added a \NeedsTeXFormat line. + Tidied up the Next encoding. + +1995-11-28 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * source2e.tex: 2 (not 3) column index and modified script + Allow control names to hyphenate in the ChangeLog. + + * latexsym.dst: \input docstrip before using docstrip commands. + + * latexsym.dtx: Stop rogue %% comments apearing in generated + files. Another one from Ulrik Vieth's /1985. + + * ltxdoc.dtx: Increase left margin and marginpar width + + * ltclass.dtx: minor improvements. + + * ltnews04.tex: minor improvements. + + * lterror.dtx: Typo in autoload \ClassError version. /1985 + + * ltmath.dtx: doc fixes for /1979. + + * ltsect.dtx: doc fixes for /1985. + + * ltfntcmd.dtx: doc fixes for /1985. + + * ltplain.dtx: doc fixes for /1985. + + * ltlists.dtx: doc fixes for /1985. + + * ltoutenc.dtx: doc fixes for /1985. + + * ltfsstrc.dtx: doc fixes for /1985. + + * ltfloat.dtx: doc fixes for /1985. + +1995-11-28 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Added test for math mode to text commands. + Renamed \@changed@x@err to \TextSymbolUnavailable. + +1995-11-27 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfssbas.dtx: reset catcode of # in fd files internal/1982 + + * exscale.dtx: add \ProvideFile to fd file for latex/1987 + +1995-11-24 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltspace.dtx + + \nobreakspace added + +1995-11-22 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltxguide.cls: typo ltxdoc.cls for ltxguide.cls + +1995-11-20 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * texpert.txt: describe updated ltxcheck + + * manifest.txt: ltnews04 + + * Makefile (TEXS): ltnews04 + + * ltnews04.tex: New TUG Address, \LoadClassWithOptions + + * doc.dtx: Make \MakeShortVerb use an \PackageInfo rather + than \tyepout. internal/1938 + +1995-11-18 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * docstrip.dtx: Minor documentation cleanups. + + * ltoutenc.dtx: add `symbol' to the message. + +1995-11-17 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * docstrip.dtx: Merge in Marcin's new code restoring + \inFileName functionality. + Remove generation date/version number from generated files + Add \AddGenerationDate batchfile command to put them back. + Force whole file through ispell!! + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Use \@wrong@font@char in \UseTextSymbol. /1676 + + * ltfssbas.dtx: Make missing fd file \typeout a Font Info + and add \@wrong@font@char for use in \UseTextSymbol. /1676 + Clean up many \changes entries. + +1995-11-15 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * source2e.tex: Exchange order of ltdefns and ltalloc + (Matches code change of 24th May.) + Modify \changes def to match doc.sty 1.9u + +1995-11-14 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltdirchk.dtx: Dont make a ! BAD typeout if just the old (or new) + dc fonts are installed. + + * ltclass.dtx: Add \LoadClassWithOptions for latex/1556 + Add \RequirePackageWithOptions to match. + Stop \@unprocessedoptions complaining about empty options + noticed whilest debugging the above change... + + * inputenc.dtx: remove rogue \endinput. Wrap long lines. + +1995-11-13 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latexbug.tex: Check default font encoding/family etc. + +1995-11-10 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutput.dtx: + + Made code in-line to remove pseudo-hooks + +1995-11-08 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * autoload.dst: fix order of files in autoerr for new docstrip. + + * ltnews04.tex: first draft + +1995-11-07 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx (subsection{Definitions for the OT1 encoding}): + Changed \char32 to \@xxxii (two tokens less). Replaced octal + number 27 by decimal number 23 to protect against the quote + character being active. Added \leavevmode at start of \c, + otherwise the output routine might be invoked within the macro + (suggested by Donald Arseneau). Replaced some 0's by \z@ + (faster). + + * ltlists.dtx (\@doendpe): Enclosed \setbox0 assignment by a + group so that it leaves the contents of box $0$ intact. + Discovered by Donald Arseneau. + + * cmfonts.fdd: Use decimal rather than octal character + specification for \hyphenchar and \skewchar so that there is + no problem with an active quote character. + +1995-11-03 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * unpack.ins: Updated for new concurrent docstrip. + + * ltoutenc.dst: Updated for new concurrent docstrip. + + * newdc.dst: Updated for new concurrent docstrip. + + * olddc.dst: Updated for new concurrent docstrip. + + * proc.dst: Updated for new concurrent docstrip. + + * autoload.dst: Updated for new concurrent docstrip. + + * latex209.dst: Updated for new concurrent docstrip. + + * inputenc.dst: Updated for new concurrent docstrip. + + * cmfonts.dst: Updated for new concurrent docstrip. + + * classes.dst: Updated for new concurrent docstrip. + + * slides.dst: Updated for new concurrent docstrip. + + * latexsym.dst: Updated for new concurrent docstrip. + + * makeindx.dst: Updated for new concurrent docstrip. + + * docstrip.dst: Updated for new concurrent docstrip. + + * docstrip.dtx: New concurrent docstrip by Marcin Woli\'nski. + +1995-11-02 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * classes.dtx + + Made \footnote always work in frontmatter + +1995-11-02 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfssbas.dtx: Remove spurious space from NFSS font warning + latex/1676 + + * ltxdoc.dtx: Add silent font substitutions. + +1995-11-02 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latex209.dtx: Added code for fleqn.sty, leqno.sty, + openbib.sty. + + * latex209.dst: Added generation of files fleqn.sty, leqno.sty, + openbib.sty for compatibility mode. + + * inputenc.dtx: Changed internal name \a to \@tabacckludge to + protect against redefinition by malicicous users. Wrapped long + lines. + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Changed internal name \a to \@tabacckludge to + protect against redefinition by malicicous users. + +1995-11-01 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latexbug.tex: Only list `configuration' input files. + + * ltfinal.dtx: Modify \@addtofilelist during initex so only + non-standard (cfg) inputs listed. + + * ltfssini.dtx: Modify \@addtofilelist during initex so only + non-standard (cfg) inputs listed. + + * ltdirchk.dtx: Modify \@addtofilelist during initex so only + non-standard (cfg) inputs listed. + + * Makefile: Add newdc/olddc + + * unpack2e.ins: Add newdc.ins. + + * cmfonts.fdd: Modify T1 and TS1 generation. + + * cmfonts.dst: remove dc font generation. + + * olddc.dst: NEW: Generate fd files for obsolete dcfonts 1.1 + and earlier. + + * newdc.dst: NEW: Generate fd files for dcfonts 1.2 + + * fontdef.dtx: Wrap fd inputs in \nfss@catcodes. internal/1932 + + * ltfssbas.dtx: Correct undefined font family test internal/1933 + +1995-10-31 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltboxes.dtx: CHANGE: Add \nobreak to \@finalstrut to allow + hyphenation of the last word of a p-column (and footnotes). + internal/1931 + + * ltdirchk.dtx: more robust checking of dc fonts. + +1995-10-31 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * slides.fdd: Added extra substitutions for shape `ui' to make + \pounds work properly in the slides class (mostly). + +1995-10-30 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltxcheck.tex: Check that if you have the old dc fonts, then the + initex run loaded a suitable old fd file. + + * fntguide.tex: Describe genb size function. + + * clsguide.tex: Mention minimal.cls is now in the distribution. + + * minimal.cls: Bring into line with version in clsguide.tex + +1995-10-29 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * classes.dtx (subsection{The title}): empty \@date as well at the + end of \maketitle + (subsection{Paragraphing}): Added the setting of \...skipamount, + just a copy of the kernel values. (PR 1464) + +1995-10-27 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltpictur.dtx: Initialise \@wholewidth in autoload kernel. + General doc cleanup. + + * usrguide.tex: Describe minimal.cls + +1995-10-26 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * minimal.cls: A masterpiece of typographical design. + + * ltfssbas.dtx: Disable autofss2 for now. + +1995-10-25 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfloat.dtx + + Corrected bug in \end@dblfloat, made code more robust + +1995-10-25 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltmath.dtx: modify docstrip guards so + \ProvidesFile{ltmath.dtx} seen by source2e.tex. + + * ltidxglo.dtx: General doc cleanup. + + * ltsect.dtx: Initilalise mark commands using \let to save space + + * ltalloc.dtx: General doc cleanup. + +1995-10-24 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfiles.dtx + + Removed one-way switches from \endocument + + * ltxref.dtx + + Removed one-way switches from \endocument + Tidying. + + * ltfssbas.dtx + + Removed one-way switches from \endocument + + * ltbibl.dtx + + Removed one-way switches from \endocument + + * ltmiscen.dtx + + Removed one-way switches from \endocument + Tidying. + +1995-10-24 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltdefns.dtx: Make \@autoload files ignore EOL. + + * lterror.dtx: modify autoload \@preamerr. + Add % to some lines as \@autoload files now ignore line ends. + +1995-10-23 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * lttab.dtx + + Made poptabs more robust + Tidied up documentation + +1995-10-23 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * classes.dtx (subsubsection{Abstract}): Added setting of + \cs{beginparpenalty} to discourage page break before abstract + heading. + +1995-10-22 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * cmfonts.fdd: Added support for new (version 1.2) DC fonts and + text companion fonts in encoding TS1. + + * inputenc.dst: Added generation of ansinew.def file. + + * inputenc.dtx: Added ansinew encoding (Windows 3.1 ANSI), as + contributed by Berthold K.P. Horn (bkph@ai.mit.edu). + +1995-10-20 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latexbug.tex: Clarify output format a bit. + + * ltclass.dtx: modify autoload support + + * ltfsstrc.dtx: Keep autofss2 code in kernel until + \begin{document}. + + * ltfssbas.dtx: Keep autofss2 code in kernel until + \begin{document}. + use \@undefined not \undefined + + * ltfinal.dtx: \@filelist zapped too early. + +1995-10-19 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dtx: Replaced \' \` \= by \a' \a` \a in order to get + correct accents in a tabbing environment. + +1995-10-18 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltspace.dtx (subsection{Horizontal space}): Moved \changes + from \@ to \hspace where it belongs. + +1995-10-17 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfinal.dtx: Reset \ProvidesFile, Preserve initex file list in + \reserved@a + + * ltclass.dtx: Remove \ProvidesFile redefinition to ltfinal. + Reset \CurrentOption in \ProcessOptions for graphics/1873 + + * ltdirchk.dtx: Modify \ProvidesFile during initex to save + debugging info and not waste \ver@... csnames. + + * latexbug.tex: Show initex file list. + + * latexbug.el: use \@@input not \input + + * latex209.dtx: \supereject, \mscount, old style \@imakepicbox + + * ltplain.dtx: Move \supereject to latex209 + + * lttab.dtx: move \mscount to latex209 use \@multicnt instead. + +1995-10-16 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltbibl.dtx: make \cite robust /1808 + + * ltmath.dtx: Make \sqrt robust /1808 + Use \@testopt in eqnarray's \\ /1911. + + * ltspace.dtx: Use \@testopt in \[no]{line|page}preak (/1911) + + * ltdefns.dtx: new \@ifstar CHANGE: require ##1 in both arguments + not ####1 in one and ##1 in the other. (internal/1910) + Use \@testopt in \newcommand and \newenvironment (/1911) + + * ltboxes.dtx: Clarify \makebox(,)[b] description. + + * ltthm.dtx: Allow \newtheorem after \begin{document} again. + (LaTeX Book, page 57) + +1995-10-16 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfssini.dtx: Added \relax at the end of the definition of + \normalfont to prevent it and \textnormal from eating up leading + spaces. + +1995-10-11 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutput.dtx + + New check in \clearpage. + +1995-10-10 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfssdcl.dtx: autoload error message + + * ltthm.dtx: Make \newtheorem and its internals `only preamble' + to save memory. + + * ltplain.dtx: autoload tracing code + + * ltfssbas.dtx: Make \showhyphens colour safe and autoloadable. + +1995-10-10 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * slides.dtx (subsection{The title}): In \maketitle, move \par + inside the scope of \Large, to get even line spacing. + +1995-10-09 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltdefns.dtx: use \@@input to load autoload files. + + * lterror.dtx: more autoload mods. + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Autoload \@changed@x@err (autoerr.sty) + +1995-10-06 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * autoload.dst: update autoerr generation. + + * ltfiles.dtx: autoload missing file error command + + * ltplain.dtx: autoload \new... error message. + + * ltdefns.dtx Use \aut@global in \DeclareRobustCommand + +1995-10-04 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfsstrc.dtx: Use new \@autoload feature. + + * ltfssbas.dtx: Use new \@autoload feature. + + * ltoutput.dtx: Use new \@autoload feature. + + * lttab.dtx: Use new \@autoload feature. + +1995-10-03 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltpatch.ltx: 1995/12/01 Christmas is nearly here... + + * Makefile: 1995/12/01 Christmas is nearly here... + + * ltdefns.dtx: Fix \@xtypein (from patch file) + + * fontdef.dtx: Define \@@sqrt (from patch file) + + * lterror.dtx: Use new \@autoload feature. + + * ltpictur.dtx: Use new \@autoload feature. + + * autoload.dst: autoload module in ltdefns.dtx. + +1995-10-02 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltplain.dtx: Move \newif to ltdefns.dtx. + Use \sbox in \underbar (saves tokens, and works with colour) + + * ltdefns.dtx: \futurelet with \@let@token for internal/924 + New implementation of \@xargdef in terms of the new + \@protected@testopt. Saves tokens and makes user defined + commands with optional arguments robust. internal/1733 + Move \newif here from ltplain. + Autoload support. Add \aut@global and \@autoload. internal/1617. + +1995-09-27 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltdirchk.dtx: Check \filename parser in ltxcheck.tex + for latex/1624 latex/1754 and graphics/1336 + Check for dc fonts in ltxcheck.tex + +1995-09-27 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * slides.dtx, slides.fdd: Globally replaced scale factor 19.91 + by 19.907 in \DeclareFontShape, as this gives better rounded + font sizes at 600dpi (suggested by Denis Roegel). + + * docstrip.dtx: Changed address of Johannes Braams. + +1995-09-25 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latex209.dtx: Declare 2 count registers previously used + in \cline. /1723 + +1995-09-25 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * web2ctex.txt: Added some comments about using non-csh, index + style files and some other missing files. + +1995-09-21 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltxguide.cls: \RequirePackage{shortvrb} for latex/1875 + + * latexbug.el (report-latex-bug): Rainer's fix for latex/1675 + +1995-09-21 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dst: Added generation of next.def file. + + * inputenc.dtx: Added next encoding, as contributed by + Stefan Ried <stef@theo-phys.uni-essen.de> and Holger Uhr + <huhr@uni-paderborn.de>. + +1995-09-20 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * slides.dtx: Fix \hline for latex/1871. + +1995-09-20 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * cmextra.dst: Added generation of OMLccm.fd file, which had + previsouly been removed from cmfonts.dst. + + * slides.dtx: Replace \@tempa by \reserved@a. Wrap some long + lines and use \null instead of \hbox{} (by DPC). + +1995-09-19 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * slides.fdd: Corrected names of .fd file names in argument to + \ProvidesFile commands. + + * ltmiscen.dtx: Moved call to \@noligs macro after call to + \verbatim@font in \verb command, just as it is already in the + verbatim environment. + +1995-09-15 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfssini.dtx: Modify TeX2 message. + +1995-09-14 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * lttab.dtx: New \cline implementation. No longer declare + counters \@cla \@clb. More macro envs in documentation. + + * ltplain.dtx: Move \multispan to lttab.dtx. Loads more macro + environments in the documentation. + +1995-09-01 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * tex2.txt: typos... + + * ltplain.dtx: Minor space savings. Add a few more macro envs. + + * autoload.dst: add the l-terror. + + * lterror.dtx: Add autoload support. + +1995-08-31 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dtx: Added 0 to the beginning of every number. + Changed the definition of "AD in latin1 and latin2 to be \-. + Swapped ordfeminine and ordmasculine around in latin1. + +1995-08-27 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * classes.dtx: + Reimplemented openbib option to save space (hash and mem). + Disable \title \author \date \and after \maketitle. + Default for \newblock outside thebibliography env changed. + +1995-08-25 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutput.dtx: + Added autoload code for autoout1.sty (\enlargethispage). + + * ltfsscmp.dtx: + Added \@preambleonly lines from ltfssdcl.dtx. + Moved compat code from ltfssbas.dtx to this file. + + * autoload.dst: + Added new autoload files. + +1995-08-24 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfssdcl.dtx: + Moved most of the \@onlypreamble declarations to the right places. + Added forgotten \DeclareSymbolFontAlphabet@ to \@preambleonly + (400 useless tokens)! + + * ltfssbas.dtx: + Added to the documentation. + +1995-08-23 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfssbas.dtx: + Added autoload code for autofss1.sty. + Added autoload code for autofss2.sty. + + + * ltfsstrc.dtx: + Macro \gobble@font@spec eliminated. + Added autoload code for autofss1.sty. + Added autoload code for autofss2.sty. + +1995-08-20 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * encguide.tex: + First draft. + +1995-08-16 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * tex2.txt: + + Clearer wordings + + * ltcntrl.dtx: + + Made most loop macros \long + Removed unnecessary \...noop macros + Tidied up documentation + +1995-08-16 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfiles.dtx: + set \@maxdepth at begin document not in class file + add a couple of \global's + + * usrguide.tex: + typo corrections pr/1809 + + * ltmath.dtx: + fixed mistake added with last update + + * classes.dtx: + throw in a couple of forgotten percents + reprogram a couple of macros to save space or macro names + update the documentation + +1995-08-11 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltlength.dtx: Fix doc typos for latex/753 + +1995-08-11 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltxdoc.dtx: + updated \marg etc to use \meta, suggested by pr/1370 + added missing braces in definition of \star + +1995-08-09 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * cmfonts.fdd: + Fixed setup for OMScmr.fd as pointed out by Christian Spieler. pr/1804 + + * ltmath.dtx: + Added code for leqno.clo and fleqn.clo + + * classes.dtx: + Moved code for leqno and fleqn to kernel files. + +1995-08-08 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * classes.dtx: + Implemented titlepage differently to support twoside,openight + options correctly. pr/1783. + + * docstrip.dst: + Removed part that might add non-standard setting of \@currdir + into docstrip.tex so that unpacked distribution stays portable. pr/1765 + +1995-08-06 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * doc.dtx (subsection{Macros for the `documentation parts'}): + Fixed problem that \begin{macro}{\foo} doesn't suppress + index entries for \foo within its body. pr/343 + (subsection[Dealing with the change history]): + \changes entries on top-level now preceed themselves with + the expansion of \generalname rather than producing the + fixed string "General". + + * docstrip.dtx: + Clarified default "copying conditions" as suggested by + Richard Stallman + +1995-07-23 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * clsguide.tex: + + Added notices concerning use of `Standard LaTeX' + + * cfgguide.tex: + + Started major expansion and rewrite + + * modguide.tex: + + Rewrite adding section on modfying LaTeX + + * legal.txt: + + Further expansion and changes + + * ltxguide.cls: + + Changed configuration file messages + +1995-07-20 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * classes.dtx: reduce save stack usage for latex/1742 + + * ltfssbas.dtx: reduce save stack usage for latex/1742 + + * ltpage.dtx: Save a few tokens in \sloppy and \fussy + + * ltboxes.dtx: Use \sbox in \@save(pic)box + + * ltlogos.dtx: Save a few tokens in logo defs. + +1995-07-19 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * manifest.txt: tex2.txt + + * tex2.txt: TeX2 installation instructions first draft. + + * ltfssini.dtx: Test for TeX2 before reading fonttext.??? + +1995-07-18 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * patches.txt: PL3 Add proc and latex209 fixes missed yesterday. + + * ltpatch.ltx: PL3 Add proc and latex209 fixes missed yesterday. + + * proc.dtx: fix \thanks for /1735 + +1995-07-17 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * patches.txt: patch level 2. + + * ltpatch.ltx: Patch level 2 (accents)c ../mir + +1995-07-16 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutput.dtx: + + New version of \@outputpage + +1995-07-14 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltbibl.dtx: Remove \@onlypreamble from \bibcite + + * ltxref.dtx: Remove \@onlypreamble from \newlabel + +1995-07-13 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltidxglo.dtx: + Added \@preambleonly statements + + * ltfssbas.dtx: + Updates to documentation + Use macro rather than switch to flag default font + substitutions pr/1236 + + * ltfiles.dtx: + Updates to documentation + + * ltdefns.dtx: + Updates to documentation + + * ltmiscen.dtx: + Removed surplus \@onlypreamble stuff + Updated documentation + Streamlined code in \enddocument + Streamlined code for \@xobeysp + +1995-07-12 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * autopict.sty: Allow 2e commands in the autoload file /1737 + +1995-07-12 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * syntonly.dtx: + Fix incorrect checksum. + +1995-07-10 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltthm.dtx: + Updates to documentation (partly pr/1734) + + * lttab.dtx: + Updates to documentation (partly pr/1734) + + * ltplain.dtx: + Updates to documentation (partly pr/1734) + + * ltoutput.dtx: + Updates to documentation pr/1734 + + * ltlists.dtx: + Updates to documentation (partly pr/1734) + + * ltfloat.dtx: + Updates to documentation pr/1734 + + * lterror.dtx: + Updates to documentation pr/1734 + + * ltbibl.dtx: + Updates to documentation (partly pr/1734) + +1995-07-09 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltcntrl.dtx: + Reimplemented loop structures using Kabelschacht method. + + * ltlists.dtx: + Some updates to the docu. + Shortend defs of enumerate and itemize by using \expandafter. + + * ltdefns.dtx: + Removed a couple of surplus tokens, updated docu. + (subsection{Command definitions}): + Make \CheckCommand preambly only to save valuable space. + +1995-07-07 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * patches.txt: document /1722 fix. + + * latex209.dtx: Fudge \@textsuperscript for /1722. + +1995-07-06 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * letter.dtx: documentation updates as suggested by Christian Spieler + pr/1721 + +1995-07-05 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltspace.dtx (section{Spacing}): + Reimplementation of \[no]pagebreak to save space. + Cleanup parts of the docu. + + * ltfntcmd.dtx: + Use proper interface to jump out of \@tfor loop. + Some docu update. + Renamed \test@next to \t@st@ic. + +1995-07-04 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latexsym.dtx: + Free space taking up by \not@base error message since + that one isn't any longer necessary. + Some documentation update. + +1995-07-03 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltplain.dtx: + Small space changes in various places. + +1995-07-02 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfinal.dtx: Moved debugging code to ltplain. + + * ltfssini.dtx: + Fixing a mistake in shortening lines. + +1995-06-30 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * patches.txt: document patches. + + * ltpatch.ltx: Oh well. I suppose it had to happen. + + * latex209.dtx: \@fnsymbol added (without \ensuremath) for /1684 + +1995-06-28 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltmath.dtx: fix \changes entries for /1677 + + * ltfssini.dtx: fix \changes entries for /1677 + +1995-06-26 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * classes.dtx: + Fixed the definition for footnotemarks in \maketitle for article + which got corrupted in the june release. pr/1683 + +1995-06-19 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltbibl.dtx: Modify \bibcite so a repeated key produces + LaTeX Warning: Label `aaa' multiply defined. + ... + LaTeX Warning: There were multiply-defined labels. + instead of + LaTeX Warning: Label(s) may have changed. + Rerun to get cross-references right. + + * ltxref.dtx: Modify \newlabel so \bibcite can share code. + + * ltclass.dtx: Stop \documentstyle re-enabling \usepackage + After it has been disabled by latex209.def (latex/1634) + +1995-06-18 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * Makefile: + + Changed to use copypre.txt and copyhead.txt + + * cfgguide.tex: + + Configuration stuff transferred from texpert.txt + + * autoload.txt: + + Tidying, removed long lines + + * cm*.dst, docstrip.dst,latex*.dst,exscale.dst + + New preambles + + * inputenc.dst,ltoutenc.dst,slides.dst: + + New preambles + + * unpack2e.ins: + + New preambles + + * copyright.txt: + + No longer used + + * copyins.txt: + + New text + + * copypre.txt: + + New file + + * copyhead.txt: + + New file + + * copydisf.txt: + + New file + + * copydisg.tex: + + New file + +1995-06-15 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfssdcl.dtx: Minor documentation edits. + + * ltfsscmp.dtx: Minor documentation edits. + + * ltfssbas.dtx: Minor documentation edits. + + * ltfsstrc.dtx: Take \ProvidesFile out of \iffalse clause + so it shows up in \listfiles in source2e.tex. + Wrap some long lines to 72. + +1995-06-15 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltnews03.tex: Added pointer to autoload.txt. + +1995-06-14 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * source2e.tex: modify printing of patch level on page 1. + + * manifest.txt: autoload files. + + * autoload.txt: initial version + + * Makefile: add autoload files + + * autoload.dst: initial version of .ins file for autoload. + + * lttab.dtx: Add \ProvidesFile to autoload file. + +1995-06-14 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dst: Fixed typo cp850 -> cp437 + +1995-06-14 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dst: Fixed typo cp850 -> cp437 + +1995-06-13 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltpictur.dtx: Add \ProvidesFile to autoload file. + + * ltfinal.dtx: Moddify method of adding patchlevel banner + Force format to be in errorstopmode, even if an installer + scrolled past an error during initex run. + +1995-06-12 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltvers.dtx: Add Auotoload banner + Check for old source files (older than a year). + +1995-06-11 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * legal.txt: + + Major changes + + * usrguide.tex: + + Added ltx3info.tex info + + * fntguide.tex: + + Added note re using non-cmr fonts in T1 + + * clsguide.tex: + + Hash marks in option declarations OK + Added Case cHANGING commands + + * cfgguide.tex: + + Configuration stuff transferred from texpert.txt + + * lablst.tex: + + Improved version: lists all bibitems separately + Changed internal commands + + * Makefile: + + Added modguide.tex + + * manifest.txt: + + Added ltnews03.tex and modguide.tex + + * install.txt: + + File name corrected + Added ltx3info.tex info + + * emtex.txt: + + Added info re batch file + + * texpert.txt: + + Configuration details transferred to cfgguide.tex + + * readme.txt: + + Added pointers to various other info files + + * ltspace.dtx: + + Added \relax to \obeycr + +1995-06-09 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Made composites declared with DeclareTextComposite + use no-argument macros rather than one-argument macros. + + * ltnews03.tex: Changed modify.tex to modguide.tex, updated + figures for space savings. + +1995-06-08 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltnews03.tex: New issue of LaTeX News. + +1995-06-06 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfinal.dtx: Made \MakeUppercase and \MakeLowercase grab their + argument and brace it. + +1995-06-05 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltpatch.ltx: Removed patch for latex/1240 (now in ltoutenc.dtx). + Removed patch for tools/1296 (now in ltoutenc.dtx). + Removed patch for latex/1322 (now in ltoutenc.dtx). + We now have an empty patch file again! + + * fontdef.dtx: Moved math commands from ltoutenc.dtx. + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Redid protection in DeclareTextCommand so that it + uses \noexpand rather than \protect. This should stop the + problems with \'\i putting the acute on a \protect rather than + on the \i. Commented out the defaults for textless and + textgreater. Allow \ProvideTextCommandDefault after + \begin{document} so it can be used in inputenc.def files. + Save some tokens in \textvisiblespace and \textunderscore. + Moved math commands to fontdef.dtx. + + * classes.dtx: Replaced \uppercase with \MakeUppercase + + * ltfinal.dtx: Added \MakeUppercase and \MakeLowercase. + +1995-05-30 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dtx: Made hex numbers safe against active ". Added + docstrip commands to applemac.def. + +1995-05-27 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltclass.dtx: + Made \filec@ntents preamble only to save space. + + * ltfssbas.dtx: + Added definition of \new@mathgroup again which got lost. + (should be moved to other file one day). + +1995-05-26 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltplain.dtx (section{Plain \TeX}): + + Made \loop long + Made \underbar use \box \tw@ + + * ltdefns.dtx (subsection{Command definitions}): + + Made \@gobble commands \long + +1995-05-26 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * proc.dtx (subsection{The page style}): Removed \rmfamily from + definition of \@oddfoot (PR 1578) + + * ltmath.dtx : Removed \rmfamily from definition of \@eqnnum + (PR 1578) + + * ltpage.dtx : Removed \rmfamily from definition of \ps@plain + (PR 1578) + +1995-05-26 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * Makefile: Remove generation of ltnfss.dtx + + * unpack2e.ins Add new NFSS files + + * manifest.txt: Add new NFSS files. + + * source2e.tex: Include new NFSS files + + * ltfssdcl.dtx: Initial version (latint.dtx) + + * ltfssini.dtx: Initial version (lfonts.dtx) + + * ltfsscmp.dtx: Initial version (fam.dtx) + + * ltfsstrc.dtx: Initial version (tracefnt.dtx) + + * ltfssbas.dtx: Initial version (fam.dtx) + +1995-05-26 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * doc.dtx (subsection{Macros surrounding the `definition parts'}): + Removed \math@fontsfalse in \MacroFont and \AltMacroFont because + this isn't any longer correct with the new math font setup in NFSS2. + pr/1622 (and some earlier one) + Use \GetFileInfo. + +1995-05-25 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latex209.dtx: + + Changed float reset hooks to empty + + * ltfloat.dtx: + + Moved new resettings into hooks so that they can be removed in + latex209.dtx + + * ltspace.dtx/ltlists.dtx + + Moved \endtrivlist and friends to ltlists.dtx + + * ltfiles.dtx (section{File Handling}): + + Added check for zero \topskip to \begin{document} + Added some \longs + + * ltspace.dtx + + Made \vspace and \vspace* more efficient and more robust + + Commented out unused code + +1995-05-25 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * letter.dtx (subsubsection{Defining the page styles}): replace + \rmfamily with \normalfont (PR 1578) + + * classes.dtx : Replace \reset@font by \normalfont + (subsubsection{Defining the page styles}): Replace + \hskip 1em\relax with \quad + Removed \rmfamily from definition of \@eqnnum (PR 1578, leqno) + +1995-05-25 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltlists.dtx: Documented form from Tobi. + +1995-05-24 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * unpack2e.ins: Exchange order of ltdefns and ltalloc + as latter now needs \@gobbletwo from former. + + * usrguide.tex (subsection{Setting text susperscripts}): + \textsuperscript now access the current font (except for size + attribute) + + * ltfloat.dtx: redefine \textsuperscript in terms of + \@textsuperscript + + * ltdefns.dtx: new \typein implementation + + * ltplain.dtx: New \newif implementation. + +1995-05-23 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dst: Added applemac.def. + + * inputenc.dtx: Added applemac.def. + Added test for whether definition of a text character ends in a + macro. + Corrected \mathordfeminine and \mathordmasculine. + + * inputenc.dst: Added applemac.def. + +1995-05-22 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * lttab.dtx: Add code and docstrip modules to support + autoloading of tabbing. + +1995-05-22 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltplain.dtx/ltfloat.dtx: Moved definitions of \footins and + \footnoterule from ltplain to ltfloat. + +1995-05-21 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latint.dtx: + Fix \DeclareMathRadical so that it does work (never did :-) + +1995-05-20 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltplain.dtx: + Updated \mathhexbox to use \mbox. + + * ltmath.dtx: + Removed \mathhexbox from this file because it is essentially an + obsolete text command (despite the name). It is still in ltlain.dtx + Streamlined bits of code. + + * latint.dtx: + coded \set@mathradical inline to save space. + Also fixed bug in \DeclareMathRadical. + + * fontdef.dtx: defined \sqrtsign to be the square root symbol not + \sqrt since this is later overwritten by the kernel anyway. + + * fam.dtx: removed definition of \on@line since already in lterror.dtx + + * ltcounts.dtx: + Allow \fnsymbol in text and math now (neccessary for pr/1503). + Streamlined code for \@definecounter and \@arabic and friends. + + * latex209.dtx (subsection{Layout}): + Added old definition for \@makefnmark and \thempfootnote to + use math mode. pr/1503 + + * ltfloat.dtx: + Moved \normalfont to \textsuperscript. + +1995-05-19 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltpictur.dtx: Add code and docstrip modules to support + autoloading feature. + +1995-05-19 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltboxes.dtx: + Moved some code from ltplain to this file. + + * ltspace.dtx: + Moved some code from ltplain to this file. + + * latint.dtx: + Added some commands from NFSS1 compat code to \@preambleonly + to save space. + + * fam.dtx: + Moved all compatibility code for NFSS1 interfaces to one place + to allow making them auto-loadable one day. + + * usrguide.tex (subsection{Setting text susperscripts}): + Added a description of \textsuperscript. pr/1503 + +1995-05-18 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * letter.dtx: replaced all \hbox to with \hb@xt@; replaced all + constructs such as \arabic{enumi} with \@arabic\c@enumi + Cleaned up the \changes entries + removed some unnecessary braces + +1995-05-18 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfloat.dtx: + Added \normalfont to the footnote mark (since it is now a text font). + For similar reason \thempfootnote needs \itshape to look like before. + +1995-05-17 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * slides.dtx: replaced all \hbox to with \hb@xt@; replaced all + constructs such as \arabic{enumi} with \@arabic\c@enumi + Cleaned up the \changes entries + + * classes.dtx: replaced all \hbox to with \hb@xt@; replaced all + constructs such as \arabic{enumi} with \@arabic\c@enumi + (subsection{Footnotes}): Use \@width instead of width + (subsection{The title}): Use \cs{\@makefnmark} in definition of + \cs{@makefntext} + Cleaned up the \changes entries + +1995-05-17 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltclass.dtx: make \g@addto@macro \long for latex/1522 + + * ltboxes.dtx: Removed surplus { } in \@irsbox + + * ltlists.dtx: Start of documented version from Tobi. + Removed surplus { } and used `\thr@@' not `3 ' to save tokens. + +1995-05-17 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfloat.dtx (subsection{Footnotes}): + Added command \textsuperscript to provide footnotes with digits + in the text font. pr/1503 + Streamlined bits of the code. + + * readme.txt: updated. + +1995-05-16 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * classes.dtx: removed lots of unnecessary braces + +1995-05-16 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * unpack2e.ins: added tracefnt.sty generattion. + + * ltsect.dtx: + Remove some surplus braces in \@startsection. + + * fam.dtx: + Streamline some of the compat code. + + * ltdefns.dtx: + Streamline code of \@typein slightly. + + * fam.dtx: + Documentation update. + + * tracefnt.dtx: + Further documentation. + +1995-05-15 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * usrguide.tex: Slightly re-word the `warning' in the\listfiles + description, for latex/1474. + +1995-05-14 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * tracefnt.dtx: + Updated the documentation. + +1995-05-13 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * alltt.dtx (section{The Implementation}): TeX goes into an + infinite loop when the alltt environment contains a construct such + as \( x' \); this can be prevented by restoring the original + definition of ' *inside* math mode. + Brought the definition of the alltt environment up-to-date with + the current definition of the verbatim environment. + +1995-05-13 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * tracefnt.dtx: + Updated \DeclareOption declarations to reflect ##1 -> #1 change. pr/1557 + +1995-05-12 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltclass.dtx: Use a token register in \DeclareOption(*) + So that # need not be written as ## + INCOMPATIBLE CHANGE: see latex/1557 + + * ltpictur.dtx: Modify \picture so a missing ( in the first + argument generates an error. latex/1355 + Add a few more macro environments. + + * latex209.dtx: Restore old definition of \@footnotemark + + * ltfloat.dtx: Add \nobreak to allow hyphenation before a + footnotemark. + Add loads of macro environments to the docs. + +1995-05-11 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltplain.dtx: + Moved a number of commands to different files following suggestions by + Ulrik Vieth. pr/1180 + + * ltmath.dtx: + Updates to \displ@y \displaylines \bmod to reflect changes in plain.tex. + + * fontdef.dtx: + Upates to \skew \rightarrowfill \leftarrowfill \@vereq to reflect changes + in plain.tex. + +1995-05-09 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * classes.dtx (\subsection{Bibliography}): Added a missing %-sign + +1995-05-08 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltbibl.dtx: Use \@firstofone instead of \@iden. + * tracefnt.dtx: Use \@firstofone instead of \@iden. + * ltdefns.dtx: Use \@firstofone instead of \@iden. + +1995-05-07 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx: + Updated definitions of \d and \b because of changes in plain.tex + + * ltplain.dtx: Use \hb@xt@. + * ltsect.dtx: Use \hb@xt@. + * ltpictur.dtx: Use \hb@xt@. + * ltoutput.dtx: Use \hb@xt@. + * ltoutenc.dtx: Use \hb@xt@. + * ltboxes.dtx: Use \hb@xt@. + + * ltdefns.dtx: + Added \hb@xt@ as abbreviation for "\hbox to". + + * manifest.txt: + Added ltx3info.tex. Rearranged some bits. + + * ltx3info.tex: + Added this file. Information about the latex3 project. + + * cmfonts.dst: + Removed generation of OMLccm.fd file. + + * unpacked.txt: + Removed surplus OMLccm.fd file. All concrete font files are now in + mfnfss. + +1995-05-06 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltsect.dtx (paragraph{...}): + Use \quad instead of \hskip 1em in \@seccntformat. pr/1596 + Add \relax to prevent `plus/minus' problem with improper redefinition + of \@seccntformat. pr/1596 + +1995-05-04 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + +* ltsect.dtx: Documented version from Tobias Oetiker. + +1995-05-03 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * idx.tex: Added missing curly brace in \setlength command. + +1995-05-02 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltsect.dtx: + Surround the . in \@dottedcontextline by \hbox to typeset it in the text + font. pr/1503 + Don't reset to \rmfamily just to \normalfont in case the document font is + not the roman one. pr/1578 + +1995-05-01 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltpar.dtx: Documentation reworked by Tobias Oetiker. + (Thanks to Tobi for volunteering.) + +1995-04-29 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltdefns.dtx (subsection{Robust commands and protect}): + Moved the initialisation of \protect to this file. + + * ltcntrl.dtx: + Removed unused defs for \@setprotect and \@resetprotect. + Moved initialisation of \protect to ltdefns.dtx. + + * ltpar.dtx (subsection{Implementation}): + Made \@par default to \@@par. (shorter) + Tobi kindly updated the documentation for this file. + +1995-04-27 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltboxes.dtx: Move some \leavevmodes earlier, for graphics/1512 + + * latex209.dtx: Add \hang and \textindent + + * ltplain.dtx: Move \hang and \textindent to latex209.dtx + Remove some commands which are (re)defined later. + +1995-04-27 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx: + Add a number of \@onlypreamble commands to save space. pr/1240 + + * ltfiles.dtx (section{File Handling}): + Support for pr/1121. see below. + + * ltmiscen.dtx (subsection{Environments}): + Limited support for \AtBeginDocument{\begin{foo}} + \AtEndDocument{\end{foo}}. + Be careful to get the order right if you do it more than once. pr/1121 + + * unpacked.txt: + Added names of new encodings. + +1995-04-25 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfiles.dtx: remove \the\every@math@size from \document + for latex/1407 + 1420 (from patch file) + + * ltdefns.dtx: From patch file: make \@check@c \long + (latex/1346) \newenvironment argument handling /1507. + + * ifthen.dtx: Fix `driver' docstrip guard. Reported by + Martin Schr"oder. + +1995-04-24 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltpage.dtx: Reset \emergencystretch in \fussy latex /1344 + (fom patch file). Clean up documentation slightly. + + * ltcntrl.dtx: fix for /1317 (internal) \@for expanding its + argument incorectly + + * ltxref.dtx:\newlabel \@onlypreamble for /1388 from patch file. + + * ltbibl.dtx: Add \mbox to \cite for latex/1239 from patch file. + Make \@onlypreamble\bibcite /1388 (from patch file) + Add some macro envs to documentation. + + * ltoutput.dtx: Modify docstrip guards to keep trace code out of + the kernel, unless `trace' specified. + 2 more fixes from patch file + latex/1451: newline command \\ in eqnarray and output routine + %%% latex/1392: AtBeginDvi broken + + * latex209.dtx: Add \proclaim and \ttraggedright + + * ltplain.dtx: Make \new... non outer: /1405 (from patch file) + Move \proclaim and \ttragedright to latex209.dtx + +1995-04-23 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltsect.dtx (section or \caption command.): + Implement \addcontentsline with \addtocontents to save space. + + * manifest.txt: + Added begleit.err (errata for the German translation of the + LaTeX Companion). + + * inputenc.dtx (section{The ISO Latin-1 encoding}): + \textonequarter and friends incorrectly declared as math chars. + (section{Default definitions for characters}): + Default values moved to own section. + (section{The ISO Latin-2 encoding}): + latin2 added. pr/1447. + (section{The IBM code page 850}): + cp850 added. pr/1330. + +1995-04-22 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltmiscen.dtx: + Removed surplus definition of \@gobble. pr/1361 + + * ltfiles.dtx: + Allow blanks within \includeonly argument. pr/1514 + + * cmfonts.fdd: + Fixed typo in OMLcmr. pr/1485 + + * syntonly.dtx: + Removed surplus \typeout lines containing the now undefined commands + \filedate etc. pr/1471 + +1995-04-21 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx: add \null to \k for latex/1274 (from patch file) + + * Makefile (cleanupsrc): set date to June 1995 + + * ltclass.dtx: Fix filecontents and \DeclareOption + pr's 1487 and 1498 . (moved from patch file.) + + * ltfinal.dtx: Modify to allow ltpatch.ltx (patch level 0) + For a full release. To solve problems of initial install picking + up old patch files. + +1995-04-19 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * makeindx.dtx: + Changed \see to use \emph as suggested by Mats Dahlgren. + +1995-04-14 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * classes.dtx (subsubsection{Margins}): Also take the + \marginparsep into account when calculating the width of the + margin paragraph. + +1995-04-07 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltlists.dtx: Missing %%% identification. + +1995-04-03 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * classes.dtx (Defining the page styles): Removed extra dot after + \thesection in article/twoside/headings case. (PR #1519) + +1995-04-02 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * slides.dtx: A slight documentation fix (PR #1517) + + * alltt.dtx: A few documentation fixes (PR #1517) + +1995-04-02 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfntcmd.dtx (section{The implementation}): + Fixed problem with $...\it\mbox...$ in compat mode. pr/1275 + + * latint.dtx: + Fixed problem with $...\it\mbox...$ in compat mode. pr/1275 + + * newlfont.dtx: Corrected bad error message if math alphabet is + misused. pr/1440 + + * lfonts.dtx: + Corrected bad error message if math alphabet is misused. pr/1440 + + * latint.dtx: + Fixed problem with "\abovewithdelims(\rfloor 1pt" + pr/1329 + +1995-03-21 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latex209.dtx: Fixes for latex/1460 (infinite looping on 2nd + \documentstyle command) and latex/1424 (\newcommand{\r}{}) + Also wrap some long lines to 72. + +1995-03-20 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltpatch.ltx: patch level 2 + + * patches.txt: patch level 2 + + * slides.dtx: Modify framebox redefinition for : graphics/1335 + +1995-03-18 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latexsym.dtx (section{The Implementation}): + Fixed lhd and friends which are supposed to be binary ops and not + relations. pr/1459 + +1995-03-17 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latexbug.el (report-latex-bug): Support transient mark mode + Also use shell-command so that shell variables are initialised. + +1995-03-14 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * letter.dtx : Various documentation changes + (subsection{Customizing the labels}): Changed the width of the + labels slightly to prevent LaTeX stuffing two on each line + (PR #1375) + +1995-01-31 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * classes.dtx (subsubsection{Description}): made \descriptionlabel + a short command (PR #1399) + * letter.dtx (subsubsection{Description}): made \descriptionlabel + a short command (PR #1399) + +1995-01-27 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * alltt.dtx (section{The Implementation}): Reset \dospecials to + its original value after the modified version has been + executed. This is to make \verb?\{}? work inside the altt + environment (PR 1369) + +1995-01-12 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * classes.dtx (subsection{Left equation numbering}): Added + \normalcolor to defintion of \@eqnnum (PR 1351) + +1994-12-17 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltnews02.tex: Edited description of AMS-LaTeX to get everything + to fit onto one page. + +1994-12-16 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * slides.dtx (subsection{Macros for font handling}): Added the + declaration of the lasy font family. + Use \newcommand* for commands with arguments instead of + \newcommand. + * latexsym.dtx: Removed the former change by outdating the last + version. + +1994-12-15 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latexbug.el: (Matt Swift) Support old emacs (tested with 18.57 + in addition to 19.28) + +1994-12-14 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx + + Corrected typo + + * usrguide.tex + + Removed some commands + + * cfgguide.tex + + Tidying + +1994-12-14 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltxguide.cls: add \par to verbatim redefinition. + +1994-12-14 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Added braces to \copyright so it works unbraced in + subscripts. + Added \ifmmode check to \@changed@cmd so that redefinitions aren't + made in math mode (which can also foul up unbraced subscripts). + Commented out \textasciicircum, + \textasciitilde, \textbackslash, \textbar, + \textgreater, \texthyphenchar, \texthyphen and + \textless to save memory. + +1994-12-13 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * cfgguide.tex: A bit more detail re ltxdoc.cfg. + + * directex.txt: lthyphen.cfg now hyphen.cfg. + + * decustex.txt: lthyphen.cfg now hyphen.cfg. + +1994-12-12 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latexsym.dtx (section{The Implementation}): Introduced the cs + \@fam@lasy to hold the name of the font family; this will either + be lasy or llasy, depending on whether the main class is slides or + not. This new cs is now also used to prevent loading the package + twice. + + * slides.dtx (subsection{Font changing}): Define \cal and \mit using + \DeclareRobustCommand + (subsubsection{Enumerate}): Handle \labelenumi cs. like in + classes.dtx; using \theenumi in its definition + (subsection{Macros for font handling}): Made \familydefault point + to \sfdefault in slides.def (PR #1020) + +1994-12-12 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latexbug.el: Add missing (defvar ltxbug-mail-headers + (Matt Swift: latex/1255) + + * ltxguide.cls: Stop \small in verbatim affecting previous para. + + * manifest.txt: cfgguide. + + * ltfloat.dtx: New version from Chris. + +1994-12-12 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Tidied up documentation. + +1994-12-11 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfloat.dtx + + * cfgguide.tex + + Major editing + +1994-12-11 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * letter.dtx (subsection{Customizing the labels}): Redefined + \mlabel to use the new \parbox syntax instead of using the + \setbox primitive. + (subsection{Font changing}): Define \cal and \mit using + \DeclareRobustCommand + (subsection{The generic letter commands}): Use + \let\protect\@unexpandable@protect instead of redefining it. + +1994-12-10 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfntcmd.dtx (section{The implementation}): + Make arguments to \@fontswitch implicit, needed for \select@group + change. + Use \space command in \text@command directly for comparison. + + * latint.dtx: + Surround \select@group with {} so that it can be used after _ and ^. + + * fam.dtx (subsection{Macros for loading fonts}): + Don't define \ifG@defaultsubs via \newif to save macro names + +1994-12-10 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dtx: Removed useless catcode setting of ~. + Made letters active and undefined by default, rather than illegal. + Added `beta test' message. + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Added documentation for the OML encoding, after + the last lot got lost by the server... + Replaced width with \@width in vrules. + +1994-12-09 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * classes.dtx (subsubsection{Captions}): Added the setting of + \if@minipage to false; floats now set it to true to prevent extra + white space from appearing when the float starts with a list; this + affected the spacing around a caption above a centered table. + +1994-12-09 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * cfgguide.tex: Initial draft, Configuration docs. + + * ltbibl.dtx: Allow \bibliographystyle in the preamble. + +1994-12-08 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * usrguide.tex: \arraynewline RIP. + + * lttab.dtx: Make \tabularnewline work in array. + \arraynewline deleted. + + * latexbug.el: mention public database. + + * latexbug.tex: Call category 0 LaTeX not base + Add >Confidential no field to all messages by default. + Add message about public database to final typeout. + Compress messages to fit on 25-line screen. + + * usrguide.tex: mention list of packages in LaTeXBook. + +1994-12-08 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * bugs.txt: Added pointer to ltxbugs2html. + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Added \null and \sh@ft to \b and \d. + +1994-12-07 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * letter.dtx: corrected checksum (PR #1243) + +1994-12-07 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * usrguide.tex: Document ltx3pub papers on ctan. + Other small corrections. + +1994-12-07 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * tlb1042.lvt: Rewrote test file to avoid printing out internal + details of how \ENC-cmd is implemented. + + * tlb0552.lvt: Rewrote test file to do a showbox on $\_$ rather + than a \tracingall. + +1994-12-06 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * fntguide.tex fix dates. + + * clsguide.tex: fix dates. + + * usrguide.tex: fix dates. + +1994-12-06 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * fam.dtx: + Added <tab> to the ignored chars in \nfss@catcodes. pr/1064 + Use \nfss@catcodes in \DeclareFontEncoding. + (subsection{Macros for loading fonts}): + set \nfss@catcodes locally to \relax in \try@load@fontshape + so that it isn't executed several times when an .fd file is + read in. + + * updated various test files. + +1994-12-05 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latexbug.tex: Add \pause so messages do not scroll off screen. + Suggested by Rosemary Bailey. + + * lablst.tex: Print labels verbatim, and input packages. + Fixing problems reported via c.t.t. + +1994-12-05 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Added braces round the \ooalign in \textcircled. + + * tlb1233.lvt: Added test file for unbraced \ooalign's. + +1994-12-02 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * fontdef.dtx: Commented out \ldots. + + * lfonts.dtx: Commented out \copyright. + + * tlb1214.lvt: Test file for symbols like \pounds. + + * tlb1217.lvt: Test file for \a. + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Fixed a bug with \a. + + * cmfonts.fdd: Added font substitutions for \pounds. + +1994-12-01 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * classes.dtx : Made the oneside option work for the book class + (PR #1195) + (section{Initial Code}): Moved the allocation of \if@mainmatter to + this section in order to let it be known when the pagestyles are + defined. The switch is used there and needs to be known then; + otherwise TeX finds the wrong \fi in an \if@twoside...\else...\fi + construct. + (subsection{Font changing}): Define \cal and \mit using + \DeclareRobustCommand + (the driver): use \newcommand* for shorthands with argument + (whole file): Use \newcommand* for commands with arguments + +1994-12-01 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * unpack2e.ins: lthyphen.ltx|cfg now hyphen.ltx|cfg + + * ltfinal.dtx: lthyphen.ltx|cfg now hyphen.ltx|cfg + + * lthyphen.dtx: lthyphen.ltx|cfg now hyphen.ltx|cfg + + * texpert.txt: Document ltxcheck font checks. + lthyphen.cfg now (or soon will be) hyphen.cfg + + * ltplain.dtx: remove some {oldcomments} and other tidying up. + +1994-11-30 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * classes.dtx (subsubsection{Chapters}): Made chapter titles more + robust against pagebreaks in the middle of them. Added an extra + \nobreak and a \interlinepenalty\@M to \@makechapterhead and + \@makeschapterhead (PR #1016, #1135) + +1994-11-30 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfiles.dtx: Use new \@dofilelist. + + * ltmiscen.dtx: Add new \@dofilelist to \enddocument + Move some of the warnings in \enddocument out of \if@filesw. + + * Makefile (TEXTS): add latexbug.el + + * unpack2e.ins: add pict2e and graphpap. + +1994-11-30 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * fam.dtx: Set \FOO-cmd to \@current@cmd rather than \relax when + entering encoding FOO. + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Made text commands expand (almost) entirely in the + mouth. + +1994-11-28 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltcntrl.dtx: Doc improvements. + +1994-11-28 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltdefns.dtx: Corrected \changes entries. + + * ltfiles.dtx: Corrected \changes entries. + + * lterror.dtx: Corrected \changes entries. + + * ltxref.dtx: Corrected \changes entries. + + * ltsect.dtx: Corrected \changes entries. + + * ltidxglo.dtx: Corrected \changes entries. + + * lttab.dtx: Corrected \changes entries (wrong format). + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Added new definitions of \b, \c and \d. + Fixed bug with accents on commands which aren't allowed in + \csname. + + * inputenc.dtx: Moved a docstrip option to it's correct home. + + * latex209.dtx: Added hacks for space around floats. + + * tlb1184.lvt: Added check file for default accent and symbol + definitions. + +1994-11-25 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltplain.dtx: Comment out lots of now obsolete code. + + * source2e.tex: Add source2e.ist, and other small improvements. + +1994-11-24 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * unpack2e.dst: Correct the preamble written to generated files. + + * ltdefns.dtx: modify \newenvironment so that a graf environment + is not allowed (Piet van Oostrum latex/1037). Previous attemt + to do this removed... + +1994-11-23 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltdirchk.dtx: typos.. (Ulrik Vieth) + + * usrguide.tex: Small updates, and typos. Add xr.sty. + + * latexbug.el: Make completion case insensitive. + + * latexbug.tex: Prompt for >Class if no test file given. + +1994-11-22 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * clsguide.tex: typo in decls argument. + + * latint.dtx: wrap long lines. + + * source2e.tex: Make frontmatter \pagenumbering{roman} + So can be processed with only 2 latex runs. (Ulrik Vieth) + Add lthyphen.dtx. + +1994-11-22 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * tlb0574.lvt: Added check file for empyt accents and accents in + tocs. + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Fixed `empty accent' bug. + + * inputenc.dtx: Fixed typo A1 -> A0. + +1994-11-21 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Fixed \dots so that it has no extra space in a + monowidth font. + Corrected typo in the definition of \mathunderscore. + + * inputenc.dtx: Added \textregistered. + Added "A0 (nbs) to Latin-1. + +1994-11-20 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfloat.dtx + + * ltoutput.dtx + + * ltxguide.cls + + Tidied formatting + + * patches.txt + + Updated + + * bugs.txt + + Updated + + * install.txt + + Updated + + * template.txt + + Updated + + * texpert.txt + + Updated + + * usrguide.tex + + Major update + + * clsguide.tex + + Major update + + * fntguide.tex + + Major update + +1994-11-18 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfinal.dtx: reallow 8-bit input. + + * ltboxes.dtx: Add \color@vbox + + * tracefnt.dtx: \next renamed to \reserved@f + + * fam.dtx: \next renamed to \reserved@f + + * latint.dtx: use \expandafter instead of \next in + \DeclareMathDelimiter. + + * ltplain.dtx: Remove \pt, now defined elsewhere. + + * ltmath.dtx Use \expandafter trick instead of \next + in a' \phantom and \smash. Colour support to \phantom and \smash + +1994-11-17 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltplain.dtx: remove \phantom (now in ltmath) + + * fam.dtx: Replace \@tempa by \reserved@a. + + * latint.dtx: Replace \@tempa by \reserved@a. + + * ltboxes.dtx: Replace \@tempa by \reserved@a. + + * ltclass.dtx: Replace \@tempa by \reserved@a. + + * ltcntlen.dtx: Replace \@tempa by \reserved@a. + + * ltcntrl.dtx: Replace \@tempa by \reserved@a. + + * ltdefns.dtx: Replace \@tempa by \reserved@a. + + * ltdirchk.dtx: Replace \@tempa by \reserved@a. + + * lterror.dtx: Replace \@tempa by \reserved@a. + + * ltfiles.dtx: Replace \@tempa by \reserved@a. + + * ltfinal.dtx: Replace \@tempa by \reserved@a. + + * ltfloat.dtx: Replace \@tempa by \reserved@a. + + * ltfntcmd.dtx: Replace \@tempa by \reserved@a. + + * ltmath.dtx: Replace \@tempa by \reserved@a. + + * ltmiscen.dtx: Replace \@tempa by \reserved@a. + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Replace \@tempa by \reserved@a. + + * ltoutput.dtx: Replace \@tempa by \reserved@a. + + * ltpictur.dtx: Replace \@tempa by \reserved@a. + + * ltsect.dtx: Replace \@tempa by \reserved@a. + + * lttab.dtx: Replace \@tempa by \reserved@a. + + * tracefnt.dtx: Replace \@tempa by \reserved@a. + +1994-11-16 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latex209.dtx + + Restored 2e logo + +1994-11-16 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * fontdef.dtx: Remove \{ and \} + +1994-11-15 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ifthen.dtx: Use \@unexpandable@protect and modify + \@setref to fix bug /946 (/1023) \pageref breaking tests. + +1994-11-14 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * lttab.dtx: Add \tabularnewline and \arraynewline. + + * ltspace.dtx: Make \\ robust + +1994-11-12 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltmiscen.dtx + + Tidied \endtrivlists + + * ltspace.dtx + + Attempted to improve error messages + + * ltfntcmd.dtx + + Added line-break to error message + + * lablst.tex + + Simpler with better layout + +1994-11-12 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltplain.dtx: replace sfcode settings. Remove \dag and friends. + +1994-11-11 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * makeindx.dtx: remove spurious \wlog. + +1994-11-10 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltbibl.dtx + + Patched \nocite{*} + + * ltplain.dtx + +1994-11-10 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * classes.dtx (subsection{Flush left equations}): Added the value + of \parskip to \abovedisplayskip to compensate for negative + \topsep settings. (PR #881) + (subsection{Single or double sided printing}): removed typo (PR + #881) + + * slides.dtx (subsection{Font changing}): Removed two typos + +1994-11-10 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltdirchk.dtx: use new definition of \loop + + * ltoutput.dtx: modify \protect setting. + + * newlfont.dtx: modify \ProvidesFile usage. + + * oldlfont.dtx: modify \ProvidesFile usage. + +1994-11-09 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * lthyphen.dtx: Use \ProvidesFile. + + * lfonts.dtx: Use \ProvidesFile. + + * setsize.dtx: RIP + + * fam.dtx: Add definitions of \@vpt (from setsize.dtx). + + * fontdef.dtx: Add \DeclareMathSizes (from setsize.dtx). + + * Makefile: Generate new release date 1994/12/01 + Remove setfile.dtx from generation of ltfss.dtx + + * ltpatch.ltx: Change to patch 1994/12/01 release. + + * ltboxes.dtx: More colour changes. + Fix \@finalstrut (from ltpatch). + + * source2e.tex: Move ltoutenc. Add fontdef and preload. + +1994-11-07 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * fontdef.dtx: Use GetFileInfo style doc header. + + * preload.dtx: Use GetFileInfo style doc header. + + * ltdefns.dtx: Move \newwrite's to ltfiles. + + * ltfiles.dtx: Move \newwrite's here from ltdefns. Remove + duplcate decalaration of \@mainaux. + +1994-11-06 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltboxes.dtx: + Added braces again that have been incorrectly removed. + + * test files: + Updated a large number of test files that had changed + due to protect handling changes and bug fix in font selection. + + * oldlfont.dtx: + Test for \protect being \@typeset@protect in \@setfontsize. + + * newlfont.dtx: + Test for \protect being \@typeset@protect in \@setfontsize. + + * lfonts.dtx: + Test for \protect being \@typeset@protect in \@setfontsize. + + * exscale.dtx: + Renamed \every@size to \every@math@size. + Update \big@size globally (new \every@math@size concept). + + * ltfiles.dtx: + Renamed \every@size to \every@math@size. + + * fam.dtx: + Renamed \every@size to \every@math@size. + Allow several encoding changes before running \selectfont. pr/1042 + + * tracefnt.dtx (section{Scaled font extraction}): + Changed the font size substitution to really select + the nearest size available. pr/747 + Fixed incorrect size selection if math fonts are not set up. pr/848 + Start cleaning up documentation. + Fix bug that produced extra "No math setup" message if + tracefont was loaded with default options. + + Patched \loop + +1994-11-05 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfloat.dtx (subsection{Floating Environments}): + + Introduced \color@hbox + Changed colour resetting for footnotes (again) + Introduced a simulacrum of compatibility to old \@xfloat + Changed float setup + + * ltboxes.dtx (section{\LaTeX\ Box commands}): + + Introduced \color@hbox + Changed colour resetting for minipage footnotes + Added to documentation + + * ltoutput.dtx (subsection{Floats}): + + Introduced \color@hbox + New style protect settings in shipout + Tidied shipout and added to documentation + Added begindvi stuff + +1994-11-05 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Added setting of \@typeset@protect to \patterns + and \hyphenation. + + * ltnews02.tex: First draft. + +1994-11-04 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfloat.dtx: Added \protected@xdef to \footnote, \@footnotetext, + and \footnotemark. + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Added \_. + + * ltpage.dtx: Added \@unexpandable@protect to \markboth and + \markright. + + * lttab.dtx: Added \set@typeset@protect to \@array and + \multicolumn. + Added \@unexpandable@protect to \@mkpream. + + * ltboxes.dtx: Added \protected@edef to \@mpfootnotetext. + + * ltidxglo.dtx: Added \protected@write to \index and \glossary. + Removed \if@filesw from \makeindex and \makeglossary. + + * ltsect.dtx: Added \protected@write to \addtocontents and + \addcontentsline. + Added \protected@edef to \@sect. + Added \protected@xdef to \thanks. + + * ltxref.dtx: Added \protected@write to \label. + Added \protected@edef to \refstepcounter. + + * ltmiscen.dtx: Removed setting of \protect from \@writefile. + + * lterror.dtx: Added \set@display@protect to messages. + + * ltfiles.dtx: Added \protected@write and a new definition of + \nofiles. + + * ltdefns.dtx: Added \x@protect and a new mechanism for protecting + short commands. + Added commands for safely performing edefs. + Added \set@display@protect to \typeout + +1994-11-03 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltdirchk.dtx: Check that latex.ltx is used with an initex with + no format preloaded. (VMS initex defaults to loading + plain.fmt) + + * ltdefns.dtx: rename \long@def to \l@ngrel@x + + * ltclass.dtx: move \@missingfileerror to ltfiles. + + * ltfiles.dtx: add \@missingfileerror + +1994-11-02 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latexbug.el 2nd attempt. + + * latexbug.tex: more alterations to work with .el file. + +1994-11-02 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Wrapped long lines. + +1994-10-31 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latexbug.tex: Add line count to discourage large test files. + +1994-10-31 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * Makefile: Added inputenc.dst and ltoutenc.dst, and inputenc.dtx. + + * fontdef.dtx: Added OMLenc.def. + + * unpack2e.ins: Added inputenc.ins. + + * unpacked.txt: Added inputenc.sty, font encoding and input + encoding files. + + * fntguide.tex: Added documentation on the new text declaration + commands. + + * usrguide.tex: Added documentation on the new text commands. + +1994-10-30 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfloat.dtx (subsection{Floating Environments}): + + In float handling: + major changes to parameter parsing, setting of local + variables, etc; + two-column and one-column cases merged; space hacks moved; + colour support improved and corrected, including extra boxes. + In marginpars: + colour support improved and corrected, including extra boxes. + In footnotes: + colour support improved. + + * ltoutput.dtx (subsection{Floats}): + + Small changes to documentation + Added colour support to \@topnewpage + Added colour support for footnotes to \@makecol + Added warning to \@fpsadddefault + + * ltdefns.dtx (subsection{Internal defining commands}): + + Added \@onelevel@sanitize + +1994-10-30 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * cmfonts.dst: Added OMScmnr and OMLcmr. + + * cmfonts.fdd: Added OMScmr and OMLcmr. + + * ltxguide.cls: Added \NEWdescription, \NEWfeature and the + optional argument to desc. + + * ltoutenc.dst: Added OMLenc.def. + + * ltoutenc.dtx: added encoding-specific commands from ltmath. + Added OML encoding. + Added \textcircled and removed \textregistered. + Added \DeclareTextCompositeCommand. + Added \t. + + * ltmath.dtx: Removed encoding-specific commands to ltoutenc. + +1994-10-29 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * Makefile: Added the alltt package. + + * alltt.dtx (section{The Implementation}): Added a missing + \dospecials in the alltt environment code. + + * classes.dtx (section{Cross Referencing}): Fixed a typo in the + documentation of \@tocrmarg. (PR #904) + +1994-10-29 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * Makefile (INSTS): + Added ltoutenc.ins. + + * manifest.txt: + Added ltoutenc.ins. + +1994-10-29 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * fontsmpl.dtx: Added tests for \copyright, \dots and + \textregistered. + + * ltmath.dtx: Added \mathellipsis, \mathparagraph, etc. + Removed all of the oldcomments and generally tidied up. + Added \DeclareMathOperator. + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Added copyright and textregistered. + Renamed the text versions of \P, \S, etc. to \textparagraph, + \textsection, etc. + Added the definitions of \dots etc. which work in math and text. + +1994-10-28 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * fam.dtx: + Added a numer of \noexpand's to \err@rel@i. pr/1088 + +1994-10-28 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * unpack2e.ins: Added OMSenc.def. + + * fontsmpl.dtx: Added the text commands defined in ltoutenc.dtx. + + * asajtest.ins: An installation file for asajtest.dtx. + + * asajtest.tex: A test file for ltoutenc.dtx. This should become + part of the test suite eventually. + + * asajtest.dtx: This is a scratch version of ltoutenc.dtx. + Rewrote the enc.def files to use the new default settings. + +1994-10-27 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latexbug.el: First attempt at emacs interface. + +1994-10-27 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Removed loading of enc.def files. + + * fontdef.dtx: Added OMSenc.def. + + * ltoutenc.dst: Added OMSenc.def. + +1994-10-26 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * source2e.tex: Add ltmath. + +1994-10-25 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltdefns.dtx: Add documentation of star form of \newcommand. + Remove all `oldcomments' environments. + Add lots of `macro' environments. + + * ltboxes.dtx: missing % in \@isavepicbox (was in ltpatch.ltx) + +1994-10-25 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Added default encodings. + Added \ProvideTextCommand and \ProvideTextCommandDefault. + Added the OMS encoding. + +1994-10-24 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltmath.dtx: + + Removed a TAB + +1994-10-24 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltboxes.dtx: Add inner braces to fbox to keep inner settings + of \fboxsep local (latex/1061) + +1994-10-23 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltmath.dtx: + + Added \normalcolor to \@eqnnum + Removed braces from \ensuremath + +1994-10-20 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltclass.dtx: Modify pkgindoc because of Tuesday's change. + +1994-10-20 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltboxes.dtx: + Put \changes cmd behind % :-) + +1994-10-20 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dtx: Split characters into text-only and math-only. + Reded some of the \providecommand's in latin1.def. + + * latex209.dtx: Corrected a typo---\mark{}{} should have been + \mark{{}{}}. + +1994-10-19 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * fam.dtx: + Added missing \relax to \DeclareFontEncoding so the args can + contain newlines. pr/1026 + +1994-10-18 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltdefns.dtx: Add *-forms to define non-long variants of + commands. + Add extra check so \newenvironment{graf} generates an error. + + * ltfiles.dtx: move \listfiles and \@addtofilelist here. + + * ltclass.dtx: move \listfiles and \@addtofilelist to ltfiles. + +1994-10-17 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latex209.dtx: Added empty initial mark. + New method of switching off 2e commands. + Allow \newcommand on 2e commands. + +1994-10-16 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltsect.dtx: + + Added \normalcolor to page-numbers in toc + + * ltfntcmd.dtx: + + Tidying, and typos fixed in documentation + Added check for empty text + Removed space from \nfss@text + Renamed \check@nocorr to \text@command: + to improve error messages + + * ltboxes.dtx (section{\LaTeX\ Box commands}): + + Added \long to \fbox, \mbox, \sbox (from ltpatch) + \leavevmode corrected for frame boxes (from ltpatch) + \@parboxto macro added to \@iiiparbox, + to remove misuse of \@empty + +1994-10-16 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latexbug.tex: stop expansion occurring on synopsis and other + fields. + +1994-10-16 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * nfssfont.dtx: + Change \end to \stop in help message. pr/615 + +1994-10-15 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * fam.dtx: + Warn, if math alphabet is used outside math (from patch) + + * fontdef.dtx (subsubsection{The log-like functions}): + Somehow lost \operator@font while moving code. + + * ltmath.dtx: + Comment out definition of \, is defined earlier as robust + + * fam.dtx: + Added [ and ] to the reset macro for .fd file loading pr/872 + +1994-10-14 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latexbug.tex: Add latexbug.cfg system, so that personal + details do not need to be entered every time. + +1994-10-14 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * fontdef.dtx: + Separate text font and math font setup. Added a lot of math + font setup stuff from other files. + + * ltmath.dtx: + File added to the distribution. + + * manifest.txt: + Added new files. + + * ltmiscen.dtx: + Moved math enviornments to ltmath.dtx + + * unpack2e.ins: + Added fontmath.ltx and fonttext.ltx generation, + removed fontdef.ltx generation, + + * doc.dtx (subsection{Macros for generating index entries}): + Added missing percent and use \ttfamily not \texttt + +1994-10-13 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltplain.dtx (section{Plain \TeX}): + Moved math code to ltmath.dtx. + Removed old code that was commented out long time ago. + + * lfonts.dtx: + Moved log-like functions to ltmath.dtx. + Removed the unnecessary refernce to \tenex. + +1994-10-12 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latexbug.tex: Add more GNATS fields. + + * ltsect.dtx: remove < > from a \changes entry (upset makeindex) + +1994-10-11 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltdirchk.dtx: Redo ltxcheck: more friendly messages, check + for TeX3.14, and missing fonts. + Add automatic detection of TeX3.14 (previously in ltpatch.ltx) + + * latexbug.tex: Modify to prompt for synopsis information. + +1994-10-07 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * pastex.txt: Installation guide for PasTeX on the Amiga. + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Moved ogonek accent. + +1994-09-26 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * idx.tex: + Add missing brace in \setlength. pr/589 + +1994-09-25 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latexsym.dtx (subsection{\LaTeX{} symbols fonts}): + Use silent substitution for the bold lasy fonts below 10pt + +1994-09-23 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * source2e.tex: Fix \newcount typo (which caused `4pt' to appear + in the change log and index) + + * manifest.txt: added pctex.txt + + * Makefile (TEXTS): added pctex.txt + + * pctex.txt: New version from PCI + +1994-09-23 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltpatch.ltx: + patch for pr872 ([] with catcode active) + +1994-09-23 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latex209.dtx: Added spaces to \@halfmag and friends. + + * ltxguide.cls: Replaced \PassOptionsToPackage{article} by + \PassOptionsToClass{article}. + +1994-09-21 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * manifest.txt: add graphpap.{ins|dtx} + + * Makefile: add graphpap.{dst|ins|dtx} + + * manifest.txt: Add textures.txt, pict2e.{ins|dtx} + + * Makefile: Add textures.txt, pict2e.{dst|ins|dtx} + + * pict2e.dtx: Wrote pict2e.dtx (It just generates an error + message, saying the package has not been written) + +1994-09-07 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latexbug.tex: Modify printing of \everyjob so babel formats + work correctly. + +1994-09-04 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dtx: Added \cs{DeclareInputComposite} and the + \cs{ProvidesCommand}s to the encoding files. + Removed the definition of the accent slots in Latin-1. + +1994-08-31 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * oztex.txt: Checked in revised version from Andrew. + +1994-08-30 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * yandytex.txt: Checked in revised version from Berthold. + +1994-08-26 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * slides.dtx (subsection{Font changing}): changed documentation to + mention \DeclareOldFontCommand instead of @renewfontswitch (PR #812) + + * letter.dtx (section{The documentation driver file}): added + missing comma in a \DoNotIndex entry (PR #857) + (subsection{Setting Paper Sizes}): Added the landscape option, + because Leslie Lamport wants to make landscape letters. + +1994-08-24 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * tlb0143.lvt, tlb0162.lvt, tlb0380.lvt, tlb0498.lvt, tlb0642.lvt, + tlb0830.lvt: Checked in. + +1994-08-09 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * graphpap.dtx: add \leavevmode to \graphpaper. + + * textures.txt: Added file. Mainly written by Blue Sky Research. + +1994-07-28 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfinal.dtx: Correct Checksum. + +1994-07-27 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltnews.cls: Replaced \PassOptionToClass by \PassOptionsToClass. + +1994-07-25 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * microtex.txt: Removed extraneous \dump. + +1994-07-18 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latexbug.tex: Add definition of \@secondoftwo, so latexbug + may once again be used with initex. + +1994-07-18 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * microtex.txt: Added installation guide for MicroTeX. + +1994-07-14 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dtx: Replaced \Dh by \DH and \Th by \TH. + Added \ensuremath to the math commands. + Added \inputencoding. + +1994-07-13 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * classes.dtx (subsubsection{Margins}): Moved the rounding of + \topmargin into native mode only (PR #93) + + * letter.dtx (subsubsection{The dimension of text}): The setting + of \textwidth and \textheight to a fixed value should only happen + in comnpatibility mode. (PR #714) + (subsubsection{Margins}): Added fixed values for \oddsidemargin, + \evensidemargin and \marginparwidth to compatibility mode + +1994-07-13 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * patches.txt: + Added description for additional patches. + + * ltpatch.ltx: + Added patches for: + \ensuremath + \LaTeXe not allowed in compat mode (exception) + + * usrguide.tex (subsection{Ensuring math mode}): + Corrected the description of \ensuremath so that it really does nothing + other than producing its argument in math mode. + + * cmfonts.fdd: + Added additional font shapes for Concrete Roman Fonts + +1994-07-13 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * fontsmpl.dtx: Added an \upshape. + +1994-07-11 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * letter.dtx (subsubsection{Itemize}): \labelitemiii was + mistakenly called \labelitemiiii (bug report # 711) + +1994-07-05 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltpatch.ltx: added patch for latex/667, minipage and \parbox + failing if used with height argument before math setup. + +1994-07-05 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltpatch.ltx: + Added patches for: + empty p-column problem + figure* with color package problem + \^{\i} in toc problem (T1 encoding) + + * patches.txt: + Added description for additional patches. + +1994-07-03 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltpatch.ltx: + Extended patch for T1+german so that composite chars are used instead of + accents + +1994-07-02 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltpatch.ltx: + Added patches for: + \mathit in text mode + \loop could do one iteration too much in certain situations + T1 breaks german 2.4a (this is a german.sty problem actually) + + * patches.txt: + Added descritions of further patch level 3 patches. + + +1994-06-30 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * fntguide.tex + + Warning about enc.def commands added + Stuff on font definition files and encoding definition files + changed + <cdp> removed, for consistency, use <encoding> throughout + Small edits + + * clsguide.tex + + Michael's amendments added + +1994-06-26 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * usrguide.tex + + Minor edits + + * clsguide.tex + + Added stuff + Changed usage of <> + Reordered update stuff + Added Summary sheet + Removed draft status + + * ltxguide.cls + +1994-06-23 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * letter.dtx (subsection{Global Declarations}): Removed a typo + (#[] instead of [1]) + Ran letter.dtx through ispell. + +1994-06-23 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * patches.txt: + Added descritions of patch level 3 patches. + + * ltpatch.ltx: + Added patches for: + inefficient text encoding handling + \"\i problem + \"{} problem + \dag \ddag \P \S lost sometimes + \t problem + \test..{} problem + + Changed usage of <> + Changed definition of verbatim + +1994-06-22 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfntcmd.dtx (section{The implementation}): + + Removed space from \DeclareTextCommand + Improved error messages from \DeclareTextCommand + + * usrguide.tex + + Changed usage of <> + + * clsguide.tex + + Added stuff + Changed usage of <> + Rationalised encoding stuff + + * fntguide.tex + + Rationalised usage of cdp, ENC, encoding + Changed usage of <> + Fixed overfull box and long lines + +1994-06-22 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * classes.dtx (subsection{Flush left equations}): Defer the + setting of \mathindent to the end of the class instead of to + \begin{document}. This way it is possible for packages to change + its value (fixes bug report #577) + Refrased a few sentences to prevent overfull hbox messages. + +1994-06-19 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * usrguide.tex + + Added stuff on project, money etc. + + * fntguide.tex + + Corrcted largesymbols stuff. + + * clsguide.tex + + Major revision and additons. + Spell checked. + Removed \typeouts. + Removed overfull boxes. + + * ltfntcmd.dtx: + + Experimental fixes to \nocorr stuff. + +1994-06-17 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * letter.dtx (subsubsection{Defining the page styles}): Added a + missing closing brace. Made a lot of small changes to the + documentation. + +1994-06-16 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * update.ins: modify for new distribution `ins' files. + +1994-06-12 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * template.txt + + Changed 2e to new. + + * fntguide.tex + + Tidying. + + * directex.txt + + Corrected layout. + +1994-06-12 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * Makefile: Split distrib directory into distrib/base and + distrib/unpacked. + + * ltpatch.dtx: Don't set catcodes of upper 128 characters in + TeX2. + + * manifest.txt: Added directex.txt. + + * Makefile (TEXTS): Added directex.txt. + +1994-06-11 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * usrguide.tex + + Typography of tools list changed. + Added typeouts. + Added letter to list of standard packages. + Removed these typeouts: + \typeout{CONTENTS OF THE TOOLS BUNDLE: needs checking} + \typeout{Marion said: Perhaps the different uses of + `newcommand and `providecommand can be shown a bit clearer} + \typeout{List of stuff in mfnfss, psnfss, babel not done} + + * fntguide.tex + + Editorial changes. + Removed duplicated text. + Removed unwanted blank lines. + + * emtex.txt + + Added section on memory problems. + + * directex.txt + + New file added. + + * install.txt + + Added new file to list. + + * readme.txt + + Editorial changes. + Added patches.txt, etc. + + * patches.txt + + Editorial changes. + Removed references to lists. + Documented lack of lists. + + * ltfntcmd.dtx + + Corrected documentation, title etc. + Corrected dates in changes entries. + +1994-06-11 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * patches.txt: + Added descritions of patch level 2 patches. + + * ltpatch.ltx: + Added patches for: + 8bit chars problem + \nocite{*} problem + \_ in math mode (T1 encoding) + + * added tests for problem 549, 554, 557. + + +1994-06-10 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * manifest.txt: Added ltpatch.ltx and patches.txt. + + * ltfinal.dtx (subsection{Input encoding}): Do not set codes for + higher half of character table for TeX2. + +1994-06-09 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * Makefile (LATEXS): Added ltpatch.ltx. + +1994-06-09 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * doc.dtx (subsection{Bells and whistles}): + Use new definitions for footnote macros within \maketitle. + Otherwise \thanks entries will overprint. + + * docstrip.dtx: + Corrected typo in documentation + +1994-06-08 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltpatch.ltx: New file fixing bugs in the major release. + + * ltfinal.dtx: Add new feature input ltpatch.ltx if the file + exists. + + * latexbug.tex: Add babel. + Use \everyjob to print format info (for new patch system) + +1994-06-06 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltboxes.dtx: Fix bug introduced last week. Add \leavevmode to + \fbox, and make \long. At the same time make \sbox and \mbox + \long even though they were not \long in 2.09. + +1994-06-06 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * Makefile.dist: Changed mv to cp, added installation of *.ist + files, added target `clean'. + + * manifest.txt: Changed name of distributed Makefile from + Makefile to Makefile.unx. + + * Makefile: Changed name of distributed Makefile from Makefile + to Makefile.unx. + +1994-06-03 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * usrguide.tex + + Changed preamble. + + * fntguide.tex + + Changed preamble. + + * clsguide.tex + + Changed preamble. + +1994-06-02 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * classes.dtx (section{Identification}): Fixed bug in the driver, + the line with \ProvidesFile was not seen by LaTeX + (section{A driver for this document}): rearranged the \DoNotIndex + stuff + +1994-06-02 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * copyright.txt and others: Changed copyright message. + +1994-06-01 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltboxes.dtx: Modify \framebox and \fbox so \width in the + optional argument of \framebox refers to the natural width + of the text, + + * latexbug.tex: add amslatex category. + + * ltlogos.dtx: add $\m@th$ to \LaTeX to force math size + calculations. + +1994-06-01 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * letter.dtx: Corrected driver code. + + * slides.dtx: Added definition of \SLiTeX. + + * Makefile: Don't add extra copyright headers to *.txt and *.err + files. + +1994-06-01 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * fntguide.tex: + Added description of \DeclareTextFontCommand. + Small updates and changes. + + * clsguide.tex: + Updates and corrections. + + * latint.dtx: + Corrected help info for \newmathalphabet error + in compat mode. + + * fntguide.tex: + Several small updates. + +1994-06-01 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltnews01.tex: Corrected grammar. + +1994-05-31 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutput.dtx: + + Removed overfull boxes. + +1994-05-31 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latexbug.tex: Switch to new latex-bugs@uni-mainz.de + address. + +1994-05-31 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * Makefile: Added clsguide.tex, fntguide.tex, usrguide.tex, + ltnews01.tex, ltxguide.cls, ltnews.cls. + + * ltfinal.dtx: Renamed lthyphen.* to lthyphen.*. + + * unpacked.txt: Renamed lthyphen.* to lthyphen.*. + + * unpack2e.ins: Renamed lthyphen.* to lthyphen.*. + + * manifest.txt: Renamed lthyphen.dtx to lthyphen.dtx, added + clsguide.tex, fntguide.tex, usrguide.tex, ltnews01.tex, + ltxguide.cls, ltnews.cls, ltnews01.ps, manual.err, compan.err. + +1994-05-31 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latex209.dtx: Added SLiTeX logo again. + + * ltnews01.tex: Finished off. + + * ltnews.cls: Added downloaded PS fonts options. + Removed angle brackets from <...> since these were the last + remaining bitmaps! + Added variants of the LaTeX logo. + Added the ltnews.cfg file. + +1994-05-30 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * texpert.txt: Added the section about configuring hyphenation. + +1994-05-30 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latexbug.tex: Add interactive request for a `category' + Also add non-interactive field showing \@TeXversion. + +1994-05-30 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * unpack2e.ins: Moved pandora, oldgerm, amsfonts, euscript, + eufrak from main distribution to extra package directory.. + + * unpacked.txt: Moved pandora, oldgerm, amsfonts, euscript, + eufrak from main distribution to extra package directory.. + + * manifest.txt: Moved pandora, oldgerm, amsfonts, euscript, + eufrak from main distribution to extra package directory. + Removed features.tex from distribution. + +1994-05-30 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * fntguide.tex: + Several updates and additions. + +1994-05-30 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * usrguide.tex: Removed the description of mfnfss and tools + packages. + Removed sections that were commented out. + Removed typeouts. + Wrapped long lines. + Rewrote to remove overfull hboxes. + Moved the stuff on \newmathalphabet to the section on LaTeX + errors. + Rewrote the stuff on latex209.cfg, and replaced + \PassOptionsToClass (which requires you to list all the + known classes) with \ds@oldlfont. + Added the `LaTeX2e command in LaTeX 2.09 document' error. + Added the SLiTeX logo to the list of unsupported commands. + Added the full list of \text..., \...family, \...series, \...shape + and \math... commands. + +1994-05-29 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * classes.dtx (subsubsection{Captions}): Make \@makecaption colour + safe by using \sbox\@tempboxa rather than \setbox\@temboxa\hbox. + +1994-05-29 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * usrguide.tex: + Small general updates. + Rewrote section on compatibility. + + * Makefile: + Removed vmstex.txt and textures.txt since currently empty. + + * copyins.txt: + Removed prelim message, say that files are mentioned in + manifest.txt. + + * copyright.txt: + Removed prelim message, say that files are mentioned in + manifest.txt. + + * manifest.txt: + Removed vmstex.txt and textures.txt since currently empty. + +1994-05-29 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltxguide.cls: Added italic correction to <...>. + Added \sourcecode. + + * fntguide.tex: Corrected typos spotted by FMi. + Added the `math selection commands' section. + Replaced the notion of math font attributes with a description + closer to that in the Companion. + Moved stuff on declaring encodings into its own section + Moved stuff on font installation into its own section. + Moved stuff on initialization into its own section. + Moved stuff on naming conventions into its own section. + Moved DeclareFixedFont into text font selection. + Added text to the introduction. + Moved all of the enc.def file commands into one subsection. + Moved everything that's left without a home into the `miscellania' + section. + Generally tidied up. + +1994-05-28 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltxguide.cls: Made << and >> produce < and > inside verbatim. + Added ltxguide.cfg. + + * fntguide.tex: Created file out of features.tex. + Redid document structure to fit with usrguide and clsguide. + Removed stuff on old style digits. + Moved text font stuff before math font stuff. + Removed `utilities' section. + Removed the author font commands (covered by usrguide). + Added description of the text font attributes. + Redid the description of the \f@... commands. + Redid the description of the \...default commands. + Added the section on the \DeclareTextWidget commands. + Added the section on math attributes. + +1994-05-27 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * proc.dtx (section{Implementation}): Added a missiing docstrip + guard. + + * classes.dtx: Moved the identification and driver sections to + the beginning of the file. + (subsubsection{Table of Contents}): Wrapped a long line + + * letter.dtx: Added \CharacterTable + Moved identification and driver to the front of the file. + Removed references to the book class from the documentation + +1994-05-27 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltxdoc.dtx: Use sequence a,..,z,A,..,Z not aa,..az,ba,..,bz + As Makeindex is not keen on the latter. + + * source2e.tex: Modify printing of line numbers in index, + + * ifthen.dtx: Use new style error commands. + + * ltboxes.dtx: Add some more names in \author, so I don't get + all the blame. + +1994-05-27 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * tlb0438.tlg: Line number change in exscale package. + + * Makefile: Renamed unpack2e.ins to unpack.ins and latex2e.ltx + to latex.ltx, renamed format file to latex.fmt. Added test + tlb0483. + + * manifest.txt: Renamed unpack2e.ins to unpack.ins and + latex2e.ltx to latex.ltx, rearranged a few lines. + + * unpack2e.ins: Renamed unpack2e.ins to unpack.ins and + latex2e.ltx to latex.ltx. + + * unpacked.txt: Renamed unpack2e.ins to unpack.ins and + latex2e.ltx to latex.ltx. + + * tracefnt.dtx: Changed copyright line. + + * pandora.dtx: Updated for new driver format, changed \wlog to + \ProvidesFile and \ProvidesPackage. + + * oldgerm.dtx: Updated for new driver format, changed \wlog to + \ProvidesFile and \ProvidesPackage. + + * oldgerm.dst: Changed copyright line, removed generation of + documentation driver. + + * pandora.dst: Changed copyright line, removed generation of + documentation driver. + + * latexsym.dst: Changed copyright line. + + * amsfonts.dst: Changed copyright line. + + * latexsym.dtx: Added \ProvidesPackage and \ProvidesFile + declaration. + + * euscript.dtx: Corrected \ProvidesPackage declaration. + + * vtl2e02.tlg: Removed test for \SLiTeX command. + + * vtl2e02.lvt: Removed test for \SLiTeX command. + +1994-05-27 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltnews01.tex: Corrected filenames of usrguie and clsguide. + Removed ltnews.cls from filecontents. + + * ltnews.cls: Checked this in. Added angle brackets to <...>. + Added AMS and SliTeX logos. + + * latex209.dtx: Added SliTeX logo. + + * ltxguide.cls: Added SliTeX logo. + +1994-05-26 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * letter.dtx (subsection{Single or double sided printing}): + wrapped a long line. + + * slides.dtx: + (subsection{The class code}): Use \input instead of \@@input. This + way it also works when \input@path is being used. Also changed + \IfFileExists to \InputIfFileExists for the same reason + + * slides.dtx: Wrapped two long lines + Moved the identification and driver to the front of the file. + + * proc.dtx (subsection{Identification}): + The second argument to \cmd\ProvidesFile wasn't closed in the + driver and the style file + + * ifthen.dtx: Wrapped a long line + Added a \ProvidesFile command to the driver + Added \CharacterTable + + * proc.dtx: + Added \CharacterTable + Changed some \changes entries to have a 'v' in front of the + version number. + Moved the identification and driver sections to the front of the + file in order to make \GetFileInfo work. + (subsection{Identification}): + Removed \cmd\typeout from .sty file; changed description + (subsection{The page style}): + Changed \rm to \normalfont\rmfamily in the definition of + \@oddfoot. + +1994-05-26 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltlogos.dtx: remove \SLiTeX. + + * ltsect.dtx: Add initial documentation section. + + * ltfloat.dtx: Add initial documentation section. + + * ltclass.dtx: Modify format of \@missingfileerror message. + + * ltmiscen.dtx: remove \literal. + + * ltxdoc.dtx: Add silent substitution for bold tt. + + * ltdirchk.dtx: Fix bug in Mac parser. typo " should have been : + (reported by Andrew Trevorrow) + + * ltbibl.dtx: Add initial documentation section. + + * ltpageno.dtx: Add initial documentation section. + + * ltlength.dtx: Improve documetation. + + * ltidxglo.dtx: Add initial documentation section. + + * ltvers.dtx: Remove PRELIMINARY TEST RELEASE from + startup banner (spring is here) + + * ltthm.dtx: wrap long lines to 72. + (long line added last night:-) + + * ltpage.dtx: wrap long lines to 72. + + * ltcounts.dtx: Add initial documentation section. + + * ltpictur.dtx: Add initial documentation section. + + * lttab.dtx: Add initial documentation section. + +1994-05-26 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * pandora.dtx: Folded a long line. + + * lablst.tex: Folded long lines. + + * copyright.txt: Removed remark about this release being + preliminary. + + * copyins.txt: Removed remark about this release being + preliminary. + + * Makefile: No list of files at end of 00readme.txt, check for + long lines added, make sure that small2e.tex and sample2e.tex + don't get a standard header. + + * testpage.tex: Folded long lines. + + * manifest.txt: Shortened long lines. + + * tnfss7.tlg: Removed blank lines around font warnings in log + file. + + * tnfss4.tlg: Removed blank lines around font warnings in log + file. + + * tnfss1.tlg: Removed blank lines around font warnings in log + file. + +1994-05-26 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * newlfont.dtx: + Wrapped long lines. + + * docstrip.dtx: + Wrapped long lines. + + * doc.dtx: + Wrapped long lines. + +1994-05-25 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfntcmd.dtx: + + Added task. + + Corrected processing of \nocorr. + + * ltoutput.dtx: + + Fixed typos and checksum. + + Extra documentation. + +1994-05-25 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltthm.dtx: Move user level documentation earlier in the file. + + * ltxref.dtx: Move user level documentation earlier in the file. + + * tracefnt.dtx: wrap long lines to 72. + + * fam.dtx: wrap long lines to 72. + + * ltoutenc.dtx: wrap long lines to 72. + + * ltclass.dtx: wrap long lines to 72. + + * ltxdoc.dtx: Increase \marginparwidth for long command names, + + * ltboxes.dtx: wrap long lines to 72. + + * ltlists.dtx: wrap long lines to 72. + + * ltxref.dtx: wrap long lines to 72. + + * ltdefns.dtx: wrap long lines to 72. + + * ltplain.dtx: wrap long lines to 72. + +1994-05-25 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * manifest.txt: Added changes.txt. + + * ltsect.dtx (\@dottedtocline): Put braces around argument 4 + (the actual toc entry) to avoid font (and possibly other) + changes leaking out to the leaders. + + * vlatex01.tlg: Updated for extra lines around warning + messages, removed trailing space in error help messages. + Change in strut for footnotes causes blank line to disappear. + + * tnfss7.tlg: Update for new \protect handling, updated for new + values of \sfcode and correct \hbar accent. + + * tnfss7.lvt: Added space after number to prevent too much + expansion. + + * tlcs01b.tlg: Update for new \protect handling. + + * tlcs07b2.tlg: Update for new \protect handling. + + * tlxs01b.tlg: Update for new \protect handling. + + * tlxs07b2.tlg: Update for new \protect handling. + + * tltc001.tlg: Updated for extra lines around info and warning + messages, update for new \protect handling, update for change in + value of \errorcontextlines counter in tltc001.lvt. + + * tl2e1.tlg: Updated for extra lines around info messages. + + * vtl2e01.tlg: Updated for extra lines around warning messages, + removed trailing space in error help messages. + + * tlb0250.tlg: Omit printout from \documentclass command. + + * tlb0250.lvt: Omit printout from \documentclass command. + + * vlatex03.tlg: Updated for extra lines around warning messages. + +1994-05-25 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * clsguide.tex: Added introduction. + Added section on command naming. + Added section on docstrip. + Added details of option processing. + Added example of DeclareRobustCommand. + Checked the document in with the server. + +1994-05-24 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfntcmd.dtx: + + Tidied, fixed some typos in documentation. + + * ltoutput.dtx (subsection{Floats}): + + Changed outputpage. + + Changed warnings etc to new commands. + + Added \MessageBreak. + +1994-05-24 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * lterror.dtx: Wrap long lines to 72. + + * ltdirchk.dtx: Set \@TeXversion to `2' by default for TeX2. Add + info about setting \@TeXversion to ltxcheck.dtx. + + * lterror.dtx Add \@latex@info@no@line, remove some obsolete + code. + +1994-05-24 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * tltx003.tlg: + Regenerated because of message changes. + + * usrguide.tex: + Updates and additions. + + * tnfss5.lvt: + Updated because check for bug (40) no longer appropriate. + + * tnfss5.tlg: + Regenerated because of .lvt change. + + * vlatex07.tlg: + Regenerated to reflect new layout of error and warning messages. + + * tltx001.lvt: + Set errorcontextlines to -1 for better high-level checks. + + * tltx001.tlg: + Regenerated to reflect new layout of error and warning messages. + + * ltmiscen.dtx (subsection{Environments}): + Changed outer default of \@currenvline to \@empty to avoid + double braces. + + * classes.dtx (section{Identification}): + Changed file information that appears in \listfiles. + +1994-05-24 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltxguide.tex: Checked in document class. + + * clsguide.tex: Added sections on 2e font commands, defining \rm + etc., and obsolete commands. + Added stuff about \normalsize, \textheight and \textwidth being the + only mandatory commands. + Implemented Frank's suggestions for additions to the `loading other + files' section (which is now a subsection of `upgrading'). + Added stuff on why primitive \input is a bad idea. + Added stuff on boxes and colour. + Moved general style stuff to overview section rather than 2.09 + section. + Added newsletter example. + +1994-05-23 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltdirchk.dtx: Add coments describing \@TeXversion which must + be defined if a TeX older than 3.141 is being used. + + * lterror.dtx: Modify the definition of \GenericError slightly. + Also add completely new definition, using \typeout rather than + \errmessage. Used with TeX's older than 3.141, which have a + bug such that ^^J appears literally rather than breaking the + line in messages. + +1994-05-23 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * usrguide.tex: + Updates and additions. + + * copyright.txt: + Point to bugs.txt for error reports. + Changed .l2e extension to .txt. + + * tracefnt.dtx: + Changed info in \ProvidesPackage. + + * latexsym.dtx: + Changed info in \ProvidesPackage. + + * ltdefns.dtx: + Removed \MessageQuote since not used otherwise. + + * lterror.dtx: + Corrected documentation. + Removed definitions for \@font@... since they are defined + in tracefnt.dtx. + + * ltclass.dtx: + Added missing percents in filecontents definition :-( + Corrected several typos. + Cleaned up help texts. + Don't stop completely if \NeedsTeXFormat finds the wrong format, + just end inputting the current file. + + * unpack2e.ins: + Changed .l2e extension to .txt. + + * install.txt: + Changed .l2e extension to .txt. + + * othertex.txt: + Remove bug address; mention bugs.txt instead. + Changed .l2e extension to .txt. + + * readme.txt: + Changed .l2e extension to .txt. + Removed test release info. + + * texpert.txt: + Changed .l2e extension to .txt. + Correct LaTeX source file name. + + * web2ctex.txt: + Changed .l2e extension to .txt. + + * yandytex.txt: + Changed .l2e extension to .txt. + + * manifest.txt: + Changed .l2e extension to .txt. + + * ltdefns.dtx: + Replaced ^^J by \MessageBreak. + + * ltclass.dtx: + Replaced many ^^J by \MessageBreak. + Reworded several help texts. + + * ltfinal.dtx: + Replaced \f@warn@break with \MessageBreak. + + * ltmiscen.dtx: + Replaced \f@warn@break with \MessageBreak. + + * fam.dtx: + Replaced \f@warn@break with \MessageBreak. + + * tracefnt.dtx: + Removed definition of \f@warn@break. + Replaced \f@warn@break with \MessageBreak. + + * latint.dtx: + Replaced \f@warn@break with \MessageBreak. + + * tl2e5.lvt: + Changed test for bug (40) of NFSS1, old test no longer + appropriate. + + * vtl2e07.tlg: + Regenerated because of extra blank lines between warnings. + + * vtl2e03.tlg: + Regenerated because of extra blank lines between warnings. + + * tnfss3.tlg: + Regenerated because of extra blank lines between warnings. + + * tlxs03r.tlg: + Regenerated because of extra blank lines between warnings. + + * tlxs03b.tlg: + Regenerated because of extra blank lines between warnings. + + * tlxs03a.tlg: + Regenerated because of extra blank lines between warnings. + + * tlcs03r.tlg: + Regenerated because of extra blank lines between warnings. + + * tlcs03b.tlg: + Regenerated because of extra blank lines between warnings. + + * tlcs03a.tlg: + Regenerated because of extra blank lines between warnings. + + * tlb0202.tlg: + Regenerated because of extra blank lines between warnings. + + * tlb0073.tlg: + Regenerated because of extra blank lines between warnings. + + * tl2e5.tlg: + Regenerated because of lvt file change. + + * tl2e4.tlg: + Regenerated because of extra blank lines between warnings. + +1994-05-23 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * clsguide.tex: Redid document structure to be more like + usrguide. + Added section on class/package structure. + Restructured the commands list. + +1994-05-22 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltmiscen.dtx: + New \protect logic. + + * ltfloat.dtx: + Changed \@warning to \@latex@warning. + + * doc.dtx: + Added \PackageError commands. + + * tracefnt.dtx: + Complete new definitions for \@fontwarning and + \@font@info. + + * lterror.dtx (subsection{Specific errors}): + Added \MessageBreak to various help messages. + Reset \protect to \relax for \@preamerr. + + * lttab.dtx: + New \protect logic in \@mkpream. + + * classes.dtx: + Use new warning message commands. + + * slides.dtx: + Use new warning commands for classes. + twocolumn option will produce warning (not error). + + * letter.dtx: + Use new warning and error commands. (we use \@latex@error + in compatibility mode) + Some documentation updates. + + * ltclass.dtx: + Use new warning and error commands. + + * ltdefns.dtx: + Removed surplus \space in error message + Use new warning and error commands. + + * proc.dtx: + Replaced \@latexerr with \ClassError{proc}. + Replaced \@@warning with \ClassWarningNoLine{proc}. + Added \Finale in documentation. + + * ltpictur.dtx: + Replaced \@warning by \@latex@warning. + + * tracefnt.dtx: + Use old spacing rules of font warnings so that test suite + isn't complaining. + +1994-05-22 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * usrguide.tex: Rewrote description of the new argument to + \newcommand. + Added section on classes and packages, on package options, and on + standard classes and packages. + Added some examples. + Added filecontents* and paragraph on what files can be sent. + Added section on latexsym in `old commands'. + Rewrote some stuff on 2.09 documents. + Added section on \frontmatter, \mainmatter and \backmatter. + Wrote `problems' section, including new error messages, stuff on + \tenrm and friends, old versions of files, and submitting a bug + report. + Added overview. + + * lterror.dtx: Replaced braces with begingroup, to stop mathords + from sneaking into math mode. + Replaced \@generic@message and \@generic@error by \GenericError, + \GenericWarning and \GenericInfo. + Made \GenericError, \GenericWarning and \GenericInfor robust. + Replaced \\ and ~ by \MessageBreak and \space. + Replaced \string by \protect in some messages. + +1994-05-21 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * source2e.tex: new style \protect code in \changes. + + * ltxdoc.dtx: Define \aalph as there are currently more than 26 + files included into source2e.tex. + New style \cmd and \cs so Alan can go \cmd\{ in ltoutenc. + +1994-05-21 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * doc.dtx: + Replaced \@latexerr by \@latex@error. + + * ltxref.dtx: + Don't produce line number when warning about multiple labels + (would be the line number from the aux file). + Replaced \@warning by \@latex@warning. + + * ltbibl.dtx: + Replaced \@warning by \@latex@warning. + + * lttab.dtx: + Replaced \@latexerr by \@latex@error. + + * ltsect.dtx: + Replaced \@latexerr by \@latex@error. + Replaced \@@warning by \@latex@warning@no@line. + + * ltmiscen.dtx: + Replaced \@latexerr by \@latex@error. + + * ltfiles.dtx: + Replaced \@latexerr by \@latex@error. + Replaced \@warning by \@latex@warning@no@line; again line numbers + do not make much sense in this file. + + * ltlists.dtx: + Replaced \@latexerr by \@latex@error. + + * lhyphen.dtx: + Fixed checksum. + + * classes.dtx (subsection{Font changing}): + Fixed wrong \changes entry. + + * letter.dtx (subsection{Font changing}): + Fixed wrong \changes entry. + +1994-05-21 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltnews01.tex: Wrote 1st draft of LaTeX News #1. + + * lterror.dtx: Made \@generic@message robust. + +1994-05-20 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * vtl2e06.tlg: Update for new \protect handling, change in + format of error messages, change in glue for framed boxes. + + * vlatex06.tlg: Update for new \protect handling, change in + format of error messages, change in glue for framed boxes. + + * ltpage.dtx (\marboth, \markright): Changed setting for + \protect. + + * tl2e7.tlg: Update for new \protect handling. + + * tl2e2.tlg: Update for new \protect handling. + + * tlb0427.tlg: Update for new \protect handling. + + * tlb0027a.tlg: Update for new \protect handling. + + * tlb0027b.tlg: Update for new \protect handling. + + * tlb0018.tlg: Update for new \protect handling. + + * vtl2e05.tlg: Update for new \protect handling. + + * vtl2e04.tlg: Update for new \protect handling. + + * vtl2e03.tlg: Update for new \protect handling. + + * vtl2e02.tlg: Update for new \protect handling. + + * vlatex05.tlg: Update for new \protect handling. + + * vlatex04.tlg: Update for new \protect handling. + + * vlatex03.tlg: Update for new \protect handling. + + * vlatex02.tlg: Update for new \protect handling. + + * tnfss2.tlg: Update for new \protect handling. + + * ltsect.dtx (\addtocontents): Correct setting of \protect. + + * ltsect.dtx (\addcontentsline): Correct setting of \protect. + + * ltmiscen.dtx (\@writefile): Added correct setting of \protect. + + * ltfloat.dtx (\@xfloat): Restore @nobreak switch inside float + to default value false. + + * ltoutput.dtx (\@outputpage): Added setting of \protect during + \shipout. + +1994-05-20 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfinal.dtx : + Replaced \font@warning by \@font@warning. + + * ltmiscen.dtx: + Replaced \@@warning by \@latex@warning@no@line. + Replaced \font@warning by \@font@warning. + + * ltfntcmd.dtx: + Replaced \@latexerr by \@latex@error. + + * newlfont.dtx: + Replaced \@latexerr by \@latex@error. + + * lfonts.dtx: + Replaced \font@warning by \@font@warning. + Replaced \@latexerr by \@latex@error. + + * latint.dtx: + Replaced \font@warning by \@font@warning. + Replaced \font@log by \@font@info. + Replaced \@latexerr by \@latex@error. + + * fam.dtx: + Replaced \font@warning by \@font@warning. + Replaced \font@log by \@font@info. + Replaced \@latexerr by \@latex@error. + + * tracefnt.dtx: + Replaced \font@warning by \@font@warning. + Replaced \font@log by \@font@info. + Replaced \@latexerr by \@latex@error. + Use new generic error commands. + +1994-05-20 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * lterror.dtx: Fixed a bug with \@inmatherr. + + * ltfinal.dtx: Corrected checksum. + + * lterror.dtx: Added \@latex@info@no@line. + Added missing full stops. + + * ltdefns.dtx: Renamed @checkcommand to CheckCommand. + + * latex209.dst: Added t1enc.sty. + + * latex209.dtx: Changed \@finalstrut. + Added t1enc.sty. + +1994-05-19 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfinal.dtx: use \maxdimen not 9999p in \showoutput. + + * test2e.tex: add test2e.cfg for customisation (suggested by + Rainer) + +1994-05-19 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * tlb0109.tlg: Change in format of error messages. + + * tlb0063.tlg: Change in format of error messages. + + * vtl2e03.tlg: Change in format of error messages. + + * vtl2e02.tlg: Change in definition of \TeX logo. + + * vtl2e01.tlg: Change in format of error messages, change in + definition of \TeX logo. + + * tltx002.tlg: Change in format of error messages. + + * vlatex03.tlg: Change in format of error messages. + + * vlatex02.tlg: Change in definition of \TeX logo. + + * vlatex01.tlg: Change in format of error messages, change in + definition of \TeX logo. + + * tltc002.tlg: Change in format of error messages. + + * source2e.tex: Changed according to split in files. + + * manifest.l2e: Changed according to split in files. + + * unpack2e.ins: Changed according to split in files. + + * ltdefns.dtx: Added definitions for \@namedef and \@nameuse + again. + + * ltcntlen.dtx: Split into ltcounts.dtx (counters), ltpageno.dtx + (page numbering), ltxref.dtx (cross referencing), ltlength.dtx + (lengths). + + * ltidxbib.dtx: Split into ltidxglo.dtx (index and glossary) and + ltbibl.dtx (bibliography commands). + + * tlb0268.tlg: Change in test2e setup causes box printout to + reappear. + + * tlb0077.tlg: Change in test2e setup causes box printout to + reappear. + + * vtl2e01.tlg: Change in test2e setup causes box printout to + reappear. + + * tl2e1.tlg: Change in test2e setup causes box printout to + reappear. + + * tlxs04a.tlg: Change in test2e setup causes box printout to + reappear. + + * tlxs02.tlg: Change in test2e setup causes box printout to + reappear. + + * tlxs01p.tlg: Change in test2e setup causes box printout to + reappear. + + * tltx001.tlg: Change in test2e setup causes box printout to + reappear. + + * vlatex05.tlg: Strut in footnotes back to old version for + compatibility mode. + + * vlatex04.tlg: Strut in footnotes back to old version for + compatibility mode. + + * vlatex03.tlg: Strut in footnotes back to old version for + compatibility mode. + + * vlatex02.tlg: Strut in footnotes back to old version for + compatibility mode. + + * vlatex01.tlg: Change in test2e setup causes box printout to + reappear. + + * tnfss1.tlg: Change in test2e setup causes box printout to + reappear. + + * tlcs02.tlg: Change in test2e setup causes box printout to + reappear. + + * tlcs01b.tlg: Change in test2e setup causes box printout to + reappear. + + * tltc001.tlg: Change in test2e setup causes box printout to + reappear, strut in footnotes back to old version for + compatibility mode. + +1994-05-18 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * tnfss4.tlg: With new handling of changes to font size and + \baselinestretch the tracefnt messages are slightly different. + + * tl2e4.tlg: With new handling of changes to font size and + \baselinestretch the tracefnt messages are slightly different. + + * vtl2e02.tlg: New definitions for LaTeX and SLiTeX logos now + active, change in writing of robust commands, change in glue for + framed boxes. + + * vlatex02.tlg: New definitions for LaTeX and SLiTeX logos now + active, change in writing of robust commands, change in glue for + framed boxes. + + * tl2e7.tlg: Updated for new values of \sfcode and correct + \hbar accent. + + * tl2e7.lvt: Replace package t1enc by fontenc, added a space. + Added space after number to prevent too much expansion. + + * vtl2e01.tlg: Change in strut for footnotes causes blank + line to disappear. + +1994-05-18 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latex209.dtx: Added \@finalstrut. + + * ltlogos.dtx: Added the TeX logo. + Made the LaTeX2e logo use the text font 2 rather than the math + font 2. + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Fixed a typo with fontenc.sty... it's + \encodingdefault, not \defaultencoding! + + * ltfinal.dtx: Corrected the lccode for d-bar. + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Made \.i produce i. + +1994-05-17 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltclass.dtx: Modify \@use@option so Alan can use + \OptionNotUsed within the code for a declared option. + +1994-05-17 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * tl2e7.lvt: Corrected: \documentstyle --> \documentclass. + + * tlb0039.tlg: Removed \usepage{t1ot1}. + + * tlb0039.lvt: Removed \usepage{t1ot1}. + + * latint.dtx: Added missing \let in \@no@font@optfalse, added + \ProvidesFile and \GetFileInfo. + + * tlb0438.tlg: Updated for \every@size now working correctly. + + * vlatex07.tlg: Change in strut for array/tabular parboxes and + footnotes. + + * vtl2e07.tlg: Change in strut for array/tabular parboxes and + footnotes. + + * vlatex05.tlg: Change in strut for footnotes, change in + writing of robust commands, change in glue for framed boxes. + + * vtl2e05.tlg: Change in strut for footnotes, change in + writing of robust commands, change in glue for framed boxes. + + * vlatex03.tlg: Change in strut for footnotes, change in glue + for framed boxes. + + * vlatex04.tlg: Change in strut for footnotes. + + * tltx001.tlg: Change in glue for framed boxes, change in args + to \@ifstar, change in colorendbox. + + * tl2e3.tlg: Change in strut for footnotes. + + * vtl2e03.tlg: Change in strut for footnotes, change in glue + for framed boxes. + + * vtl2e04.tlg: Change in strut for footnotes. + + * tlb0202.tlg: Change in expansion of accent macros. + + * tltc001.tlg: Change in glue for framed boxes, change in args + to \@ifstar, change in colorendbox. + +1994-05-17 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltplain.dtx: An underscore character with catcode 12 in math + mode produced an error since the active underscore was \let to + \_ before the latter was defined. \global\let replaced by \gdef. + +1994-05-17 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * lfonts.dtx: + Added extra braces to \copyright. + Added extra braces to \nfss@text (allow direct use in subscript). + +1994-05-17 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * lterror.dtx: Moved error commands from ltdefns.dtx. + + * ltdefns.dtx: Added section on \protect. Moved error commands to + lterror.dtx. + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Removed braces from \$ since they're now in + nfss@text. + + * latex209.dtx: Fixed a bug with \ds@newlfont. + Removed extra spaces from the missing file error. + Commented out bezier with \iffalse...\fi rather than %% to avoid + bezier turning up in every file. + Corrected some documentation. + +1994-05-16 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltmiscen.dtx: Use \DeclareRobustCommand to define \ensuremath, + and add extra braces so a_\ensuremath{foo} works. + + * ltoutput.dtx: Add \color@begingroup to protect \normalcolor. + move \normalcolor out of the inner box. + +1994-05-16 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * unpack2e.ins: Added batch file ltoutenc.ins. + + * ltoutenc.dst: Capitalize encoding names. + +1994-05-16 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * fam.dtx (subsection{Macros for the user}): + Removed surplus braces from robust command \linespread. + Pass \baselinestretch not \f@linespread in \fontsize. + + * ltoutenc.dtx: + \DeclareTextCommand now uses specified encoding again in + top-level part. + Encoding files now use mixed case names, eg OT1enc.def + (subsection{Definitions for the OT1 encoding}): + Added extra braces in def of \$. + + * ltplain.dtx: + Changed \loop ...\repeat to use Kabelschacht method (TUB 8#2) + Comment out encoding specific commands which are defined by + ltoutenc.dtx. + + * ltoutput.dtx: + Use \let to get original defs of accents back in output routine. + + * ltfinal.dtx: + Removed loading of ot1enc.sty (not longer available). + Moved definitions of \@acci and friends to lfonts.dtx. + + * lfonts.dtx (subsection{Miscellaneous}): + Define saved versions of accents (\@acci and friends) here. + + * fontdef.dtx (subsection{Encodings}): + Declare default encoding first. + Load encoding specific files for OT1 and T1. + +1994-05-16 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltcntrl.dtx: Split file from ltinit.dtx. + + * ltcounts.dtx: Split file from ltinit.dtx. + + * ltdefns.dtx: Split file from ltinit.dtx. + + * lterror.dtx: Split file from ltinit.dtx. + + * ltlogos.dtx: Split file from ltinit.dtx. + + * ltpar.dtx: Split file from ltinit.dtx. + + * ltspace.dtx: Split file from ltinit.dtx. + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Removed \P, since it's not in the T1 encoding. + Added \r and \k accents. + Added \NG, \ng, \TH, \th, \DH, \dh, \DJ and \dj. + + * latex209.dtx: Fixed a bug with \mediumseries. + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Redid fontenc.sty to use the new mixed-case + encoding files. + Fixed a bug with \pounds. + + * latex209.dtx: Fixed a bug with the margid option. + + * ltfinal.dtx: Removed ot1enc.sty. + +1994-05-15 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * lfonts.dtx: + \$ and \pdollar removed since now part of encoding cmds. + \pounds and \ppounds ditto. + + * fam.dtx: + Names of encoding commands changed to \<enc>-cmd. + +1994-05-15 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latex209.dtx: Added the nomargid and margid options. + +1994-05-14 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ifthen.dtx: Add \TE@repl, to make \or safe in \equal. + +1994-05-14 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * fontdef.dtx (subsection{Encodings}): + Don't input .def files in encoding declarations. + + * fam.dtx (section{Macros for setting up the tables}): + Init the encoding change macro only for new \DeclareFontEncoding. + Log redeclarations of font encodings. + (subsection{Macros for the user}): + Added missing \noexpand to \enc@update. + Initialise all \f@... macros with \@empty. + (subsection{Macros for loading fonts}): + Don't change \f@encoding in \DeclareErrorFont. Removed + definitions for \makeatletter and \@input etc. since they are not + longer necessary. + + * lfonts.dtx (subsection{Miscellaneous}): + Removed surplus braces within \normalfont. + Added \DeclareErrorFont. + + * unpack2e.ins (IMPORTANT NOTICE): + Moved ltoutenc.dtx before ltfss.dtx since ltfss needs parts of the + code. + + * tracefnt.dtx (section{Macros common to \texttt{fam.tex} and + \texttt{tracefnt.sty}}): Added \enc@update to selectfont. + + * fam.dtx (section{Macros for setting up the tables}): + Initialise \<enc>@cmd in \DeclareFontEncoding. + (subsection{Macros for the user}): + Added \enc@update to \fontencoding. Thus now encoding updates are + deferred until the following \selectfont (as they should). One + action of \enc@update is to update \<enc>@cmd for the old and the + new encoding. + +1994-05-14 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Renamed \ENC@cmd to \ENC-cmd, to avoid collisions + with commands like \U@cmd. + + * ltoutenc.dst: Updated the dst file to match ltoutenc.dtx. + + * latex209.dtx: Redid the oldlfont and newlfont options to set the + \@no@font@optfalse flag. + + * fontsmpl.dtx: Split font sample document and package out of + ltoutenc. + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Stopped commands declared with DeclareTextWidget + from going into an infinite loop if f@encoding isn't the current + encoding. + Added fontenc package. + Made ot1enc.def and t1enc.def files rather than packages. + + * latex209.dtx: Changed how 2e commands are switched off. + Removed the date from the announcement of 2.09 mode. + +1994-05-13 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * lfonts.dtx: remove file identification typeout. + + * latint.dtx: remove file identification typeout. + + * setsize.dtx: remove file identification typeout. + + * tracefnt.dtx: remove file identification typeout. + + * fam.dtx: remove file identification typeout. + + * lttab.dtx: Remove definition of \a \a' etc. Now in + ltoutenc.dtx + + * ltboxes.dtx: New accent handling in parboxrestore. + + * newlfont.dtx: \DeclareProtectedCommand now + \DeclareRobustCommand + + * oldlfont.dtx: \DeclareProtectedCommand now + \DeclareRobustCommand + + * ltpictur.dtx: Removed unnecessary braces from \@ifnextchar and + \@ifstar constructions. + + * ltclass.dtx: Stop \listfiles being run twice, (A second + occurrence in the preamble is silently ignored) + + * lttab.dtx: Add colour support to tabbing macros. + Use \@finalstrut in @endpbox. + + * ltfloat.dtx: Add colour support (back again:-) to + \@footnotetext. Safe this time, using \normalcolor in an inner + group, leaving \reset@font\footnotesize in an outer group so + that \split... get set correctly. Also use \@finalstrut, and + remove some superfluous braces. + Add \normalcolor to \@xfloat, so floats do not pick up the + current colour. + +1994-05-13 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * fam.dtx: + Use \@input@ for .fd files so that they show up with + \listfiles. + + * ltfntcmd.dtx: + Replaced \@protecteddef by \DeclareRobustCommand. + + * fontcmds.dtx: + File renamed to ltfntcmd.dtx. + + * unpack2e.ins: + Added Welcome message. + Update kernel generation. + + * ltsect.dtx: + Added file identification string. + + * ltpictur.dtx: + Added file identification string. + + * ltcntlen.dtx: + Added file identification string. + Removed \@Ialph and \@ialph since they neither save space + nor execution time. + + * ltfiles.dtx: + Added file identification string. + Execute \every@size hook at begin document. + + * ltvers.dtx: + Added file identification string. + Added \endinput at the end. This is necessary for running + unpack2e.ins. + Use \fmtname in \everyjob and welcome message. + + * tracefnt.dtx: + Change \DeclareProtectedCommand to \DeclareRobustCommand. + + * lfonts.dtx: + Change \DeclareProtectedCommand to \DeclareRobustCommand. + + * fam.dtx: + Change \DeclareProtectedCommand to \DeclareRobustCommand. + +1994-05-13 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltinit.dtx: Added \@backslashchar. + Improved coding of \@ifdefinable. + + * testdist.dtx: Improved documentation. + + * emtex.l2e: Created this file. + + * ltfinal.dtx: Loaded package ot1enc, and defined \@acci and + friends. + + * ltinit.dtx: Added logging to DeclareProtectedCommand. + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Renamed accents.dtx to ltoutenc.dtx. + After all these months It's now a real bit of kernel! :-) + + * accents.dtx: Replaces \space by ` ' in csname. + + * ltinit.dtx: Replaced \space by ` ' in \csname + + * accents.dtx: Added \{, \} and \$. + + * ltinit.dtx: Renamed DeclareProtectedCommand to + DeclareRobustCommand. + Moved DeclareRobustCommand after @gobble. + Removed @if@short@command. + Removed \{ and \}. + + * accents.dtx: Redid all the kernel commands. Made t1.def and + ot1.def into t1enc.sty and ot1enc.sty. + +1994-05-12 Braams J.L. <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * slides.dtx: + Changed some \changes entries to have a 'v' in front of the + version number. + (section{A driver for this document}): + A missing \begin{macrocode} line caused LaTeX to loop and complain + about \begin{document} only being allowed in the preamble. + Wrapped a number of long lines to prevent overfull hbox messages + and fixed improper nesting of macro and macrocode environments. + + * letter.dtx: + Changed some \changes entries to have a 'v' in front of the + version number. + (subsubsection{Defining the page styles}): + Made running heads the same for odd and even pages in twoside + mode. + +1994-05-12 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * amsfonts.dst: Remove generation of the drv file. + + * amsfonts.fdd: Add \ProvidesFile comments to all the files + generated. + + * slides.fdd: Add \ProvidesFile comments to all the files + generated. + + * ltdirchk.dtx: Add early definition of \ProvidesFile, + so fd files read at initex time work OK. + Add `v' to \changes entries. + + * cmfonts.fdd: Add \ProvidesFile comments to all the files + generated. + + * newlfont.dtx: \DeclareProtectedCommand to define \em. Remove + the definitions of \prm and friends. + + * oldlfont.dtx: use \DeclareProtectedCommand to define \rm and + friends. Also use \normalfont rather than \reset@font. + +1994-05-12 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutput.dtx: Added \normalcolor to the output routine just + before the head and foot are placed. Needed now color.sty does + not redefine \reset@font. + + * ltboxes.dtx: merged \fbox and \framebox. + Defined \@finalstrut (used in \@mpfootnotetext) + Defined \normalcolor (\let to \relax) + +1994-05-12 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * tracefnt.dtx: + New \baselinestretch concept. + Added some tracing again that was incorrectly removed. + Ensure that ltfss can be processed with main mem + less than 65000 by adding macrocode envs. + Defined all robust commands vi \DeclareProtectedCommand. + + * lfonts.dtx: + Ensure that ltfss can be processed with main mem + less than 65000 by adding macrocode envs. + Defined all robust commands vi \DeclareProtectedCommand. + + * fam.dtx: + New \baselinestretch concept. + Ensure that ltfss can be processed with main mem + less than 65000 by adding macrocode envs. + Defined all robust commands vi \DeclareProtectedCommand. + + * latint.dtx: + Allow commands to be \let to \relax in the argument of + \DeclareMathSymbol, etc. So far only undefined commands + or commands of the right type (eg mathchars) were + allowed. + Ensure that ltfss can be processed with main mem + less than 65000 by adding macrocode envs. + +1994-05-12 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltinit.dtx: Fixed a bug with DeclareProtectedCommand. + +1994-05-11 Braams J.L. <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * classes.dtx: + Changed some \changes entries to have a 'v' in front of the + version number. + +1994-05-11 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltboxes.dtx: Superfluous braces removed from several commands + + * ltclass.dtx: modify filecontents environment so that ctrl-L + and ctrl-I are written as a blank line and space respectively. + A warning is given if either of these translations takes + place, using a devious use of \@ifundefined. + +1994-05-11 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltinit.dtx: Moved the logos to after \DeclareProtectedCommand. + Defined them using \DeclareProtectedCommand. + Made the SLiTeX logo use the TeX logo. + Made \, and \hspace use \DeclareProtectedCommand. + + * ltfinal.dtx: Added %%% ltfinal.dtx line. + + * ltinit.dtx: Added %%% ltinit.dtx line. + + * latex209.dst: Added dummy bezier.sty. + + * latex209.dtx: Added dummy bezier.sty. + +1994-05-10 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltmiscen.dtx: Slight change in text of error message for + \verb in command argument. + +1994-05-10 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltinit.dtx: Added documentation sent by DPC. + Moved \makeatletter and \maketother into ltinit. + Added extra ^^Js to \@latexerr. + Removed a couple of spurious braces. + +1994-05-09 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * fontcmds.dtx: Temporary fix: Make sure that \next is not + dangerously \let to \relax. + + * exscale.dtx: + Added code for scaling of \big... delimiters. + +1994-05-09 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * fam.dtx: + Added file identification string. + Changed error message to fit linewidth. + + * latint.dtx: + Added file identification string. + Added test to \newmathalphabet to produce an error if + used in old 209 sources without explicit newlfont or oldlfont + option. (New compatibility concept) + + * oldlfont.dtx (section{The Code}): + Setting of \math@bgroup and \math@egroup outside latex209 + part. (New compatibility concept) + + * fontcmds.dtx: + Replaced use of \next by \@let@token and undid temp fix 3.3e. + +1994-05-08 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * fontcmds.dtx: + +1994-05-08 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * exscale.dtx: Changed to conform to new documentation + standard. + + * euscript.dtx: Changed to conform to new documentation + standard. + + * eufrak.dtx: Changed to conform to new documentation + standard. + + * eufrak.dst: Removed generation of .drv file. + +1994-05-08 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltxdoc.dtx: + Moved definition of \GetFileInfo to doc.dtx. + + * doc.dtx (subsection{GetFileInfo}): + Moved definition of \GetFileInfo into this file. + + * ltthm.dtx: + Added file identification string. + +1994-05-08 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * somedefs.dtx: Produced v0.01. + + * rawfonts.dtx: Produced v0.01, using somedefs.dtx. + +1994-05-07 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * lttab.dtx: + Added file identification string. + Changed \@firsttab and \@maxtab from counters to chardefs. + Removed surplus {} in \@ifnextchar and \@ifstar constructs. + Removed plain TeX definition of \+ + +1994-05-06 Braams J.L. <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * letter.dtx (subsubsection{Itemize}): + Inserted \normalfont before \bfseries in second level list label. + (subsubsection{Description}): + Inserted \normalfont before \bfseries in \descriptionlabel + Modified the documentation to use doc's `environment' environment + when documenting new environments. + (subsubsection{Vertical spacing}): + Added the setting of \maxdepth and \@maxdepth. + + * slides.dtx: + Modified the documentation to use doc's `environment' environment + when documenting new environments. + (subsubsection{Vertical spacing}): + Added the setting of \maxdepth and \@maxdepth. + + * classes.dtx (subsection{The title}): + Now check whether we are in the first or second column in + twocolumn mode. + (subsubsection{Vertical spacing}): + Added the setting of \maxdepth and \@maxdepth. + (subsubsection{Itemize}): + Inserted \normalfont before \bfseries in second level list label. + (subsubsection{Description}): + Inserted \normalfont before \bfseries in \descriptionlabel + +1994-05-05 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltidxbib.dtx: Do not write page number in \nocite warning + message. Set switch for warning and end of run. + +1994-05-05 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * preload.dtx: + Added some explanation about the need to have the encoding + predeclared as well. + +1994-05-05 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfinal.dtx: Added empty \errhelp. + +1994-05-04 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltclass.dtx: Changed the wording of the warning in + \NeedsTeXFormat. + + * ltinit.dtx: added patch (from Frank) + @badcrerr error message removed + +1994-05-04 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latint.dtx: + Renamed \@@DeclareMathDelimiter to \@xDeclareMathDelimiter + +1994-05-03 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltinit.dtx: add \@break@tfor + Remove many superfluous braces around arguments of \@ifnextchar + and \@ifstar. + + * source2e.tex: allow full indexing on \@latexerr \@warning, and + \@tempboxa and friends. + + * ltfiles.dtx: add \@onlypreamble\@obsoletefile + remove some obsolete code which was previously commented out. + rename \@break@loop to \@break@tfor, and move its definition to + ltinit. + + * tlb0203.lvt: new test file for \@tfor bug. + +1994-05-03 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltidxbib.dtx: Make \nocite issue a warning for an undefined + citation key. + + * ltfinal.dtx: Corrected setting catcode for ctrl-j. + + * amsfonts.fdd: Removed definitions for AMS-supplied cm fonts. + + * cmfonts.fdd: Included definitions for AMS-supplied cm fonts. + +1994-05-03 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltmiscen.dtx: + \@badcrerr replaced by \@nolnerr. + + * ltinit.dtx: + \@badcrerr error message removed. + +1994-05-03 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfinal.dtx: Set the catcode of ^^J to other. + + Removed \@undefinedfonterror. + +1994-05-02 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutput.dtx (subsubsection{Float control}): + + Shortened code of \@resethfps. + + Corrected info message code. + + * fontcmds.dtx: + +1994-05-02 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latex209.dtx: Redid the method of switching off 2e commands. + + * ltfinal.dtx: Set all the catcodes before dumping. Made 127 + illegal. + + * install.l2e: Added yandytex.l2e + + * accents.dtx: Rewrote almost everything from scratch. + + * yandytex.l2e: Installed a file from Berthold + + Corrected \@fontswitch. + +1994-05-01 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfloat.dtx (subsection{Floating Environments}): + + Added \@largefloatcheck. + + Removed unnecessary braces from arguments of \@ifnextchar. + +1994-05-01 Braams J.L. <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * classes.dst: + Removed line left over from the driver generation. + + * slides.dtx (subsection{The class code}): + Removed the use of variables to store the version information. + Added \ProvidesFile to slides.def + + * letter.dtx (section{Identification}): + Removed the use of variables to store the version information. + + * classes.dtx (section{Identification}): + Removed the use of variables to store the version information. + + * proc.dtx (subsection{Identification}): + Removed the use of variables to store the version information. + + * makeindx.dtx (subsection{Identification}): + Removed the use of variables to store the version information. + +1994-04-30 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltinit.dtx: + + Added latexinfo commands. + + * fontcmds.dtx: + + Changed prefix in \@protecteddef from frag@ to frag. + Changed warning therein to an info message. + + Removed long lines. + + Changed to, eg, v1.0l. + + * ltoutput.dtx: + + Rogue space removed. + + Cut-off points for adding \@emptycol changed. + + Empty column action added: \@emptycol. + + Full of floats action improved. + + Changed `active characters warning' to an info message. + + (subsection{Floats}): + + Changed wording of some error messages. + + Changed 9* to 199* in dates. + + Fixed bug from \dblfigrule with \@topnewpage. + + Removed long lines. + + Changed to, eg, v1.0l. +1994-04-29 Braams J.L. <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * letter.dtx (section{Identification}): + Use the generic name LaTeX instead of LaTeX2e in the arguments of + \ProvidesClass and removed typeout message. + +1994-04-29 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltboxes.dtx: use `v' in \changes entries. + + * ltxdoc.dtx: Update the documentation. (source2e now has an + index by default.) + + * ltclass.dtx: upgrade version to 1 (no other change, except + using `v' in \changes entries in to match the other kernel + files.) + + * test2e.tex: reset the original \showbox parameters. (As + ltplain now sets them to -1) + +1994-04-28 Braams J.L. <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * classes.dtx (subsubsection{Table of Contents}): + Changed the definitions of \l@part, \l@chapter and \l@section + (article only) to check the value of tocdepth. : + (section{Identification}): + Use the generic name LaTeX instead of LaTeX2e in the arguments of + \ProvidesClass and \ProvidesFile + + * letter.dtx (subsection{Two-side or one-side printing}): + Allow the twoside option in native mode; introduced oneside + option. + (subsubsection{Defining the page styles}): + Changed the definition of the pagestyles plain and empty to also + define the head and feet for even pages; Added different + definition for pagestyle headings when twoside is in effect. + (subsection{The generic letter commands}): + A letter has to start on a `right' page when in twosided mode. + +1994-04-28 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * graphpap.dtx: Leslie's \graphpaper macros, Converted to + ignore spaces between arguments, and documented using doc. + + * ltxdoc.dtx: add \parg for picture mode args. + + * ltpictur.dtx (subsection{Curves}): added \bezier and \qbezier + (section{Picture Mode}): Modified \picture \multiput and \bezier + so that they ignore spaces between arguments. + (section{Picture Mode}): made \circle use \@inmatherr + +1994-04-28 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltplain.dtx (section{Plain \TeX}): + Turn off overrfull box tracing in trancript file. + + * doc.dtx (subsection{Bells and whistles}): + Ignore \Finale without \StopEventually. + + * latint.dtx: + Removed \uppercase from all counter assignments dealing possibly + with hex numbers. That means that + \DeclareMathSymbol{m}{\mathord}{operators}{"6d} + doesn't work any longer (must be "6D now). + On the other hand + \DeclareMathSymbol{m}{\mathord}{operators}{`m} + although we would suggest to use at least `\m + + * ltlists.dtx: + Replaced the warning \@ltxnomath by \@inmatherr. + + * ltinit.dtx (section{Initex initialisations}): + Added error macro \@inmatherr#1 to be issued by commands + that will not work in math mode (like (\circle)) + + * doc.dtx (subsection{Redefining the \textsf{index} environment}): + Use \RequirePackage to input multicol. + +1994-04-25 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltclass.dtx: Remove extra full stops from the ends of some + error messages. + +1994-04-25 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltmiscen.dtx: + message changed to "\verb ended by end of line" + +1994-04-24 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltpage.dtx: + Redefine \@leftmark and \@rightmark to use \@firstoftwo + and \@secondoftwo. + + * classes.dtx (subsection{Font changing}): + We do warn now if \sl or \sc is found in math + (not that they should be used at all. + + * ltpictur.dtx: + Removed surplus spaces after "\hbox to " in several cases. + +1994-04-23 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfinal.dtx (subsection{Font loading}): + Checked the value of \font@submax. If greater 0pt issue a + bold warning and reset it to 0pt. + + * ltmiscen.dtx: + \verb error messages reworded. + +1994-04-22 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltplain.dtx: + Replaced width, height, depth by \@wifth, \@height, \@depth. + + * latint.dtx: + Replace the use of \@leftmark with \@firstoftwo. + Moved \@tempdimc to ltinit.dtx. + + * ltinit.dtx: + Moved all \@gobble... macros to this file. + + * ltmiscen.dtx (subsection{Environments}): + Messages generated by \enddocument reworded. + +1994-04-21 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltboxes.dtx (section{\LaTeX\ Box commands}): add colour + support to minipage. add comments throughout the file. + + * source2e.tex: modify to always print the index and change + history, no longer need to use ltxdoc.cfg to get the index. + +1994-04-21 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * newlfont.dtx: + Changed message "Don't use ..." to "Command \foo invalid in math mode". + + * lfonts.dtx: + Changed message "Don't use ..." to "Command \foo invalid in math mode". + + * fam.dtx: + Changed message "Don't use ..." to "Command \foo invalid in math mode". + Changed \errmessage's to \@latexerr's. + +1994-04-21 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * install.l2e: Corrected the wording of the bug report. + + * ltfinal.dtx: Added some documentation, incorporated ltcodes.dtx. + This now includes setting the catcodes of 128--255 to `illegal'. + +1994-04-20 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * features.tex: New name for dircheck. + Improve description of package option names. Modify + description of dtx extension (as they may now be directly + processed by LaTeX. + \@filename@parse typo corrected to \filename@parse. + +1994-04-20 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * fam.dtx (subsection{Macros for loading fonts}): + Added the global flag \ifG@fontsubs. This will be set to true + when automatic font substitution happened. + + * ltmiscen.dtx (subsection{Environments}): + Moved the warning messages in \enddocument so that they will appear in + succession. Also ensure that the aux file is always read so that toc etc. + will be correctly produced even in case of multiple labels. + Query \ifG@fontsubs and issue a warning in \enddocument when set to true. + Also check if size substitution has happened and issue a warning if it + is greater than \fontsubfuzz. + +1994-04-20 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latex209.dtx: Redefined \verbatim@noligs@list. + +1994-04-19 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltpage.dtx Improve documentation. + +1994-04-18 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfinal.dtx: Use catcode15 not catcode13 for control chars. + Initialise \textwidth \textheight and page style. + + * ltfloat.dtx: removed colour support from \@footnotetext and + \@savemarbox. The `simple' extra groups that had been added + cause incorrect spacing. More complicated modifications + required for colour support will be done in color.sty. + +1994-04-18 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latint.dtx: + Removed surplus definition of \no@alphabet@error (see fam.dtx entry). + Corrected an error in \DeclareMathAlphabet M@#3 -> M@#2. + Added a missing % in \SetMathAlphabet@. + Changed two error message helps still containing \documentstyle. :-) + Changed all "Redeclaring something..." messages to log only infos. + Changed "Check substitution defaults ..." message to "Checking defaults ..." + + * fam.dtx: + Changed message "Calculating math sizes ..." to appear only in + transcript file. + \no@alphabet@error reimplemented to be LaTeX err message. + \no@alphabet@help removed. + + * tracefnt.dtx: + Changed line breaks and wording in some messages. + Removed surplus "." from some warning messages. + All warning/error messages changed to start "LaTeX Font Warning" etc. + Continuation lines are changed to "(Font)". + + * tracefnt.dtx (section{Scaled font extraction}): + Removed dimen regs \fontsubfuzz and \fontsubmax and replaced them + by macros \fontsubfuzz and \font@submax. + +1994-04-18 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * web2ctex.l2e: Changed name from unixtex.l2e. Changed the + example shell script to look for a LATEX209INPUTS environment + variable. + + * install.l2e: Changed name of unixtex.l2e to + web2ctex.l2e. + + * latint.dtx: Changed \font@warning to \font@log for redefining + math alphabets and symbol fonts. + +1994-04-17 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltcntlen.dtx: + Use new std counter error message \@nocounterr. + + * ltthm.dtx: + Use new std counter error message \@nocounterr. + + * ltinit.dtx: + Defined \@nocounterr to be the LaTeX2e error command with one + argument that announces unknown counters. Changed \@nocnterr + back to no-arg syntax for compatibility with old styles making + use of that error message. \@nocnterr should not be used by + new LaTeX2e applications. + +1994-04-15 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * proc.dtx: Adding missing guard /class, this produced + incorrect proc.sty. + + * ltboxes.dtx: Added missing % character in definition of + \@isavebox. + +1994-04-14 Braams J.L. <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * slides.dtx (subsection{Font changing}): + \@renewfontswitch has gone; \@newfontswitch has become + \DeclareOldFontCommand + + * letter.dtx (subsection{Font changing}): + \@renewfontswitch has gone; \@newfontswitch has become + \DeclareOldFontCommand + + * classes.dtx (subsection{Fonts}): + The size changing commands are no longer defined in the + kernel. Use \newcommand instead of \renewcommand. + (subsection{Font changing}): + \@renewfontswitch has gone; \@newfontswitch has become + \DeclareOldFontCommand + + * oldgerm.dtx: + Renamed \@newtextcmd to \DeclareTextFontCommand + + * fontcmds.dtx: + Renamed \@newtextcmd to \DeclareTextFontCommand and + \@newfontswitch to \DeclareOldFontCommand as agreed in Warwick. + + +1994-04-14 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * source2e.tex: fix to pagestyle in change log. + +1994-04-14 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latexbug.tex: Changed the prompt for `a list of files' to a + prompt for a single filename. Made latexbug look to see if it + could find the file, and if it can, it includes the file and the + logfile in the latexbug.msg. + +1994-04-12 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltinit.dtx: Add definition of \@dischyph (was in ltboxes). + + * ltboxes.dtx: Remove redefinition \@acci-iii. (now defined in + ltplain). Remove definition of \@dischyph (now in ltinit). + + * ltplain.dtx: define \' \` \= in terms of \@acci-iii. + Use NFSS font commands in \ttraggedright and \proclaim. + +1994-04-12 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * manifest.l2e: Changes according to splitting of kernel. + + * ltvers.dtx: Have Expansion of \fmtversion (version info) + generated automatically. + + * accdefs.dtx: Removed definitions of accent macros \' \` \= + as these are in the kernel. + +1994-04-12 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * oztex.l2e: Added warning that lines are > 80 chars + +1994-04-11 Braams J.L. <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * classes.dtx (subsubsection{Titlepage}): + Removed bug introduced by inserting \cleardoublepage in the wrong + place. + + Checked the file for long lines and wrapped them. + + LL introduced options openright and openany fot the report and + book classes. + + LL introduced commands \frontmatter, \mainmatter and \backmatter + to the book class. + +1994-04-11 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltclass.dtx: add * form of filecontents environment. + Protect \ProvidesFile against space and / having strange + catcodes. + + * ltinit.dtx: remove setting of errorcontextlines in \@latexerr + remove old definition of the \LaTeX logo. + + * source2e.tex: minor improvements (mainly to the comments) + + * ltthm.dtx: use new style \@nocnterr (diff from Frank, dated + 1994/04/09) + +1994-04-11 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * fam.dtx: Added `defaultscriptratio and + `defaultscriptscriptratio. + + * latex209.dtx: Switched off `enlargethispage and the `!' float + option. + +1994-04-10 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * install.l2e: Split the installation guide into install.l2e, + texpert.l2e, and system-specific oztex.l2e and unixtex.l2e files. + + * template.l2e: Created a template for system.l2e files. + +1994-04-09 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltherest.dtx: + Use standard counter missing error message for \newtheorem. + + * ltcntlen.dtx: + Use \setcounter in \stepcounter to have counter name checked. + Change usage of \@nocnterr to have counter name as argument. + + * ltinit.dtx: + Change default err message to point to the LaTeX manual or + LaTeX companion. + +1994-04-05 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latex209.dtx: Switched off `lrbox, `width, `height and `depth in + 2.09 mode. + + Removed optional arguments to `parbox, `minipage and `newcommand. + + Made `ProvidesPackage and `ProvidesClass produce log entries + rather than warnings. + + Removed `filedate. + +1994-03-31 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltxdoc.dtx: Minor improvements. + + * manifest.l2e: update this file with all the new file names. + + * source2e.tex: update this file with all the new file names. + + * unpack2e.ins: update this file with all the new file names. + + * ltherest.dtx: The only thing left in this file is the old + definition of \documentstyle and \@options, which are + redefined in ltclass.dtx. This file is now removed. + + * ltpage.dtx: Create file. Page style + \raggedbottom \sloppy + etc. Taken from ltherest.dtx. + + * ltidxbib.dtx: create file. index and bibliography stuff from + ltherest.dtx. + +1994-03-29 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltcntlen.dtx: create file. Contains counter and length macros. + + * ltmiscen.dtx: remove counter macros. + +1994-03-28 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfloat.dtx: create file by removing sectioning commands from + ltherest.dtx + Use \normalsize in \@caption in place of \@normalsize. + + * ltsect.dtx: create file by removing sectioning commands from + ltherest.dtx. + + * ltthm.dtx: create file by removing theorem environment from + ltherest.dtx. + + * lttab.dtx: Improve documentation, mainly making sure that + \changes entries are not in the scope of `oldcomments'. + + * ltlists.dtx: Improve documentation, mainly making sure that + \changes entries are not in the scope of `oldcomments'. + + * ltmiscen.dtx: Improve documentation, mainly making sure that + \changes entries are not in the scope of `oldcomments'. + + * ltfiles.dtx: remove \@normalsize test from \document. Use + \normalsize instead of \@normalsize. + + * ltinit.dtx: Remove redefinition of \newcount and friends as + version in ltplain.dtx is no longer \outer. + Comment out the experimental version of \@bsphack. + + Remove test for \cs{inputlineno} undefined as it is + defined in ltplain.dtx + + * ltplain.dtx: remove \outer from \newskip \newdimen \newwrite + and \newfam. Also comment out the definition of the `log like' + operators. (This does not alter the format, as they were + previously redefined by later files.) + + * ltdirchk.dtx: Improve documentation. (Removal of comments + refering to obsolete versions of the file.) + +1994-03-25 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * source2e.tex: fix date to be \fmtversion, and add authors. + + * ltxdoc.dtx (section{DocInclude}): Use \part to separate the + individual file sections. + + * Started Keeping Change log in GNU format. All entries below + this point, have been converted from the LaTeX/doc \changes + log. + +1994-03-16 Braams J.L. <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * proc.dtx: + Removed the use of \wlog and included \fileversion in the optional + argument of \ProvidesClass + + * slides.dtx: + Removed the \typeout lines since they are no longer needed. + + * varioref.dtx (subsection{Options}): + Inserted missing hash mark in the code for the spanish option. + +1994-03-16 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfiles.dtx v1.0c \document (DPC) directly add file list + settings + + * ltclass.dtx 0.3f \listfiles Move this code directly into + \document + + * ltclass.dtx 0.3f "General" Add pkgindoc package + +1994-03-15 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltdirchk.dtx 1.0c "General" Add \NeedsTeXFormat + + * ltclass.dtx 0.3e \@missingfileerror Quit on x or X just like + a real error + + * fontcmds.dtx v3.2a "General" Removed defs of short-forms and + all sizes except \normalize + + * fontcmds.dtx v3.2a "General" Removed \@renewfontswitch + + * fontcmds.dtx v3.2a "General" Changed \/ to \@@italiccorr + + * fontcmds.dtx v3.2a "General" Adapted to mass formatting + +1994-03-15 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * varioref.dtx (subsection{Options}): + Text added for spanish default (Julio Sanchez). + Changed all \extra... to \extras... that was a bug + +1994-03-14 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltherest.dtx v1.0c \end@float (DPC) Use \color@endgroup + + * ltherest.dtx v1.0c \@xfloat (DPC) Use \color@begingroup + + * ltherest.dtx v1.0c \@savemarbox (DPC) Use \color@begingroup + + * ltherest.dtx v1.0c \@footnotetext (DPC) Use + \color@begingroup, add \endgraf + + * ltherest.dtx 1.0c \@xympar (DPC) Use \color@begingroup + + * ltboxes.dtx 1.0b \sbox Use \color@begingroup + + * ltboxes.dtx 1.0b \lrbox Use \color@begingroup + + * ltboxes.dtx 1.0b \color@endgroup macro added for colour + support + + * ltboxes.dtx 1.0b \color@begingroup macro added for colour + support + + * ltboxes.dtx 1.0b \@isavepicbox Use \color@begingroup + + * ltboxes.dtx 1.0b \@isavebox Use \color@begingroup + +1994-03-14 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * lablst.tex: Added. + + * idx.tex: Added. + +1994-03-14 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * classes.dtx (subsubsection{Margins}): + Shortened calculation for margins. + +1994-03-13 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltinit.dtx v1.0c \@tfor (DPC) Add \@tf@r so a single group is + correctly treated. + + * ltfiles.dtx 0.3b \InputIfFileExists Use new cmd + \@addtofilelist + + * ltclass.dtx 0.3d \listfiles Reset \@addtofilelist at begin + document + + * ltclass.dtx 0.3d \@addtofilelist Macro added + +1994-03-13 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * docstrip.dtx: + Replaced \if!#2! by \if>#2> in \from to allow negated modules + appearing in this place. + + * doc.dtx: + Removed \typeout's + + * eufrak.dtx: + Removed \typeout's + + * euscript.dtx: + Removed \typeout's + + * latexsym.dtx: + Removed \typeout's + + * exscale.dtx: + Removed \typeout's + + * oldgerm.dtx: + Removed \typeout's + + * varioref.dtx: + Removed \typeout's + + * pandora.dtx: + Removed \typeout's + + * docstrip.dst: + Corrected unpacking for ltxdoc.cls (change of docstrip module). + + * classes.dtx + (subsubsection{The dimension of text}): + Use same default values for native mode as in old styles. + + (section{Identification}): + Added file versions to the \Provides... commands + + (subsection{Footnotes}): + Use \@makefnmark rather than its expansion in the definition + of \@makefntext. + +1994-03-12 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltplain.dtx v1.0b "General" Name changed from lplain. The end + of an era + + * ltinit.dtx v1.0b \@yargdef Name changed from \XXX@Argdef + + * ltinit.dtx v1.0b \@reargdef New defn, in terms of \@yargdef + + * ltherest.dtx v0.1b \@xympar (DPC) Extra bgroup for colour + + * ltherest.dtx v0.1b \@savemarbox (DPC) Extra group for colour + + * ltdirchk.dtx 1.0b "General" Minor edits to the typeouts in + ltxcheck + + * ltdirchk.dtx 1.0b "General" Change name from dircheck.dtx + + * ltclass.dtx 0.3c \ProvidesPackage use \@gtempa + + * ltclass.dtx 0.3c \ProvidesPackage Add \wlog + + * ltclass.dtx 0.3c \ProvidesFile Add \wlog + + * ltclass.dtx 0.3c "General" Change name from docclass to + ltclass + + * ltclass.dtx 0.3c \@fileswithoptions Do not use + \@pr@videpackage to avoid typeout + +1994-03-12 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * classes.dtx + (section{Identification}): + Removed \typeout statements since this is now handled by + \Provide... + + (subsubsection{Margins}): + New algorithm for calculation \oddsidemargin. + New algorithm for calculating \marginparwidth. + + * unpack2e.ins: + Changed kernel generation using new file names. + +1994-03-11 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * slides.dtx: Corrected \@oval, like previous change to + latex.dtx. + + * latint.dtx: \DeclareSymbolFontAlphabet: Added check against + use of alphabet switch outside of math mode. + +1994-03-10 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * newlfont.dtx: Changed \math@bgroup/\math@egroup to use + \bgroup/\egroup, to follow the change in fam.dtx. + + * fam.dtx: Changed \math@bgroup/\math@egroup to use + \bgroup/\egroup rather than \begingroup/\endgroup to avoid + leaking out of style changes. Side effect: now always produce + mathord atoms. + + * tlb0320.lvt: Added \showoutput and \scrollmode. + + * manifest.l2e: Added syntonly.dtx, syntonly.ins and + nfssfont.tex. + + * l2extra.dst: Added generation of syntonly package. Removed + generation of .drv file for varioref. + + * syntonly.dst: Added to distribution. + + * syntonly.dtx: Added to distribution. + +1994-03-08 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltplain.dtx v1.0a "General" Remove need for a driver file. + + * ltdirchk.dtx 1.0a "General" Reorganise driver module into `new + style' + + * ltclass.dtx 0.3b "General" Modify driver code into `new style' + +1994-03-08 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * slides.dtx: Changed \@makefnmark to call \@makefntext rather + that \@thefnmark directly. + + * letter.dtx: Changed \@makefnmark to call \@makefntext rather + that \@thefnmark directly. Changed class to always write an + .aux file, so that, e.g., cross referencing commands work. + + * tl2e4.tlg: Update for new versions of packages latexsym, + newlfont, euscript. + + * tlxs05s.tlg: Update for removal of declared option `twoside' + in slides.dtx. + + * tlcs05s.tlg: Update for removal of declared option `twoside' + in slides.dtx. + + * tlcs01a.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a --> + v2.1b). + + * tlcs01b.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a --> + v2.1b). + + * tlcs01l.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a --> + v2.1b). + + * tlcs01p.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a --> + v2.1b). + + * tltc001.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a --> + v2.1b). + + * tltc002.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a --> + v2.1b). + + * tlcs01r.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a --> + v2.1b). + + * tlcs02.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a --> + v2.1b). + + * tlcs04a.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a --> + v2.1b). + + * tlcs04b.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a --> + v2.1b). + + * tlcs04r.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a --> + v2.1b). + + * tlcs08.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a --> + v2.1b). + + * slides.dtx: Corrected first argument of \IfFileExists for + reading sfonts.cfg: sfonts.def to sfonts.cfg. + + * tnfss1.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a --> + v2.1b). + + * tnfss2.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a --> + v2.1b). + + * tnfss3.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a --> + v2.1b). + + * tnfss4.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a --> + v2.1b). + + * tnfss5.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a --> + v2.1b). + + * tnfss6.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a --> + v2.1b). + + * tl2e5.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a --> + v2.1b). + + * tlb0014.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a --> + v2.1b). + + * vlatex01.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a --> + v2.1b). + + * vlatex02.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a --> + v2.1b). + + * vlatex03.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a --> + v2.1b). + + * vlatex04.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a --> + v2.1b). + + * vlatex06.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a --> + v2.1b). + + * vlatex07.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a --> + v2.1b). + + * tl2e1.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a --> + v2.1b). + + * tl2e2.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a --> + v2.1b). + + * tl2e3.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a --> + v2.1b). + + * tlb0057.tlg: Updated for new filedate (\docdate taken up + from some file). + + * tlb0010.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a --> + v2.1b). + + * tlb0018.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a --> + v2.1b). + + * tlb0073.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a --> + v2.1b). + + * tlb0077.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a --> + v2.1b). + + * fontcmds.dtx: Corrected typo in documentation. + +1994-03-07 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * lttab.dtx v1.0a "General" Long lines wrapped to 72 columns + + * ltpictur.dtx v0.1a "General" Long lines wrapped to 72 columns + + * ltpictur.dtx v0.1a "General" Initial version, split from + latex.dtx + + * ltlists.dtx v1.0a "General" Long lines wrapped to 72 columns + + * ltinit.dtx v1.0a "General" (DPC) Removed input of nfsscode.ltx + + * ltinit.dtx v1.0a \@@italiccorr Macro added + + * ltinit.dtx v0.1a "General" Long lines wrapped to 72 columns + + * ltinit.dtx v0.1a "General" Initial version, split from + latex.dtx + + * ltherest.dtx v0.1a \end@float (DPC) Extra group for colour + + * ltherest.dtx v0.1a "General" Long lines wrapped to 72 columns + + * ltherest.dtx v0.1a "General" Initial version, split from + latex.dtx + + * ltherest.dtx v0.1a \@xfloat (DPC) Extra group for colour + + * ltherest.dtx v0.1a \@settodim (DPC) Extra group for colour + + * ltherest.dtx v0.1a \@hangfrom (DPC)Extra groups for colour + + * ltherest.dtx v0.1a \@footnotetext (DPC) Extra group for colour + + * ltfinal.dtx v0.1a "General" Remove oldcomments environment + + * ltfinal.dtx v0.1a "General" Initial version, split from + latex.dtx + + * ltfinal.dtx 0.1a "General" use \InputIfFileExists not + \IfFileExists + + * ltfinal.dtx 0.1a "General" move code here from lhyphen.dtx + + * ltfinal.dtx 0.1a "General" Add code from the old dump.dtx + + * ltfiles.dtx v1.0a "General" Long lines wrapped to 72 columns + + * ltfiles.dtx v1.0a "General" Initial version, split from + latex.dtx + + * ltboxes.dtx v1.0a "General" Unify format with other Kernel + files + + * ltboxes.dtx v0.1a \@mpfootnotetext (DPC) Extra group for + colour + +1994-03-07 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * cmextra.dst: Corrected `cyrilic' --> `cyrillic'. Changed + 1993 to 1994. + + * slides.dtx: Removed declared option `twoside' (Suggested by + Joachim Schrod). + +1994-03-07 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * makeindx.dtx (subsection{Makeidx}): + Changed \newcommand to \providecommand for \seename. + +1994-03-06 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latexsym.dtx: + Changed \typeout's to \wlog's + + * newlfont.dtx (section{The Code}): + Define \cal and \mit to behave as in NFSS1 + +1994-03-04 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltvers.dtx v1.0a "General" Initial version, split from + latex.dtx + + * lttab.dtx v1.0a "General" Initial version, split from + latex.dtx + + * ltlists.dtx v1.0a "General" Initial version, split from + latex.dtx + +1994-03-04 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * testpage.tex: Changed question asking for paper type so that + the answer must now include `paper'. Added question for + doublesided printing. + +1994-03-03 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltboxes.dtx 0.1f \@irsbox Replaced a missing \else + +1994-03-03 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltxdoc.dtx: + Added driver code in front so that the documentation can be + processed by simply running the file through LaTeX2e. + Set counter StandardModuleDepth to 1, since all ltx documentation + needs that setting anyway. + +1994-03-02 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltclass.dtx 0.3a "General" Remove need for driver file + + * ltboxes.dtx v0.1e "General" Remove need for drv file + + * ltboxes.dtx v0.1e "General" Add 2ekernel module + +1994-03-02 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * unpack2e.ins: Added 2ekernel conditional to generation of + ltboxes.ltx from ltboxes.dtx since this is now necessary + (cf. last change to ltboxes.dtx). + + * unpack2e.ins: Added 2ekernel conditional to generation of + latex2e.ltx from docclass.dtx since this is now necessary + (cf. last change to docclass.dtx). + + * unpack2e.ins: Removed generation of latex2e.drv and + dircheck.drv. + + * slides.dst: Renamed sfontdef.* to sfonts.*. + + * unpacked.l2e: Removed *.drv files (no longer generated) + Renamed slides .ltx files to .def. + + * slides.fdd: Removed extra pair of curly braces after + DeclareFontFamily. Corrected Documentation to refer to + sfonts.*, not to sfontdef.*. + + * slides.dtx: Renamed files sfontdef.* to sfonts.*. + + * letter.dtx: Moved documentation driver further up, so that + "latex2e letter.dtx" works. + + * letter.dst: Removed generation of .drv file, changed typeout + message that explains how to typeset the documentation. + + * slides.dtx: Added forgotten changes entry for last change. + + * slides.dtx: Renamed files slides.ltx and sfontdef.ltx to + slides.def and sfontdef.def. + + * slides.fdd: Moved driver further up so that no extra .drv + file is needed, but "latex2e slides.fdd" works. + + * slides.dst: Updated copyright message to show 1994. Removed + generation of .drv files. Renamed .ltx --> .def + + * slides.dtx: Moved driver further up so that no extra .drv + file is needed, but "latex2e slides.dtx" works. Removed + makeidx class option, as it is now a proper package. Changed + leqno class option t oread leqno.clo. Added fleqn class + option (reads fleqn.clo). +1994-03-01 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltdirchk.dtx 0.2k "General" Add unstripped module, so that + dircheck.dtx may be used with initex + +1994-03-01 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * unpack2e.ins: + Removed unnecessary .drv generation (some are still there) + Added the the WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY message to some preambles. + + * oldgerm.dtx: + Moved the driver code in front so that the documentation can be + processed by simply running the file through LaTeX2e. + Removed extra pair of braces after \DeclareFontFamily which has + only three arguments not four. + + * oldlfont.dtx: + Removed surplus \ShortVerb setting. + + * lhyphen.dtx: + Corrected typo in documentation. + +1994-02-28 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * varioref.dtx: + Moved the driver code in front so that the documentation can be + processed by simply running the file through LaTeX2e. + +1994-02-27 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latint.dtx: + Removed decl of \@unused since defined earlier. + Removed decl of \typeout. + Removed decl of \@tempdima \@tempdimb. + +1994-02-26 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * eufrak.dtx: + Changed driver code slightly. + Moved the driver code in front so that the documentation can be + processed by simply running the file through LaTeX2e. + + * euscript.dtx: + Changed driver code slightly. + Moved the driver code in front so that the documentation can be + processed by simply running the file through LaTeX2e. + + * exscale.dtx: + Moved the driver code in front so that the documentation can be + processed by simply running the file through LaTeX2e. + + * nfssfont.dtx: + Added to the distribution. + Moved the driver code in front so that the documentation can be + processed by simply running the file through LaTeX2e. + + * docstrip.dtx (section{Producing the documentation}): + Moved the driver code in front so that the documentation can be + processed by simply running the file through LaTeX2e. + + * oldlfont.dtx: + Moved the driver code in front so that the documentation can be + processed by simply running the file through LaTeX2e. + + * latexsym.dtx: + Moved the driver code in front so that the documentation can be + processed by simply running the file through LaTeX2e. + + * newlfont.dtx: + Moved the driver code in front so that the documentation can be + processed by simply running the file through LaTeX2e. + + * pandora.dtx: + Moved the driver code in front so that the documentation can be + processed by simply running the file through LaTeX2e. + + * preload.dtx: + Moved the driver code in front so that the documentation can be + processed by simply running the file through LaTeX2e. + + * lhyphen.dtx: + Moved the driver code in front so that the documentation can be + processed by simply running the file through LaTeX2e. + + * fontdef.dtx: + Moved the driver code in front so that the documentation can be + processed by simply running the file through LaTeX2e. + + * fontcmds.dtx: + Moved the driver code in front so that the documentation can be + processed by simply running the file through LaTeX2e. + +1994-02-24 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * fam.dtx (subsection{Macros for loading fonts}): + Removed catcode settings from \try@load@fontshape and + \DeclareFontShape and placed them into a separate macro called + \nfss@catcodes so that it is easier to maintain special + requirements for packages that make certain characters active. + diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/clsguide.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/clsguide.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..fef1a8e6a28 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/clsguide.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/clsguide.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/clsguide.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..4a926edf9cc --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/clsguide.tex @@ -0,0 +1,1872 @@ +% \iffalse meta-comment +% +% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 +% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere +% in this file. +% +% This file is part of the LaTeX base system. +% ------------------------------------------- +% +% It may be distributed and/or modified under the +% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 +% of this license or (at your option) any later version. +% The latest version of this license is in +% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +% version 2003/12/01 or later. +% +% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". +% +% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is +% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional +% information. +% +% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution +% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with +% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. +% +% \fi +% Filename: clsguide.tex + +\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/12/01] + +\documentclass{ltxguide}[1995/11/28] + +\title{\LaTeXe~for class and package writers} + +\author{Copyright \copyright~1995--2003 The \LaTeX3 Project\\ + All rights reserved} + +\date{9 December 2003} + +\begin{document} + +\maketitle + +\tableofcontents + +\section{Introduction} + +This document is an introduction to writing classes and packages for +\LaTeX{}, with special attention given to upgrading existing +\LaTeX~2.09 packages to \LaTeXe{}. The latter subject is also +covered in an article by Johannes Braams published in TUGboat~15.3. + +\subsection{Writing classes and packages for \LaTeXe} + +\LaTeX{} is a document preparation system that enables the document +writer to concentrate on the contents of their text, without bothering +too much about the formatting of it. For example, chapters are +indicated by |\chapter{<title>}| rather than by selecting 18pt bold. + +The file that contains the information about how to turn logical +structure (like `|\chapter|') into formatting (like `18pt bold ragged +right') is a \emph{document class}. In addition, some features (such +as colour or included graphics) are independent of the document class +and these are contained in \emph{packages}. + +One of the largest differences between \LaTeX~2.09 and \LaTeXe{} is in +the commands used to write packages and classes. In \LaTeX~2.09, +there was very little support for writing |.sty| files, and so writers +had to resort to using low-level commands. + +\LaTeXe{} provides high-level commands for structuring packages. +It is also much easier to build classes and packages on top of each +other, for example writing a local technical report class |cetechr| +(for the Chemical Engineering department) based on |article|. + +\subsection{Overview} + +This document contains an overview of how to write classes and +packages for \LaTeX{}. It does \emph{not} introduce all of the +commands necessary to write packages: these can be found in either +\emph{\LaTeXbook} or \emph{\LaTeXcomp}. But it does describe the new +commands for structuring classes and packages. + +\begin{description} + +\item[Section~\ref{Sec:general}] contains some general advice about + writing classes and packages. It describes the difference between + classes and packages, the command naming conventions, the use of + |doc| and |docstrip|, how \TeX's primitive file and box commands + interact with \LaTeX{}. It also contains some hints about general + \LaTeX{} style. + +\item[Section~\ref{Sec:structure}] describes the structure of classes + and packages. This includes building classes and packages on top of + other classes and packages, declaring options and declaring + commands. It also contains example classes. + +\item[Section~\ref{Sec:commands}] lists the new class and package + commands. + + \item[Section~\ref{Sec:upgrade}] gives detailed advice on how to + upgrade existing \LaTeX~2.09 classes and packages to \LaTeXe{}. + +\end{description} + +\subsection{Further information} + +For a general introduction to \LaTeX{}, including the new features of +\LaTeXe{}, you should read \emph{\LaTeXbook} +by Leslie Lamport~\cite{A-W:LLa94}. + +A more detailed description of the new features of \LaTeX{}, and an +overview of more than 150 packages, is to be found in +\emph{\LaTeXcomp} by Michel Goossens, Frank Mittelbach and Alexander +Samarin~\cite{A-W:GMS94}. + +The \LaTeX{} system is based on \TeX{}, which is +described in \emph{The \TeX book} by Donald E.~Knuth~\cite{A-W:DEK91}. + +There are a number of documentation files which accompany every copy +of \LaTeX{}. A copy of \emph{\LaTeX{} News} will come out with each +six-monthly release of \LaTeX{}, and is found in the files +|ltnews*.tex|. The author's guide \emph{\usrguide} describes the new +\LaTeX{} document features; it is in |usrguide.tex|. The guide +\emph{\fntguide} describes the \LaTeX{} font selection scheme for +class- and package-writers; it is in |fntguide.tex|. Configuring +\LaTeX{} is covered by the guide \emph{\cfgguide} in +\texttt{cfgguide.tex} whilst the philosophy behind our policy on +modifying \LaTeX{} is described in \emph{\modguide} in +\texttt{modguide.tex}. + +We are gradually turning the source code for \LaTeX{} into a \LaTeX{} +document \emph{\sourcecode}. This document includes an index of +\LaTeX{} commands and can be typeset from |source2e.tex|. + +For more information about \TeX{} and \LaTeX{}, please contact your +local \TeX{} Users Group, or the international \TeX{} Users Group. +Here are some useful addresses. +\begin{quote}\small\label{addrs} + \TeX{} Users Group, P.O. Box 1239, Three Rivers, CA~93271-1239, USA\\ + Fax:~+1~209~561~4584 \ Email: \texttt{tug@mail.tug.org} + + UK TUG, 1 Eymore Close, Selly Oak, Birmingham B29~4LB, UK\\ + Fax: +44 121 476 2159 \ Email: \texttt{uktug-enquiries@tex.ac.uk} +\end{quote} + + +\subsection{Policy on standard classes} + +Many of the problem reports we receive concerning the standard classes +are not concerned with bugs but are suggesting, more or less politely, +that the design decisions embodied in them are `not optimal' and +asking us to modify them. + +There are several reasons why we should not make such changes to these +files. +\begin{itemize} +\item + However misguided, the current behaviour is clearly what was + intended when these classes were designed. +\item + It is not good practice to change such aspects of `standard classes' + because many people will be relying on them. +\end{itemize} + +We have therefore decided not to even consider making such +modifications, nor to spend time justifying that decision. This does +not mean that we do not agree that there are many deficiencies in the +design of these classes, but we have many tasks with higher priority +than continually explaining why the standard classes for \LaTeX{} +cannot be changed. + +We would, of course, welcome the production of better classes, or of +packages that can be used to enhance these classes. So your first +thought when you consider such a deficiency will, we hope, be ``what +can I do to improve this?'' + +Similar considerations apply to those parts of the kernel that are +implementing design decisions, many of which should be left to the +class file but are not in the current system. We realise that in such +cases it is much more difficult for you to rectify the problem +yourself but it is also the case that making such changes in the +kernel would probably be a major project for us; therefore such +enhancements will have to wait for \LaTeX3. + +\section{Writing classes and packages} +\label{Sec:writing} + +This section covers some general points concerned with writing +\LaTeX{} classes and packages. + + +\subsection{Old versions} + +If you are upgrading an existing \LaTeX~2.09 style file then we +recommend freezing the 2.09 version and no longer maintaining it. +Experience with the various dialects of \LaTeX{} which existed in the +early 1990's suggests that maintaining packages for different versions +of \LaTeX{} is almost impossible. It will, of course, be necessary +for some organisations to maintain both versions in parallel for some +time but this is not essential for those packages and classes +supported by individuals: they should support only the new standard +\LaTeXe{}, not obsolete versions of \LaTeX{}. + + +\subsection{Using `docstrip' and `doc'} + +If you are going to write a large class or package for \LaTeX{} then +you should consider using the |doc| software which comes with +\LaTeX{}. +\LaTeX{} classes and packages written using this can be +processed in two ways: they can be run through \LaTeX{}, to produce +documentation; and they can be processed with |docstrip|, to produce +the |.cls| or |.sty| file. + +The |doc| software can automatically generate indexes of definitions, +indexes of command use, and change-log lists. It is very useful for +maintaining and documenting large \TeX{} sources. + +The documented sources of the \LaTeX{} kernel itself, and of the +standard classes, etc, are |doc| documents; they are in the |.dtx| +files in the distribution. You can, in fact, typeset the source code +of the kernel as one long document, complete with index, by running +\LaTeX{} on |source2e.tex|. + +For more information on |doc| and |docstrip|, consult the files +|docstrip.dtx|, |doc.dtx|, and \emph{\LaTeXcomp}. For examples of its +use, look at the |.dtx| files. + +\subsection{Is it a class or a package?} +\label{Sec:classorpkg} + +The first thing to do when you want to put some new \LaTeX{} commands +in a file is to decide whether it should be a \emph{document class} or a +\emph{package}. The rule of thumb is: +\begin{quote} + If the commands could be used with any document class, then make + them a package; and if not, then make them a class. +\end{quote} + +There are two major types of class: those like |article|, |report| or +|letter|, which are free-standing; and those which are extensions or +variations of other classes---for example, the |proc| document class, +which is built on the |article| document class. + +Thus, a company might have a local |ownlet| class for printing letters +with their own headed note-paper. Such a class would build on top of +the existing |letter| class but it cannot be used with any other +document class, so we have |ownlet.cls| rather than |ownlet.sty|. + +The |graphics| package, in contrast, provides commands for including +images into a \LaTeX{} document. Since these commands can be used +with any document class, we have |graphics.sty| rather than +|graphics.cls|. + + +\subsection{Command names} + +\LaTeX{} has three types of command. + +There are the author commands, such as |\section|, |\emph| and +|\times|: most of these have short names, all in lower case. + +There are also the class and package writer commands: +most of these have long mixed-case names such as the following. +\begin{verbatim} + \InputIfFileExists \RequirePackage \PassOptionsToClass +\end{verbatim} + +Finally, there are the internal commands used in the \LaTeX{} +implementation, such as |\@tempcnta|, |\@ifnextchar| and |\@eha|: +most of these commands contain |@| in their name, which means they +cannot be used in documents, only in class and package files. + +Unfortunately, for historical reasons the distinction between these +commands is often blurred. For example, |\hbox| is an internal +command which should only be used in the \LaTeX{} kernel, whereas +|\m@ne| is the constant $-1$ and could have been |\MinusOne|. + +However, this rule of thumb is still useful: if a command has |@| in +its name then it is not part of the supported \LaTeX{} language---and +its behaviour may change in future releases! If a command is +mixed-case, or is described in \emph{\LaTeXbook}, then you can rely on +future releases of \LaTeXe{} supporting the command. + +\subsection{Box commands and colour} +\label{Sec:colour} + +Even if you do not intend to use colour in your own documents, by +taking note of the points in this section you can ensure that your +class or package is compatible with the |color| package. This may +benefit people using your class or package who have access to colour +printers. + +The simplest way to ensure `colour safety' is to always use \LaTeX{} +box commands rather than \TeX{} primitives, that is use |\sbox| rather +than |\setbox|, |\mbox| rather than |\hbox| and |\parbox| or +the |minipage| environment rather than |\vbox|. +The \LaTeX{} box commands have new options which mean that they are now +as powerful as the \TeX{} primitives. + +As an example of what can go wrong, consider that in +|{\ttfamily <text>}| +the font is restored just \emph{before} the |}|, whereas in the +similar looking construction +|{\color{green} <text>}| +the colour is restored just \emph{after} the final |}|. Normally this +distinction does not matter at all; but consider a primitive \TeX{} +box assignment such as: +\begin{verbatim} + \setbox0=\hbox{\color{green} <text>} +\end{verbatim} +Now the colour-restore occurs after the |}| and so is \emph{not} +stored in the box. Exactly what bad effects this can have depends on +how colour is implemented: it can range from getting the wrong +colours in the rest of the document, to causing errors in the +dvi-driver used to print the document. + +Also of interest is the command |\normalcolor|. This is +normally just |\relax| (i.e., does nothing) +but you can use it rather like |\normalfont| to +set regions of the page such as captions or section headings to the +`main document colour'. + + +\subsection{Defining text and math characters} +\label{Sec:chars} + +Because \LaTeXe{} supports different encodings, definitions of commands +for producing symbols, accents, composite glyphs, etc.\ must be +defined using the commands provided for this purpose and described in +\emph{\fntguide}. This part of the system is still under development +so such tasks should be undertaken with great caution. + +Also, |\DeclareRobustCommand| should be used for encoding-independent +commands of this type. + +Note that it is no longer possible to refer to the math font set-up +outside math mode: for example, neither |\textfont 1| nor +|\scriptfont 2| are guaranteed to be defined in other modes. + + +\subsection{General style} +\label{Sec:general} + +The new system provides many commands designed to help you produce +well-structured class and package files that are both robust and +portable. This section outlines some ways to make intelligent use of +these. + +\subsubsection{Loading other files} +\label{Sec:loading} + +\NEWdescription{1995/12/01} +\LaTeX{} provides these commands: +\begin{verbatim} + \LoadClass \LoadClassWithOptions + \RequirePackage \RequirePackageWithOptions +\end{verbatim} +for using classes or packages inside other classes or packages. We +recommend strongly that you use them, rather than the primitive +|\input| command, for a number of reasons. + +Files loaded with |\input <filename>| will not be listed in the +|\listfiles| list. + +If a package is always loaded with |\RequirePackage...| or |\usepackage| +then, even if its loading is requested several times, it will be +loaded only once. By contrast, if it is loaded with |\input| then it +can be loaded more than once; such an extra loading may waste time and +memory and it may produce strange results. + +If a package provides option-processing then, again, strange results +are possible if the package is |\input| rather than loaded by means of +|\usepackage| or |\RequirePackage...|. + +If the package |foo.sty| loads the package |baz.sty| by use of +|\input baz.sty| then the user will get a warning: +\begin{verbatim} + LaTeX Warning: You have requested package `foo', + but the package provides `baz'. +\end{verbatim} +Thus, for several reasons, using |\input| to load packages is not a +good idea. + +Unfortunately, if you are upgrading the file |myclass.sty| to a class +file then you have to make sure that any old files which contain +|\input myclass.sty| still work. + +This was also true for the standard classes (|article|, |book| and +|report|), since a lot of existing \LaTeX~2.09 document styles contain +|\input article.sty|. The approach which we use to solve this is +to provide minimal files |article.sty|, |book.sty| and |report.sty|, +which simply load the appropriate class files. + +For example, |article.sty| contains just the following lines: +\begin{verbatim} + \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e} + \@obsoletefile{article.cls}{article.sty} + \LoadClass{article} +\end{verbatim} +You may wish to do the same or, if you think that it is safe to do so, +you may decide to just remove |myclass.sty|. + +\subsubsection{Make it robust} + +We consider it good practice, when writing packages and classes, to use +\LaTeX{} commands as much as possible. + +Thus, instead of using |\def...| we recommend using one of +|\newcommand|, |\renewcommand| or |\providecommand|; |\CheckCommand| is +also useful. Doing this makes +it less likely that you will inadvertently redefine a command, giving +unexpected results. + +When you define an environment, use |\newenvironment| or +|\renewenvironment| instead |\def\foo{...}| and |\def\endfoo{...}|. + +If you need to set or change the value of a \m{dimen} or \m{skip} +register, use |\setlength|. + +To manipulate boxes, use \LaTeX{} commands such as |\sbox|, +|\mbox| and |\parbox| rather than |\setbox|, |\hbox| and |\vbox|. + +Use |\PackageError|, |\PackageWarning| or |\PackageInfo| (or the +equivalent class commands) rather than |\@latexerr|, |\@warning| or +|\wlog|. + +It is still possible to declare options by defining |\ds@<option>| and +calling |\@options|; but we recommend the |\DeclareOption| and +|\ProcessOptions| commands instead. These are more powerful and use +less memory. So rather than using: +\begin{verbatim} + \def\ds@draft{\overfullrule 5pt} + \@options +\end{verbatim} +you should use: +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareOption{draft}{\setlength{\overfullrule}{5pt}} + \ProcessOptions\relax +\end{verbatim} + +The advantage of this kind of practice is that your code is more +readable and, more important, that it is less likely to break when +used with future versions of \LaTeX{}. + +\subsubsection{Make it portable} + +It is also sensible to make your files are as portable as possible. To +ensure this; they should contain only visible 7-bit text; and the +filenames should contain at most eight characters (plus the three +letter extension). Also, of course, it \textbf{must not} have the +same name as a file in the standard \LaTeX{} distribution, however +similar its contents may be to one of these files. + +It is also useful if local classes or packages have a common prefix, +for example the University of Nowhere classes might begin with |unw|. +This helps to avoid every University having its own thesis class, all +called |thesis.cls|. + +If you rely on some features of the \LaTeX{} kernel, or on a package, +please specify the release-date you need. For example, the package +error commands were introduced in the June 1994 release so, if you use +them then you should put: +\begin{verbatim} + \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1994/06/01] +\end{verbatim} + +\subsubsection{Useful hooks} + +Some packages and document styles had to redefine the command +|\document| or |\enddocument| to achieve their goal. This is no +longer necessary. You can now use the `hooks' |\AtBeginDocument| and +|\AtEndDocument| (see Section~\ref{Sec:delays}). Again, using these +hooks makes it less likely that your code breaks with future versions +of \LaTeX{}. It also makes it more likely that your package can work +together with someone else's. + +\NEWdescription{1996/12/01} +However, note that code in the |\AtBeginDocument| hook is part of the +preamble. Thus there are restrictions on what can be put there; in +particular, no typesetting can be done. + +\section{The structure of a class or package} +\label{Sec:structure} + +\LaTeXe{} classes and packages have more structure than \LaTeX~2.09 +style files did. The outline of a class or package file is: +\begin{description} +\item[Identification] The file says that it is a \LaTeXe{} package or + class, and gives a short description of itself. +\item[Preliminary declarations] + Here the file declares some commands and can also load + other files. Usually these commands will be just those needed for + the code used in the declared options. +\item[Options] The file declares and processes its options. +\item[More declarations] This is where the file does most of its work: + declaring new variables, commands and fonts; and loading other files. +\end{description} + +\subsection{Identification} + +The first thing a class or package file does is identify itself. +Package files do this as follows: +\begin{verbatim} + \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e} + \ProvidesPackage{<package>}[<date> <other information>] +\end{verbatim} +For example: +\begin{verbatim} + \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e} + \ProvidesPackage{latexsym}[1994/06/01 Standard LaTeX package] +\end{verbatim} +Class files do this as follows: +\begin{verbatim} + \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e} + \ProvidesClass{<class-name>}[<date> <other information>] +\end{verbatim} +For example: +\begin{verbatim} + \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e} + \ProvidesClass{article}[1994/06/01 Standard LaTeX class] +\end{verbatim} +\NEWdescription{1998/06/19} +The \m{date} should be given in the form `\textsc{yyyy/mm/dd}' and +must be present if the optional argument is used (this is also true +for the |\NeedsTeXFormat| command). +Any derivation from this syntax will result in low-level \TeX{} +errors---the commands expect a valid syntax to speed up the daily +usage of the package or class and make no provision for the case that +the developer made a mistake! + +This date is checked whenever a user specifies a date in their +|\documentclass| or |\usepackage| command. For example, if you wrote: +\begin{verbatim} + \documentclass{article}[1995/12/23] +\end{verbatim} +then users at a different location +would get a warning that their copy of |article| was out of +date. + +The description of a class is displayed when the class is used. The +description of a package is put into the log file. These descriptions +are also displayed by the |\listfiles| command. The phrase +\texttt{Standard LaTeX} \textbf{must not} be used in the identification +banner of any file other than those in the standard \LaTeX{} +distribution. + + +\subsection{Using classes and packages} + +The first major difference between \LaTeX~2.09 style files and +\LaTeXe{} packages and classes is that \LaTeXe{} supports +\emph{modularity}, in the sense of building files from small +building-blocks rather than using large single files. + +A \LaTeX{} package or class can load a package as follows: +\begin{verbatim} + \RequirePackage[<options>]{<package>}[<date>] +\end{verbatim} +For example: +\begin{verbatim} + \RequirePackage{ifthen}[1994/06/01] +\end{verbatim} +This command has the same syntax as the author command |\usepackage|. +It allows packages or classes to use features provided by other +packages. For example, by loading the |ifthen| package, a package +writer can use the `if\dots then\dots else\dots' commands provided +by that package. + +A \LaTeX{} class can load one other class as follows: +\begin{verbatim} + \LoadClass[<options>]{<class-name>}[<date>] +\end{verbatim} +For example: +\begin{verbatim} + \LoadClass[twocolumn]{article} +\end{verbatim} +This command has the same syntax as the author command |\documentclass|. +It allows classes to be based on the syntax and appearance of another +class. For example, by loading the |article| class, a class writer +only has to change the bits of |article| they don't like, rather than +writing a new class from scratch. + +\NEWfeature{1995/12/01} +The following commands can be used in the common case that you want to +simply load a class or package file with exactly those options that +are being used by the current class. +\begin{verbatim} + \LoadClassWithOptions{<class-name>}[<date>] + \RequirePackageWithOptions{<package>}[<date>] +\end{verbatim} +For example: +\begin{verbatim} + \LoadClassWithOptions{article} + \RequirePackageWithOptions{graphics}[1995/12/01] +\end{verbatim} + +\subsection{Declaring options} + +\NEWdescription{1998/12/01} +The other major difference between \LaTeX~2.09 styles and \LaTeXe{} +packages and classes is in option handling. Packages and classes can +now declare options and these can be specified by authors; for +example, the |twocolumn| option is declared by the |article| class. +Note that the name of an option should contain only those characters +allowed in a `\LaTeX{} name'; in particular it must not contain any +control sequences. + +An option is declared as follows: +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareOption{<option>}{<code>} +\end{verbatim} +For example, the |dvips| option (slightly simplified) +to the |graphics| package is implemented as: +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareOption{dvips}{\input{dvips.def}} +\end{verbatim} +This means that when an author writes |\usepackage[dvips]{graphics}|, +the file |dvips.def| is loaded. As another example, the |a4paper| +option is declared in the |article| class to set the |\paperheight| +and |\paperwidth| lengths: +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareOption{a4paper}{% + \setlength{\paperheight}{297mm}% + \setlength{\paperwidth}{210mm}% + } +\end{verbatim} +Sometimes a user will request an option which the class +or package has not explicitly declared. By default this will produce +a warning (for classes) or error (for packages); this behaviour +can be altered as follows: +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareOption*{<code>} +\end{verbatim} +For example, to make the package |fred| produce a warning rather than +an error for unknown options, you could specify: +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareOption*{% + \PackageWarning{fred}{Unknown option `\CurrentOption'}% + } +\end{verbatim} +Then, if an author writes |\usepackage[foo]{fred}|, they will get a +warning \texttt{Package fred Warning: Unknown option `foo'.} As +another example, the |fontenc| package tries to load a file +|<ENC>enc.def| whenever the \m{ENC} option is used. This +can be done by writing: +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareOption*{% + \input{\CurrentOption enc.def}% + } +\end{verbatim} +\NEWdescription{1998/12/01} +It is possible to pass options on to another package or class, using +the command |\PassOptionsToPackage| or |\PassOptionsToClass| (note +that this is a specialised operation that works only for option +names). For example, to pass every unknown option on to the |article| +class, you can use: +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareOption*{% + \PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{article}% + } +\end{verbatim} +If you do this then you should make sure you load the class at some +later point, otherwise the options will never be processed! + +So far, we have explained only how to declare options, not how to +execute them. To process the options with which the file was called, +you should use: +\begin{verbatim} + \ProcessOptions\relax +\end{verbatim} +This executes the \m{code} for each option that was both specified and +declared (see Section~\ref{Sec:commands.options} for details of how +this is done). + +For example, if the |jane| package file contains: +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareOption{foo}{\typeout{Saw foo.}} + \DeclareOption{baz}{\typeout{Saw baz.}} + \DeclareOption*{\typeout{What's \CurrentOption?}} + \ProcessOptions\relax +\end{verbatim} +and an author writes |\usepackage[foo,bar]{jane}|, then they will see +the messages \texttt{Saw foo.} and \texttt{What's bar?} + +\subsection{A minimal class file} + +Most of the work of a class or package is in defining new commands, or +changing the appearance of documents. This is done in the body of the +package, using commands such as |\newcommand| or |\setlength|. + +\LaTeXe{} provides several new commands to help class and package +writers; these are described in detail in Section~\ref{Sec:commands}. + +There are four things that every class file \emph{must} contain: these +are a definition of |\normalsize|, values for |\textwidth| and +|\textheight| and a specification for page-numbering. So a minimal +document class file\footnote {This class is now in the standard +distribution, as \texttt{minimal.cls}.} looks like this: +\begin{verbatim} + \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e} + \ProvidesClass{minimal}[1995/10/30 Standard LaTeX minimal class] + \renewcommand{\normalsize}{\fontsize{10pt}{12pt}\selectfont} + \setlength{\textwidth}{6.5in} + \setlength{\textheight}{8in} + \pagenumbering{arabic} % needed even though this class will + % not show page numbers +\end{verbatim} +However, this class file will not support footnotes, marginals, +floats, etc., nor will it provide any of the 2-letter font commands +such as |\rm|; thus most classes will contain more than this minimum! + +\subsection{Example: a local letter class} + +A company may have its own letter class, for setting letters in the +company style. This section shows a simple implementation of such a +class, although a real class would need more structure. + +The class begins by announcing itself as |neplet.cls|. +\begin{verbatim} + \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e} + \ProvidesClass{neplet}[1995/04/01 NonExistent Press letter class] +\end{verbatim} +Then this next bit passes any options on to the |letter| class, which +is loaded with the |a4paper| option. +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareOption*{\PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{letter}} + \ProcessOptions\relax + \LoadClass[a4paper]{letter} +\end{verbatim} +In order to use the company letter head, it redefines the +|firstpage| page style: this is the page style that is used on +the first page of letters. +\begin{verbatim} + \renewcommand{\ps@firstpage}{% + \renewcommand{\@oddhead}{<letterhead goes here>}% + \renewcommand{\@oddfoot}{<letterfoot goes here>}% + } +\end{verbatim} +And that's it! + +\subsection{Example: a newsletter class} + +A simple newsletter can be typeset with \LaTeX{}, using a variant of the +|article| class. +The class begins by announcing itself as |smplnews.cls|. +\begin{verbatim} + \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e} + \ProvidesClass{smplnews}[1995/04/01 The Simple News newsletter class] + + \newcommand{\headlinecolor}{\normalcolor} +\end{verbatim} +It passes most specified options on to the |article| class: apart from +the |onecolumn| option, which is switched off, and the |green| option, +which sets the headline in green. +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareOption{onecolumn}{\OptionNotUsed} + \DeclareOption{green}{\renewcommand{\headlinecolor}{\color{green}}} + + \DeclareOption*{\PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{article}} + + \ProcessOptions\relax +\end{verbatim} +It then loads the class |article| with the option |twocolumn|. +\begin{verbatim} + \LoadClass[twocolumn]{article} +\end{verbatim} +Since the newsletter is to be printed in colour, it now loads the +|color| package. The class does not specify a device driver option +since this should be specified by the user of the |smplnews| class. +\begin{verbatim} + \RequirePackage{color} +\end{verbatim} +The class then redefines |\maketitle| to produce the title in 72pt +Helvetica bold oblique, in the appropriate colour. +\begin{verbatim} + \renewcommand{\maketitle}{% + \twocolumn[% + \fontsize{72}{80}\fontfamily{phv}\fontseries{b}% + \fontshape{sl}\selectfont\headlinecolor + \@title + ]% + } +\end{verbatim} +It redefines |\section| and switches off section numbering. +\begin{verbatim} + \renewcommand{\section}{% + \@startsection + {section}{1}{0pt}{-1.5ex plus -1ex minus -.2ex}% + {1ex plus .2ex}{\large\sffamily\slshape\headlinecolor}% + } + + \setcounter{secnumdepth}{0} +\end{verbatim} +It also sets the three essential things. +\begin{verbatim} + \renewcommand{\normalsize}{\fontsize{9}{10}\selectfont} + \setlength{\textwidth}{17.5cm} + \setlength{\textheight}{25cm} +\end{verbatim} +In practice, a class would need more than this: it would provide +commands for issue numbers, authors of articles, page styles and so +on; but this skeleton gives a start. The |ltnews| class file is not +much more complex than this one. + +\section{Commands for class and package writers} +\label{Sec:commands} + +This section describes briefly each of the new commands for class and +package writers. To find out about other aspects of the new system, +you should also read \emph{\LaTeXbook}, \emph{\LaTeXcomp} and +\emph{\usrguide}. + +\subsection{Identification} + +The first group of commands discussed here are those used +to identify your class or package file. + +\begin{decl} +|\NeedsTeXFormat| \arg{format-name} \oarg{release-date} +\end{decl} +This command tells \TeX{} that this file should be processed using a +format with name \m{format-name}. You can use the optional argument +\m{release-date} to further specify the earliest release date of the +format that is needed. When the release date of the format is older +than the one specified a warning will be generated. The standard +\m{format-name} is \texttt{LaTeX2e}. The date, if present, must be in +the form \textsc{yyyy/mm/dd}. + +Example: +\begin{verbatim} + \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1994/06/01] +\end{verbatim} + +\begin{decl} +|\ProvidesClass| \arg{class-name} \oarg{release-info} \\ +|\ProvidesPackage| \arg{package-name} \oarg{release-info} +\end{decl} +This declares that the current file contains the definitions for the +document class \m{class-name} or package \m{package-name}. + +The optional \m{release-info}, if used, must contain: +\begin{itemize} + \item the release date of + this version of the file, in the form \textsc{yyyy/mm/dd}; +\item optionally followed by a space and a short description, possibly + including a version number. +\end{itemize} +The above syntax must be followed exactly so that this information +can be used by |\LoadClass| or |\documentclass| (for classes) or +|\RequirePackage| or |\usepackage| (for packages) to test that the +release is not too old. + +The whole of this \m{release-info} information is displayed by +|\listfiles| and should therefore not be too long. + +Example: +\begin{verbatim} + \ProvidesClass{article}[1994/06/01 v1.0 Standard LaTeX class] + \ProvidesPackage{ifthen}[1994/06/01 v1.0 Standard LaTeX package] +\end{verbatim} + +\begin{decl} + |\ProvidesFile| \arg{file-name} \oarg{release-info} +\end{decl} +This is similar to the two previous commands except that here the full +filename, including the extension, must be given. It is used for +declaring any files other than main class and package files. + +Example: +\begin{verbatim} + \ProvidesFile{T1enc.def}[1994/06/01 v1.0 Standard LaTeX file] +\end{verbatim} + +Note that the phrase \texttt{Standard LaTeX} \textbf{must not} be used +in the identification banner of any file other than those in the +standard \LaTeX{} distribution. + +\subsection{Loading files} +\label{Sec:loadf} + +\NEWfeature{1995/12/01} +This group of commands can be used to create your own document class or +package by building on existing classes or packages. +\begin{decl} + |\RequirePackage| \oarg{options-list} \arg{package-name} + \oarg{release-info}\\ + |\RequirePackageWithOptions| \arg{package-name} + \oarg{release-info} +\end{decl} +Packages and classes should use these commands to load other packages. + +The use of |\RequirePackage| is the same as the author command +|\usepackage|. + +Examples: +\begin{verbatim} + \RequirePackage{ifthen}[1994/06/01] + \RequirePackageWithOptions{graphics}[1995/12/01] +\end{verbatim} + +\begin{decl} + |\LoadClass| \oarg{options-list} \arg{class-name} + \oarg{release-info}\\ + |\LoadClassWithOptions| \arg{class-name} + \oarg{release-info} +\end{decl} +\NEWfeature{1995/12/01} +These commands are for use \emph{only} in class files, they cannot be +used in packages files; +they can be used at most once within a class file. + +The use of|\LoadClass| is the same as +the use of |\documentclass| to load a class file. + +Examples: +\begin{verbatim} + \LoadClass{article}[1994/06/01] + \LoadClassWithOptions{article}[1995/12/01] +\end{verbatim} + +\NEWfeature{1995/12/01} +The two |WithOptions| versions simply load the class (or package) file +with exactly those options that are being used by the current file +(class or package). See below, in \ref{Sec:opmove}, for further +discussion of their use. + + +\subsection{Option declaration} +\label{Sec:commands.options.dec} + +\NEWdescription{1998/12/01} +The following commands deal with the declaration and handling of +options to document classes and packages. Every option name must be a +`\LaTeX{} name'. + +There are some commands designed especially for use within the +\m{code} argument of these commands (see below). + +\begin{decl} + |\DeclareOption| \arg{option-name} \arg{code} +\end{decl} +This makes \m{option-name} a `declared option' of the class or package +in which it is put. + +The \m{code} argument contains the code to be executed if that option +is specified for the class or package; it can contain any valid +\LaTeXe{} construct. + +Example: +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareOption{twoside}{\@twosidetrue} +\end{verbatim} + +\begin{decl} + |\DeclareOption*| \arg{code} +\end{decl} +This declares the \m{code} to be executed for every option which is +specified for, but otherwise not explicitly declared by, the class or +package; this code is called the `default option code' and it can +contain any valid \LaTeXe{} construct. + +If a class file contains no |\DeclareOption*| then, by default, all +specified but undeclared options for that class will be silently +passed to all packages (as will the specified and declared options for +that class). + +If a package file contains no |\DeclareOption*| then, by default, each +specified but undeclared option for that package will produce an error. + + +\subsection{Commands within option code} +\label{Sec:within.code} + +These two commands can be used only within the \m{code} argument of +either |\DeclareOption| or |\DeclareOption*|. Other commands commonly +used within these arguments can be found in the next few subsections. + +\begin{decl} + |\CurrentOption| +\end{decl} +This expands to the name of the current option. + +\begin{decl} + |\OptionNotUsed| +\end{decl} +This causes the current option to +be added to the list of `unused options'. + +\NEWfeature{1995/06/01} + You can now include hash marks (\texttt{\#}) within these \m{code} + arguments without special treatment (formerly, it had been + necessary to double them). + +\subsection{Moving options around} +\label{Sec:opmove} + +These two commands are also very useful within the \m{code} argument +of |\DeclareOption| or |\DeclareOption*|: +\begin{decl} + |\PassOptionsToPackage| \arg{options-list} \arg{package-name}\\ + |\PassOptionsToClass| \arg{options-list} \arg{class-name} +\end{decl} +The command |\PassOptionsToPackage| passes the option names in +\m{options-list} to package \m{package-name}. +This means that it adds the \m{option-list} to the +list of options used by any future |\RequirePackage| or |\usepackage| +command for package \m{package-name}. + +Example: +\begin{verbatim} + \PassOptionsToPackage{foo,bar}{fred} + \RequirePackage[baz]{fred} +\end{verbatim} +is the same as: +\begin{verbatim} + \RequirePackage[foo,bar,baz]{fred} +\end{verbatim} + +Similarly, |\PassOptionsToClass| may be used in a class file to pass +options to another class to be loaded with |\LoadClass|. + +\NEWdescription{1995/12/01} +The effects and use of these two commands should be contrasted with +those of the following two (documented above, in \ref{Sec:loadf}): +\begin{verbatim} + \LoadClassWithOptions + \RequirePackageWithOptions +\end{verbatim} +The command|\RequirePackageWithOptions| is similar to +|\RequirePackage|, but it always loads the required package with +exactly the same option list as that being used by the current class +or package, rather than with any option explicitly supplied or passed +on by |\PassOptionsToPackage|. + +The main purpose of |\LoadClassWithOptions| is to allow one class to +simply build on another, for example: +\begin{verbatim} + \LoadClassWithOptions{article} +\end{verbatim} +This should be compared with the slightly different construction +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareOption*{\PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{article}} + \ProcessOptions\relax + \LoadClass{article} +\end{verbatim} +As used above, the effects are more or less the same, but the first is +a lot less to type; also the |\LoadClassWithOptions| method runs +slightly quicker. + +If, however, the class declares options of its own then +the two constructions are different. Compare, for example: +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareOption{landscape}{\@landscapetrue} + \ProcessOptions\relax + \LoadClassWithOptions{article} +\end{verbatim} +with: +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareOption{landscape}{\@landscapetrue} + \DeclareOption*{\PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{article}} + \ProcessOptions\relax + \LoadClass{article} +\end{verbatim} +In the first example, the \textsf{article} class will be loaded with +option |landscape| precisely when the current class is called with +this option. By contrast, in the second example it will never be +called with option \texttt{landscape} as in that case \textsf{article} +is passed options only by the default option handler, but this handler +is not used for |landscape| because that option is explicitly +declared. + +\subsection{Delaying code} +\label{Sec:delays} + +These first two commands are also intended primarily for use within +the \m{code} argument of |\DeclareOption| or |\DeclareOption*|. + +\begin{decl} + |\AtEndOfClass| \arg{code}\\ + |\AtEndOfPackage| \arg{code} +\end{decl} +These commands declare \m{code} that is saved away internally and then +executed after processing the whole of the current class or package +file. + +Repeated use of these commands is permitted: the code in the +arguments is stored (and later executed) in the order of their +declarations. + +\begin{decl} + |\AtBeginDocument| \arg{code}\\ + |\AtEndDocument| \arg{code} +\end{decl} +These commands declare \m{code} to be saved internally and executed +while \LaTeX{} is executing |\begin{document}| or |\end{document}|. + +The \m{code} specified in the argument to |\AtBeginDocument| is +executed near the end of the |\begin{document}| code, \emph{after} the +font selection tables have been set up. It is therefore a useful +place to put code which needs to be executed after everything has been +prepared for typesetting and when the normal font for the document is +the current font. + +\NEWdescription{1995/12/01} +The |\AtBeginDocument| hook should not be used for code that does any +typesetting since the typeset result would be unpredictable. + +The \m{code} specified in the argument to |\AtEndDocument| is +executed at the beginning of the |\end{document}| code, +\emph{before} the final page is finished and before any leftover +floating environments are processed. If some of the \m{code} is to be +executed after these two processes, you should include a |\clearpage| +at the appropriate point in \m{code}. + +Repeated use of these commands is permitted: the code in the +arguments is stored (and later executed) in the order of their +declarations. + +\begin{decl}[1994/12/01] + |\AtBeginDvi| \arg{specials} +\end{decl} +These commands save in a box register things which are written to the +|.dvi| file at the beginning of the `shipout' of the first page of the +document. + +This should not be used for anything that will add any typeset +material to the |.dvi| file. + +Repeated use of this command is permitted. + + +\subsection{Option processing} +\label{Sec:commands.options} + +\begin{decl} + |\ProcessOptions| +\end{decl} +This command executes the \m{code} for each selected option. + +We shall first describe how |\ProcessOptions| works in a package file, +and then how this differs in a class file. + +To understand in detail what |\ProcessOptions| does in a package file, +you have to know the difference between \emph{local} and \emph{global} +options. +\begin{itemize} +\item \textbf{Local options} are those which have been explicitly + specified for this particular package in the \m{options} argument of + any of these: +\begin{quote} + |\PassOptionsToPackage{<options>}| \ |\usepackage[<options>]|\\ + |\RequirePackage[<options>]| +\end{quote} +\item \textbf{Global options} are any other options that are specified + by the author in the \m{options} argument of + |\documentclass[<options>]|. +\end{itemize} +For example, suppose that a document begins: +\begin{verbatim} + \documentclass[german,twocolumn]{article} + \usepackage{gerhardt} +\end{verbatim} +whilst package |gerhardt| calls package |fred| with: +\begin{verbatim} + \PassOptionsToPackage{german,dvips,a4paper}{fred} + \RequirePackage[errorshow]{fred} +\end{verbatim} +then: +\begin{itemize} +\item |fred|'s local options are |german|, |dvips|, |a4paper| + and |errorshow|; +\item |fred|'s only global option is |twocolumn|. +\end{itemize} + +When |\ProcessOptions| is called, the following happen. +\begin{itemize} +\item \emph{First}, for each option so far declared in |fred.sty| + by |\DeclareOption|, it looks to see if that option is either a + global or a local option for |fred|: if it is then the corresponding + code is executed. + + This is done in the order in which these options + were declared in |fred.sty|. +\item \emph{Then}, for each remaining \emph{local} option, the command + |\ds@<option>| is executed if it has been defined somewhere (other + than by a |\DeclareOption|); otherwise, the `default option code' is + executed. If no default option code has been declared then an error + message is produced. + + This is done in the order in which these + options were specified. +\end{itemize} +Throughout this process, the system ensures that the code declared for +an option is executed at most once. + +Returning to the example, if |fred.sty| contains: +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareOption{dvips}{\typeout{DVIPS}} + \DeclareOption{german}{\typeout{GERMAN}} + \DeclareOption{french}{\typeout{FRENCH}} + \DeclareOption*{\PackageWarning{fred}{Unknown `\CurrentOption'}} + \ProcessOptions\relax +\end{verbatim} +then the result of processing this document will be: +\begin{verbatim} + DVIPS + GERMAN + Package fred Warning: Unknown `a4paper'. + Package fred Warning: Unknown `errorshow'. +\end{verbatim} +Note the following: + +\begin{itemize} +\item the code for the |dvips| option is executed before that for the + |german| option, because that is the order in which they are declared + in |fred.sty|; +\item the code for the |german| option is executed only once, when the + declared options are being processed; +\item the |a4paper| and |errorshow| options produce the warning from + the code declared by |\DeclareOption*| (in the order in which they + were specified), whilst the |twocolumn| option does not: this is + because |twocolumn| is a global option. +\end{itemize} + +In a class file, |\ProcessOptions| works in the same way, except +that: \emph{all} options are local; and the default value for +|\DeclareOption*| is |\OptionNotUsed| rather than an error. + +\NEWdescription{1995/12/01} +Note that, because |\ProcessOptions| has a |*|-form, it is wise to +follow the non-star form with |\relax|, as in the previous examples, +since this prevents unnecessary look ahead and possibly misleading +error messages being issued. + +\begin{decl} + |\ProcessOptions*| + |\@options| +\end{decl} +This is like |\ProcessOptions| but it executes the options in the +order specified in the calling commands, rather than in the order of +declaration in the class or package. For a package this means that the +global options are processed first. + +The |\@options| command from \LaTeX~2.09 has been made equivalent to +this in order to ease the task of updating old document styles to +\LaTeXe{} class files. + +\begin{decl} + |\ExecuteOptions| \arg{options-list} +\end{decl} + +For each option in the \m{options-list}, in order, +this command simply executes the command +|\ds@<option>| (if this command is not defined, then that option is +silently ignored). + +It can be used to provide a `default option list' just before +|\ProcessOptions|. For example, suppose that in a class file you want +to set up the default design to be: two-sided printing; 11pt fonts; +in two columns. Then it could specify: +\begin{verbatim} + \ExecuteOptions{11pt,twoside,twocolumn} +\end{verbatim} + + +\subsection{Safe file commands} + +These commands deal with file input; they ensure that the non-existence +of a requested file can be handled in a user-friendly way. + +\begin{decl} +|\IfFileExists| \arg{file-name} \arg{true} \arg{false} +\end{decl} +If the file exists then the code specified in \m{true} is +executed. + +If the file does not exist then the code specified in \m{false} is +executed. + +This command does \emph{not} input the file. + +\begin{decl} + |\InputIfFileExists| \arg{file-name} \arg{true} \arg{false} +\end{decl} +This inputs the file \m{file-name} if it exists and, immediately +before the input, the code specified in \m{true} is executed. + +If the file does not exist then the code specified in \m{false} is +executed. + +It is implemented using |\IfFileExists|. + + +\subsection{Reporting errors, etc} + +These commands should be used by third party classes and packages to +report errors, or to provide information to authors. + +\begin{decl} + |\ClassError| \arg{class-name} \arg{error-text} \arg{help-text}\\ + |\PackageError| \arg{package-name} \arg{error-text} \arg{help-text} +\end{decl} +These produce an error message. The \m{error-text} is displayed and the +|?| error prompt is shown. If the user types |h|, they will be shown +the \m{help-text}. + +Within the \m{error-text} and \m{help-text}: |\protect| can be used to +stop a command from expanding; |\MessageBreak| causes a line-break; +and |\space| prints a space. + +Note that the \m{error-text} will have a full stop added to it, so do +not put one into the argument. + +For example: +\begin{verbatim} + \newcommand{\foo}{FOO} + \PackageError{ethel}{% + Your hovercraft is full of eels,\MessageBreak + and \protect\foo\space is \foo + }{% + Oh dear! Something's gone wrong.\MessageBreak + \space \space Try typing \space <<return>> + \space to proceed, ignoring \protect\foo. + } +\end{verbatim} +produces this display: +\begin{verbatim} + ! Package ethel Error: Your hovercraft is full of eels, + (ethel) and \foo is FOO. + + See the ethel package documentation for explanation. +\end{verbatim} +If the user types |h|, this will be shown: +\begin{verbatim} + Oh dear! Something's gone wrong. + Try typing <<return>> to proceed, ignoring \foo. +\end{verbatim} + +\begin{decl} + |\ClassWarning| \arg{class-name} \arg{warning-text}\\ + |\PackageWarning| \arg{package-name} \arg{warning-text}\\ + |\ClassWarningNoLine| \arg{class-name} \arg{warning-text}\\ + |\PackageWarningNoLine| \arg{package-name} \arg{warning-text}\\ + |\ClassInfo| \arg{class-name} \arg{info-text}\\ + |\PackageInfo| \arg{package-name} \arg{info-text} +\end{decl} +The four |Warning| commands are similar to the error commands, except +that they produce only a warning on the screen, with no error prompt. + +The first two, |Warning| versions, also show the line number where the +warning occurred, whilst the second two, |WarningNoLine| versions, do +not. + +The two |Info| commands are similar except that they log the +information only in the transcript file, including the line number. +There are no |NoLine| versions of these two. + +Within the \m{warning-text} and \m{info-text}: |\protect| can be used to +stop a command from expanding; |\MessageBreak| causes a line-break; +and |\space| prints a space. +Also, these should not end with a full stop as one is +automatically added. + + +\subsection{Defining commands} +\label{Sec:commands.define} + +\LaTeXe{} provides some extra methods of (re)defining commands that are +intended for use in class and package files. + +\NEWfeature{1994/12/01} +The \texttt{*}-forms of these commands should be used to define +commands that are not, in \TeX{} terms, long. This can be useful for +error-trapping with commands whose arguments are not intended to +contain whole paragraphs of text. + +\begin{decl} + |\DeclareRobustCommand| \arg{cmd} \oarg{num} \oarg{default} + \arg{definition}\\ + |\DeclareRobustCommand*| \arg{cmd} \oarg{num} \oarg{default} + \arg{definition} +\end{decl} +This command takes the same arguments as |\newcommand| but it declares +a robust command, even if some code within the\m{definition} is +fragile. You can use this command to define new robust commands, or +to redefine existing commands and make them robust. A log is put into +the transcript file if a command is redefined. + +For example, if |\seq| is defined as follows: +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareRobustCommand{\seq}[2][n]{% + \ifmmode + #1_{1}\ldots#1_{#2}% + \else + \PackageWarning{fred}{You can't use \protect\seq\space in text}% + \fi + } +\end{verbatim} +Then the command |\seq| can be used in moving arguments, even though +|\ifmmode| cannot, for example: +\begin{verbatim} + \section{Stuff about sequences $\seq{x}$} +\end{verbatim} + +Note also that there is no need to put a |\relax| before the +|\ifmmode| at the beginning of the definition; this is because the +protection given by this |\relax| against expansion at the wrong time +will be provided internally. + +\begin{decl} + |\CheckCommand| \arg{cmd} \oarg{num} \oarg{default} + \arg{definition}\\ + |\CheckCommand*| \arg{cmd} \oarg{num} \oarg{default} + \arg{definition} +\end{decl} +This takes the same arguments as |\newcommand| but, rather than define +\m{cmd}, it just checks that the current definition of \m{cmd} is +exactly as given by \m{definition}. An error is raised if these +definitions differ. + +This command is useful for checking the state of the system before +your package starts altering the definitions of commands. It allows +you to check, in particular, that no other package has redefined the +same command. + +\subsection{Moving arguments} + +\NEWdescription{1994/12/01} +The setting of protect whilst processing (i.e.~moving) moving arguments +has been reimplemented, as has the method of writing information from +the |.aux| file to other files such as the |.toc| file. Details can +be found in the file |ltdefns.dtx|. + +We hope that these changes will not affect many packages. + +\section{Miscellaneous commands, etc} +\label{Sec:commands.misc} + +\subsection{Layout parameters} + +\begin{decl} +|\paperheight|\\ +|\paperwidth| +\end{decl} +These two parameters are usually set by the class to be the size of +the paper being used. This should be actual paper size, unlike +|\textwidth| and |\textheight| which are the size of the main text +body within the margins. + + +\subsection{Case changing} +\label{sec:case} + +\begin{decl} + |\MakeUppercase| \arg{text} \\ + |\MakeLowercase| \arg{text} +\end{decl} + +\NEWfeature{1995/06/01} +\TeX{} provides two primitives |\uppercase| and |\lowercase| for +changing the case of text. These are sometimes used in document +classes, for example to set information in running heads in all +capitals. + +Unfortunately, these \TeX{} primitives do not change the case of +characters accessed by commands like |\ae| or |\aa|. To overcome this +problem, \LaTeX{} provides two new commands |\MakeUppercase| and +|\MakeLowercase| to do this. + +For example: +\begin{quotation} +\begin{tabular}{rl} + |\uppercase{aBcD\ae\AA\ss\OE}| & \uppercase{aBcD\ae\AA\ss\OE}\\ + |\lowercase{aBcD\ae\AA\ss\OE}| & \lowercase{aBcD\ae\AA\ss\OE}\\ + |\MakeUppercase{aBcD\ae\AA\ss\OE}| & + \MakeUppercase{aBcD\ae\AA\ss\OE}\\ + |\MakeLowercase{aBcD\ae\AA\ss\OE}| & \MakeLowercase{aBcD\ae\AA\ss\OE} +\end{tabular} +\end{quotation} + +The commands |\MakeUppercase| and |\MakeLowercase| themselves are +robust, but they have moving arguments. + +The commands use the \TeX{} primitives |\uppercase| and |\lowercase|, +and so have a number of unexpected `features'. In particular, they +change the case of everything (except characters in the names of +control-sequences) in their text argument: this includes mathematics, +environment names, and label names. + +For example: +\begin{verbatim} + \MakeUppercase{$x+y$ in \ref{foo}} +\end{verbatim} +produces $X+Y$ and the warning: +\begin{verbatim} + LaTeX Warning: Reference `FOO' on page ... undefined on ... +\end{verbatim} +In the long run, we would like to use all-caps fonts rather than any +command like |\MakeUppercase| but this is not possible at the moment +because such fonts do not exist. + +\NEWdescription{1995/12/01} +In order that upper/lower-casing will work reasonably well, and in +order to provide any correct hyphenation, \LaTeXe{} \emph{must} use, +throughout a document, the same fixed table for changing case. +The table used is designed for the font encoding |T1|; this works well +with the standard \TeX{} fonts for all Latin alphabets but will cause +problems when using other alphabets. + +\subsection{The `openany' option in the `book' class} + +\NEWdescription{1996/06/01} +The |openany| option allows chapter and similar openings to +occur on left hand pages. Previously this option affected only +|\chapter| and |\backmatter|. It now also affects +|\part|, |\frontmatter| and |\mainmatter|. + +\subsection{Better user-defined math display environments} + +\begin{decl} + |\ignorespacesafterend| +\end{decl} + +\NEWfeature{1996/12/01} +\NEWdescription{2003/12/01} +Suppose that you want to define an environment for displaying text +that is numbered as an equation. A straightforward way to do this is +as follows: +\begin{verbatim} + \newenvironment{texteqn} + {\begin{equation} + \begin{minipage}{0.9\linewidth}} + {\end{minipage} + \end{equation}} +\end{verbatim} +However, if you have tried this then you will probably have noticed +that it does not work perfectly when used in the middle of a paragraph +because an inter-word space appears at the beginning of the first +line after the environment. + +There is now an extra command (with a very long name) available that +you can use to avoid this problem; it should be inserted as shown here: +\begin{verbatim} + \newenvironment{texteqn} + {\begin{equation} + \begin{minipage}{0.9\linewidth}} + {\end{minipage} + \end{equation} + \ignorespacesafterend} +\end{verbatim} + +This command may also have other uses. + +\subsection{Normalising spacing} + +\begin{decl} + |\normalsfcodes| +\end{decl} + +\NEWfeature{1997/06/01} +This command should be used to restore the normal settings of the +parameters that affect spacing between words, sentences, etc. + +An important use of this feature is to correct a problem, reported by +Donald Arseneau, that punctuation in page headers has always (in all +known \TeX{} formats) been potentially wrong whenever a page break +happens while a local setting of the space codes is in effect. These +space codes are changed by, for example, the command +\verb|\frenchspacing|) and the \textsf{verbatim} environment. + +It is normally given the correct definition automatically in +|\begin{document}| and so need not be explicitly set; however, if it +is explicitly made nonempty in a class file then automatic +default setting will be over-ridden. + + +\section{Upgrading \LaTeX~2.09 classes and packages} +\label{Sec:upgrade} + +This section describes the changes you may need to make when you +upgrade an existing \LaTeX{} style to a package or class but we shall +start in optimistic mode. + +Many existing style files will run with \LaTeXe{} without any +modification to the file itself. When everything is running OK, +please put a note in the newly created package or class file to record +that it runs with the new standard \LaTeX{}; then distribute it to +your users. + +\subsection{Try it first!} +\label{Sec:try-it} + +The first thing you should do is to test your style in `compatibility +mode'. The only change you need to make in order to do this is, +possibly, to change the extension of the file to |.cls|: you should +make this change only if your file was used as a main document style. +Now, without any other modifications, run \LaTeXe{} on a document that +uses your file. This assumes that you have a suitable collection of +files that tests all the functionality provided by your style file. +(If you haven't, now is the time to make one!) + +You now need to change the test document files so that they are +\LaTeXe{} documents: see \emph{\usrguide} for details of how to do +this and then try them again. You have now tried the test documents +in both \LaTeXe{} native mode and \LaTeX~2.09 compatibility mode. + +\subsection{Troubleshooting} +\label{Sec:trouble} + +If your file does not work with \LaTeXe{}, there are two likely +reasons. +\begin{itemize} +\item \LaTeX{} now has a robust, well-defined designer's interface for + selecting fonts, which is very different from the \LaTeX~2.09 + internals. +\item Your style file may have used some \LaTeX~2.09 internal commands + which have changed, or which have been removed. +\end{itemize} + +When you are debugging your file, you will probably need more +information than is normally displayed by \LaTeXe. This is achieved +by resetting the counter |errorcontextlines| from its default value of +$-1$ to a much higher value, e.g.~999. + +\subsection{Accommodating compatibility mode} + +Sometimes an existing collection of \LaTeX~2.09 documents makes it +inconvenient or impossible to abandon the old commands entirely. +If this is the case, then it is possible to accommodate both conventions +by making special provision for documents processed in compatibility +mode. + +\begin{decl} +|\if@compatibility| +\end{decl} +This switch is set when a document begins with |\documentstyle| rather +than |\documentclass|. Appropriate code can be supplied for either +condition, as follows: +\begin{verbatim} + \if@compatibility + <code emulating LaTeX 2.09 behavior> + \else + <code suitable for LaTeX2e> + \fi +\end{verbatim} + + +\subsection{Font commands} + +Some font and size commands are now defined by the document class +rather than by the \LaTeX{} kernel. If you are upgrading a +\LaTeX~2.09 document style to a class that does not load one of the +standard classes, then you will probably need to add definitions for +these commands. + +\begin{decl} + |\rm| |\sf| |\tt| |\bf| |\it| |\sl| |\sc| +\end{decl} +None of these short-form font selection commands are defined in the +\LaTeXe{} kernel. They are defined by all the standard class files. + +If you want to define them in your class file, there are several +reasonable ways to do this. + +One possible definition is: +\begin{verbatim} + \newcommand{\rm}{\rmfamily} + ... + \newcommand{\sc}{\scshape} +\end{verbatim} +This would make the font commands orthogonal; for example +|{\bf\it text}| would produce bold italic, thus: \textbf{\textit{text}}. +It will also make them produce an error if used in math mode. + +Another possible definition is: +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareOldFontCommand{\rm}{\rmfamily}{\mathrm} + ... + \DeclareOldFontCommand{\sc}{\scshape}{\mathsc} +\end{verbatim} +This will make |\rm| act like |\rmfamily| in text mode (see above) and +it will make |\rm| select the |\mathrm| math alphabet in math mode. + +Thus |${\rm math} = X + 1$| will produce `${\rm math} = X + 1$'. + +If you do not want font selection to be orthogonal then you can +follow the standard classes and define: +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareOldFontCommand{\rm}{\normalfont\rmfamily}{\mathrm} + ... + \DeclareOldFontCommand{\sc}{\normalfont\scshape}{\mathsc} +\end{verbatim} +This means, for example, that |{\bf\it text}| will produce medium +weight (rather than bold) italic, thus: \textit{text}. + +\begin{decl} + |\normalsize| \\ + |\@normalsize| +\end{decl} +The command |\@normalsize| is retained for compatibility with +\LaTeX~2.09 packages which may have used its value; but redefining it +in a class file will have no effect since it is always reset to have +the same meaning as |\normalsize|. + +This means that classes \emph{must} now redefine |\normalsize| rather +than redefining |\@normalsize|; for example (a rather incomplete one): +\begin{verbatim} + \renewcommand{\normalsize}{\fontsize{10}{12}\selectfont} +\end{verbatim} +Note that |\normalsize| is defined by the \LaTeX{} kernel to be an +error message. + +\begin{decl} + |\tiny| |\footnotesize| |\small| |\large|\\ + |\Large| |\LARGE| |\huge| |\Huge| +\end{decl} +None of these other `standard' size-changing commands are defined in +the kernel: each needs to be defined in a class file if you need it. +They are all defined by the standard classes. + +This means you should use |\renewcommand| for |\normalsize| and +|\newcommand| for the other size-changing commands. + + +\subsection{Obsolete commands} + +Some packages will not work with \LaTeXe{}, normally because they relied +on an internal \LaTeX{} command which was never supported and has now +changed, or been removed. + +In many cases there will now be a robust, high-level means of +achieving what previously required low-level commands. Please consult +Section~\ref{Sec:commands} to see if you can now use the \LaTeXe{} +class and package writers commands. + +Also, of course, if your package or class redefined any of the kernel +commands (i.e.~those defined in the files |latex.tex|, |slitex.tex|, +|lfonts.tex|, |sfonts.tex|) then you will need to check it very +carefully against the new kernel in case the implementation has +changed or the command no longer exists in the \LaTeX2e{} kernel. + +Too many of the internal commands of \LaTeX~2.09 have been +re-implemented or removed to be able to list them all here. You must +check any that you have used or changed. + +We shall, however, list some of the more important commands which are +no longer supported. + +\begin{decl} + |\tenrm| |\elvrm| |\twlrm| \dots\\ + |\tenbf| |\elvbf| |\twlbf| \dots\\ + |\tensf| |\elvsf| |\twlsf| \dots\\ + \qquad$\vdots$ +\end{decl} +The (approximately) seventy internal commands of this form are no longer +defined. If your class or package uses them then \emph{please} +replace them with new font commands described in \emph{\fntguide}. + +For example, the command |\twlsf| should be replaced by: +\begin{verbatim} + \fontsize{12}{14}\normalfont\sffamily\selectfont +\end{verbatim} + +Another possibility is to use the |rawfonts| package, described in +\emph{\usrguide}. + +Also, remember that many of the fonts preloaded by \LaTeX~2.09 +are no longer preloaded. + +\begin{decl} + |\vpt| |\vipt| |\viipt| \dots +\end{decl} +These were the internal size-selecting commands in \LaTeX~2.09. +(They can still be used in \LaTeX~2.09 compatibility mode.) +Please use the command |\fontsize| instead: see \emph{\fntguide} for +details. + +For example, |\vpt| should be replaced by: +\begin{verbatim} + \fontsize{5}{6}\normalfont\selectfont +\end{verbatim} + +\begin{decl} + |\prm|, |\pbf|, |\ppounds|, |\pLaTeX| \dots +\end{decl} +\LaTeX~2.09 used several commands beginning with |\p| in order to +provide `protected' commands. For example, |\LaTeX| was defined to be +|\protect\pLaTeX|, and |\pLaTeX| was defined to produce the \LaTeX{} +logo. This made |\LaTeX| robust, even though |\pLaTeX| was not. + +These commands have now been reimplemented using +|\DeclareRobustCommand| +(described in Section~\ref{Sec:commands.define}). +If your package redefined one of the |\p|-commands then you must +remove the redefinition and use |\DeclareRobustCommand| to redefine the +non-|\p| command. + +\begin{decl} +|\footheight|\\ +|\@maxsep|\\ +|\@dblmaxsep| +\end{decl} +These parameters are not used by \LaTeXe{} so they have been removed, +except in \LaTeX~2.09 compatibility mode. Classes should no longer +set them. + +\begin{thebibliography}{1} + +\bibitem{A-W:GMS94} +Michel Goossens, Frank Mittelbach, and Alexander Samarin. +\newblock {\em The {\LaTeX} Companion}. +\newblock Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1994. + +\bibitem{A-W:DEK91} +Donald~E. Knuth. +\newblock {\em The \TeX book}. +\newblock Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1986. +\newblock Revised to cover \TeX3, 1991. + +\bibitem{A-W:LLa94} +Leslie Lamport. +\newblock {\em {\LaTeX:} A Document Preparation System}. +\newblock Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, second edition, 1994. + +\end{thebibliography} + +\newpage +\thispagestyle{empty} + +\section*{\LaTeXe{} Summary sheet: updating old styles} + +Section references below are to \emph{\clsguide}. + +\begin{enumerate} + +\item Should it become a class or a package? + See Section~\ref{Sec:classorpkg} for how to answer this question. + +\item If it uses another style file, then you will need to obtain an + updated version of this other file. Look at Section~\ref{Sec:loading} + for information on how to load other class and package files. + +\item Try it: see Section~\ref{Sec:try-it}. + +\item It worked? Excellent, but there are probably still some things + you should change in order to make your file into a well-structured + \LaTeXe{} file that is both robust and portable. So you should now + read Section~\ref{Sec:writing}, especially~\ref{Sec:general}. You + will also find some useful examples in Section~\ref{Sec:structure}. + + If your file sets up new fonts, font-changing commands or symbols, + you should also read \emph{\fntguide}. + +\item It did not work? There are three possibilities here: + \begin{itemize} + \item error messages are produced whilst reading your file; + \item error messages are produced whilst processing test documents; + \item there are no errors but the output is not as it should be. + \end{itemize} + Don't forget to check carefully for this last possibility. + + If you have got to this stage then you will need to read + Section~\ref{Sec:upgrade} to find the solutions that will make your + file work. +\end{enumerate} + +\end{document} + diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/compan.err b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/compan.err new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..9f7ddee0d57 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/compan.err @@ -0,0 +1,2975 @@ +\newcommand\erratafiledate{2001/04/06} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% To produce a printed version of this errata file run this file through +% LaTeX. It will unpack a small class file (if not already present) and +% a configuration file with the extension .cfg. You might want to modify +% the setting in this configuration file to print only a partial errata +% suitable for your printed revision of this book, see details in the +% .cfg file. +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + + +\begin{filecontents}{errata.cls} +% Copyright (C) 1997, Frank Mittelbach + +\ProvidesClass{errata} + [1997/12/31 v0.6b Mini class for errata files subject to change (FMi)] + +\LoadClass{article} + +\setcounter{secnumdepth}{-1} +\addtolength\textwidth{5cm} +\addtolength\oddsidemargin{-3cm} + +\addtolength\textheight{36pt} + +\RequirePackage{shortvrb} +\MakeShortVerb{\|} + +\RequirePackage{array,longtable} +\RequirePackage{multicol} + + +\newcommand\erratagetnumber{} +\def\erratagetnumber#1/#2/#3\erratagetnumber{#1#2#3} + + +\newcommand\gobbleerrata{% + \setbox\@tempboxa\vbox\bgroup + \let\endgobble\egroup + \let\hideamp\relax + \let\\\relax\let\par\@@par} + +\newcommand*\hideamp{&} + +\let\endgobble\relax + + +\newcommand\erratastartdate{} +\newcommand\myprinting{} + + +\newcommand\doweprint[2]{% + \ifnum \myprinting < \if!#2!1000 \else#2 \fi + \ifnum \expandafter\erratagetnumber\erratastartdate\erratagetnumber < + \erratagetnumber#1\erratagetnumber \relax + \@tempswatrue + \else + \@tempswafalse + \fi + \else + \@tempswafalse + \fi +} + + + +\newcommand\includedentries{entries after = \erratastartdate} +\newcommand\printedentries{between \erratastartdate\space and} + +\newcommand\showallerrors{% + \renewcommand\includedentries{all errata entries}% + \renewcommand\printedentries{up to} + \renewcommand\doweprint[2]{\@tempswatrue}} + + +\newcommand\displayrevisionfix[2]{% + \if!#2!\textbf{#1}\else\textit{#1}\rlap{\textsuperscript{#2}}\fi} + +\newcommand\norevisionnumbers{% + \renewcommand\displayrevisionfix[2]{\textbf{##1}}} + +\IfFileExists{\jobname.cfg} + { + \input{\jobname.cfg} + \typeout{***************************************************} + \typeout{*} + \typeout{* Configuration file for \jobname.err found } + \typeout{*} + \typeout{* If you wish to generate an errata listing} + \typeout{* containing only errors found after a certain revision} + \typeout{* and/or only errors found after a certain date} + \typeout{* modify the information stored in \jobname.cfg} + \typeout{*} + \typeout{* Current settings are:} + \typeout{*} + \typeout{* \@spaces printing of your book = \myprinting} + \typeout{* \@spaces include \includedentries} + \typeout{*} + \typeout{***************************************************} + } + {} + +%% \erroronpage <page> <line info> <contributor> <date> <fixed in revision> + +\newcommand\erroronpage[5]{% + \endgobble + \doweprint{#4}{#5}% + \if@tempswa + \typeout{Typesetting entry #1 #2 #3 #4}% + \else + \typeout{Ignoring entry #1 #2 #3 #4}% + \expandafter\gobbleerrata + \fi + \hideamp \\% + \displayrevisionfix{#1}{#5} + \hideamp #2 \hideamp (\textsf{#3}) \hideamp +} + +\newcommand\CHAPTER[1]{\endgobble + &\\[4pt]% + \multicolumn{4}{l}{\framebox[10cm][l]{\textbf{\normalsize\strut#1}}} \\} + +\newenvironment{erratalist} + {\begin{longtable}{r>{\raggedright}p{2cm}l>{\raggedright}p{10cm}l}} + {\endgobble\end{longtable}} + +\newcommand\erratatitle[2] + {\begin{center}\LARGE\bfseries + Errata list for #1\\[5pt](\myprinting.\ printing)\\[10pt] + \large Includes all entries found \printedentries\space #2 + \end{center}% + \markright{Errata for #1 (\printedentries\space #2)}% + \thispagestyle{plain}% + \vspace{20pt}} + +\pagestyle{myheadings} + +\AtBeginDocument{\small} + +\setlength\parindent{0pt} +\setlength\parskip{2pt} + +\newcommand\contributor[2]{\makebox[1cm][l]{\sffamily#1} #2\par} + +% some special shortcuts overwriting existing commands: + +\let\u\underline +\renewcommand\>{$\to$} + +\end{filecontents} + + +\begin{filecontents}{\jobname.cfg} +% +% +% Configuration file for the errata listing of +% +% The LaTeX Companion +% +% +% \erratastartdate +% +% Specifies the date from which on errata entries should be listed. +% +% The format is YYYY/MM/DD. +% +% The default below ensures that all entries are typeset. +% + +\renewcommand\erratastartdate{1994/05/01} + + +% +% \myprinting +% +% Specifies which (revised) printing you own. For example, if you +% have the second printing set this to 2 so that errors already +% corrected in that printing will not appear in your errata +% listing. +% +% The default below ensures that all entries relevant to the second +% printing are typeset. (first printing are not included so don't +% try, and a third printing does not exist although some extries +% claim they are which means i have corrected the source :-) +% +% If you really own a first printing (which is something like a +% collectors item i'm sure :-) you will find an ascii version of +% its errors corrected after \end{document} in the errata file. +% +% + +\renewcommand\myprinting{2} + +% +% \norevisionnumbers +% +% Specifies that all page numbers in the errata are shown in the same +% format (bold face) irregardless of whether or not they are fixed +% in some revision. The default is to print corrected errors in +% italic and add the revision number as a superscript. Since the +% Companion has only one revision which is not included in the +% errata we turn this feature off. + +\norevisionnumbers + +% +% \showallerrors +% +% With this command you tell the program that all errata entries are +% supposed to be generated. This makes \myprinting and +% \erratastartdate basically obsolete so this isn't turned on by +% default. +% +% +\endinput +\end{filecontents} + + + +\documentclass{errata} + +\begin{document} + +\erratatitle{The \LaTeX{} Companion}{\erratafiledate} + + +\begin{verbatim} +@book(A-W:GMS94, + author = {Michel Goossens and Frank Mittelbach and + Alexander Samarin}, + title = {The {\LaTeX} Companion}, + publisher = {Addison-Wesley}, + address = {Reading, Massachusetts}, + year = 1994, + pagenums = {530 + 30}, + bibliography = {yes}, + index = {yes}, + isbn = {0-201-54199-8}, +) +\end{verbatim} + + +\begin{list}{}{\setlength\leftmargin{0cm}\setlength\rightmargin{5cm}} +\item[] +The latest version of this file (\texttt{\jobname.err}) can be found +as part of the \LaTeX{} distribution. + +The first column in the table shows the page number of the errata +entry. Superscript numbers in the first column refer to the printed +revision in which this entry was corrected. The second column gives +the precise location, negative line numbers are counted from the +bottom of the page. The third column shows the first finder of the +problem. +\end{list} + +\begin{erratalist} + +\CHAPTER{General } + +\erroronpage{i}{last line}{KSe}{1997/06/01}{3} + Replace ``Signapore'' with ``Singapore''. + +\erroronpage{iii}{copyright notice}{BDe}{1997/06/01}{} + True copyright symbol provided by Lucida Bright should be used. + +\erroronpage{xi}{}{FMi} {1997/06/01}{} + Add a section entitled ``Using the examples'' and describe the need + for a) |\makeatletter| ... for commands with |@| in their name, i.e., + something like the explanation on page 15 and b) that people have + to watch out for the packages they need, something that might be + explained a little earlier on in the same section. + +\CHAPTER{Front matter} + +\CHAPTER{Chapter 1} + +\erroronpage{1}{last line}{DAr}{1997/06/01}{} + Replace ``the \TeX{} book'' by ``The \TeX book'' (capitalized ``The'' and + close up). + (The same for page 23 footnote). + +\erroronpage{2}{para 3}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + Replace ``in the public domain'' with ``free of charge'' + as \TeX{} is copyrighted by Donald E. Knuth and *NOT* public domain. + +\erroronpage{2}{para 4}{UVi}{1997/06/01}{3} + In the book title `\TeX{} and METAFONT ...', the METAFONT logo should + be in italic. + +\erroronpage{5}{para 3, l.1}{MOs}{1997/06/01}{} + ``LaTeX'' should be typeset ``\LaTeX''. + +\erroronpage{6}{l -8 }{MOs}{1997/06/01}{} + |Y\&Y| should by typeset |Y\&Y\@|. + +\erroronpage{7}{last line}{MGo}{1997/06/01}{3} + ``International Standards Organization'' should be + ``International Organization for Standardization''. + +\CHAPTER{Chapter 2} + +\erroronpage{12}{two lines of white space}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + This is not a mistake, only a bad design (perhaps). What you see on + this page is a looooong caption and the line + ``need different logical ...'' + is the rest of the sentence that was started on the previous page. + +\erroronpage{14}{l.8}{CKr}{1997/06/01}{3} + Add missing ``be'': ``it will \u{be} assumed to be...''. + +\erroronpage{14}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + Replace last para with: + ``Finally, when the |\begin{document}| is reached, all global options are + checked to see whether each of them has been used by any package; if + not, you will get a warning message. It is usually a spelling mistake + if your option name is never used; another possibility is the removal + of a |\Lmcs{usepackage}| command loading a package that used this + option.'' + +\erroronpage{17}{}{JSa}{1997/06/01}{3} + Last sentence of 2.1.2 is unclear. + MGo: Replace with: + + ``If a document is too large to process in a single run, + it can be sub-divided into sub-parts that can be run separately. + However, in this case, they must be processed + \emph{in the correct sequence} to ensure that the + cross-references and page numbers are correct.'' + +\erroronpage{17}{sec 2.1.3}{FMi}{1998/05/23}{} + The |\end{filecontents}| should be on a line by itself without + any text or spaces on either side. If this is not the case a + warning is produced. Also mention that this environment has a star + form which does not write any comentary into the file. + +\erroronpage{18}{para 2}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + In the front matter the so-called \emph{starred form} of the +sectioning commands is normally used. + +\erroronpage{20}{table 2.1}{DAr}{1997/06/01}{} + Replace ``-1'' by ``$-1$'' (minus sign not hyphen). + +\erroronpage{23}{the footnote}{UVi}{1997/06/01}{3} + There is a spurious space between ``\TeX'' and ``book''. + +\erroronpage{24}{description of ``name'' argument}{BRa}{1997/06/01}{} + Add something like: + ``The \emph{name} must be non-empty. |\@startsection| internally + calls the command \emph{name}mark with one argument to produce + the running head if necessary, see pages 93ff. For this reason one + has to define such a command for completely new sectioning + commands. Similarily, a command with two arguments (title and + page number) and the name |\l@|\emph{name} must exist to format any + table of contents entries properly, see pages 34ff.'' + +\erroronpage{25}{description of ``afterskip''}{CRo}{1997/06/01}{} + Boundary condition is wrong. + Replace: ``afterskip $\geq 0$'' by ``afterskip $> 0$'' + and + replace: ``afterskip $< 0$'' by ``afterskip $\leq 0$''. + +\erroronpage{31}{sec 2.4}{DAr}{1997/06/01}{} + First sentence of sec 2.4 is awkward. Sounds like the titles specify + the page numbers! + +\erroronpage{31}{Table 2.3}{GSa}{1997/06/01}{3} + |\refname| (default ``References'') should appear in the table. + +\erroronpage{35}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + Explanation of |\addtocontents| and |addcontentsline| arguments: file + argument contains |toc|, |lof|, or |lot| (i.e., without ``.'' in front)! + +\erroronpage{35}{ }{MDa}{1997/06/01}{} + The last example with |\addcontentsline| is set with a different font + for the braces than all other examples. Very minor ``error''. + +\erroronpage{36}{ }{FMi}{1997/06/01}{} + Reword first para to make it clearer that files with arbitrary extensions + can be used and that ``|.xmp|'' is just one example + (done already in German edition). + +\erroronpage{37}{last line in table 2.4}{IAN}{1997/06/01}{} + Add missing parenthesis: + ``(The default definition is a small roman font.\u{)}''. + +\erroronpage{37}{l.6 below Table}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + The latest versions of the package now support ``short'' + extensions for use with operating systems like DOS. + +\erroronpage{41}{ }{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + Remove the ``|\label{before}|'' in the example since it does not serve + any purpose. + +\erroronpage{41}{ }{JSa}{1997/06/01}{3} + Last paragraph starting with ``|vref| will produce a |ref| only + when...'' is ambiguous or misleading. + MGo: Replace with: + ``The command |\vref| is like |\ref| when reference and + |\label| are on the same page. If label and reference differ by + one, |\vref| creates one of the strings: ``on the facing page,'' + ``on the preceding page,'' or ``on the following page''; the word + ``facing'' is used when label and reference both fall onto a double + spread. When the difference is larger than one page, |\vref| + produces both |\ref| and |\pageref|.'' + +\erroronpage{42}{footnote}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + ``flafter'' is a package not an option! + +\erroronpage{43}{before: Language Support}{FMi,JAd}{1997/06/01}{3} + Add: + ``If the space added by |\vpageref| turns out to be wrong, as in + |(\vpageref[here]{ex:foo})| + use the variant with two optional arguments and put all text up to + the preceding blank (in this case just the open parentheses) into both + optional arguments, ie + |\vpageref[(here][(]{ex:foo})|.'' + + +\CHAPTER{Chapter 3} + +\erroronpage{48}{para 3}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + Add the following sentence: + ``Note, that accented characters have to be + surrounded by braces like this: \verb={\"a}=.'' + +\erroronpage{50}{para 1}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + Remove this sentence ``They are optional features ...'' since + the new version of ulem activates them automatically. + +\erroronpage{50}{example}{RBa}{1997/06/01}{3} + Replace: ``The |\USA| has 50 states.'' by ``|\GB| was unified in 1707.'' + +\erroronpage{53ff}{ }{PvO}{1997/06/01}{} + An alternative to picinpar is the pickins package which provides + sophisticated picture inclusion (with and without caption, with + frames etc.) into a paragraph. Main drawback perhaps: the + documentation is very good but right now only available in German. + +\erroronpage{54}{l.2}{PvG}{1997/06/01}{} + Add a right parenthesis ``)'' after ``|tabwindow|\u{)}.''. + +\erroronpage{54}{last line}{DAr}{1997/06/01}{} + Replace ``are very specific'' by ``are intricate''. + +\erroronpage{61}{first example}{FMi} {1997/06/01}{3} + Finish line with a percent: + ``|\setlength{\rightmargin}{\leftmargin}}%|''. + +\erroronpage{64}{last l.}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + Replace: ``(forcing a new line)'' by + ``followed by a forced line break''. + +\erroronpage{64}{code \string\Lentrylabel}{FMi}{1998/01/10}{} + Change the line +\begin{verbatim} + {\makebox[0pt][l]{\textsf{#1:}}\\}}% +\end{verbatim} +to +\begin{verbatim} + {\makebox[0pt][l]{\textsf{#1:}}\\\mbox{}}}% +\end{verbatim} +to avoid an underfull hbox message. + +\erroronpage{68}{}{PvO}{1997/06/01}{3} + ``|\verbatiminput|'' should be ``|\verbatimtabinput|'' (in the box). + +\erroronpage{69}{}{PvO}{1997/06/01}{3} + |\begin{listing}|: I find that confusing, although I guess it is just + the way the package works. The problem is that the required + argument is NOT the first number that you see, but the first number + you see = req.arg+opt.arg-1. Maybe the description can include a + warning about this. + MGo proposes the following text: + + ``An optional argument ``step'' specifies + the step between numbered lines (its default value is 1, + and it corresponds to all lines being numbered), while + the required argument ``firstline'' + is the number of the first line. + If ``step'' is different from |1|, then the first number + shown will be ``\emph{step}$+$\emph{firstline}$-1$,'' for instance + if the \texttt{listing} environment is invoked by the command + \verb!\begin{listing}[2]{3}!, each second line + will be numbered, starting with the number $2+3-1$, i.e., $4$.'' + +\erroronpage{71}{figure 3.7}{PvO}{1997/06/01}{3} + ``|\skip\footins|'' is missing in the figure. + + +\erroronpage{72}{l -2}{OBa}{1997/06/01}{} + ``|\renewcommand{footnoterule}|'' should be + ``|\renewcommand{\footnoterule}|''. + +\erroronpage{73}{l 3}{GGr}{1997/06/01}{} + ``|\renewcommand{footnoterule}|'' should be + ``|\renewcommand{\footnoterule}|''. + +\erroronpage{74}{l.11}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + Replace ``may not match'' by ``will not match''. + +\erroronpage{74}{last para of 3.4.2}{GGr,FMi}{1997/06/01}{} + Change to: + ``There are three parameters to define the style of marginal notes: + |\marginparwidth|, |\marginparsep|, and |\marginparpush|. Their + default values are shown in table 4.2 on page 87.'' + +\erroronpage{75}{para 2}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + Replace ``accumulated in memory'' by ``accumulated in the external file''. + +\erroronpage{75}{para 3}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + Drop ``in memory'' since the text is stored externally. + +\erroronpage{80}{last two paras from 3.5.5}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + Since ftnright.sty is now updated for \LaTeX2e the last two paragraphs + can be dropped. + +\erroronpage{82}{2nd paragraph after + boxed\texttt{\textbackslash excludeversion}}{MGo}{1997/06/01}{3} + ``\emph{tag} is a name...'' should read ``\emph{tagname} is a name...''. + +\CHAPTER{Chapter 4} + +\erroronpage{87}{table 4.2}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{} + The table shows the value for the document styles of \LaTeX\ + 2.09. The class files of \LaTeXe\ have slightly different values: +\begin{verbatim} + two-sided one-sided + 10pt 11pt 12pt 10pt 11pt 12pt +\oddsidemargin 35pt 29pt 17pt 62pt 55pt 39pt +\evensidemargin 89pt 80pt 62pt -- -- -- +\marginparwidth 121pt 113pt 95pt 94pt 88pt 73pt +\topmargin 16pt 21pt 17pt 16pt 21pt 17pt +\textheight 46 40 38 46 40 38 (in lines) +\end{verbatim} + +\erroronpage{89}{l 6}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + The vpage.sty package is now available under a new name with extended + functionality, vmargin.sty. + +\erroronpage{89}{l.10}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + Portrait and landscape should be in typewriter font since they are actual + keywords for the optional ``orient'' argument of |\setpapersize|. + +\erroronpage{92}{l.1}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + The first three are used ... + +\erroronpage{92}{l.2}{BDe}{1997/06/01}{} + The word ``empty'' is set in a different font. + +\erroronpage{92}{l.5}{BDe}{1997/06/01}{} + Replace ``pagestyle{empty}'' by ``|\pagestyle{empty}|''. + +\erroronpage{92}{para 4, l.4}{CKr}{1997/06/01}{3} + Replace: ``styles is concerned'' by ``styles are concerned''. + +\erroronpage{92}{l.8}{EPi}{1997/06/01}{} + Replace ``thispagestyle{empty}'' by ``|\thispagestyle{empty}|''. + +\erroronpage{93}{last line}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + ``... the commands |\chaptermark|, |\sectionmark|, ...'' + FMi add: + + ``These commands are executed automatically by the corresponding + heading commands. They have one argument in which they receive the + heading text or its short form from the optional argument of the + heading command.'' + +\erroronpage{95}{l.9}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + Replace: ``by defining the commands |\markboth| ...'' + by: ``by using the commands |\mathboth| ...''. + +\erroronpage{97}{para 1}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + Replace last sentence by: + ``Note that in this case the length |\headheight| and perhaps + |\footskip| might have to be increased.''. + +\erroronpage{100}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{} + Add a warning that |\enlargethispage| only modifies the + main part of the page: running headers and footers stay + unchanged. This means that it is possible to overprint + information in the footer if the main text gets too large. + +\CHAPTER{Chapter 5} + +\erroronpage{103}{para 4, l.2}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + Replace ``previous tabstop'' by ``following tabstop''. + +\erroronpage{104}{ }{JPe}{1997/06/01}{3} + The example actually shows an ALGOL68 program (not a Pascal one). + +\erroronpage{106}{ }{TMa,FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + Last line before footnote, in the |>| command: + The 4th ``|{|'' should be a ``|}|''. + +\erroronpage{106}{footnote}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + ``... in case of |p|, |m|, or |b|, the ...''. + +\erroronpage{108}{}{WLe}{1997/06/01}{3} + Replace first sentence by: + ``When you have a narrow column, you must not only make sure that the + first word can be hyphenated (see page 65) but consider that short + texts are easier to typeset in ragged right mode (without being + aligned at the right margin).''. + +\erroronpage{108}{l.5}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + Replace ``environment'' by ``command''. + +\erroronpage{108}{example}{FGo}{1997/06/01}{3} + Replace ``superconciousness'' by ``superconsciousness''. + +\erroronpage{108}{example}{UMu}{1998/07/15}{} + Hyphenate ``Pos-si-bi-li-t\'es'' correctly. + +\erroronpage{109}{l.3 of text}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + Replace ``vertical column separator'' by ``column separator''. + +\erroronpage{110}{\texttt{\textbackslash doublerulesep}}{VSc}{1997/06/01}{} + ``The width of the space between lines created by two successive + \verb=|= characters in the environment preamble,...''. + +\erroronpage{ 111}{para 2}{EMS}{2000/05/30}{} + Why not to give a formula instead the description? + +\erroronpage{112 }{}{EMS}{2000/05/30}{} + ``LR-mode'' not defined before + +\erroronpage{113}{very end of paragraph 5.3.4}{UJa}{1997/06/01}{3} + A closing curly brace is missing, i.e., ``|...\fill}}}|''. + +\erroronpage{115}{example}{FGo}{1997/06/01}{3} + Replace ``superconciousness'' by ``superconsciousness''. + +\erroronpage{115}{l.4}{EMS}{2000/05/30}{} + Replace ``above'' by ``below'' + +\erroronpage{116}{l.3 bottom}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + Replace: ``\,`c' type columns'' by ``\,`c', `r', or `l' type columns''. + +\erroronpage{117}{l.4}{VSc}{1997/06/01}{} + Replace by: + ``For instance, in the case of the example on page 115 we got the + following output.''. + +\erroronpage{120}{following}{FPo}{1997/06/01}{3} + Shouldn't Table 5.3, 5.4, 5.5 and 5.7 (and perhaps others) better be + Figures, like a lot of other examples presenting tabulated \LaTeX\ output? + + MGo: We have renamed all example ``tables'', namely 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 5.5, + and 5.7 to become figures. + +\erroronpage{121}{Table 5.4}{EMS}{2000/05/30}{} + Right column of each page, the space between Nb and name of Surat must be + larger. + +\erroronpage{122}{5.4.2, para2, l.4}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + It could be helpful to explicitly mention that one shouldn't use |\nofiles| + together with longtable since longtable needs to write to the |aux| file. + It would be even better if longtable would detect this problem. + +MGo: add a footnote at the end of the sentence ``...table in question'': + + ``This means that the |\nofiles| command, that suppresses + writing of all but the \texttt{dvi} and \texttt{log} files, + should not be used together with the \texttt{longtable} package.''. + + +\erroronpage{122}{5.4.2., para 2, l.5 following}{DKa}{1997/06/01}{} + With version 4 of longtable the |\setlongtables| command + is no longer necessary. For this reason the documentation + starting with + ``This feature has to be activated ...'' + up to the end of page 122 can be removed. + In addition |\setlongtables| should be removed from the table + on page 124 and the description on page 125. + + David's suggestion for a new description: + + ``longtable breaks the table into several chunks which are typeset one + after the other. As later chunks are only able to influence the width + of earlier chunks by writing information to the .aux file it might + take several \LaTeX\ runs until the column widths converge. (If + additional runs are necessary \LaTeX\ will output a warning). Earlier + releases of the package needed the |\setlongtables| command to trigger + this mechanism. Starting with version~4 this works automatically.'' + + Also starting with the 1996/12/01 release longtable has additional + commands like |\pagebreak| and also distinguishes |\\| and |\\*| (which + are the same in ordinary tabulars). + +\erroronpage{124}{table 5.6}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + In line ``|\LTchunksize|'' replace ``(\TeX\ counter)'' by + ``(\LaTeX\ counter)''. + Both are correct but why mention the \TeX\ version? + +\erroronpage{127}{inside the tables}{JKn}{1997/06/01}{} + ``su sudanese'' should read ``su sundanese'' (twice), + ``te tegulu'' should read ``te telugu'' (twice). + +\erroronpage{129}{text l.4 bottom}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + Replace: ``output file'' by ``output'' + +\erroronpage{133}{5.6.3, l.1}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + Replace: ``in narrow'' by ``between narrow'' + +\erroronpage{133}{Threeparttable}{DAr}{1997/06/01}{} + Perhaps one of the notes could be longer to show that they are +indeed formatted to the same width as the table. + + +\erroronpage{ 135}{para 1, l.-1}{EMS}{2000/05/30}{} + Remove the word ``fixup'' + +\erroronpage{135}{para 1 of multirow section}{MGo}{1997/06/01}{3} + The author of the multirow package is no longer unknown; it is + Jerry Leichter. + +\erroronpage{136}{second example}{EMS}{2000/05/30}{} + Using this input, it gives an output without the white space on the top of + last row. + + FMi: looks wrong to me what is shown in the book, but i can't check + the outcome right now. + + +\erroronpage{137}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + |\firsthline| and |\lasthline| will be part of array.sty with the next + release. + +\CHAPTER{Chapter 6} + +\erroronpage{143}{l.20}{GGr}{1997/06/01}{} + Replace ``between'' by ``among''. + +\erroronpage{143}{l7-8 from bottom}{MOh}{1997/06/01}{3} + Replace ``you can prevents'' by ``you can prevent''. + +\erroronpage{143}{description of dbltextfloatsep}{EMS,FMi}{2000/05/30}{} + Replace the sentence in parentheses with: + (The default is the same as |\textfloatsep|.) + + + + +\erroronpage{144}{example}{UJa}{1997/06/01}{3} + Better use |\renewcommand{\section}|, since |\newcommand{\section}| + is only correct if you design a class file from scratch. + +\erroronpage{145}{l.11}{TMa}{1997/06/01}{3} + Replace ``ignoreed'' by ``ignored''. + +\erroronpage{148}{}{WLe}{1997/06/01}{3} + Fig 6.1: The left and right sides do not correspond in detail. + +\erroronpage{149}{last para to page 150}{FVi}{1997/06/01}{} + Replace this para by: + ``Newer releases of the \textsf{float} package (v1.2 and higher) + integrate the functionality of the package \textsf{here} by David + Carlisle completely. With older versions one had to first issue + |\restylefloat{table}| and/or |\restylefloat{figure}| to be able to use + the |H| specifier with the standard \LaTeX\ environments.'' + +\erroronpage{150}{}{BFr}{1997/12/17}{} + The successor of the ``floatfig'' package for \LaTeXe{} is called + ``floatflt'' offering somewhat extended capabilities. + +\erroronpage{152}{}{ADu}{1997/06/01}{} + In the wrapfig example the ``boxit'' environment is used but never + explained. Better use |\begin{fminipage}[3in]|. + +\erroronpage{152}{figure 6.3}{PvG}{1997/06/01}{} + The word ``wrapfigure'' in the caption should be set in |\normalfont| + rather than |\ttfamily|. + +\erroronpage{153}{para 1, l.3}{DBo}{2001/04/06}{} + The space after the figure is now set by |\subfigbottomskip|. + + As a general warning those skips are actually defined via + |\newcommand| so can't be modified with |\setlength| as one would + expect. + +\erroronpage{153}{para 2, l.3}{CKr}{1997/06/01}{3} + Replace: ``(defined by default as |(\alph{subfigure})\space},|'' + by: ``(defined by default as |(\alph{subfigure})\space}),|''. + +\erroronpage{153}{para 3}{TBo}{1997/06/01}{} + Line 2/3 says a ``tabular'' environment is used in + Fig. 6.4 to align the subfigures. This is not true. + +\erroronpage{155}{\texttt{\textbackslash @makecaption} + and \texttt{\textbackslash @isucaption} example}{JvM,FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + In both cases is a closing brace missing. It should read: + ``|\ifthenelse{\lengthtest{\wd\tempbox > \linewidth}}%|''. + +\CHAPTER{Chapter 7} + +\erroronpage{ 163}{ Font size l.4}{EMS}{2000/05/30}{} + Replace ``less then'' by ``less than'' + +\erroronpage{164}{Figure 7.6}{TMa}{1997/06/01}{3} + The 10pt font is actually Lucida Bright and the magnified + one Computer Modern 5 pt, so it whould be better to use CMR twice. + +\erroronpage{166}{l.12}{TRa}{1997/06/01}{3} + Replace: ``end of the next environment'' by ``the end of the current + environment''. + +\erroronpage{166}{l.13}{TRa}{1997/06/01}{3} + Add ``r'': ``To change the fonts for individual words or + short ph\u{r}ases''. + +\erroronpage{167}{}{PAp}{1997/06/01}{3} + Replace: ``If you used ...'' by: ``If you use ...''. + +\erroronpage{169}{l.9}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{} + Replace: ``|\lowercase|'' by ``|\MakeLowercase|''. + +\erroronpage{169}{l.10}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{} + Replace: ``makes use of the \TeX\ primitive |\lowercase|'' + by: ``makes use of the \LaTeXe\ command |\MakeLowercase|''. + +\erroronpage{170}{table 7.1}{BBe,FMi}{1997/06/01}{} + Rename the caption to: + ``The standard size-changing declarations''. + +\erroronpage{171}{footnote}{GRo,FMi}{1997/06/01}{} + Add word: + ``Any package that changes the |\catcode| of a character \u{used} inside + |\nocorrlist| ...''. + +\erroronpage{174}{para 3}{UVi}{1997/06/01}{} + Computer Modern Typewriter has no bold extended series only medium. + +\erroronpage{174}{para 4}{CMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + Replace by: + An example in which some default values are changed can be found in + the chapter about PostScript (section 11.9.6 on page 339). + +\erroronpage{179}{para 3, l.5}{BBe, FMi}{1997/06/01}{} + Add ``upright bold'' in: + ``Instead, you should use the |\mathbf| alphabet identifier for + \u{upright bold} characters and/or use the command ...'' + +\erroronpage{180}{7.5.1, para 2}{MGo}{1997/10/20}{} + Rewrite the whole section on DC fonts to take into account the + existence of the EC fonts since the beginning of 1997. + +\erroronpage{181}{table 7.5}{PvG}{1997/06/01}{} + Table 7.5 is not referenced on the page or in the neighboring pages. + + MGo: Probably best to add reference at the third line of Section + 7.5.1: ``Besides the Computer Modern families \u{(see Figure 7.5)}...''. + +\erroronpage{182}{}{FJe}{1997/06/01}{3} + Table 7.6 is incomplete. Nowadays there is the following set of fonts + available from labrea.stanford.edu: +\begin{verbatim} +Concrete Roman medium: ccr5 ccr6 ccr7 ccr8 ccr9 ccr10 +Concrete Roman medium italic: ccti10 +Concrete Roman medium slanted: ccsl9 ccsl10 +Concrete Roman medium caps and small caps: cccsc10 +Concrete Roman condensed slanted: ccslc9 +Concrete Math medium italic: ccmi10 +Concrete Math condensed italic: ccmic9 +\end{verbatim} + +\erroronpage{182}{}{WLe}{1997/06/01}{3} + Table 7.7: Examples of Pandora fonts are incorrect: +\begin{verbatim} +Pandora Roman bold is typeset in (again) Pandora Roman medium +Pandora Sans is typeset in Pandora Roman slanted +Pandora Sans bold is typeset in Pandora Roman bold +\end{verbatim} + +\erroronpage{182}{para 2}{UMu}{1998/07/15}{} + ``Gothisch'' should read ``Gotisch'' (twice). + +\erroronpage{183}{end of para 1}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{} + Add: + ``Umlaut-accents and \ss{} are produced in these fonts via + ligatures with the character |"|, e.g., |"s|, |"a|, etc. This looks like + the way the german and babel packages operate but is functionally + different so that those fonts cannot be used currently with these + packages.'' + +\erroronpage{184}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{} + The packages euscript and eufrak have been moved into the amsfonts + distribution. euscript is now considered obsolete (but available) + and the following is provided: +\begin{verbatim} +\usepackage{eufrak} defines \mathfrak (and \EuFrak for compatibility) +\usepackage{eucal} or +\usepackage[mathcal]{eucal} changes \mathcal to use euler script fonts +\usepackage[mathscr]{eucal} defines \mathscr to use euler script fonts + and leaves \mathcal alone +\usepackage{euscript} defines \EuScript (considered obsolete) +\end{verbatim} + +\erroronpage{184}{last sentence}{NBe}{1997/06/01}{} + Remove sentence: ``Alternatively, these symbols ...'' + because this is no longer true. + +\erroronpage{185}{l.4}{CMi}{1997/06/01}{} + Replace ``chose'' by ``choose''. + +\erroronpage{187}{description of debugshow}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{} + Add: ``This option might change the typesetting of material in + certain circumstances. For this reason it should not be turned + on when producing camera ready copy.''. + +\erroronpage{187}{description of pausing}{VBr}{1997/06/01}{} + Replace: ``to help detecting the detection of problems'' + by: ``to help in the detection of font problems''. + +\erroronpage{191}{example}{MGo}{1997/06/01}{} + Replace: ``po russki'' by ``po-russki''. + +\erroronpage{196}{second para from bottom}{CMi}{1997/06/01}{} + Since a size function can have both an optional and a mandatory argument + this para should speak about arguments in plural (two occasions). + +\erroronpage{198}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{} + There is now also a genb function that generates names for the ec + font naming conventions e.g., |<10.95> genb * ecmr| results in |ecmr1095| + and there is, of course, a silent variant sgenb. + +\erroronpage{200}{l 8.}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{} + ``... with a font family as a whole.''. + +\erroronpage{201}{l 1}{PBL}{1997/06/01}{} + Replace ``|{dcmr}|'' by ``|{cmr}|''. + +\erroronpage{203}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{} + ``The starting letters T, O, M, \u{and S} are reserved for standard + encodings...''. + +\erroronpage{205}{top}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{} + NFSS now doesn't load math fonts unless it encounters a formula + in the new size. So the first para must be modified. + +\erroronpage{206}{top}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{} + Replace the sentence: ``In fact, only the |\DeclareFontEncoding| ....'' + by: ``If the encoding of the font is unknown to NFSS it must be first + declared with |\DeclareFontEncoding| inside the package file. The + other two declarations can, in fact, alternatively be placed + into an |.fd| file.'' + +\erroronpage{208}{l.6}{CMi}{1997/06/01}{} + Replace: ``you can define them'' by ``you can define it'' + since the math alphabet and not the letters are defined. + +\erroronpage{209}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{} + Add the following declaration to the default setup: + ``|\SetSymbolFont{symbols}{bold}{OMS}{cmsy}{b}{n}|''. + +\erroronpage{211}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{} + In explanation for ``Checking defaults for |<cdp>/<font shape>|'' + replace |\DeclareFontEncoding| by |\DeclareFontSubstitution|. + +\erroronpage{214}{4th error message}{LLa}{2000/07/01}{} + occured \> occur\u{r}ed + +\CHAPTER{Chapter 8 --- book version (online version below)} + +\erroronpage{215}{}{MGo,FMi}{1998/02/04}{} + This whole chapter has been adapted to version 1.2 of amslatex + and is available as a PDF or PS file from + \texttt{http://www.awl.com/...} or from CTAN at + \texttt{CTAN:/tex-archive/info/companion-rev/}. + +\erroronpage{215}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + Remove second reference to Graetzer's book ([95]). + +\erroronpage{216}{last line of 8.1}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{} + Replace ``you should load the amstex package'' + by ``you should load the amsmath package'' + + Note that 1.2 release of amslatex introduced amsmath as the + successor to amstex. Starting with this release the package amstex + should only be used in compatibility mode, i.e., in old documents + using |\documentstyle|. Nearly all documentation in this chapter is + nevertheless still valid (if amsmath is used). Exceptions are + hopefully all documented in the errata by now. Sorry for the + inconvenience but this incompatible change happened after the \LaTeX{} + Companion was printed and making a second edition for that reason + would look silly in my eyes. A PDF file with a new version of + chapter 8 is available on CTAN see above. + +\erroronpage{216}{first two paragraphs of 8.2.1}{BBe}{1997/06/01}{} + Replace ``amstex'' by ``amsmath'' + + Replace the first sentence of the second paragraph by + ``In the amsmath package, |\boldsymbol| is to be used for individual + bold math symbols and bold Greek letters---everything in math + except for bold upright letters (where one would use |\mathbf|).'' + + To the list of examples in the second sentence, after ``pi'', add + a bold italic A, and insert ``|\boldsymbol{A}|,'' in the appropriate + place in the code list. + +\erroronpage{217}{}{GSa}{1997/06/01}{3} + Note that the Companion uses Lucida math fonts which contain the + standard \LaTeX\ and AmS symbols but with different shapes compared + to the Computer Modern math fonts. + +\erroronpage{218}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + In amslatex release 1.2: + |\Bbb|, |\frak| are OBSOLETE. Use |\mathbb|, |\mathfrak|. + +\erroronpage{219}{table 8.5}{JPe}{1997/06/01}{} + Put a comma between |\leq| and |\le|. + Also show that the ``greater equal sign'' can be produced + by |\geq| and |\ge|. + +\erroronpage{219}{table 8.5}{UMu}{1998/07/15}{} + Add |\ne| as synonym for |\neq|. + +\erroronpage{219}{table 8.5}{KSi}{1997/06/01}{3} + |\simeq| shows a wrong symbol. The correct one should look like a tilde + on top of a minus. The symbol shown seems to be only available in the + Lucida fonts where it is call ``lessmuch''. + +\erroronpage{221}{Table 8.15}{GFe}{1997/06/01}{} + Remove the |\dashleftarrow| and |\dashrightarrow| entries, because they + do not belong to the AMS-Fonts. (only in the lucida fonts). + Add a |\Rrightarrow| entry. + Remove one of the two |\rightrightarrows| entries. + Add an entry for |\restriction| as synonym for |\upharpoonright|. + +\erroronpage{221}{table 8.15}{FMi,PNu}{1997/06/01}{} + |\rightleftarrows| are shown twice at entries (7,1) and (7,3). + +\erroronpage{221}{Table 8.17}{GFe}{1997/06/01}{} + Add an entry for |\llless| as synonym for |\lll|. + Add an entry for |\gggtr| as synonym for |\ggg|. + Add an entry for |\Doteq| as synonym for |\doteqdot|. + +\erroronpage{222}{Table 8.19}{GFe}{1997/06/01}{} + Add an entry for |\doublecap| as synonym for |\Cap|. + Add an entry for |\doublecup| as synonym for |\Cup|. + +\erroronpage{222}{Table 8.20}{GFe}{1997/06/01}{} + Remove footnote. + +\erroronpage{224}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{} + In amslatex release 1.2: + |\accentedsymbol| was moved to package amsxtra. + +\erroronpage{225}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{} + In amslatex release 1.2: + All superscripted accents |\sphat|, etc. were moved to package amsxtra. + +\erroronpage{228}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{} + In amslatex release 1.2: + |\operatornamewithlimits| is OBSOLETE: new name is |\operatorname*|. + +\erroronpage{229}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{} + We should add a line with |\bmod| to the first example. + +\erroronpage{229}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{} + In amslatex release 1.2: + |\fracwithdelims| was moved to package amsxtra. + +\erroronpage{230}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{} + In amslatex release 1.2: + |\lcfrac|, |\rcfrac| are OBSOLETE. New syntax is |\cfrac{...}{...}| or + |\cfrac[l]{...}{...}| to get left-positioned numerators or |\cfrac[r]|... + +\erroronpage{231}{l.4 and first example of 8.4.2}{DEl}{1998/08/08}{} + Add matrix environment \texttt{Bmatrix} + +\erroronpage{???}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{} + In amslatex release 1.2: + New subequations environment, for example +\begin{verbatim} + \begin{subequations}{a} + ... + \end{subequations} +\end{verbatim} + causes all numbered equation environments within that scope to be + numbered (4.9a) (4.9b) (4.9c) etc. if the preceding numbered + equation was 4.8. The argument can be a,A,i,I,1,f for the standard + \LaTeX\ numbering types: |\alph|, |\Alph|, |\roman|, |\Roman|, |\arabic|, + |\fnsymbol|. A |\label| command immediately after + |\begin{subequations}{...}| will produce a |\ref| of the parent number + ``4.9'', not ``4.9a''. The counters used by the subequations environment + are ``parentequation'' and ``equation'' and standard uses of + |\addtocounter|, |\setcounter|, etc. are possible with these counter + names. + +\erroronpage{233}{example on top}{GRo}{1997/06/01}{} + ``|\dots|'' should be replaced by ``|\hdotsfor 2|'' in the first two rows + of the matrix (lines 2 and 4 of the input) to align the last column + of the matrix. + +\erroronpage{233}{Section 8.4.3 The Sb and Sp Environments}{MMu}{1997/06/01}{} + In amsmath.sty the these environments no longer exist. + Use |\substack| instead as in +\begin{verbatim} + \sum_{\substack{0\le i\le m\\ 0<j<n}} P(i,j) +\end{verbatim} + Note, that there is also slightly more general environment + subarray, which allows for greater control over horizontal + positioning. + +\erroronpage{236}{l.2 bottom}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + Start a new sentence at: ``Each one is ...''. + +\erroronpage{238}{section 8.5.5, para 2}{PNu}{1997/06/01}{3} + Replace ``ctagsplt'' by ``centertags'' + as ``|ctagsplt|'' is only valid in compatibility mode. + +\erroronpage{241}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{} + Say that righttag is an option to the amsmath package. + +\erroronpage{241}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{} + The errata above is probably already obsolete again, option is now + reqno/leqno and default is no longer on the left. + +\erroronpage{242}{}{GZi}{1997/06/01}{} + The commands |@,| and |@!| (supposedly they yield 1/10 of |\,| and |\!|) + are no longer supported by the amsmath package. + +\erroronpage{243}{}{GGr,FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + To the entries for amscd and amssymb add: + ``This package is not automatically included by the amsmath package.''. + +\erroronpage{243}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{} + In amslatex release 1.2: + See also errata for page 216 about amstex \> amsmath! + New packages have been added: +\begin{verbatim} + amsxtra for seldom used commands + amsthm theorem code for classes + amsintsm special integral syntax + New options have been added to classes: + 8pt,9pt sizes + fleqn is now supported + nomath don't load amsmath package + New options to amsmath package: + psamsfonts (also amsfonts package) + load different .fd file set for PostScript + Type 1 versions of amsfonts + intlimits/nointlimits put (no) limits on \int signs + sumlimits/nosumlimits put (no) limits on \sum signs + namelimits/nonamelimits put (no) limits on operator names + leqno/reqno tags on the left (right) + centertags/tbtags tags centered on split + Obsolete options: + ctagsplt only available in compatibilty mode + use centertags instead +\end{verbatim} + +\erroronpage{246}{l.3 of code}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + It should be: ``|g(\xi,t)|'' not ``|g(x\i,t)|'' + (that typo was now caught by the recent \LaTeX\ release which detected + the |\i| in math mode (where |\imath| should be used)) + +\erroronpage{250}{}{TMa}{1997/06/01}{3} + Just before Section 8.7.6: ``|align*|'' should be ``|align|'', + like it says in the text. + +\erroronpage{250}{Equation 8.58 and unnumbered version}{VSc}{1997/06/01}{} + ``kerning'' for subscript ``j'' too big (compare $U_ju_j$) + distance between ``U'' and ``j'' and ``u'' not acceptable. + +FMi: looks like a font problem + +\erroronpage{255}{two last lines}{VSc}{1997/06/01}{} + Unindent last two lines (cosmetics) +\begin{verbatim} + \begin{gather} + : + : + \begin{align*} + : + ...\end{align*} + ...\end{gather} +\end{verbatim} + +\erroronpage{256}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{} + Since AMSLaTeX 1.2 will place the formula number now by default to the + right the last paragraph needs correction. + +\erroronpage{256}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + Replace: ``All these parameters are expressed as lengths ...'' + by: ``All these are length parameters ...''. + +\erroronpage{257}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{} + Add (somehow): + ``the parameters |\abovedisplay|... and |\belowdisplay|... + depend on the current font size. For this reason one can't modify them + in the preamble of a document using |\setlength| but one needs to change + the definition of |\normalsize|, etc.'' + +\CHAPTER{Chapter 8 --- updated online version} + +\erroronpage{every page}{footer}{KRa}{1998/06/22}{} + ``The LaTeX Companion'' and ``AMS-LaTeX'' \> ``The + \LaTeX{} Companion'' and ``AMS-\LaTeX''. + +\erroronpage{235}{8.3.11, para 2}{KRa}{1998/06/22}{} + Replace ``baove'' with ``above''. + +\erroronpage{240}{l.4 and first example of 8.4.2}{DEl}{1998/08/08}{} + Add matrix environment \texttt{Bmatrix} + +\erroronpage{254}{last sentence in 8.6.6}{HAs}{1998/07/28}{} + free available \> freely available. + +\erroronpage{254}{all examples}{BBe}{1998/08/07}{} + The command |\Lenv| should be |\texttt|. |\Lenv| is in fact an + internal command of the class that was used to produce the + Companion and denotes a \LaTeX{} environment name that also + appears in the index of the book. + +\erroronpage{258}{last sentence}{HAs}{1998/07/28}{} + ``first'' and ``second'' should be interchanged. + +\CHAPTER{Chapter 9} + +\erroronpage{260}{}{RPo}{1997/06/01}{3} + A truly international \TeX\ also needs support for different + typesetting directions, i.e., TeX-XeT. + MGo adds: TeX-Xet has been replaced by e\TeX\ and $\Omega$ also might + be helpful in multi-language environments. + +\erroronpage{261}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + ``to the 256-bit DC-font glyphs'' should better read: + ``to the 256 glyphs of an EC-font''. + MGo: change also other references from ``DC'' to ``EC''. + +\erroronpage{262}{l.3}{MGo}{1997/10/20}{3} + Replace ``ISO-10646 encoding'' to ``Unicode/ISO-10646 encoding''. + +\erroronpage{264}{}{WLe}{1997/06/01}{3} + Bottom of page: The example at the end ``Drucker bzw. Druk-ker'', etc. + is not very useful, since it does not show the commands. + +\erroronpage{264}{}{PvO}{1997/06/01}{3} + The footnote text is confusing (I have to read it twice to + understand). I suggest to say: ``Note that the \u{original} package + is incompatible...''. + +\erroronpage{265}{l.8}{RWa}{1997/06/01}{} + Replace ``Inhaltverzeichnis'' by ``Inhalt\u{s}verzeichnis''. + +\erroronpage{265}{l.3 from bottom of 9.2.2}{PvG}{1997/06/01}{} + Replace ``\textsf{francais}'' by ``\textsf{french}''. + + MGo adds: nor really true, since Babel will load B. Gaulle's + french package when ``french'' is specified as its option. On the other + hand with the option ``francais'' the standard code in Babel is activated. + There is also an option ``frenchb'' (by Daniel Flipo) which loads + a mini-version of ``french'' but one which still has most of french's + features. + +\erroronpage{265}{section 9.2.3}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + The command |\adddialect| has two arguments: + ``|\adddialect{dialect-name}{language}|''. + +\erroronpage{267}{table 9.2}{JBr}{1997/06/01}{3} + Macro ``|\alsoseename|'' is actually called ``|\alsoname|'' in Babel. + +\erroronpage{267}{table 9.2}{RdB}{1997/06/01}{3} + Macro ``|\headpagename|'' is actually called ``|\pagename|'' in Babel. + +\erroronpage{270}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{} + My version of epsfig doesn't support textures with eps files, + so i guess that example is not correct (but i may not have latest + graphics). + +\erroronpage{270}{caption}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + Example using babel's option french (output on the facing page) + MGo: we have to change to ``|\usepackage[francais]{babel}|''. + +\erroronpage{271}{}{PKr}{1997/06/01}{} + The caption of tableau 1 reads: + ``Quelques commandes du pacquet \texttt{francais}'' + However, in the ``Liste des tableaux'' it reads: + ``Quelques commandes du style \texttt{francais}''. + + MGo: In the next edition we should write ``extension'', the + equivalent (chosen by GUTenberg) of the word ``package'' in French. + +\erroronpage{273}{}{JPe}{1997/06/01}{3} + The ``,'' after ``|\begin{order}|'' should be replaced by a blank. + +\erroronpage{274}{Table 9.4}{DMa}{1997/06/01}{} + Entries in the column ``French input'' should be set in verbatim mode, + instead of ttfamily, in order to properly illustrate the user input. + I.e., the spaces (indicated by |_| below) should be removed: +\begin{verbatim} + point-virgule_; + Il dit_: oui + Mon Dieu_! + Pourquoi pas_? +\end{verbatim} + MGo: not true, since the package ``french'' will transform that space + into a small space (before double punctuation, i.e., ;, :, ?, and !). + +\erroronpage{274}{l.6}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + Replace: ``...associated with their names.'' + by: ``...associated with them.''. + +\CHAPTER{Chapter 10} + +\erroronpage{275}{footnote}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + Remove the colon in the citation text. + +\erroronpage{275}{para 1}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + Add a footnote like this: + ``In certain situations it is possible for the |\special| command to + change the formatting because it can produce an additional break point + and it might prevent \LaTeX\ from noticing spaces.'' + +\erroronpage{277}{}{PvO}{1997/06/01}{3} + Better use ``|\setlength{\sdim}{1.5\sboxsep}|''. + Also show in the example that you do not use the default of 10pt. + +\erroronpage{277}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + In the first printing we used some modified version of the shadow + package (with an unofficial name). In the second printing we somehow + got it wrong again (the last shadow box is supposed to have a + larger shadow), sigh. It should read: + ``|\setlength{\sdim}{3\fboxsep}|'' + in the example. + +\erroronpage{278}{description of \texttt{\textbackslash ovalbox}} + {FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + Replace with: + ``The width of the frame is defined by the |\thinlines| command. The + diameter of the corner arcs is set with a |\cornersize| command. + The form |\cornersize{num}| sets the diameter to \emph{num} + $\times$ minimum(width of box, height of box); the form + |\cornersize*{len}| sets the diameter to \emph{len}. The + default is |\cornersize{0.5}|.'' + +\erroronpage{282}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + In the syntax box for ``|\root(x-|...'' show the space following the ``)'' + explicitly, since it is mandatory. + +\erroronpage{284}{}{MDa}{1997/06/01}{} + Add to the description of |\legend| that this command is to be used + outside the actual barenv environment. + +\erroronpage{285}{}{MDa}{1997/06/01}{} + In the description of the command ``|\setyname|'' the argument ``x-label'' + should become ``y-label'' (cf. the command |\setxname|). + +\erroronpage{293}{10.2.7}{MGo} {1997/10/20}{3} + Add reference to ``\LaTeX\ Graphics Companion'' for more on Feynman, + electronics, etc. diagrams. + +\erroronpage{293}{10.2.7, para 3}{MGo} {1997/06/01}{3} + Clarification: + A set of electronic circuit symbols developed by + Adrian Johnstone is available (on CTAN) as part of his + \texttt{lcircuit} system to be used with the \TeX{}cad program + (see figure 10.5). + +\erroronpage{294}{bottom}{JPe}{1997/06/01}{3} + Logically items 3 and 4 should be interchanged. + + MGo: I do not think so, since the final coordinates |(x,y)| should + be specified only for the final version. + +\erroronpage{295}{l.2}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + Replace: ``shortest line'' by ``shortest available line''. + +\erroronpage{296}{l.6}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + Replace: ``than the equivalent $n_1$ |\multiput| statements.'' + by: ``than multiple |\multiput| statements.''. + +\erroronpage{301}{l.1}{RHa}{1998/01/06}{} + Last argument of |\oval| is optional and should therefore be + surrounded by |[...]| + +\erroronpage{302}{l.7}{MGo, SKo}{1997/06/01}{} + Replace: ``must lie within the interval $[0,\pi/2]$ ...'' + by: ``must lie within the interval $[0,2\pi]$ ...''. + +\erroronpage{306}{l.3 bottom}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + Replace: ``for subsequent |\draw| commands'' + by: ``for subsequent |\match| commands''. + +\erroronpage{307}{def. of \texttt{\textbackslash drawwith}}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + Argument should be named ``draw-command'' since it can contain only + a single command. + +\CHAPTER{Chapter 11} + +\erroronpage{311}{all}{MGo}{1997/10/20}{} + A lot of material in this chapter has been discussed in more detail + in the ``\LaTeX\ Graphics Companion''. + +\erroronpage{312}{and probably elsewhere as well}{BDe}{1997/06/01}{} + Replace ``Bezier'' with ``B\'ezier''. + +\erroronpage{313}{last bullet line}{OBa}{1997/06/01}{} + Eliminate the space in front of the comma. + +\erroronpage{313}{11.1.2, l.4}{EMS}{2000/05/30}{} + Which appendix is in [2] and which one is in [87]? + + FMi: see appendices G and H in [2], or [87] + +\erroronpage{316}{table 11.1}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + Mention the dvips options: + ``-pp\# (single page)'' and ``-pp\#$_1$:\#$_2$ (page range)''. + +\erroronpage{318}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + Remove the double quotes around ``clip='' and the quotes around ``='' in + the explanation of the clip parameter. + MGo: Add note that epsfig is now superseded by \LaTeX's graphics package. + +\erroronpage{319}{l.4 from bottom of 11.3}{PvG}{1997/06/01}{} + Replace ``third column'' by ``first column''. + +\erroronpage{319}{l.4 from bottom of 11.3}{PvG}{1998/01/26}{} + Replace ``are given in the third column of table 11.2 on page 317'' +with ``are given by those values in the first column that correspond to +the X's in the third column''. + +\erroronpage{320}{l.2 from bottom}{PvG}{1998/01/26}{} + Replace ``are given in the fourth column of table 11.2 on page 317'' +with ``are given by those values in the first column that correspond +to the X's in the fourth column''. + +\erroronpage{321}{}{FPo}{1997/06/01}{3} + The caption for figure 11.4 could use some negative space between + ``Pre-'' and ``1991''. + +\erroronpage{321}{}{RSt}{1997/06/01}{3} + Perhaps we should learn about history better: make the caption + of figure 11.4: ``Pre-1990 Europe''. + +\erroronpage{321}{code for figure 11-x}{VSc}{1997/06/01}{3} + The nineth line should be unindented: +\begin{verbatim} + 6 \begin{minipage} + 7 \centering\epsfig + 8 \caption{Central + 9 ...\end{minipage} +\end{verbatim} + +\erroronpage{321}{}{PKr}{1997/06/01}{3} + It would be better to show that the example is coded as a figure by + surrounding the code with |\begin{figure}| ... |\end{figure}|. + +\erroronpage{328}{description of \texttt{\textbackslash cbstart}} + {MOh}{1997/06/01}{3} + Remove comma: + ``...the beginning of the region\u{,} which has to be flagged...'' + +\erroronpage{328}{l.2 of 11.5.1}{PvG}{1998/01/26}{} + Replace ``are given in the fifth column of table 11.2 on page 317'' +with ``are given by those values in the first column that correspond to +the X's in the fifth column''. + +\erroronpage{331}{}{BBe}{1997/06/01}{3} + First figure using |\psboxit|, the dashes formed by +\begin{verbatim} + ...--% + -- ... +\end{verbatim} + segment into an emdash and a hyphen; just a tad peculiar looking. + MGo: We could use |---| (three dashes). + +\erroronpage{333}{table 11.6 last line}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{} + Zapf Chancery is only available in italic thus the shape column + should show ``it'' and not ``n''. + +\erroronpage{335}{last line of 11.9.2}{CMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + Replace ``Symbols'' by ``Symbol'' since that is the name of the font. + +\erroronpage{335}{last line of 11.9.2}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + Remove forward reference since it is to the next(!) section. + +\erroronpage{337}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + Replace ``Style'' by ``Package'' in heading. + +\erroronpage{338}{}{WLe}{1997/06/01}{3} + Greek example, why not better use ``... ALFA\quad ...''? + MGo: Because I wanted to show that for some letters their is NO + simple correspondence, so that an ``unused'' Latin letter was chosen to + represent the Greek. + +\erroronpage{340}{l -8 in 11.9.7}{BBe}{1997/08/25}{} + The name is Kris Holmes, not Chris. + +\erroronpage{340}{l -3 in 11.9.7}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + Use plural: + ``... typesetting your complete document with these font families.''. + +\erroronpage{340}{section 10.10}{MGo}{1997/10/20}{3} + This complete section should be rewritten to replace the references + to ``DC'' by ``EC'' and to reflect present situation with PSNFSS. Also + see section 10.5 (TeXBase 1 encoding) of ``\LaTeX\ Graphics Companion''. + +\erroronpage{341}{table 11.12}{UMu,FMi}{1998/07/15}{} + Codepoint 0x18 should contain ``perthousandzero'', not + ``perthousand''. However, note that nearly no PS font will have a + perthousandzero glyph thus with PS fonts the slot would need to + stay unused. For this reason some people place in this position the + perthousand and add the ligature ``percent'' ``perthousand'' $\to$ + ``perthousand'' so that macros assuming perthousandzero in this + slot will work. + +\CHAPTER{Chapter 12} + +\erroronpage{349}{section 12.1.4}{MSc}{1997/06/01}{} + Not explicitly said but important. The ``|key@visual|'' can be used on + any level i.e., +\begin{verbatim} + \indexentry{aa@\textit{aa}!bb@\textit{bb}!cc@\textit{cc}}{10} +\end{verbatim} + will result in: +\begin{verbatim} + \item \textit{aa} + \subitem \textit{bb} + \subsubitem \textit{cc}, 10 +\end{verbatim} + +\erroronpage{350}{first examples}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + The last line of the first examples should read + ``\verb=\index{tabbing|)textit}='', + otherwise MakeIndex would complain about it. + +\erroronpage{350}{l.4 from bottom}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + Replace ``|{\it rose}|'' by ``|\textit{rose}|''. Not wrong but better. + +\erroronpage{351}{l.2}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + Replace: ``of the definition of the |\Prog| program.'' + by: ``of the definition of the |\Prog| command.''. + +\erroronpage{351}{l.21}{PvG}{1997/09/09}{} + Replace: ``(see also the example on page 348)'' + to: ``(see also the example at the bottom of page 347)''. + +\erroronpage{352}{l.2+3 }{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + Replace: + ``For example, you can define the command |\Index|, whose argument enters + its argument at the same time in the text and in the index.'' + by: + ``For example, you can define the command |\Index|, whose argument is + entered at the same time in the text and in the index.'' + +\erroronpage{352}{l.11 }{MDa}{1997/06/01}{} + The example definition +\begin{verbatim} + \newcommand{\Indextt}[1]{\texttt{#1}\index{#1@\texttt{#1}} +\end{verbatim} + lacks a further closing brace. + +\erroronpage{353-354}{}{FMi,MGo}{1997/06/01}{3} + The figures shown in the makeindex processing example are not + reflecting what is in the source on p354 (one index entry was dropped + there). + Correction: Add in section ``Printing the Index'' an index + entry ``|\index{include index}|'' as follows: + \begin{verbatim} + \section{Printing the Index} + \index{Final production run} + During the final production run of a document the + index can be included\index{include index} by putting + a \Com{printindex} command at the position in the text + \end{verbatim} + +\erroronpage{354}{}{PvO}{1997/06/01}{3} + The example should show a ``|\makeindex|'' command. + +\erroronpage{354}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{} + The lefthand side of the example should use the verbatim environment + not the verbatimcmd environment which is only defined when the moreverb + package is used. Also the example should show +\begin{verbatim} + \renewenvironment{theindex}{..}{..} +\end{verbatim} + +\erroronpage{355}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + It should say (in one line): +\begin{verbatim} + makeindex [-ciglqr] + [-o \emph{ind}] [-p \emph{no}] [-s \emph{sty}] [-t \emph{log}] + [\emph{idx0} \emph{idx1} ...] +\end{verbatim} + +\erroronpage{355}{ description of -g}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{} + Not an error in the book but in the program: works correctly only in + version 2.13 of Makeindex (2.12 dies with larger files). + Also with 2.13 quote is set to `+' with the |-g| option. + +\erroronpage{355}{}{PvO}{1997/06/01}{3} + It should say: +\begin{verbatim} + -o \emph{ind} Take the file \emph{ind} as the output index file. +\end{verbatim} + +\erroronpage{355}{ description of -p n}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + ``\emph{no}'' should always be in italics not typewriter. + the words ``|any|'', ``|odd|'', and ``|even|'' should be always + in typewriter. + +\erroronpage{356}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + It should say: +\begin{verbatim} + -s \emph{sty} Take the file \emph{sty} as the index style file. +\end{verbatim} + +\erroronpage{356}{}{PvO}{1997/06/01}{3} + It should say: +\begin{verbatim} + -t \emph{log} Use \emph{log} as the transcript file. +\end{verbatim} + +\erroronpage{356}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + It should say: +\begin{verbatim} + Extra `@' at position ... +\end{verbatim} + +\erroronpage{357}{Inconsistent page ..}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + Replace: ``\verb=\index{cat|iv}='' + by: ``\verb=\index{cat|see{animals}}=''. + +\erroronpage{358}{}{PvO}{1997/06/01}{3} + The description of escape is very confusing. + (FMi:) agreed, what about (FMi, MGo): +\begin{verbatim} + quote symbol that escapes the character following it. + escape symbol without special meaning unless followed by + the quote character in which case that character + looses its special function and both will be printed. +\end{verbatim} + +\erroronpage{358}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + Replace + ``(s) signals an attribute of type string, (c) of type char'' + by: + ``(s) attribute of type string, (c) of type char (surrounded by single or + double quotes, respectively)''. + +\erroronpage{358}{end of para 1}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + Add: Makeindex uses Unix string syntax in the style file. For this + reason one has to enter ``|\\|'' to get a single ``|\|'' in the output. + +\erroronpage{359}{}{PvO}{1997/06/01}{} + Description of |delim_t| is missing. + +\erroronpage{359}{table}{WMr}{1998/08/14}{} + A description of the .ist-keywords + \begin{verbatim} + symhead_positive "Symbols" + symhead_negative "symbols" + numhead_positive "Numbers" + numhead_negative "numbers" + \end{verbatim} + is missing. They are obviously quite helpful if your document is + not in English. + +\erroronpage{359}{delim\_0}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + Replace: ``entry-page number delimiter at level 0'' + by: ``delimiter between entry and first page number at level 0''. + (because the original is not understandable). + +\erroronpage{359}{}{FMi}{1998/01/18}{} + Description of |suffix_2p|, |suffix_3p|, and |suffix_mp| are + missing. If non-empty they replace a page range of length 2, 3, or + (m)any by the first page number followed by respective suffix. + +\erroronpage{359}{encap\_suffix}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + Remove surplus dot in default: ``|}|'' + +\erroronpage{359}{}{SMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + In Makeindex 2.12 and later versions the value of + ``|page_precedence(s)|'' is ``rnaRA''. + Therefore the examples on page 363 should be the other way around. + +\erroronpage{359}{}{FMi}{1998/01/18}{} + Add an example for |suffix_2p|, |suffix_3p|, and |suffix_mp|. + +\erroronpage{362}{fig 12.7}{WMr}{1999/01/14}{} + That's actually just a suggestion: + If you take a close look at the leaders in the index, you'll find + that they don't line up horizontally, probably because |\dotfill| uses + |\cleaders| instead of |\leaders|. By defining something like +\begin{verbatim} + \newcommand{\indexdotsep}{2.24} + \newcommand{\indexdotfill}{% + \leaders\hbox{$\m@th + \mkern\indexdotsep mu\hbox{.}% + \mkern\indexdotsep mu$}\hfill} +\end{verbatim} + (stolen from the definition of |\@dottedtocline|) in a \texttt{.sty} and a + redefinition in the \texttt{.ist} file (the \texttt{preamble} declaration + might need to be placed on a single line though): +\begin{verbatim} + preamble "\\begin{theindex}\n + \\providecommand{\\indexdotfill}{\\dotfill}\n" + delim_0 "\\ \\indexdotfill\\ " + ... +\end{verbatim} + they come out better (I think). + +\erroronpage{363}{l.7}{EMS}{2000/05/30}{} + Replace ``rRnaA'' by ``rnaRA'' + +\erroronpage{364}{}{RWo}{1997/06/01}{} + Remind the reader how to use a file with an extension + different from |.idx| with Makeindex. + +\erroronpage{364+365}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + The redefinition of theindex environment should set |\parindent| to zero + otherwise one ends up with all entries except the first being indented. + +\erroronpage{365}{}{WLe}{1997/06/01}{3} + According to the text on page 365, the index in the example should + have three columns instead of two. + +FMi: change this sentence to something like this: + ``... we have used a redefined theindex environment similar to the one + shown in section 12.5 but with two columns and without the |\newpage|.''. + +\erroronpage{366}{fig 12.8}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + This looks like the spot the ten differences in the picture: + Replace: ``|\renewcommand[2]{\printindex}{%|'' + by : the correct order of arguments :-(. + MGo: I see nothing wrong with the definition as it is written. + + Add a ``|\|'' in front of |textbf| in definition of ``|\printindex|''. + + Add a proper definition of ``|\Prog|'' and ``|\Com|'', they are not + the same as in fig 12.8. + + Outline that ``|\renewenvironment{theindex}{...}{...}|''. + + Indent |\input{#1.ind}| (this is cosmetics) + and don't use |\begin{center}| use |\section*| (cosmetics too). + +\erroronpage{367}{item 5}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + Replace: ``|\renewcommand{\indexproofstyle}{\footnotesize\itshape}|'' + by: ``|\indexproofstyle{\footnotesize\itshape}|''. + +\CHAPTER{Chapter 13} + +\erroronpage{373}{code middle of the page}{GGr,FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + First example is missing a closing brace: +\begin{verbatim} +\renewcommand{\@cite}[2]{% + [{#1\ifthenelse{\boolean{@tempswa}}{,#2}{}}]} +\end{verbatim} + Second example would nowadays be better done with |\textsuperscript|: +\begin{verbatim} +\renewcommand{\@cite}[2]{% + {\textsuperscript{#1}% + \ifthenelse{\boolean{@tempswa}}{,#2}{}}} +\end{verbatim} + +\erroronpage{373}{}{DAr}{1997/06/01}{} + Nowadays the cite and overcite packages will sort the list of citations. + +\erroronpage{373}{l.-2}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + Replace the incorrect sentence by: + ``The punctuation characters (.,;:) will be moved in front of the + superscript, but not in front of quotation marks, if present, e.g., + \verb=``The {\TeX}book'' \cite{Knuth}.= gives ``The + {\TeX}book''.$^8$, which may not be the desired format.'' + +\erroronpage{375}{l.3 of 13.2}{PvG}{1997/09/09}{} + Replace: ``\textit{key}'' by ``\textit{cite\_key}''. + +\erroronpage{378}{}{UVi}{1997/06/01}{} + The table of |.bst| files lists some styles named |phxxx.bst|, where + |xxx| stands for abbreviations like |aip|, |nf|, |pf|, |ppcf|, etc. + On CTAN these styles are now located in a subdirectory |phy-bstyles| + and they no longer carry the prefix |ph| in their name. It would + be a good idea to update this in the Companion, because otherwise + people looking for the names with the famous ``|quote site index|'' + might not find them. + + MGo: In fact I found them on CTAN under both names. + FMi: I'm right now reluctant to change anything since i wonder + whether those names will stay. It seems wrong to me that the names + (prefix) have changed. + +\erroronpage{378}{}{UVi}{1997/06/01}{} + |(ph)ppcf.bst| is described as ``a physics version of the apalike + BibTeX style''. This might be true somehow, but a better + describtion would be ``BibTeX style for Plasma Physics and + Controlled Fusion'', since that is the name of the journal the + abbreviation ppcf stands for (see |physjabb|). + |(ph)report.bst| is described as ``BibTeX style for internal + reports''. It might be a good idea to add some hint that this + probably refers to the Princeton Plasma Physics Lab or Princeton + University. + MGo: We could update that part in a future edition. + +\erroronpage{381}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{} + Extend the source of example to include |abstract| and |keyword| + field which then can be shown in output of printbib on page 396. + +\erroronpage{381}{l.1 in Figure 13.4}{LFe}{2000/03/29}{} + ``\texttt{BiBTeX}'' should be ``\texttt{BibTeX}''. + +\erroronpage{385}{l.7}{PvO}{1997/06/01}{3} + ``only works without modifications on UNIX'' is probably a bit too + harsh: It is meant that modifications are necessary for systems + such as MS-DOS that have file names with strict length limits. + By the way should UNIX not be typeset with small capitals? + MGo: No, ATT (and most publishers) spell it all uppercase. + +\erroronpage{385}{l.-18}{DAr}{1997/06/01}{3} + Replace ``combines two different'' by ``uses two different'' + (the styles aren't really combined.) + +\erroronpage{386}{l.3 of 13.3.2}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + Replace ``style'' by ``package''. + +\erroronpage{386}{4}{EFe}{1998/09/03} + ``Fernandez'' should be typed ``|Fern{\'a}ndez|''. + +\erroronpage{387}{l.1 }{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + The root file should be called |chapterbibexa.tex| (as in the + formatting example on page 385). + +\erroronpage{388}{caption}{RSt}{1997/06/01}{3} + For ``advisable precedure'' read ``advisable procedure''. + +\erroronpage{392}{start of para 4}{CMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + ``The argument of the |\bibliography| command must ...''. + +\erroronpage{392}{after example}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + Add: ``... after the BibTeX run unless the bibliography entries + themselves contain citations to other entries + (e.g., |note = {reviewed in \cite{..}}|).'' + +\erroronpage{393}{bibextract}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + The regular expression must (!) contain only lowercase characters + (even when looking for words like ``Adobe''), otherwise nothing + will be found. Thus our examples should read: +\begin{verbatim} +bibextract "" "postscript" bibfile(s) > new-bibfile +bibextract "author|organization" "adobe" bibfile(s) > new-bibfile +\end{verbatim} + +\erroronpage{393}{bibextract}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + Another restriction: + ``You might have to clean the |.bib| files using + bibclean before bibextract finds correct entries.'' + +\erroronpage{393}{l.6. bottom}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + While the next command will only extract those entries containing + ``Adobe'' in the |author| or |organization| field. + +\erroronpage{393}{last para, 394 first para}{FMi,MGo}{1997/06/01}{3} + Replace ``citefind.sh'' by ``citefind''. + Replace ``citetags.sh'' by ``citetags''. + +\erroronpage{394}{l.4}{CMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + Replace ``styles'' by ``files''. + +\erroronpage{394}{23}{EFe}{1998/09/03}{} + Add: \ldots and book\u{s} about\ldots + +\erroronpage{398}{para 3}{PVi}{1997/06/01}{} + Say explicitly that quotes or braces *must* be omitted around + abbreviations like the name of the months. + +\erroronpage{399}{14}{EFe}{1998/09/03} + ``Lopez Fernandez'' should be typed ``|L{\'o}pez Fern{\'a}ndez|''. + +\erroronpage{400}{4,5,7}{EFe}{1998/09/03} + ``Lopez Fernandez'' should be typed ``|L{\'o}pez Fern{\'a}ndez|''. + +\erroronpage{400}{9 from bottom}{EFe}{1998/09/03} + ``Maria'' should be typed ``|Mar{\'i}a|''. + +\erroronpage{401}{l.1}{PVi}{1997/06/01}{} + Remove comma in ``and others,''. + +\erroronpage{403}{}{???}{1997/06/01}{3} + A comma is missing after: ``@article(tub-87,'' + +\erroronpage{403}{para 1}{CMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + Replace all ``.bib style'' with ``.bib file''. + +\erroronpage{404}{1st example}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + Use |\providecommand| instead of |\newcommand|. + +\erroronpage{413}{add.period}{PvO}{1997/06/01}{3} + Should read: ``adds dot to string unless that string ends with `.', + `?', or `!'\,''. + +\CHAPTER{Chapter 14} + +\erroronpage{424}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + Add ``|\Finale|'' to the box with ``|\StopEventually{final text}|'' + since they belong together. + +\erroronpage{425}{para 3 (explanation of + \texttt{\textbackslash MakeShortVerb})}{SBe}{1997/06/01}{} +\begin{verbatim} + change ... (the character |"| is often ... may prefer \verb="|"=). + to ... (the character |"| is often ... may prefer \verb=|=). + + change ... just type |\DeleteShortVerb {\c}|. + to ... just type |\DeleteShortVerb{\c}|. + + change ... the abbreviated cform, ... + to ... the abbreviation form, ... +\end{verbatim} + +\erroronpage{426}{figure 14.1}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + It should be |\DocInput{docexam.doc}| because .dtx is reserved for + files whose documentation can be produced by simply running them + through \LaTeX. + +\erroronpage{426}{l.4 of section 14.2.7.}{PAp}{1997/06/01}{3} + Replace: ``You should run the file thought ...'' + by ``You should run the file through ...''. + +\erroronpage{427}{figure 14.2}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{} + Better use ``|\ProvidesPackage|'' instead of ``|\typeout|'' messages. + +\erroronpage{427}{figure 14.2}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + The |\item| in the definition of ``docsampleenv'' should be removed. + Also: the documentation of ``docsampleenv'' is incorrect. + +\erroronpage{429}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + Replace the heading: ``Document structure and validation support'' + by: ``Document structure commands''. + +\erroronpage{429}{Table 14.1, item: \texttt{\textbackslash DeleteShortVerb}} + {VSc}{1997/06/01}{} + Add argument: ``|\DeleteShortVerb{\char}|''. + +\erroronpage{430}{Table 14.1, item: \texttt{\textbackslash MakeShortVerb}} + {VSc}{1997/06/01}{} + Add backslash: ``|\MakeShortVerb{\char}|''. + +\erroronpage{432}{ table 14.1}{MDa}{1997/06/01}{} + In the last section of this table, ``Layout and typesetting parameters'', + the commands ``|\tt|'' and ``|\sl|'' appear (cf. your own remark in the + errata file regarding page 350). + +\erroronpage{432}{table 14.1}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{} + We should also describe the \LaTeX\ counters IndexColumns (number of + columns in the index) and GlossaryColumns (number of columns in the + history listing). + +\erroronpage{432ff}{chapter 14.3}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{} + Since \LaTeX\ 95/12/01 docstrip is able to generate more than one file + in a single run. This extended functionality is currently described + only in the documented source code, i.e., in the file |docstrip.dtx|. + +\erroronpage{433}{para 6}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + Not only NFSS2 but the whole \LaTeX\ (2e) is now distributed using + the doc system. + +\erroronpage{433}{para 1 of 14.3.1}{SBe}{1997/06/01}{} + Change font of \% in: + ``... but preceded with two \% characters.''. + +\erroronpage{433}{Section 14.3.1}{MSc,FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + Mention that |\preamble| ...|\endpreamble| is meant for straight text and + that nearly no command will work between. One can use |\string||\foo| to + put out a command name literally. + +\erroronpage{434}{l.10}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + Replace: ``|\batchfile| Batch file commands can be ...'' + by: ``Batch file commands, like |\generateFile|, can be ...''. + +\erroronpage{434}{l.-9}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + Replace the sentence: ``Note that these tags must ...'' + by: ``The tags must be placed at the beginning of the line + preceded by a |%|, e.g.,''. + +\erroronpage{434}{l.-2}{SBe}{1997/06/01}{} + Change space after ``!'' from inter-sentence to inter-word space. + +\erroronpage{437+438}{}{ASc}{1997/06/01}{3} + In the second last code line the |\@@end| should be replaced by + |\csname @@end\endcsname| since otherwise |\@@end| isn't recognised + in most situations. This also means that the checksum changes to 15. + +\CHAPTER{Appendix A} + +\erroronpage{440}{second example}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + It should better be: ``|\newcommand{\PsI}{\Ps\index{\Ps}}|'' + +\erroronpage{440}{second example}{FMi}{1999/04/30}{} + second line of |\EPsI| has one closing brace too many, i.e., should be + |\index{\PS!Encapsulated}\index{EPS}}| + +\erroronpage{440}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{} + As a general comment we should remark that when nesting command + definitions, e.g., a |\renewcommand| inside a |\newenvironment| one has to + double the |#| characters denoting the arguments when referring to the + arguments of the inner definition, for instance, +\begin{verbatim} + \newenvironment{foo}[1] + { ... #1 % argument of environment foo + \renewcommand\bar[2]{ ... + ##1 % argument of command \bar + #1 % argument of environment foo + ##2 % argument of command \bar + }% + ... #1 % argument of environment foo + }{...} +\end{verbatim} + +\erroronpage{440}{following}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{} + |\newcommand| and |\renewcommand| now support a starred form which + makes it illegal to use |\par| (or an empty line) in the argument(s) + of the command being defined. This can be helpful for tracking + down errors of missing closing argument braces and can be used if + a command is intended to be used only within paragraphs. + +\erroronpage{440}{}{RWo}{1997/06/01}{3} + Use the same formula in the last two examples to show the advantage + of |\ensuremath| better. + +\erroronpage{442}{last line of A.1.1}{PvG}{1997/09/09}{} +Add the reference (see section 13.5.4 on page 404) at the end of the +line. + +\erroronpage{446}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + Add to the description of |\newcounter|: + ``It also defines |\thenewctr| to be |\arabic{newctr}|.''. + +\erroronpage{447}{}{MSc}{1997/06/01}{3} + A counter cannot be larger than 9 if used with |\fnsymbol|. + +\erroronpage{447}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + All the |\the...| commands in the examples should be defined with + |\renewcommand|. + +\erroronpage{449}{Table A.1}{PvG}{1997/09/09}{} +For consistency with the previous definition of pt and the following +definition of dd change: (72 bp = 1 in) \> $= \frac{1}{72}$in . +FMi: or perhaps the other way around? + +\erroronpage{449}{table A.1}{MSe}{1997/06/01}{} + The cicero length in millimetres is wrong: + Replace: ``4.531 mm'' by ``4.513 mm''. + +\erroronpage{449}{l.4}{EPi}{1997/06/01}{} + Remove accent from Did\^ot. + +\erroronpage{450}{table A.2}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + |\hfill| is better described as a ``rubber space'' not a ``rubber length''. + +\erroronpage{454}{l.7}{UGo}{1997/06/01}{} + The optional arguments to |\raisebox| are exchanged: ``height'' comes + before ``depth''. + +\erroronpage{454}{para 2, l.3}{PvG}{1997/09/09}{} + Replace: ``by specifying a height and depth ...'' + by: ``by specifying a \textit{height} and \textit{depth} ...''. + +\erroronpage{456}{last para}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{} + Replace: ``In the case below'' by ``In the next case'' since the next + example is on the following page. + +\erroronpage{459}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + Add ``x333x'' after both |\usebox{\myboxb}| commands in the example + (cosmetics!). + +\erroronpage{461}{table A.4}{WLe}{1997/06/01}{3} + For ``|\Requirepackage|'' read ``|\RequirePackage|'' in the explanation of + |\LoadClass|. + +\erroronpage{470}{text l.5 from bottom}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + Replace ``(real or integer)'' by ``integer''. They can't be real! + +\erroronpage{470}{text l.3 from bottom}{RCr}{1997/08/21}{} + Replace ``more that twenty'' by ``more than twenty''. + +\erroronpage{470}{A.5}{CRo}{1997/06/01}{3} + In the description of the ifthen package, no clear distinction is + made between those commands which can be used only in a + {test}-argument, and those which are for other uses. + +\erroronpage{472}{}{RWo}{1997/06/01}{3} + The index entries in the |.idx| file would actually look like this + (remove the surplus ``page:AAAA1'' in the middle of them): +\begin{verbatim} + \indexentry{AAAA!both}{472} + \indexentry{AAAA!indexentry}{472} + \indexentry{AAAA!indexonly}{472} +\end{verbatim} + +\erroronpage{474}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{} + Add a remark that one can't use |\isodd| to directly test |\value{page}| + and expect correct information because the value of this counter + isn't always correct due to \TeX's asynchronous output routine. + +\CHAPTER{Appendix B} + +\erroronpage{475}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + Maybe rename the heading to ``\TeX\ Software and User Group information''. + +\erroronpage{475}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + Add information about the possibility to get the CTAN software on + CD: +\begin{verbatim} + \bibitem{primetime:VBr94} + Vicki Brown, editor. + \newblock {\em Prime Time {\TeX}cetera}, volume~1. + \newblock Prime Time Freeware, Sunnyvale, CA, 1994. + \newblock Contains CD with CTAN software. +\end{verbatim} + MGo: Now (end of 1997) there are various other CD's which offer + (parts of) CTAN and/or ready-to-run \TeX\ environments for UNIX, + Windows, DOS, Mac, etc. + +\erroronpage{477}{l 13}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + Should read: ``contents of the morebin \u{zip} archive on \u{y}our + local node.''. + +\erroronpage{479}{under b.2 mail servers}{BBe} {1997/06/01}{3} + I am irked by the difference in the depth of the underline under + ``end'' right after ``send help''; + maybe you could be persuaded to use a strut? + +\CHAPTER{Bibliography} + +\erroronpage{481}{[1], l.10}{VSc}{1997/06/01}{} + Addison\u{-}Wesley, 1992 + +\erroronpage{491}{}{RWo}{1997/06/01}{3} + The name is Peter Vollenweider; somebody inverted the `w'. + +\CHAPTER{Index} + +\erroronpage{}{}{JKn}{1997/06/01}{} + I suggest to index the table 5.7 (page 127) under ``Language'' + and the table on top of page 140 under ``S''. + +\erroronpage{}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{} + There should be entries for all encodings, |OT1|, |T1|, |OML|, + |OMS|, |OMX|, pointing at least to page 192, perhaps to others. + +\erroronpage{493}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{} + The two funny looking entries of the form ``|\, 220|'' actually should + be ``|\{, 220|'' + ``|\}, 220|''. + +\erroronpage{497}{}{GGr}{1997/06/01}{3} + Add entry for ``Blackboard bold'' pointing to page 218. + Also add one pointing to page 208 (MPi). + And add a similar entry for |\Bbb| (MPi). + +\erroronpage{500}{}{JBa}{1997/06/01}{} + ``Commutative Diagrams'' should point to 233-235. + +\erroronpage{500}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{} + |\cornersize| is incorrectly indexed as ``rigid length''. + +\erroronpage{500}{dd}{MCl}{1997/11/06}{} + Did\^{o}t \> Didot + +\erroronpage{501}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{} + |\DeclareFontSubstitution| should have bold entry to page 203. + +\erroronpage{501}{}{MCl}{1997/11/19}{} + Did\^{o}t \> Didot + +\erroronpage{506}{}{CRo}{1997/06/01}{3} + Add index entry for ``Fragile command'' and ``Commands, fragile'' + to point to 246 and 471. + +\erroronpage{507}{}{BBe}{1997/08/25}{} + The name is Kris Holmes, not Chris. + +\erroronpage{508}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + Index entry for |\IndexMin| should be a ``rigid length''. + +\erroronpage{509}{}{PvO,FMi}{1997/06/01}{} + Reference 249 for |\left| should be 248. (This is probably true for + other entries pointing to the example section of chapter 8, because + index entries to the examples are placed after the example.) + +\erroronpage{517}{}{OBo}{1997/06/01}{} + Entries for ``Page header'', ``Header of page'', ``Page footer'', and + ``Footer of page'' should also point to pages 91 and 96 and perhaps + also to page 20 where table 2.2 describes how sectioning commands + relate to page headers. + +\erroronpage{519}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + Environment supertabular is incorrectly indexed under |\supertabular|. + +\erroronpage{520}{}{PvO}{1997/06/01}{} + Reference 249 for |\right| should be 248. + +\erroronpage{525-527}{}{BBe}{1997/06/01}{} + I was a little surprised to find the listing for ``\TeX\ users group'' + where one would expect to find ``TUG'' in the index, although ``TUG'' + doesn't appear in the entry. I also would have expected to see + p.260 listed with that entry, considering the reference there to + the TWGMLC and the Portland meeting. + + The people who were acknowledged in the preface don't show up in + the index. Although it's not necessary, of course, Knuth did + include his acknowledgees and sources of quotes in the \TeX book + index, so there's a precedent. + +\erroronpage{526}{}{UVi}{1997/06/01}{} + Add index entry ``Title page'' to point to 452. + +\erroronpage{527}{}{FMi}{1997/06/01}{3} + ``|\unitlength|'' is incorrectly indexed as a command. + +\CHAPTER{Production Notes} + +\end{erratalist} + + + +\begin{multicols}{3}[Thanks to all who have found errors or + omissions. Listed are the people who found an errata entry first.] +\contributor{ADu}{Alain Dupuis} +\contributor{ASc}{Andreas Schwab} +\contributor{BBe}{Barbara Beeton} +\contributor{BDe}{Bernard Desruisseaux} +\contributor{BFr}{Bert Frederiks} +\contributor{BGa}{Bernard Gaulle} +\contributor{BNa}{Blaise Nkwenti-Azeh} +\contributor{BRa}{Bernd Raichle} +\contributor{CKr}{Claudia Kraft} +\contributor{CMi}{Christel Mittelbach} +\contributor{CRo}{Chris Rowley} +\contributor{DAr}{Donald Arseneau} +\contributor{DBo}{David Boersma} +\contributor{DCa}{David Carlisle} +\contributor{DEl}{Daniel Elvin} +\contributor{DKa}{David Kastrup} +\contributor{DKra}{Dieter Kraft} +\contributor{DKre}{Dieter Kreft} +\contributor{DKu}{David Kustrin} +\contributor{DMa}{Daniel Mainz} +\contributor{DOs}{David Osborne} +\contributor{DRo}{Denis Roegel} +\contributor{EFe}{Eduardo Fern\'andez} +\contributor{EPi}{Eric Picheral} +\contributor{EMS}{SOUIDI EL Mamoun} +\contributor{FGo}{Frans Goddijn} +\contributor{FJe}{Frank Jensen} +\contributor{FMi}{Frank Mittelbach} +\contributor{FPo}{Frank Poppe} +\contributor{FVi}{Frode Viste} +\contributor{GFe}{Gabriel Valiente Feruglio} +\contributor{GGr}{George Graetzer} +\contributor{GRo}{Guenter Rote} +\contributor{GSa}{Gernot Salzer} +\contributor{GZi}{Georg Zimmermann} +\contributor{HAs}{Helmer Aslaksen} +\contributor{IAN}{Ignacio Arenaza Nuno} +\contributor{JAd}{Jeff Adler} +\contributor{JBa}{Jonas Barklund} +\contributor{JBr}{Johannes Braams} +\contributor{JHa}{Jay Hammond} +\contributor{JKn}{J\"org Knappen} +\contributor{JPe}{Joachim Pense} +\contributor{JSa}{Julio Sanchez} +\contributor{JvM}{Jan Van Mieghem} +\contributor{JWe}{Jon Wells} +\contributor{KML}{Kathleen M. Lyle} +\contributor{KRa}{Kalle Rato} +\contributor{KSe}{Karl Seybold} +\contributor{KSi}{Kimmo Sipila} +\contributor{LFe}{Luca Ferrante} +\contributor{LLa}{Leslie Lamport} +\contributor{LWi}{Linda Wilson} +\contributor{MCl}{Matthias Clasen} +\contributor{MDa}{Mats Dahlgren} +\contributor{MGo}{Michel Goossens} +\contributor{MMu}{Martin C M\"uller} +\contributor{MPi}{Mike Piff} +\contributor{MOh}{Marcus W. Ohlhaut} +\contributor{MOs}{Martin J. Osborne} +\contributor{MSc}{Martin Schr\"oder} +\contributor{MSe}{Michael R. Semple} +\contributor{NBe}{Nelson Beebe} +\contributor{NPo}{Nico Poppelier} +\contributor{OBa}{Oeyvind Bakke} +\contributor{OBo}{Oscar Bosman} +\contributor{PAp}{Pedro Aphalo} +\contributor{PvG}{Philip von Guggenberg} +\contributor{PHa}{Paul Hafner} +\contributor{PKr}{Peter Kruijt} +\contributor{PBL}{Peter Busk Laursen} +\contributor{PNu}{Peter N\"uchter} +\contributor{PVi}{Philip A. Viton} +\contributor{PvO}{Piet van Oostrum} +\contributor{RBa}{Rosemary Bailey} +\contributor{RCr}{Robert Cristel} +\contributor{RdB}{Rob den Braasem} +\contributor{RHa}{Ralph Hangleiter} +\contributor{RPo}{Rama Porrat} +\contributor{RSa}{Robert Sakic} +\contributor{RSt}{Rebecca Stiels} +\contributor{RWa}{Richard Walker} +\contributor{RWo}{Reinhard Wonneberger} +\contributor{SBe}{Stephan Bergmann} +\contributor{SKi}{Steve King} +\contributor{SKo}{Siegfried K\"olbig} +\contributor{SMi}{Stefan Mintert} +\contributor{TBo}{Tilmann B\"o\ss} +\contributor{TMa}{Torsten Martinsen} +\contributor{TRa}{T.V. Raman} +\contributor{UGo}{Ulrich Goldschmitt} +\contributor{UJa}{Ulrich Jahnz} +\contributor{UMu}{Ulrich M\"uller} +\contributor{UVi}{Ulrik Vieth} +\contributor{VBr}{Volker Brandt} +\contributor{VSc}{Volker RW Schaa} +\contributor{War}{Warwick Conference (March 21-22 1994)} +\contributor{WLe}{Werner Lemberg} +\contributor{WMr}{Wilhelm M\"uller} +\end{multicols} + +Many other people send us corrections for errors already found. +Thanks to all of you! + +If you find further errors please report them to one of the authors +\begin{quote}\ttfamily + frank.mittelbach@latex-project.org + goossens@cern.ch \\ +\end{quote} +preferable in a form usable for this file, i.e., +\begin{flushleft} +|\erroronpage{|\textit{page-number}|}{|\textit{line-identification}|}{|% + \textit{your-initials}|}{|\textit{date}|}{}| \\ + \hspace*{2em}\textit{description of the the errata} +\end{flushleft} +Here is an example: +\begin{verbatim} +\erroronpage{5}{para 3, l.1}{MOs}{1997/06/01}{} + ``LaTeX" should be typeset ``\LaTeX". +\end{verbatim} + +\end{document} + + + +********************************** +* * +* Errors in first printing * +* * +********************************** + + + +========== General =========== + +* Some source files in the LaTeX2e distribution have got new names, +for example latex.tex -> lt....dtx (many files). The final +distribution is still under construction. + + +========== Front matter =========== + +-* Title Page + Drop IPS, from affiliation of Samarin (just leave ISO) + +-* Copyright page + Add second printing + +-* Table of Contents, Page xviii + 10.5 should read "Packages Based on epic + +-* Table of Contents, Page xxi + Page number of Bibliography should be 481 + +-* Table of Contents, Page xxiii + 5.8 A comparison (not A Comparison) + + +========== Chapter 1 =========== + +-* Page 3 last para (SKi) + files containing the structures and layout definitions (extension + .sty) should also include extension .cls + +-* Page 4 (JSa) + Add clo to LaTeX layout & structure file extensions + +-* Page 5 third par (GGr) + In Textures, the transcript file has no extension. + + +========== Chapter 2 =========== + +-* Page 13 (PHa) + 4th bullet item: define your own (not OUR own) + +-* Page 15 (JSa) + 1994/08/02 should also be 1994/08/01 + +-* Page 29 (NPo) + fig 2.9: braces round argument `title' and `toc_entry' missing. + (very strange this) + +-* Page 37, l.6 below Table (GGr) + Extension .mtc<N> will not work in DOS (Windows). + +-* Page 44 (JSa,FMi) + The default for \reftextfaraway was missing. + Also changed the local adaption example to use \RequirePackage +with a reference to Appendix A. + +========== Chapter 3 =========== + +-* Page 48 (LLa) + The paragraph above the example unfortunately doesn't describe the +example any longer, it describes an old version of it. + +-* Page 52 (OBa) + \fuzzy should be \fussy (3 lines above title 3.1.5...) + +-* Page 52 (SKi) + The multispace package was written by Stephen (not Stephan) Page. + +-* Page 59 (FMi) + The representation of \labelitemiv is missing. This seems to be +a``correction'' of the printer people since the dot is in the +PostScript file! + +-* Page 62 (MGo) + More general (and more correct) description of general list +parameters. Especially the relation between the \labelwidth and +\itemindent lengths are made clearer. + +-* Page 65 (DCa) + The labels in the Mentry env are aligned on the top of their *boxes* +not on their first baselines. (A buggy \parbox[t] implementation on +the way to LaTeX2e) + +-* Page 67 (NPo) + \begin{verbatimtab}[...] instead of \verbatimtab[...] since we +describe an environment + +-* Page 70 (FMi) + verbatimwrite is incorrectly mentioned as a command but it is an +environment. Also correct index entry. + +-* Page 71 (DCa) + stepping the mpfootnote counter +should be + stepping the footnote counter + + +========== Chapter 4 =========== + +-* Page 86 (FMi) + testpage.tex in LaTeX2e now asks interactively for the paper your +printer uses so there isn't any need to use testa4.tex any longer. + +-* Page 94-95 (FMi) + Replace para starting at the bottom with: +The marking commands work reasonably well for right markers ``numbered +within'' left markers (for example, when the left marker is changed by +a \Lcs{chapter} command and the right marker is changed by a +\Lcs{section} command). However, it produces somewhat anomalous +results if a \Lcs{markboth} command is preceded by some other mark +command on the same page---see the page receiving \texttt{L5 R3.2} in +Figure~\vref{fig:pagemarkers}. This figure shows schematically which +left and right markers are generated for pages being shipped out. + +-* Page 95 (FMi) + Replace the last four lines in figure 4.3 with the following five + lines: +\markboth{L4}{} {L4}{} +\markboth{L5}{} {L5}{} +\newpage% ----page break ---- L5 R3.2 +\markright{R5.1} {L5}{R5.1} +\end{document} L5 R5.1 + + + +-* Page 97 (GGr,FMi) + Replace begin of second para with: + +Some \LaTeX{} commands, like \Lcs{chapter}, use a \Lcs{thispagestyle} +command to automatically switch to the \Psty{plain} page style, thus +overriding the page style currently in effect. To customize such +pages use the \Pmsty{fancyplain} page style. This page style sets up +\Psty{fancy} for normal pages and in addition ... + +-* Page 98 (EPi) + \usestylefile{fancyheadings} (in bottom example) +should be + \usepackage{fancyheadings} + +-* Page 99 (EPi) + \usestylefile{fancyheadings} (in figure 4.6) +should be + \usepackage{fancyheadings} + +-* Page 99 (FMi) + \samepage is considered obsolete in LaTeX2e and will not be +documented by Leslie Lamport in his book; the relevant paragraph has +been rephrased. + + +========== Chapter 5 =========== + +-* Page 111 (OBa) + "substracting" should be "subtracting" (12th line from top) + +-* Page 120 (DKre,FPo) + Bring Example text and table 5.3 in synch + +-* Page 121 (DKre,FPo) + Bring Example text and table 5.4 in synch + +-* Page 123 (FMi,FPo) + Bring Example text and table 5.5 in synch + +-* Page 127 (FPo) + The bottom left figure seems to have a quote before Tsonga +This is a printing artefact. + +-* Page 127 (PvO) + Bottom left figure, there is also some spurious ink before + Croatian. + +-* Page 127 Table 5.7 (FPo) + In the last `page' the code for Tsonga appears as 'ts, with a quote +in front of it. It might be a blob of ink, but it looks very much like +a quote. (It is a blob of extra ink, and this was missed by the +printer, compare p59. FMi:-) + +-* Page 128 (FMi) + Lowercase word "comparison" in caption for table 5.8 + Also correct lot entry page xxiii. + +-* Page 133 (MGo) + In table 5.9 URW is misspelled as URM + + +========== Chapter 6 =========== + +-* Page 151 (MGo) + Figure 6.2, the vertical lines of the box surrounding the map + are partly invisible (printing problem) + + +========== Chapter 7 =========== + +-* Page 170 l. 9, f.b. (GGr) + Change sentence to: Font metric files (i.e., .tfm files) are loaded +for all intermediate typefaces, even if these fonts are never used. + +-* Page 171 caption (GGr) + Change + easy memorable + to + easily memorizable + +-* Page 171 (FMi,LLa) + The default for \nocorrlist was changed to +\newcommand{\nocorrlist}{,.} + in the LaTeX distribution because :; do not look right with the +default LaTeX fonts from the Computer Modern families. + +-* Page 177 (FMi,LLa) + The example shows that \mathnormal produces italic numbers. This is +only true for the Lucida Math Fonts used in the Companion. Thus, the +following footnote should be added to the expanation: + \footnote{With the default setup of \LaTeXe{} using Computer Modern +math fonts, \Lmcs{mathnormal} will produce old style numerals, not the +italic ones shown in the example, where Lucida is used.} + +-* Page 180 in 7.5, l. 3 (GGr) + section B should be Appendix B + +-* Page 180 l. 3 f.b. (GGr,FMi) + `Consequentially' should be `Consequently'; + in the same sentence change `used' to `uses'. + +-* Page 186 l. 8 f.b. (GGr) + Add space before `This' + +-* Page 187 last line (GGr) + Captialize: new font selection scheme + +-* Page 191 last line (FMi) + Add: For this to work the encoding OT2 must be declared in the +preamble or a package file. + +-* Page 194 (FMi) + \cmdunh10.tfm +should be + cmdunh10.tfm + +-* Page 195, 197 (FMi) + Again all .tfm files shouldn't have \ in front of their names + +-* Page 201 (MGo) + substract should be subtract on second line explaining \fontdimen4 + +-* Page 202 (FMi) + For peamble read preamble + +-* Page 204 (GGr) + fontdef.tex was renamed to fontdef.ltx in the final distribution + (also correct index entry) + +-* Page 205, last para (SMi) + [...], you first have make the typeface [...] +should be + [...], you first have to make the typeface [...] + +-* Page 211 (FMi) + Warning message "Check substitution defaults for ..." was changed to +"Checking defaults for ...". Also change \DeclareFontEncoding to +\DeclareFontSubstitution in last sentence of explanation for this +message. + +-* Page 211 (FMi) + The message "Don't use ..." was changed to "Command ... invalid in +math mode". + +-* Page 211 (FMi) + The message "Encoding scheme <name> changed to <new name> in ..." +has changed to "Encoding <name> has changed to <new name> for ..." + +-* Page 213 (FMi) + New message added: + +\erritem{Overwriting \m{something} in version \m{name} ...} + +A declaration, like \Lcs{SetSymbolFont} or \Lcs{DeclareMathAlphabet}, +has changed the assignment of font shapes to \m{something} (a symbol +font or a math alphabet) in the math version \m{name}. + +-* Page 214 (FMi) + New message added: + +\erritem{Size substitutions with differences up to \m{size} have occured} + +This message will appear at the end of the run in case \NFSS{} +selected at least one significantly different size because the +requested size was not available. The \m{size} is the maximum +deviation that was needed. + +-* Page 214 (FMi) + New message added: + +\erritem{Some font shapes were not available, defaults substituted} + +This message will appear at the end of the run in case \NFSS{} +had to use automatic font substitution for some font shapes. + + +========== Chapter 8 =========== + +-* Page 215 (FMi,MGo) + Added a reference to George~Gr\"atzer's book on AmSLaTeX. + Also add bibliography [95] (see bibliography section later) + +-* Page 218 (DCa) + \o + should be + o + +-* Page 219 (DCa) + `blank' \rown + should be + /-\ \frown (didnt this one create a TeX error :-) + (FMi no because of TeX's \csname bug :-( ) + + +-* Page 219, 222 (DRo,FMi) + The \varnothing and \emptyset do show the wrong +character, ie need exchanging. + +-* Page 220 (DCa) + { should be \{ + } should be \} + +-* Page 220, Table 8.13. (LLa) + Is that \digamma right? It looks an awful lot like a slanted + F to me. +This is unfortunately true. The Lucida Fonts do not contain that +character and we overlooked that the font setup simply points to the +slanted F. + +-* Page 222, Table 8.20 (FMi) + The characters \Game \Finv \Bbbk \diagdown \diagup are now part of +amssymb.sty + +-* Page 231 (DCa) + The \biggl( in the scope of \begin{large} is *smaller* than the +normalsize one! + +-* Page 238 (DCa) + The examples of split environment with and without the ctagsplt +option do not work as the linewidth is too narrow, so in both cases +the tag apears on the line before the display. + +-* Page 241 (PHa) + The typeset equation just before (8.41') should have a tag: ' + (This is once more a printer problem. the tag ' is in the PS file +and must have been removed by somebody manually) +To avoid this problem the example was changed to show $*$ twice. + + * Page 243 (FMi) +Replace fist sentence of 8.6.5 with: + A few options are recognized by the amsmath package and the class + files coming with AmS-LaTeX. + +-* Page 244 ... 251 (FMi) + The vertical lines in the examples (mentioned on this page) are all +missing on the final printout. Another printing problem. + +-* Page 250 (MGo) + section 8.7.6: some space (\thinspace) should be inserted in + front of the semicolon (;) at the end of formula 8.57 and its + unnumbered equivalent (fourth line from bottom). + +========== Chapter 9 =========== + +-* Page 270 (BNa) + 8th line of example should read + \\\today\end{center} instead of \\\today{center} + +-* Pages 272 and 274 (BGa, MGo) + Use correct (Lucida, not poor man's) guillemets + \symb{13}, \symb{14} for French + +========== Chapter 10 =========== + +-* Several pages have index entries added (MGo) + +-* Page 277 (LWi) + In CTAN version of shadow.sty \shadowbox is called \shadox + In example replace also \shadowdim by \sdim. (Unfortunately we used + one of the many variants of this package.) + +-* Page 278 (DCa) + This is a ovalbox +should be + This is an ovalbox + +-* Page 280-281 (MGo,FMi) + Describe new command \qbezier, and replace old bezier + style and command with \qbezier commands in examples. + +-* Page 303 (FMi) + Change section heading 10.5 to "Packages Based on epic" + Change also table of contents on page xviii + +-* Page 305 (FMi) + The lower picture should be turned 180 degrees. + +-* Page 307 (DCa) + A tree graph ican bedrawn + should be + A tree graph can be drawn + +========== Chapter 11 =========== + +-* Page 314 (MGo) + Figure 11.1: some of the dotted vertical and horizontal lines + indicating the coordinate system are part invisible + (printing problem) + +-* Page 318 (DKu) + first line of boxed description of \epsfig command, + rotate=angle,% should be angle=degrees,% + +-* Page 321 (MGo) + Figure 11.5 The vertical lines at the right-hand side of the + is invisible (printing problem) + +-* Page 333 (PHa) + Footnote in Table 11.6: ZapfChancery (not ZaptChancery) + Tag entries for Sans Serif fonts as sl (slanted) instead + of it (italic) (FPo) + +-* Page 333 last line (GGr) + Change to: The mapping between the layout in a PostScript font and +the font encoding needed by TeX ... + +-* Page 340 (PHa) + 6th line before the end of 11.9.7: Hyphen missing in AMS-TeX + +-* Page 340 (DKra,FMi) + para 4, line 5: ... (see tables 8.2 to 8.20 beginning in page 218) + +========== Chapter 12 =========== + +-* Page 359 (DCa) + postamble command preceeding the index + should be + postamble command following the index + +-* Page 360 (PHa) + last line of 12.4.2: the correct page reference is 355, not 353. + +========== Chapter 13 =========== + +-* Page 393, middle of page (KML) + Utah Univeristy should read Utah University + +-* Page 401, 5th line from bottom (SMi} + left braces missing in {G{\"o}}del}, should be {G{\"{o}}del} + +========== Chapter 14 =========== + +-* Pages 435-438 (FMi) + By convention .dtx files are files that can be directly processed by +LaTeX (by making the `driver code' the first docstrip module) + +========== Appendix A =========== + +-* Page 446 (DCa) +(\stepcounter description) + oldcr +should be + oldctr + +-* Pages 448 and 449 (MGo) + All occurrences of the string "\cmd", representing the LaTeX + lengths parameters should not have the \ (backslash) to + be compatible with the syntax used in Lamport and the rest + of the Companion (Lamport assumes that cmd implicitly implies + the backslash). + +-* Page 458, 2 para (MGo) + innner-pos should be inner-pos + +-* Page 459 (DCa, MGo) +You use `cmd' for \sbox, but `\cmd' for lrbox. +Should be 'cmd' throughout to be compatible with Lamport's syntax. + +-* Page 461 (FMi) + Add \ProvidesFile to table. + \PassOptionsToClass{option-list}{release} should read + \PassOptionsToClass{option-list}{class} + +-* Page 462 (FMi) + Describe \ProvidesFile. This is like \ProvidesPackage but you need + to give the full file name including extension. It is meant for + files that are neither packages nor classes but want to identify + themselves too. + +-* Page 467 (War) + \PassOptionsToClass{option-list}{release} should read + \PassOptionsToClass{option-list}{class} + +-* Page 468, second line of example (DOs) + \NeedsTeXformat{LaTeX2e} should read \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e} + +-* Page 474 (DCa) + \ifodd +should be + \isodd +also correct index entries + +========== Appendix B =========== + +-* Page 475 (PHa) + line -3: where Jones' TeX-index + ^ (insert apostrophe) + +-* Page 476 (NPo) + - CTAN host in Germany has changed to ftp.dante.de + - correct location of TeX-index file on ftp.dante.de (MGo) + + * Page 476 (ASc) + The host pit-manager.mit.edu has changed its name to rtfm.mit.edu. + +-* Page 479 (MGo) update for Dante + - their mail server is at ftpmail@dante.de, + - send a message containing the word "help" to get instructions. + +-* Page 480 (EPi,MGo) + UKTeX gets Chair instead of Chairman + Group francophone should read Groupe francophone + Email address for Dante is now dante@dante.de (MGo) + +========== Bibliography =========== + +-* Pages 482 and following (BBe) + TUGboat should have a small "b"; occurs about a zillion times in + both references and text. why don't you just use \TUB for it: + \def\TUB{{\tubfont TUGboat\/}} + +-* Page 482, [11] last line (BBe) + "bowles" should be "bowls" + +-* Page 485, (BBe) [31] last line (BBe) + "Script Mathematical Formula Processor -- SMFF" + maybe that should be "SMFP"?, No, it should be (MGo) :+{ + "Script Mathematical Formula Formatter -- SMFF" + +-* Page 485, [33]--[35] (BBe) + omit "Technical Report" from before the ISO numbers. + the ISO document system also has technical reports, which have "TR" + in their number designations; these are quite different from the + standards, which is what is being referred to here. + also in [35] you should refer to "ISO/IEC 10646, ISO Geneva, 1993." + this was approved as a formal standard last year, so the "draft" is + no longer appropriate. and it's joint with the International + Electrotechnical Commission, no longer just ISO. + +-* Page 486, [37] (BBe) + publication location is not Stanford, but Bedford, MA. + +-* Page 491, [85] (BBe) + reference should be to ISO/IEC 10646, not "ISO-10656". + (you can leave out the "iec" in this context, but do fix the number.) + +-* Page 492, [88] (BBe) + not sure where crc press is located, but "Ann Horbor" isn't likely it. + possibly "Ann Arbor"? Yes, it is (MGo) + +-* Page 492, [90] (BBe) + is there a reason why in "\LaTeX{} Kompaktf"uhrer" + the latex part is italic and the kompaktf"uhrer is upright? i'd + have made both italic, and knowing leslie's predilection about the + latex logo, ... +-* Page 492, (MGo) + Add new reference [95] + George Gr"atzer. + Math into TeX: A Simple Introduction to AmSLaTeX. + Birkh"auser, Boston, 1993. + The first part of the book provides the novice user of + AmSLaTeX with a simple approach, based on many examples, + a formula gallery, sample files, and templates. + The second part contains a systematic discussion with + detailed examples and rules of all aspects of AmSLaTeX, + while the final part looks at more advanced customization issues. + + + +========== Index =========== + +-* Page 493ff (FMi) + all font-size functions need to be indexed under their names pointing +to Size-function + +-* Page 495-6 (FMi) + \baselineskip is indexed once as command (not rubber length) + +-* Page 501 (LLa) + The main entry for DOCSTRIP (page 432ff) is missing. + +-* Page 505 (LLa) + Add entry: +Font substitution + defaults 193,210-211 (and perhaps other places) + +-* Page 508 (PHa,FMi) + the page range for the entries + index package and Index + should only be 367-370 and 345-370 + +-* Page 517 (DCa) + All the page number styles are double printed, eg AlphAlph + +-* Page 519 (FPo) + Double entry for pt (Point) + +========== Production Notes =========== + +-* Page 529 (FMi) + State that cover art of Companion was done by Toni Saint-Regis. + + diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/cstex.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/cstex.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..1ebde3928d5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/cstex.txt @@ -0,0 +1,19 @@ + LaTeX installation instructions for CS-TeX + + 10 November 1995 + + +You may also use the installation instructions for MultiTeX +(MULTITEX.TXT) with some differences. +The menu entries at CTEX.PRG are named: + + "Parameter|Environment" instead of "Parameter|... TeX" + "Parameter|Formatvorgabe" instead of "TeX-Projekt|Einstellungen" + "Finden|TeX" instead of "Parameter|... TeX" + "Finden|IniTeX" instead of "Parameter|... TeX" + "Finden|HauptDatei" instead of "TeX-Projekt|Hauptdatei" + "Arbeiten|Erzeugen" instead of "TeX-Projekt|Erzeugen" + +That's all. + +Copyright 1995 Markus Kohm and the LaTeX3 project. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/cyrguide.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/cyrguide.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..16730d796bb --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/cyrguide.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/cyrguide.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/cyrguide.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..c1cbf10032a --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/cyrguide.tex @@ -0,0 +1,398 @@ +% \iffalse meta-comment +% +% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 +% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere +% in this file. +% +% This file is part of the LaTeX base system. +% ------------------------------------------- +% +% It may be distributed and/or modified under the +% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 +% of this license or (at your option) any later version. +% The latest version of this license is in +% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +% version 2003/12/01 or later. +% +% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". +% +% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is +% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional +% information. +% +% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution +% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with +% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. +% +% \fi +\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/12/01] + +\documentclass{ltxguide}[1999/02/28] + +\title{Cyrillic languages support in \LaTeX} + +\author{\copyright~Copyright 1998--1999,\\ Vladimir Volovich, + Werner Lemberg and \LaTeX3 Project Team.\\ All rights reserved.} + +\date{12 March 1999} + +\begin{document} + +\maketitle +\tableofcontents + +\begin{abstract} + This document contains basic information on the Cyrillic setup for + \LaTeX{}: how to get the fonts, how to set them up, how to use + the interface, its interaction with \babel{}, etc. This is only a first + draft of the document and it will probably be modified in future; so + please send in comments on it via the \texttt{latexbug} system + (see below). +\end{abstract} + + +\section{Introduction} + +Most Latin-based European languages were supported in \LaTeX{} by +introducing the~|T1|~font encoding and by using the \textsf{fontenc} +and \textsf{inputenc} packages; these use only standard \TeX{} means +to support any \mbox{8-bit} input encoding and this one standard font +encoding. The restriction to a single font encoding guarantees that +multiple languages can happily coexist in one document (\eg +hyphenation will be correct for all languages). + +Starting with the December~1998 Release, \LaTeX{} finally supports +Cyrillic languages. This support is based on the new standard +Cyrillic \TeX{} font encodings---|T2A|, |T2B|, |T2C|, and~|X2|. The +first three of these satisfy some basic requirements for +\LaTeX{}~|T*|~encodings, and thus can be used in multi-lingual documents +with other languages based on standard font encodings. + +The reason why we need four different Cyrillic font encodings is that +these font encodings support \emph{all} the Cyrillic languages that +have been used during the twentieth century (see +Section~\ref{fontencs})! The number of Cyrillic glyphs is large, so +they cannot be represented with 128~character slots; the other (lower) +128~slots are reserved for Latin letters and other invariant symbols +that are needed for the encoding to be a conformant +\LaTeX{}~\texttt{T}~encoding. + +There are some glyphs in the |T2*|~encodings which do not yet have +associated characters in \emph{Unicode}, the world-wide character +standard. Also, one more font encoding, |T2D|,~is planned for a +forthcoming release of \LaTeX{}. A lot of Cyrillic input encodings +are already supported (see Section~\ref{inputencs}), and additional +encodings could be added easily. + + +\subsection{Acknowledgments} +\label{sec:acks} + +The work on |T2*|~encodings was carried out by the T2~Team, led by +Alexander Berdnikov (other members are Mikhail Kolodin and Andrew +Janishewskii). The LH~fonts were produced by Olga Lapko (with +A.~Khodulev). The \textsf{T2} bundle and \textsf{ruhyphen} package +were written by Werner Lemberg and Vladimir Volovich (except that the +concrete hyphenation patterns which are part of \textsf{ruhyphen} came +from individual authors). The support for the Ukrainian language was +prepared by Andrij Shvaika. + + +\section{Installation} + +The \textsf{fontenc} and \textsf{inputenc} packages are installed +automatically in every base \LaTeX{} distribution. + +All the necessary extra files to use with these packages for Cyrillic +are in the \textsf{cyrillic} bundle, which at present contains the +following: four font encoding definition files (|t2aenc.def|, +|t2benc.def|, |t2cenc.def|, |x2enc.def|); several input encoding +definition files (all the other |*.def| files), and font definition +files (|*.fd|). +The installation of these is described here. + +\subsection{Fonts} + +The default font families in \LaTeX{} are the Computer Modern +families, namely the CM~fonts (|OT1|~encoded) and the EC~fonts +(|T1|~encoded). The LH~fonts, which are now available, provide +Computer Modern fonts for all Cyrillic font encodings. They are +designed to be compatible with the EC~fonts, and they provide the same +font shapes and sizes; they are available at |CTAN:fonts/cyrillic/lh| +(the latest version is 3.20). The installation instructions for the +fonts are in the file |INSTALL| in the font distribution. + +Other fonts, including Type~1 fonts, can also be used, provided that +their encoding (for \TeX{}) is \mbox{|T2|-compatible}. Some +ready-to-use packages supporting such fonts are also available, \eg at +\URL{ftp://ftp.vsu.ru/pub/tex} (they should soon be on \ctan). Currently, +you will find two packages there: \textsf{PsCyr}, which contains some +freely distributable Cyrillic Type~1 fonts with support for \LaTeX{}; +and \textsf{c1fonts}, which contains virtual fonts similar to the +\textsf{AE}~fonts package using the BlueSky and BaKoMa fonts +available from \ctan{} (see the |README| file in that package for +detailed information). Further font packages are expected soon. + +\subsection{Hyphenation patterns} + +You can find a collection of hyphenation patterns for the Russian +language in the \textsf{ruhyphen} package at +|CTAN:language/hyphenation/ruhyphen|. These patterns support the +|T2*|~encodings, as well as other popular font encodings used for +Russian typesetting (including the Omega internal encoding). +Patterns for other Cyrillic languages should be adapted to work with +the |T2*|~encodings. + +\subsection{\babel{} support for Russian and Ukrainian} +\label{bblrus} + +Version~3.6k of \babel{} includes support for the |T2*|~encodings and +for typesetting both Russian and Ukrainian texts using the Cyrillic +letters. The temporary fontencoding |LWN|, which was used in earlier +releases of \babel{}, will be withdrawn in the near future and replaced +by the |OT2| encoding. + +\subsection{Getting pre-built packages} + +Many of the major \TeX{} distributions, such as te\TeX{}, fp\TeX{} and +\TeX{}live, contain (or soon will) everything that is needed, +including the LH~fonts, \textsf{ruhyphen} and the latest version of +\babel{}. We hope that all \TeX{} distributions will soon include all +of these, so that the chances are that you will not need to install +this by yourself (but it is not difficult). + +If you are using em\TeX, Mik\TeX, or fp\TeX, you +can download the \textsf{ruemtex} package from +\URL{ftp://ftp.vsu.ru/pub/tex}. + +\section{Usage} + +Support for Cyrillic is based on these standard \LaTeX{} mechanisms: +the \textsf{fontenc} and \textsf{inputenc} packages (and on \babel{}). +Thus the basic principles for its use are similar to those for other +European languages: you simply add, to your document preamble, lines +like the following. + +\begin{verbatim} +\usepackage[T2A]{fontenc} +\usepackage[koi8-r]{inputenc} +\end{verbatim} + +Here you can put any desired input encoding instead of +\mbox{\texttt{koi8-r}}: for example, it would be \texttt{cp866} if you are +using a MS-DOS text editor with this Cyrillic code page to prepare your +documents, or \texttt{cp1251} if you are a MS~Windows user with Cyrillic +support. A full list of the available Cyrillic encodings can be found in +Section~\ref{inputencs} and in the file |cyinpenc.dtx|. + +Documents are, naturally, not restricted to a single font encoding; +this is essential for multi-lingual journals or documents. Such +changes can be made by using the |\fontencoding| command as part of a +font-change. However, it is best to access these font encodings via a +higher-level interface. + +Since such changes are often closely related to other +language-dependent settings, it is often sensible to use the \babel{} +system, which provides further useful `localisation' and standardised +multi-lingual interfaces (for further details, see +Section~\ref{bblrus}). Then you can use lines like the following in +your document: + +\begin{verbatim} +\usepackage[koi8-r]{inputenc} +\usepackage[russian]{babel} +\end{verbatim} + +This will automatically choose the default font encoding for Russian, +which is |T2A|, if available. Documentation of the complete set of +font-encoding selection rules can be found in |cyrillic.dtx| which is +part of |rusbabel|. + +These \LaTeX{} interfaces are very convenient because they make your +documents completely portable, being based solely on standard \TeX{} +features. This will mean that your documents can be processed on any +\TeX{} system without any need for re-encoding to the `native' +encoding used on each platform; this is because the encoding of the +document is specified in the document itself. + +Moreover, if necessary, more than one input encoding can be used +within a document; this could be useful if, for example, you need to +combine articles prepared by authors on different machines. Each part +of the document is then identified by a |\inputencoding| command, +which can therefore only be used between paragraphs. + +Please note that you must always use the two standard \LaTeX{} +commands, |\MakeUppercase| and |\MakeLowercase| to produce uppercase +or lowercase text in your documents. This is because |\uppercase| and +|\lowercase| will not work at all for Cyrillic (note that these latter +two commands are not, and never have been, available for use directly +in \LaTeX{} documents). + + +\section{Font encodings for Cyrillic languages} +\label{fontencs} + +The Cyrillic font encodings support the following languages. Note +that some languages can be properly typeset with more than one +encoding. + +\begin{itemize} +\raggedright +\item[|T2A|:] + Abaza, Avar, Agul, Adyghei, Azerbaijani, Altai, Balkar, Bashkir, + Bulgarian, Buryat, Byelorussian, Gagauz, Dargin, Dungan, Ingush, + Kabardino-Cherkess, Kazakh, Kalmyk, Karakalpak, Karachaevskii, + Karelian, Kirghiz, Komi-Zyrian, Komi-Permyak, Kumyk, Lak, Lezghin, + Macedonian, Mari-Mountain, Mari-Valley, Moldavian, Mongolian, + Mordvin-Moksha, Mordvin-Erzya, Nogai, Oroch, Osetin, Russian, Rutul, + Serbian, Tabasaran, Tadzhik, Tatar, Tati, Teleut, Tofalar, Tuva, + Turkmen, Udmurt, Uzbek, Ukrainian, Hanty-Obskii, Hanty-Surgut, + Gipsi, Chechen, Chuvash, Crimean-Tatar. +\item[|T2B|:] + Abaza, Avar, Agul, Adyghei, Aleut, Altai, Balkar, Byelorussian, + Bulgarian, Buryat, Gagauz, Dargin, Dolgan, Dungan, Ingush, Itelmen, + Kabardino-Cherkess, Kalmyk, Karakalpak, Karachaevskii, Karelian, + Ketskii, Kirghiz, Komi-Zyrian, Komi-Permyak, Koryak, Kumyk, Kurdian, + Lak, Lezghin, Mansi, Mari-Valley, Moldavian, Mongolian, + Mordvin-Moksha, Mordvin-Erzya, Nanai, Nganasan, Negidal, Nenets, + Nivh, Nogai, Oroch, Russian, Rutul, Selkup, Tabasaran, Tadzhik, + Tatar, Tati, Teleut, Tofalar, Tuva, Turkmen, Udyghei, Uigur, Ulch, + Khakass, Hanty-Vahovskii, Hanty-Kazymskii, Hanty-Obskii, + Hanty-Surgut, Hanty-Shurysharskii, Gipsi, Chechen, Chukcha, Shor, + Evenk, Even, Enets, Eskimo, Yukagir, Crimean Tatar, Yakut. +\item[|T2C|:] + Abkhazian, Bulgarian, Gagauz, Karelian, Komi-Zyrian, Komi-Permyak, + Kumyk, Mansi, Moldavian, Mordvin-Moksha, Mordvin-Erzya, Nanai, + Orok (Uilta), Negidal, Nogai, Oroch, Russian, Saam, Old-Bulgarian, + Old-Russian, Tati, Teleut, Hanty-Obskii, Hanty-Surgut, Evenk, + Crimean Tatar. +\end{itemize} + +The |X2|~encoding was designed to support all the above languages. +Its name does not start with |T| because, for example, it contains no +Latin letters (it is purely a Cyrillic glyph container); it therefore +cannot be used in mixed-script documents along with the other |T*| +encodings. Please consult Section~6.4 \textit{Naming conventions} of +the file |fntguide.tex| in the base \LaTeX{} distribution for details +of the differences between \LaTeX{} font encodings and how they are +named. + +There are two other \LaTeX{} Cyrillic font encodings, |OT2| and |LCY|, +that are not included in the base \LaTeX{} distribution. The first is +a \mbox{7-bit} encoding (hence the |O|) developed by the AMS; it is +useful for typesetting relatively small fragments of text in Cyrillic, +using a Latin transliteration scheme. The other, |LCY|, is an +\mbox{8-bit} Cyrillic encoding which is not compatible with the +requirements for \LaTeX{} |T*|~encodings (hence the |L|); thus it is not +suitable for typesetting multi-lingual documents, but it can be used in +Plain \TeX{}-based macro packages because it is an extension of |OT1|. +These two encodings are supported by \babel{} and by \textsf{ot2cyr}. + + +\section{Input encodings} +\label{inputencs} + +Several Cyrillic code-pages are widely used. Currently, \LaTeX{} +contains support for 20~Cyrillic input encodings (some of which are +variants of each other). + +\begin{itemize} + +\item |cp855| --- the standard \mbox{MS-DOS} Cyrillic code-page. + +\item |cp866| --- the standard \mbox{MS-DOS} Russian code-page. + Several code-pages very similar to this are also supported + (the differences are all in the range 242--254). + \begin{itemize} + \item |cp866av| -- the `Cyrillic Alternative' code-page (an + alternative variant of cp866); + \item |cp866mav| -- the `Modified Alternative Variant'; + \item |cp866nav| -- the `New Alternative Variant'; + \item |cp866tat| -- an experimental Tatarian code-page. + \end{itemize} + +\item |cp1251| --- the standard MS Windows Cyrillic code-page. + +\item \mbox{\texttt{koi8-r}} --- a standard Cyrillic code-page widely + used in UNIX-like systems for Russian language support that is + specified in RFC~1489. The situation with \mbox{\texttt{koi8-r}} is + somewhat similar to that for |cp866|: there are several similar + code-pages which coincide for all Russian letters but add some other + Cyrillic letters. The following are supported: + \begin{itemize} + \item \mbox{\texttt{koi8-u}} -- for Ukrainian; + \item \mbox{\texttt{koi8-ru}} -- this is described in a draft RFC + document specifying a widely used character set for mail and news + exchange in the Ukrainian internet community, as well as for + presenting WWW information resources in the Ukrainian language; + \item |isoir111| -- the \mbox{ISO-IR-111 ECMA} Cyrillic Code Page. + \end{itemize} + +\item |iso88595| --- the \mbox{ISO 8859-5} Cyrillic code-page (also called + \mbox{ISO-IR-144}). + +\item |maccyr| --- the Apple Macintosh Cyrillic code-page (also known + as Microsoft cp10007) and |macukr|, the Apple Macintosh Ukrainian + code-page, very similar to the Cyrillic code-page. + +\item The Mongolian code-pages: |ctt| |dbk| |mnk| |mos| |ncc| |mls|. + These code-pages were taken from Oliver Corff's `Mon\TeX' package + (available at |CTAN:language/mongolian/montex|). Since the |T2*| + encodings support the Mongolian Cyrillic script, it is convenient to + have support for Mongolian input encodings as well. Pointers to + documentation for these code-pages will be much appreciated. + +\end{itemize} + + +\section{Reporting bugs} + +In case you find a bug and want to report it, please follow the +guidelines given in the file |bugs.txt| in the base \LaTeX{} +distributions. Note that there is a category specifically for +reporting any bugs that occur only when using Cyrillic fonts or +support packages. + + +\section{Miscellanea in the \textsf{T2} bundle} +\label{t2m} + +The \textsf{T2}~bundle at |CTAN:macros/latex/contrib/supported/t2| +contains some other useful files, including support for Plain +\TeX{}-based macro packages, support for Bib\TeX{} and MakeIndex (see +also the \textsf{xindy} program and package---highly recommended for +making indices with Cyrillic), support for the \textsf{fontinst} +package, mapping tables relating these Cyrillic font encodings (and +input encodings) to the Unicode character names and slots (these are +in the subdirectory |enc-maps|), and more! + +To produce documented source listings of the \textsf{T2}~package, run +\LaTeX{} on the |*.dtx| and |*.fdd| files therein. + +When typesetting Cyrillic texts, there is a tradition of using +Cyrillic letters (in some situations) within math formul\ae, in +exactly the same way as most of the world uses Latin letters. +By default this does not work, because symbols declared with +|\DeclareTextSymbol| may not be used in math. + +If you need within math to `transparently' typeset glyphs declared in +font encoding definition files, then you could try using the +experimental \textsf{mathtext} package, which is also in the +\textsf{T2}~bundle. Note that this package uses up at least one +additional math alphabet per font encoding. For this and other +reasons, The \LaTeX3 Project Team considers that this experimental +extension to \LaTeX{}'s glyph-handling mechanisms should be used with +caution; but please try it out and send us your opinions and ideas. +Note that it is not included in the core of \LaTeX{} because both the +coding and the interfaces are likely to change at some point in the +future. + +Finally, here are some pointers to further information: + +\begin{quote} + \URL{http://www.cemi.rssi.ru/cyrtug}\\ + \URL{http://xtalk.price.ru/tex} +\end{quote} + +\end{document} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/decustex.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/decustex.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..323d00f1b03 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/decustex.txt @@ -0,0 +1,373 @@ + LaTeX installation instructions for DECUS TeX (OpenVMS) + + 15 August 1994 + + +SUMMARY +======= + +This file contains instructions on how to install LaTeX for +DECUS TeX on OpenVMS. Before reading this file, you should read +install.txt, which will explain how the LaTeX installation works. + +This file describes: + + * How to save any old version of LaTeX. + + * How to unpack the LaTeX distribution. + + * How to configure LaTeX. + + * How to create the LaTeX format. + + * How to install the LaTeX files. + + * How to check the LaTeX installation. + + * Post Installation Tasks. + + * Running LaTeX with old versions (PD V3.4 and earlier) of DECUS TeX + + +SAVING ANY OLD VERSION OF LaTeX +=============================== + +If you are currently using the old LaTeX version, 2.09, you may wish +to save it before installing the new version of LaTeX. + +a) The old LaTeX 2.09 version will be kept in a subdirectory [.LATEX209] + in your TeXinputs tree (normally TEX_ROOT:[INPUTS]). + + When your LaTeX distribution was already installed in a subdirectory + (e.g. [.LATEX]), simply execute a rename: + RENAME TEX_ROOT:[INPUTS]LATEX.DIR LATEX209.DIR + (You may have to modify the file protection of the directory file.0 + + Otherwise, create a new subdirectory TEX_ROOT:[INPUTS.LATEX209] + All style files (.STY) as well as LATEX.TEX, LPLAIN.TEX, LFONTS.TEX, + SLITEX.TEX, SPLAIN.TEX, SFONTS.TEX, LHYPHEN.TEX, IDX.TEX, LABLST.TEX, + MAKEINDEX.TEX, SAMPLE.TEX, SMALL.TEX, TRYFONTS.TEX, TESTPAGE.TEX and + TESTA4.TEX should be moved into this directory. + +b) You need to set up a separate logical name for the LaTeX-2.09 search + list; to prevent interference with the new LaTeX release: + Edit the command procedure that is used to initialize the TeX system: + This is probably the file STARTTEX.COM, located in TEX_ROOT:[000000]. + Search for the definition of the TEX_INPUTS search list. Add a similar + definition using another name (.e.g. LTX_INPUTS) by duplicating the + search list in STARTTEX.COM. Change this new definition by adding + an entry "TEX_ROOT:[INPUTS.LATEX209]" at the top of the list, so + that the files from the old LaTeX-2.09 are accessed before the new files + from LaTeX2e. + +c) To use the old LaTeX 2.09 format, you have to define a new command + which uses the new logical name LTX_INPUTS as TeXinputs search path. + This is archived by adding the following line to STARTTEX.COM (best + place: just after the INITEX command definition): + + "$ OLATEX :== TEX/FORMAT=TEX_FORMATS:LPLAIN/TEXINPUTS=LTX_INPUTS:" + +d) There is no need to rename the old format file LPLAIN.FMT. The new LaTeX + format uses a different name (LATEX.FMT) per default. + But if there is a command procedure to generate the format files, you + might want to update it to reflect the changed location of the LaTeX-2.09 + sources. + +To install the recent changes, you have to reexecute the TeX initialization +procedure. To enshure that all logical names are properly redefined, you +should delete the logical name TEX_ROOT by + "DEASSIGN TEX_ROOT" +(or simply log out and start a new session). + + +UNPACKING THE DISTRIBUTION +========================== + +It is recommended that you keep the new LaTeX distributions an a +separate subdirectory. This simplifys later maintance work. +To unpack the sources, you should create a new directory, e.g: +TEX_ROOT:[INPUTS.LATEX.SRC]. +Copy the hole LaTeX distribution into this directory, and change +your working directory to this location with a SET DEFAULT command. +Now simply type + "INITEX UNPACK.INS" +(after you have initialized the TeX system). The unpack procedure +should then proceed without errors. +The time needed for Unpacking depends on your hardware equipment. +On an Alpha AXP machine (DEC 3000/400), this will last less than 5 minutes; +on an older VAX, you will probably need an order of magnitude more time. +(But I have never tested it on a VAX...) + + + +CONFIGURING LATEX +================= + +A) The TEXSYS.CFG file: +----------------------- +If you have a recent version of DECUS TeX (3.1415, PD V3.5 or later), no +special texsys.cfg file is needed. DECUS TeX is now fully compatible with +the extended input checking techniques used in the new LaTeX (LaTeX2e). +For a usable texsys.cfg setup with older (outdated) versions of DECUS TeX, +see the section +"Running LaTeX with old versions (PD 3.4 and earlier) of DECUS TeX" +below. + +B) Setting up multilingual hyphenation patterns: +------------------------------------------------ +If you want to use non USenglish hyphenation patterns (in addition +or as a replacement), you need to create a configuration file +"HYPHEN.CFG" to override the LaTeX defaults. +Your HYPHEN.CFG file should load all required hyphenation patterns. +At the end, the default language should be switched on and the appropiate +values of \lefthyphenmin and \righthyphenmin for this language should be +set. +It is strongly recommended to load the USenglish hyphenation patterns +as language 0 and to use this language as default to maintain compatibility +with other installations. This setup is needed to allow correct processing +of the delivered (english) LaTeX documentation files! +As an example for a HYPHEN.CFG file, a bilingual setup for german +and US english (can be used together with the babel package or german.sty) +is shown: +%% +%% This is file `hyphen.cfg', +%% +%% Modified for dual language support by Christian Spieler, 20. June 1994. +%% +%% This file is part of the LaTeX2e system. +%% ---------------------------------------- +%% + +\message{Loading hyphenation patterns for US english and German.} + +% PREPARING A FOREIGN LANGUAGE VERSION: +% +% This file loads hyphenation patterns for US english. +% If you want to load additional or other hyphenation patterns, +% you have to change this file, which is hereby allowed explicitly, +% under the restriction that if you do so, you MUST also change the +% message above. +% + +\message{US-English hyphenation} + \language=0 + \chardef\l@USenglish=\language + \input ushyphen \input ushyphen.upd + +\message{German hyphenation} + \newlanguage\l@german + \language=\l@german + \input ghyphen + +\language=\l@USenglish % USenglish as Default +\lefthyphenmin=2 \righthyphenmin=3 % disallow x- or -xx breaks +\endinput +%% +%% End of file `hyphen.cfg'. + +For a nongerman country, the needed modifications are obvious. +Further information can be found in "texpert.txt" and "lthyphen.dtx". + +C) Memory requirements: +----------------------- +LaTeX2e needs more main memory, string memory and hash space to +store its macros than previous versions of LaTeX. +Since DECUS TeX is compiled as (64 bit) BigTeX with large memory arrays, +this should not impose any problems. +When you have got a newer version of DECUS TeX (3.1415 PD 3.3a or later) +there should be enough pattern memory to load at least hyphenation patterns +for three different languages. The sizes of the current version (PD 3.5) +are: + trie size: 45000 + trie op size: 1000 + trie op size per language: 511 + +The bad news: +Up to now, DECUS TeX does not allow to adjust its internal arrays at +run time. Therefore, if you really need more space somewhere, you +have to recompile TeX -- the program -- with the appropiate changes, +sorry. + + + +CREATING THE LaTeX FORMAT +========================= + +Be sure that all hyphenation pattern sources requested by HYPHEN.CFG +are accessible through the TEX_INPUTS search list. When you did not +create a HYPHEN.CFG file, at least the US english hyphenation pattern +must be found this way under the name HYPHEN.TEX. + +To create the LaTeX format the first time, you should apply +the command: + + initex latex.ltx + +in the directory where you have unpacked the distribution. +This will create a file LATEX.FMT in this directory without +further interaction. + +This file has to be moved to the formats directory to be accessible +by the LATEX command. This can be archived by + + RENAME LATEX.FMT TEX_FORMATS: + SET FILE/PROTECTION=(W:RE) TEX_FORMATS:LATEX.FMT + +(If TEX_FORMATS: is located on a different disk in your installation, +you have to use the COPY command, instead. The protection setting enables +all users to use the new format.) + + + +PUTTING THE FILES WHERE LaTeX CAN READ THEM +=========================================== + +The LaTeX class and style files as well as some auxiliary .TEX files +need to be put in a directory of the TEX_INPUTS search path. In the +suggested setup, this is simply the parent directory of the location +where you have unpacked the distribution. +You should apply: + + RENAME latexbug.tex, testpage.tex, docstrip.tex, - + lablst.tex, idx.tex, nfssfont.tex, small2e.tex, sample2e.tex, - + *.cls, *.clo, *.sty, *.fd, *.def, *.ist [-] + + + +FINAL INSTALLATION STEPS +======================== + +To use LaTeX, some preparations need to be done: + +1.) You have to enshure that TeX looks into the right directories when + searching for LaTeX styles and classes. In the suggested setup, + the LaTeX core classes and styles have been put into the directory + TEX_ROOT:[INPUTS.LATEX]. This directory needs to be part of the + Texinputs search list, which is (normally) defined by the logical + name TEX_INPUTS (without colon!). Check the TeX startup command file + STARTTEX.COM (should be found in TEX_ROOT:[000000]). The list of + equivalences in the definition of "TEX_INPUTS" should contain the + directory where you intend to place the LaTeX2e classes. For correct + operation, it is ABSOLUTELY neccessary that this directory is listed + before any location of old LaTeX-2.09 files! + (For efficiency, it might be best to place directories with frequently + used packages/styles/classes near the top of the search list.) + +2.) You have to modify (or add) the LATEX command definition in the TeX + initialization procedure. The proposed setup is to use a "LATEX" DCL + command, which gets defined in the DECUS-TEX.CLD command definition + file. + You have to edit the file TEX_ROOT:[EXE]DECUS-TEX.CLD. If there is no + entry for a verb LATEX, add one by duplicating the definition for + the verb TEX (and changing the verb name into LATEX). + a) Modify the default value of the qualifier "FORMAT" into + "TEX_FORMATS:LATEX" (if you had LaTeX-2.09, the old value + was TEX_FORMATS:LPLAIN). + b) Check, if the default value of the TEXINPUTS qualifier is + the logical name you chose for the LaTeX2e input path. Normally + this should be "TEX_INPUTS:" (WITH trailing colon!). + +Now you should rerun the command file TEX_ROOT:STARTTEX.COM to get the +changes to the TeX system setup into effect. +To trigger the redefinition of all TeX related logical names, you have +to delete the logical name TEX_ROOT by + "DEASSIGN TEX_ROOT" +(or to log out and start a new session). + + + +CHECKING THAT THE INSTALLATION WORKED +===================================== + +To check that the installation is working: + +* Be shure you have executed the STARTTEX.COM command file + (found in the root directory of the TeX directory tree). + +* Set your current directory to TEX_ROOT:[INPUTS.LATEX.SRC] + (or the location you used to unpack the LaTeX distribution). + +* Check that there is no file ARTICLE.CLS in this directory. + If you have found one, rename or remove it. + +* Execute the command + + LATEX LTXCHECK + + This will run a test on the LaTeX installation and should produce + 'OK!' to a number of test. If it does not, then see the `PROBLEMS' + section in install.txt. + + You have now installed LaTeX! + + + +POST INSTALLATION TASKS +======================= + +In the DECUS TeX distribution, there is a command procedure FMTBUILD.COM +in the TEX_FORMATS: location to simplify recreation of all TeX formats +after a change or an update to the TeX program. You might want to +integrate the new LaTeX format into this procedure. The strategy of this +procedure is to copy all needed sources into the TEX_FORMATS: location and +building the format files right there. +To include the LaTeX format in this procecure, you have to add a section +looking similar to: +======================= start here ======================== +$ +$LATEX: +$LaTeX_STD: +$!LaTeX (LaTeX2e release), standard configuration: +$ copy TEX_ROOT:[INPUTS.LATEX.SRC]*.ltx *.*; +$ copy TEX_ROOT:[INPUTS.LATEX.SRC]texsys.cfg *.cfg +$ copy TEX_ROOT:[INPUTS.LATEX.SRC]hyphen.cfg *.cfg +$ initex "latex.ltx" +$ dele *.ltx;* /log +$ dele texsys.aux;* /log +$ dele texsys.cfg;* /log +$ dele hyphen.cfg;* /log +$ +====================== end here =========================== + +When you have decided to keep the LaTeX-2.09 system, you should +modify the corresponding section in FMTBUILD.COM to reflect the +changes described in the section "SAVING ANY OLD VERSION OF LaTeX"!! + + + +RUNNING LaTeX WITH OLD VERSIONS (PD V3.4 AND EARLIER) OF DECUS TeX +================================================================== + +These version of DECUS TeX do no use the TEXINPUTS search path when +trying to open a file via \openin. This behaviour breaks the +enhance input file checking techniques implemented in LaTeX (LaTeX2e) +without further precautions. +To get around this problem, LaTeX allows an alternate way to specify the +TEXINPUTS search path to the file checking macros. This is done +through a special macro definition which has to be supplied by the +user (= LaTeX installer) via the file TEXSYS.CFG. +The following example shows a TEXSYS.CFG file which is known to work +when your LaTeX system files are accessed through the logical name +"TEX_INPUTS": + +%% texsys.cfg for DECUS TeX (VMS) +%% +% \subsection{VMS (???)} +% Some VMS implementations have different paths +% for |\openin| and |\input|. For these one could use definitions like +% the following: +% +\def\@currdir{[]} +\def\input@path{% + {SYS$DISK:[]}% + {TEX_INPUTS:}% +} +\endinput +%% +%% end of texsys.cfg for DECUS TeX + +For further details, see dircheck.dtx and texpert.txt. + + +--- Copyright 1994 Christian Spieler and the LaTeX3 project --- +--- All rights reserved. --- diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/directex.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/directex.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..f20a0028bff --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/directex.txt @@ -0,0 +1,135 @@ +Abstract: LaTeX installation guide for DirectTeX v2.0, 2nd version +===================================================================== + + Wilfried Ricken + Blumenfeldstrasse 4 + 44795 Bochum + Germany + +49-234-450400 + wilfr@hadron.tp2.ruhr-uni-bochum.de + +===================================================================== + + LaTeX installation instructions for DirectTeX + ============================================= + + 6 June 1994 + + +NOTE: LaTeX is installed and ready to use in DirectTeX 2.0 and later. +If you have an older version of DirectTeX then please upgrade. Don't +expect any support if you decide to merge this release of LaTeX with +an older version of DirectTeX! If you have DirectTeX 2.0 or later +then you will only need to read the following instructions if you +decide to update the version of LaTeX distributed with DirectTeX. + +NOTE: All folder names are relative to your global TeX folder, e.g. +`TeX-Inputs:LaTeX' refers to the folder `{dt_TeXFolder}TeX-Inputs:LaTeX'. + + +SUMMARY +======= + +This file contains instructions on how to install LaTeX for DirectTeX. +Before reading this file you should read install.txt, which explains +how the LaTeX installation works in more detail. + +The following sections describe: + + * How to save any old version of LaTeX. + + * How to unpack the LaTeX distribution. + + * How to create the LaTeX format. + + * How to check that the installation worked. + + * Removing unnecessary files. + + +SAVING ANY OLD VERSION OF LATEX +=============================== + +If you have DirectTeX 2.0, you do not have to do anything do save the +old LaTeX 2.09 because it is already located in a folder `LaTeX-2.09' +and not within the `TeX-Inputs' folder, which is normally searched by +TeX. + + +UNPACKING THE DISTRIBUTION +========================== + +To unpack the LaTeX distribution: + + * Delete all files from the `TeX-Inputs:LaTeX' folder. + + * Move all files in the distribution to this folder. + + * Start up DirectTeX and set the current directory to this folder. + + * Execute the following commands: + + Set dt_TeXLogFiles '' + TeX -i unpack.ins + +This will start the unpacking process. This may take some time: +about 7 minutes on a Quadra 840. Now move the files `gind.ist' +and `gglo.ist' to the folder `Aux-Inputs:MakeIndex'. + + +CREATING THE LATEX FORMAT +========================= + +To create the LaTeX format: + + * Select `Initialize Formats...' from the `Formats' menu. + + * Select `LaTeX' or `BigLaTeX' and click OK. + +If you want to create the format manually, simply execute the command + + TeX -i latex.ltx + +NOTE: DirectTeX v2.0 does not contain a hyphen.tex file. Instead it +contains a folder `TeX-Inputs:Hyphenation' which contains some files +`hyphen-??.tex' and a file `hyphen.cfg'. The latter one may be +used to specify the hyphenation patterns to use. It is configured to +include the German and the US English hyphenation patterns and to set +the default language to US English. + + +CHECKING THAT THE INSTALLATION WORKED +===================================== + +To check that the installation worked: + + * Set the current directory to the `TeX-LogFiles' folder. + + * Execute the command + + LaTeX ltxcheck.tex + +This will run a test of the LaTeX installation and should produce +`OK!' to a number of tests. If it does not then see `PROBLEMS' +in install.txt. + +You have now installed LaTeX! + + +REMOVING UNNECESSARY FILES +========================== + +After LaTeX has been successfully installed, you might want to delete +some non-essential files (after making backup copies) to free up space +on your hard disk. From the `TeX-Inputs:LaTeX' folder, delete all +files ending in: + + .ins .drv .dtx .fdd .log .aux .txt .err .ps + +You may also look at the files *guide.tex, typeset and print them and +then delete them to save more space. These files contain some +information about certain characteristics of LaTeX. + + +--- Copyright 1994 Wilfried Ricken and the LaTeX3 project. --- +--- All rights reserved. --- diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/emtex.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/emtex.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..ae1f5353b6c --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/emtex.txt @@ -0,0 +1,124 @@ + +LaTeX installation instructions for emTeX + +31 December 1997 + +SUMMARY +======= + +This file contains instructions on how to install LaTeX for emTeX on +DOS; users of emTeX on OS/2 have to make the standard small +changes, e. g. using `.cmd' instead of `.bat'. + +Before reading this file, you should read install.txt, which explains +how the LaTeX installation works. + +These instructions assume you are using the current release of the +emTeX distribution with its standard directory setup. If your systems +setup is different from the emTeX standard, we hope you are familiar +enough with your system to deviate from these instructions where +necessary. + + +This file describes: + +* How to unpack the LaTeX distribution. + +* How to install the LaTeX files. + +* How to create the LaTeX format file. + + +UNPACKING THE DISTRIBUTION +========================== + +To unpack the LaTeX distribution, change to a directory created for +installation use +(e. g. c:\install, c:\latexnew). + +Run iniTeX on the file unpack.ins, which - using emTeX - means to +use the /i option. So at the command line type: + +tex /i unpack.ins +or (if you use big versions like tex386.exe) +tex386 /i unpack.ins + +PUTTING THE UNPACKED FILES TO WHERE LATEX FINDS THEM +==================================================== + +Move the unpacked files to a directory, where LaTeX can find them, +which in the standard emTeX directory structure is + +emTeX\texinput\latex2e + +The files to be moved are + +latexbug.tex testpage.tex docstrip.tex + +and all files with the extensions + +*.cls *.clo *.sty *.fd *.def *.cfg + +If you use the Makeindex program, move the *.ist files to the makeindex +input directory, usually emtex\idxstyle. + + +CREATING THE LATEX FORMAT FILE +============================== + +To create the LaTeX format file, change to the directory +emtex\texfmts +or +emtex\btexfmts (respectively) + +and run iniTeX, e. g. + +tex /i +or +tex386 /i (respectively) + +on the file latex.ltx to create the format file latex.fmt. + + +HINTS AND TIPS +============== + +To ease creation of a format file, the emTeX distribution now +contains the program makefmt. Please, refer to the emTeX +distribution documentation for information about how to +use makefmt. + +To check, if the latex installation works, run laTeX on the +file ltxcheck.tex. This should produce a number of `OK' messages. +If it produces any warnings, please consult the `problems' +section of the file install.txt. + + +MEMORY PROBLEMS +=============== + +If you still use an old release of emTeX or a PC with a CPU lower than 80386, +you will have to increase the part of memory known as `string characters' or +as `pool size'. + +Set it to its maximum value by using the option + +/mp:65550 + +either on the command line or in the EMTEXOPT variable. + +You may be able to compensate this increase by reducing the +amount of memory needed for `font info', using the option + +/mf: '. + +When using several packages, or when processing complex documents, +especially when they contain lots of cross references, citations etc., +you may run out of the part of memory known as `multiletter +control sequences' or as `hash table'. + +The only real cure for this problem is to get a recent version of emTeX. + +---Contributed by: Heinz Kusznier <kusznier@ping.at> +---Copyright 1997 by Heinz Kusznier and the LaTeX3 project--- +--- All rights reserved --- diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/emtextds.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/emtextds.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..31263d9c02d --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/emtextds.txt @@ -0,0 +1,232 @@ + LaTeX installation instructions for + emTeX/TDS (OS/2), version 0.4 and above + + 2001-09-04 + +SUMMARY +======= + +This file contains instructions on how to install LaTeX for emTeX/TDS, +version 0.4 and above. Before reading this file, you should read +install.txt, which will explain how the LaTeX installation works. + +This file describes: + + * How to unpack the LaTeX distribution. + + * How to create the LaTeX format. + + * How to install the LaTeX files. + + * What to do if you have any problems. + + + +REQUIREMENTS +============ + +These installation instructions assume that you have installed the +emTeX/TDS system already and want to upgrade LaTeX to a newer version. + +The contents of the directories texmf\source\latex\base and +texmf\tex\latex\base should be deleted before installing a new LaTeX +version. + + + +SAVING YOUR OLD VERSION OF LaTeX +================================ + +Instead of deleting the contents of the above directories you may +alternatively move the files to directories outside the texmf tree. + + + +UNPACKING THE DISTRIBUTION +========================== + +Copy all the files from the CTAN directory macros/latex/base to the +directory texmf\source\latex\base on your HD. + +Open an OS/2 window (aka command line) and make the above directory +the current one, e.g., if the texmf tree resides on drive c: + + c: + cd \texmf\source\latex\base + +Unpack the distribution by executing the command: + + htex386 -i unpack.ins + + + +CREATING THE LaTeX FORMAT +========================= + +Now execute the command + + makelatex + +to create the LaTeX format file. + + + +PUTTING THE FILES WHERE LaTeX CAN READ THEM +=========================================== + +The next step in the installation of LaTeX is to move the files needed +to run the system into the correct directories (or folders). + +You should move to the LaTeX input directory \texmf\tex\latex\base + + * latexbug.tex, testpage.tex, lablst.tex, idx.tex, nfssfont.tex + small2e.tex, sample2e.tex, docstrip.tex and texsys.cfg + +and any files whose name ends with: + + * .cls, document class files. + + * .clo, document class options files. + + * .sty, package files. + + * .fd, font definition files. + + * .def, files of definitions which may be read by LaTeX while + processing documents. + + * .ltx, the files from which the format can be rebuilt. + +You should move to the MakeIndex input directory \texmf\makeindex +all files whose name ends with: + + * .ist, MakeIndex style files. + +Please, note that any files existing already in the target directories +must be overwritten! + +Caution: Do NOT move the files preload.cfg, fonttext.cfg and +fontmath.cfg to \texmf\tex\latex\base ! + +The makelatex script has already moved the format file to the +directory where it belongs. + +You have now installed LaTeX! + + + +CHECKING THAT THE INSTALLATION WORKED +===================================== + +To make sure that the installation has worked, you should run the new +LaTeX on the document `ltxcheck.tex'. Just type + + latex ltxcheck + +This will produce a number of messages, each of which should be `OK'. +If any of them are `BAD', then read the `PROBLEMS' section below. + +If all the messages are `OK' then you are finished! + + + +PROBLEMS +======== + +The installation should proceed smoothly. However, you may get some +errors. + +`File missing': Some of the files from the LaTeX distribution are + missing. There are a number of possible reasons for this: + + * The files really are missing. + You should get the missing files from the same place you got the + rest of the distribution. If you cannot do this then you should + complain to whoever gave you this distribution. + + * The files are present, but in the wrong directory. See the + section above "Putting the files where LaTeX can read them" + + * The files are present, and in the right directory. Did you alter + the REXX scripts makelatex.cmd or latex.cmd? Did you alter the + environment variable TEXMACROS? + + +`Font missing': Some of the fonts (.tfm files) required by LaTeX are + missing. As above, either you have not got the required files, + they have been deleted or TeX is not able to find them. As long as + you did not alter the environment variable TEXTFM, this should not + happen. + + +`Out of memory': In the file texmf\tex\latex\local\hyphen.cfg you may + have defined too many languages to be included. Try to increase + the value of the -mt option in the REXX scripts makelatex.cmd + and/or latex.cmd. If, however, TeX reports the "trie op size" to + have been exceeded, the number of languages loaded must be reduced. + + +If you have any problems installing LaTeX, you should: + + * read the Technical Manual texmf\doc\emtexTDS\manual.eng and the + description of the TeX program, texmf\emtex\book\english\tex.inf; + + * if this fails, try asking the emTeX mailing list or a general TeX + mailing list; + + * if this fails, send a bug report via email to the author of + emTeX/TDS; see the section "Support" in the file readme.eng or + install.eng. + + + +CLEARING UP +=========== + +You may now be wondering what to do with all the remaining files in +the directory texmf\source\latex\base that are not needed to run +LaTeX. This is, of course, a matter of personal taste and +availability of disk space but here is some guidance. + + * The files ltnews<xx>.tex contain the LaTeX newsletters. You should + run the latest one through LaTeX and nove the resulting dvi file to + the directory texmf\doc\latex\base + + * The files with names of the form <xxx>guide.tex contain reference + information covering (amongst other things) those features new to + this version of LaTeX: they are not intended to be either a user + guide or a complete reference for the system. You should run them + through LaTeX and move the resulting dvi files to the directory + texmf\doc\latex\base, thus replacing the previous versions. + + * The files with extension .dtx, together with source2e.tex, + can be used to typeset the documented source code (see texpert.txt + for further information). + + * The files with extension .fdd contain the documented sources for + the font definition files. + + * The file ltx3info.tex contains information about the LaTeX3 project + and how you can support it. + + * The files with extension .txt contain information about (amongst + other things) copyright, installation, patches and bug-reports; and + those with extension .err contain errata lists for various + publications: see 00readme.txt for further details. + + * The file ltxcheck.tex is used to test the format; therefore you + should keep it if you expect to remake the format before getting + the next full distribution. + + * The files with extension .ins are used to unpack the code from the + .dtx and .fdd files. + + * We recommend that you keep, in the formats directory + texmf\emtex\htexfmts, the transcript file that was produced whilst + creating the format; this file is called latex.log. + + + --- Copyright 1999--2001 Walter Schmidt and the LaTeX3 project --- + + --- All rights reserved. --- + diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/fntguide.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/fntguide.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..16522753020 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/fntguide.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/fntguide.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/fntguide.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..d64b4804697 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/fntguide.tex @@ -0,0 +1,1830 @@ +% \iffalse meta-comment +% +% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 +% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere +% in this file. +% +% This file is part of the LaTeX base system. +% ------------------------------------------- +% +% It may be distributed and/or modified under the +% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 +% of this license or (at your option) any later version. +% The latest version of this license is in +% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +% version 2003/12/01 or later. +% +% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". +% +% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is +% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional +% information. +% +% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution +% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with +% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. +% +% \fi +% Filename: fntguide.tex + +\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/12/01] + +\documentclass{ltxguide}[1995/11/28] + +\title{\LaTeXe{} font selection} + +\author{\copyright~Copyright 1995--2004, \LaTeX3 Project Team.\\ + All rights reserved.} + +\date{10 February 2004} + +\begin{document} + +\maketitle + +\tableofcontents + +\section{Introduction} + +This document describes the new font selection features of the \LaTeX{} +Document Preparation System. It is intended for package writers who +want to write font-loading packages similar to |times| or |latexsym|. + +This document is only a brief introduction to the new facilities and +is intended for package writers who are familiar with \TeX{} fonts and +\LaTeX{} packages. It is \emph{neither} a user-guide \emph{nor} a +reference manual for fonts in \LaTeXe. + +\subsection{\LaTeXe~fonts} + +The most important difference between \LaTeX~2.09 and \LaTeXe{} is the +way that fonts are selected. In \LaTeX~2.09, the Computer Modern fonts +were built into the \LaTeX~format, and so customizing \LaTeX{} to use +other fonts was a major effort. + +In \LaTeXe, very few fonts are built into the format, and there are +commands to load new text and math fonts. Packages such as |times| or +|latexsym| allow authors to access these fonts. +This document describes how to write similar font-loading packages. + +The \LaTeXe{} font selection system was first released as the `New Font +Selection Scheme' (NFSS) in 1989, and then in release~2 in 1993. +\LaTeXe{} includes NFSS release~2 as standard. + +\subsection{Overview} + +This document contains an overview of the new font commands +of \LaTeX. + +\begin{description} + +\item[Section~\ref{Sec:text}] describes the commands for selecting fonts + in classes and packages. It lists the five \LaTeX{} font + attributes, and lists the commands for selecting fonts. It also + describes how to customize the author commands such as |\textrm| and + |\textit| to suit your document design. + +\item[Section~\ref{Sec:math}] explains the commands for controlling + \LaTeX{} math fonts. It describes how to specify new math fonts and + new math symbols. + +\item[Section~\ref{Sec:install}] explains how to install new fonts into + \LaTeX. It shows how \LaTeX{} font attributes are turned into \TeX{} + font names, and how to specify your own fonts using font definition + files. + +\item[Section~\ref{Sec:encode}] discusses text font encodings. + It describes how to declare a new encoding and how to define + commands, such as |\AE| or |\"|, which have different definitions in + different encodings, depending on whether ligatures, etc.\ are + available in the encoding. + +\item[Section~\ref{Sec:misc}] covers font miscellanea. It describes how + \LaTeX{} performs font substitution, how to customize fonts that are + preloaded in the \LaTeX{} format, and the naming conventions used in + \LaTeX{} font selection. + +\end{description} + +\subsection{Further information} + +For a general introduction to \LaTeX, including the new features of +\LaTeXe, you should read \emph{\LaTeXbook}, +Leslie Lamport, Addison Wesley, 2nd~ed, 1994. + +A more detailed description of the \LaTeX{} font selection scheme is to +be found in \emph{\LaTeXcomp}, Goossens, Mittelbach and Samarin, Addison +Wesley, 1994. + +The \LaTeX{} font selection scheme is based on \TeX, which is described +by its developer in \emph{The \TeX book}, Donald E.~Knuth, Addison +Wesley, 1986, revised in 1991 to include the features of \TeX~3. + +Sebastian Rahtz's |psnfss| software contains the software for using a +large number of Type~1 fonts (including the Adobe Laser Writer 35 and +the Monotype CD-ROM fonts) in \LaTeX. It should be available from the +same source as your copy of \LaTeX. + +The |psnfss| software uses fonts generated by Alan Jeffrey's +|fontinst| software. This can convert fonts from Adobe Font Metric +format into a format readable by \LaTeX, including the generation of +the font definition files described in Section~\ref{Sec:install}. The +|fontinst| software should be available from the same source as your +copy of \LaTeX. + +Whenever practical, \LaTeX{} uses the font naming scheme called +`fontname'; this was described in \emph{Filenames for fonts},% +\footnote{An up-to-date electronic version +of this document can be found on any CTAN server, in the directory +\texttt{info/fontname}.} +\emph{TUGboat}~11(4),~1990. + +The class-writer's guide \emph{\clsguide} describes +the new \LaTeX{} features for writers of document classes and packages +and is kept in |clsguide.tex|. Configuring +\LaTeX{} is covered by the guide \emph{\cfgguide} in +\texttt{cfgguide.tex} whilst the philosophy behind our policy on +modifying \LaTeX{} is described in \emph{\modguide} in +\texttt{modguide.tex}. + +We are gradually turning the source code for \LaTeX{} into a \LaTeX{} +document \emph{\sourcecode}. This document includes an index of +\LaTeX{} commands and can be typeset from |source2e.tex|. + +For more information about \TeX{} and \LaTeX{}, please contact your +local \TeX{} Users Group, or the international \TeX{} Users Group. +Here are some useful addresses. +\begin{quote}\small\label{addrs} + \TeX{} Users Group, P.O. Box 1239, Three Rivers, CA~93271-1239, USA\\ + Fax:~+1~209~561~4584 \ Email: \texttt{tug@mail.tug.org} + + UK TUG, 1 Eymore Close, Selly Oak, Birmingham B29~4LB, UK\\ + Fax: +44 121 476 2159 \ Email: \texttt{uktug-enquiries@tex.ac.uk} +\end{quote} + + +\section{Text fonts} +\label{Sec:text} + +This section describes the commands available to class and package +writers for specifying and selecting fonts. + +\subsection{Text font attributes} + +Every text font in \LaTeX{} has five \emph{attributes}: +\begin{description} + +\item[encoding] This specifies the order that characters appear in the + font. The two most common text encodings used in \LaTeX{} are + Knuth's `\TeX{} text' encoding, and the `\TeX{} text extended' + encoding developed by the \TeX{} Users Group members during a \TeX{} + Conference at Cork in~1990 (hence its informal name `Cork encoding'). + +\item[family] The name for a collection of fonts, usually grouped under + a common name by the font foundry. For example, `Adobe Times', `ITC + Garamond', and Knuth's `Computer Modern Roman' are all font families. + +\item[series] How heavy or expanded a font is. For example, `medium + weight', `narrow' and `bold extended' are all series. + +\item[shape] The form of the letters within a font family. For + example, `italic', `oblique' and `upright' (sometimes called + `roman') are all font shapes. + +\item[size] The design size of the font, for example `10pt'. If no + dimension is specified, `pt' is assumed. + +\end{description} +The possible values for these attributes are given short acronyms by +\LaTeX. The most common values for the font encoding are: +\begin{center} +\begin{minipage}{.7\linewidth} + \begin{tabular}{rl} + |OT1| & \TeX{} text \\ + |T1| & \TeX{} extended text \\ + |OML| & \TeX{} math italic \\ + |OMS| & \TeX{} math symbols \\ + |OMX| & \TeX{} math large symbols \\ + |U| & Unknown \\ + |L<xx>| & A local encoding + \end{tabular} +\end{minipage} +\end{center} +The `local' encodings are intended for font encodings which are only +locally available, for example a font containing an organisation's +logo in various sizes. + +There are far too many font families to list them all, but some common +ones are: +\begin{center} +\begin{minipage}{.7\linewidth} + \begin{tabular}{rl} + |cmr| & Computer Modern Roman \\ + |cmss| & Computer Modern Sans \\ + |cmtt| & Computer Modern Typewriter \\ + |cmm| & Computer Modern Math Italic \\ + |cmsy| & Computer Modern Math Symbols \\ + |cmex| & Computer Modern Math Extensions \\ + |ptm| & Adobe Times \\ + |phv| & Adobe Helvetica \\ + |pcr| & Adobe Courier + \end{tabular} +\end{minipage} +\end{center} +The most common values for the font series are: +\begin{center} +\begin{minipage}{.7\linewidth} + \begin{tabular}{rl} + |m| & Medium \\ + |b| & Bold \\ + |bx| & Bold extended \\ + |sb| & Semi-bold \\ + |c| & Condensed + \end{tabular} +\end{minipage} +\end{center} +The most common values for the font shape are: +\begin{center} +\begin{minipage}{.7\linewidth} + \begin{tabular}{rl} + |n| & Normal (that is `upright' or `roman') \\ + |it| & Italic \\ + |sl| & Slanted (or `oblique') \\ + |sc| & Caps and small caps + \end{tabular} +\end{minipage} +\end{center} +The font size is specified as a dimension, for example |10pt| or +|1.5in| or |3mm|; if no unit is specified, |pt| is assumed. These five +parameters specify every \LaTeX{} font, for example: +\begin{center} + \begin{tabular}{@{}r@{\,}l@{\,}c@{\,}c@{\,}cc@{}r@{}} + \multicolumn{5}{@{}c}{\emph{\LaTeX{} specification}} & + \emph{Font} & + \emph{\TeX{} font name} \\ + |OT1| & |cmr| & |m| & |n| & |10| & + Computer Modern Roman 10 point & + |cmr10| \\ + |OT1| & |cmss| & |m| & |sl| & |1pc| & + Computer Modern Sans Oblique 1 pica & + |cmssi12| \\ + |OML| & |cmm| & |m| & |it| & |10pt| & + Computer Modern Math Italic 10 point & + |cmmi10| \\ + |T1| & |ptm| & |b| & |it| & |1in| & + Adobe Times Bold Italic 1 inch & + |ptmb8t at 1in| + \end{tabular} +\end{center} +These five parameters are displayed whenever \LaTeX{} gives an overfull +box warning, for example: +\begin{verbatim} + Overfull \hbox (3.80855pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 314--318 + []\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 Normally [] and [] will be iden-ti-cal, +\end{verbatim} +The author commands for fonts set the five attributes: +\begin{center} + \begin{tabular}{rcl} + \emph{Author command} & + \emph{Attribute} & + \emph{Value in} |article| \emph{class} \\ + |\textrm{..}| or |\rmfamily| & family & |cmr| \\ + |\textsf{..}| or |\sffamily| & family & |cmss| \\ + |\texttt{..}| or |\ttfamily| & family & |cmtt| \\ + |\textmd{..}| or |\mdseries| & series & |m| \\ + |\textbf{..}| or |\bfseries| & series & |bx| \\ + |\textup{..}| or |\upshape| & shape & |n| \\ + |\textit{..}| or |\itshape| & shape & |it| \\ + |\textsl{..}| or |\slshape| & shape & |sl| \\ + |\textsc{..}| or |\scshape| & shape & |sc| \\ + |\tiny| & size & |5pt| \\ + |\scriptsize| & size & |7pt| \\ + |\footnotesize| & size & |8pt| \\ + |\small| & size & |9pt| \\ + |\normalsize| & size & |10pt| \\ + |\large| & size & |12pt| \\ + |\Large| & size & |14.4pt| \\ + |\LARGE| & size & |17.28pt| \\ + |\huge| & size & |20.74pt| \\ + |\Huge| & size & |24.88pt| + \end{tabular} +\end{center} +The values used by these commands are determined by the document class, +using the parameters defined in Section~\ref{Sec:text.param}. + +Note that there are no author commands for selecting new encodings. +These should be provided by packages, such as the |fontenc| package. + +This section does not explain how \LaTeX{} font specifications are +turned into \TeX{} font names. This is described in +Section~\ref{Sec:install}. + +\subsection{Selection commands} + +The low-level commands used to select a text font are as follows. + +\begin{decl} +|\fontencoding| \arg{encoding} \\ +|\fontfamily| \arg{family}\\ +|\fontseries| \arg{series}\\ +|\fontshape| \arg{shape}\\ +|\fontsize| \arg{size} \arg{baselineskip}\\ +|\linespread| \arg{factor} +\end{decl} + +\NEWdescription{1998/12/01} +Each of the commands starting with |\font...| sets one of the font +attributes; |\fontsize| also sets |\baselineskip|. The |\linespread| +command prepares to multiply the current (or newly defined) +|\baselineskip| with \m{factor} (e.g., spreads the lines apart for +values greater one). + +The actual font in use is not altered by these commands, but the +current attributes are used to determine which font and baseline skip +to use after the next |\selectfont| command. + + +\begin{decl} +|\selectfont| +\end{decl} +Selects a text font, based on the current values of the font attributes. + +\emph{Warning}: There \emph{must} be a |\selectfont| command +immediately after any settings of the font parameters by (some of) +the six commands above, before any following text. +For example, it is legal to say: +\begin{verbatim} + \fontfamily{ptm}\fontseries{b}\selectfont Some text. +\end{verbatim} +but it is \emph{not} legal to say: +\begin{verbatim} + \fontfamily{ptm} Some \fontseries{b}\selectfont text. +\end{verbatim} +You may get unexpected results if you put text between a +|\font<parameter>| command (or |\linespread|) and a |\selectfont|. + +\begin{decl} +|\usefont| \arg{encoding} \arg{family} \arg{series} \arg{shape} +\end{decl} +A short hand for the equivalent |\font...| commands followed by a +call to |\selectfont|. + + +\subsection{Internals} + +The current values of the font attributes are held in internal macros. + +\begin{decl} + |\f@encoding| \\ + |\f@family| \\ + |\f@series| \\ + |\f@shape| \\ + |\f@size| \\ + |\f@baselineskip| \\ + |\tf@size| \\ + |\sf@size| \\ + |\ssf@size| +\end{decl} + +These hold the current values of the encoding, the family, the series, +the shape, the size, the baseline skip, the main math size, the +`script' math size and the `scriptscript' math size. The last three +are accessible only within a formula; outside of math they may contain +arbitrary values. + +For example, to set the size to 12 without +changing the baseline skip: +\begin{verbatim} + \fontsize{12}{\f@baselineskip} +\end{verbatim} +However, you should \emph{never} alter the values of the internal +commands directly; they must only be modified using the low-level +commands like |\fontfamily|, |\fontseries|, etc. If you disobey this +warning you might produce code that loops. + +\subsection{Parameters for author commands} +\label{Sec:text.param} + +The parameter values set by author commands such as |\textrm| and +|\rmfamily|, etc.\ are not hard-wired into \LaTeX; instead these +commands use the values of a number of parameters set by the document +class and packages. For example, |\rmdefault| is the name of the +default family selected by |\textrm| and |\rmfamily|. Thus to set a +document in Adobe Times, Helvetica and Courier, the document designer +specifies: +\begin{verbatim} + \renewcommand{\rmdefault}{ptm} + \renewcommand{\sfdefault}{phv} + \renewcommand{\ttdefault}{pcr} +\end{verbatim} + +\begin{decl} + |\encodingdefault| \\ + |\familydefault| \\ + |\seriesdefault| \\ + |\shapedefault| +\end{decl} +The encoding, family, series and shape of the main body font. By +default these are |OT1|, |\rmdefault|, |m| and |n|. Note that since +the default family is |\rmdefault|, this means that changing +|\rmdefault| will change the main body font of the document. + +\begin{decl} + |\rmdefault| \\ + |\sfdefault| \\ + |\ttdefault| +\end{decl} +The families selected by |\textrm|, |\rmfamily|, |\textsf|, +|\sffamily|, |\texttt| and |\ttfamily|. By default these are |cmr|, +|cmss| and |cmtt|. + +\begin{decl} + |\bfdefault| \\ + |\mddefault| +\end{decl} +The series selected by |\textbf|, |\bfseries|, |\textmd| and +|\mdseries|. By default these are |bx| and |m|. +These values are suitable for the default families used. If other +fonts are used as standard document fonts (for example, certain +PostScript fonts) it might be necessary to adjust the value of +|\bfdefault| to |b| since only a few such families have a `bold +extended' series. An alternative (taken for the fonts provided by +|psnfss|) is to define silent substitutions from |bx| series to |b| +series with special |\DeclareFontShape| declarations and the |ssub| +size function, see Section~\ref{sec:sizefunct}. + + +\begin{decl} + |\itdefault| \\ + |\sldefault| \\ + |\scdefault| \\ + |\updefault| +\end{decl} +The shapes selected by |\textit|, |\itshape|, |\textsl|, |\slshape|, +|\textsc|, |\scshape|, |\textup| and |\upshape|. By default these are +|it|, |sl|, |sc| and |n|. + +Note that there are no parameters for the size commands. These should +be defined directly in class files, for example: +\begin{verbatim} + \renewcommand{\normalsize}{\fontsize{10}{12}\selectfont} +\end{verbatim} +More elaborate examples (setting additional parameters when the text +size is changed) can be found in |classes.dtx| the source +documentation for the classes |article|, |report|, and |book|. + + +\subsection{Special font declaration commands} + +\begin{decl} +|\DeclareFixedFont| \arg{cmd} \arg{encoding} \arg{family} \arg{series} + \arg{shape} \arg{size} +\end{decl} + +Declares command \m{cmd} to be a font switch which selects the font +that is specified by the attributes \m{encoding}, \m{family}, +\m{series}, \m{shape}, and \m{size}. + +The font is selected without any adjustments to baselineskip and other +surrounding conditions. + +This example makes |{\picturechar .}| select a small dot very quickly: +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareFixedFont{\picturechar}{OT1}{cmr}{m}{n}{5} +\end{verbatim} + + +\begin{decl} +|\DeclareTextFontCommand| \arg{cmd} \arg{font-switches} +\end{decl} + +Declares command \m{cmd} to be a font command with one argument. +The current font attributes are locally modified by \m{font-switches} +and then the argument of \m{cmd} is typeset in the resulting new font. + +Commands defined by |\DeclareTextFontCommand| automatically take care +of any necessary italic correction (on either side). + +The following example shows how |\textrm| is defined by the kernel. +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareTextFontCommand{\textrm}{\rmfamily} +\end{verbatim} + +To define a command that always typeset its argument in the italic +shape of the main document font you could declare: +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareTextFontCommand{\normalit}{\normalfont\itshape} +\end{verbatim} + +This declaration can be used to change the meaning of a command; if +\m{cmd} is already defined, a log that it has been redefined +is put in the transcript file. + +\begin{decl} +|\DeclareOldFontCommand| \arg{cmd} \arg{text-switch} + \arg{math-switch} +\end{decl} + +Declares command \m{cmd} to be a font switch (i.e.~used with the +syntax |{<cmd>...}|) having the definition \m{text-switch} +when used in text and the definition \m{math-switch} when used in a +formula. +Math alphabet commands, like |\mathit|, when used within \m{math-switch} +should not have an argument. Their use in this argument causes their +semantics to change so that they here act as a font switch, as +required by the usage of the \m{cmd}. + +This declaration is useful for setting up commands like |\rm| to behave +as they did in \LaTeX~2.09. We strongly urge you \emph{not} to misuse +this declaration to invent new font commands. + +The following example defines |\it| to produce the italic shape of the +main document font if used in text and to switch to the font that would +normally be produced by the math alphabet |\mathit| if used in a +formula. +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareOldFontCommand{\it}{\normalfont\itshape}{\mathit} +\end{verbatim} + +This declaration can be used to change the meaning of a command; if +\m{cmd} is already defined, a log that it has been redefined +is put in the transcript file. + + +\section{Math fonts} +\label{Sec:math} + +This section describes the commands available to class and package +writers for specifying math fonts and math commands. + +\subsection{Math font attributes} + +The selection of fonts within math mode is quite different to that of +text fonts. + +Some math fonts are selected explicitly by one-argument commands such +as |\mathsf{max}| or |\mathbf{vec}|; such fonts are called \emph{math +alphabets}. These math alphabet commands affect only the font used +for letters and symbols of type |\mathalpha| (see +Section~\ref{Sec:math.commands}); other symbols within the argument +will be left unchanged. The predefined math alphabets are: +\begin{center} + \begin{tabular}{ccc} + \emph{Alphabet} & \emph{Description} & \emph{Example} \\ + |\mathnormal| & default & $abcXYZ$ \\ + |\mathrm| & roman & $\mathrm{abcXYZ}$ \\ + |\mathbf| & bold roman & $\mathbf{abcXYZ}$ \\ + |\mathsf| & sans serif & $\mathsf{abcXYZ}$ \\ + |\mathit| & text italic & $\mathit{abcXYZ}$ \\ + |\mathtt| & typewriter & $\mathtt{abcXYZ}$ \\ + |\mathcal| & calligraphic & $\mathcal{XYZ}$ + \end{tabular} +\end{center} +Other math fonts are selected implicitly by \TeX{} for symbols, with +commands such as |\oplus| (producing $\oplus$) or with straight +characters like |>>| or |+|. Fonts containing such math symbols are +called \emph{math symbol fonts}. The predefined math symbol fonts +are: +\begin{center} + \begin{tabular}{ccc} + \emph{Symbol font} & \emph{Description} & \emph{Example} \\ + |operators| & symbols from |\mathrm| & $[\;+\;]$ \\ + |letters| & symbols from |\mathnormal| & $<<\star>>$ \\ + |symbols| & most \LaTeX{} symbols & $\leq*\geq$ \\ + |largesymbols| & large symbols & $\sum\prod\int$ + \end{tabular} +\end{center} +Some math fonts are both \emph{math alphabets} and \emph{math symbol +fonts}, for example |\mathrm| and |operators| are the same font, and +|\mathnormal| and |letters| are the same font. + +Math fonts in \LaTeX{} have the same five attributes as text fonts: +encoding, family, series, shape and size. However, there are no +commands that allow the attributes to be individually changed. +Instead, the conversion from math fonts to these five attributes is +controlled by the \emph{math version}. For example, the |normal| math +version maps: +\begin{center} + \begin{tabular}{rlc@{ }c@{ }c@{ }c} + \multicolumn{2}{c}{\emph{Math font}} & + \multicolumn{4}{c}{\emph{External font}} \\ + \emph{Alphabets} & \emph{Symbol fonts} & + \multicolumn{4}{c}{\emph{Attributes}} \\ + |\mathnormal| & |letters| & |OML| & |cmm| & |m| & |it| \\ + |\mathrm| & |operators| & |OT1| & |cmr| & |m| & |n| \\ + |\mathcal| & |symbols| & |OMS| & |cmsy| & |m| & |n| \\ + & |largesymbols| & |OMX| & |cmex| & |m| & |n| \\ + |\mathbf| & & |OT1| & |cmr| & |bx| & |n| \\ + |\mathsf| & & |OT1| & |cmss| & |m| & |n| \\ + |\mathit| & & |OT1| & |cmr| & |m| & |it| \\ + |\mathtt| & & |OT1| & |cmtt| & |m| & |n| + \end{tabular} +\end{center} +The |bold| math version is similar except that it contains bold fonts. +The command |\boldmath| selects the |bold| math version. + +Math versions can only be changed outside of math mode. + +The two predefined math versions are: +\begin{center} + \begin{tabular}{rl} + |normal| & the default math version \\ + |bold| & the bold math version + \end{tabular} +\end{center} +Packages may define new math alphabets, math symbol fonts, and math +versions. This section describes the commands for writing such +packages. + +\subsection{Selection commands} + +There are no commands for selecting symbol fonts. Instead, these are +selected indirectly through symbol commands like |\oplus|. +Section~\ref{Sec:math.commands} explains how to define symbol commands. + +\begin{decl} + |\mathnormal{<math>}|\\ + |\mathcal{<math>}|\\ + |\mathrm{<math>}|\\ + |\mathbf{<math>}|\\ + |\mathsf{<math>}|\\ + |\mathit{<math>}|\\ + |\mathtt{<math>}| +\end{decl} +Each math alphabet is a command which can only be used inside math +mode. For example, |$x + \mathsf{y} + \mathcal{Z}$| produces $x + +\mathsf{y} + \mathcal{Z}$. + +\begin{decl} +|\mathversion{<version>}| +\end{decl} +This command selects a math version; it can only be used outside math +mode. For example, |\boldmath| is defined to be |\mathversion{bold}|. + +\subsection{Declaring math versions} + +\begin{decl} +|\DeclareMathVersion| \arg{version} +\end{decl} + +Defines \m{version} to be a math version. + +The newly declared version is initialised with the defaults for all +symbol fonts and math alphabets declared so far (see the commands +|\DeclareSymbolFont| and |\DeclareMathAlphabet|). + +If used on an already existing version, an information message is +written to the transcript file and all previous |\SetSymbolFont| or +|\SetMathAlphabet| declarations for this version are overwritten by +the math alphabet and symbol font defaults, i.e.~one ends up with a +virgin math version. + +Example: +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareMathVersion{normal} +\end{verbatim} + + +\subsection{Declaring math alphabets} + +\begin{decl} +|\DeclareMathAlphabet| \arg{math-alph} \arg{encoding} \arg{family} + \arg{series} \arg{shape} +\end{decl} + +\NEWdescription{1997/12/01} +If this is the first declaration for \m{math-alph} then a new math +alphabet with this as its command name is created. + +The arguments \m{encoding} \m{family} \m{series} \m{shape} are used to +set, or reset, the default values for this math alphabet in all math +versions; if required, these must be further reset later for a +particular math version by a |\SetMathAlphabet| command. + +If \m{shape} is empty then this \m{math-alph} is declared to be invalid +in all versions, unless it is set by a later |\SetMathAlphabet| +command for a particular math version. + +Checks that the command \m{math-alph} is either already a math +alphabet command or is undefined; and that \m{encoding} is a known +encoding scheme, i.e., has been previously declared. + + +In these examples, |\foo| is defined for all math versions but |\baz|, +by default, is defined nowhere. +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareMathAlphabet{\foo}{OT1}{cmtt}{m}{n} + \DeclareMathAlphabet{\baz}{OT1}{}{}{} +\end{verbatim} + + +\begin{decl} +|\SetMathAlphabet| \arg{math-alph} \arg{version}\\ + \null\hfill\arg{encoding} \arg{family} \arg{series} \arg{shape} +\end{decl} + +Changes, or sets, the font for the math alphabet \m{math-alph} in math +version \m{version} to \m{encoding}\m{family}\m{series}\m{shape}. + +Checks that \m{math-alph} has been declared as a math alphabet, +\m{version} is a known math version and \m{encoding} is a known +encoding scheme. + + +This example defines |\baz| for the `normal' math version only: +\begin{verbatim} + \SetMathAlphabet{\baz}{normal}{OT1}{cmss}{m}{n} +\end{verbatim} + +Note that this declaration is not used for all math alphabets: +Section~\ref{sec:symalph} describes |\DeclareSymbolFontAlphabet|, +which is used to set up math alphabets contained in fonts which have +been declared as symbol fonts. + + +\subsection{Declaring symbol fonts} +\label{sec:symalph} + +\begin{decl} +|\DeclareSymbolFont| \arg{sym-font} \arg{encoding} \arg{family} + \arg{series} \arg{shape} +\end{decl} + +\NEWdescription{1997/12/01} +If this is the first declaration for \m{sym-font} then a new +symbol font with this name is created (i.e.~this identifier is assigned +to a new \TeX{} math group). + +The arguments \m{encoding} \m{family} \m{series} \m{shape} are used to +set, or reset. the default values for this symbol font in \emph{all} +math versions; if required, these must be further reset later for +a particular math version by a |\SetSymbolFont| command. + +Checks that \m{encoding} is a declared encoding scheme. + + +For example, the following sets up the first four standard math symbol +fonts: +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareSymbolFont{operators}{OT1}{cmr}{m}{n} + \DeclareSymbolFont{letters}{OML}{cmm}{m}{it} + \DeclareSymbolFont{symbols}{OMS}{cmsy}{m}{n} + \DeclareSymbolFont{largesymbols}{OMX}{cmex}{m}{n} +\end{verbatim} + + +\begin{decl} +|\SetSymbolFont| \arg{sym-font} \arg{version}\\ + \null\hfill \arg{encoding} \arg{family} \arg{series} \arg{shape} +\end{decl} + +Changes the symbol font \m{sym-font} for math version \m{version} +to \m{encoding} \m{family} \m{series} \m{shape}. + +Checks that \m{sym-font} has been declared as a symbol font, +\m{version} is a known math version and \m{encoding} is a +declared encoding scheme. + + +For example, the following come from the set up of the `bold' +math version: +\begin{verbatim} + \SetSymbolFont{operators}{bold}{OT1}{cmr}{bx}{n} + \SetSymbolFont{letters}{bold}{OML}{cmm}{b}{it} +\end{verbatim} + + +\begin{decl} +|\DeclareSymbolFontAlphabet| \arg{math-alph} \arg{sym-font} +\end{decl} + +\NEWdescription{1997/12/01} +Allows the previously declared symbol font \m{sym-font} to be the +math alphabet with command \m{math-alph} in \emph{all} math versions. + +Checks that the command \m{math-alph} is either already a math alphabet +command or is undefined; and that \m{sym-font} is a symbol font. + + +Example: +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareSymbolFontAlphabet{\mathrm}{operators} + \DeclareSymbolFontAlphabet{\mathcal}{symbols} +\end{verbatim} + +This declaration should be used in preference to +|\DeclareMathAlphabet| and |\SetMathAlphabet| when a math alphabet is +the same as a symbol font; this is because it makes better use of the +limited number (only 16) of \TeX's math groups. + +\NEWdescription{1997/12/01} +Note that, whereas a \TeX{} math group is allocated to each symbol font +when it is first declared, a math alphabet uses a \TeX{} math group +only when its command is used within a math formula. + + +\subsection{Declaring math symbols} +\label{Sec:math.commands} + +\begin{decl} +|\DeclareMathSymbol| \arg{symbol} \arg{type} \arg{sym-font} + \arg{slot} +\end{decl} + +The \m{symbol} can be either a single character such as `|>>|', or a +macro name, such as |\sum|. + +Defines the \m{symbol} to be a math symbol of type +\m{type} in slot \m{slot} of symbol font \m{sym-font}. The +\m{type} can be given as a number or as a command: +\begin{center} + \begin{tabular}{ccc} + \emph{Type} & \emph{Meaning} & \emph{Example} \\ + |0| or |\mathord | & Ordinary & $\alpha$ \\ + |1| or |\mathop | & Large operator & $\sum$ \\ + |2| or |\mathbin | & Binary operation & $\times$ \\ + |3| or |\mathrel | & Relation & $\leq$ \\ + |4| or |\mathopen | & Opening & $\langle$ \\ + |5| or |\mathclose| & Closing & $\rangle$ \\ + |6| or |\mathpunct| & Punctuation & $;$ \\ + |7| or |\mathalpha| & Alphabet character & $A$ + \end{tabular} +\end{center} +Only symbols of type |\mathalpha| will be affected by math alphabet +commands: within the argument of a math alphabet command they will +produce the character in slot \m{slot} of that math alphabet's font. +Symbols of other types will always produce the same symbol +(within one math version). + +|\DeclareMathSymbol| allows a macro \m{symbol} to be redefined only if +it was previously defined to be a math symbol. It also checks that +the \m{sym-font} is a declared symbol font. + +Example: +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareMathSymbol{\alpha}{0}{letters}{"0B} + \DeclareMathSymbol{\lessdot}{\mathbin}{AMSb}{"0C} + \DeclareMathSymbol{\alphld}{\mathalpha}{AMSb}{"0C} +\end{verbatim} + +\begin{decl} + |\DeclareMathDelimiter| \arg{cmd} \arg{type} + \arg{sym-font-1} \arg{slot-1}\\ + \null\hfill \arg{sym-font-2} \arg{slot-2} +\end{decl} +Defines \m{cmd} to be a math delimiter where the small variant is in +slot \m{slot-1} of symbol font \m{sym-font-1} and the large +variant is in slot \m{slot-2} of symbol font \m{sym-font-2}. +Both symbol fonts must have been declared previously. + +Checks that \m{sym-font-i} are both declared symbol fonts. + +If \TeX{} is not looking for a delimiter, \m{cmd} is treated just as +if it had been defined with |\DeclareMathSymbol| using +\m{type}, \m{sym-font-1} and \m{slot-1}. In other words, if a +command is defined as a delimiter then this automatically defines it +as a math symbol. + +\NEWdescription{1998/06/01} +In case \m{cmd} is a single character such as `|[|', the same syntax is +used. Previously the \arg{type} argument was not present (and thus the +corresponding math symbol declaration had to be provided seperately). + +Example: +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareMathDelimiter{\langle}{\mathopen}{symbols}{"68} + {largesymbols}{"0A} + \DeclareMathDelimiter{(} {\mathopen}{operators}{"28} + {largesymbols}{"00} +\end{verbatim} + + +\begin{decl} +|\DeclareMathAccent| \arg{cmd} \arg{type} \arg{sym-font} \arg{slot} +\end{decl} + +Defines \m{cmd} to act as a math accent. + +The accent character comes from slot \m{slot} in +\m{sym-font}. The \m{type} can be either +|\mathord| or |\mathalpha|; in the latter case the accent character +changes font when used in a math alphabet. + +Example: +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareMathAccent{\acute}{\mathalpha}{operators}{"13} + \DeclareMathAccent{\vec}{\mathord}{letters}{"7E} +\end{verbatim} + + +\begin{decl} +|\DeclareMathRadical| \arg{cmd} + \arg{sym-font-1} \arg{slot-1}\\ + \null\hfill \arg{sym-font-2} \arg{slot-2} +\end{decl} + +Defines \m{cmd} to be a radical where the small variant is in +slot \m{slot-1} of symbol font \m{sym-font-1} and the +large variant is in slot \m{slot-2} of symbol font +\m{sym-font-2}. Both symbol fonts must have been declared +previously. + +Example (probably the only use for it!): +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareMathRadical{\sqrt}{symbols}{"70}{largesymbols}{"70} +\end{verbatim} + +\subsection{Declaring math sizes} + +\begin{decl} +|\DeclareMathSizes| \arg{t-size} \arg{mt-size} \arg{s-size} + \arg{ss-size} +\end{decl} + +Declares that \m{mt-size} is the (main) math text size, \m{s-size} is +the `script' size and \m{ss-size} the `scriptscript' size to be used +in math, when \m{t-size} is the current text size. For text sizes for +which no such declaration is given the `script' and `scriptscript' +size will be calculated and then fonts are loaded for the calculated +sizes or the best approximation (this may result in a warning +message). + +Normally, \m{t-size} and \m{mt-size} will be identical; however, if, +for example, PostScript text fonts are mixed with bit-map math fonts +then you may not have available a \m{mt-size} for every \m{t-size}. + +Example: +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareMathSizes{13.82}{14.4}{10}{7} +\end{verbatim} + +\section{Font installation} +\label{Sec:install} + +This section explains how \LaTeX's font attributes are turned into +\TeX{} font specifications. + +\subsection{Font definition files} + +\NEWdescription{1997/12/01} +The description of how \LaTeX{} font attributes are turned into \TeX{} +fonts is usually kept in a \emph{font definition file} (|.fd|). The +file for family \m{family} in encoding \m{ENC} must be +called |<enc><family>.fd|: for example, |ot1cmr.fd| for Computer +Modern Roman with encoding |OT1| or |t1ptm.fd| for Adobe Times with +encoding |T1|. Note that encoding names are converted to lowercase +when used as part of file names. + +Whenever \LaTeX{} encounters an encoding/family combination that it +does not know (e.g.~if the document designer says +|\fontfamily{ptm}\selectfont|) then \LaTeX{} attempts to load the +appropriate |.fd| file. ``Not known'' means: there was no +|\DeclareFontFamily| declaration issued for this encoding/family +combination. If the |.fd| file could not be found, a warning is +issued and font substitutions are made. + +The declarations in the font definition file are responsible for +telling \LaTeX{} how to load fonts for that encoding/family +combination. + +\subsection{Font definition file commands} + +\emph{Note}: A font definition file should contain only commands +from this subsection. + +Note that these commands can also be used outside a font definition +file: they can be put in package or class files, or even in the +preamble of a document. + +\begin{decl} + |\ProvidesFile{<file-name>}[<release-info>]| +\end{decl} +The file should announce itself with a |\ProvidesFile| command, +as described in \emph{\clsguide}. For example: +\begin{verbatim} + \ProvidesFile{t1ptm.fd}[1994/06/01 Adobe Times font definitions] +\end{verbatim} + +Spaces within the arguments specific to font definition files are +ignored to avoid surplus spaces in the document. If a real space is +necessary use |\space|. +\NEWdescription{2004/02/10}However, note that this is only true if the +declaration is made at top level! If used within the definition of +another command, within |\AtBeginDocument|, option code or in similar +places, then spaces within the argument will remain and may result in +incorrect table entries. + +\begin{decl} +|\DeclareFontFamily| \arg{encoding} \arg{family} \arg{loading-settings} +\end{decl} + +Declares a font family \m{family} to be available in encoding scheme +\m{encoding}. + +The \m{loading-settings} are executed immediately after loading any +font with this encoding and family. + +Checks that \m{encoding} was previously declared. + +This example refers to the Computer Modern Typewriter font family in +the Cork encoding: +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareFontFamily{T1}{cmtt}{\hyphenchar\font=-1} +\end{verbatim} + +Each |.fd| file should contain exactly one |\DeclareFontFamily| +command, and it should be for the appropriate encoding/family +combination. + +\begin{decl} +|\DeclareFontShape| \arg{encoding} \arg{family} \arg{series} + \arg{shape}\\ + \null\hfill \arg{loading-info} \arg{loading-settings} +\end{decl} + +Declares a font shape combination; here \m{loading-info} contains the +information that combines sizes with external fonts. The syntax is +complex and is described in Section~\ref{sec:loadinfo} below. + +The \m{loading-settings} are executed after loading any font with this +font shape. They are executed immediately after the +`loading-settings' which were declared by |\DeclareFontFamily| and so +they can be used to overwrite the settings made at the family level. + +Checks that the combination \m{encoding}\m{family} was previously +declared via |\DeclareFontFamily|. + +Example: +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmr}{m}{sl}{% + <<5-8>> sub * cmr/m/n + <<8>> cmsl8 + <<9>> cmsl9 + <<10>> <<10.95>> cmsl10 + <<12>> <<14.4>> <<17.28>> <<20.74>> <<24.88>> cmsl12 + }{} +\end{verbatim} +The file can contain any number of |\DeclareFontShape| commands, +which should be for the appropriate \m{encoding} and \m{family}. + +\NEWfeature{1996/06/01} +The font family declarations for the |OT1|-encoded fonts now all +contain: +\begin{verbatim} + \hyphenchar\font=`\- +\end{verbatim} +This enables the use of an alternative |\hyphenchar| in other encodings +whilst maintaining the correct value for all fonts. + +\subsection{Font file loading information} +\label{sec:loadinfo} + +The information which tells \LaTeX{} exactly which font ({\tt .tfm}) +files to load is contained in the \m{loading-info} part of a +|\DeclareFontShape| declaration. This part consists of one or more +\m{fontshape-decl}s, each of which has the following form: + +\begin{center} +\begin{tabular}{r@{ $::=$ }l} + \m{fontshape-decl} & \m{size-infos} \m{font-info} \\ + \m{size-infos} & \m{size-infos} \m{size-info} $\mid$ + \m{size-info} \\ + \m{size-info} & ``|<<|'' \m{number-or-range} ``|>>|'' \\ + \m{font-info} & $[$ \m{size-function} ``|*|'' $]$ + $[$ ``|[|'' \m{optarg} ``|]|'' $]$ \m{fontarg} \\ +\end{tabular} +\end{center} +The \m{number-or-range} denotes the size or size-range +for which this entry applies. + +If it contains a hyphen it is a +range: lower bound on the left (if missing, zero implied), upper bound +on the right (if missing, $\infty$ implied). For ranges, the +upper bound is \emph{not} included in the range and the lower bound is. + +Examples: +\begin{center} +\begin{tabular}{lll} + |<<10>>| & simple size& 10pt only\\ + |<<-8>>| & range& all sizes less than 8pt\\ + |<<8-14.4>>| & range& all sizes greater than or equal to 8pt\\ + & & \ but less than 14.4pt\\ + |<<14.4->>| & range& all sizes greater than or equal 14.4pt +\end{tabular} +\end{center} +If more than one \m{size-info} entry follows without any +intervening \m{font-info}, they all share the next \m{font-info}. + +The \m{size-function}, if present, handles the use of \m{font-info}. +If not present, the `empty' \m{size-function} is assumed. + +All the \m{size-info}s are inspected in the order in which they appear +in the font shape declaration. If a \m{size-info} matches the +requested size, its \m{size-function} is executed. If |\external@font| +is non-empty afterwards this process stops, otherwise the next +\m{size-info} is inspected. (See also |\DeclareSizeFunction|.) + +If this process does not lead to a non-empty |\external@font|, +\LaTeX{} tries the nearest simple size. If the entry contains only +ranges an error is returned. + + +\subsection{Size functions} +\label{sec:sizefunct} + + +\LaTeX{} provides the following size functions, whose `inputs' are +\m{fontarg} and \m{optarg} (when present). + +\begin{description} +\item[`' (empty)] +Load the external font \m{fontarg} at the user-requested size. If +\m{optarg} is present, it is used as the scale-factor. + +\item[s] +Like the empty function but without terminal warnings, only +loggings. + +\item[gen] +Generates the external font from \m{fontarg} followed by +the user-requested size, e.g.~|<<8>> <<9>> <<10>> gen * cmtt| + +\item[sgen] +Like the `gen' function but without terminal warnings, only loggings. + +\item[genb] +\NEWfeature{1995/12/01} +Generates the external font from \m{fontarg} followed by +the user-requested size, using the conventions of the `ec' fonts. +e.g.~|<<10.98>> genb * dctt| produces |dctt1098|. + +\item[sgenb] +\NEWfeature{1995/12/01} +Like the `genb' function but without terminal warnings, only loggings. + +\item[sub] +Tries to load a font from a different font shape declaration given by +\m{fontarg} in the form \m{family}|/|\m{series}|/|\m{shape}. + +\item[ssub] +Silent variant of `sub', only loggings. + +\item[subf] +Like the empty function but issues a warning that it has to substitute +the external font \m{fontarg} because the desired font shape was not +available in the requested size. + +\item[ssubf] +Silent variant of `subf', only loggings. + +\item[fixed] +Load font \m{fontarg} as is, disregarding the user-requested size. +If present, \m{optarg} gives the ``at \ldots pt'' size to be used. + +\item[sfixed] +Silent variant of `fixed', only loggings. + +\end{description} + +Examples for the use of most of the above size functions can be found +in the file |cmfonts.fdd|---the source for the standard |.fd| files +describing the Computer Modern fonts by Donald Knuth. + + +\begin{decl} +|\DeclareSizeFunction| \arg{name} \arg{code} +\end{decl} + +Declares a size-function \m{name} for use in |\DeclareFontShape| +commands. The interface is still under development but there should be +no real need to a define new size functions. + +The \m{code} is executed when the size or size-range in +|\DeclareFontShape| matches the user-requested size. + +The arguments of the size-function are automatically parsed and placed +into |\mandatory@arg| and |\optional@arg| for use in \m{code}. Also +available, of course, is |\f@size|, which is the user-requested size. + +To signal success \m{code} must define the command |\external@font| +to contain the external name and any scaling options (if present) for +the font to be loaded. + +This example sets up the `empty' size function (simplified): +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareSizeFunction{} + {\edef\external@font{\mandatory@arg\space at\f@size} +\end{verbatim} + + +\section{Encodings} +\label{Sec:encode} + +This section explains how to declare and use new font encodings and +how to declare commands for use with particular encodings. + +\subsection{The \textsf{fontenc} package} + +Users can select new font encodings using the |fontenc| package. The +|fontenc| package has options for encodings; the last option becomes +the default encoding. For example, to use the |OT2| (Washington +University Cyrillic encoding) and |T1| encodings, with |T1| as the +default, an author types: +\begin{verbatim} + \usepackage[OT2,T1]{fontenc} +\end{verbatim} + +\NEWdescription{1997/12/01} +For each font encoding \m{ENC} given as an option, this package loads +the \emph{encoding definition} (|<enc>enc.def|, with an all +lower-case name) file; it also sets |\encodingdefault| to be the last +encoding in the option list. + +The declarations in the encoding definition file |<enc>enc.def| for +encoding \m{ENC} are responsible for declaring this encoding and +telling \LaTeX{} how to produce characters in this encoding; this file +should contain nothing else (see Section~\ref{Sec:encode.def}. + +The standard \LaTeX{} format declares the |OT1| and |T1| text +encodings by inputting the files |ot1enc.def| and |t1enc.def|; it also +sets up various defaults which require that |OT1|-encoded fonts are +available. +Other encoding set-ups might be added to the distribution at a +later stage. + +Thus the example above loads the files |ot2enc.def| and |t1enc.def| +and sets |\encodingdefault| to |T1|. + +\emph{Warning}: If you wish to use |T1|-encoded fonts other than the `cmr' +family then you may need to load the package (e.g.~\texttt{times}) +that selects the fonts \emph{before} loading \texttt{fontenc} (this +prevents the system from attempting to load any |T1|-encoded fonts from +the `cmr' family). + +\subsection{Encoding definition file commands} +\label{Sec:encode.def} + +\emph{Note}: An encoding definition file should contain only commands +from this subsection. + +\NEWdescription{1997/12/01} +As with the font definition file commands, it is also possible +(although normally not necessary) to use these declarations directly +within a class or package file. + +\emph{Warning}: Some aspects of the contents of font definition files +are still under development. Therefore, the current versions of the +files |ot1enc.def| and |t1enc.def| are temporary versions and should +not be used as models for producing further such files. For further +information you should read the documentation in |ltoutenc.dtx|. + +\begin{decl} + |\ProvidesFile{<file-name>}[<release-info>]| +\end{decl} +The file should announce itself with a |\ProvidesFile| +command, described in \emph{\clsguide}. For example: +\begin{verbatim} + \ProvidesFile{ot2enc.def} + [1994/06/01 Washington University Cyrillic encoding] +\end{verbatim} + + +\begin{decl} +|\DeclareFontEncoding| \arg{encoding} \arg{text-settings} + \arg{math-settings} +\end{decl} + +Declares a new encoding scheme \m{encoding}. + +The \m{text-settings} are +declarations which are executed every time |\selectfont| changes the +encoding to be \m{encoding}. + +The \m{math-settings} are similar but are for math alphabets. They +are executed whenever a math alphabet with this encoding is +called. + +\NEWfeature{1998/12/01} +It also saves the value of \m{encoding} in the macro +|\LastDeclaredEncoding|. + +Example: +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareFontEncoding{OT1}{}{} +\end{verbatim} + +Some author commands need to change their definition depending on +which encoding is currently in use. For example, in the |OT1| +encoding, the letter `\AE' is in slot |"1D|, whereas in the |T1| +encoding it is in slot |"C6|. So the definition of |\AE| has to +change depending on whether the current encoding is |OT1| or |T1|. +The following commands allow this to happen. + +\begin{decl} + |\DeclareTextCommand| \arg{cmd} \arg{encoding} + \oarg{num} \oarg{default} \arg{definition} +\end{decl} +This command is like |\newcommand|, except that it defines a +command which is specific to one encoding. For example, the +definition of |\k| in the |T1| encoding is: +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareTextCommand{\k}{T1}[1] + {\oalign{\null#1\crcr\hidewidth\char12}} +\end{verbatim} +|\DeclareTextCommand| takes the same optional arguments as +|\newcommand|. + +The resulting command is +robust, even if the code in \m{definition} is fragile. + +It does not produce an error if the command has already +been defined but logs the redefinition in the transcript file. + +\begin{decl}[1994/12/01] + |\ProvideTextCommand| \arg{cmd} \arg{encoding} + \oarg{num} \oarg{default} \arg{definition} +\end{decl} +This command is the same as |\DeclareTextCommand|, except that +if \m{cmd} is already defined in encoding \m{encoding}, then the +definition is ignored. + +\begin{decl} + |\DeclareTextSymbol| \arg{cmd} \arg{encoding} \arg{slot} +\end{decl} +This command defines a text symbol with slot \m{slot} in the +encoding. For example, the definition of |\ss| in the |OT1| encoding +is: +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareTextSymbol{\ss}{OT1}{25} +\end{verbatim} +It does not produce an error if the command has already +been defined but logs the redefinition in the transcript file. + +\begin{decl} + |\DeclareTextAccent| \arg{cmd} \arg{encoding} \arg{slot} +\end{decl} +This command declares a text accent, with the accent taken from slot +\m{slot} in the encoding. For example, the definition of |\"| in +the |OT1| encoding is: +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareTextAccent{\"}{OT1}{127} +\end{verbatim} +It does not produce an error if the command has already +been defined but logs the redefinition in the transcript file. + +\begin{decl} + |\DeclareTextComposite| \arg{cmd} \arg{encoding} \arg{letter} + \arg{slot} +\end{decl} +This command declares that the composite letter formed from applying +\m{cmd} to \m{letter} is defined to be simply slot \m{slot} in the +encoding. The \m{letter} should be a single letter (such as |a|) or +a single command (such as |\i|). + + +For example, the definition of |\'{a}| +in the |T1| encoding could be declared like this: +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareTextComposite{\'}{T1}{a}{225} +\end{verbatim} + +The \m{cmd} will normally have been previously declared +for this encoding, either by using +|\DeclareTextAccent|, or as a one-argument |\DeclareTextCommand|. + +\begin{decl}[1994/12/01] + |\DeclareTextCompositeCommand| \arg{cmd} \arg{encoding} \arg{letter} + \arg{definition} +\end{decl} +This is a more general form of |\DeclareTextComposite|, which allows +for an arbitrary \m{definition}, not just a \m{slot}. The main use +for this is to allow accents on |i| to act like accents on |\i|, for +example: +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\'}{OT1}{i}{\'\i} +\end{verbatim} +It has the same restrictions as |\DeclareTextComposite|. + + +\begin{decl}[1998/12/01] + |\LastDeclaredEncoding| +\end{decl} +This holds the name of the last encoding declared via +|\DeclareFontEncoding| (this should also be the currently most +efficient encoding). It can be used in the \m{encoding} argument +of the above declarations in place of explicitly mentioning the +encoding, e.g. +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareFontEncoding{T1}{}{} + \DeclareTextAccent{\`}{\LastDeclaredEncoding}{0} + \DeclareTextAccent{\'}{\LastDeclaredEncoding}{1} +\end{verbatim} +This can be useful in cases where encoding files sharing common code +are generated from one source. + + +\subsection{Default definitions} + +\NEWdescription{1997/12/01} +The declarations used in encoding definition files define +encoding-specific commands but they do not allow those commands to be +used without explicitly changing the encoding. For some commands, +such as symbols, this is not enough. For example, the~|OMS| encoding +contains the symbol~`\S', but we need to be able to use the +command~|\S| whatever the current encoding may be, without explicitly +selecting the encoding~|OMS|. + +\NEWdescription{1997/12/01} +To allow this, \LaTeX{} has commands that declare default definitions +for commands; these defaults are used when the command is not defined +in the current encoding. For example, the default encoding for~|\S| +is~|OMS|, and so in an encoding (such as |OT1|) which does not +contain~|\S|, the~|OMS| encoding is selected in order to access this +glyph. But in an encoding (such as~|T1|) which does contain~|\S|, the +glyph in that encoding is used. The standard \LaTeXe{} format sets +up several such defaults using the following encodings: |OT1|,~|OMS| +and~|OML|. + +\emph{Warning}: These commands should \emph{not} occur in encoding +definition files, since those files should declare only commands for use +when that encoding has been selected. They should instead be placed +in packages; they must, of course, always refer to encodings that are +known to be available. + +\begin{decl}[1994/12/01] + |\DeclareTextCommandDefault| \arg{cmd} \arg{definition} +\end{decl} +This command allows an encoding-specific command to be given a default +definition. For example, the default definition for |\copyright| is +defined be be a circled `c' with: +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareTextCommandDefault{\copyright}{\textcircled{c}} +\end{verbatim} +\begin{decl}[1994/12/01] + |\DeclareTextAccentDefault| \arg{cmd} \arg{encoding} \\ + |\DeclareTextSymbolDefault| \arg{cmd} \arg{encoding} +\end{decl} +These commands allow an encoding-specific command to be given a +default encoding. For example, the default encoding for |\"| and +|\ae| is set to be |OT1| by: +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareTextAccentDefault{\"}{OT1} + \DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\ae}{OT1} +\end{verbatim} +Note that |\DeclareTextAccentDefault| can be used on any one-argument +encoding-specific command, not just those defined with +|\DeclareTextAccent|. Similarly, |\DeclareTextSymbolDefault| can be +used on any encoding-specific command with no arguments, not just +those defined with |\DeclareTextSymbol|. + +For more examples of these definitions, see |ltoutenc.dtx|. + +\begin{decl}[1994/12/01] + |\ProvideTextCommandDefault| \arg{cmd} \arg{definition} +\end{decl} +This command is the same as |\DeclareTextCommandDefault|, except that +if the command already has a default definition, then the definition +is ignored. This is useful to give `faked' definitions of symbols +which may be given `real' definitions by other packages. For example, +a package might give a fake definition of |\textonequarter| by saying: +\begin{verbatim} + \ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textonequarter}{$\m@th\frac14$} +\end{verbatim} + + \subsection{Encoding defaults} + +\begin{decl} +|\DeclareFontEncodingDefaults| \arg{text-settings} \arg{math-settings} +\end{decl} + +Declares \m{text-settings} and \m{math-settings} for all encoding +schemes. These are executed before the encoding scheme dependent ones +are executed so that one can use the defaults for the major cases and +overwrite them if necessary using |\DeclareFontEncoding|. + +If |\relax| is used as an argument, the current setting of this default +is left unchanged. + +This example is used by amsfonts.sty for accent positioning; it changes +only the math settings: +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareFontEncodingDefaults{\relax}{\def\accentclass@{7}} +\end{verbatim} + + +\begin{decl} +|\DeclareFontSubstitution| \arg{encoding} \arg{family} \arg{series} + \arg{shape} +\end{decl} + +Declares the default values for font substitution which will be used +when a font with encoding \m{encoding} +should be loaded but no font can be found with the current +attributes. + +These substitutions are local to the encoding scheme because the +encoding scheme is never substituted! They are tried in the order +\m{shape} then \m{series} and finally \m{family}. + +If no defaults are set up for an encoding, the values given by +|\DeclareErrorFont| are used. + +The font specification for +\m{encoding}\m{family}\m{series}\m{shape} +must have been defined by |\DeclareFontShape| +before the |\begin{document}| is reached. + +Example: +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareFontSubstitution{T1}{cmr}{m}{n} +\end{verbatim} + +\subsection{Case changing} +\label{sec:case} + +\begin{decl} + |\MakeUppercase| \arg{text} \\ + |\MakeLowercase| \arg{text} +\end{decl} + +\NEWfeature{1995/06/01} +\TeX{} provides the two primitives |\uppercase| and |\lowercase| for +changing the case of text. Unfortunately, these \TeX{} primitives do +not change the case of characters accessed by commands like |\ae| or +|\aa|. To overcome this problem, \LaTeX{} provides these two commands. + +In the long run, we would like to use all-caps fonts rather than any +command like |\MakeUppercase| but this is not possible at the moment +because such fonts do not exist. + +For further details, see \texttt{clsguide.tex}. + +\NEWdescription{1999/04/23} +In order that upper/lower-casing will work reasonably well, and in +order to provide any correct hyphenation, \LaTeXe{} \emph{must} use, +throughout a document, the same fixed table for changing case. The +table used is designed for the font encoding |T1|; this works well +with the standard \TeX{} fonts for all Latin alphabets but will cause +problems when using other alphabets. As an experiment, it has now +been extended for use with some Cyrillic encodings. + + +\section{Miscellanea} +\label{Sec:misc} + +This section covers the remaining font commands in \LaTeX{} and some +other issues. + +\subsection{Font substitution} + +\begin{decl} +|\DeclareErrorFont| \arg{encoding} \arg{family} \arg{series} + \arg{shape} \arg{size} +\end{decl} + +Declares \m{encoding}\m{family}\m{series}\m{shape} to be the font shape +used in cases where the standard substitution mechanism fails +(i.e.~would loop). For the standard mechanism see the command +|\DeclareFontSubstitution| above. + +The font specification for +\m{encoding}\m{family}\m{series}\m{shape} +must have been defined by |\DeclareFontShape| +before the |\begin{document}| is reached. + +Example: +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareErrorFont{OT1}{cmr}{m}{n}{10} +\end{verbatim} + + +\begin{decl} +|\fontsubfuzz| +\end{decl} + +This parameter is used to decide whether or not to produce a terminal +warning if a font size substitution takes place. If the difference +between the requested and the chosen size is less than |\fontsubfuzz| +the warning is only written to the transcript file. The default value +is |0.4pt|. This can be redefined with |\renewcommand|, for example: +\begin{verbatim} + \renewcommand{\fontsubfuzz}{0pt} % always warn +\end{verbatim} + +\subsection{Preloading} + +\begin{decl} +|\DeclarePreloadSizes| \arg{encoding} \arg{family} \arg{series} + \arg{shape} +\arg{size-list} +\end{decl} + + +Specifies the fonts that should be preloaded by the format. These +commands should be put in a |preload.cfg| file, which is read in when +the \LaTeX{} format is being built. +Read |preload.dtx| for more information on how to built such a +configuration file. + +Example: +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclarePreloadSizes{OT1}{cmr}{m}{sl}{10,10.95,12} +\end{verbatim} + + +\subsection{Accented characters} + +\NEWdescription{1996/06/01} +Accented characters in \LaTeX{} can be produced using commands such as +|\"a| etc. The precise effect of such commands depends on the font +encoding being used. When using a font encoding that contains the +accented characters as individual glyphs (such as the |T1| encoding, +in the case of |\"a|) words that contain such accented characters can +be automatically hyphenated. For font encodings that do not contain +the requested individual glyph (such as the |OT1| encoding) such a +command invokes typesetting instructions that produce the accented +character as a combination of character glyphs and diacritical marks +in the font. In most cases this involves a call to the \TeX{} +primitive |\accent|. Glyphs constructed as composites in this way +inhibit hyphenation of the current word; this is one reason why the +|T1| encoding is preferable to the original \TeX{} font encoding +|OT1|. + +It is important to understand that commands like |\"a| in \LaTeXe{} +represent just a name for a single glyph (in this case `umlaut a') and +contain no information about how to typeset that glyph---thus it does +\emph{not} mean `put two dots on top of the character a'. The +decision as to what typesetting routine to use will depend on the +encoding of the current font and so this decision is taken at the last +minute. Indeed, it is possible that the same input will be typeset in +more than one way in the same document; for example, text in section +headings may also appear in table of contents and in running heads; and +each of these may use a font with a different encoding. + +For this reason the notation |\"a| is \emph{not} equivalent to: +\begin{verbatim} + \newcommand \chara {a} \"\chara +\end{verbatim} +In the latter case, \LaTeX{} does not expand the macro |\chara| but +simply compares the notation (the string |\"\chara|) to its list of +known composite notations in the current encoding; when it fails to +find |\"\chara| it does the best it can and invokes the typesetting +instructions that put the umlaut accent on top of the expansion of +|\chara|. Thus, even if the font actually contains `\"a' as an +individual glyph, it will not be used. + +The low-level accent commands in \LaTeX{} are defined in such a way +that it is possible to combine a diacritical mark from one font with a +glyph from another font; for example, |\"\textparagraph| will produce +\"\textparagraph. The umlaut here +is taken from the |OT1| encoded font |cmr10| whilst the paragraph sign +is from the |OMS| encoded font |cmsy10|. (This example may be +typographically silly but better ones would involve font encodings +like |OT2| (Cyrillic) that might not be available at every +site.) + +There are, however, restrictions on the font-changing commands that +will work within the argument to such an accent command. These are +\TeX{}nical in the sense that they follow from the way that \TeX{}'s +|\accent| primitive works, allowing only a special class of commands +between the accent and the accented character. + +The following are examples of commands that will not work correctly as +the accent will appear above a space: the font commands with text +arguments (|\textbf{...}| and friends); all the font size declarations +(|\fontsize| and |\Large|, etc.); |\usefont| and declarations that +depend on it, such as |\normalfont|; box commands (e.g.~|\mbox{...}|). + +The lower-level font declarations that set the attributes family, +series and shape (such as |\fontshape{sl}\selectfont|) will produce +correct typesetting, as will the default declarations such as +|\bfseries|. + + +\subsection{Naming conventions} + +\begin{itemize} +\item +Math alphabet commands all start with |\math...|: examples are +|\mathbf|, |\mathcal|, etc. + +\item +The text font changing commands with arguments all start with +|\text...|: e.g.~|\textbf| and |\textrm|. The exception to this is +|\emph|, since it occurs very commonly in author documents and so +deserves a shorter name. + +\item +Names for encoding schemes are strings of up to three letters (all +upper case) plus digits. + +The \LaTeX3 project reserves the use of encodings starting with the +following letters: |T| (standard 256-long text encodings), |TS| +(symbols that are designed to extend a corresponding |T| encoding), +|X| (text encodings that do not conform to the strict requirements for +|T| encodings), |M| (standard 256-long math encodings), |S| (other +symbol encodings), |A| (other special applications), |OT| (standard +128-long text encodings) and |OM| (standard 128-long math encodings). + +Please do not use the above starting letters for non-portable +encodings. If new standard encodings emerge then we shall add them in +a later release of \LaTeX. + +Encoding schemes which are local to a site or a system should start +with |L|, experimental encodings intended for wide distribution will +start with |E|, whilst |U| is for Unknown or Unclassified encodings.. + +\item +Font family names should contain up to five lower case letters. +Where possible, these should conform to the \emph{Filenames for fonts} +font naming scheme. + +\item +Font series names should contain up to four lower case letters. + +\item +Font shapes should contain up to two letters lower case. + +\item +Names for symbol fonts are built from lower and upper case letters +with no restriction. +\end{itemize} + +Whenever possible, you should use the series and shape names suggested +in \emph{\LaTeXcomp} since this will make it easier to combine new +fonts with existing fonts. + +\NEWdescription{1994/12/01} + Where possible, text symbols should be named as |\text| followed by + the Adobe glyph name: for example |\textonequarter| or + |\textsterling|. Similarly, math symbols should be named as + |\math| followed by the glyph name, for example |\mathonequarter| + or |\mathsterling|. Commands which can be used in text or math can + then be defined using |\ifmmode|, for example: +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareRobustCommand{\pounds}{% + \ifmmode \mathsterling \else \textsterling \fi + } +\end{verbatim} + Note that commands defined in this way must be robust, in case they + get put into a section title or other moving argument. + +\section{If you need to know more \ldots} + +\NEWdescription{1996/06/01} +The |tracefnt| package provides for tracing the actions concerned with +loading, substituting and using fonts. +The package accepts the following options: +\begin{description} +\item[errorshow] Write all information about font changes, etc.\ but + only to the transcript file unless an error occurs. This means that + information about font substitution will not be shown on the + terminal. + +\item[warningshow] Show all font warnings on the terminal. This + setting corresponds to the default behaviour when this + \texttt{tracefnt} package is \emph{not} used! + +\item[infoshow] Show all font warnings and all font info messages + (that are normally only written to the transcript file) also on the + terminal. This is the default when this \texttt{tracefnt} package is + loaded. + +\item[debugshow] In addition to what is shown by \texttt{infoshow}, + show also changes of math fonts (as far as possible): beware, this + option can produce a large amount of output. + +\item[loading] Show the names of external font files when they are + loaded. This option shows only `newly loaded' fonts, not those + already preloaded in the format or the class file before this + \texttt{tracefnt} package becomes active. + +\item[pausing] + Turn all font warnings into errors so that \LaTeX{} will stop. +\end{description} + +\emph{Warning}: The actions of this package can change the layout of a +document and even, in rare cases, produce clearly wrong output, so +it should not be used in the final formatting of `real documents'. + +\begin{thebibliography}{1} + +\bibitem{A-W:GMS94} +Michel Goossens, Frank Mittelbach and Alexander Samarin. +\newblock {\em The {\LaTeX} Companion}. +\newblock Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1994. + +\bibitem{tub:DKn89} +Donald~E. Knuth. +\newblock Typesetting concrete mathematics. +\newblock {\em {TUG}boat}, 10(1):31--36, April 1989. + +\bibitem{A-W:LLa94} +Leslie Lamport. +\newblock {\em {\LaTeX:} A Document Preparation System}. +\newblock Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, second edition, 1994. + +\end{thebibliography} + +\end{document} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/grphcomp.err b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/grphcomp.err new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..0db15e4f807 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/grphcomp.err @@ -0,0 +1,1135 @@ +\newcommand\erratafiledate{2002/02/25} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% To produce a printed version of this errata file run this file through +% LaTeX. It will unpack a small class file (if not already present) and +% a configuration file with the extension .cfg. You might want to modify +% the setting in this configuration file to print only a partial errata +% suitable for your printed revision of this book, see details in the +% .cfg file. +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + + +\begin{filecontents}{errata.cls} +% Copyright (C) 1997, Frank Mittelbach + +\ProvidesClass{errata} + [1997/12/31 v0.6b Mini class for errata files subject to change (FMi)] + +\LoadClass{article} + +\setcounter{secnumdepth}{-1} +\addtolength\textwidth{5cm} +\addtolength\oddsidemargin{-3cm} + +\addtolength\textheight{36pt} + +\RequirePackage{shortvrb} +\MakeShortVerb{\|} + +\RequirePackage{array,longtable} +\RequirePackage{multicol} + + +\newcommand\erratagetnumber{} +\def\erratagetnumber#1/#2/#3\erratagetnumber{#1#2#3} + + +\newcommand\gobbleerrata{% + \setbox\@tempboxa\vbox\bgroup + \let\endgobble\egroup + \let\hideamp\relax + \let\\\relax\let\par\@@par} + +\newcommand*\hideamp{&} + +\let\endgobble\relax + + +\newcommand\erratastartdate{} +\newcommand\myprinting{} + + +\newcommand\doweprint[2]{% + \ifnum \myprinting < \if!#2!1000 \else#2 \fi + \ifnum \expandafter\erratagetnumber\erratastartdate\erratagetnumber < + \erratagetnumber#1\erratagetnumber \relax + \@tempswatrue + \else + \@tempswafalse + \fi + \else + \@tempswafalse + \fi +} + + + +\newcommand\includedentries{entries after = \erratastartdate} +\newcommand\printedentries{between \erratastartdate\space and} + +\newcommand\showallerrors{% + \renewcommand\includedentries{all errata entries}% + \renewcommand\printedentries{up to} + \renewcommand\doweprint[2]{\@tempswatrue}} + + +\newcommand\displayrevisionfix[2]{% + \if!#2!\textbf{#1}\else\textit{#1}\rlap{\textsuperscript{#2}}\fi} + +\newcommand\norevisionnumbers{% + \renewcommand\displayrevisionfix[2]{\textbf{##1}}} + +\IfFileExists{\jobname.cfg} + { + \input{\jobname.cfg} + \typeout{***************************************************} + \typeout{*} + \typeout{* Configuration file for \jobname.err found } + \typeout{*} + \typeout{* If you wish to generate an errata listing} + \typeout{* containing only errors found after a certain revision} + \typeout{* and/or only errors found after a certain date} + \typeout{* modify the information stored in \jobname.cfg} + \typeout{*} + \typeout{* Current settings are:} + \typeout{*} + \typeout{* \@spaces printing of your book = \myprinting} + \typeout{* \@spaces include \includedentries} + \typeout{*} + \typeout{***************************************************} + } + {} + +%% \erroronpage <page> <line info> <contributor> <date> <fixed in revision> + +\newcommand\erroronpage[5]{% + \endgobble + \doweprint{#4}{#5}% + \if@tempswa + \typeout{Typesetting entry #1 #2 #3 #4}% + \else + \typeout{Ignoring entry #1 #2 #3 #4}% + \expandafter\gobbleerrata + \fi + \hideamp \\% + \displayrevisionfix{#1}{#5} + \hideamp #2 \hideamp (\textsf{#3}) \hideamp +} + +\newcommand\CHAPTER[1]{\endgobble + &\\[4pt]% + \multicolumn{4}{l}{\framebox[10cm][l]{\textbf{\normalsize\strut#1}}} \\} + +\newenvironment{erratalist} + {\begin{longtable}{r>{\raggedright}p{2cm}l>{\raggedright}p{10cm}l}} + {\endgobble\end{longtable}} + +\newcommand\erratatitle[2] + {\begin{center}\LARGE\bfseries + Errata list for #1\\[5pt](\myprinting.\ printing)\\[10pt] + \large Includes all entries found \printedentries\space #2 + \end{center}% + \markright{Errata for #1 (\printedentries\space #2)}% + \thispagestyle{plain}% + \vspace{20pt}} + +\pagestyle{myheadings} + +\AtBeginDocument{\small} + +\setlength\parindent{0pt} +\setlength\parskip{2pt} + +\newcommand\contributor[2]{\makebox[1cm][l]{\sffamily#1} #2\par} + +% some special shortcuts overwriting existing commands: + +\let\u\underline +\renewcommand\>{$\to$} + +\end{filecontents} + + +\begin{filecontents}{\jobname.cfg} +% +% +% Configuration file for the errata listing of +% +% The LaTeX Graphics Companion +% +% +% \erratastartdate +% +% Specifies the date from which on +% errata entries should be listed. +% +% The format is YYYY/MM/DD. +% +% The default below ensures that all +% entries are typeset. +% +\renewcommand\erratastartdate{1997/03/01} + +% +% \myprinting +% +% Specifies which (revised) printing you +% own. For example, if you have the second +% printing set this to 2 so that errors +% already corrected in that printing will not +% appear in your errata listing. +% +% The default below ensures that all +% entries are typeset. +% +\renewcommand\myprinting{1} +% +% +% \norevisionnumbers +% +% Specifies that all page numbers in the errata are shown in the same +% format (bold face) irregardless of whether or not they are fixed +% in some revision. The default is to print corrected errors in +% italic and add the revision number as a superscript. +% +% +% \showallerrors +% +% With this command you tell the program that all errata entries are +% supposed to be generated. This makes \myprinting and +% \erratastartdate basically obsolete so this isn't turned on by +% default. +% +% +\endinput +\end{filecontents} + + + +\documentclass{errata} + + +\begin{document} + +\erratatitle{The \LaTeX{} Graphics Companion}{\erratafiledate} + + +\begin{verbatim} +@book(A-W:GMR97, + author = {Michel Goossens and Sebastian Rahtz and + Frank Mittelbach}, + title = {The {\LaTeX} Graphics Companion}, + substitle = {Illustrating Documents with {\TeX} and PostScript}, + series = "Tools and Techniques for Computer Typesetting", + publisher = {Addison-Wesley}, + address = {Reading, Massachusetts}, + year = 1997, + ISBN = "0-201-85469-4", + LCCN = "Z253.4.L38G663 1997", + pagenums = {xxv + 554}, + source-infos = {yes}, + bibliography = {yes}, + index = {yes}, + price = "US\$39.75", +) +\end{verbatim} + +\begin{list}{}{\setlength\leftmargin{0cm}\setlength\rightmargin{5cm}} +\item[] +The latest version of this file (\texttt{\jobname.err}) can be found +as part of the \LaTeX{} distribution. + +The first column in the table shows the page number of the errata +entry. Superscript numbers in the first column refer to the printed +revision in which this entry was corrected. The second column gives +the precise location, negative line numbers are counted from the +bottom of the page. The third column shows the first finder of the +problem. + +\end{list} + + +\begin{erratalist} + +%======================================================================= +\CHAPTER{General } + +\erroronpage{}{}{FMi}{1997/04/01}{} + We should give back references from plates to pages with the + original examples + +%======================================================================= +\CHAPTER{Front matter } + +\erroronpage{xxiii}{l.8}{FMi}{1997/04/01}{2} + that can't be the correct hyphenation, can it? unpara-lleled? + American english: un-par-al-leled + British english: un-pa-ral-lelled + +\erroronpage{}{}{FMi,SPQR}{1999/03/11}{} + Add the following information: + +In order to save space on the pages, and make the example +code look less cluttered, we do not print self-contained code. +This means that you can not simply type in what you read, and feed it +to \LaTeX, or the other programs. In particular, we omit: +\begin{quote} + |\documentclass...| (\LaTeX) \\ + |\begin{document}| and |\end{document}| (\LaTeX) \\ + |beginfig...| and |endfig| (Metapost) \\ + |input graph| (Metapost \S3.3.1) \\ + |input boxes| (Metapost \S3.3.2) +\end{quote} + +However, we do always show \LaTeX{} |\usepackage| declarations as it +is not always obvious which packages have to be loaded. + +If you have trouble reproducing one of the examples you should get +the example files from CTAN, which are all self-contained runnable +examples. + + +%======================================================================= +\CHAPTER{Chapter 1 } + +\erroronpage{4}{l.2 of bulleted item}{PMcJ}{1998/06/11}{} + in form \> in the form + +\erroronpage{4}{l.-7}{PMcJ}{1998/06/11}{} + surprisingly \> surprising + +\erroronpage{5}{last para, l.2}{VSc}{1997/06/12}{2} + Delete second "the" in: is perhaps the the most flexible one + +\erroronpage{18}{l.-7}{AMM}{1998/11/11}{} + to define an specialized \> to define a specialized + +\erroronpage{20}{top}{DGi}{1997/12/30}{} + PSTricks packages most of \> PSTricks packages offer most of + +\erroronpage{20}{l.16}{PMcJ}{1998/06/11}{} + Hewlett Package \> Hewlett-Packard + +\erroronpage{21}{fig. 1.19}{AMM}{1998/11/11}{} + The explanation of plot lines ('decade.*') are awfully positioned + over the plot (this is the default positioning, perhaps a different + set of data sould be selected). + +\erroronpage{22}{top}{DGi}{1997/12/30}{} + delete second `with' in ``with with the troff program.'' + +\erroronpage{22}{l.16}{PMcJ}{1998/06/13}{} + \texttt{.PE} statement \> a \texttt{.PE} command + +\erroronpage{25}{l.-10}{AMM}{1998/11/11}{} + AutoCAD for archaeologists \> AutoCAD for designers + (archaeologists are very very special users of AutoCAD, which is + much more popular among architects or engineers) + +%======================================================================= +\CHAPTER{Chapter 2 } + +\erroronpage{29}{l.-2}{NBe}{1997/07/11}{2} + add comma: TIFF\u{,} PCX + +\erroronpage{33}{keepaspectratio}{JOl}{1997/10/31}{} + Replace ``the values'' by ``the value''. + suggestion: Replace ``above for defaults'' by ``above for the default''. + +\erroronpage{39}{line 5}{DCa}{1997/06/18}{2} + orient key should be origin key (as shown on previous line;-) + +\erroronpage{39}{2.2.4, 2 para}{JUl}{2000/10/18}{} + Add the following sentence: + The syntax for specifying directories is system dependent but + Windows and Unix implementations allow the use of |/| as a + directory separator, i.e., the above example should work on both + platforms. + + +\erroronpage{41}{table 2.2}{DCa}{1997/06/18}{2} + All the entries in the `ext' and `read-file' columns + ought to start with a `.', e.g., .ps .eps ... + +\erroronpage{41}{middle}{DCa}{1997/06/24}{2} + Example should read: +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareGraphicsRule{.ps.gz}{eps}{.ps.bb}{`gunzip -c #1} +\end{verbatim} + +\erroronpage{43--44}{ex. 2-3-6 and 2-3-8}{DGi}{1997/12/30}{} + \verb|K\"oln| and \verb|Rh\^one| should be 8-bit markup + (the 7 bits syntax make TeX appear paleothic) + +\erroronpage{46}{fig 2.2}{JOl}{1997/10/31}{} + Replace ``centre'' by ``center'' to be consistent with the other two + ``center's'' in the figure. + +\erroronpage{49}{bottom}{FMi}{1997/04/01}{2} + The definition of |\Bpara| doesn't show everything, add in front + |\newcommand\Bpara[4]{%| + and a closing |}| after |\end{picture}| + +\erroronpage{51}{bottom}{FMi} {1997/04/01}{2} + Add a comment about \texttt{clockwise} and \texttt{counterclockwise} + options to define the direction of rotation. + +%======================================================================= +\CHAPTER{Chapter 3 } + +\erroronpage{55}{l.13}{FMi}{1997/04/01}{2} + Missing space before 0 + +\erroronpage{56}{l.2}{PMcJ}{1998/06/13}{} + a object \> an object + +\erroronpage{60}{l.8}{PMcJ}{1998/06/13}{} + an METAFONT \> a METAFONT + +\erroronpage{64}{l.6}{PMcJ,FMi}{1998/06/13}{} + is three real numbers between 0 and 1 for each read, green and blue, + \> \u{consists of} three real numbers between 0 and 1, + \u{corresponding to} red, green\u{,} and blue, + +\erroronpage{65}{bottom}{DGi}{1997/12/30}{} + delete second `the' in ``to apply the the bbox command'' + +\erroronpage{75}{ex.3-3-9}{FMi}{1997/04/01}{} + Why is the first peak rotated to the left? printing problem? + MP problem? or what? --- actually seems to be a data problem + +\erroronpage{93}{l.7}{NBe}{1997/07/11}{2} + Marek Ry{\'c}ko Jackowski (1995) \> + Marek Ry{\'c}ko (Jackowski 1995) + +\erroronpage{93}{l.12}{NBe}{1997/07/11}{2} + METAFONT code, , and \> + METAFONT code, \texttt{mftops.mf}, and + +\erroronpage{94}{l.7}{FMi}{1997/04/01}{2} + Second ref to Fig.~3.3 should reference Fig.~3.4 instead + +%======================================================================= +\CHAPTER{Chapter 4 } + +\erroronpage{97}{l.-15}{NBe}{1997/07/11}{2} + replace term ``curly brackets'' by ``braces'' (Commonwealth usage) + +\erroronpage{97}{l.-3}{NBe}{1997/07/11}{2} + replace term ``curly brackets'' by ``braces'' (Commonwealth usage) + +\erroronpage{99}{top}{DGi}{1997/12/30}{} + ``so that you can use polar coordinates \ldots'' + \> ``so that you can use several other powerful systems of coordinate + specification, such as polar coordinates \ldots'' + +\erroronpage{100}{ex. 4-2-5}{DGi}{1997/12/30}{} +\begin{verbatim}\psset{dimen=inner} + \psframe + (1,1)(4,4) +\end{verbatim} +would be better expressed as \verb|\psframe[dimen=inner](1,1)(4,4)| + +\erroronpage{100}{middle}{AMM}{1998/4/17}{} + Avoid line breaking after Chapter: ``\verb+Chapter~2+''. + +\erroronpage{100}{middle}{DGi}{1997/12/30}{} + ``we recommend that \LaTeX{} users stick with the color package'' +--- note that `color' is available with `plain' also. + +\erroronpage{100--101}{ex 4-3-1}{DGi}{1997/12/30}{} +The \verb|\psclip ... \endpsclip| +syntax is not coherent with the choice made for pspicture on page 97. +It should be \verb|\begin{psclip}| +\ldots \verb|\end{psclip}|, with a note + like ``The special \LaTeX{} environment (plain \TeX{} users must code + \verb|\Environment_name| ... \verb|\endEnvironment_name|)'' + +\erroronpage{101}{4}{DGi}{1997/12/30}{} +analagous \> analogous + +\erroronpage{102}{l.4}{UMu,FMi}{1997/07/18}{2} + Replace para by: + This places \textit{stuff} in the direction \textit{refangle} at a + distance of \textit{labelsep} from $(x,y)$. If \textit{labelsep} + is not specified the current value of |\labelsep| (defaults to 5pt + in standard \LaTeX) is used. Since angles are \ldots + +\erroronpage{104}{top}{DGi}{1997/12/30}{} +replace first `each' with `at' in ``print a dot each each of the'' + +\erroronpage{104}{ex.4-4-4 to 4-4-7}{FMi}{1997/04/01}{} + Missing refs to plates IIa-d + +\erroronpage{106}{Table 4.4}{DGi}{1997/12/30}{} + diamond and diamond* results are the wrong way around + (it was an old bug corrected by DGi March 18, 1997) + +\erroronpage{107}{ex.4-5-2}{PGu}{1999/01/28}{} + |\usepackage{pstricks}| \> |\usepackage{pstcol}| + +\erroronpage{110}{ex.4-5-13}{FMi}{1997/04/01}{2} + Missing |\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}| |\usepackage{ps-text}| + declaration on top of example + +\erroronpage{114--120}{ex.4-6-1 up to 4-6-23}{UMu}{1997/07/18}{2} + Change |\usepackage {pstricks}| to |\usepackage {pstricks,pst-node}| + +\erroronpage{115}{middle}{DGi}{1997/12/30}{} + ``describing the matrix and tree package' can be confusing as the reader + may believe that there is a `matrix' package---perhaps + ``describing the matrix environment and tree package'' + +\erroronpage{124}{ex.4-6-32}{FMi}{1997/04/01}{2} + Missing ref to plate VIb + +\erroronpage{125}{l.2}{TRa}{1997/04/28}{2} + replace: successive columns to overlap + +\erroronpage{128}{ex. 4-6-39}{DGi}{1997/12/30}{} +Avoid 7-bit coding, use 8-bit + +\erroronpage{133}{l.2}{RFa}{1997/04/14}{2} + Narrative says that the curves are $\sin(x)$, $\sin(x^2)$ and $\cos(x)$. + Code says |<x dup sin exch cos mul>|, which isn't $\sin(x^2)$, it's + $\sin(x)\cos(x)$ (aka $0.5 \sin(2x)$) + +\erroronpage{134}{bottom}{DGi}{1997/12/30}{} + ``(written in sh and awk, it is called pie-chart.sh and can be found in + the PSTricks distribution.)'' +Note that it will be soon be reissued as \> PstChart, written in Perl. + +\erroronpage{137}{ex.4-8-4}{FMi}{1997/04/01}{} + Missing ref to plate IVa + +\erroronpage{145}{l.-7}{DCa}{1997/09/01}{2} + pstpoly \> pst-poly + +\erroronpage{146}{l.2}{DCa}{1997/09/01}{2} + pstpoly \> pst-poly + +\erroronpage{146}{ex. 4-10-7}{DGi}{1997/12/30}{} + \verb|\PstRegularPolygon| \> \verb|\PstPolygon|, + \verb|\RPolyCurves| \> \verb|\PolyCurves|, + \verb|\RPolyIntermediatePoint| \> \verb|IntermediatePoint|, + \verb|\RPolyNbSides| \> \verb|\PolyNbSides|, and + \verb|\RPolyOffet| \> \verb|\PolyOffet|. (changes in package) + +\erroronpage{154}{top}{DGi}{1997/12/30}{} + pstVerb \> \verb|\pstVerb| + +\erroronpage{154}{l.-9}{NBe}{1997/07/11}{2} + fi you need \> + if you need + +\erroronpage{155}{bottom}{DGi}{1997/12/30}{} + delete \texttt{(x1,y1)} from end of psline entry + +\erroronpage{157}{top}{DGi}{1997/12/30}{} +For gradbegin and gradend, note defaults of +0.0 0.1 0.95 and 0 1 1 (rbg values); default of gradlines would be 300 not 500 + +\erroronpage{157}{top}{DGi}{1997/12/30}{} +add ``arrows==style'' + +\erroronpage{158}{bottom}{DGi}{1997/12/30}{} +arrowlength default is 1.4 + +\erroronpage{158}{bottom}{DGi}{1997/12/30}{} +arrowinset default is 0.4; +tbarsize default is 2pt 5; +bracketlength default is 0.15; +rbracketlength default is 0.15; +arrowscale default is 0.1. + +\erroronpage{159--160}{}{DGi}{1997/12/30}{} + \verb|{text}| is very restrictive. In fact it can be a lot of other things. + \verb|stuff| in the PSTricks manual was clearer. + +\erroronpage{159}{middle}{DGi}{1997/12/30}{} +\verb|\Rnode(x,y){name}{text}| \> +\verb|\Rnode*[settings]{name}{text}| +(the syntax had changed in 1994) + +\erroronpage{160}{middle}{DGi}{1997/12/30}{} +ncdiag \verb|`rrows| \> `arrows' + +\erroronpage{163}{middle}{DGi}{1997/12/30}{} +insert: +\begin{verbatim} +\pcangles*[settings]{arrows}(x1,y1)(x2,y2) +\pcdiagg*[settings]{arrows}(x1,y1)(x2,y2) +\end{verbatim} + +\erroronpage{164}{middle}{DGi}{1997/12/30}{} +default for edge is \verb|\ncline| + +\erroronpage{165}{top}{DGi}{1997/12/30}{} +treenodes \> treenodesize + + +\erroronpage{165}{bottom}{DGi}{1997/12/30}{} +psxlabel \> pshlabel (twice) + +\erroronpage{165}{bottom}{DGi}{1997/12/30}{} +psylabel \> psvlabel + +%======================================================================= +\CHAPTER{Chapter 5 } + +\erroronpage{170}{l.8}{NBe}{1997/07/11}{2} + substract \> + subtract + +\erroronpage{181}{exa 5-5-4}{NBe}{1997/07/11}{2} + The line from $L$ to $\Sigma^L$ in the upper left corner is too + long, and overlaps the first $L$. + +%\erroronpage{181}{exa 5-5-4}{EGu}{1997/08/10}{2} +% Top-left: The edge starts from coordinate (-1,-1) +% relative to L, instead of coordinate (?,1). +% Edges that go upward or leftward have arrows at +% their end, but not the edges that go downward +% or rightward. Is this purposely so? +% Bottom right: Dotted arrow touches the H + +\erroronpage{183}{exa 5-5-6}{EGu}{1997/08/10}{2} + The C / saved d[3] should be framed as well + +\erroronpage{188}{middle}{DGi}{1997/12/30}{} +assocated \> associated + +\erroronpage{202}{exa 3-3-33}{EGu}{1997/08/10}{2} + The labels can be better spaced within the + windows they get from the curves + +\erroronpage{203}{exa 3-3-34}{EGu}{1997/08/10}{2} + The labels can be better spaced within the + windows they get from the curves + +%======================================================================= +\CHAPTER{Chapter 6 } + +\erroronpage{206}{l.4}{UVi}{1997/12/16}{} + On the subject of typesetting rules for scientific texts, consider + adding a reference to Beccari (1997), TUGboat 18\#1, pp. 39--48, + which was published after the LGC, but should be a good reference + anyway. + +\erroronpage{206}{l.21}{PMcJ}{1998/06/11}{} + texts packages \> texts, packages + +\erroronpage{208}{l.-14}{NBe}{1997/07/11}{2} + set of macros are needed \> + set of macros is needed + +\erroronpage{244}{table}{UVi}{1997/12/16}{} + The voltmeter symbol looks the same as that of the current source + one line above, so you probably got the wrong symbol. + + +%======================================================================= +\CHAPTER{Chapter 7 } + +\erroronpage{254}{l.7}{BLu}{1998/01/15}{} + missing space between `MuTeX' and `to' + +\erroronpage{257}{}{AMi}{1997/05/06}{2} + The clefs on the left of the staves and a few other symbols like + |\allabreve| are positioned too high on the staves. How that could + have happened is beyond me---on my last printout before the actual + printing it is correct (FMi) + +\erroronpage{259}{l.12}{NBe}{1997/07/11}{2} + into an \texttt{music} \> + into a \texttt{music} + +\erroronpage{259}{-4}{JKr}{1998/08/26}{} + delete second ``with'' in ``with with + \texttt{\textbackslash r\ldots\ or \textbackslash l\ldots}'' + + +%======================================================================= +\CHAPTER{Chapter 8 } + +\erroronpage{278ff}{11}{MWa}{1998/03/26}{} + The chessfont used (chessf10) is not correct. The knight-character used +in the notation (not for the board) is supposed to look to the right, not +to the left. If one uses the font chess10f from the bdfchess-package and +renames it, that font is correct. + +\erroronpage{299}{l.-4}{JKr}{1998/08/31}{} + In the command description for |\whitepoint| and |\blackpoint| the position + and number of stones are reversed. Replace + \texttt{\{\textit{n}\}\{\textit{p}\}} with + \texttt{\{\textit{p}\}\{\textit{n}\}} twice. + +%======================================================================= +\CHAPTER{Color Plates } + +\erroronpage{Ic}{}{FMi}{1997/04/01}{2} + $\approx$ sign missing in print + +\erroronpage{IIb}{}{FMi}{1997/04/01}{2} + that plate doesn't correspond to original! + what kind of pink is this by the way? + +\erroronpage{IIc}{}{SPQR}{1997/04/01}{2} + the triangle has no fill + +\erroronpage{IIf}{}{FMi}{1997/04/01}{} + this plate does not correspond to any earlier example. seems + to be a combination of two examples in fact + +\erroronpage{IIIa}{}{SPQR}{1997/04/01}{2} + the circle has no fill + +\erroronpage{VIb}{}{FMi}{1997/04/01}{} + what kind of pink is that? + +\erroronpage{IX}{}{TJe}{1997/08/26}{} + "white" column, "Egypt" row: joie \> joy + +\erroronpage{XVII}{}{MGo}{1997/08/31}{} + the horizontal lines should be normal width (.4pt) + +\erroronpage{XXI}{}{SPQR}{1997/04/01}{2} + This is nonsense, all the pics are the same!! they are + supposed to show progressive CMYK printing --- somebody thinking + very hard during the printing process? + +%======================================================================= +\CHAPTER{Chapter 9 } + +\erroronpage{312}{9.1.1, para 1, l.3 bottom}{MGo}{1997/07/02}{2} + ``Isacc Newton'' should be ``Isaac Newton'' + +\erroronpage{312}{9.1.1, para 2, l.4}{BBe}{1997/08/01}{2} + Thomas Young, a\u{n} English doctor + +\erroronpage{313}{9.1.2, l.2}{JRi}{1998/04/28}{} + ``sub\u{s}tractive'' should be ``subtractive'' + +\erroronpage{313}{9.1.2, bullet 1, l.2}{MGo}{1997/07/02}{2} + ``output devide'' should be ``output device'' + +\erroronpage{313}{9.1.2, bullet 1, l.3}{BBe}{1997/08/01}{2} + \textbf{Y}ellow, \u{B}lac\u{\textbf{k}} + +\erroronpage{313}{9.1.2, bullet 1, l.4}{BBe}{1997/08/01}{2} + \textbf{B}rightness or \u{\textbf{V}}alue + +\erroronpage{313}{9.1.2, bullet 2, l.2}{BBe}{1997/08/01}{2} + colo\u{rm}etric + +\erroronpage{313}{l.-2}{MGo}{1997/07/02}{2} + ``phosphoros'' should be ``phosphorous'' + +\erroronpage{340}{fig}{NBe,FMi}{1997/07/11}{2} +The difference between these 3 pagestyle examples are nearly +invisible (plain has a number at the bottom and align has a page +number on the top-left corner and position marks on the three others. + +\erroronpage{341}{l.-9}{NBe}{1997/07/11}{2} + can contains \> + can contain + +%======================================================================= +\CHAPTER{Chapter 10 } + +%\erroronpage{354}{table}{UVi}{1997/12/16}{} +% Replace \textsf{lucbr} by \textsf{lucidabr} for latest PSNFSS? +% +% SPQR: not necessarily. they do different things. leave as is + +\erroronpage{355}{l.-5}{UVi}{1997/12/16}{} + Computer Modern, Euler Math, MathTime, and Lucida New Math. + \> Computer Modern, Concrete Math, Euler Math, MathTime, + and Lucida New Math. (See CTAN:fonts/concmath and + CTAN:macros/latex/contrib/supported/concmath) + +\erroronpage{355}{l.-2}{NBe}{1997/07/11}{2} + none of Computer Modern, Euler Math or Lucida work \> + none of Computer Modern, Euler Math\u{,} or Lucida work\u{s} + +\erroronpage{359}{l.18}{AMM}{1998/11/30}{} + package file times.sty [the same typeface should be used] + +\erroronpage{362}{l.15}{NBe}{1997/07/11}{2} + download \> + downloaded + +\erroronpage{362}{l.18}{NBe}{1997/07/11}{2} + organized up \> + organized + +\erroronpage{362}{l.-10}{NBe}{1997/07/11}{2} + (named \texttt{config.}\textit{Short Family Name} (e.g., \> + (named \texttt{config.}\textit{Short Family Name}, e.g., + +\erroronpage{362}{l.-10}{UVi}{1997/12/16}{} + Adobe Garamond's short name is \texttt{pag} \> \texttt{pgm} + (3 times) (\texttt{pag} is AvantGarde!) + +\erroronpage{362}{l.-3}{NBe}{1997/07/11}{2} + discusses of how \> + discusses how + +\erroronpage{366}{l.24}{NBe}{1997/07/11}{2} + 0.0777779 \> + 0.077779 + +\erroronpage{367}{l.14}{FMi}{1997/04/01}{2} + Add `might': \ldots\ if any of them is zero it might be omitted. + +\erroronpage{368}{l.21}{NBe}{1997/07/11}{2} + CHECKSUM \> + FONTCHECKSUM + +\erroronpage{382}{l.7}{FMi}{1997/04/01}{2} + ``V\ldots'' should be italic not bold + +\erroronpage{382}{l.-11}{BBe}{1997/08/01}{2} + an old distribution of \texttt{dvips}\u{).} + +\erroronpage{387}{l.17}{NBe}{1997/07/11}{2} + are left undefined are for use \> + are left undefined for use + +\erroronpage{392}{para 5, l.10}{DCa,FMi}{1997/06/24}{2} + Add \verb=|= twice: \verb!one one |=:|>> exclam ;! + +\erroronpage{395}{l.-4}{NBe}{1997/07/11}{2} + creates a \texttt{mtx} \> + creates an \texttt{mtx} + +\erroronpage{399}{l.-8}{DCa}{1997/06/30}{2} + Delete line as it is the same as code line nr 7. + +\erroronpage{400}{l.7}{DCa}{1997/06/30}{2} + Delete line as it is the same as code line nr 13. + +\erroronpage{401}{l.17}{FMi}{1997/04/01}{2} + line numbering should continue with 10 + +\erroronpage{403}{l.5}{FMi}{1997/04/01}{2} + line numbering should continue with 13 + +\erroronpage{405}{l.2}{UVi}{1997/12/16}{} + Is the overfull hbox in ``bold-face math italic'' intentional? + +\erroronpage{407}{l.8}{NBe}{1997/07/11}{2} + applies \> + apply + +\erroronpage{411}{table 10.8}{SPQR}{1998/05/15}{} + Fontname code for ``hairline'' should be ``a'' not ``h''. + +%======================================================================= +\CHAPTER{Chapter 11 } + +\erroronpage{426}{table}{UVi}{1997/12/16}{} + The closing brace in the example about inserting literal + PostScript is misplaced. It probably should be: + |\special{"newpath 0 0 moveto 100 100 lineto stroke}| + +\erroronpage{429}{l.2}{WaS}{2000/09/19}{} + Slanting was forgotten; the complete example should read: +\begin{verbatim} +mbbbo8r Bembo-Bold " .167 SlantFont TeXBase1Encoding ReEncodeFont " <8r.enc <mbbb8a.pfb +\end{verbatim} + Replace \texttt{mbbb8r} with \texttt{mbbbo8r} accordingly in line~4. + +\erroronpage{434}{11.3, l.5}{BDr}{1997/06/26}{2} + to-to-bottom \> top-to-bottom + +\erroronpage{442}{11.4, l.3}{BBe}{1997/08/01}{2} + a very few PostScript\u{ }Level 2 features + +\erroronpage{446}{l.-17}{NBe}{1997/07/11}{2} + to these. so that \> + to these, so that + +\erroronpage{446}{l.-14}{NBe}{1997/07/11}{2} + brackets \> + parentheses + +\erroronpage{448}{l.-4}{NBe}{1997/07/11}{2} + \verb=doc\%02d.tif= \> + \verb=doc%02d.tif= + +\erroronpage{450}{l.8}{PKa}{1997/09/15}{} + \verb=-sShingling= \> + \verb=-dShingling= + +\erroronpage{450}{sec. 11.4.4}{UVi}{1997/12/16}{} + Mention the existance of \textsf{gv} by Johannes Plass, a recent + development derived from \textsf{GhostView} by Tim Theissen? + +\erroronpage{452}{l.-2}{BBe}{1997/08/01}{2} + Use sans font throughout: \textsf{Adobe Illustrator 3} + +\erroronpage{454}{l.9}{AMM}{1998/12/09}{} + -Eextension \> -Eexpansion + +\erroronpage{461}{l.10}{NBe}{1997/07/11}{2} + preceed \> + precede + + +\erroronpage{462}{}{DSe}{1998/12/18}{} + +Daniel Sebald suggested to explain in some detail how to use xfig with +\LaTeX. (So far we haven't checked this method.) He wrote: + +The following is a description of how to use xfig to generate +quality postscript pictures then incorporate \LaTeX{} text. It +is a bit of a round-about method, but not too bad given the +flexibility and quality of output. Furthermore, because in +this method basically the only \LaTeX{} picture element used +is text (lines, etc. are PostScript) \LaTeX{} runs more efficiently +than if only \LaTeX{} picture elements are used. + +\erroronpage{462}{continued}{DSe}{1998/12/18}{} +1. Draw the picture in xfig and change the font types to + "LaTeX fonts". Use the xfig export feature that will + output the nice quality lines, circles, etc. to a PostScript + file and export the \LaTeX{} fonts and locations to a + separate \LaTeX{} file. The option is called "Combined PS/LaTeX + (both parts)". (Remember you must edit the font type + to be \LaTeX{} font.) The \LaTeX{} file includes the PostScript + file via the |\special| command. + + A neat little trick is to type math using the \LaTeX{} + syntax directly on the xfig figure, e.g., |$\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}$| + then select "special" under the special flag in the + text edit box so that xfig doesn't add extra backslashes to generate + such things as |\$|, |\_|, etc. Then when compiling in the next step + the result is nicely formatted math text. Granted, the text + doesn't look right in xfig, but with only a bit of guessing + and using |left/center/right| alignment properly this is + no big problem. + + Positioning can be done using the justification in the + text edit box to prevent extra white space appearing in + the final figure because xfig treats the whole text string + when computing figure borders. (If a long string of text + obstructs the figure in xfig the hidden flag can be selected + in the text edit box to hide the text string from the screen.) + +2. Create a simple file such as follows: +\begin{verbatim} + \documentclass{article} + \usepackage{epsfig} + \begin{document} + \pagestyle{empty} + \input{filename.pstex_t} + \end{document} +\end{verbatim} + + then compile it under \LaTeX{}. Now use dvips to turn this + into an encapsulated PostScript file. That is +\begin{verbatim} + > dvips filename -E -o filename.eps +\end{verbatim} + +\erroronpage{462}{continued}{DSe}{1998/12/18}{} + +3. In your final document simply treat the generated eps + file just as you would any eps file. There are \LaTeX{} + packages that allow scaling of such figures. Because + the text is now in the eps file it gets scaled accordingly. + + An alternate method instead of step 2 is simply to input + |filename.pstex_t| into the final \LaTeX{} document. This works + fine but the flexibility of scaling text may not exist. + +4. Use your imagination! xfig allows importing PostScript + documents. So you can bring in pictures generated by + other programs, e.g., Matlab, and add annotation with the + method described above. + + +%======================================================================= +\CHAPTER{Appendix A } + +\erroronpage{465}{l.-6}{NBe}{1997/07/11}{2} + this requires \ldots{} are given \> + this requires \ldots{} be given + + [Subjunctive, rather than indicative, is called for here, + because ``require'' is a condition.] + +%\erroronpage{471}{column 2, l.10}{BBe}{1997/08/01}{} +% \texttt{b3} (braggado) Braggadocio WHAT IS WRONG????? + +\erroronpage{471}{column 4, l.8}{PMcJ}{1998/06/11}{} + u:N\u{i}mbusMonL + +\erroronpage{472}{column 3, l.17}{BBe}{1997/08/01}{2} + u:N\u{i}mbusSanL + +\erroronpage{473}{column 4, l.21}{BBe}{1997/08/01}{2} + \texttt{rw} (rockwell) Rockwel\u{lS}late + +\erroronpage{475ff}{table heading}{BBe}{1997/08/01}{2} + Use uppercase: \u{ISO} Latin + +\erroronpage{480}{perthousand}{PGu}{2002/02/24}{} + Glyph for perthousand is a small 0 \> should be like 0/00 + + Actually, the glyph is a small 0 in in several fonts (the + perthousand is then generated internally as a ligature with \%) + +\erroronpage{482--487}{Table~A.4}{WaS}{2000/09/26}{} + Table~A.4 is lacking the entries for the slots 38 and 139, + and slot 89 is listed twice. + + 38 is ampersand throughout. + + 139 is Nacute, guilsinglleft, empty, empty, guilsinglleft, atilde, + perthousand in the encodings from left to right. + + The above errors have been added to second (corrected) printing and + are not present in the first printing. + +\erroronpage{482}{caption}{FMi}{1997/04/01}{2} + the characters ``Table A.4:'' are set in the wrong size (too small) + +\erroronpage{484}{l.-3,-4}{BBe}{1997/08/01}{2} + guilsingleft and guilsingright \> + guilsinglleft and guilsinglright + +\erroronpage{489}{l.8}{BBe}{1997/08/01}{2} + \ldots\verb=}{=\textit{de\u{p}th}\verb=}{=\ldots + +\erroronpage{491}{l.20}{BBe}{1997/08/01}{2} + you can use expressions such as \verb=\width{=\u{\textit{glyph}}\verb=}= + +%\erroronpage{491}{l.20}{FMi}{1997/08/01}{} +% add extra space in front of this line (and in similar places in +% that section) + +%======================================================================= +\CHAPTER{Appendix B } + +\erroronpage{498}{}{AOg}{1999/02/27}{} + Add \texttt{ctan.tug.org} to the list of CTAN sites (others may + need update as well + +\erroronpage{498}{l.10}{PMcJ}{1998/06/11}{} + it \> is + +\erroronpage{506}{l.-8}{SPQR}{1997/08/01}{2} + fonts/psfonts/adobe/garamond \> + \texttt{CTAN:fonts/psfonts/adobe/garamond} + +\erroronpage{506}{l.-11}{BBe}{1997/08/01}{2} + see\u{ }\texttt{http//www.adobe.com./prodindex/framemaker/main.html} + +\erroronpage{507}{l.17}{BBe}{1997/08/01}{2} + remove surplus \verb=%= + +\erroronpage{507}{l.17}{MGo}{1998/01/16}{} + The old URL is obsolete, a new one is + \texttt{http://www.imsisoft.com/hijaak/index.html} + +\erroronpage{507}{l.-3}{BBe}{1997/08/01}{2} + \texttt{CTAN\u{:f}onts/utils/mm} + +\erroronpage{508}{l.5}{BBe}{1997/08/01}{2} + \texttt{http:\u{//}www.mathworks.com} + +\erroronpage{508}{l.11}{BBe}{1997/08/01}{2} + \texttt{CTAN\u{:f}onts/utils/mm} + +%======================================================================= +\CHAPTER{Bibliography } + +\erroronpage{516}{l.12}{BBe}{1997/08/01}{2} + Do not use typewriter for ``seminar.sty'' or + use typewriter also with next item. + +%======================================================================= +\CHAPTER{Index } + +\erroronpage{523}{graphicx depth key}{PMcJ,FMi}{1998/06/13}{} + Spurious entry, depth is no keyword for graphicx package + +\erroronpage{529}{pspicture}{FMi}{1997/04/01}{2} + Add reference to p.48 + +\erroronpage{535}{Document classes}{FMi}{1998/04/31}{} + Document classes \> Document \u{C}lasses + +\erroronpage{543}{graphicx depth key}{FMi}{1998/06/21}{} + Spurious entry, depth is no keyword for graphicx package + +\erroronpage{546}{\texttt{\textbackslash heat}}{FMi}{1997/04/01}{2} + Typo: remove and add p.302 to |\heart| instead + +\end{erratalist} + + + +%========================================================================== + +\bigskip + + +\begin{multicols}{3}[Thanks to all who have found errors or + omissions. Listed are the people who found an errata entry first.] +\contributor{AMi}{Arno Mittelbach} +\contributor{AMM}{Alberto Maria Marchetti} +\contributor{AOg}{Arthur Ogawa} +\contributor{BBe}{Barbara Beeton} +\contributor{BDr}{Bernard Drapeau} +\contributor{BLu}{Ben Lukoschus} +\contributor{DCa}{David Carlisle} +\contributor{DGi}{Denis Girou} +\contributor{DSe}{Daniel Sebald} +\contributor{EGu}{Eitan Gurari} +\contributor{FMi}{Frank Mittelbach} +\contributor{JKr}{J\"urgen Kr\"amer} +\contributor{JOl}{Jeffrey D. Oldham} +\contributor{JRi}{Jonathan Rich} +\contributor{MGo}{Michel Goossens} +\contributor{MWa}{Michael Wanko} +\contributor{NBe}{Nelson H. F. Beebe} +\contributor{PGu}{Patrick Gundlach} +\contributor{PKa}{Peter Kabal} +\contributor{PMcJ}{Paul McJones} +\contributor{RFa}{Robin Fairbairns} +\contributor{SPQR}{Sebastian Rahtz} +\contributor{TJe}{Tarjei T. Jensen} +\contributor{TRa}{T.V. Raman} +\contributor{UMu}{Uwe M\"unch} +\contributor{UVi}{Ulrik Vieth} +\contributor{VSc}{Volker RW Schaa} +\contributor{WaS}{Walter Schmidt} +\contributor{JUl}{Julian Ullmann} +\end{multicols} + + +If you find further errors please report them to one of the authors +\begin{quote}\ttfamily + frank.mittelbach@latex-project.org\\ + sebastian.rahtz@oucs.ox.ac.uk\\ + goossens@cern.ch +\end{quote} +preferable in a form usable for this file, i.e., +\begin{flushleft} +|\erroronpage{|\textit{page-number}|}{|\textit{line-identification}|}{|% + \textit{your-initials}|}{|\textit{date}|}{}| \\ + \hspace*{2em}\textit{description of the the errata} +\end{flushleft} +Here is an example: +\begin{verbatim} +\erroronpage{4}{l.-7}{PMcJ}{1998/06/11}{} + surprisingly \> surprising +\end{verbatim} + + +\end{document} + diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/handbuch.err b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/handbuch.err new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..d0b7f2e2b68 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/handbuch.err @@ -0,0 +1,340 @@ +\newcommand\erratafiledate{1999/04/21} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% To produce a printed version of this errata file run this file through +% LaTeX. It will unpack a small class file (if not already present) and +% a configuration file with the extension .cfg. You might want to modify +% the setting in this configuration file to print only a partial errata +% suitable for your printed revision of this book, see details in the +% .cfg file. +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + + +\begin{filecontents}{errata.cls} +% Copyright (C) 1997, Frank Mittelbach + +\ProvidesClass{errata} + [1997/12/31 v0.6b Mini class for errata files subject to change (FMi)] + +\LoadClass{article} + +\setcounter{secnumdepth}{-1} +\addtolength\textwidth{5cm} +\addtolength\oddsidemargin{-3cm} + +\addtolength\textheight{36pt} + +\RequirePackage{shortvrb} +\MakeShortVerb{\|} + +\RequirePackage{array,longtable} +\RequirePackage{multicol} + + +\newcommand\erratagetnumber{} +\def\erratagetnumber#1/#2/#3\erratagetnumber{#1#2#3} + + +\newcommand\gobbleerrata{% + \setbox\@tempboxa\vbox\bgroup + \let\endgobble\egroup + \let\hideamp\relax + \let\\\relax\let\par\@@par} + +\newcommand*\hideamp{&} + +\let\endgobble\relax + + +\newcommand\erratastartdate{} +\newcommand\myprinting{} + + +\newcommand\doweprint[2]{% + \ifnum \myprinting < \if!#2!1000 \else#2 \fi + \ifnum \expandafter\erratagetnumber\erratastartdate\erratagetnumber < + \erratagetnumber#1\erratagetnumber \relax + \@tempswatrue + \else + \@tempswafalse + \fi + \else + \@tempswafalse + \fi +} + + + +\newcommand\includedentries{entries after = \erratastartdate} +\newcommand\printedentries{between \erratastartdate\space and} + +\newcommand\showallerrors{% + \renewcommand\includedentries{all errata entries}% + \renewcommand\printedentries{up to} + \renewcommand\doweprint[2]{\@tempswatrue}} + + +\newcommand\displayrevisionfix[2]{% + \if!#2!\textbf{#1}\else\textit{#1}\rlap{\textsuperscript{#2}}\fi} + +\newcommand\norevisionnumbers{% + \renewcommand\displayrevisionfix[2]{\textbf{##1}}} + +\IfFileExists{\jobname.cfg} + { + \input{\jobname.cfg} + \typeout{***************************************************} + \typeout{*} + \typeout{* Configuration file for \jobname.err found } + \typeout{*} + \typeout{* If you wish to generate an errata listing} + \typeout{* containing only errors found after a certain revision} + \typeout{* and/or only errors found after a certain date} + \typeout{* modify the information stored in \jobname.cfg} + \typeout{*} + \typeout{* Current settings are:} + \typeout{*} + \typeout{* \@spaces printing of your book = \myprinting} + \typeout{* \@spaces include \includedentries} + \typeout{*} + \typeout{***************************************************} + } + {} + +%% \erroronpage <page> <line info> <contributor> <date> <fixed in revision> + +\newcommand\erroronpage[5]{% + \endgobble + \doweprint{#4}{#5}% + \if@tempswa + \typeout{Typesetting entry #1 #2 #3 #4}% + \else + \typeout{Ignoring entry #1 #2 #3 #4}% + \expandafter\gobbleerrata + \fi + \hideamp \\% + \displayrevisionfix{#1}{#5} + \hideamp #2 \hideamp (\textsf{#3}) \hideamp +} + +\newcommand\CHAPTER[1]{\endgobble + &\\[4pt]% + \multicolumn{4}{l}{\framebox[10cm][l]{\textbf{\normalsize\strut#1}}} \\} + +\newenvironment{erratalist} + {\begin{longtable}{r>{\raggedright}p{2cm}l>{\raggedright}p{10cm}l}} + {\endgobble\end{longtable}} + +\newcommand\erratatitle[2] + {\begin{center}\LARGE\bfseries + Errata list for #1\\[5pt](\myprinting.\ printing)\\[10pt] + \large Includes all entries found \printedentries\space #2 + \end{center}% + \markright{Errata for #1 (\printedentries\space #2)}% + \thispagestyle{plain}% + \vspace{20pt}} + +\pagestyle{myheadings} + +\AtBeginDocument{\small} + +\setlength\parindent{0pt} +\setlength\parskip{2pt} + +\newcommand\contributor[2]{\makebox[1cm][l]{\sffamily#1} #2\par} + +% some special shortcuts overwriting existing commands: + +\let\u\underline +\renewcommand\>{$\to$} + +\end{filecontents} + + +\begin{filecontents}{\jobname.cfg} +% +% +% Configuration file for the errata listing of +% +% Das LaTeX-Handbuch +% +% +% \erratastartdate +% +% Specifies the date from which on errata entries should be listed. +% +% The format is YYYY/MM/DD. +% +% The default below ensures that all entries are typeset. +% + +\renewcommand\erratastartdate{1995/05/16} + + +% +% \myprinting +% +% Specifies which (revised) printing you own. Currently there is +% only the first printing. +% +% + +\renewcommand\myprinting{1} + +% +% \norevisionnumbers +% +% Specifies that all page numbers in the errata are shown in the same +% format (bold face) irregardless of whether or not they are fixed +% in some revision. The default is to print corrected errors in +% italic and add the revision number as a superscript. Since the +% Handbuch no revision we turn this feature off. + +\norevisionnumbers + +% +% \showallerrors +% +% With this command you tell the program that all errata entries are +% supposed to be generated. This makes \myprinting and +% \erratastartdate basically obsolete so this isn't turned on by +% default. +% +% +\endinput +\end{filecontents} + +\providecommand{\BibTeX}{% + B\kern-.05em{\scshape i\kern-.025emb}\kern-.08em\TeX} +\providecommand{\MakeIndex}{\textit{MakeIndex}} + +\documentclass[german]{errata} + +\usepackage{german} + +\begin{document} + +\erratatitle{Das \LaTeX-Handbuch}{\erratafiledate} + + +\begin{verbatim} +@book(A-W:Lamport95, + author = "Leslie Lamport", + title = "Das \LaTeX-Handbuch", + publisher = Addison-Wesley, + address = Bonn: Paris; Reading, Mass., + year = 1995, + pagenums = {325 + 20}, + bibliography = {yes}, + index = {yes}, + isbn = {3-89319-826-1} + } +) +\end{verbatim} + + +\begin{list}{}{\setlength\leftmargin{0cm}\setlength\rightmargin{5cm}} +\item[] +Die jeweils letzte Version dieser Datei (\texttt{\jobname.err}) ist Teil der +\LaTeX{} distribution. + +Die erste Spalte der Tabelle enth"alt die Seitenzahl des Fehlereintrags. +Die zweite Spalte gibt den genauen Ort an; negative Zeilennummern sind vom +Seitenende gerechnet. +In der dritten Spalte steht der Entdecker des Fehlers. +\end{list} + +\begin{erratalist} + +\CHAPTER{Zur deutschen Ausgabe} + +\erroronpage{xix}{letzte Zeile}{MSc}{1995/12/25}{} + seinen Schiedsspr"uchen \> seine Schiedsspr"uche + +\CHAPTER{Darf ich vorstellen} + +\erroronpage{7}{Zitat}{ILe}{1999/04/21}{} + Das Zitat Kroneckers lautet korrekt: + \begin{quote} + Die ganzen Zahlen hat der liebe Gott gemacht,\\ + alles andere ist Menschenwerk. + \end{quote} + Im darauf"|folgenden Absatz mu"s das Zitat "`Gott schuf\dots"' durch + "`Die ganzen Zahlen\dots"' ersetzt werden. + +\CHAPTER{Im Anfang war die Tat} + +\CHAPTER{Zu neuen Ufern} + +\erroronpage{66}{zweites Beispiel, rechte Spalte, 2. Zeile}{ILe}{1999/03/29}{} +|\texit| \> |\textit| + +\CHAPTER{Auf den Weg gebracht} + +\CHAPTER{W"ahlt mir eine Klasse} + +\CHAPTER{Formvollendet} + +\CHAPTER{Ins Bild gesetzt} + +\CHAPTER{Auf den Weg gebracht} + +\CHAPTER{Per aspera ad astra} + +\CHAPTER{\MakeIndex} + +\CHAPTER{\BibTeX} + +\CHAPTER{Referenz} + +\erroronpage{252}{erste Zeile}{MSc}{1995/12/25}{} + |\sbox{|\emph{text}|}| \> |\sbox{|\emph{bf"|l\/}|}{|\emph{text}|}| + +\CHAPTER{Deutsch \&{} andere Mysterien} + +\erroronpage{272}{letzter Absatz, erste Zeile}{RSt}{1995/06/01}{} + werden diese \> wird dieses + +\erroronpage{275}{zweiter Punkt, erste Zeile}{JSk}{1995/06/01}{} + Wor-tabk"urzungen \> Wort-abk"urzungen + +\erroronpage{277}{letzte Zeile}{MSc}{1995/12/25}{} + Streiche "`Norm"' + +\CHAPTER{Index} + +\erroronpage{305}{Kronecker, Leopold}{MSc}{1999/04/21}{} + Verweis auf Seite 7 einf"ugen. + +\end{erratalist} + + +\begin{multicols}{3}[Dank an alle, die Fehler oder Auslassungen + gefunden haben. Aufgef"uhrt sind die Entdecker der Fehler.] +\contributor{ILe}{Ingo Lepper} +\contributor{JSk}{Jochen Skupin} +\contributor{MSc}{Martin Schr"oder} +\contributor{RSt}{Rebecca Stiels} +\end{multicols} + +Viele andere haben mir Korrekturen f"ur schon bekannte Fehler +geschickt. Vielen Dank an euch alle! + +Wenn Sie noch mehr Fehler finden, schicken Sie bitte eine Notiz an +\begin{quote}\ttfamily + martin.schroeder@acm.org +\end{quote} +am besten in einer Form, die in diese Datei eingebaut werden kann, +d.\,h. +\begin{flushleft} +|\erroronpage{|\textit{Seitenzahl-Nummer}|}{|\textit{Zeile-Position}|}{|% + \textit{Ihr-K"urzel}|}{|\textit{Datum}|}{}| \\ + \hspace*{2em}\textit{Beschreibung des Druckfehlers} +\end{flushleft} +Ein Beispiel: +\begin{verbatim} +\erroronpage{xix}{letzte Zeile}{MSc}{1995/12/25}{} + seinen Schiedsspr"uchen \> seine Schiedsspr"uche +\end{verbatim} + +\end{document} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/install.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/install.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..578f7159605 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/install.txt @@ -0,0 +1,534 @@ + LaTeX Installation Guide + + 2003/12/01 + +SUMMARY +======= + +This file contains the installation instructions for the latest +version of the LaTeX document preparation system. + +The rest of this document describes: + + * How to find out about installing LaTeX for your version of TeX. + + * How the installation works. + + * What to do if anything goes wrong. + +TeX experts who want to know more about how the LaTeX installation +works and how it can be customized should read texpert.txt. + + +DOCUMENTATION +============= + +Brief introductions to various aspects of the new LaTeX release can be +found in the distributed files with names <xxx>guide.tex. You will +need to install the new version before you can typeset these files. + +A full description of the new LaTeX release (and of more than 100 +packages that can be used with LaTeX) can be found in: + + * The LaTeX Companion, Goossens, Mittelbach and Samarin, + Addison-Wesley, ISBN 0-201-54199-8. + +The new release is also described in the second edition of: + + * LaTeX A Document Preparation System, Leslie Lamport, + Addison-Wesley, ISBN 0-201-52983-1 + +Also possibly of interest (describing package and programs related to +graphical applications, Postscript font usage, etc.): + + * The LaTeX Graphics Companion, Goossens, Rathz and Mittelbach, + Addison-Wesley ISBN 0-201-85469-4. + + +REQUIREMENTS +============ + +In addition to the LaTeX distribution files, you will also need the +following: + + * a TeX system, including iniTeX (see `Your Version of TeX', below); + + * the file `hyphen.tex', or some other hyphenation files (see `Creating + the LaTeX Format', below); + + * the font files (normally .tfm files) for the Computer Modern fonts, + including some non-standard ones (see `Fonts needed', below); + + * about 6.5MB of spare disk space for use during the installation. + + +YOUR VERSION OF TEX +=================== + +LaTeX is based upon Donald Knuth's TeX typesetting system. This is +available for almost every make of computer, from microcomputers +through workstations to large main-frames. + +Further details about how to install LaTeX for your version of TeX may +be available in a file called <system>.txt. At present the following +such files exist (at least): + + * amiweb2c.txt for Amiga web2c TeX on the Amiga. + + * cstex.txt for CS-TeX on the Atari. + + * decustex.txt for TeX from DECUS on VAX/VMS. + + * directex.txt for DirectTeX on the Macintosh. + + * emtex.txt for emTeX on IBM PC compatibles. + + * emtextds.txt for Schmidt's emTeX/TDS for OS/2. + + * lindner.txt for Lindner's TeX on the Atari. + + * microtex.txt for MicroTeX (uTeX) on IBM PC compatibles. + + * multitex.txt for MultiTeX on the Atari. + + * oztex.txt for OzTeX on the Macintosh. + + * pastex.txt for PasTeX on the Amiga. + + * pctex.txt for PCTeX on IBM PC compatibles. + + * textures.txt for Textures on the Macintosh. + + * truetex.txt for TrueTeX for Windows 95/98/NT. + + * vtex.txt for MicroPress's VTeX. + + * vtexfree.txt for MicroPress's VTeX/Free for Linux-x86 (VTeX/Lnx) + and OS/2 (VTeX/2). + + * web2ctex.txt for web2c TeX on Unix platforms. + + * yandytex.txt for Y&YTeX on IBM PC compatibles. + +You should finish reading this file before reading the <system>.txt +file for your version. If there is no such file then this file alone is +your installation guide. + +If you have bought a commercial version of TeX/LaTeX and there is no +file for your system then you could ask the company which sells your +version of TeX to supply one. + +Note to TeX implementors/suppliers: +---------------------------------- +If you can supply us with a <system>.txt file for your implementation +we shall be very grateful and we shall add it to our distribution. + + + +HOW THE INSTALLATION WORKS +========================== + +The LaTeX installation is in five stages: + + * Saving any old version of LaTeX. + + * Unpacking the distribution (this may not be necessary). + + * Creating the LaTeX format. + + * Putting the files where LaTeX can read them. + + * Checking the installation. + + +SAVING YOUR OLD VERSION OF LaTeX +================================ + +If you are currently using the old LaTeX version, 2.09, you may wish +to save it before installing the new version of LaTeX. + +If it exists, the <system>.txt file will describe in detail how to do +this; in some of these files, the new version is referred to as +LaTeX2e in order to clearly distinguish it from the old version. + +The details of how to do everything in this section will depend to a +very large extent on your TeX implementation. + +First you should find the LaTeX format file on your system +(usually called `latex.fmt' or `lplain.fmt') and rename it to +`latex209.fmt'. + +You should then save a copy of the current LaTeX system files. These +may be kept in a TeX inputs directory or folder, which is usually +called something like one of these: + + tex\texinput tex/inputs TeX-inputs + +or they may be kept in a separate LaTeX inputs location, possibly a +subdirectory or subfolder of the TeX inputs location, called `latex'. + +There are thus two possibilities, depending on whether the LaTeX +inputs have been kept separate from the other TeX inputs or not. + + * If the LaTeX inputs are separated from the other TeX inputs, then + you should make a new directory that is a copy of the whole of the + LaTeX inputs directory, and call it `latex209'. + + * If the LaTeX inputs are kept with the other TeX inputs, then you + should create a new directory called `latex209' and then copy to it + any file ending with .sty from the LaTeX inputs directory. + +It may be possible to run both the new LaTeX and LaTeX 2.09 in +parallel. To do this, you should create a `latex209' command, +or menu entry, that is similar to `latex' except that: + + * The `latex209' format is used rather than `latex'. + + * The `latex209' directory is searched before the LaTeX inputs + directory. + +The details of how to do this vary according to your system so you +may find more information in a <system>.txt file. + + +BEFORE UNPACKING THE DISTRIBUTION +================================= + +Latex needs a number of files to run, for example `article.cls' +contains the `article' document class. However, these files are NOT +themselves the source files produced by the LaTeX3 Project Team. We +write documented sources in `docstrip archive files' which can be +unpacked to produce the files that LaTeX needs. For example, +classes.dtx contains the documented sources for all the LaTeX +document classes, including article.cls. + +The FIRST thing to do is to check whether you need to unpack these +archive files, as follows. + +Before reading any further, you should check to see whether the LaTeX +distribution you have contains the unpacked files. You can do this by +looking to see if you have got the file latex.ltx. If you do, then +you should have all the unpacked files and so you can move on to the +section entitled `Creating the LaTeX format'. + +The unpacking will create and write files only into the current +directory (or current folder, or default directory). This helps to +prevent it overwriting existing files or causing problems with your +system files. It is therefore sensible to carry out the installation +in a directory reserved for this purpose; on a multi-user system you +should ensure that you have read and write permissions for files in +this directory. + + +UNPACKING THE DISTRIBUTION +========================== + +The archive files are unpacked by running iniTeX on the file +unpack.ins. + +NOTE: On relatively slow computers, this unpacking can take a long +time. + +NOTE: Using LaTeX with old DC Fonts. +------------------------------------ + +By default LaTeX uses the `ec' font collection for its T1 (Cork) encoded +fonts. + +If you are using the pre-release versions of the ec fonts known as `dc' +then you could update your fonts to ec, or unpack suitable fd files +for the dc fonts at this point. + +For versions of the dc fonts older than release 1.2 (issued +during 1995) then at this point you should unpack the fd files for +the old dc fonts by running plain TeX or LaTeX on the file +olddc.ins + +For release 1.3 of the dc fonts you should unpack fd files by running +plain TeX or LaTeX on the file newdc.ins + +You need to do this even if you have obtained the `unpacked' +distribution and so have not processed the unpack.ins file described +above. + +If this is your first installation, so you do not yet have a format, +or if you are unsure of which release of the T1 encoded fonts you +have, ignore this step and build the LaTeX format as described below. +This will build a format using the current ec font names. +The test document ltxcheck.tex will report any problems with the ec +or dc fonts and report whether you need to unpack either +olddc.ins or newdc.ins. + + +CREATING THE LATEX FORMAT +========================= + +To create the LaTeX format, you should run iniTeX on the file +`latex.ltx'. + +A hyphenation file such as `hyphen.tex' is read by this run so it +should be accessible by iniTeX. It also needs to be able to read the +`.tfm' font files for the basic fonts. These font files and +hyphenation file(s) should be part of your TeX system. + +You should save the resulting format file `latex.fmt' in the TeX +formats directory. You may also have to create and/or install a +program called `latex', a `LaTeX' option to your TeX implementation, +or a batch file or shell script. The details of this stage will +depend on your TeX implementation; note that the name of the format +file differs from that normally used in LaTeX 2.09. + +Note: TeX experts may wish to customize LaTeX (for example, to allow +non-American hyphenation). They should read cfgguide.tex to find out +how to do this. + +If you are still using a very old version of TeX (pre 1990) then you +must now read tex2.txt. + +Note that the experimental variant of LaTeX described in autoload.txt +is no longer supported. + + +PUTTING THE FILES WHERE LaTeX CAN READ THEM +=========================================== + +The next step in the installation of LaTeX is to move the files needed +to run the system into the correct directories (or folders). +These are: + + * the directory containing the format files. + + * the LaTeX inputs directory, which contains LaTeX system files. + + * the MakeIndex inputs directory, which contains MakeIndex files. + +You should move to the formats directory: + + * latex.fmt. + +You should move to the LaTeX input directory the files: + + * latexbug.tex, testpage.tex, lablst.tex, idx.tex, nfssfont.tex + small2e.tex, sample2e.tex and docstrip.tex. + +and any files whose name ends with: + + * .cls, document class files. + + * .clo, document class options files. + + * .sty, package files. + + * .fd, font definition files. + + * .def, files of definitions which may be read by LaTeX while + processing documents. + + * .cfg, TeX expert configuration files. + +You should move to the MakeIndex input directory all files +whose name ends with: + + * .ist, MakeIndex style files. + +You have now installed LaTeX! + + +GETTING A WORKING LaTeX +======================= + +You may now need to set up your system to use the new version of +LaTeX; e.g. by configuring the environment, adding menu items, writing +batch files or shell scripts. Details may be found in a <system>.txt +file for your system. + + +CHECKING THAT THE INSTALLATION WORKED +===================================== + +To make sure that the installation has worked, you should run the new +LaTeX on the document `ltxcheck.tex'. + +How this is done varies according to your system; you may find the +necessary detailed instructions in a <system>.txt file. + +This will produce a number of messages, each of which should be `OK'. +If any of them are `BAD', then read the `PROBLEMS' section below. + +If all the messages are `OK' then you are finished! + +Fonts needed +------------ + +One thing that is checked by running ltxcheck.tex is the existence of +certain fonts on your system. + +The new LaTeX format assumes that you have on your system more font +files from the Computer Modern families than did previous versions. + +It is not essential to get all these fonts immediately but, if you do +not have the .tfm files for some of them then you will get several +error messages when you try to typeset any of the documentation files, +such as `usrguide.tex'. + +Here are some examples: + + ! Font OML/cmm/b/it/8=cmmib8 at 8.0pt not loadable: + Metric (TFM) file not found + + ! Font OMS/cmsy/b/n/8=cmbsy8 at 8.0pt not loadable: + Metric (TFM) file not found + +You can, in fact, ignore all these messages (however awful they may +sound) as far as typesetting the file is concerned: the results, +whilst not perfect, will be little different to what was intended. + +However, you should install these fonts as soon as possible (they are +in the sub-directory `fonts/tfm' of the LaTeX directory on CTAN). +They are: + + cmmib5 cmmib6 cmmib7 cmmib8 cmmib9 + cmbsy5 cmbsy6 cmbsy7 cmbsy8 cmbsy9 + + +PROBLEMS +======== + +On most systems the installation should proceed smoothly. However, you +may get some errors. + + +`texsys.cfg': While running iniTeX on latex.ltx you may get an error + message that reports a problem with texsys.cfg. + + If this happens then you have obtained (or produced) a texsys.cfg + file that is not suitable for your system. + + First, if it exists read the <system>.txt file. This may tell you + how to customize the file texsys.cfg. + + If the <system>.txt file does not mention texsys.cfg then you should + not need a texsys.cfg file. Try deleting texsys.cfg and building the + LaTeX format again. + + If you still get errors, try using LaTeX to typeset ltdirchk.dtx and + then read this document. + + The details of how to do this vary according to your system so you +may find more details in a <system>.txt file. + + +`File missing': Some of the files from the LaTeX distribution are + missing. There are a number of possible reasons for this: + + * The files really are missing. + You should get the missing files from the same place you got the + rest of the distribution. If you cannot do this then you should + complain to whoever gave you this distribution. + + * The files are present, but in the wrong directory. + You should move the files to a directory that iniTeX can read. + + * The files are present, and in the right directory. + Your iniTeX may have been set up incorrectly. You may be able to + correct this, depending on your TeX implementation. See the + documentation of your TeX implementation for more details. + + +`Font missing': Some of the fonts (.tfm files) required by LaTeX are + missing. As above, either you have not got the required files, or + iniTeX is not able to find them. So you may need to move them or to + configure iniTeX to look in the correct places. See the + documentation of your TeX implementation for more details. + + +`Out of memory': On TeX implementations with small memory, you may + exhaust iniTeX's memory whilst installing LaTeX. + + You may be able to correct this: + + * Some TeX implementations allow the amount of memory allocated + to TeX to be increased. See the documentation of your TeX + implementation for more details. + + * Some iniTeX implementations allow more memory than others; so + you may be able to run iniTeX on a larger machine and then move + the files across to the smaller machine. + + * If the error happens during the unpacking of the distribution + (i.e. when you run iniTeX on unpack.ins) then try running this + file with normal TeX, for example plain TeX or an old version + of LaTeX. + + +If you have any problems installing LaTeX, you should: + + * read the <system>.txt file, if one exists; + + * if this does not help, ask your local TeX guru; + + * if this fails, try asking a local TeX mailing list; + + * if this fails, run iniTeX on the file latexbug.tex, fill in the + resulting bug report form, and send it to the address given in that + file. + + +CLEARING UP +=========== + +You may now be wondering what to do with all the remaining files +that are not needed to run LaTeX. This is, of course, a matter of +personal taste and availability of disk space but here is some +guidance. + + * The files with extension .dtx, together with source2e.tex, + can be used to typeset the documented source code (see texpert.txt + for further information). + + * The files with extension .fdd contain the documented sources for + the font definition files. + + * The files ltnews<xx>.tex and ltnews<xx>.ps both contain the latest + LaTeX newsletter. + + * The file ltx3info.tex contains information about the LaTeX3 project + and how you can support it. + + * The files with extension .txt contain information about (amongst + other things) copyright, installation, patches and bug-reports; and + those with extension .err contain errata lists for various + publications: see 00readme.txt for further details. + + * The files with names of the form <xxx>guide.tex contain reference + information covering only those features new to this version of + LaTeX: they are not intended to be either a user guide or a + complete reference for the system. + + * The files with extension .ltx, together with ltxcheck.tex, are + used to create and test the format; therefore you should keep these + if you expect to remake the format before getting the next full + distribution. + + * The files with extension .ins are used to unpack the code from the + .dtx and .fdd files. + + * We recommend that you keep, in the formats directory, the + transcript file that was produced whilst creating the format; + this file is called latex.log or latex.lis. + + +FINALLY +======= + +Once you have installed LaTeX for your TeX implementation, you might +like to write a <system>.txt file explaining how you did it. If you +want to do this, you should edit the file template.txt. + +If you would like your <system>.txt file to be included with the LaTeX +distribution, please mail it to the project at the address given in +the file bugs.txt and latexbug.tex. + + +--- Copyright 1994, 1995, 1996 + The LaTeX3 Project. All rights reserved --- diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/latexbug.el b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/latexbug.el new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..492f0d18f67 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/latexbug.el @@ -0,0 +1,502 @@ +;;; latexbug.el +;;; +;;; Version 0: `test of concept' +;;; Don't look to closely at my lisp coding style... +;;; +;;; David Carlisle +;;; Version 0.1 1994/11/23 +;;; Version 0.2 1994/12/12 +;;; Version 0.3 1995/03/17 +;;; Version 0.4 1995/09/21 +;;; Version 0.5 1995/10/17 +;;; Version 0.6 1997/07/16 +;;; Version 0.7 1997/12/17 +;;; Version 0.8 1999/01/07 +;;; +;;; +;;; LOADING +;;;;;;;;;;; +;;; +;;; To use this code, place the file in a directory searched by lisp +;;; Add +;;; +;;; (autoload 'report-latex-bug "latexbug" +;;; "LaTeX bug report generator" t) +;;; +;;; to your .emacs file (without the ;;;). +;;; +;;; Then if the impossible happens and you discover a bug in LaTeX, +;;; or wish to suggest a change to LaTeX, type +;;; M-x report-latex-bug +;;; +;;; and follow the instructions. +;;; +;;; A file latexbug.cfg can be used to customise +;;; latexbug.tex as described in the comments in latexbug.tex. +;;; or you can customise in your .emacs, as shown below. +;;; +;;; CUSTOMISATION +;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;; +;;; +;;; The following variables may be set in your .emacs to customise this +;;; file. +;;; +;;; (setq ltxbug-name "David Carlisle") ; your name +;;; (setq ltxbug-address "dpc@,,,") ; your email address +;;; If these two are not set here, or in the latexbug.cfg +;;; file. emacs will prompt for the values. The prompt +;;; will suggest default values based on standard emacs variables +;;; user-full-name and user-mail-address. +;;; +;;; (setq ltxbug-mail-headers "...") ; additional mail headers. +;;; For example (setq ltxbug-mail-headers "FCC: ~/Mail/sent") +;;; To log outgoing mail in a `sent' file. +;;; +;;; (setq ltxbug-latex-command "...") ; latex command +;;; Set this if LaTeX is not called latex, eg it may be latex2e. +;;; +;;; +;;; Perhaps I should have based this on gnat's send-pr.el but it seemed +;;; easier to write it from scratch to work in latexbug.tex at the +;;; required points. +;;; +;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;; + +(require 'sendmail) + +(defvar ltxbug-latex-command "latex" + "Command name for Standard LaTeX (LaTeX2e)") + +(defvar ltxbug-directory nil +"Directory in which to run LaTeX, should end with slash. +Default, nil, means inherit directory from current buffer.") + +(defvar user-full-name nil); just needed on ancient emacs +(defvar ltxbug-name nil +"Your name. +If this is nil, will be prompted if not set in latexbug.cfg.") + +(defvar user-mail-address nil); just needed on ancient emacs +(defvar ltxbug-address nil +"Your email-address. +If this is nil, will be prompted if not set in latexbug.cfg.") + +(defvar ltxbug-mail-headers "" +"Extra mail headers that will be added to the mail message. +This is in addition to `To' and `Subject'.") + +;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;; + +(defvar ltxbug-categories +'(("latex") ("tools") ("graphics") + ("mfnfss") ("psnfss") ("amslatex") ("babel") ("expl3") ("cyrillic")) +"Valid GNATS categories") + + +(defun report-latex-bug () +"LaTeX bug report generator" + (interactive) +;; +;; Locally turn off transient mark mode. + (let ((transient-mark-mode nil) + (current-default-directory default-directory)) +;; +;; First produce one large window for the main message +;; and a smaller help window below. + (delete-other-windows) +;; (setq ltxbug-msg (switch-to-buffer "*latex-bugs*")); not emacs18 + (switch-to-buffer + (setq ltxbug-msg (get-buffer-create "*latex-bugs*"))) + (erase-buffer) + (setq default-directory + (or ltxbug-directory current-default-directory)) + (setq major-mode 'ltxbug) + (setq mode-name "LaTeX Bug Report") + (use-local-map ltxbug-map) + (message "Running latex on latexbug.tex ....") + (split-window-vertically +;; -13 ;; old emacs's can't do this + (- (window-height) 13)) + (switch-to-buffer-other-window + (setq ltxbug-help (get-buffer-create "latexbugs help"))) +;; +;; Initially fill the message buffer with the output from running +;; latexbug.tex. + (erase-buffer) +;; +;; Use shell-command not start-process here so shell variables are +;; initialised before calling LaTeX. +;; Hope that is enough \\ to keep all the different shells happy... +;; {} replaced by \\{\\} in version 0.4 (fix for latex/1675) +;; Use \@@input (v0.5) + (shell-command (concat + ltxbug-latex-command + " \\\\nonstopmode\\\\makeatletter\ + \\\\def\\\\batch\\{\\}\\\\@@input latexbug ") t) + (switch-to-buffer-other-window ltxbug-msg) + (goto-char (point-min)) +;; +;; Change header to mention this latexbug.el file. + (if (re-search-forward "!" (point-max) t) + (ltxbug-error) +;; else + (ltxbug-do-report)))) + + + +(defun ltxbug-do-report () + (erase-buffer) +;; +;; Grab the template produced by latexbug.tex + (insert-file "latexbug.msg") +;; +;; Change header to mention this latexbug.el file. + (goto-char (point-min)) + (re-search-forward "\\(by latexbug.\\)\\(tex\\)" (point-max) t) + (replace-match "\\1el") +;; +;; Grab email address into mail field. + (re-search-forward "Re.*email to \\(.*\\)[^Z]*=$" (point-max) t) +;; +;; Put the synopsis template into the Subject field. +;; Add the delimiter used by the mail-send function. + (goto-char (point-min)) + (let ((temp + (concat "To: " + (buffer-substring (match-beginning 1) (match-end 1)) " +Subject: < SYNOPSIS > +" + ltxbug-mail-headers + (if (not (equal "" ltxbug-mail-headers)) " +") + "--text follows this line-- +" ))) +;; +;; Remove the rest of the banner from latexbug.tex + (goto-char (point-min)) + (delete-region (match-beginning 0) (match-end 0)) +;; +;; insert the mail headers + (insert temp)) +;; +;; +;; Get the required category using minibuffer completion. + (set-buffer ltxbug-help) + (erase-buffer) + (insert " +Several categories of files are supported, +corresponding to directories in the standard LaTeX distribution: + + latex: The `base' format, and standard classes only (base). + tools: Packages supported by the LaTeX3 project team (tools). + graphics: The color and graphics packages (graphics). + mfnfss: Packages for using some MetaFont fonts (mfnfss). + psnfss: Packages for using PostScript fonts LaTeX (psnfss). + amslatex: AMS supported Classes and Packages (amsfonts and amslatex). + babel: Packages supporting many different languages (babel). + expl3: Experimental packages for TeX programmers (expl3). + cyrillic: Packages for using Cyrillic fonts (cyrillic). +") + (let* ((completion-ignore-case t) + (cat (completing-read "Which Category ? " + ltxbug-categories nil t ))) + (set-buffer "*latex-bugs*") + (ltxbug-replace "< CATEGORY >" (if (equal cat "") "latex" cat))) +;; +;; Get the synopsis, make sure it is non empty, and not too long. + (set-buffer ltxbug-help) + (erase-buffer) + (insert " + Please enter a One line Synopsis of the report. + This should be < 50 characters. + + This text will be used as the mail header on all + subsequent correspondence. Please use informative strings. + For example: \\mathit generates error in foobar environmenent + rather than just `LaTeX Bug' or similar strings. +") + (set-buffer ltxbug-msg) + (let ((syn (read-from-minibuffer "Synopsis ? " ))) + (while (or (equal syn "") (> (length syn) 50)) + (setq syn + (read-from-minibuffer "Synopsis (0 < length < 50) ? " syn))) + (set-buffer "*latex-bugs*") + (ltxbug-replace "< SYNOPSIS >" syn)) +;; +;; If latexbug.cfg has not already defined the name +;; grab it from minibuffer + (goto-char (point-min)) + (if (re-search-forward "< ENTER YOUR NAME >" (point-max) t) + (if ltxbug-name + (ltxbug-replace "< ENTER YOUR NAME >" ltxbug-name) +;; else + (set-buffer ltxbug-help) + (erase-buffer) + (insert " + Please enter Your Name +") + (set-buffer ltxbug-msg) + (let ((temp (read-from-minibuffer "Your Name ? " user-full-name))) + (set-buffer "*latex-bugs*") + (ltxbug-replace "< ENTER YOUR NAME >" temp)))) +;; +;; If latexbug.cfg has not already defined the email address +;; grab it from minibuffer + (goto-char (point-min)) + (if (re-search-forward "< ENTER YOUR EMAIL ADDRESS >" (point-max) t) + (if ltxbug-address + (ltxbug-replace "< ENTER YOUR EMAIL ADDRESS >" ltxbug-address) +;; else + (set-buffer ltxbug-help) + (erase-buffer) + (insert " + Please enter Your email address. +") + (set-buffer ltxbug-msg) + (let ((temp (read-from-minibuffer "Your email address ? " + user-mail-address))) + (set-buffer "*latex-bugs*") + (ltxbug-replace "< ENTER YOUR EMAIL ADDRESS >" temp)))) +;; +;; Grab file name. +;; If this is empty, suggest changing the >Class + (set-buffer ltxbug-help) + (erase-buffer) + (insert " +A bug report should be accompanied by a test file +and a the log that the test generates. + +If a test file is not appropriate for this report +Just hit <return> + +Otherwise please specify the file to include. +") + (set-buffer ltxbug-msg) + (let ((temp (read-file-name "Test file ? " nil "" t))) + (if (equal temp "") + (progn + (ltxbug-update-field + "Class" + '(("sw-bug")("doc-bug")("change-request")) + " +You have not offered a test file. + +Perhaps that this is not a bug report. +The default class for messages is sw-bug. + +Possible classes of messages are: + sw-bug: Message reporting a Bug in the software. + doc-bug: Message reporting an error in the documentation. + change-request: Message requesting a change to some LaTeX feature.") + (re-search-forward ">How-to-repeat") + (delete-region (match-beginning 0) (point-max))) +;; else + (set-buffer ltxbug-msg) + (ltxbug-replace " < TEST FILE HERE " "") + (insert-file temp) + (let ((lines 0)) + (while (re-search-forward "\n" (mark) t) + (setq lines (+ lines 1))) + (if (> lines 60) + (progn + (set-buffer ltxbug-help) + (erase-buffer) + (insert +(format "%s%d%s" " +!!!! +Your test file is " lines " lines long!!! + +Test files should be as short as possible, while still showing +the behaviour. Please try to keep the file below 60 lines. +")) + (set-buffer ltxbug-msg)))) + (let* ((log1 + (concat + (substring temp 0 (string-match "\\.[^\\.]*$" temp)) + ".log")) + (log (read-file-name "Log file ? " "" log1 t log1))) + (if (equal log "") + (message "WHY NO LOG ???") + (ltxbug-replace " < LOG FROM TEST FILE HERE >" "") + (insert-file log))))) +;; +;; Prompt for the message text. + (set-buffer ltxbug-help) + (erase-buffer) + (insert " +Complete your bug report by giving the full descripition +below the `Description of bug:' header. + +There are other database fields you may wish to add, +type C-c C-f to change or add an additional field. + +Once the report is complete, type C-c C-c to send the message. + +A saved copy of the report will be in the file +latexbug.msg. +") + (switch-to-buffer ltxbug-msg) + (ltxbug-replace " < ENTER BUG REPORT HERE >" "") + (auto-fill-mode 1) + (setq fill-column 72)) + + +(defun ltxbug-error () + (set-buffer ltxbug-help) + (erase-buffer) + (insert " +LaTeX did not succesfully produce a bug report template.")) + +(defun ltxbug-save-and-send () + (interactive) + (write-file "latexbug.msg") + (mail-send-and-exit nil)) + + +(defun ltxbug-replace (a b) + "Replace the regexp a by the string b everywhere in the current buffer" + (goto-char (point-min)) + (while (re-search-forward a (point-max) t) + (replace-match b t t))) + +(defvar ltxbug-map (make-sparse-keymap) + "Local keymap used in LaTeX bug buffer.") + +(define-key ltxbug-map "\C-c\C-c" 'ltxbug-save-and-send) +(define-key ltxbug-map "\C-c\C-f" 'ltxbug-oneline-field) + + +(defun ltxbug-update-field (field values help) +"Update FIELD using completion list VALUES and help text HELP. + First entry in VALUES is the default." + (interactive) + (set-buffer ltxbug-help) + (erase-buffer) + (insert help) + (goto-char (point-min)) + (set-buffer ltxbug-msg) + (goto-char (point-min)) + (let ((temp "")) + (if (re-search-forward + (concat"\n>" field ":\\( *\\)\\(.*\\)$") (point-max) t) +;; if field already there + (progn + (setq temp (buffer-substring (match-beginning 2) (match-end 2))) + (delete-region (match-beginning 1) (match-end 2))) +;; else + (re-search-forward ">Category:.*$") + (insert (concat "\n>" field ":"))) + (insert " ") + (let ((temp2 + (completing-read (concat field " ? ") values nil t temp))) + (insert (if (equal temp2 "") + (car(car values)) temp2))))) + + +(defun ltxbug-responsible () + (interactive) + (ltxbug-update-field + "Responsible" +;; Alphabetical order, which makes Alan the default... + '(("alan")("chris")("david")("frank")("johannes") + ("michael")("rainer")) +" + You may set the >Responsible field to a particular person. + **Do not do this unless you have very good reason.** + We may not appreciate having jobs allocated to us in this way:-) + The possible values are: + alan (Alan Jeffrey) + chris (Chris Rowley) + david (David Carlisle) + frank (Frank Mittelbach) + johannes (Johannes Braams) + michael (Michael Downes) + rainer (Rainer Schoepf) +")) + +(defun ltxbug-confidential () + (interactive) + (ltxbug-update-field + "Confidential" + '(("no")("yes")) +" + You may set the >Confidential field to yes. + + The report database is publicly searchable. + See bugs.txt for details. + Reports marked Confidential will not be made public. + Possible values: + no The default. Report may be made public. + yes Report should only be seen by LaTeX maintainers. +")) + + +(defun ltxbug-priority () + (interactive) + (ltxbug-update-field + "Priority" + '(("low")("medium")("high")) +" + Change the priority of the report from `high' + Possible values: + low + medium + high +")) + +(defun ltxbug-severity () + (interactive) + (ltxbug-update-field + "Severity" + '(("non-critical")("serious")("critical")) +" + Classify the severity of the problem.' + Possible values: + non-critical + serious + critical +")) + +(defun ltxbug-class () + (interactive) + (ltxbug-update-field + "Class" + '(("sw-bug")("doc-bug")("change-request")) +" + Classify the type of report. + Possible values: + sw-bug: Message reporting a bug in the software. + doc-bug: Message reporting an error in the documentation. + change-request: Message requesting a change to some LaTeX feature. +")) + +(defun ltxbug-window-setup () + (interactive) + (delete-other-windows) + (split-window-vertically -13) + (switch-to-buffer-other-window ltxbug-help)) + +(defun ltxbug-oneline-field () + (interactive) + (ltxbug-window-setup) + (erase-buffer) + (insert " + You may wish to add or alter the following fields: + Class Class of this report. + Confidential Confidential (or not). + Responsible Assign to a member of the LaTeX maintenance team + Severity Severity of the bug. + Priority Priority of the report. +") + (set-buffer ltxbug-msg) + (let* ((completion-ignore-case t) + (field (completing-read "Which field ? " + '(("Class")("Confidential")("Priority")("Severity") + ("Responsible")) + nil t))) + (cond + ((equal field "Class") (ltxbug-class)) + ((equal field "Confidential") (ltxbug-confidential)) + ((equal field "Responsible") (ltxbug-responsible)) + ((equal field "Severity") (ltxbug-severity)) + ((equal field "Priority") (ltxbug-priority))))) diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/legal.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/legal.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..6b92aba4591 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/legal.txt @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + LaTeX Copyright, Warranty and Distribution Restrictions + + 20 December 2003 + + +COPYRIGHT +========= + +This distribution is +Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2002 2003 2004 +The LaTeX3 Project and the individual authors: + + Leslie Lamport + Johannes Braams + David Carlisle + Alan Jeffrey + Frank Mittelbach + Chris Rowley + Rainer Schoepf + +License +======= + +LaTeX is free software that can be redistributed and/or modified +under the terms of the LaTeX Project Public License as specified +in the file lppl.txt. +The latest version of this license is in + http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +version 2003/12/01 or later. + +The use of LaTeX is unrestricted. + +This Work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". + +The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution +is given in the file `manifest.txt'. + +Files generated by means of unpacking the distribution (using, for +example, the docstrip program) may be distributed at the distributor's +discretion. However if they are distributed then a copy of the base +system must be distributed together with them. + +The list of all derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution +and covered by LPPL is given in the file unpacked.txt. + diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/lindner.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/lindner.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..99fce1c96e9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/lindner.txt @@ -0,0 +1,171 @@ + LaTeX installation instructions for Lindner-TeX (Atari) + + 1995 June 25 + +SUMMARY +======= + +This file contains instructions on how to install LaTeX for +Lindner-TeX. Before reading this file, you should read +install.txt, which will explain how the LaTeX installation works. + +This file describes: + + * How to save any old version of LaTeX. + + * How to configure LaTeX. + + * How to unpack the LaTeX distribution. + + * How to create the LaTeX format. + + * How to install the LaTeX files. + + * What to do if you have any problems. + + +REQUIREMENTS +============ + +In addition to the LaTeX distribution files, you will also need the +following: + + * the file `hyphen.tex', or some other hyphenation files (see `Creating + the LaTeX Format', below); we recommend to use the `babel' system by + Johannes Braams, which can be found probably where you got your copy + of LaTeX, e.g. the CTAN archive ftp-servers; + + * the font files (normally .tfm files) for the Computer Modern fonts, + including some non-standard ones (see `Fonts needed', below). + + +SAVING ANY OLD VERSION OF LaTeX +=============================== + + If you are currently using the old LaTeX version, 2.09, you may wish + to save it before installing the new version of LaTeX. + + + If you want to use the new LaTeX2e, which is also the new standard, instead + of your old version, you can delete all files in your /texinput/stdinput + directory, except for the two plain TeX format files named PLAIN.FMT and + PLAING.FMT, which can usually be found in the directory /texinput/formats. + If you want to keep the old 2.09 version of LaTeX, move all the input files + to a directory named (e.g.) stdinput.209 and create a new directory + stdinput.2e for the new files. + + +CONFIGURING LATEX +================= + + LaTeX2e uses more memory than the former versions. To use it, you need an + ATARI ST/TT/Falcon with at least 2Mb of RAM, so that you can use the BigTeX + version of Lindner-TeX. The files are available on the CTAN archive servers + in the directory tex/systems/atari/lindner-tex-packed-disks. + + No specially adapted TEXSYS.CFG file is needed for the Lindner +implementation + of TeX. If you want to configure your system, you should edit the TEXSETUP + file with your favourite ASCII editor. This file contents the main +in-/output + paths for the system. CAUTION: Some paths are saved directly to the code of + the TEXSHELL.PRG. These can be edited from the shell only! + + VERY IMPORTANT NOTICE: If you want to use the Lindner-TeX-System in a multi- + tasking environment like MagiC or MTOS, you should rename TEXSHELL.PRG to + TEXSHELL.TOS (unless your Desktop allows to determine the type of executa- + bles to certain types, like e.g. GEMINI). This will cause the TEXSHELL to +re- + direct all output to the VT52-Window, so the .TTP executables will not write + directly to the screen. + + +UNPACKING THE DISTRIBUTION +========================== + + To unpack the distribution, run INITEX on the file unpack.ins. (If you can, + get the already unpacked distribution from CTAN, because the unpacking + might take an awfully long time on an 8Mhz ST). + + +CREATING THE LaTeX FORMAT +========================= + + To create the new LaTeX format, you have to run IniTeX on the file + latex.ltx. Make sure, that this file (and the hyphenation files) are in + a directory searched by TeX. To configure the hyphenation read the file + TEXPERT.TEX. A new LaTeX format named LATEX.BFM will be created and dumped + to the directory where your other formats already are (environment variable + DUMPPATH in the TEXSETUP file). There is no need to rename this file to + LATEX.FMT. To install the new format file in the TEXSHELL.PRG, doubleclick + into the lower field of the formats section in the TeX-window, choose + LATEX.BFM in the file selector, ignore the error message about the file ex- + tensions and save the TEXSHELL options. + + +PUTTING THE FILES WHERE LaTeX CAN READ THEM +=========================================== + + We suggest the following configuration for your /stdinput.2e directory: + - create a new folder CLASSES and copy all *.CLS and *.CLO files into it; + - copy all *.STY files to a new folder PACKAGES; + - copy all *.FD and *.ENC files to a new folder FONTDEFS; + - copy all other files to a folder OTHERS. + + You might delete all *.DTX, *.INS and *.TXT files (after reading or + processing them to get the documentations) in order to save disk space. Note + that the *.DTX files can be processed by the new LaTeX version only. +CAUTION: + you should, of course, keep a backup copy of all these files somewhere so +you + can can reinstall them if necessary. + + +GETTING A WORKING LaTeX +======================= + + All you have to do now is writing the new paths to the TEXSETUP file so + that TeX can find the files when running. + + +CHECKING THAT THE INSTALLATION WORKED +===================================== + + To check the installation select LTXCHECK.LTX in the TeXShell and run the + new LaTeX on it. Make sure that you copy LTXCHECK.LTX to the document input + directory, usually /texinput/document, before you proceed it. It's going to + produce some `OK' messages, and perhaps some `BAD' warnings. + + +PROBLEMS +======== + + If any problems occur, check the LindnerTeX users guide. Note that you need + some special fonts to process the XXXGUIDE.TEX files that come with the + LaTeX distribution. These fonts are available on CTAN also. If you use a + previewer like ASCREEN v3.2 or DVI v2.3x the missing fonts will be substi- + tuted and can be produced with METAFONT later. + + If you have any other problems with the LaTeX installation, see the + `PROBLEMS' section in install.txt. + + +CLEARING UP +=========== + + See section `PUTTING FILES...' for details. + + +GETTING IN TOUCH WITH THE AUTHOR +================================ + + If you have any problems, comments or proposals for changes or extensions to + this text, you can send your questions to the author by email. + The probably best address to use is Thomas_Cloer@s4.maus.de (only mails + <16kb). You can also try tcloer@tyrell.s.bawue.de or tcloer1@gwdg.de. + + + + +--- Copyright 1995 Thomas Cloer and the LaTeX3 project --- +--- All rights reserved. --- diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/lppl-1-0.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/lppl-1-0.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..9425aab83cd --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/lppl-1-0.txt @@ -0,0 +1,211 @@ +LaTeX Project Public License +============================ + +LPPL Version 1.0 1999-03-01 + +Copyright 1999 LaTeX3 Project + Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies + of this license document, but modification is not allowed. + + +Preamble +======== + +The LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL) is the license under which the +base LaTeX distribution is distributed. As described below you may use +this licence for any software that you wish to distribute. + +It may be particularly suitable if your software is TeX related (such +as a LaTeX package file) but it may be used for any software, even if +it is unrelated to TeX. + +To use this license, the files of your distribution should have an +explicit copyright notice giving your name and the year, together +with a reference to this license. + +A typical example would be + + %% pig.sty + %% Copyright 2001 M. Y. Name + + % This program can redistributed and/or modified under the terms + % of the LaTeX Project Public License Distributed from CTAN + % archives in directory macros/latex/base/lppl.txt; either + % version 1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version. + +Given such a notice in the file, the conditions of this document would +apply, with: + +`The Program' referring to the software `pig.sty' and +`The Copyright Holder' referring to the person `M. Y. Name'. + +To see a real example, see the file legal.txt which carries the +copyright notice for the base latex distribution. + +This license gives terms under which files of The Program may be +distributed and modified. Individual files may have specific further +constraints on modification, but no file should have restrictions on +distribution other than those specified below. +This is to ensure that a distributor wishing to distribute a complete +unmodified copy of The Program need only check the conditions in this +file, and does not need to check every file in The Program for extra +restrictions. If you do need to modify the distribution terms of some +files, do not refer to this license, instead distribute The Program +under a different license. You may use the parts of the text of LPPL as +a model for your own license, but your license should not directly refer +to the LPPL or otherwise give the impression that The Program is +distributed under the LPPL. + + + +The LaTeX Project Public License +================================ +Terms And Conditions For Copying, Distribution And Modification +=============================================================== + + +WARRANTY +======== + +There is no warranty for The Program, to the extent permitted by +applicable law. Except when otherwise stated in writing, The +Copyright Holder provides The Program `as is' without warranty of any +kind, either expressed or implied, including, but not limited to, the +implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular +purpose. The entire risk as to the quality and performance of the +program is with you. Should The Program prove defective, you assume +the cost of all necessary servicing, repair or correction. + +In no event unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing +will The Copyright Holder, or any of the individual authors named in +the source for The Program, be liable to you for damages, including +any general, special, incidental or consequential damages arising out +of any use of The Program or out of inability to use The Program +(including but not limited to loss of data or data being rendered +inaccurate or losses sustained by you or by third parties as a result +of a failure of The Program to operate with any other programs), even +if such holder or other party has been advised of the possibility of +such damages. + + +DISTRIBUTION +============ + +Redistribution of unchanged files is allowed provided that all files +that make up the distribution of The Program are distributed. +In particular this means that The Program has to be distributed +including its documentation if documentation was part of the original +distribution. + +The distribution of The Program will contain a prominent file +listing all the files covered by this license. + +If you receive only some of these files from someone, complain! + +The distribution of changed versions of certain files included in the +The Program, and the reuse of code from The Program, are allowed +under the following restrictions: + + * It is allowed only if the legal notice in the file does not + expressly forbid it. + See note below, under "Conditions on individual files". + + * You rename the file before you make any changes to it, unless the + file explicitly says that renaming is not required. Any such changed + files must be distributed under a license that forbids distribution + of those files, and any files derived from them, under the names used + by the original files in the distribution of The Program. + + * You change any `identification string' in The Program to clearly + indicate that the file is not part of the standard system. + + * If The Program includes an `error report address' so that errors + may be reported to The Copyright Holder, or other specified + addresses, this address must be changed in any modified versions of + The Program, so that reports for files not maintained by the + original program maintainers are directed to the maintainers of the + changed files. + + * You acknowledge the source and authorship of the original version + in the modified file. + + * You also distribute the unmodified version of the file or + alternatively provide sufficient information so that the + user of your modified file can be reasonably expected to be + able to obtain an original, unmodified copy of The Program. + For example, you may specify a URL to a site that you expect + will freely provide the user with a copy of The Program (either + the version on which your modification is based, or perhaps a + later version). + + * If The Program is intended to be used with, or is based on, LaTeX, + then files with the following file extensions which have special + meaning in LaTeX Software, have special modification rules under the + license: + + - Files with extension `.ins' (installation files): these files may + not be modified at all because they contain the legal notices + that are placed in the generated files. + + - Files with extension `.fd' (LaTeX font definitions files): these + files are allowed to be modified without changing the name, but + only to enable use of all available fonts and to prevent attempts + to access unavailable fonts. However, modified files are not + allowed to be distributed in place of original files. + + - Files with extension `.cfg' (configuration files): these files + can be created or modified to enable easy configuration of the + system. The documentation in cfgguide.tex in the base LaTeX + distribution describes when it makes sense to modify or generate + such files. + + +The above restrictions are not intended to prohibit, and hence do +not apply to, the updating, by any method, of a file so that it +becomes identical to the latest version of that file in The Program. + +======================================================================== + +NOTES +===== + +We believe that these requirements give you the freedom you to make +modifications that conform with whatever technical specifications you +wish, whilst maintaining the availability, integrity and reliability of +The Program. If you do not see how to achieve your goal whilst +adhering to these requirements then read the document cfgguide.tex +in the base LaTeX distribution for suggestions. + +Because of the portability and exchangeability aspects of systems +like LaTeX, The LaTeX3 Project deprecates the distribution of +non-standard versions of components of LaTeX or of generally available +contributed code for them but such distributions are permitted under the +above restrictions. + +The document modguide.tex in the base LaTeX distribution details +the reasons for the legal requirements detailed above. +Even if The Program is unrelated to LaTeX, the argument in +modguide.tex may still apply, and should be read before +a modified version of The Program is distributed. + + +Conditions on individual files +============================== + +The individual files may bear additional conditions which supersede +the general conditions on distribution and modification contained in +this file. If there are any such files, the distribution of The +Program will contain a prominent file that lists all the exceptional +files. + +Typical examples of files with more restrictive modification +conditions would be files that contain the text of copyright notices. + + * The conditions on individual files differ only in the + extent of *modification* that is allowed. + + * The conditions on *distribution* are the same for all the files. + Thus a (re)distributor of a complete, unchanged copy of The Program + need meet only the conditions in this file; it is not necessary to + check the header of every file in the distribution to check that a + distribution meets these requirements. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/lppl-1-1.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/lppl-1-1.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..52100607d17 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/lppl-1-1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,314 @@ + +The LaTeX Project Public License +=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=- + +LPPL Version 1.1 1999-07-10 + +Copyright 1999 LaTeX3 Project + Everyone is allowed to distribute verbatim copies of this + license document, but modification of it is not allowed. + + +PREAMBLE +======== + +The LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL) is the license under which the +base LaTeX distribution is distributed. + +You may use this license for any program that you have written and wish +to distribute. This license may be particularly suitable if your +program is TeX-related (such as a LaTeX package), but you may use it +even if your program is unrelated to TeX. The section `WHETHER AND HOW +TO DISTRIBUTE PROGRAMS UNDER THIS LICENSE', below, gives instructions, +examples, and recommendations for authors who are considering +distributing their programs under this license. + +In this license document, `The Program' refers to any program +distributed under this license. + +This license gives conditions under which The Program may be distributed +and conditions under which modified versions of The Program may be +distributed. Individual files of The Program may bear supplementary +and/or superseding conditions on modification of themselves and on the +distribution of modified versions of themselves, but *no* file of The +Program may bear supplementary or superseding conditions on the +distribution of an unmodified copy of the file. A distributor wishing +to distribute a complete, unmodified copy of The Program therefore +needs to check the conditions only in this license and nowhere else. + +Activities other than distribution and/or modification of The Program +are not covered by this license; they are outside its scope. In +particular, the act of running The Program is not restricted. + +We, the LaTeX3 Project, believe that the conditions below give you +the freedom to make and distribute modified versions of The Program +that conform with whatever technical specifications you wish while +maintaining the availability, integrity, and reliability of +The Program. If you do not see how to achieve your goal while +meeting these conditions, then read the document `cfgguide.tex' +in the base LaTeX distribution for suggestions. + + +CONDITIONS ON DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION +=========================================== + +You may distribute a complete, unmodified copy of The Program. +Distribution of only part of The Program is not allowed. + +You may not modify in any way a file of The Program that bears a legal +notice forbidding modification of that file. + +You may distribute a modified file of The Program if, and only if, the +following eight conditions are met: + + 1. You must meet any additional conditions borne by the file on the + distribution of a modified version of the file as described below + in the subsection `Additional Conditions on Individual Files of + The Program'. + + 2. If the file is a LaTeX software file, then you must meet any + applicable additional conditions on the distribution of a modified + version of the file that are described below in the subsection + `Additional Conditions on LaTeX Software Files'. + + 3. You must not distribute the modified file with the filename of the + original file. + + 4. In the modified file, you must acknowledge the authorship and + name of the original file, and the name (if any) of the program + which contains it. + + 5. You must change any identification string in the file to indicate + clearly that the modified file is not part of The Program. + + 6. You must change any addresses in the modified file for the + reporting of errors in the file or in The Program generally to + ensure that reports for files no longer maintained by the original + maintainers will be directed to the maintainers of the modified + files. + + 7. You must distribute the modified file under a license that forbids + distribution both of the modified file and of any files derived + from the modified file with the filename of the original file. + + 8. You must do either (A) or (B): + + (A) distribute a copy of The Program (that is, a complete, + unmodified copy of The Program) together with the modified + file; if your distribution of the modified file is made by + offering access to copy the modified file from a designated + place, then offering equivalent access to copy The Program + from the same place meets this condition, even though third + parties are not compelled to copy The Program along with the + modified file; + + (B) provide to those who receive the modified file information + that is sufficient for them to obtain a copy of The Program; + for example, you may provide a Uniform Resource Locator (URL) + for a site that you expect will provide them with a copy of + The Program free of charge (either the version from which + your modification is derived, or perhaps a later version). + +Note that in the above, `distribution' of a file means making the +file available to others by any means. This includes, for instance, +installing the file on any machine in such a way that the file is +accessible by users other than yourself. `Modification' of a file +means any procedure that produces a derivative file under any +applicable law -- that is, a file containing the original file or +a significant portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications +and/or translated into another language. + +Changing the name of a file is considered to be a modification of +the file. + +The distribution conditions in this license do not have to be +applied to files that have been modified in accordance with the +above conditions. Note, however, that Condition 7. does apply to +any such modified file. + +The conditions above are not intended to prohibit, and hence do not +apply to, the updating, by any method, of a file so that it becomes +identical to the latest version of that file of The Program. + + + +A Recommendation on Modification Without Distribution +----------------------------------------------------- + +It is wise never to modify a file of The Program, even for your own +personal use, without also meeting the above eight conditions for +distributing the modified file. While you might intend that such +modified files will never be distributed, often this will happen by +accident -- you may forget that you have modified the file; or it may +not occur to you when allowing others to access the modified file +that you are thus distributing it and violating the conditions of +this license. It is usually in your best interest to keep your copy +of The Program identical with the public one. Many programs provide +ways to control the behavior of that program without altering its +licensed files. + + +Additional Conditions on Individual Files of The Program +-------------------------------------------------------- + +An individual file of The Program may bear additional conditions that +supplement and/or supersede the conditions in this license if, and only +if, such additional conditions exclusively concern modification of the +file or distribution of a modified version of the file. The conditions +on individual files of The Program therefore may differ only with +respect to the kind and extent of modification of those files that +is allowed, and with respect to the distribution of modified versions +of those files. + + +Additional Conditions on LaTeX Software Files +--------------------------------------------- + +If a file of The Program is intended to be used with LaTeX (that is, +if it is a LaTeX software file), then the following additional +conditions, which supplement and/or supersede the conditions +above, apply to the file according to its filename extension: + + - You may not modify any file with filename extension `.ins' since + these are installation files containing the legal notices that are + placed in the files they generate. + + - You may distribute modified versions of files with filename + extension `.fd' (LaTeX font definition files) under the standard + conditions of the LPPL as described above. You may also distribute + such modified LaTeX font definition files with their original names + provided that: + (1) the only changes to the original files either enable use of + available fonts or prevent attempts to access unavailable fonts; + (2) you also distribute the original, unmodified files (TeX input + paths can be used to control which set of LaTeX font definition + files is actually used by TeX). + + - You may distribute modified versions of files with filename + extension `.cfg' (configuration files) with their original names. + The Program may (and usually will) specify the range of commands + that are allowed in a particular configuration file. + +Because of portability and exchangeability issues in LaTeX software, +The LaTeX3 Project deprecates the distribution of modified versions of +components of LaTeX or of generally available contributed code for them, +but such distribution can meet the conditions of this license. + + +NO WARRANTY +=========== + +There is no warranty for The Program. Except when otherwise stated in +writing, The Copyright Holder provides The Program `as is', without +warranty of any kind, either expressed or implied, including, but not +limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for +a particular purpose. The entire risk as to the quality and performance +of The Program is with you. Should The Program prove defective, you +assume the cost of all necessary servicing, repair, or correction. + +In no event unless agreed to in writing will The Copyright Holder, or +any author named in the files of The Program, or any other party who may +distribute and/or modify The Program as permitted below, be liable to +you for damages, including any general, special, incidental or +consequential damages arising out of any use of The Program or out of +inability to use The Program (including, but not limited to, loss of +data, data being rendered inaccurate, or losses sustained by anyone as +a result of any failure of The Program to operate with any other +programs), even if The Copyright Holder or said author or said other +party has been advised of the possibility of such damages. + + +WHETHER AND HOW TO DISTRIBUTE PROGRAMS UNDER THIS LICENSE +========================================================= + +This section contains important instructions, examples, and +recommendations for authors who are considering distributing their +programs under this license. These authors are addressed as `you' in +this section. + + +Choosing This License or Another License +---------------------------------------- + +If for any part of your program you want or need to use *distribution* +conditions that differ from those in this license, then do not refer to +this license anywhere in your program but instead distribute your +program under a different license. You may use the text of this license +as a model for your own license, but your license should not refer to +the LPPL or otherwise give the impression that your program is +distributed under the LPPL. + +The document `modguide.tex' in the base LaTeX distribution explains +the motivation behind the conditions of this license. It explains, +for example, why distributing LaTeX under the GNU General Public +License (GPL) was considered inappropriate. Even if your program is +unrelated to LaTeX, the discussion in `modguide.tex' may still be +relevant, and authors intending to distribute their programs under any +license are encouraged to read it. + + +How to Use This License +----------------------- + +To use this license, place in each of the files of your program both +an explicit copyright notice including your name and the year and also +a statement that the distribution and/or modification of the file is +constrained by the conditions in this license. + +Here is an example of such a notice and statement: + + %% pig.dtx + %% Copyright 2001 M. Y. Name + % + % This program may be distributed and/or modified under the + % conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.1 + % of this license or (at your option) any later version. + % The latest version of this license is in + % http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt + % and version 1.1 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX + % version 1999/06/01 or later. + % + % This program consists of the files pig.dtx and pig.ins + +Given such a notice and statement in a file, the conditions given in +this license document would apply, with `The Program' referring to the +two files `pig.dtx' and `pig.ins', and `The Copyright Holder' referring +to the person `M. Y. Name'. + + +Important Recommendations +------------------------- + + Defining What Constitutes The Program + + The LPPL requires that distributions of The Program contain all the + files of The Program. It is therefore important that you provide a + way for the licensee to determine which files constitute The Program. + This could, for example, be achieved by explicitly listing all the + files of The Program near the copyright notice of each file or by + using a line like + + % This program consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. + + in that place. In the absence of an unequivocal list it might be + impossible for the licensee to determine what is considered by you + to comprise The Program. + + Noting Exceptional Files + + If The Program contains any files bearing additional conditions on + modification, or on distribution of modified versions, of those + files (other than those listed in `Additional Conditions on LaTeX + Software Files'), then it is recommended that The Program contain a + prominent file that defines the exceptional conditions, and either + lists the exceptional files or defines one or more categories of + exceptional files. + + Files containing the text of a license (such as this file) are + often examples of files bearing more restrictive conditions on + modification. LaTeX configuration files (with filename extension + `.cfg') are examples of files bearing less restrictive conditions + on the distribution of a modified version of the file. The + additional conditions on LaTeX software given above are examples + of declaring a category of files bearing exceptional additional + conditions. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/lppl-1-2.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/lppl-1-2.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..5b05fe86893 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/lppl-1-2.txt @@ -0,0 +1,318 @@ + +The LaTeX Project Public License +=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=- + +LPPL Version 1.2 1999-09-03 + +Copyright 1999 LaTeX3 Project + Everyone is allowed to distribute verbatim copies of this + license document, but modification of it is not allowed. + + +PREAMBLE +======== + +The LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL) is the license under which the +base LaTeX distribution is distributed. + +You may use this license for any program that you have written and wish +to distribute. This license may be particularly suitable if your +program is TeX-related (such as a LaTeX package), but you may use it +even if your program is unrelated to TeX. The section `WHETHER AND HOW +TO DISTRIBUTE PROGRAMS UNDER THIS LICENSE', below, gives instructions, +examples, and recommendations for authors who are considering +distributing their programs under this license. + +In this license document, `The Program' refers to any program +distributed under this license. + +This license gives conditions under which The Program may be distributed +and conditions under which modified versions of The Program may be +distributed. Individual files of The Program may bear supplementary +and/or superseding conditions on modification of themselves and on the +distribution of modified versions of themselves, but *no* file of The +Program may bear supplementary or superseding conditions on the +distribution of an unmodified copy of the file. A distributor wishing +to distribute a complete, unmodified copy of The Program therefore +needs to check the conditions only in this license and nowhere else. + +Activities other than distribution and/or modification of The Program +are not covered by this license; they are outside its scope. In +particular, the act of running The Program is not restricted. + +We, the LaTeX3 Project, believe that the conditions below give you +the freedom to make and distribute modified versions of The Program +that conform with whatever technical specifications you wish while +maintaining the availability, integrity, and reliability of +The Program. If you do not see how to achieve your goal while +meeting these conditions, then read the document `cfgguide.tex' +in the base LaTeX distribution for suggestions. + + +CONDITIONS ON DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION +=========================================== + +You may distribute a complete, unmodified copy of The Program. +Distribution of only part of The Program is not allowed. + +You may not modify in any way a file of The Program that bears a legal +notice forbidding modification of that file. + +You may distribute a modified file of The Program if, and only if, the +following eight conditions are met: + + 1. You must meet any additional conditions borne by the file on the + distribution of a modified version of the file as described below + in the subsection `Additional Conditions on Individual Files of + The Program'. + + 2. If the file is a LaTeX software file, then you must meet any + applicable additional conditions on the distribution of a modified + version of the file that are described below in the subsection + `Additional Conditions on LaTeX Software Files'. + + 3. You must not distribute the modified file with the filename of the + original file. + + 4. In the modified file, you must acknowledge the authorship and + name of the original file, and the name (if any) of the program + which contains it. + + 5. You must change any identification string in the file to indicate + clearly that the modified file is not part of The Program. + + 6. You must change any addresses in the modified file for the + reporting of errors in the file or in The Program generally to + ensure that reports for files no longer maintained by the original + maintainers will be directed to the maintainers of the modified + files. + + 7. You must distribute the modified file under a license that forbids + distribution both of the modified file and of any files derived + from the modified file with the filename of the original file. + + 8. You must do either (A) or (B): + + (A) distribute a copy of The Program (that is, a complete, + unmodified copy of The Program) together with the modified + file; if your distribution of the modified file is made by + offering access to copy the modified file from a designated + place, then offering equivalent access to copy The Program + from the same place meets this condition, even though third + parties are not compelled to copy The Program along with the + modified file; + + (B) provide to those who receive the modified file information + that is sufficient for them to obtain a copy of The Program; + for example, you may provide a Uniform Resource Locator (URL) + for a site that you expect will provide them with a copy of + The Program free of charge (either the version from which + your modification is derived, or perhaps a later version). + +Note that in the above, `distribution' of a file means making the +file available to others by any means. This includes, for instance, +installing the file on any machine in such a way that the file is +accessible by users other than yourself. `Modification' of a file +means any procedure that produces a derivative file under any +applicable law -- that is, a file containing the original file or +a significant portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications +and/or translated into another language. + +Changing the name of a file (other than as necessitated by the file +conventions of the target file systems) is considered to be a +modification of the file. + +The distribution conditions in this license do not have to be +applied to files that have been modified in accordance with the +above conditions. Note, however, that Condition 7. does apply to +any such modified file. + +The conditions above are not intended to prohibit, and hence do not +apply to, the updating, by any method, of a file so that it becomes +identical to the latest version of that file of The Program. + + + +A Recommendation on Modification Without Distribution +----------------------------------------------------- + +It is wise never to modify a file of The Program, even for your own +personal use, without also meeting the above eight conditions for +distributing the modified file. While you might intend that such +modified files will never be distributed, often this will happen by +accident -- you may forget that you have modified the file; or it may +not occur to you when allowing others to access the modified file +that you are thus distributing it and violating the conditions of +this license. It is usually in your best interest to keep your copy +of The Program identical with the public one. Many programs provide +ways to control the behavior of that program without altering its +licensed files. + + +Additional Conditions on Individual Files of The Program +-------------------------------------------------------- + +An individual file of The Program may bear additional conditions that +supplement and/or supersede the conditions in this license if, and only +if, such additional conditions exclusively concern modification of the +file or distribution of a modified version of the file. The conditions +on individual files of The Program therefore may differ only with +respect to the kind and extent of modification of those files that +is allowed, and with respect to the distribution of modified versions +of those files. + + +Additional Conditions on LaTeX Software Files +--------------------------------------------- + +If a file of The Program is intended to be used with LaTeX (that is, +if it is a LaTeX software file), then the following additional +conditions, which supplement and/or supersede the conditions +above, apply to the file according to its filename extension: + + - You may not modify any file with filename extension `.ins' since + these are installation files containing the legal notices that are + placed in the files they generate. + + - You may distribute modified versions of files with filename + extension `.fd' (LaTeX font definition files) under the standard + conditions of the LPPL as described above. You may also distribute + such modified LaTeX font definition files with their original names + provided that: + (1) the only changes to the original files either enable use of + available fonts or prevent attempts to access unavailable fonts; + (2) you also distribute the original, unmodified files (TeX input + paths can be used to control which set of LaTeX font definition + files is actually used by TeX). + + - You may distribute modified versions of files with filename + extension `.cfg' (configuration files) with their original names. + The Program may (and usually will) specify the range of commands + that are allowed in a particular configuration file. + +Because of portability and exchangeability issues in LaTeX software, +The LaTeX3 Project deprecates the distribution of modified versions of +components of LaTeX or of generally available contributed code for them, +but such distribution can meet the conditions of this license. + + +NO WARRANTY +=========== + +There is no warranty for The Program. Except when otherwise stated in +writing, The Copyright Holder provides The Program `as is', without +warranty of any kind, either expressed or implied, including, but not +limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for +a particular purpose. The entire risk as to the quality and performance +of The Program is with you. Should The Program prove defective, you +assume the cost of all necessary servicing, repair, or correction. + +In no event unless agreed to in writing will The Copyright Holder, or +any author named in the files of The Program, or any other party who may +distribute and/or modify The Program as permitted above, be liable to +you for damages, including any general, special, incidental or +consequential damages arising out of any use of The Program or out of +inability to use The Program (including, but not limited to, loss of +data, data being rendered inaccurate, or losses sustained by anyone as +a result of any failure of The Program to operate with any other +programs), even if The Copyright Holder or said author or said other +party has been advised of the possibility of such damages. + + +WHETHER AND HOW TO DISTRIBUTE PROGRAMS UNDER THIS LICENSE +========================================================= + +This section contains important instructions, examples, and +recommendations for authors who are considering distributing their +programs under this license. These authors are addressed as `you' in +this section. + + +Choosing This License or Another License +---------------------------------------- + +If for any part of your program you want or need to use *distribution* +conditions that differ from those in this license, then do not refer to +this license anywhere in your program but instead distribute your +program under a different license. You may use the text of this license +as a model for your own license, but your license should not refer to +the LPPL or otherwise give the impression that your program is +distributed under the LPPL. + +The document `modguide.tex' in the base LaTeX distribution explains +the motivation behind the conditions of this license. It explains, +for example, why distributing LaTeX under the GNU General Public +License (GPL) was considered inappropriate. Even if your program is +unrelated to LaTeX, the discussion in `modguide.tex' may still be +relevant, and authors intending to distribute their programs under any +license are encouraged to read it. + + +How to Use This License +----------------------- + +To use this license, place in each of the files of your program both +an explicit copyright notice including your name and the year and also +a statement that the distribution and/or modification of the file is +constrained by the conditions in this license. + +Here is an example of such a notice and statement: + + %% pig.dtx + %% Copyright 2001 M. Y. Name + % + % This program may be distributed and/or modified under the + % conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.2 + % of this license or (at your option) any later version. + % The latest version of this license is in + % http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt + % and version 1.2 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX + % version 1999/12/01 or later. + % + % This program consists of the files pig.dtx and pig.ins + +Given such a notice and statement in a file, the conditions given in +this license document would apply, with `The Program' referring to the +two files `pig.dtx' and `pig.ins', and `The Copyright Holder' referring +to the person `M. Y. Name'. + + +Important Recommendations +------------------------- + + Defining What Constitutes The Program + + The LPPL requires that distributions of The Program contain all the + files of The Program. It is therefore important that you provide a + way for the licensee to determine which files constitute The Program. + This could, for example, be achieved by explicitly listing all the + files of The Program near the copyright notice of each file or by + using a line like + + % This program consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. + + in that place. In the absence of an unequivocal list it might be + impossible for the licensee to determine what is considered by you + to comprise The Program. + + Noting Exceptional Files + + If The Program contains any files bearing additional conditions on + modification, or on distribution of modified versions, of those + files (other than those listed in `Additional Conditions on LaTeX + Software Files'), then it is recommended that The Program contain a + prominent file that defines the exceptional conditions, and either + lists the exceptional files or defines one or more categories of + exceptional files. + + Files containing the text of a license (such as this file) are + often examples of files bearing more restrictive conditions on + modification. LaTeX configuration files (with filename extension + `.cfg') are examples of files bearing less restrictive conditions + on the distribution of a modified version of the file. The + additional conditions on LaTeX software given above are examples + of declaring a category of files bearing exceptional additional + conditions. + + + diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/lppl.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/lppl.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..f721587db1b --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/lppl.txt @@ -0,0 +1,401 @@ +The LaTeX Project Public License +=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=- + +LPPL Version 1.3 2003-12-01 + +Copyright 1999 2002-03 LaTeX3 Project + Everyone is allowed to distribute verbatim copies of this + license document, but modification of it is not allowed. + + +PREAMBLE +======== + +The LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL) is the primary license under +which the the LaTeX kernel and the base LaTeX packages are distributed. + +You may use this license for any work of which you hold the copyright +and which you wish to distribute. This license may be particularly +suitable if your work is TeX-related (such as a LaTeX package), but +you may use it with small modifications even if your work is unrelated +to TeX. + +The section `WHETHER AND HOW TO DISTRIBUTE WORKS UNDER THIS LICENSE', +below, gives instructions, examples, and recommendations for authors +who are considering distributing their works under this license. + +This license gives conditions under which a work may be distributed +and modified, as well as conditions under which modified versions of +that work may be distributed. + +We, the LaTeX3 Project, believe that the conditions below give you +the freedom to make and distribute modified versions of your work +that conform with whatever technical specifications you wish while +maintaining the availability, integrity, and reliability of +that work. If you do not see how to achieve your goal while +meeting these conditions, then read the document `cfgguide.tex' +and `modguide.tex' in the base LaTeX distribution for suggestions. + + +DEFINITIONS +=========== + +In this license document the following terms are used: + + `Work' + Any work being distributed under this License. + + `Derived Work' + Any work that under any applicable law is derived from the Work. + + `Modification' + Any procedure that produces a Derived Work under any applicable + law -- for example, the production of a file containing an + original file associated with the Work or a significant portion of + such a file, either verbatim or with modifications and/or + translated into another language. + + `Modify' + To apply any procedure that produces a Derived Work under any + applicable law. + + `Distribution' + Making copies of the Work available from one person to another, in + whole or in part. Distribution includes (but is not limited to) + making any electronic components of the Work accessible by + file transfer protocols such as FTP or HTTP or by shared file + systems such as Sun's Network File System (NFS). + + `Compiled Work' + A version of the Work that has been processed into a form where it + is directly usable on a computer system. This processing may + include using installation facilities provided by the Work, + transformations of the Work, copying of components of the Work, or + other activities. Note that modification of any installation + facilities provided by the Work constitutes modification of the Work. + + `Current Maintainer' + A person or persons nominated as such within the Work. If there is + no such explicit nomination then it is the `Copyright Holder' under + any applicable law. + + `Base Interpreter' + A program or process that is normally needed for running or + interpreting a part or the whole of the Work. + A Base Interpreter may depend on external components but these + are not considered part of the Base Interpreter provided that each + external component clearly identifies itself whenever it is used + interactively. Unless explicitly specified when applying the + license to the Work, the only applicable Base Interpreter is a + "LaTeX-Format". + + + +CONDITIONS ON DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION +=========================================== + +1. Activities other than distribution and/or modification of the Work +are not covered by this license; they are outside its scope. In +particular, the act of running the Work is not restricted and no +requirements are made concerning any offers of support for the Work. + +2. You may distribute a complete, unmodified copy of the Work as you +received it. Distribution of only part of the Work is considered +modification of the Work, and no right to distribute such a Derived +Work may be assumed under the terms of this clause. + +3. You may distribute a Compiled Work that has been generated from a +complete, unmodified copy of the Work as distributed under Clause 2 +above, as long as that Compiled Work is distributed in such a way that +the recipients may install the Compiled Work on their system exactly +as it would have been installed if they generated a Compiled Work +directly from the Work. + +4. If you are the Current Maintainer of the Work, you may, without +restriction, modify the Work, thus creating a Derived Work. You may +also distribute the Derived Work without restriction, including +Compiled Works generated from the Derived Work. Derived Works +distributed in this manner by the Current Maintainer are considered to +be updated versions of the Work. + +5. If you are not the Current Maintainer of the Work, you may modify +your copy of the Work, thus creating a Derived Work based on the Work, +and compile this Derived Work, thus creating a Compiled Work based on +the Derived Work. + +6. If you are not the Current Maintainer of the Work, you may +distribute a Derived Work provided the following conditions are met +for every component of the Work unless that component clearly states +in the copyright notice that it is exempt from that condition. Only +the Current Maintainer is allowed to add such statements of exemption +to a component of the Work. + + a. If a component of this Derived Work can be a direct replacement + for a component of the Work when that component is used with the + Base Interpreter, then, wherever this component of the Work + identifies itself to the user when used interactively with that + Base Interpreter, the replacement component of this Derived Work + clearly and unambiguously identifies itself as a modified version + of this component to the user when used interactively with that + Base Interpreter. + + b. Every component of the Derived Work contains prominent notices + detailing the nature of the changes to that component, or a + prominent reference to another file that is distributed as part + of the Derived Work and that contains a complete and accurate log + of the changes. + + c. No information in the Derived Work implies that any persons, + including (but not limited to) the authors of the original version + of the Work, provide any support, including (but not limited to) + the reporting and handling of errors, to recipients of the + Derived Work unless those persons have stated explicitly that + they do provide such support for the Derived Work. + + d. You distribute at least one of the following with the Derived Work: + + 1. A complete, unmodified copy of the Work; + if your distribution of a modified component is made by + offering access to copy the modified component from a + designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy + the Work from the same or some similar place meets this + condition, even though third parties are not compelled to + copy the Work along with the modified component; + + 2. Information that is sufficient to obtain a complete, unmodified + copy of the Work. + +7. If you are not the Current Maintainer of the Work, you may +distribute a Compiled Work generated from a Derived Work, as long as +the Derived Work is distributed to all recipients of the Compiled +Work, and as long as the conditions of Clause 6, above, are met with +regard to the Derived Work. + +8. The conditions above are not intended to prohibit, and hence do +not apply to, the modification, by any method, of any component so that it +becomes identical to an updated version of that component of the Work as +it is distributed by the Current Maintainer under Clause 4, above. + +9. Distribution of the Work or any Derived Work in an alternative +format, where the Work or that Derived Work (in whole or in part) is +then produced by applying some process to that format, does not relax or +nullify any sections of this license as they pertain to the results of +applying that process. + +10. a. A Derived Work may be distributed under a different license + provided that license itself honors the conditions listed in + Clause 6 above, in regard to the Work, though it does not have + to honor the rest of the conditions in this license. + + b. If a Derived Work is distributed under this license, that + Derived Work must provide sufficient documentation as part of + itself to allow each recipient of that Derived Work to honor the + restrictions in Clause 6 above, concerning changes from the Work. + +11. This license places no restrictions on works that are unrelated to +the Work, nor does this license place any restrictions on aggregating +such works with the Work by any means. + +12. Nothing in this license is intended to, or may be used to, prevent +complete compliance by all parties with all applicable laws. + + +NO WARRANTY +=========== + +There is no warranty for the Work. Except when otherwise stated in +writing, the Copyright Holder provides the Work `as is', without +warranty of any kind, either expressed or implied, including, but not +limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for +a particular purpose. The entire risk as to the quality and performance +of the Work is with you. Should the Work prove defective, you +assume the cost of all necessary servicing, repair, or correction. + +In no event unless agreed to in writing will the Copyright Holder, or +any author named in the components of the Work, or any other party who +may distribute and/or modify the Work as permitted above, be liable to +you for damages, including any general, special, incidental or +consequential damages arising out of any use of the Work or out of +inability to use the Work (including, but not limited to, loss of +data, data being rendered inaccurate, or losses sustained by anyone as +a result of any failure of the Work to operate with any other +programs), even if the Copyright Holder or said author or said other +party has been advised of the possibility of such damages. + + +MAINTENANCE OF THE WORK +======================= + +The Work has the status `author-maintained' if the Copyright Holder +explicitly and prominently states near the primary copyright notice in +the Work that the Work can only be maintained by the Copyright Holder +or simply that is `author-maintained'. + +The Work has the status `maintained' if there is a Current Maintainer +who has indicated in the Work that they are willing to receive error +reports for the Work (for example, by supplying a valid e-mail +address). It is not required for the Current Maintainer to acknowledge +or act upon these error reports. + +The Work changes from status `maintained' to `unmaintained' if there +is no Current Maintainer, or the person stated to be Current +Maintainer of the work cannot be reached through the indicated means +of communication for a period of six months, and there are no other +significant signs of active maintenance. + +You can become the Current Maintainer of the Work by agreement with +any existing Current Maintainer to take over this role. + +If the Work is unmaintained, you can become the Current Maintainer of +the Work through the following steps: + + 1. Make a reasonable attempt to trace the Current Maintainer (and + the Copyright Holder, if the two differ) through the means of + an Internet or similar search. + + 2. If this search is successful, then enquire whether the Work + is still maintained. + + a. If it is being maintained, then ask the Current Maintainer + to update their communication data within one month. + + b. If the search is unsuccessful or no action to resume active + maintenance is taken by the Current Maintainer, then announce + within the pertinent community your intention to take over + maintenance. (If the Work is a LaTeX work, this could be + done, for example, by posting to comp.text.tex.) + + 3a. If the Current Maintainer is reachable and agrees to pass + maintenance of the Work to you, then this takes effect + immediately upon announcement. + + b. If the Current Maintainer is not reachable and the Copyright + Holder agrees that maintenance of the Work be passed to you, + then this takes effect immediately upon announcement. + + 4. If you make an `intention announcement' as described in 2b. above + and after three months your intention is challenged neither by + the Current Maintainer nor by the Copyright Holder nor by other + people, then you may arrange for the Work to be changed so as + to name you as the (new) Current Maintainer. + + 5. If the previously unreachable Current Maintainer becomes + reachable once more within three months of a change completed + under the terms of 3b) or 4), then that Current Maintainer must + become or remain the Current Maintainer upon request provided + they then update their communication data within one month. + +A change in the Current Maintainer does not, of itself, alter the fact +that the Work is distributed under the LPPL license. + +If you become the Current Maintainer of the Work, you should +immediately provide, within the Work, a prominent and unambiguous +statement of your status as Current Maintainer. You should also +announce your new status to the same pertinent community as +in 2b) above. + + +WHETHER AND HOW TO DISTRIBUTE WORKS UNDER THIS LICENSE +====================================================== + +This section contains important instructions, examples, and +recommendations for authors who are considering distributing their +works under this license. These authors are addressed as `you' in +this section. + +Choosing This License or Another License +---------------------------------------- + +If for any part of your work you want or need to use *distribution* +conditions that differ significantly from those in this license, then +do not refer to this license anywhere in your work but, instead, +distribute your work under a different license. You may use the text +of this license as a model for your own license, but your license +should not refer to the LPPL or otherwise give the impression that +your work is distributed under the LPPL. + +The document `modguide.tex' in the base LaTeX distribution explains +the motivation behind the conditions of this license. It explains, +for example, why distributing LaTeX under the GNU General Public +License (GPL) was considered inappropriate. Even if your work is +unrelated to LaTeX, the discussion in `modguide.tex' may still be +relevant, and authors intending to distribute their works under any +license are encouraged to read it. + +A Recommendation on Modification Without Distribution +----------------------------------------------------- + +It is wise never to modify a component of the Work, even for your own +personal use, without also meeting the above conditions for +distributing the modified component. While you might intend that such +modifications will never be distributed, often this will happen by +accident -- you may forget that you have modified that component; or +it may not occur to you when allowing others to access the modified +version that you are thus distributing it and violating the conditions +of this license in ways that could have legal implications and, worse, +cause problems for the community. It is therefore usually in your +best interest to keep your copy of the Work identical with the public +one. Many works provide ways to control the behavior of that work +without altering any of its licensed components. + +How to Use This License +----------------------- + +To use this license, place in each of the components of your work both +an explicit copyright notice including your name and the year the work +was authored and/or last substantially modified. Include also a +statement that the distribution and/or modification of that +component is constrained by the conditions in this license. + +Here is an example of such a notice and statement: + + %% pig.dtx + %% Copyright 2003 M. Y. Name + % + % This work may be distributed and/or modified under the + % conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 + % of this license or (at your option) any later version. + % The latest version of this license is in + % http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt + % and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX + % version 2003/12/01 or later. + % + % This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". + % + % This Current Maintainer of this work is M. Y. Name. + % + % This work consists of the files pig.dtx and pig.ins + % and the derived file pig.sty. + +Given such a notice and statement in a file, the conditions +given in this license document would apply, with the `Work' referring +to the three files `pig.dtx', `pig.ins', and `pig.sty' (the last being +generated from `pig.dtx' using `pig.ins'), the `Base Interpreter' +referring to any "LaTeX-Format", and both `Copyright Holder' and +`Current Maintainer' referring to the person `M. Y. Name'. + +To prevent the Maintenance section of LPPL from allowing someone else +to become the Current Maintainer without your agreement, you could +change "maintained" above into "author-maintained". + + +Important Recommendations +------------------------- + + Defining What Constitutes the Work + + The LPPL requires that distributions of the Work contain all the + files of the Work. It is therefore important that you provide a + way for the licensee to determine which files constitute the Work. + This could, for example, be achieved by explicitly listing all the + files of the Work near the copyright notice of each file or by + using a line such as: + + % This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. + + in that place. In the absence of an unequivocal list it might be + impossible for the licensee to determine what is considered by you + to comprise the Work and, in such a case, the licensee would be + entitled to make reasonable conjectures as to which files comprise + the Work. + diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews01.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews01.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..67f7a3b184a --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews01.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews01.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews01.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..2bea531b802 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews01.tex @@ -0,0 +1,152 @@ +% \iffalse meta-comment +% +% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 +% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere +% in this file. +% +% This file is part of the LaTeX base system. +% ------------------------------------------- +% +% It may be distributed and/or modified under the +% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 +% of this license or (at your option) any later version. +% The latest version of this license is in +% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +% version 2003/12/01 or later. +% +% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". +% +% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is +% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional +% information. +% +% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution +% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with +% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. +% +% \fi +% Filename: ltnews01.tex + +% This is issue 1 of LaTeX News. + +\documentclass +% [type1fonts] + {ltnews} + +\publicationmonth{June} +\publicationyear{1994} +\publicationissue{1} + +\begin{document} + +\maketitle + +\section{Welcome to \LaTeXNews} + +An issue of \emph{\LaTeXNews} will accompany every future release of +\LaTeX. It will tell you about important events, such as major bug +fixes, newly available packages, or any other \LaTeX{} news. + +\section{\LaTeXe---the new \LaTeX{} release} + +The most important news is the release of \LaTeXe, the new version of +the \LaTeX{} software. This version has better support for fonts, +graphics and colour, and will be actively maintained by the \LaTeX3 +project team. Upgrades will be issued every six months, in June and +December. + +\section{Why a new \LaTeX?} + +Over the years many extensions have been developed for \LaTeX. This +is, of course, a sure sign of its continuing popularity but it has had +one unfortunate result: incompatible \LaTeX{} formats came into use at +different sites. Thus, to process documents from various places, a +site maintainer was forced to keep \LaTeX{} (with and without \NFSS), +\SLiTeX, \AmSLaTeX, and so on. In addition, when looking at a source +file it was not always clear for which format the document was written. + +To put an end to this unsatisfactory +situation a new release of \LaTeX{} was produced. +It brings all such extensions back under a single format and thus +prevents the proliferation of mutually incompatible dialects of +\LaTeX~2.09. The new release was available for several months as a +test version, and the final release of 1~June officially +replaces the old version. + +\section{Processing documents with \LaTeXe} + +Documents written for \LaTeX~2.09 will +still be read by \LaTeXe. Any such document is run in +\emph{\LaTeX~2.09 compatibility mode}. + +Unfortunately, compatibility mode comes with a price: it can run +up to 50\% slower than \LaTeX~2.09 did. If you want to run your document +in the faster \emph{native mode}, you should try replacing the line: +\begin{verbatim} + \documentstyle[<options>,<packages>]{<class>} +\end{verbatim} +with: +\begin{verbatim} + \documentclass[<options>]{<class>} + \usepackage{latexsym,<packages>} +\end{verbatim} +Unfortunately, this will not always work, because some \LaTeX~2.09 +packages will only work in \LaTeXe{} compatibility mode. You should find +out if there is a \LaTeXe{} version of the package available. + +\LaTeXe{} native mode also gives access to the new features of \LaTeXe, +described in \emph{\LaTeXe{} for authors}. + +\section{New packages} + +\LaTeXe{} has much better support for graphics, colour, fonts, and +multi-lingual typesetting. The following software should be available +from the distributor who brought you \LaTeXe: + +\begin{citations} +\item[babel] for typesetting in many languages. +\item[color] for colour support. +\item[graphics] for including images. +\item[mfnfss] for using bitmap fonts. +\item[psnfss] for using Type~1 fonts. +\item[tools] other packages by the \LaTeX3 team. +\end{citations} +The packages come with full documentation, and are also described in +\emph{\LaTeX: A Document Processing System} or +\emph{The \LaTeX{} Companion}. + +\section{Further information} + +More information about \LaTeXe{} is to be found in: + +\begin{citations} +\item[\LaTeX: A Document Preparation System] + Leslie Lamport, \AW, 2nd ed, 1994. +\item[The \LaTeX{} Companion] + Goossens, Mittelbach and Samarin, \AW, 1994. +\end{citations} +The \LaTeX{} distribution comes with documentation on the new features of +\LaTeX: + +\begin{citations} +\item[\LaTeXe{} for authors] + describes the new features of \LaTeX{} documents, + in the file \verb|usrguide.tex|. +\item[\LaTeXe{} for class and package writers] + describes the new features of \LaTeX{} classes and packages, + in the file \verb|clsguide.tex|. +\item[\LaTeXe{} font selection] + describes the new features of \LaTeX{} fonts for + class and package writers, + in the file \verb|fntguide.tex|. +\end{citations} +For more information on \TeX{} and \LaTeX, get in touch with your local +\TeX{} Users Group, or the international \TeX{} Users Group, +P.~O.~Box~869, Santa~Barbara, CA~93102-0869, USA, Fax:~+1~805~963~8358, +EMail:~tug@tug.org. + +\end{document} + + + diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews02.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews02.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..98bc7f18ea0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews02.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews02.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews02.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..91cf742de9e --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews02.tex @@ -0,0 +1,154 @@ +% \iffalse meta-comment +% +% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 +% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere +% in this file. +% +% This file is part of the LaTeX base system. +% ------------------------------------------- +% +% It may be distributed and/or modified under the +% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 +% of this license or (at your option) any later version. +% The latest version of this license is in +% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +% version 2003/12/01 or later. +% +% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". +% +% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is +% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional +% information. +% +% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution +% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with +% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. +% +% \fi +% Filename: ltnews02.tex + +% This is issue 2 of LaTeX News. + +\documentclass +% [lw35fonts] + {ltnews} + +\publicationmonth{December} +\publicationyear{1994} +\publicationissue{2} + +\begin{document} + +\maketitle + +\section{Welcome to \LaTeXNews~2} + +An issue of \emph{\LaTeXNews} will accompany every future release of +\LaTeX. It will tell you about important events, such as major bug +fixes, newly available packages, or any other \LaTeX{} news. + +\section{December 1994 release of \LaTeX} + +December 1994 sees the second release of \LaTeXe. We are on schedule +to deliver a release of \LaTeX{} every six months, in December and +June. + +This release has seen quite a lot of activity, which is not too +surprising as it's only been a year since the first test release of +\LaTeXe. We don't expect so much activity in the next six months. + +Many of the changes are minor improvements and bug-fixes---see +\emph{\LaTeXe{} for authors} (\verb|usrguide.tex|), \emph{\LaTeXe{} +font selection} (\verb|fntguide.tex|) and our change log +(\verb|changes.txt|) for more details. + +However, there are two important new packages available for \LaTeX: +\texttt{inputenc} and AMS-\LaTeX. + +\section{Accented input} + +One of the problems with writing non-English documents in \LaTeX{} is +the accent commands. Reading documents containing text like +\verb|na\"\i ve| is frustrating, especially if your keyboard allows +you to type \texttt{na\"\i ve}. + +In the past, \LaTeX{} has not supported input containing accented +characters such as \texttt{\"\i}, because Windows, Macintosh and Unix +all have different ways of dealing with accented input, called +\emph{input encodings}. + +However, the \verb|inputenc| package allows you to specify which input +encoding your document is written with, for example to use the ISO +Latin-1 encoding, you type: +\begin{verbatim} + \usepackage[latin1]{inputenc} +\end{verbatim} +At the moment, \verb|inputenc| supports the \verb|ascii| and +\verb|latin1| input encodings, but more will be added with future +releases. + +The \verb|inputenc| package is +currently a test release. The user interface for the full release will +be upwardly compatible with the test version. + +\section{AMS-\LaTeX{}} + + AMS-\LaTeX{} is a set of miscellaneous extensions for \LaTeX{} + distributed by the American Mathematical Society. They provide superior + information structure and superior printed output for mathematical + documents. + + There are far too many features of AMS-\LaTeX{} to list here. + AMS-\LaTeX{} is described in the accompanying documentation, + and in \emph{The \LaTeX{} Companion}. + + Version 1.2beta of AMS-\LaTeX{} was released for testing by intrepid + users in October 1994. The full release of AMS-\LaTeX{}~1.2 is expected + in early January 1995. + + It will be divided into two bundles: + \begin{itemize} + + \item the \verb|amsfonts| packages, which give access to + hundreds of new mathematical symbols, and new math fonts + such as blackboard bold and fraktur. + + \item the \verb|amsmath| packages, which provide finer control over + mathematical typesetting, such as multi-line subscripts, + enhanced theorem and proof environments, + and improved displayed equations, + + \end{itemize} + For compatibility with older documents, an \verb|amstex| package will be + provided. + +\section{\LaTeX{} on the internet} + +\LaTeX{} has its own home page on the World Wide Web, with the URL: +\begin{verbatim} + http://www.tex.ac.uk/CTAN/latex/ +\end{verbatim} +This page describes \LaTeX{} and the \LaTeX3 project, and contains +pointers to other \LaTeX{} resources, such as the user guides, the +\TeX{} Frequently Asked Questions, and the \LaTeX{} bugs database. + +The electronic home of anything \TeX-related is the Comprehensive +\TeX{} Archive Network (CTAN). This is a network of cooperating ftp +sites, with over a gigabyte of \TeX{} material: +\begin{verbatim} + ftp://ftp.tex.ac.uk/tex-archive/ + ftp://ftp.shsu.edu/tex-archive/ + ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/ +\end{verbatim} +For more information, see the \LaTeX{} home page. + +\section{Further information} + +For more information on \TeX{} and \LaTeX, get in touch with your local +\TeX{} Users Group, or the international \TeX{} Users Group, +P.~O.~Box~869, Santa~Barbara, CA~93102-0869, USA, Fax:~+1~805~963~8358, +EMail:~tug@tug.org. + + +\end{document} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews03.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews03.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..ac4faee1438 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews03.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews03.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews03.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..4cecadbf161 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews03.tex @@ -0,0 +1,145 @@ +% \iffalse meta-comment +% +% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 +% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere +% in this file. +% +% This file is part of the LaTeX base system. +% ------------------------------------------- +% +% It may be distributed and/or modified under the +% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 +% of this license or (at your option) any later version. +% The latest version of this license is in +% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +% version 2003/12/01 or later. +% +% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". +% +% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is +% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional +% information. +% +% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution +% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with +% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. +% +% \fi +% Filename: ltnews03.tex + +% This is issue 3 of LaTeX News. + +\documentclass +% [lw35fonts] + {ltnews} + +\publicationmonth{June} +\publicationyear{1995} +\publicationissue{3} + +\begin{document} + +\maketitle + +\section{Welcome to \LaTeXNews~3} + +An issue of \emph{\LaTeXNews} will accompany every future release of +\LaTeX. It will tell you about important events, such as major bug +fixes, newly available packages, or any other \LaTeX{} news. + +\section{June 1995 release of \LaTeX} + +June 1995 sees the third release of \LaTeXe. We are on schedule +to deliver a release of \LaTeX{} every six months, in December and +June. + +In the last \emph{\LaTeXNews}, we said ``we don't expect so much +activity in the next six months,'' which has turned out not to be +true! + +\section{Additional input encodings} + +In the last release of \LaTeX{} we distributed a test version of the +\texttt{inputenc} package which allows the use of input characters +other than just a--z and A--Z. The package has proved to be robust, +so we are now distributing an expanded version. +The new release comes with a number of input encodings: + +\begin{itemize} +\item \texttt{ascii} the standard encoding, +\item \texttt{latin1} the ISO Western European alphabet, +\item \texttt{latin2} the ISO Eastern European alphabet, +\item \texttt{cp437} the IBM codepage 437, +\item \texttt{cp850} the IBM codepage 850, and +\item \texttt{applemac} the Apple Macintosh encoding. +\end{itemize} +These can be used by specifying an option to the \texttt{inputenc} +package, for example: +\begin{verbatim} + \usepackage[latin1]{inputenc} +\end{verbatim} +The new input encodings are currently being tested, but we don't +expect any major changes. + +\section{\LaTeX\ getting smaller} + +In the past releases of \LaTeXe, the amount of memory \LaTeX{} +requires has increased, but we are pleased to say that this trend has +been reversed. We hope that future releases of \LaTeX{} will continue +to get smaller. + +For example, on this document, the December 1994 release used 52,622 +words of memory, and the June 1995 release uses 51,216 words of +memory, which is a 2.7\% reduction. + +We are currently experimenting with other ways of reducing the size of +\LaTeX. For example, we are experimenting with an option to remove +the \texttt{picture} and \texttt{tabbing} environments from the +\LaTeX{} kernel, and to load them from a file the first time they are +used. This should help \LaTeX{} to run on machines with limited +memory. See \texttt{autoload.txt} for details. + +\section{Distribution and modification} + +One topic of discussion that has kept us busy is the distribution and +modification conditions of \LaTeX. We are committed to keeping +\LaTeX{} as free reliable software, and ensuring that (as far as +possible) \LaTeX{} documents will produce the same results on all +systems. + +The modification conditions are currently under discussion, and we +would like to hear from anyone interested. Please read +\texttt{modguide.tex} for more information. + +\section{AMS-\LaTeX\ full release} + +The AMS-\LaTeX\ packages were still in beta test in the December 1994 +release of \LaTeX, and the full release came out in January 1995. + +AMS-\LaTeX\ is described in the \emph{User's Guide} +(\texttt{amsldoc.tex}) and in \emph{The \LaTeX{} Companion}. + +\section{PostScript fonts} + +There is a new test release of the PSNFSS packages for accessing +PostScript fonts in \LaTeXe. This includes an update to all of the +fonts, to remove many of the underfull and overfull \verb|\hbox| +warnings, and improve the setting of non-English languages. + +The new release of \LaTeX{} removes all of the `hidden' uses of +Computer Modern mathematics. For example, the footnote markers used +to use math mode, so always used Computer Modern digits rather than +ones from the current text font. This has now been fixed. + +\section{Further information} + +For more information on \TeX{} and \LaTeX, get in touch with your local +\TeX{} Users Group, or the international \TeX{} Users Group, +P.~O.~Box~869, Santa~Barbara, CA~93102-0869, USA, Fax:~+1~805~963~8358, +EMail:~tug@tug.org. + +The \LaTeX{} home page is \verb|http://www.tex.ac.uk/ctan/latex/| +and contains links to other WWW resources for \LaTeX. + +\end{document} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews04.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews04.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..ec90da3780a --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews04.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews04.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews04.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..ea81f7d5320 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews04.tex @@ -0,0 +1,143 @@ +% \iffalse meta-comment +% +% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 +% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere +% in this file. +% +% This file is part of the LaTeX base system. +% ------------------------------------------- +% +% It may be distributed and/or modified under the +% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 +% of this license or (at your option) any later version. +% The latest version of this license is in +% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +% version 2003/12/01 or later. +% +% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". +% +% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is +% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional +% information. +% +% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution +% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with +% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. +% +% \fi +% Filename: ltnews04.tex + +% This is issue 4 of LaTeX News. + +\documentclass +% [lw35fonts] + {ltnews} + + +\publicationmonth{December} +\publicationyear{1995} +\publicationissue{4} + +\begin{document} + +\maketitle + +\section{Welcome to \LaTeXNews~4} + +An issue of \emph{\LaTeXNews} will accompany every future release of +\LaTeX. It will tell you about important events, such as major bug +fixes, newly available packages, or any other \LaTeX{} news. +This issue accompanies the fourth release of \LaTeXe. + + +\section{\LaTeX\ getting smaller} + +The last release in June started a trend of \LaTeX\ becoming +smaller, we are pleased to announce that this has continued with this +release. In particular the experimental `autoload' version described in +\texttt{autoload.txt} is much smaller as more parts of \LaTeX\ are +autoloaded. + +\section{New `concurrent' docstrip} + +The time taken to `unpack' this release from the documented sources +should be much reduced (roughly half the time, depending on +installation conditions). This is due to an improved version of the +docstrip program that has been contributed by Marcin Woli\'nski. +This can write up to 16 files at once. The +previous version could only write one file at a time which meant that +it was very slow when producing many small files from the same source +file as the source needed to be re-read for each file written. + +\section{New T1 encoded fonts} + +This year J\"org Knappen has completed a new release of the `Cork' +(T1) encoded Computer Modern fonts: the dc fonts release 1.2. + +This release of the dc fonts fixes many bugs (including the missing +\verb|?`| (?`) and \verb|!`| (!`) ligatures) and improves the fonts in +many other ways. It is strongly recommended that you upgrade as soon as +possible if currently you are using the old dc fonts, release 1.1 or +earlier. The new fonts are available from the CTAN archives, in +\texttt{tex-archive/fonts/dc}. + +The names of the font files are \emph{different}. This does not affect +\LaTeX\ documents but \emph{does} affect the installation procedure as +it assumes that you have the \emph{new} fonts, and will write suitable +`fd' files for those fonts. If you have not yet upgraded your dc fonts +then, after unpacking the distribution, you \emph{must} +\verb|latex olddc.ins| to produce `fd' files for the old dc fonts. +This must be done \emph{before} the format is made. Running the test +document at \texttt{ltxcheck.tex} the end of the installation will +inform you if the wrong set of `fd' files has been installed. + +Note that this change does not affect the standard `OT1' Computer +Modern fonts that \LaTeX\ uses by default. + +\section{More robust commands} + +The commands \verb|\cite| and \verb|\sqrt| are now robust. + +Although most commands with optional arguments are fragile, as +documented, such commands defined using the second optional argument +of \verb|\newcommand| and its derivatives are now \emph{robust}. + +\section{New Interface to building `extension' classes} + +The mechanism provided by \verb|\DeclareOption|, \verb|\ProcessOptions| +and \verb|\LoadClass| has proved to be a powerful and expressive means +of defining one class in terms of another `base' class. However there +have been some requests to simplify the declaration of the common case +where you want the `base' class to be called with \emph{all} the +options that were specified to the extension class. This is now +provided by the new command \verb|\LoadClassWithOptions|. A similar +command \verb|\RequirePackageWithOptions| is provided for package use. +More details of this feature are provided in \texttt{clsguide.tex} and +\texttt{ltclass.dtx}. + +\section{More Input Encodings} + +The experimental \texttt{inputenc} package allows a more natural style +of input of accented and other characters. + +Three new input encodings are now supported. +\begin{itemize} +\item \texttt{ansinew} the Windows ansi encoding, + as used in Microsoft Windows 3.x. +\item \texttt{cp437de} a variant of \texttt{cp437}, which uses \ss\ + rather than $\beta$ in the appropriate slot. +\item \texttt{next} the encoding used on Next computers. +\end{itemize} + +\section{Further information} + +For more information on \TeX{} and \LaTeX, get in touch with your local +\TeX{} Users Group, or the international \TeX{} Users Group, +1850 Union Street, \#1637, San Francisco, CA~94123, USA, +Fax:~+1~415~982~8559, +EMail:~tug@tug.org. +The \LaTeX{} home page is \verb|http://www.tex.ac.uk/ctan/latex/| +and contains links to other WWW resources for \LaTeX. + +\end{document} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews05.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews05.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..92f4aeb1c06 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews05.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews05.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews05.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..e346484c11b --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews05.tex @@ -0,0 +1,158 @@ +% \iffalse meta-comment +% +% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 +% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere +% in this file. +% +% This file is part of the LaTeX base system. +% ------------------------------------------- +% +% It may be distributed and/or modified under the +% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 +% of this license or (at your option) any later version. +% The latest version of this license is in +% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +% version 2003/12/01 or later. +% +% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". +% +% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is +% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional +% information. +% +% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution +% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with +% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. +% +% \fi +% Filename: ltnews05.tex + +% This is issue 5 of LaTeX News. + +\documentclass +% [lw35fonts] + {ltnews} + +% \usepackage[T1]{fontenc} + +\publicationmonth{June} +\publicationyear{1996} +\publicationissue{5} + +\begin{document} + +\maketitle + +\section{Welcome to \LaTeXNews~5} +This issue of \emph{\LaTeXNews} accompanies the fifth release of the +new standard \LaTeX{}, \LaTeXe. + +\section{Extra possibilities for section headings} +Most \LaTeX\ sectioning commands are defined using +\verb|\@startsection|. +For example, the \textsf{article} class defines: +\begin{small} +\begin{verbatim} +\newcommand\section{\@startsection + {section}{1}{0pt}{-3.5ex plus-1ex minus-.2ex}% + {2.3ex plus.2ex}{\normalfont\Large\bfseries}} +\end{verbatim} +\end{small} +The last argument specifies the style in which the section heading is +to be typeset. + +The new feature added at this release is that at the \emph{end} of +this argument you may specify a command that \emph{takes an argument}. +This command will be applied to the section number and heading. +For example, one could use the \verb|\MakeUppercase| command to +produce uppercase headings. A package or class file could contain: +\begin{small} +\begin{verbatim} +\renewcommand\section{\@startsection + {section}{1}{0pt}{-3.5ex plus-1ex minus-.2ex}% + {2.3ex plus.2ex}{\normalfont\Large\MakeUppercase}} +\end{verbatim} +\end{small} +to produce section headings using uppercase medium weight text, rather +than the bold text used by \textsf{article}. Note that, like the font +choice, the uppercasing applies only to the actual heading (including +any automatically generated section number), not to the text as it may +appear in the running head or table of contents. + +\section{The `openany' option in the `book' class} +The \textsf{openany} option allows chapter and similar openings to +occur on left hand pages. Previously this option only affected +\verb|\chapter| and \verb|\backmatter|. It now also affects +\verb|\part|, \verb|\frontmatter| and \verb|\mainmatter|. + +\section{More font (output) encodings} +The font encoding name \texttt{T3} has been allocated to the encoding +used in the new 256-character \textsc{IPA} fonts (for the phonetic +alphabet) produced by Rei Fukui. His package, \textsf{tipa}, +gives access to these fonts and should soon be available. (The +encoding named \texttt{OT3} is the 128-character encoding used in the +\textsc{IPA} fonts produced by Washington State University.) + + + +\section{More input encodings supported} +The \textsf{inputenc} package now supports the IBM codepage~852 used +in Eastern Europe, with the option~\texttt{[cp852]} contributed by +Petr~Sojka. + +Also, the \textsf{inputenc} package now activates most `control codes' +with \textsc{ascii} values below 32. +Currently none of the encodings in the standard distribution makes use +of these positions. + +\section{Fixes and improvements} +The \LaTeX\ kernel has only had minor changes, apart from +\verb|\@startsection| mentioned above. +However, some small fixes have been incorporated removing the +following problems: + +\begin{itemize} +\item + In tabular and array, previous versions of \LaTeX\ `lost' the + inter-column space from an `\texttt{l}'-column, when that column + was completely empty. + +\item + Previously, the use of the \verb|\nofiles| command could change + the \emph{vertical spacing} in a document.\\ A side effect of fixing + this is that when \verb|\nofiles| is used, \verb|\label| puts a + blank line in the log file. + +\item + \LaTeX~often loads fonts `on demand'. Previously, this could + happen inside the argument of an accent command and this would + cause the accent to appear in the wrong place. + +\end{itemize} + +\section{Changes to the `tools' packages} + +\begin{itemize} +\item + The \textsf{longtable} package now uses a modified algorithm, + contributed by David Kastrup, to align the `chunks' of a table. + It is now unnecessary to edit the document to add + \verb|\setlongtables| before the final run of \LaTeX. + In certain cases of overlapping \verb|\multicolumn| entries, the new + algorithm will produce better column widths than the old (at the + price of extra passes through \LaTeX). + +\item + The \textsf{dcolumn} package now has the extra possibility of + specifying the number of digits both \emph{before} and after the + `decimal point'. This makes it easy to centre the column of numbers + under a wide heading. +\end{itemize} + +\section{New copy of the \LaTeX\ bug database} +\verb|http://www.tex.ac.uk/ctan/latex/bugs.html| will soon have links +to a copy of the searchable \LaTeX\ bugs database at Mainz (Germany) +as well as the original copy at Sussex (England). + +\end{document} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews06.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews06.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..0396c273659 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews06.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews06.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews06.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..20b9c7d6b09 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews06.tex @@ -0,0 +1,149 @@ +% \iffalse meta-comment +% +% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 +% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere +% in this file. +% +% This file is part of the LaTeX base system. +% ------------------------------------------- +% +% It may be distributed and/or modified under the +% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 +% of this license or (at your option) any later version. +% The latest version of this license is in +% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +% version 2003/12/01 or later. +% +% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". +% +% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is +% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional +% information. +% +% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution +% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with +% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. +% +% \fi +% Filename: ltnews06.tex + +% This is issue 6 of LaTeX News. + +\documentclass +% [lw35fonts] + {ltnews} + +% \usepackage[T1]{fontenc} + +\publicationmonth{December} +\publicationyear{1996} +\publicationissue{6} + +\begin{document} + +\maketitle + +\section{Welcome to \LaTeXNews~6} +This issue of \emph{\LaTeXNews} accompanies the sixth release of the +new standard \LaTeX{}, \LaTeXe. + +\section{Mono-case file names} +Previously \LaTeX\ has used some files with `mixed-case' file names +such as \texttt{T1cmr.fd} and \texttt{T1enc.def}. + +These file names cause problems on some systems (in particular they +are illegal on the ISO 9660 CDROM format) and so in this release +all file names have been made lowercase (for example +\texttt{t1cmr.fd} and \texttt{t1enc.def}). + +This change should \emph{not} affect any document. Within \LaTeX, +encodings still have the usual uppercase names in uses such as +\verb|\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}| and \verb|\fontencoding{T1}|. +\LaTeX\ will automatically convert to the lowercase form while +constructing the file name. +\LaTeX\ will input the `fd' file under the old name if it fails to +find the file with the new name, so existing collections of fd files +should still work with this new release. + +The change \emph{does} affect the configuration files that may be used +to make the \LaTeX\ format with initex. For example, the file +\texttt{fonttext.ltx} previously specified \verb|\input{T1cmr.fd}|. +It now has \verb|\input{t1cmr.fd}|. +If you use a local file \texttt{fonttext.cfg} +you will need to make similar changes, as \verb|\input{T1cmr.fd}| +will not work as \texttt{T1cmr.fd} is no longer in the distribution. + +The files affected by this change all have names of the form +\verb|*.fd| or \verb|*enc.def|. + +\section{Another input encoding} +Thanks to work by S\o ren Sandmann, the \textsf{inputenc} package now +supports the IBM codepage~865 used in Scandinavia. + +\section{Better user-defined math display environments} +Suppose that you want to define an environment for displaying text +that is numbered as an equation. A straightforward way to do this is +as follows: +\begin{verbatim} + \newenvironment{texteqn} + {\begin{equation} + \begin{minipage}{0.9\linewidth}} + {\end{minipage} + \end{equation}} +\end{verbatim} +However, if you have tried this then you will probably have noticed +that it does not work perfectly when used in the middle of a paragraph +because an inter-word space appears at the beginning of the first +line after the environment. + +There is now an extra command (with a very long name) available that +you can use to avoid this problem; it should be inserted as shown here: +\begin{verbatim} + \newenvironment{texteqn} + {\begin{equation} + \begin{minipage}{0.9\linewidth}} + {\end{minipage} + \end{equation} + \ignorespacesafterend} +\end{verbatim} + +\section{Docstrip improvements} +The \textsf{docstrip} program that is used to unpack the \LaTeX\ +sources has undergone further development. The new version should be +able to process all old `batchfiles' but it allows a simpler syntax in +new `batchfiles' (no need to define \verb|\def\batchfile{|\ldots). + +It also allows `target' directories to be specified when writing +files. This directory support is disabled by default unless activated +in a local \texttt{docstrip.cfg} configuration file. +See \texttt{docstrip.dtx} for details. + +\section{AMS \LaTeX\ update} +Since the last \LaTeX\ release in June, the American Mathematical +Society have re-issued the `AMS\LaTeX' classes and packages, fixing +several reported problems. + +\section{Graphics package update} +The \LaTeX\ color and graphics packages have been updated slightly, +principally to support more dvi drivers, see the readme file in the +\textsf{graphics} distribution. + +\section{EC Fonts released} +The first release of the Extended Computer Modern fonts has just been +made. (In January 1997.) + +This release of \LaTeX\ does \emph{not} default to these `ec' fonts +as its T1 encoded fonts. By default it will +use the `dc' fonts if the T1 encoding is requested. + +As noted in \texttt{install.txt} you may run \TeX\ on the install file +\texttt{ec.ins} \emph{after} unpacking the base distribution but +\emph{before} making the \LaTeX\ format. This will produce +suitable `fd' files making \LaTeX\ (including, for the first time, the +\textsf{slides} class) use the `ec' fonts as the default T1 encoded +font set. + + +\end{document} + diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews07.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews07.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..ee5da998e97 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews07.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews07.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews07.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..e9f8cec1483 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews07.tex @@ -0,0 +1,146 @@ +% \iffalse meta-comment +% +% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 +% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere +% in this file. +% +% This file is part of the LaTeX base system. +% ------------------------------------------- +% +% It may be distributed and/or modified under the +% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 +% of this license or (at your option) any later version. +% The latest version of this license is in +% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +% version 2003/12/01 or later. +% +% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". +% +% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is +% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional +% information. +% +% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution +% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with +% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. +% +% \fi +% Filename: ltnews07.tex + +% This is issue 7 of LaTeX News. + +\documentclass +% [lw35fonts] + {ltnews} + +% \usepackage[T1]{fontenc} + +\publicationmonth{June} +\publicationyear{1997} +\publicationissue{7} + +\begin{document} + +\maketitle + +\section{T1 encoded Computer Modern fonts} +As in the last release the base \LaTeX\ distribution contains +three different sets of `fd' files for T1 encoded fonts. + +In this release the default installation uses \texttt{ec.ins} +and so installs files suitable for the current `EC fonts' +distribution. If you have still not updated to the EC fonts and +are using the earlier test versions, known as DC then you should +unpack \texttt{newdc.ins} (for DC release 1.2 or later) or +\texttt{olddc.ins} (for the original releases of the DC fonts). +This should be done after unpacking \texttt{unpack.ins} but +before making the format by running ini\TeX{} on \texttt{latex.ltx}. +There are further details in \texttt{install.txt}. + + +\section{T1 encoded Concrete fonts} +The Metafont sources for T1 encoded `Concrete' fonts have been +removed from the \textsf{mfnss} distribution as they were based +on the now obsolete DC fonts release 1.1. Similarly the +\textsf{cmextra.ins} install file in the \textsf{base} distribution no +longer generates fd files for the `Concrete' fonts. +To use these fonts in either T1 or OT1 encoding it is +recommended that you obtain Walter Schmidt's \textsf{ccfonts} package +and fonts from CTAN \texttt{macros/latex/contrib/supported/ccfonts}. + + +\section{Further input encodings} +Two more \textsf{inputenc} packages have been added: for latin5, +thanks to H. Turgut Uyar; and for latin3, thanks to J\"org Knappen. + + +\section{Normalising spacing after punctuation} +The command \verb|\normalsfcodes| was introduced at the last patch +release. This is normally given the correct definition automatically +and so need not be explicitly set. It is used to correct a problem, +reported by Donald Arseneau, that punctuation in page headers has +always (in all known \TeX\ formats) been potentially incorrect if the +page break happens while a local setting of the space codes (for +instance by the command \verb|\frenchspacing|) is in effect. A common +example of this happening in \LaTeX\ is in the \textsf{verbatim} +environment. + + +\section{Accessing Bold Math Symbols} +The \textsf{tools} distribution contains a new package, \textsf{bm}, +which defines a command \verb|\bm| that allows individual bold symbols +to be accessed within a math expression (in contrast to +\verb|\boldmath| which makes whole math expressions default to bold +fonts). It is more general than the existing \textsf{amsbsy} package; +however, to ease the translation of documents between these two +packages, \textsf{bm} makes \verb|\boldsymbol| an alias for +\verb|\bm|. + +This package was previously made available from the `contrib' area of +the CTAN archives, and as part of Y\&Y's \LaTeX\ support for the +MathTime fonts. + + +\section{Policy on standard classes} + +Many of the problem reports we receive concerning the standard classes +are not concerned with bugs but are suggesting, more or less politely, +that the design decisions embodied in them are `not optimal' and +asking us to modify them. + +There are several reasons why we have decided not to make such changes +to these files. +\begin{itemize} +\item + However misguided, the current behaviour is clearly what was + intended when these classes were designed. +\item + It is not good practice to change such aspects of `standard classes' + because many people will be relying on them. +\end{itemize} + +We have therefore decided not to even consider making such +modifications, nor to spend time justifying that decision. This does +not mean that we do not agree that there are many deficiencies in the +design of these classes, but we have many tasks with higher priority +than continually explaining why the standard classes for \LaTeX{} +cannot be changed. + +We would, of course, welcome the production of better classes, or of +packages that can be used to enhance these classes. + + +\section{New addresses for TUG} +For information about joining the \TeX{} Users Group, and about lots +of other \LaTeX-related matters, please contact +them at their new address: +\begin{quote}\small + \TeX{} Users Group, P.O. Box 1239,\\ + Three Rivers, CA~93271-1239, USA\\ + Fax:~+1~209~561~4584\\ + E-mail: \texttt{tug@mail.tug.org}\\ + URL: \texttt{http://www.tug.org/} +\end{quote} + +\end{document} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews08.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews08.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..ff24fa69654 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews08.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews08.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews08.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..2de84c6ef17 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews08.tex @@ -0,0 +1,154 @@ +% \iffalse meta-comment +% +% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 +% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere +% in this file. +% +% This file is part of the LaTeX base system. +% ------------------------------------------- +% +% It may be distributed and/or modified under the +% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 +% of this license or (at your option) any later version. +% The latest version of this license is in +% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +% version 2003/12/01 or later. +% +% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". +% +% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is +% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional +% information. +% +% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution +% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with +% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. +% +% \fi +% Filename: ltnews08.tex + +% This is issue 8 of LaTeX News. + +\documentclass +% [lw35fonts] + {ltnews} + +% \usepackage[T1]{fontenc} + +\publicationmonth{December} +\publicationyear{1997} +\publicationissue{8} + +\begin{document} + +\maketitle + +\section{New supported font encodings} + +Two new font encodings are supported as options to the \textsf{fontenc} +package: +\begin{description} +\item [OT4] +This is a seven-bit encoding designed for Polish. The \LaTeX\ support +was developed by Mariusz Olko. +\item [TS1] This is the `Text Companion Encoding'; it contains symbols +designed to be used in text, as opposed to mathematical formulas, and +some accents designed for uppercase letters. It is currently +supported by the `tc' fonts, which match the T1 encoded `ec' text +fonts. A subset of the glyphs in this encoding is supported by +virtual fonts distributed with the PostScript font metrics on the +\textsc{ctan} archives. (This is the `8c' encoding in Karl Berry's +fontname scheme.) The \textsf{textcomp} package provides access to +this encoding but here is a warning to current users of that package: +some of the internal names for the characters have changed. +\end{description} + + +\section{New input encodings} + +These additions to the \textsf{inputenc} package are +\texttt{decmulti} (the DEC Multinational +Character Set, contributed by M.~Y.~Chartoire) +and \texttt{cp1250} (an MS-Windows encoding for Central and Eastern +Europe, contributed by Marcin Woli\'nski). There is also a +\texttt{cp1252} encoding that is identical to \texttt{ansinew}. + + +\section{Tools} + +The \textsf{calc} package (used in many examples in \emph{The \LaTeX\ +Companion}) has been contributed to this distribution by Kresten Krab +Thorup and Frank Jensen. This is essentially the same as the version +that has been available from the \textsc{ctan} archives for some time, +with one minor change: to use \LaTeX-style error messages. It enables +the use of arithmetic expressions within arguments to standard +\LaTeX{} commands where a length or a counter value is required. For +example: +\begin{verbatim} + \setcounter {page} { \value{page} * 2 + 1 } + \parbox { 3in - ( 2mm + \textwidth / 9 ) } +\end{verbatim} + +There have also been some improvements to several other packages in +this collection. In particular, \textsf{bm} now works correctly with +constructions such as \verb|\bm{f'}| involving \texttt{'} or other +characters which use \TeX's special ``\verb|\mathcode"8000|'' +feature. Also, \textsf{multicol} sets the length \verb|\columnwidth| +to an appropriate value; this enables it to work with classes that +support two-column setting, e.g.,~the AMS classes. + + +\section{Graphics} + +The special \verb|oztex.def| driver file has been removed, and Oz\TeX\ +support has been merged with dvips, following advice from +Andrew Trevorrow about Oz\TeX~3.x. + +The \textsf{keyval} package has had some internal improvements: to +use \LaTeX\ format error messages; and to avoid `\verb|#| doubling'. +This latter change means that the \verb|command| key for the +\textsf{graphicx} version of \verb|\includegraphics| should now be used +with one \verb|#| rather than two. For example, \verb|command = `gunzip #1|. +Fortunately this key is almost never used in practice, so few if any +documents should be affected by this change. + + +\section{\LaTeX3 experimental programming conventions} + +As announced at the \TeX\ Users Group meeting (Summer 1997), a group of +highly experimental packages will soon be released to allow experienced\\ +\TeX\ programmers to experiment with, and comment on, a proposed set +of syntax conventions and basic data-types that might form +the basis for programming large scale projects in \TeX. +They will be located in\\ +this CTAN directory: +\begin{verbatim} + CTAN:macros/latex/packages/expl3 +\end{verbatim} +The documentation of this material is as follows: individual package +files provide outline, draft documentation; there is an article that +gives an overview of the syntax and related concepts; there is a +\texttt{readme.txt} file containing a brief description of the +collection. + +All aspects of these packages are liable, indeed likely, to change. +They should not be used at this stage for anything +that requires a stable system. However, we do encourage people to +experiment with these packages, and to send comments on them to the +\texttt{LaTeX-L} mailing list. +To subscribe to this list, mail to: +\begin{verbatim} + listserv@urz.uni-heidelberg.de +\end{verbatim} +the following one line message: +\begin{verbatim} + subscribe LATEX-L <<first-name>> <<second-name>> +\end{verbatim} + +% Revert to this if gets too full. +% See \texttt{modguide.tex} for +% information on how to subscribe to \texttt{LaTeX-L}. + +\end{document} + diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews09.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews09.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..fcd68e60678 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews09.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews09.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews09.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..bf6099ca8e9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews09.tex @@ -0,0 +1,142 @@ +% \iffalse meta-comment +% +% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 +% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere +% in this file. +% +% This file is part of the LaTeX base system. +% ------------------------------------------- +% +% It may be distributed and/or modified under the +% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 +% of this license or (at your option) any later version. +% The latest version of this license is in +% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +% version 2003/12/01 or later. +% +% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". +% +% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is +% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional +% information. +% +% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution +% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with +% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. +% +% \fi +% Filename: ltnews09.tex + +% This is issue 9 of LaTeX News. + +\documentclass +% [lw35fonts] + {ltnews}[1999/02/23] + +%\usepackage[T1]{fontenc} + +\publicationmonth{June} +\publicationyear{1998} +\publicationissue{9} + +\begin{document} + +\maketitle + + +\section{New math font encodings} + +A joint working group of the \TeX{} Users Group and the \LaTeX3 +Project is developing a new 8-bit math font encoding for \TeX{}. +It is designed to overcome several limitations and implementation +problems of the old math font encodings and to simplify switching +between different sets of math fonts, much as the \LaTeX{} font +selection interface has simplified switching between text fonts. + +Since the work on this project relies entirely on volunteer work, we +cannot give a specific release date yet. However, a prototype +implementation already exists. This contains several sets of virtual +fonts, some \LaTeX{} packages and a kernel module; we hope to +integrate it into the main \LaTeX{} distribution for the next +release. + +Documents using only standard \LaTeX{} commands for math symbols +should not be affected by switching to the new math font encodings +However, documents, classes or packages making specific assumptions +about the encoding of math symbol fonts are likely to break. + +Further information about the Math Font Group may be found on +the World Wide Web at \texttt{http://www.tug.org/twg/mfg/}. + + +\section{A new math accent} + +A new math accent, \verb|\mathring|, has been added. This is a math mode +version of the ring accent (\r{}) which is available in text +mode with the command \verb|\r|. + +\section{Extended \cs{DeclareMathDelimiter}} + +The command \verb|\DeclareMathDelimiter| has been extended. +Normally this command takes six arguments. Previously, when being used +to declare a character (such as \texttt{[}) as a delimiter, a variant +form was used with only five arguments. The argument specifying the +default `math class' was omitted. Now the full six-argument form may be +used in this case. The extra information is used to implicitly declare +the character via \verb|\DeclareMathSymbol| for use when the symbol is +not used with \verb|\left| or \verb|\right|. + +The old five-argument form is detected and will work as before. + +\newpage + +\section{Tools distribution} + +The \texttt{multicol} package now supports the production of multiple +columns without balancing the last page. To get this effect use the +\texttt{multicols*} environment. + +The \texttt{layout} package was partly recoded by Hideo Umeki to +display page layout effects in a better way. + +As suggested by Donald Arseneau, the \texttt{calc} package was extended +to support the new commands \verb|\widthof{<text>}|, +\verb|\heightof{<text>}|, and \verb|\depthof{<text>}| within a +\texttt{calc}-expression. At the same time we modified a few kernel +commands so that \texttt{calc}-expressions can now be used in various +useful places such as the dimension arguments to the \texttt{tabular} +environment and the \verb|\rule| command. For many other standard +\LaTeX{} commands this was already possible. + + +\section{Support for Cyrillic encodings} + +We are very pleased that, after a lengthy period of development, a set +of fonts, encodings and support files for using \LaTeX\ with Cyrillic +characters will soon be available. + +Test versions of the `LH' fonts for these Cyrillic encodings, based on +the Computer Modern design, are available from CTAN archives in the +directory \texttt{fonts/cyrillic/lh-test}. The \LaTeX\ support files +(by Werner Lemberg and Vladimir Volovich) are also available from CTAN +archives in\\ + \texttt{macros/latex/contrib/supported/t2} + + +\section{Default docstrip header} + +Many \LaTeX\ users now distribute packages in documented source form +using the \textsf{docstrip} system. Docstrip allows a header to be +placed on generated package files, suitable for giving copyright +information, or distribution conditions. + +We have changed the default version of this header so that it allows +stripped files to be distributed in ready-to-run installations such as +the \TeX{}Live CD\@. If you use the default header for distributing +your files you should check that the new copyright text is acceptable +to you. The file \texttt{docstrip.dtx} explains how to produce your own +header if you wish to do so. + + +\end{document} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews10.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews10.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..bf879f9cdaf --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews10.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews10.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews10.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..bdaef0d9193 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews10.tex @@ -0,0 +1,153 @@ +% \iffalse meta-comment +% +% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 +% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere +% in this file. +% +% This file is part of the LaTeX base system. +% ------------------------------------------- +% +% It may be distributed and/or modified under the +% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 +% of this license or (at your option) any later version. +% The latest version of this license is in +% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +% version 2003/12/01 or later. +% +% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". +% +% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is +% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional +% information. +% +% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution +% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with +% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. +% +% \fi +% Filename: ltnews10.tex 12/01/1998 + +% This is issue 10 of LaTeX News. + +\documentclass +% [lw35fonts] + {ltnews}[1999/02/23] + +% \usepackage[T1]{fontenc} + +\publicationmonth{December} +\publicationyear{1998} +\publicationissue{10} + +\begin{document} + +\maketitle + + +\section{Five years of \LaTeXe} + +Since this is the 10th edition of \LaTeX{} News, the (no longer) New +Standard \LaTeX{} must have hit the streets almost this long ago. In +fact it was only the beta-version that some people got just in time for +Christmas~1993, and since then there has been a lot of tidying-up and +smoothing of rough edges (not to mention a few bug fixes!). + +Maybe it is time for something more radically different to emerge and +be hungrily adopted by the world; but don't panic, we shall be +maintaining what you have now for a long time yet. Amongst the more +polite things that have been written about our efforts, we found that this +quote (somewhat censored to protect the guilty) well reflects some of +our feelings about working on \LaTeX{} over the years: \textit{the mere +existence of \LaTeXe{} is a great miracle}. + + + \section{Restructuring the \LaTeX{} distribution} + + Since the (once) `new' standard \LaTeX{} has reached such a venerable + age, we are reviewing the way in which the system is presented to the + world. + + An early intention is to define, given the wide variety of good + packages now available, what now constitutes a useful installation of + \LaTeX{}. We also hope that such a definition will help document + portability if it leads to a future in which a \LaTeX{} class + designer can reasonably assume that a known list of + facilities will be there for all users (so that each class + need not supply them). + + As a first small step towards this definition, we shall replace the + \texttt{latex/packages} subdirectory on \ctan{}. + This directory was a curious mixture of the important, such as the + \LaTeX{} \texttt{tools}, that any self-respecting \LaTeX{} + installation ought to have, and the esoteric or experimental. + + The esoterica from \texttt{packages} will be moved to + new locations, as follows: + \begin{quote} + \texttt{expl3} to \texttt{latex/exptl/project}\\ + \texttt{mfnfss} to \texttt{latex/contrib/supported/mfnfss} + \end{quote} + + The subdirectory that replaces \texttt{packages} will be called + \texttt{latex/required}; all the other sub-directories of + \texttt{packages} will be moved there. + +\vspace{17pt} +\pagebreak + + \section{\LaTeX\ Project on the Internet} +A new \texttt{latex-project.org} domain has been registered. +The web site is not yet fully functional but the old \LaTeX\ pages from +\ctan\ are available at \texttt{http://www.latex-project.org/} and the +\LaTeX\ bug reporting address has been changed to +\texttt{latex-bugs@latex-project.org}. + + \section{Restructuring the \LaTeX{} package licenses} + +Several people have requested an easy mechanism for the distribution +of \LaTeX\ packages and other software ``under the same conditions as +\LaTeX''. The old \texttt{legal.txt} file was unsuitable as a general +licence as it referred to specific \LaTeX\ authors, and to specific +files. + +Therefore, in this release \texttt{legal.txt} contains just the +copyright notice and a reference to the new \emph{\LaTeX\ Project +Public License} (LPPL) for the distribution and modification +conditions. The \texttt{tools}, \texttt{graphics}, and \texttt{mfnfss} +packages also now refer to this license in their distribution notices. + + \section{Support for Cyrillic encodings} + +Basic Cyrillic support, as announced in \LaTeX{} News~9, is now +finally an official part of \LaTeX{}. It includes support for the +following standard Cyrillic font encodings (this list may +grow):~\mbox{\texttt{T2A T2B T2C X2}}. + +It also includes various Cyrillic input encodings (20~in total, +including commonly used variants and Mongolian Cyrillic +encodings). This provides platform independent and +sophisticated basic support for high-quality typesetting in various +Cyrillic-based languages. + +For further information see the file \texttt{cyrguide.tex}. + +\section{Tools distribution} + +The \texttt{varioref} package has been extended to support textual +page references to a range of objects: e.g.,~if \texttt{eq-first} +and \texttt{eq-last} are the label names for the first and last +equation in a sequence, then you can now write +\begin{verbatim} + see~\vrefrange{eq-first}{eq-last} +\end{verbatim} +This results in different text depending on whether both +labels fall on the same page. + +Some additional user commands, as well as building-blocks for writing +private extensions, are described in the accompanying documentation. + + + +\end{document} + diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews11.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews11.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..c6adabf630c --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews11.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews11.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews11.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..f809795ce96 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews11.tex @@ -0,0 +1,141 @@ +% \iffalse meta-comment +% +% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 +% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere +% in this file. +% +% This file is part of the LaTeX base system. +% ------------------------------------------- +% +% It may be distributed and/or modified under the +% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 +% of this license or (at your option) any later version. +% The latest version of this license is in +% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +% version 2003/12/01 or later. +% +% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". +% +% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is +% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional +% information. +% +% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution +% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with +% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. +% +% \fi +% Filename: ltnews11.tex 01/06/1999 +% This is issue 11 of LaTeX News. + +\documentclass +% [lw35fonts] % uncomment this line to get Times + {ltnews} + +% \usepackage[T1]{fontenc} + +\publicationmonth{June} +\publicationyear{1999} +\publicationissue{11} + +\begin{document} + +\maketitle + +\section{Back in sync} + +The last release of \LaTeX{} was delayed even longer than you have +come to expect. We hope that it proved worth waiting for. It +required a major integration of the code from several people and, +independently, the introduction of the LPPL (see \LaTeX{} News~10) plus +several related changes to our internal systems. It therefore seemed +sensible to wait until everything was complete rather than do things +in too much hurry. + +This seem to have been a successful strategy as +the recent patch release was related to an isolated change that was +done many months previously. If this release does not appear a lot +closer to its nominal date then \ldots~well, you will not be reading +this sentence! + +\section{Yearly release cycles} + +With the year 2000 rapidly approaching, we intend to switch to a +release frequency of just one per year (with patches if necessary) for +the core of \LaTeXe{}. These days the system is sufficiently stable +that the original update policy is costing everybody more time than is +now warranted. + +\section{LPPL update} + +Thanks to extensive and valuable input from Matt Swift +(\email{swift@alum.mit.edu}) we now have a clearer and more detailed +form of the \LaTeX{} Project Public Licence. This release contains +both the original version (in \file{lppl-1-0.txt}) and the updated +version, LPPL~1.1. + +\section{The future of Sli\TeX{}} + +We still get a very small trickle of reports about this part of the +system (if you are no longer able to recall \LaTeX~2.09 then you will +know it as the \class{slides} class). We have not classified them (in +our minds at least) as bugs since we have always known that there are +many problems with this class. It is clear to us that the only +sensible action would be to redesign the system completely; in +particular, to remove much of its complexity whose purpose is to +support 10-year-old overlay technology. However, this would take a +lot too much time and would be completely out of proportion to its +current usage. + +We are therefore planning to make the \class{slides} class +unsupported in the sense that any problem related to the use of +invisible fonts is considered to be a feature (The \LaTeXe{} manual by +Leslie Lamport doesn't even describe this part of the class any more). +Of course, if it still has its enthusiasts then we are happy to cede +it to their loving care (somewhat like a preserved steam locomotive, +in some parts of the world). + +\section{Fontenc package peculiarities} + +The \verb=\usepackage= interface normally ensures that a package is +loaded only once. The \pkg{fontenc} package has become an +exception to this rule: it can be loaded several times using different +options, e.g., allowing the user to add a font encoding in the +preamble. This comes at a price for package writers: the low-level +commands (see \file{ltclass.dtx}) used to check if a package was +loaded, and with which options, do not work for the \pkg{fontenc} +package. + +\section{New math font encodings} + +As we announced in \LaTeX{} News~9, a joint working group of the +\TeX{} Users Group and the \LaTeX3 Project has developed a new +\mbox{8-bit} math font encoding for \TeX{}. +The reason why this work is not yet released is because of other +exciting developments in the world of math fonts and math characters. +It is obviously wise to ensure that the encoding work is fully +integrated with the available fonts. + +Those interested are reminded that further information about the Math +Font Group may be found on the World Wide Web at:\\ +\url{http://www.tug.org/twg/mfg/}. + +\section{Tools distribution} + +The \pkg{multicol} package has now got a small but useful extension +which allows you to force a column break where this is really +necessary. This is done with the command \verb=\columnbreak=, which +can be used like \verb=\pagebreak= (e.g.,~within paragraphs) except +that it cannot have an optional argument and thus it always forces a +new column. + +\section{Coming soon} + +Major work on a new class file structure to support flexible +designs is well under way; some of this work will be presented at the +TUG'99 conference in Vancouver, Canada. With a bit of luck much of +this work could be ready for integration into the next release---so +watch this space! + +\end{document} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews12.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews12.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..25c454e2915 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews12.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews12.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews12.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..6f9ecc20b24 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews12.tex @@ -0,0 +1,154 @@ +% \iffalse meta-comment +% +% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 +% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere +% in this file. +% +% This file is part of the LaTeX base system. +% ------------------------------------------- +% +% It may be distributed and/or modified under the +% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 +% of this license or (at your option) any later version. +% The latest version of this license is in +% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +% version 2003/12/01 or later. +% +% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". +% +% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is +% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional +% information. +% +% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution +% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with +% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. +% +% \fi +% Filename: ltnews12.tex +% +% This is issue 12 of LaTeX News. + +\documentclass +% [lw35fonts] % uncomment this line to get Times + {ltnews}[1999/12/01] + +% \usepackage[T1]{fontenc} + +\publicationmonth{December} +\publicationyear{1999} +\publicationissue{12} + +% Should go to .cls: +\newcommand{\acro}[1]{\textsc{\MakeLowercase{#1}}} + +\begin{document} + +\maketitle + +\section{LPPL update} + +Since the release of the \LaTeX{} Project Public Licence version~1.1, +we have received a small number of queries which resulted in some +minor changes to improve the wording or explain the intentions better. +As a consequence this release now contains LPPL~1.2 in the file +\file{lppl.txt} and the previous versions as \file{lppl-1-0.txt} and +\file{lppl-1-1.txt}. + +\section{fixltx2e package} + + This package provides fixes to \LaTeXe{} which are desirable but + cannot be integrated into the \LaTeXe{} kernel directly as they + would produce a version incompatible to earlier releases (either + in formatting or functionality). + + By having these fixes in the form of a package, users can benefit + from them without the danger that their documents will fail, or + produce unexpected results, at other sites; this works because a + document will contain a clear indication (the \verb=\usepackage= + line, preferably with a required date) that at least some of these + fixes are required to format it. + +\section{Outcome of TUG '99 (Vancouver)} + +The slides from the \acro{TUG}'99 presentation we gave on \emph{a +new interface for \LaTeX\ class designers} are available from the +\LaTeX\ Project website; look for the file \verb|tug99.pdf| at: +\begin{quote} + \url{http://www.latex-project.org/talks/} +\end{quote} + +Please note that this document was intended only to be informal +``speaker's notes'' for our own use. We decided to make them available (the +speaker's notes as well as the slides that were presented) because several +people requested copies after the talk. However, they are \emph{not} in +a polished copy-edited form and are not intended for publication. + +Prototype implementations of parts of this interface are now available from: +\begin{quote} + \url{http://www.latex-project.org/code/experimental/} +\end{quote} + +We are continuing to add new material at this location so as to +stimulate further discussion of the underlying concepts. As of +December 1, 1999 +the following parts can be downloaded. +\begin{description} + + \item[xparse] Prototype implementation of the interface for declaring + document command syntax. See the \texttt{.dtx} files for + documentation. + + \item[template] Prototype implementation of the template interface + (needs parts of \texttt{xparse}). + + The file \texttt{template.dtx} in that directory has a large section + of documentation at the front describing the commands in the + interface and giving a `worked example' building up some templates + for caption formatting. + + \item[xcontents] Interface description for table of contents data (no + code yet). Coding examples have been thoroughly discussed on the + \texttt{latex-l} list. + + \item[xfootnote] Working examples for generating footnotes, + etc. Needs \texttt{xparse} and \texttt{template}. + + \end{description} +All examples are organised in subdirectories and additionally + available as \texttt{gzip} \texttt{tar} files. + + Please remember +that this material is intended only for experimentation and comments; +thus any aspect of it, e.g., the user interface or the functionality, +may change and, in fact, is very likely to change. +For this reason it is explicitly forbidden to place this material on +\acro{CD-ROM} distributions or public servers. + +These concepts, as well as their implementation, are under discussion +on the list \texttt{LATEX-L}. You can join this list, which is +intended solely for discussing ideas and concepts for future versions +of \LaTeX, by sending mail to +%\begin{quote} + \email{listserv@URZ.UNI-HEIDELBERG.DE} +%\end{quote} +containing the line + \begin{quote} + \texttt{SUBSCRIBE LATEX-L} \textit{Your Name} + \end{quote} + +This list is archived and, after subscription, you can retrieve older +posts to it by sending mail to the above address, containing a command +such as: +\begin{quote} +\texttt{GET LATEX-L LOGyymm} +\end{quote} +where \texttt{yy}=Year and \texttt{mm}=Month, e.g. +\begin{quote} +\texttt{GET LATEX-L LOG9910} +\end{quote} +for all messages sent in October 1999. + + +\end{document} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews13.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews13.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..140ae9107be --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews13.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews13.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews13.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..f81ff6d1927 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews13.tex @@ -0,0 +1,201 @@ +% \iffalse meta-comment +% +% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 +% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere +% in this file. +% +% This file is part of the LaTeX base system. +% ------------------------------------------- +% +% It may be distributed and/or modified under the +% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 +% of this license or (at your option) any later version. +% The latest version of this license is in +% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +% version 2003/12/01 or later. +% +% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". +% +% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is +% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional +% information. +% +% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution +% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with +% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. +% +% \fi +% Filename: ltnews13.tex +% +% This is issue 13 of LaTeX News. + +\documentclass +% [lw35fonts] % uncomment this line to get Palatino + {ltnews}[2000/07/21] + +% \usepackage[T1]{fontenc} + +\publicationmonth{June} +\publicationyear{2000} +\publicationissue{13} + + +\begin{document} + +\maketitle + +\raisefirstsection +\section{Yearly release cycle} + +We announced in \textit{\LaTeX{} News~11} that we intended to switch +to a 12-monthly release schedule. With the present (June~2000) +release, this switch is being made: thus the next release of \LaTeX{} +will be dated June~2001. We shall of course continue, as in the past, +to release patches as needed to fix significant bugs. + + +\section{PSNFSS: \small Quote of the Month} + +\begin{quote} + You should say in the \LaTeX{} News that Walter Schmidt has taken over + \PSNFSS{} from me. It gives me a certain pleasure to be able to draw a + line under that part of my life\ldots + + \begin{latexonly} + \vspace{-\baselineskip} + \end{latexonly} + + \begin{flushright} + Sebastian Rahtz + \end{flushright} +\end{quote} + +\begin{latexonly} + \vspace{-\baselineskip} +\end{latexonly} + +\noindent +The \PSNFSS{} material, which supports the use\latex{\\} +of common PostScript fonts with \LaTeX{}, has been thoroughly updated. +Most noticeably, the \package{mathpple} package, which used to be +distributed separately, is now part of the basic \PSNFSS{} bundle; +this package provides mathematical typesetting with the Palatino +typeface family. In addition, numerous bugs and flaws have been fixed +and the distribution has been `cleaned up'. The file +\file{changes.txt} contains a detailed list of these changes. +\latex{\looseness=-1} %%!!!!! It worked! + +The documentation (in \file{psnfss2e.pdf}) has been completely +rewritten to provide a comprehensive introduction to the use +of PostScript fonts. + +Notice that the new \PSNFSS{} needs updated files for font metrics, +virtual fonts and font definitions. If you received the new +version~(8.1) as part of a complete \TeX{} system then these new font +files should also have been installed. However, if you intend to +install or update \PSNFSS{} yourself, please read the instructions in +the file \file{00readme.txt} of the new \PSNFSS{} distribution. + +Support for commercial PostScript fonts, such as +Lucida~Bright, has been removed from the basic distribution; +it is now available from \ctan{}: +\begin{latexonly} + \file{\ctanhttp macros/latex/\\ + contrib/supported/psnfssx}. +\end{latexonly} +\begin{htmlonly} + \url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/supported/psnfssx}. +\end{htmlonly} + +\section{New AMS-\LaTeX{}} + +Version 2.0 of AMS-\LaTeX{} was released on December 1, 1999. It can +be obtained via \url{ftp://ftp.ams.org/pub/tex/} or +\url{http://www.ams.org/tex/amslatex.html}, as well from \ctan{}: +\begin{latexonly} + \file{\ctanhttp macros/latex/\\ + required/amslatex}. +\end{latexonly} +\begin{htmlonly} + \url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/amslatex}. +\end{htmlonly} + +This release consists chiefly of bug fixes and consolidation of the +existing features. The division of AMS-\LaTeX{} into two main parts +(the math packages;\latex{\\} +the AMS document classes) has been made more pronounced. +The files \file{diffs-m.txt}, \file{diffs-c.txt}, +\file{amsmath.faq}, and \file{amsclass.faq} describe the\latex{\\} +changes and address some common questions. + +The primary documentation files remain \file{amsldoc.tex}, for the +\package{amsmath} package, and \file{instr-l.tex}, for the AMS +document classes.\latex{\\} +The documentation for the \package{amsthm} package,\latex{\\} +however, has been moved from \file{amsldoc.tex}\latex{\\} +to a separate document \file{amsthdoc.tex}. + +\begin{latexonly} + \vfill +\end{latexonly} + +\section{New input encoding \package{latin4}} + +The package \package{inputenc} has, thanks to Hana Skoumalov\'a, +been extended to cover the \package{latin4} input encoding; this +covers Baltic and Scandinavian languages as well as Greenland +Inuit and Lappish. + +\begin{latexonly} + \vfill +\end{latexonly} + +\section{New experimental code} + +In \textit{\LaTeX{} News~12} we announced some ongoing work towards a +`Designer Interface for \LaTeX' and we presented some early results +thereof. Since then, at Gutenberg\,2000 in Toulouse and TUG\,2000 in +Oxford, we described a new output routine and an improved method of +handling vertical mode material between paragraphs. In combination +these support higher quality \emph{automated}\footnote + {The stress here is on automated!} +page-breaking and page make-up\latex{\\} +for complex pages---the best yet achieved with \TeX{}! + +A paper describing the new output routine is +\begin{latexonly} + at\\ + \file{http://www.latex-project.org/papers/xo-pfloat.pdf% + \hspace*{-16pt}}\\ +\end{latexonly} +\begin{htmlonly} + at \url{http://www.latex-project.org/papers/xo-pfloat.pdf}. +\end{htmlonly} +All code examples and documentation are available +\begin{latexonly} + at\\ + \file{http://www.latex-project.org/code/experimental/% + \latex{\hspace*{-5pt}}}.\\[3pt] +\end{latexonly} +\begin{htmlonly} + at \url{http://www.latex-project.org/code/experimental/}. + +\end{htmlonly} +This directory has been extended to contain +\begin{description} + \item[galley] Prototype implementation of the interface\latex{\\} + for manipulating vertical material in galleys. + \item[xinitials] Prototype implementation of the interface\latex{\\} + for paragraph initials (needs the \texttt{galley} package. + \item[xtheorem] Contributed example using the \texttt{template} + package to provide a designer interface for theorem environments. + \item[xoutput] A prototype implementation of the new output routine + as described in the \texttt{xo-pfloat.pdf} paper. Expected + availability: at or shortly after\latex{\\} + the TUG\,2000 conference. +\end{description} + +\end{document} + + diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews14.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews14.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..7853707e18d --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews14.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews14.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews14.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..cb37ba193b7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews14.tex @@ -0,0 +1,169 @@ +% \iffalse meta-comment +% +% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 +% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere +% in this file. +% +% This file is part of the LaTeX base system. +% ------------------------------------------- +% +% It may be distributed and/or modified under the +% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 +% of this license or (at your option) any later version. +% The latest version of this license is in +% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +% version 2003/12/01 or later. +% +% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". +% +% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is +% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional +% information. +% +% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution +% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with +% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. +% +% \fi +% Filename: ltnews14.tex +% +% This is issue 14 of LaTeX News. + +\documentclass +% [lw35fonts] % uncomment this line to get Palatino + {ltnews}[2001/07/12] + +% \usepackage[T1]{fontenc} + +\publicationmonth{June} +\publicationyear{2001} +\publicationissue{14} + + +\begin{document} + +\maketitle + +\raisefirstsection +\section{Future releases} + +We are currently exploring how to best support the very large +community of individuals, organisations and enterprises that depend on +the robustness and availability of the current standard \LaTeX{} +distribution. The results of this may lead to some changes in the +regular release schedule and the handling of bug reports during the +next year. + +\section{New release of \textsf{Babel} (required)} + +Earlier this year a new release of \textsf{Babel} (3.7) became +available. You can read about its new features in +\begin{latexonly} + \file{http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/}\\ + \hspace*{4em}\file{latex/required/babel/announce.txt} +\end{latexonly} +\begin{htmlonly} + \url{http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/babel/announce.txt} +\end{htmlonly} + +One of the bugs that got fixed in this release deals with how labels +are handled by \LaTeX{}. Because this part of the kernel is modified +by \textsf{babel}, the relevant changes need to be coordinated. +Therefore to use \textsf{Babel} with this release of \LaTeX{} you will +need to update your version of \textsf{babel} to at least 3.7. + +\section{New input encoding \package{latin9}} + +The package \package{inputenc} has, thanks to Karsten Tinnefeld, been +extended to cover the \package{latin9} input encoding. The +ISO-Latin~9 encoding is a useful modern replacement for ISO-Latin~1 +that contains a few characters needed for French and Finnish. Of wider +interest, it also contains the euro currency sign; this could be the +killer argument for many 8-bit texts to use Latin-9 in the future. + +According to a Linux manpage, ISO~Latin-9 supports Albanian, Basque, +Breton, Catalan, Danish, Dutch, English, Estonian, Faroese, Finnish, +French, Frisian, Galician, German, Greenlandic, Icelandic, Irish +Gaelic, Italian, Latin, Luxemburgish, Norwegian, Portuguese, +Rhaeto-Romanic, Scottish Gaelic, Spanish and Swedish.\\ +The characters added in \package{latin9} are (in \LaTeX{} notation):\\ +\begin{small} +\verb| \texteuro \v S \v s \v Z \v z \OE \oe \" Y | +\end{small}\\ +They displace the following characters from \package{latin1}:\\ +\begin{small} +\verb| \textcurrency \textbrokenbar \"{} \'{} \c{} |\\ +\verb| \textonequarter \textonehalf \textthreequarters | +\end{small} + + +\section{New tools} + +The new package \package{trace} provides many commands to control +\LaTeX{}'s tracing and debugging output, including the excellent new +information available with \eTeX{} such as the extremely useful +tracing of local assignments. You will find it in the tools +distribution. + +It offers the command \verb|\traceon|, which is similar to +\verb|\tracingall| but suppresses uninteresting stuff such as font +loading by NFSS (which can go on for pages if you are unlucky). It +also offers \verb|\traceoff| to \ldots\ guess what! Full details are +in the documented source file, \file{trace.dtx}. + +In the base \package{ifthen} package we have added +the uppercase synonyms \verb|\NOT| \verb|\AND| and \verb|\OR|. + +\section{New experimental code} + +In \textit{\LaTeX{} News~12} we announced some ongoing work towards a +`Designer Interface for \LaTeX' and we presented some early results +thereof. Since then, at Gutenberg\,2000 in Toulouse and TUG\,2000 in +Oxford, we described a new output routine and an improved method of +handling vertical mode material between paragraphs. In combination +these support higher quality \emph{automated}\footnote + {The stress here is on automated!} +page-breaking and page make-up\latex{\\} +for complex pages---the best yet achieved with \TeX{}! + +More recently we have added material to handle the complex front +matter requirements of journal articles; this was presented at +Gutenberg\,2001 in Metz. + +A paper describing the new output routine is +\begin{latexonly} + at\\ +\begin{small} + \file{http://www.latex-project.org/papers/xo-pfloat.pdf}\\ +\end{small} +\end{latexonly} +\begin{htmlonly} + at \url{http://www.latex-project.org/papers/xo-pfloat.pdf}. +\end{htmlonly} +All code examples and documentation are available +\begin{latexonly} + at\\ +\begin{small} + \file{http://www.latex-project.org/code/experimental} +\end{small} +\end{latexonly} +\begin{htmlonly} + at \url{http://www.latex-project.org/code/experimental/}. +\end{htmlonly} + +This directory has been extended to contain the following. +\begin{description} + \item[galley] Prototype implementation of the interface\latex{\\} + for manipulating vertical material in galleys. + \item[xinitials] Prototype implementation of the interface\latex{\\} + for paragraph initials (needs the \texttt{galley} package). + \item[xtheorem] Contributed example using the \texttt{template} + package to provide a designer interface for theorem environments. + \item[xor] A prototype implementation of the new output routine + as described in the \texttt{xo-pfloat.pdf} paper. + \item[xfrontm] A prototype version of + the new font matter interface. +\end{description} + +\end{document} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews15.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews15.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..5f0d72bd3ac --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews15.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews15.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews15.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..2f2a9f2cb09 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews15.tex @@ -0,0 +1,169 @@ +% \iffalse meta-comment +% +% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 +% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere +% in this file. +% +% This file is part of the LaTeX base system. +% ------------------------------------------- +% +% It may be distributed and/or modified under the +% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 +% of this license or (at your option) any later version. +% The latest version of this license is in +% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +% version 2003/12/01 or later. +% +% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". +% +% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is +% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional +% information. +% +% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution +% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with +% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. +% +% \fi +% Filename: ltnews15.tex +% +% This is issue 15 of LaTeX News. + +\documentclass +% [lw35fonts] % uncomment this line to get Palatino + {ltnews}[2004/02/28] + +% \usepackage[T1]{fontenc} + +\publicationmonth{December} +\publicationyear{2003} +\publicationissue{15} + +\begin{document} + +\maketitle + +%\raisefirstsection + +\section{Anniversary release} + +Yes, it's now 10~years since the first release in this series and, for +Knuthists, this release also contains \textit{Issue 16}\,! + +Meanwhile this \textit{Issue~15} describes the major new features in +the current release whilst \textit{Issue~16} looks\newline +a little way into the future of \LaTeX{}. + + +\section{LPPL -- new version} + +Most importantly, there is now a new version, 1.3, of the \LaTeX{} +Project Public Licence. Many of you will\newline +be thrilled to know that, following the exchange of over 1600 e-mail +messages dissecting various aspects of its philosophy such as `how +many angels can appear in the name of a file before it becomes +non-free', this version\newline +is now officially a DFSG (Debian Free Software Guidelines) approved license. +The discussions start at +\url{http://lists.debian.org/debian-legal/2002/debian-legal-200207/threads.html} +with high traffic throughout August to October~2002 and further +heated discussions starting in April~2003 and concluding +around June at +\url{http://lists.debian.org/debian-legal/2003/debian-legal-200306/msg00206.html}. + +The important features of the new version are useful clarifications in +the wording, and revised procedures\newline +for making a change to the Current Maintainer of a package. Special +thanks to all those people from\newline Debian Legal who worked +constructively with us\newline +on this onerous task, especially but not exclusively\newline +Jeff Licquia and Branden Robinson. + + +\section{Small updates to varioref} + +The English has been corrected in \verb|\reftextbefore| +(an incompatible change). There are other extensions +such as \verb|\labelformat|, \verb|\Ref|, \verb|\Vref| and \verb|\vpagerefnum|. +Some Dutch text has also been changed and two\newline +new options added: \package{slovak} and \package{slovene}. + + +\section{New and more robust commands} + +Many of the math mode commands for compound symbols have been made +robust and a new robust command has been added: \verb|\nobreakdashes|. +This last is a low-level command, borrowed from the \package{amsmath} +package, for use only before hyphens or dashes. It prevents the line +break that is normally allowed\newline +after the following sequence of dashes. + + +\section{Fixing font sizes} + +The new \package{fix-cm} package, by Walter Schmidt, changes the CM font +definition (\texttt{.fd}) files so that similar design sizes are used +in both the \texttt{OT1} and \texttt{T1} encodings. + + +\section{Font encodings} + +A number of options have been added to the \package{textcomp} package, +enabling only available glyphs to be used. +Also, the `NFSS font families' are now divided into five different groups +according to the subset of glyphs each provides from the full +collection of symbols in the TS1 encoding. +Given sufficient information about a font family +\package{textcomp} will use this in order to limit the\newline +typesetting to those glyphs that are available. + +Use of this mechanism has also enhanced \verb|\oldstylenums| +to use the current font if possible. + + +\section{Displaying font tables} + +With the \package{nfssfont} package you can now +specify the font to display by giving its `NFSS classification', +rather than needing to know its external font file's name. +It is also now possible to generate large collections of font +tables in batch mode by providing a suitable input file. + + +\section{New input encodings} + +The \package{inputenc} package has been extended as follows: +\package{macce} input encoding +(Apple Central European), +thanks to Radek Tryc and Marcin Wolinski; \package{cp1257}\newline +for Baltic languages; \package{latin10}, +thanks to Ionel Ciob\^{i}c\u{a}.\newline +The euro symbol has by +now been added to several encodings: +\package{ansinew}, \package{cp1250} +and \package{cp1252} (which also\newline +has another addition), whilst \package{cp858} +adds it to \package{cp850}. + + +\section{Unicode input} + +Partial, experimental support for text files that use the Unicode +encoding form UTF-8 is now provided by the option \package{utf8} for +the \package{inputenc} package. + +The only Unicode text file characters supported by the current version +are those based on the most common inputs for glyphs from the small +collection\newline +of standard \LaTeX{} Latin encodings. + + +\section{And finally \ldots\ pict2e} + +The old, non-functional version of this package has been removed + as there is now a fully working version from Hubert G\"a{\ss}lein + and Rolf Niepraschk. It is described + in \textit{The \LaTeX{} Manual}. + +\end{document} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews16.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews16.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..5213f4f29c7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews16.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews16.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews16.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..6fcf0564f64 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltnews16.tex @@ -0,0 +1,161 @@ +% \iffalse meta-comment +% +% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 +% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere +% in this file. +% +% This file is part of the LaTeX base system. +% ------------------------------------------- +% +% It may be distributed and/or modified under the +% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 +% of this license or (at your option) any later version. +% The latest version of this license is in +% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +% version 2003/12/01 or later. +% +% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". +% +% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is +% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional +% information. +% +% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution +% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with +% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. +% +% \fi +% Filename: ltnews16.tex +% +% This is issue 16 of LaTeX News. + +\documentclass +% [lw35fonts] % uncomment this line to get Palatino + {ltnews}[2004/02/28] + +% \usepackage[T1]{fontenc} + +\publicationmonth{December} +\publicationyear{2003} +\publicationissue{16} + +\begin{document} + +\maketitle + +%\raisefirstsection + +\section{Anniversary news} + +This anniversary \textit{Issue~16} takes a brief look into the future work of +the \LaTeX3 Project Team, both short and and longer range. Please let +us know if you want %\newline +to get involved with us in any of this work (see below). + +An overview of the 10th Anniversary Release, dated 2003/12/01, is +can be found in \textit{Issue~15}. + + +\section{TLC2: The \LaTeX{} Companion -- 2nd edition!} + +Since you are reading this newsletter, there is a good chance that +you, or a friend, has already bought this encyclopedic volume: the +incomparable Second\newline +Edition of this work that is every \LaTeX{}ie's\newline +ultimate lucky charm. + +If by some chance you have not yet purchased your own copy then get +into training, get shopping, and get flexing your muscles (both +physical---it's $1100+$~pages,\newline +and intellectual) by using it to discover +masses of invaluable `insider information' about: +\begin{itemize} +\item the latest release of Standard \LaTeX{}; +\item over~200~extension packages; +\item plus related software and systems. +\end{itemize} +For more information on this all new (??\ldots OK,\newline +not \emph{all}, but over 90\%!!), +all accurate (we hope!)\newline +10th~Anniversary Edition, check out\newline + \mbox{\url{http://www.awprofessional.com/titles/0201362996}}. + + +\section{Future maintenance} + +We are currently exploring how best to support the very large and +rapidly growing community of individuals, organisations and +enterprises that depend on the robustness and availability of the +current standard \LaTeX{} distribution. Although we remain firmly\newline +resolved not to make changes in the base distribution (the kernel) of +Standard \LaTeX{}, there is still much that needs doing to maintain +its reliability and utility and to keep up the necessary level of +communication with users and supporters. Also, as with all advanced +software systems, bugs are still turning up occasionally so %\newline +some fixes are still essential. + +One major impediment to providing adequate service levels in this area +is, of course, the difficulties inherent in obtaining the time and +commitment of skilled minds---hence the appeal above to anyone +interested %\newline +in getting involved. + + +\section{LPPL certification} + +There are still some outstanding diplomatic tasks around the +\LaTeX{} Project Public Licence: these include +e.g.,~getting it `OSF certified' and ensuring that it gains +more support and wider use, even in the FSF world\newline +where it has long been tolerated. + + +\section{Use of \eTeX/pdf\TeX} + +We expect that within the next two years, releases of \LaTeX{} will +change modestly in order to run best under an extended \TeX{} engine +that contains the \eTeX{} primitives, e.g., \eTeX{} or pdf\TeX{}. +The details of this possible upgrade need further work so we are not +making a definite announcement yet. + +Although the current release does not \emph{require} \eTeX{} features, +we certainly recommend using an extended \TeX{}, especially if you +need to debug macros. + + +\section{End of `autoload' support} + +As computer systems generally grow in capacity, requirements change +and so we believe that the \package{autoload} variant of \LaTeX{} is +no longer required. Thus, although the code remains it is no longer +supported. We hope this does not cause any problems. + + +\section{New models, new code} + +In the period 1999--2001 we published many results of our work over +the previous decade on the development of new concepts and models +for automated typesetting based on \TeX{} as the underlying platform. +These can be found at \url{http://www.latex-project.org/papers/} +and +\mbox{\url{http://www.latex-project.org/code/experimental/}}. + +Since then a very large proportion of the The Team's efforts have been +diverted to provide the core author team for TLC2, which provides +over 1000 pages of carefully researched and tested documentation of +many aspects of the vast world of \LaTeX{} related software that +was developed over that same time period and that continues +to grow and improve prodigiously. + +Completion of that task \ldots\ until TLC3!! \ldots\ presents the +possibility of getting back to this more exciting development work, +or even to more radical work on non-\TeX{}-based models and +implementations. + +Of course, any such ideas are predicated on our ability to organise +(with you, we hope) an efficient\newline +but responsive maintenance and support system\newline +for Standard \LaTeX{}. + +\end{document} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltpictur.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltpictur.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..16023ba3ae7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltpictur.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltx3info.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltx3info.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..58d698cbd36 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltx3info.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltx3info.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltx3info.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..6a7eb8c2f23 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltx3info.tex @@ -0,0 +1,474 @@ +% \iffalse meta-comment +% +% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 +% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere +% in this file. +% +% This file is part of the LaTeX base system. +% ------------------------------------------- +% +% It may be distributed and/or modified under the +% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 +% of this license or (at your option) any later version. +% The latest version of this license is in +% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +% version 2003/12/01 or later. +% +% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". +% +% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is +% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional +% information. +% +% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution +% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with +% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. +% +% \fi +\documentclass[a4paper]{article} + +% Commands and environments: + +\newcommand{\eg}{e.g.~} +\newcommand{\ie}{i.e.~} + + +\newenvironment{citations}{% + \list{}{% + \renewcommand{\makelabel}[1]{\normalfont\itshape ##1}% + }% +}{% + \endlist +} + +% Some logos: + +\newcommand{\NFSS}{NFSS} + +\newcommand{\LaTeXNews}{\LaTeX~News} + +\newcommand{\AW}{Addison Wesley} + +\newcommand{\SGML}{{\sc SGML}} +\newcommand{\DSSSL}{{\sc DSSSL}} +\newcommand{\HTML}{{\sc HTML}} +\newcommand{\XML}{{\sc XML}} +\newcommand{\PDF}{{\sc PDF}} + +\newcommand{\PS}{{\sc Post\-Script}} + +\newcommand{\AmSTeX}{$\mathcal A$\lower.4ex\hbox{$\!\mathcal + M\!$}$\mathcal S$-\TeX} +\newcommand{\AmSLaTeX}{$\mathcal A$\lower.4ex\hbox{$\!\mathcal + M\!$}$\mathcal S$-\LaTeX} +\newcommand{\MF}{{\sc Meta\-font}} + +% sections + +\setcounter{secnumdepth}{-2} + +% Front matter: + +\title{\Large The \LaTeX3 Project} + +\author{\copyright 1995--1999 \ +Frank Mittelbach and +Chris Rowley} + +\date{12 January 1999} + +\begin{document} + +\thispagestyle{empty} + +\maketitle + +\begin{abstract} + This article describes the motivation, achievements and future of + the \LaTeX3 Project, which was established to produce a new version + of \LaTeX{}, the widely-used and highly-acclaimed document + preparation system. It also describes how you can help us to + achieve our aims.\\[2pt] + \textbf{For Archive maintainers, Authors, Publishers and + Distributors:}\\ + The project team request that, whenever possible, you include this + article in any of the following: + \begin{itemize} + \item Books about \TeX{} and \LaTeX{}. + \item Instructions for authors on using \LaTeX{}. + \item The printed documentation of CD-ROM collections that contain + \LaTeX. + \item On-line collections that include a significant proportion of + documents encoded in \LaTeX. +\end{itemize} +\end{abstract} + +\section{Outline} + +The purposes of the \LaTeX3 system can be summarized thus: it will +greatly increase the range of documents which can be processed; and it +will provide a flexible interface for typographic designers to easily +specify the formatting of a class of documents. + +The \LaTeX3 Project Team is a small group of volunteers whose aim is +to produce this major new document processing system based on the +principles pioneered by Leslie Lamport in the current \LaTeX. + +The major visible work of the team before 1997 was the development of +the current \emph{standard} version of \LaTeX{}. This was first +released in 1994 and has since then been actively maintained and +enhanced by extensions to that core system. They will continue to +develop and maintain this system, releasing updated versions every six +months and recording these activities in the \LaTeX{} bugs database +(see below). + +Although \LaTeX{} may be distributed freely, the production and +maintenance of the system does require expenditure of reasonably large +sums of money. The \LaTeX3 Project Fund has therefore been set up to +channel money into this work. We know that some users are +aware of this fund as they have already contributed to it---many +thanks to all of them! If you want to know more about how you can +help the project, see Page \pageref{fund}---and thanks in advance for +your generosity in the future. + + +\section{Background} + +With \TeX{}, Knuth designed a formatting system that is able to +produce a large range of documents typeset to extremely high quality +standards. For various reasons (\eg quality, portability, stability +and availability) \TeX{} spread very rapidly and can nowadays be best +described as a world-wide de facto standard for high quality +typesetting. Its use is particularly common in specialized areas, such +as technical documents of various kinds, and for multi-lingual +requirements. + +The \TeX{} system is fully programmable. This allows the development +of high-level user interfaces whose input is processed by \TeX{}'s +interpreter to produce low-level typesetting instructions; these are +input to \TeX{}'s typesetting engine which outputs the format of each +page in a device-independent page-description language. The \LaTeX{} +system is such an interface; it was designed to support the needs of +long documents such as textbooks and manuals. It separates content and +form as much as possible by providing the user with a generic (\ie +logical rather than visual) mark-up interface; this is combined with +style sheets which specify the formatting. + +Recent years have shown that the concepts and approach of \LaTeX{} are +now widely accepted. Indeed, \LaTeX{} has become the standard method +of communicating and publishing documents in many academic +disciplines. This has led to many publishers accepting \LaTeX{} +source for articles and books; and the American Mathematical Society +now provides a \LaTeX{} package making the features of \AmSTeX{} +available to all users of \LaTeX{}. Its use has also spread into many +other commercial and industrial environments, where the technical +qualities of \TeX{} together with the concepts of \LaTeX{} are +considered a powerful combination of great importance to such areas as +corporate documentation and publishing. This has also extended to +on-line publishing using, for example, \PDF{} output incorporating +hypertext and other active areas. + +With the spreading use of \SGML{}-compliant systems (\eg Web-based +publishing using \HTML{} or \XML{}) \TeX{} again is a common choice as +the formatting engine for high quality typeset output: a widely used +such system is {\em The Publisher\/} from ArborText, whilst a more +recent development is the object-oriented document editor Grif. The +latter is used for document processing in a wide range of industrial +applications; it has also been adopted by the Euromath consortium as +the basis of their mathematician's workbench, one of the most advanced +of the emerging project-oriented user environments. Typeset output +from \SGML{}-coded documents in these systems is obtained by +translation into \LaTeX{}, which will therefore soon also be a natural +choice for the output of \DSSSL-compliant systems. + +Because a typical \SGML{} Document Type Definition (DTD) uses concepts +similar to those of \LaTeX{}, the formatting is often implemented by +simply mapping document elements to \LaTeX{} constructs rather than +directly to `raw \TeX'. +This enables the +sophisticated analytical techniques built into the \LaTeX{} +software to be exploited; and it avoids the need to program in \TeX{}. + +\section{Motivation} + +This increase in the range of applications of \LaTeX{} has highlighted +certain limitations of the current system, both for authors of +documents and for designers of formatting styles. + +In addition to the need to extend the variety of classes of document +which can be processed by \LaTeX{}, substantial enhancements are +necessary in, at least, the following areas: + \begin{itemize} + \item + the command syntax (attributes, short references, etc); + \item + the layout specification interface (style design); + \item + the level of robustness (error recovery, omitted tags); + \item + the extendibility (package interface); + \item + the layout specification of tabular material; + \item + the specification and inclusion of graphical material; + \item + the positioning of floating material, and other aspects of page + layout; + \item + the requirements of hypertext systems. + \end{itemize} + + Further analysis of these deficiencies has shown that some of the + problems are to be found in \LaTeX{}'s internal concepts and design. + This project to produce a new version therefore involves thorough + research into the challenges posed by new applications and by the use + of \LaTeX{} as a formatter for a wide range of documents, \eg \SGML{} + documents; on-line \PDF{} documents with hypertext links. + + This will result in a major re-implementation of large parts of the + system. Some of the results of such rethinking of the fundamentals + are already available in Standard \LaTeX{}, notably in the following + areas: + +\begin{itemize} +\item Font declaration and selection; +\item Font and glyph handling within mathematical formulas; +\item Handling multiple font glyph encodings within a document; +\item Allowing multiple input character encodings within a document; +\item A uniform interface for graphics inclusion; +\item Support for coloured text; +\item Building and interfacing new classes and extension packages. +\end{itemize} + + +\section{Description} + +The strengths of the present version of \LaTeX{} are +as follows: + \begin{itemize} + \item excellent standard of typesetting for text, technical +formulas\\ +and tabular material; + \item separation of generic mark-up from visual formatting; + \item ease of use for authors; + \item portability of documents over a wide range of platforms; + \item adaptability to many languages; + \item widespread and free availability; + \item reliable support and maintenance by the \LaTeX3 project team. + \end{itemize} + These will be preserved and in many cases greatly enhanced by the new + version which is being developed to fulfill the following requirements. + \begin{itemize} + \item + It will provide a syntax that allows highly automated translation + from popular \SGML{} DTDs into \LaTeX{} document classes (these + will be provided as standard with the new version). + + The syntax of the new \LaTeX{} user-interface will, for example, + support the \SGML{} concepts of `entity', `attribute' and `short + reference' in such a way that these can be directly linked to the + corresponding \SGML{} features. + + \item + It will support hypertext links and other features required for + on-line structured documents using, for example, \HTML{} and \XML{}. + +\item + It will provide a straightforward style-designer interface to support + both the specification of a wide variety of typographic requirements + and the linking of entities in the generic mark-up of a document to + the desired formatting. These two parts of the design process will + be clearly separated so that it is possible to specify different + layouts for the same DTD. + + The language and syntax of this interface will be as natural as + possible for a typographic designer. As a result, this language + could easily be interfaced to a visually-oriented, menu-driven + specification system. + + This interface will also support \DSSSL{} specifications and + style-sheet concepts such as those used with \HTML{} and \XML{}. + + \item + It will provide an enhanced user-interface that allows expression of + the typesetting requirements from a large range of subject areas. Some + examples are listed here. + + \begin{itemize} + \item The requirements of technical documentation (\eg offset layout,\\ + change bars, etc). + \item The requirements of academic publishing in the humanities\\ + (critical text editions, etc). + \item The requirements of structural formulas in chemistry. + \item Advanced use of the mathematical-typesetting features of \TeX{}. + \item The integration of graphical features, such as shading, + within text. + \item the integration of hypertext and other links in on-line + documents using systems such as \HTML{}, \XML{} and \PDF{}. + + \end{itemize} + + Special care will be taken to ensure that this interface is + extensible: this will be achieved by use of modular designs. + + + \item + It will provide a more robust author-interface. For example, + artificial restrictions on the nesting of commands will be removed. + Error handling will be improved by adding + a more effective, interactive help system. + + \item + It will provide access to arbitrary fonts from any family (such as + the \PS{} and TrueType fonts) including a wide range of fonts for + multi-lingual documents and the specialist glyphs required by + documents in various technical and academic areas. + + \item + The new interfaces will be documented in detail and the + system will provide extensive catalogues of examples, carefully + designed to make the learning time for new users (both designers and + authors) as short as possible. + + \item + The code itself will be thoroughly documented and it will be + designed on modular principles. Thus the system will be easy to + maintain and to enhance. +\end{itemize} + +The resulting new \LaTeX{} will, like the present version, be usable +with any standard \TeX{} system (or whatever replaces it) and so will +be freely available on a wide range of platforms. + + +\section{\LaTeX{} documentation} + +\begingroup +\setlength{\parindent}{0pt} + +A complete description of Standard \LaTeX{} can be found in: +\begin{citations} +\item[\LaTeX: A Document Preparation System] + Leslie Lamport,\\ \AW, 2nd ed, 1994. +\item[The \LaTeX{} Companion] + Goossens, Mittelbach and Samarin,\\ \AW, 1994. +\end{citations} + +A recent addition to the publications closely associated with the +project is: +\begin{citations} +\item[The \LaTeX{} Graphics Companion] + Goossens, Mittelbach and Rahtz,\\ \AW, 1997. +\end{citations} + +This \LaTeX{} distribution comes with documentation on several aspects +of of the system. The newer features of the system are described in +the following documents: +\begin{citations} +\item[\LaTeXe{} for authors] + describes the new features of \LaTeX{} documents, + in the file \texttt{usrguide.tex}; +\item[\LaTeXe{} for class and package writers] + describes how to produce \LaTeX{} classes and packages, + in the file \texttt{clsguide.tex}; +\item[\LaTeXe{} font selection] + describes the new features of \LaTeX{} fonts for + class and package writers, + in the file \texttt{fntguide.tex}. +\end{citations} + +For further contacts and sources of information on \TeX{} and +\LaTeX{}, see the addresses on Page~\pageref{contacts}. + +\endgroup +\pagebreak + + +\section{The \LaTeX3 Project Fund} +\label{fund} + +Although \LaTeX{} may be distributed freely, the production and +maintenance of the system does require expenditure of reasonably large +sums of money. There are many necessities that need substantial +financing: examples are new or enhanced computing equipment and travel +to team meetings (the volunteers come from many different countries, +so getting together occasionally is a non-trivial exercise). + +This is why we are appealing to you for contributions to the fund. +Any sum will be much appreciated; the amount need not be large as +small contributions add up to very useful amounts. Contributions of +suitable equipment and software will also be of great value. This +appeal is both to you as an individual author and to you as a member +of a group or as an employee: please encourage your department or your +employer to contribute towards sustaining our work. + +We should like to see funded projects that make considerable use of +\LaTeX{} (\eg conferences and research teams who use it to publish +their work, and electronic research archives using it) include +contributions to this fund in their budgets. %% e-print systems + +We are also asking commercial organisations to assess the benefits +they gain from using, or distributing, a well-supported \LaTeX{} and +to make appropriate contributions to the fund in order that we can +continue to maintain and improve the product. If you work for, or do +business with, such an organisation, please bring to the attention of +the relevant people the existence and needs of the project. + +In particular, we ask that all the large number of organisations and +businesses that distribute \LaTeX{}, within other software or as part +of a CD-ROM collection, should consider pricing all products containing +\LaTeX{} at a level that enables them to make regular donations to the +fund from the profit on these items. We also ask all authors and +publishers of books about \LaTeX{} to consider donating part of the +royalties to the fund. + +Contributions should be sent to one of the following addresses: +\begin{quote}\small\label{addrs} + \TeX{} Users Group, P.O. Box 2311, Portland, OR~97208-2311 USA\\ + Fax:~+1~503~223~3960 \ Email: \texttt{tug@tug.org} + + \noindent + UK TUG, 1 Eymore Close, Selly Oak, Birmingham B29~4LB UK\\ + Fax: +44 121 476 2159 \ Email: \texttt{uktug-enquiries@tex.ac.uk} +\end{quote} + +Cheques should be payable to the user group (TUG or UKTUG) and be +clearly marked as contributions to the \LaTeX3 fund. +Many thanks to all of you who have contributed in the past and thanks +in advance for your generosity in the future. + +\section{Contacts and information} +\label{contacts} + +In addition to the sources mentioned above, \LaTeX{} has its home page +on the World Wide Web at: +\begin{verbatim} + http://www.latex-project.org/ +\end{verbatim} +This page describes \LaTeX{} and the \LaTeX3 project, and contains +pointers to other \LaTeX{} resources, such as the user guides, the +\TeX{} Frequently Asked Questions, and the \LaTeX{} bugs database. + +More general information, including contacts for local User Groups, +can be accessed via: +\begin{verbatim} + http://www.tug.org/ +\end{verbatim} + +The electronic home of anything \TeX-related is the Comprehensive +\TeX{} Archive Network (CTAN). This is a network of cooperating ftp +sites, with over a gigabyte of \TeX{} material: +\begin{verbatim} + ftp://cam.ctan.org/tex-archive/ + ftp://dante.ctan.org/tex-archive/ + ftp://tug.ctan.org/tex-archive/ +\end{verbatim} + +For more information, see the \LaTeX{} home page. + + +\end{document} + + + diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltxcheck.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltxcheck.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..cdb2b05c244 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/ltxcheck.tex @@ -0,0 +1,974 @@ +% \iffalse meta-comment +% +% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 +% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere +% in this file. +% +% This file is part of the LaTeX base system. +% ------------------------------------------- +% +% It may be distributed and/or modified under the +% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 +% of this license or (at your option) any later version. +% The latest version of this license is in +% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +% version 2003/12/01 or later. +% +% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". +% +% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is +% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional +% information. +% +% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution +% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with +% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. +% +% \fi +% +% \iffalse +%% File `ltxcheck.tex'. +%% Copyright (C) 1994-1997 LaTeX3 project, David Carlisle +%% +% LaTeX Test File. +% ================ +% +% Processing this file with a newly installed LaTeX +% will test various aspects of the installation. +% +% To typeset the comments in this file, create a small +% file ltxcheck.drv that looks like the following (without the %) +% +% \documentclass{ltxdoc} +% \begin{document} +% \DocInput{ltxcheck.tex} +% \end{document} +% +% and process `latex ltxcheck.drv'. +% +\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1997/06/01] +% \fi +% +% \StopEventually{} +% \CheckSum{643} +% +% \changes{v1.0c}{1994/03/15} +% {Add \cmd{\NeedsTeXFormat}} +% \changes{v1.0t}{1996/09/25} +% {Move ltxcheck to separate file} +% \changes{v1.0v}{1996/11/20} +% {lowercase filenames /1044} +% \changes{v1.1d}{2004/02/11} +% {Remove pict2e.sty} +% +\ProvidesFile{ltxcheck.tex}[2004/02/11 v1.1d LaTeX check file (DPC)] +% +% \GetFileInfo{ltxcheck.tex} +% \title{\textsf{ltxcheck}: The \LaTeX\ test program\thanks +% {version~\fileversion, dated \filedate}} +% \author{David Carlisle} +% \date{\filedate} +% \maketitle +% +% This file, |ltxcheck.tex| should be run after \LaTeX\ has been +% installed. It Checks some system dependent parts of \LaTeX\ are set up +% correctly for your system, and checks that the main input files and +% fonts that \LaTeX\ uses are present and can be found by \LaTeX. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\makeatletter +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\typeout{^^J% +LaTeX2e installation check file^^J% +===============================} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\typeout{^^J% + Before running this file through LaTeX2e you should have installed^^J% + the Standard LaTeX files in their final `system' directories.^^J% + This file should *not* be run in a directory that contains article.cls} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% |\pause| just slows things down so that not too much appears on the +% screen at once, or scrolls off the top. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pause{% + \typeout{}% + \message{** Hit return to continue: }% + \read -1 to \xxx + \typeout{}} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\typeout{^^J% + After certain tests, LaTeX will pause so that you can read the^^J% + output without it scrolling off the screen.^^J% + When you are ready just hit <return> and LaTeX will continue.^^J% + When LaTeX pauses, you will see a prompt like the one below.^^J^^J% + If a test fails, a message will be displayed followed by^^J% + an error message starting `! BAD'.^^J% + LaTeX will quit if you try to scroll past some error messages.} +\pause +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Check that the system has defined |\@currdir| correctly +% by writing an |.aux| file and then trying to find it again. +% \begin{macrocode} +\typeout{^^J% + Checking the current directory syntax^^J% + =====================================} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\iftest\testfalse +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\ifx\@currdir\@undefined + \typeout{^^J% + \noexpand\@currdir is undefined !!^^J% + Something is seriously wrong with the LaTeX2e initialisation.^^J% + Either you have corrupted files or this is a LaTeX bug.} + \errmessage{BAD LaTeX2e system!!} + \expandafter\@@end +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\ifx\@currdir\@empty + \typeout{^^J% + \noexpand\@currdir is defined to be empty.^^J% + This means that LaTeX can not distinguish between a file^^J% + aaaaa.tex^^J% + that exists in the current directory, and a file aaaaa.tex^^J% + in another directory.^^J% + It may be that this Operating System has no concept of `directory'^^J% + in which case the setting is correct. If however it is possible to^^J% + uniquely refer to a file then a suitable definition of + \noexpand\@currdir^^J% + should be added to texsys.cfg, and the format remade.} + \pause +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\else + \typeout{^^J% +\noexpand\@currdir is defined as + \expandafter\strip@prefix\meaning\@currdir^^J% + (Testing...)} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\begingroup +\endlinechar=-1 +\count@\time +\divide\count@ 60 +\count2=-\count@ +\multiply\count2 60 +\advance\count2 \time +\edef\today{% + \the\year/\two@digits{\the\month}/\two@digits{\the\day}:% + \two@digits{\the\count@}:\two@digits{\the\count2}} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} + \immediate\openout15=ltxcheck.aux + \immediate\write15{\today^^J} + \immediate\closeout15 % +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} + \openin\@inputcheck\@currdir ltxcheck.aux % + \ifeof\@inputcheck + \typeout{\@currdir ltxcheck.aux not found}% + \else + \read\@inputcheck to \reserved@a + \ifx\reserved@a\today + \typeout{\@currdir ltxcheck.aux found} + \testtrue + \else + \typeout{BAD: old file \reserved@a(should be \today)}% + \testfalse + \fi + \fi + \closein\@inputcheck +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} + \iftest + \endgroup + \typeout{\noexpand \@currdir OK!} + \else + \endgroup +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} + \typeout{^^J% + The LaTeX2e installation has defined \noexpand\@currdir^^J% + to be \expandafter\strip@prefix\meaning\@currdir.^^J% + This appears to be incorrect.^^J% + You should add a correct definition to texsys.cfg^^J% + and rebuild the format.} + \errmessage{BAD LaTeX2e system!!} + \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\@@end + \fi + \pause +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \changes{v1.0k}{1995/09/27} +% {Check filename parser} +% Check the filename parser can at least cope with a simple +% name + extension, |article.cls|. +% \begin{macrocode} +\typeout{^^J% + Checking the filename parser^^J% + ============================} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\filename@parse{article.cls} +\def\reserved@a{article} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\testtrue +\ifx\filename@base\reserved@a + \ifx\filename@ext\@clsextension + \else + \testfalse + \fi +\else + \testfalse +\fi +\iftest + \typeout{filename parser OK!}\pause +\else + \typeout{^^J% + The LaTeX2e installation has defined \noexpand\filename@parse.^^J% + This appears to be incorrect.^^J% + You should remove the incorrect definition from texsys.cfg^^J% + and rebuild the format.} + \errmessage{BAD LaTeX2e system!!} + \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\@@end +\fi +% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Check the input path by looking for |article.cls|. If |article.cls| +% is in the current directory it would be found anyway, so first check +% it is not there. +% \begin{macrocode} +\typeout{^^J% + Checking the input path^^J% + =======================^^J} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\begingroup +\let\input@path\@undefined +\ifx\@currdir\@empty\else + \IfFileExists{\@currdir article.cls} + {\typeout{% + article.cls appears to be in current directory!^^J^^J% + If this is the case, install article.cls into a^^J% + `standard input directory'^^J% + and copy ltxcheck.tex to another directory before^^J% + processing with LaTeX.^^J% + ^^J% + If article.cls is not in the current directory,^^J% + then you need to edit texsys.cfg.^^J% + Read the comments in that file. If nothing else works, add:^^J% + \string\let\string\@currdir\string\@empty^^J}% + \errhelp{Move files, or edit texsys.cfg} + \def\ArticleClassFoundInCurrentDirectory{% + This file should not be run in a `standard input directory'} + \errmessage{BAD: \ArticleClassFoundInCurrentDirectory}} + {} +\fi +\endgroup +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\IfFileExists{article.cls} + {\typeout{input path OK!}} + {\typeout{^^J% + LaTeX claims that article.cls is not on the system.^^J% + Either LaTeX has been incorrectly installed, or the + \noexpand\input@path^^J% + is incorrect. A correct definition should be added to^^J% + texsys.cfg, and the format remade.} + \pause + \typeout{^^J% + Typical definitions of \noexpand\input@path include:^^J^^J% + \string\let\string\input@path=\noexpand\@undefined + (the default definition)^^J^^J% + \string\def\string\input@path{\@percentchar^^J + {/usr/lib/tex/inputs/} {/usr/local/lib/tex/inputs/} }^^J^^J% + \string\def\string\input@path{\@percentchar^^J + {c:/tex/inputs/} {a:/} }^^J^^J% + \string\def\string\input@path{\@percentchar^^J + {tex_inputs:} {SOMEDISK:[SOMEWHERE.TEX.INPUTS]} }^^J}% + \pause + \typeout{^^J% + Note that \noexpand\input@path should be undefined + unless your^^J% + TeX installation does not make + \noexpand\openin and \noexpand\input^^J% + search the same directories.^^J% + If \noexpand\input@path is defined, entries should be^^J% + in the same syntax as \noexpand\@currdir^^J% + ie full directory names that may be concatenated with the^^J% + basename (note the final / and ] in the above examples).^^J% + Some systems may need more complicated settings.^^J% + See texsys.cfg for more examples.^^J% + ! BAD \noexpand\input@path!!} + \@@end}% +\pause +% \end{macrocode} +% +% For versions prior to \TeX3 complain to the installer. (Although +% \LaTeX\ will work with these old \TeX\ versions). +% For versions between 3 and 3.14 check that \LaTeX\ is using the +% work-around for the |^^J| in |\message| bug. +% \begin{macrocode} +\typeout{^^J% + Checking the TeX version^^J% + ========================} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \changes{v0.2j}{1994/02/25} +% {\cs{noboundary} is \cs{relax} not undef in TeX2 (initialised +% in 2e format)} +% \begin{macrocode} +\dimen@\ifx\@TeXversion\@undefined4\else\@TeXversion\fi\p@% +\ifx\noboundary\relax + \typeout{^^J% + This is TeX 2. You will not be able to use all the new features^^J% + of LaTeX2e with such an old TeX.^^J% + The current version (1995/12/11) is TeX 3.14159.^^J% + Consider upgrading your TeX.} + \ifdim\dimen@<3\p@\else + \errhelp{Check that texsys.cfg has not defined \@TeXversion} + \def\OldTeX{% + BAD: \noexpand\@TeXversion is incorrect: \meaning\@TeXversion} + \errmessage{\OldTeX} + \fi +\else +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \changes{v1.0h}{1994/10/11} +% {Check for TeX3.141} +% \begin{macrocode} + \ifdim\dimen@>3.14\p@ + \typeout{This appears to be a recent version of TeX!^^J% + If the following `lines' all appear on the same line,^^J% + separated by \string^\string^J % + then there has been an incorrect installation.} + \else + \typeout{^^J% + This appears to be a TeX between 3.0 and 3.14^^J% + but the current version (1995/12/11) is TeX 3.14159^^J% + consider upgrading your TeX.^^J% + The following `lines' will appear on the same line,^^J% + separated by \string^\string^J;^^J% + the same problem may affect other messages from LaTeX.} + \fi +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\message{line1^^Jline2^^Jline3} +\pause +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% +% +% To check that the \LaTeX\ fonts have been installed, the well known +% trick of going into |\batchmode|, and testing for |\nullfont| is used. +% Not all fonts are tested, just a representative sample. +% \begin{macrocode} +\typeout{^^J% + Checking fonts^^J% + =====================================} +% \end{macrocode} +% \changes{v1.0h}{1994/10/11} +% {Check for fonts} +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\checkfont#1{% + \batchmode + \font\test=#1\relax + \errorstopmode + \ifx\test\nullfont + \typeout{\@spaces! BAD: #1.tfm not found!} + \@tempswatrue + \else + \typeout{\@spaces OK: #1.tfm found} + \fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\typeout{^^JChecking Standard TeX fonts...} +\@tempswafalse +\checkfont{cmr10} +\checkfont{cmr12} +\checkfont{cmmi10} +\if@tempswa + \errhelp{Obtain a complete standard TeX font distribution.} + \errmessage{BAD: Missing Standard Fonts} +\else +% \end{macrocode} +% \changes{v1.0s}{1996/07/19} +% {Check for bad cm fonts} +% \begin{macrocode} + \font\testcm=cmr10 + \testcm + \setbox0\hbox{h{}o} + \setbox2=\hbox{ho} + \ifdim\wd0=\wd2 + \typeout{^^J% +OK: correct Computer Modern fonts installed.}% + \else + \typeout{^^J% +An unauthorised and incompatible release of the^^J% +Computer Modern fonts has been installed on your system.^^J% +The official fonts may be obtained from CTAN archives in:^^J% +tex-archive/fonts/cm^^J% +For further details see Donald Knuth's Home page:^^J% +http://www-cs-faculty.stanford.edu/\protect~knuth/cm.html}% + \errhelp{Re-install Computer Modern fonts, and then rebuild LaTeX} + \errmessage{BAD Standard fonts!!} + \fi +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} + \pause +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\typeout{^^JChecking LaTeX Picture Mode fonts...} +\@tempswafalse +\checkfont{lcircle10} +\checkfont{lcirclew10} +\if@tempswa + \@tempswafalse + \checkfont{circle10} + \checkfont{circlew10} + \if@tempswa + \typeout{^^J! BAD: You do not have the picture mode fonts:^^J% + lcircle10 and lcirclew10} + \else + \typeout{^^J! BAD:% + You have the picture mode fonts with their old names:^^J% + circle10 and circlew10 have been renamed to^^J% + lcircle10 and lcirclew10} + \fi + \errhelp{Obtain a complete standard LaTeX font distribution.} + \errmessage{BAD: Missing LaTeX Fonts} +\else + \pause +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\typeout{^^JChecking Extra LaTeX Computer Modern fonts...} +\@tempswafalse +\checkfont{cmmib5} +\checkfont{cmmib7} +\checkfont{cmex7} +\if@tempswa +\typeout{! BAD:^^J% + LaTeX2e uses a few `extra' Computer Modern fonts produced by^^J% + The American Mathematical Society.^^J% + If you install The AMSFONTS font collection, then these, and other,^^J% + fonts will be available to LaTeX.^^J% + Although installing AMSFONTS is recommended, LaTeX does not require^^J% + The full collection; you may obtain a minimal set of extra LaTeX^^J% + fonts from any CTAN archive, in: tex-archive/macros/latex/fonts/} +\errhelp{Obtain LaTeX fonts or the AMSFONTS collection.} +\errmessage{BAD: Missing LaTeX Fonts} +\else + \pause +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \changes{v1.0k}{1995/09/27} +% {Check for dc and tc fonts} +% \changes{v1.1a}{1997/01/14} +% {Check for ec fonts} +% \changes{v1.1c}{1997/06/10} +% {Modify messages now ec released} +% \begin{macrocode} +\typeout{^^JChecking T1 encoded Computer Modern (dc & ec) fonts...} +% \end{macrocode} +% \changes{v1.0m}{1995/10/31} +% {Check the T1 fd files match the dc release.} +% This command looks for the string |dcr17<| in the font tables for +% T1/cmr. If it is there, then the T1 fd files match the old dc fonts, +% for dc release 1.1 or earlier. If not then presumably new fd files +% are being used. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\dcrseventeen{% + \begingroup + \escapechar-1 + \xdef\reserved@a{% + \noexpand\in@ + {\expandafter\string\csname dcr17\endcsname<}% + {\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter + \string\csname T1/cmr/m/n\endcsname<}}% + \endgroup + \reserved@a} +% \end{macrocode} +% Similarly this command looks for the string |ecrm| in the font tables +% for T1/cmr. If it is there, then the T1 fd files match the ec fonts, +% for ec release 1.0 or later. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\ecrm{% + \begingroup + \escapechar-1 + \xdef\reserved@a{% + \noexpand\in@ + {\expandafter\string\csname ecrm\endcsname}% + {\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter + \string\csname T1/cmr/m/n\endcsname}}% + \endgroup + \reserved@a} +% \end{macrocode} +% \changes{v1.0o}{1995/11/14} +% {dont produce a BAD message if just one set of dc fonts is missing} +% Remove the ``! BAD'' typeout while checking for dc fonts so +% as not to worry sites with just the new ones. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\checkfont#1{% + \batchmode + \font\test=#1\relax + \errorstopmode + \ifx\test\nullfont + \typeout{\@spaces\@spaces #1.tfm not found} + \@tempswatrue + \else + \typeout{\@spaces OK: #1.tfm found} + \fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% + +% \begin{macrocode} +\@tempswafalse +\checkfont{ecrm1000} +\if@tempswa +% \end{macrocode} +% No ec fonts. Check the state of the dc fonts. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\typeout{No EC fonts found, checking DC fonts...} +\@tempswafalse +\checkfont{dcr10} +\if@tempswa + \@tempswafalse + \checkfont{tcr1000} + \if@tempswa +% \end{macrocode} +% No dc fonts at all. +% \begin{macrocode} + \typeout{^^J% +! BAD: No ec fonts found!!^^J% +LaTeX does not require the use of ec fonts^^J% +however they are strongly recommended.^^J% +The ec fonts are available in a more natural range of sizes^^J% +and allow better hyphenation and kerning than the^^J% +old fonts such as cmr10.^^J% +These ec fonts may be obtained from CTAN archives, in:^^J% +tex-archive/fonts/ec} + \else +% \end{macrocode} +% No old dc fonts, but new ones installed. +% First check whether the latest patch has been applied. +% \changes{v1.0p}{1995/12/11} +% {Check for dc fonts 1.2 patch level 1 (Bernd Raichle) /2003} +% \changes{v1.0q}{1996/06/03} +% {Check for dc fonts 1.3} +% \changes{v1.1b}{1997/01/24} +% {extra closing brace removed from this branch} +% \begin{macrocode} + \font\testdc=dcr1000 + \testdc + \setbox0\hbox{A{}y} + \setbox2=\hbox{Ay} + \ifdim\wd0>\wd2 + \typeout{^^J% +! BAD: dc fonts release 1.3 installed^^J% +The dc fonts are now replaced by the ec fonts^^J% +These ec fonts may be obtained from CTAN archives, in:^^J% +tex-archive/fonts/ec.}% + \else + \typeout{^^J% +! BAD dc fonts 1.2 or older installed.^^J% +The dc fonts are now replaced by the ec fonts^^J% +These ec fonts may be obtained from CTAN archives, in:^^J% +tex-archive/fonts/ec.}% + \fi + \dcrseventeen + \ifin@ + \typeout{^^J% +The fd files for the obsolete release 1.1 of the^^J% +dc fonts have been loaded into the LaTeX format.^^J% +However, you appear to have at least release 1.2 of the dc fonts.^^J% +You should generate suitable fd files by running:^^J% +latex newdc.ins^^J% +and then rebuild the format by rerunning:^^J% +initex latex.ltx} + \errmessage{BAD LaTeX2e system!!} + \else + \typeout{^^J% + DC fonts OK!} + \fi + \fi +\else + \@tempswafalse + \checkfont{tcr1000} + \if@tempswa +% \end{macrocode} +% Old DC fonts, but no new ones. +% \begin{macrocode} + \typeout{^^J% +Old dc fonts found!!^^J% +Only the original dc fonts are on your system.^^J% +Later releases of the dc/ec fonts introduced^^J% +many improvements and are strongly recommended.^^J% +They may be obtained from CTAN archives, in:^^J% +tex-archive/fonts/ec.} + \pause + \dcrseventeen + \ifin@\else + \typeout{^^J% +The LaTeX2e installation has installed fd files for^^J% +release 1.2 (or later) of the dc fonts.^^J% +However, you appear to have only release 1.1 of these fonts.^^J% +You must now generate the correct fd files by running:^^J% +latex olddc.ins^^J% +and then rebuild the format by rerunning:^^J% +initex latex.ltx} + \errmessage{BAD LaTeX2e system!!} + \fi + \else +% \end{macrocode} +% Both old and new DC fonts. +% \begin{macrocode} + \font\testdc=dcr1000 + \testdc + \setbox0\hbox{A{}y} + \setbox2=\hbox{Ay} + \ifdim\wd0>\wd2 + \typeout{^^J% +! BAD: dc fonts release 1.3 installed^^J% +The dc fonts are now replaced by the ec fonts^^J% +These ec fonts may be obtained from CTAN archives, in:^^J% +tex-archive/fonts/ec.}% + \else + \typeout{^^J% +! BAD dc fonts 1.2 or older installed.^^J% +The dc fonts are now replaced by the ec fonts^^J% +These ec fonts may be obtained from CTAN archives, in:^^J% +tex-archive/fonts/ec.}% + \fi +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} + \dcrseventeen + \ifin@ + \typeout{^^J% +The fd files for the obsolete release 1.1 of the^^J% +dc fonts have been loaded into the LaTeX format.^^J% +However, you appear to have at least release 1.2 of the dcfonts.^^J% +You should use generate suitable fd files by running:^^J% +latex newdc.ins^^J% +and then rebuild the format by running:^^J% +initex latex.ltx^^J% +Otherwise LaTeX will always use the older fonts.} + \errmessage{BAD LaTeX2e system!!} + \else + \ecrm + \ifin@ + \typeout{^^J% +The fd files for the new EC fonts have been loaded into^^J% +the LaTeX format.^^J% +However, these fonts are not found by LaTeX.^^J% +You should either install the ec fonts, or generate suitable^^J% +fd files for the dc fonts by running: \space latex newdc.ins^^J% +and then rebuild the format by running: \space initex latex.ltx} + \errmessage{BAD LaTeX2e system!!} + \else + \typeout{^^J% +DC fonts OK!^^J% +(Both old and new dc font releases are installed.)^^J% +Note that the dc fonts are expected to be replaced by ec^^J% +in January 1997.} + \fi + \fi + \fi +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% Else EC fonts are found, so check whether LaTeX is going to use them. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\else +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} + \ecrm + \ifin@ + \typeout{EC fonts OK!} + \else + \typeout{% +EC fonts installed but LaTeX is still using dc fonts.^^J% +You may want to run ec.ins and remake the LaTeX format} + \fi +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\fi +\pause +% \end{macrocode} +% +% +% +% The following files will be unpacked by running iniTeX on +% |unpack.ins|. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\typeout{^^JChecking LaTeX input files...^^J} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% If the specified file is not there, add it to the list. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\checkfile#1{% + \IfFileExists{#1}{}{\edef\missingfile{\missingfile#1, }}} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Report any missing files in the last batch tested. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\filereport#1#2{% +\ifx\missingfile\@empty + \typeout{^^J% +OK: The #1 files such as #2^^J% +are accessible to LaTeX.} +\pause +\expandafter\@gobbletwo +\else + \typeout{^^J% +! BAD: The #1 files:^^J% +\missingfile^^J% +are not accessible to LaTeX.} +\errhelp{Check the installation!} +\let\missingfile\@empty +\fi +\errmessage{Missing LaTeX files}} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Kernel files: +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\missingfile\@empty +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\checkfile{hyphen.ltx} +\checkfile{fontmath.ltx} +\checkfile{fonttext.ltx} +\checkfile{preload.ltx} +\checkfile{texsys.cfg} +\checkfile{latex.ltx} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Don't use |\filereport| here as the message is rather different +% as the |.ltx| files don't really need to be available to \LaTeX\ +% once the format is made. +% \begin{macrocode} +\ifx\missingfile\@empty + \typeout{^^J% +OK: The files such as latex.ltx that are used to make^^J% +the format are accessible to LaTeX.} +\else + \typeout{^^J% +The files:^^J% +\missingfile^^J% +that are used to make the format are not accessible to LaTeX.^^J% +This is OK, but you will need those files if you need to remake the^^J% +the format later.} +\fi +\pause +\let\missingfile\@empty +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Class files and class options: +% \begin{macrocode}} +\checkfile{article.cls} +\checkfile{report.cls} +\checkfile{book.cls} +\checkfile{letter.cls} +\checkfile{ltxdoc.cls} +\checkfile{proc.cls} +\checkfile{slides.cls} +\checkfile{bk10.clo} +\checkfile{bk11.clo} +\checkfile{bk12.clo} +\checkfile{size10.clo} +\checkfile{size11.clo} +\checkfile{size12.clo} +\checkfile{fleqn.clo} +\checkfile{leqno.clo} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\filereport{main class}{article.cls} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Package files: +% \begin{macrocode} +\checkfile{alltt.sty} +\checkfile{doc.sty} +\checkfile{exscale.sty} +\checkfile{flafter.sty} +\checkfile{fontenc.sty} +\checkfile{graphpap.sty} +\checkfile{ifthen.sty} +\checkfile{inputenc.sty} +\checkfile{latexsym.sty} +\checkfile{makeidx.sty} +\checkfile{newlfont.sty} +\checkfile{oldlfont.sty} +\checkfile{shortvrb.sty} +\checkfile{showidx.sty} +\checkfile{slides.sty} +\checkfile{syntonly.sty} +\checkfile{tracefnt.sty} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\filereport{main package}{ifthen.sty} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Font definition (.fd) files: +% \begin{macrocode}} +\checkfile{omlcmm.fd} +\checkfile{omlcmr.fd} +\checkfile{omllcmm.fd} +\checkfile{omscmr.fd} +\checkfile{omscmsy.fd} +\checkfile{omslcmsy.fd} +\checkfile{omxcmex.fd} +\checkfile{omxlcmex.fd} +\checkfile{ot1cmdh.fd} +\checkfile{ot1cmfib.fd} +\checkfile{ot1cmfr.fd} +\checkfile{ot1cmr.fd} +\checkfile{ot1cmss.fd} +\checkfile{ot1cmtt.fd} +\checkfile{ot1cmvtt.fd} +\checkfile{ot1lcmss.fd} +\checkfile{ot1lcmtt.fd} +\checkfile{t1cmdh.fd} +\checkfile{t1cmfib.fd} +\checkfile{t1cmfr.fd} +\checkfile{t1cmr.fd} +\checkfile{t1cmss.fd} +\checkfile{t1cmtt.fd} +\checkfile{t1cmvtt.fd} +\checkfile{ts1cmr.fd} +\checkfile{ts1cmss.fd} +\checkfile{ts1cmtt.fd} +\checkfile{ts1cmvtt.fd} +\checkfile{ucmr.fd} +\checkfile{ucmss.fd} +\checkfile{ucmtt.fd} +\checkfile{ullasy.fd} +\checkfile{ulasy.fd} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\filereport{font definition}{t1cmr.fd} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Font encoding files: +% \begin{macrocode} +\checkfile{t1enc.def} +\checkfile{ot1enc.def} +\checkfile{omsenc.def} +\checkfile{omlenc.def} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\filereport{font encoding}{t1enc.def} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Input encoding files: +% \begin{macrocode} +\checkfile{ascii.def} +\checkfile{latin1.def} +\checkfile{latin2.def} +\checkfile{latin3.def} +\checkfile{latin5.def} +\checkfile{cp850.def} +\checkfile{cp852.def} +\checkfile{cp865.def} +\checkfile{cp437.def} +\checkfile{cp437de.def} +\checkfile{applemac.def} +\checkfile{next.def} +\checkfile{ansinew.def} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\filereport{input encoding}{latin1.def} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Compatibility files: +% \begin{macrocode} +\checkfile{article.sty} +\checkfile{book.sty} +\checkfile{letter.sty} +\checkfile{proc.sty} +\checkfile{report.sty} +\checkfile{fleqn.sty} +\checkfile{leqno.sty} +\checkfile{openbib.sty} +\checkfile{latex209.def} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\filereport{compatibility mode}{article.sty} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Other files: +% \begin{macrocode} +\checkfile{bezier.sty} +\checkfile{docstrip.tex} +\checkfile{slides.def} +\checkfile{sfonts.def} +\checkfile{t1enc.sty} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\filereport{remaining}{sfonts.def} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\@@end +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \Finale +% + diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/manifest.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/manifest.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..44bc337d211 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/manifest.txt @@ -0,0 +1,410 @@ +% +% The following files form the LaTeX2e distribution of 2004/03/02 +% +% +% CONTENTS OF THE LaTeX DISTRIBUTION +% ================================== +% +% Documentation: +% -------------- +% +% 00readme.txt -- The distribution guide. START BY READING THIS FILE +% manifest.txt -- This file. +% +% install.txt -- How to install LaTeX (overview). +% tex2.txt -- Extras for installing LaTeX on TeX2. +% autoload.txt -- About the `autoload' LaTeX variant: no longer supported. +% +% amiweb2c.txt -- How to install LaTeX with Amiga WEB2C. +% cstex.txt -- How to install LaTeX with Atari CS-TeX. +% decustex.txt -- How to install LaTeX with VAX/VMS DECUS TeX. +% directex.txt -- How to install LaTeX with Mac DirectTeX. +% emtex.txt -- How to install LaTeX with PC emTeX. +% emtextds.txt -- How to install LaTeX with Schmidt's emTeX/TDS (OS/2). +% lindner.txt -- How to install LaTeX with Lindner's Atari TeX. +% microtex.txt -- How to install LaTeX with PC MicroTeX. +% miktex.txt -- How to install LaTeX with MikTeX for Windows 95 and NT. +% multitex.txt -- How to install LaTeX with Atari MultiTeX. +% oztex.txt -- How to install LaTeX with Mac OzTeX. +% pastex.txt -- How to install LaTeX with Amiga PasTeX. +% pctex.txt -- How to install LaTeX with PC PCTeX. +% textures.txt -- How to install LaTeX with Mac Textures. +% truetex.txt -- How to install LaTeX with TrueTeX for Windows 95 and NT. +% vtex.txt -- How to install LaTeX with PC VTeX. +% vtexfree.txt -- How to install LaTeX with VTeX/Free (VTeX/Lnx, VTeX/2). +% web2ctex.txt -- How to install LaTeX with Unix web2c TeX. +% yandytex.txt -- How to install LaTeX with PC Y&Y TeX. +% +% template.txt -- A template for writing installation guides. +% texpert.txt -- Documentation for TeX experts. +% patches.txt -- Explains the patch mechanism. +% +% legal.txt -- Copyright notice; warranty; copying conditions. +% lppl.txt -- The LaTeX Project Public License (current version). +% lppl-1-0.txt -- The LaTeX Project Public License (version 1.0). +% lppl-1-1.txt -- The LaTeX Project Public License (version 1.1). +% lppl-1-2.txt -- The LaTeX Project Public License (version 1.1). +% +% bugs.txt -- How to submit a bug report for LaTeX. +% latexbug.tex -- File to generate a bug report. +% latexbug.el -- File to generate a bug report with emacs. +% +% source2e.tex -- File to produce kernel documentation. +% changes.txt -- List of changes in reverse chronological order. +% +% sample2e.tex -- Sample LaTeX input file. +% small2e.tex -- Small sample LaTeX input file. +% +% clsguide.tex -- How to write class files. +% cfgguide.tex -- Guide to using `.cfg' files to configure LaTeX. +% cyrguide.tex -- Guide to using cyrillic languages in LaTeX. +% fntguide.tex -- Guide to font selection. +% modguide.tex -- Guide to modifying and distributing LaTeX. +% usrguide.tex -- User guide for this release. +% +% ltnews01.tex -- What was new in the release dated 1994/06. +% ltnews02.tex -- What was new in the release dated 1994/12. +% ltnews03.tex -- What was new in the release dated 1995/06. +% ltnews04.tex -- What was new in the release dated 1995/12. +% ltnews05.tex -- What was new in the release dated 1996/06. +% ltnews06.tex -- What was new in the release dated 1996/12. +% ltnews07.tex -- What was new in the release dated 1997/06. +% ltnews08.tex -- What was new in the release dated 1997/12. +% ltnews09.tex -- What was new in the release dated 1998/06. +% ltnews10.tex -- What was new in the release dated 1998/12. +% ltnews11.tex -- What was new in the release dated 1999/06. +% ltnews12.tex -- What was new in the release dated 1999/12. +% ltnews13.tex -- What was new in the release dated 2000/06. +% ltnews14.tex -- What was new in the release dated 2001/06. +% ltnews15.tex -- What was new in the latest release dated 2003/12. +% ltnews16.tex -- What may happen in 2004 and beyond. +% +% ltx3info.tex -- Information about the LaTeX3 project. +% +% manual.err -- Errata for the LaTeX Manual. +% compan.err -- Errata for the LaTeX Companion. +% begleit.err -- Errata for the LaTeX-Begleiter (German). +% grphcomp.err -- Errata for the LaTeX Graphics Companion. +% handbuch.err -- Errata for the LaTeX Manual (German). +% webcomp.err -- Errata for the LaTeX Web Companion. +% webcompg.err -- Errata for the LaTeX Web Companion (German). +% +% +% Kernel files: +% ------------- +% +% cmfonts.fdd -- Font definitions for Computer modern fonts. +% fontdef.dtx -- Code for font definitions. +% lthyphen.dtx -- Hyphenation support. +% ltboxes.dtx -- Code for making boxes. +% ltclass.dtx -- Class and option handling. +% ltcounts.dtx -- Counters. +% ltpageno.dtx -- Page numbering. +% ltxref.dtx -- Cross referencing. +% ltlength.dtx -- Lengths. +% ltdirchk.dtx -- Support for search in current directory. +% ltfiles.dtx -- File handling. +% ltfinal.dtx -- Code for debugging and final initialisations. +% ltfloat.dtx -- Float handling. +% ltfntcmd.dtx -- Various font switching commands. +% ltfssbas.dtx -- NFSS Base macros +% ltfsstrc.dtx -- NFSS Tracing (and tracefnt.sty) +% ltfssdcl.dtx -- NFSS Declarative interface +% ltfssini.dtx -- NFSS Initialisation +% ltfsscmp.dtx -- NFSS1 compatibility +% ltidxglo.dtx -- Index and glossary. +% ltbibl.dtx -- Bibliography commands. +% ltalloc.dtx -- Allocation of counters and others. +% ltdefns.dtx -- Initial definitions. +% ltcntrl.dtx -- Program control macros. +% lterror.dtx -- Error handling. +% ltpar.dtx -- Paragraphs. +% ltspace.dtx -- Spacing, line and page breaking. +% ltlogos.dtx -- Logos. +% ltlists.dtx -- Code for lists and related environments. +% ltmath.dtx -- Code for math. +% ltmiscen.dtx -- Code for miscellaneous environments. +% ltoutenc.dtx -- Code for output encoding commands. +% ltoutput.dtx -- LaTeX page makeup (output routine). +% ltpictur.dtx -- The picture environment. +% ltpage.dtx -- Page styles and related commands. +% ltplain.dtx -- Things borrowed from the plain format. +% lttab.dtx -- The tabbing, tabular and array environments. +% ltthm.dtx -- The theorem-like environments. +% ltsect.dtx -- Sectioning and title commands. +% ltvers.dtx -- Version identification code. +% preload.dtx -- Code for preloading fonts. +% ltpatch.ltx -- Patches to current kernel. +% +% +% Standard Classes: +% ----------------- +% +% classes.dtx -- Standard document classes article/book/report. +% letter.dtx -- Standard document class letter. +% proc.dtx -- Proc class: modifies the article class. +% slides.dtx -- Slides class, etc based on SLiTeX. +% slifonts.fdd -- Font declarations for slides class. +% +% +% LaTeX2.09 compatibility: +% ------------------------ +% +% latex209.dtx -- Implements LaTeX 2.09 compatibility mode. +% +% +% Standard packages: +% ------------------ +% +% alltt.dtx -- Implements the alltt environment. +% fixltx2e.dtx -- Implements non-gratuitous fixes to LaTeX. +% graphpap.dtx -- Implements programming \graphpaper command.. +% inputenc.dtx -- Implements eight-bit input. +% utf8ienc.dtx -- Supplement for inputenc to implement UTF8 encoding. +% ifthen.dtx -- Implements programming control structures. +% makeindx.dtx -- Implements support for generating an index. +% +% +% Font selection files: +% --------------------- +% +% exscale.dtx -- Scaling the math extension font. +% latexsym.dtx -- Definitions for LaTeX symbol fonts. +% newlfont.dtx -- New semantics of font switching commands. +% nfssfont.dtx -- program for testing a font and generating glyph tables. +% oldlfont.dtx -- Old semantics of font switching commands. +% syntonly.dtx -- Syntonly package for running in syntax check mode. +% +% +% The doc package: +% ---------------- +% +% doc.dtx -- Package for self documenting code. +% docstrip.dtx -- Module for removing comments. +% ltxdoc.dtx -- Class file for printing documentation. +% +% +% Installation scripts for the various parts: +% ------------------------------------------- +% +% unpack.ins -- LaTeX main installation script (see below). +% +% +% Installation scripts used by unpack.ins: +% ------------------------------------------ +% +% alltt.ins -- Installation script for the alltt package. +% classes.ins -- Installation script for standard classes. +% cmfonts.ins -- Installation script for OT* Computer Modern fonts. +% newdc.ins -- Installation script for T* Computer Modern fonts. +% docstrip.ins -- Installation script for docstrip. +% exscale.ins -- Installation script for scaling the cmex font. +% fixltx2e.ins -- Installation script for the fixltx2e package. +% format.ins -- Installation script for latex.ltx. +% graphpap.ins -- Installation script for graphpap.dtx. +% inputenc.ins -- Installation script for inputenc.dtx. +% ifthen.ins -- Installation script for ifthen.dtx. +% latex209.ins -- Installation script for compatibility mode. +% latexsym.ins -- Installation script for latexsym.dtx. +% letter.ins -- Installation script for document class letter. +% ltoutenc.ins -- Installation script for output encoding files. +% makeindx.ins -- Installation script for makeindx.dtx. +% nfssfont.ins -- Installation script for nfssfont.dtx. +% proc.ins -- Installation script for the proc package. +% slides.ins -- Installation script for SLiTeX. +% syntonly.ins -- Installation script for the syntonly package. +% +% +% Installation scripts to be used by themselves: +% ---------------------------------------------- +% +% cmextra.ins -- Installation script for additional CM fonts. +% autoload.ins -- For the `autoload' LaTeX variant: no longer supported. +% ec.ins -- Installation script for T1 and TS1 EC fonts. +% olddc.ins -- Installation script for obsolete dc fonts (v1.1). +% +% +% Support files: +% -------------- +% +% ltxguide.cls -- Document class used by the guides. +% ltnews.cls -- Document class for `news' document. +% minimal.cls -- Minimal document class for debugging and testing. +% idx.tex -- Print out index entries in your document. +% lablst.tex -- Generate list of labels used in a document. +% testpage.tex -- Test file for checking the accuracy of a printer. +% ltxcheck.tex -- Test file for checking the LaTeX installation. +% +% +% ====================================================================== +% +% The following file list is read in during the installation procedure +% to check that all the files are present. The file names should be +% separated by white space, and this file should end with |\endinput|. +% +00readme.txt +alltt.dtx +alltt.ins +amiweb2c.txt +autoload.ins +autoload.txt +begleit.err +bugs.txt +cfgguide.tex +changes.txt +classes.dtx +classes.ins +clsguide.tex +cmextra.ins +cmfonts.fdd +cmfonts.ins +compan.err +cstex.txt +cyrguide.tex +decustex.txt +directex.txt +doc.dtx +docstrip.dtx +docstrip.ins +ec.ins +emtex.txt +emtextds.txt +exscale.dtx +exscale.ins +fixltx2e.dtx +fixltx2e.ins +fntguide.tex +fontdef.dtx +format.ins +graphpap.dtx +graphpap.ins +grphcomp.err +handbuch.err +idx.tex +ifthen.dtx +ifthen.ins +inputenc.dtx +inputenc.ins +install.txt +lablst.tex +latex209.dtx +latex209.ins +latexbug.el +latexbug.tex +latexsym.dtx +latexsym.ins +legal.txt +letter.dtx +letter.ins +lindner.txt +lppl-1-0.txt +lppl-1-1.txt +lppl-1-2.txt +lppl.txt +ltalloc.dtx +ltbibl.dtx +ltboxes.dtx +ltclass.dtx +ltcntrl.dtx +ltcounts.dtx +ltdefns.dtx +ltdirchk.dtx +lterror.dtx +ltfiles.dtx +ltfinal.dtx +ltfloat.dtx +ltfntcmd.dtx +ltfssbas.dtx +ltfsscmp.dtx +ltfssdcl.dtx +ltfssini.dtx +ltfsstrc.dtx +lthyphen.dtx +ltidxglo.dtx +ltlength.dtx +ltlists.dtx +ltlogos.dtx +ltmath.dtx +ltmiscen.dtx +ltnews.cls +ltnews01.tex +ltnews02.tex +ltnews03.tex +ltnews04.tex +ltnews05.tex +ltnews06.tex +ltnews07.tex +ltnews08.tex +ltnews09.tex +ltnews10.tex +ltnews11.tex +ltnews12.tex +ltnews13.tex +ltnews14.tex +ltnews15.tex +ltnews16.tex +ltoutenc.dtx +ltoutenc.ins +ltoutput.dtx +ltpage.dtx +ltpageno.dtx +ltpar.dtx +ltpatch.ltx +ltpictur.dtx +ltplain.dtx +ltsect.dtx +ltspace.dtx +lttab.dtx +ltthm.dtx +ltvers.dtx +ltx3info.tex +ltxcheck.tex +ltxdoc.dtx +ltxguide.cls +ltxref.dtx +makeindx.dtx +makeindx.ins +manifest.txt +manual.err +microtex.txt +miktex.txt +minimal.cls +modguide.tex +multitex.txt +newdc.ins +newlfont.dtx +nfssfont.dtx +nfssfont.ins +olddc.ins +oldlfont.dtx +oztex.txt +pastex.txt +patches.txt +pctex.txt +preload.dtx +proc.dtx +proc.ins +sample2e.tex +slides.dtx +slides.ins +slifonts.fdd +small2e.tex +source2e.tex +syntonly.dtx +syntonly.ins +template.txt +testpage.tex +tex2.txt +texpert.txt +textures.txt +truetex.txt +unpack.ins +usrguide.tex +utf8ienc.dtx +vtex.txt +vtexfree.txt +web2ctex.txt +webcomp.err +webcompg.err +yandytex.txt +\endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/manual.err b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/manual.err new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..804665c7872 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/manual.err @@ -0,0 +1,330 @@ +\documentclass{article} + +\newcommand{\reportedby}[2]{{\small [First reported by #1 on \mbox{#2}.]}} +\newcommand{\erratum}[1]{\subsubsection*{#1}} + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% MODIFICATION DATE % +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% % +% Defines \moddate to expand to modification date such as % +% % +% 5 Aug 1991 % +% % +% and \prdate to print it in a large box. Assumes editor % +% updates modification date in standard SRC Gnu Emacs style. % +% (should work for any user name). % +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\def\ypmd{% % +% % +% % + Last modified on Wed Sep 17 10:55:19 PT 2003 by lamport % + endypmd} % +% % +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\newcommand{\moddate}{\expandafter\xpmd\ypmd} % +\def\xpmd Last modified % +on #1 #2 #3 #4:#5:#6 #7 #8 by #9 endypmd{#3 #2 #8} % +\newcommand{\prdate}{\noindent\fbox{\Large\moddate}} % +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +\newcommand{\mytt}{\normalfont\ttfamily} +\newcommand{\cindex}{\index} +\newcommand\bs{\char '134 } % A backslash character for \tt font + +\title{Errata to the Second Edition of the \LaTeX\ Manual} +\author{Leslie Lamport} +\date{\moddate} + +\begin{document} +\maketitle + +\noindent These are all the errors and omissions to the manual, +\LaTeX: {\em A Document Preparation System}, second edition, published +by Addison-Wesley, reported as of \moddate. Positions in the book are +indicated by page and line number, where the top line of a page is +number 1 and the bottom line is number $-1$. A running head and a +page number are not considered to be lines, but all other lines are. +Please report any additional errors to {\tt lamport@pa.dec.com}. + + +\subsection*{Errors Corrected in the First Printing} + +\erratum{page 25, example of \texttt{verse} environment} +Replace \verb|{\em all\/}| by \verb|\emph{all}|. + \reportedby{Rosemary Bailey}{29 Aug 1994} + +\erratum{page 28, first paragraph} +Not an error, but it would be +helpful to add the following sentence to the end of that paragraph: + ``(If a declaration has arguments, they become additional +arguments of the corresponding environment's \verb|\begin| command.)'' + + +\erratum{page 33, line 10} +Add \verb|\]| to the list of fragile commands. + \reportedby{Rosemary Bailey}{29 Aug 1994} + +\erratum{page 43, table 3.5} +Add an entry for \verb|\notin| ($\notin$). + \reportedby{Rosemary Bailey}{29 Aug 1994} + +\erratum{page 72, two examples} +Change \verb|{\em ...}| to \verb|\emph{...}| + \reportedby{Rosemary Bailey}{29 Aug 1994} + +\erratum{page 101} +This is not an error, but some readers will find it helpful if, in the +descriptions of \verb|\setlength| and \verb|\addtolength|, +\verb|\gnat| were replaced by \verb|\parskip|. + \reportedby{Ellen Gilkerson}{9 Aug 1994} + +\erratum{page 108, lines 7 and 10} +This is not an error, but it might be easier to understand +the example if \verb|\len| were replaced by something like \verb|\saved|. + \reportedby{Rosemary Bailey}{29 Aug 1994} + +\erratum{page 139, lines $-8$ and $-9$} + +The funny break between these two lines should be eliminated. +\reportedby{Malcolm Clark}{9 Aug 1994} + +\erratum{page 177, line $-12$} + +The \verb|twocolumn| option cannot be used with the \verb|letters| +class. + +\erratum{page 197, lines 7 and 9} + +The \verb|figure*| environment is ended by \verb|\end{figure*}|, and +the \verb|table*| environment is ended by \verb|\end{table*}|. +\reportedby{Malcolm Clark}{9 Aug 1994} + +\erratum{page 228} + +Add a note that, before running a LaTeX2.09 file in compatibility mode +in LaTeX2e, you should delete the old versions of the auxiliary files. + +\subsection*{Errors Corrected in the Second Printing} + +\erratum{page xv, line 10} +``Chris Rowley'' should come after ``Sebastian Rahtz''. +\reportedby{Martin Schr\"{o}der}{24 April 1995} + + + +\erratum{page 29, line $-10$} +Change ``error indicator line'' to ``error locator line''. +\reportedby{Xavier Perramon}{2 Jan 1995} + +\erratum{page 37, lines 26--28} +Change the two sentences ``None of these \ldots formula.'' to: +\begin{quote} +These text-producing commands can be used in math mode to put ordinary +text in a formula. (When the command is used in math mode, its +argument is processed in LR mode.) The declarations cannot be used in +math mode. Section 3.3.8 explains how to change the type style of a +formula's math-mode symbols. +\end{quote} +\reportedby{Mike Piff}{7 Mar 1995} + +\erratum{page 39, line 6} +Replace ``any mode'' with ``paragraph and LR mode''. Also, +after line 8, add: +\begin{quote} +The commands \verb|\dag|, \verb|\ddag|, \verb|\S|, and \verb|\P| +can also be used in math mode. +\end{quote} + +\erratum{page 53, line 24} +Change ``are needed in the'' to ``are used in the'' +\reportedby{Mike Piff}{21 Oct 1994} + +\erratum{page 80, line 1} +The section heading should not be outdented. +\reportedby{Martin Schr\"{o}der}{23 Jan 1995} + +\erratum{page 83, line $-8$} +Change ``\verb|\resettime|'' to ``\verb|\settime|''. + +\erratum{page 84, after line $11$} Add the following sentence: ``The +\hbox{\verb|\onlyslides|} and \hbox{\verb|\onlynotes|} commands may +not work right if a \texttt{slide}, \texttt{overlay}, or \texttt{note} +environment appears in the argument of any command.'' +\reportedby{Eike Ritter}{May 1996} + +\erratum{page 153, line 1} +Add ``or subentry'' after ``entry''. +\reportedby{Martin Schr\"{o}der}{22 Feb 1995} + +\erratum{page 171} +Add the following before line $-4$: +\begin{description} +\item[\mytt \bs columnwidth] +Normal width + \cindex{columnwidth}% +of a column; +% \index{column!width}% + \index{width!of column}% +equals \verb|\textwidth| except for multiple-column styles. +Its value should not be changed with the length-setting commands. +\end{description} +Also, in line $-4$, change \verb|\textwidth| to \verb|\columnwidth|. +%\reportedby{Volker Kuhlmav}{20 Jan 1995} +\reportedby{Rosemary Bailey}{9 Sep 1994} + +\erratum{page 180, lines 15--19} +% +Replace these five lines (which begin ``These commands are overriden'') +with: +\begin{itemize} \item[] +To override a heading on a right-hand page (any page for one-sided +printing), put a \verb|\markright| after the sectioning command and in +its mandatory argument, and add an optional argument without the +\verb|markright|, as in +\begin{itemize} +\item[] + \verb|\chapter[Gnu Scents]{Gnu Scents\markright{|\textit{right\_head}\verb|}}|\\ + \verb|\markright{|\textit{right\_head}\verb|}| +\end{itemize} +To change the heading on a left-hand page, put a \verb|\markboth| +command immediately after the sectioning command. +\end{itemize} +\reportedby{Jerome Breitenbach}{14 Dec 1995} + +\erratum{page 182} +The dimensions +\verb|\pageheight| and \verb|\pagewidth| +should be \verb|\paperheight| and \verb|\paperwidth|, +respectively. (The index entries on page 260 should also be changed.) +\reportedby{Alan Jeffrey, on behalf of a user}{12 Sep 1995} +\erratum{page 192, line 19} +Change ``\emph{cmd}'' to ``\emph{def}''. +\reportedby{Martin Schr\"{o}der}{9 Mar 1995} + + +\erratum{page 195, line 14} +Change ``numbered `within' it'' to ``numbered directly `within' it''. +\reportedby{Martin Schr\"{o}der}{5 Dec 1994} + +\erratum{page 197, line 14} +After ``\verb|\textwidth|'' add ``or \verb|\columnwidth|'' +\reportedby{Volker Kuhlmann}{22 Jan 1995} + +\erratum{page 226} + +After line 7, add +\begin{quote} +These declarations may not be used in math mode. +\end{quote} +Replace lines 16-19 (beginning ``None of these commands'') with +\begin{quote} +When these commands are used in math mode, the \emph{text} +argument is processed in LR mode. + +These commands and declarations are robust. Words typeset in +typewriter style are not hyphenated except where permitted by \verb|\-| +commands. +\end{quote} +\reportedby{Marc Lavine}{22 Aug 1995} + +\erratum{page 228} +To the section ``Type Styles and Sizes'', add the following sentence: +A few mathematical symbols now require the \texttt{latexsym} package---see +Tables 3.4--3.7. + +\subsection*{Errors Corrected in the Sixteenth Printing} + +\erratum{page 42, line 14} +Change ``through a symbol'' by ``through a relation symbol''. +\reportedby{Frank Mittelbach}{15 Nov 1996} + +\erratum{page 42, Table 3.4} +\verb|\land| should be listed as a synonym for \verb|\wedge|, and +\verb|\lor| should be listed as a synonym for \verb|\vee|. +\reportedby{Chris Rowley}{28 Oct 1998} + +\erratum{page 43, Table 3.7} +\verb|\lnot| should be listed as a synonym for \verb|\neg|. +\reportedby{Chris Rowley}{15 Oct 1998} + +\erratum{page 51, line 8} +Change ``The \verb|\,| command'' to ``The \verb|\,| and \verb*|\ | commands''. +\reportedby{Phillip J Shelton}{2 Jul 1999} + +\erratum{page 61, second examaple (middle of page)} +Remove the \verb|\mbox{}| following the \texttt{tabbing} environment. +\reportedby{Marcin Wolinski}{17 Sep 2003} + +\erratum{page 137} This is not an error, but it would be better to +change lines 23 and 24 to: +\begin{quote} +\LaTeX\ + \index{file!not found error}% + \index{file!nonexistent}% +is trying to read a file that apparently doesn't exist. If the missing +file has the extension \texttt{tex}, then \LaTeX\ is trying to + \index{input)@\verb+\input+!of nonexistent file}% + \index{include)@\verb+\include+!of nonexistent file}% +\verb|\input| or \verb|\include| it; if it +\end{quote} + +\erratum{page 171, line 19} +Change the description of \verb|\indent| to: +\begin{description} +\item[\mytt \bs indent] +Produces a +% \cindex{indent}% +% \index{paragraph!indentation}% +horizontal space whose width equals the width of the +paragraph indentation. It can be used to add a paragraph indentation +where one would otherwise be suppressed. (If it doesn't work, +try typing \verb|\indent\indent|.) Robust. +\end{description} +\reportedby{Chris Rowley}{15 Oct 1998} + +\erratum{page 179, line 19} +% +Change to: +\begin{quote} +page style for the \texttt{article} and \texttt{report} document classes. +\end{quote} +\reportedby{Stephen J. Alter}{17 Sep 1997} + +\erratum{page 195, line 28} +Replace ``\textit{num}$_1$ and \textit{num}$_1$ are numbers'' +with ``\textit{num}$_1$ and \textit{num}$_2$ are numbers''. +\reportedby{Magnus Lewis-Smith}{14 Jan 1999} + +\erratum{page 196, line $-5$} +Change \verb|\newboolean{|\emph{name}\verb|}| to +\verb|\newboolean{|\emph{nam}\verb|}|. +\reportedby{Christopher von B\"{u}low}{28 Aug 2000} + + +\erratum{page 198, line 14} +Change ``it will not be printed'' to ``it will usually not be printed''. + +\erratum{page 210, line 20} +Add a space after ``bibliography''. +\reportedby{Marcin Wolinski}{17 Sep 2003} + + +\erratum{page 218, line $-14$} +Change ``\texttt{tabular}'' to ``\texttt{tabbing}''. +\reportedby{Carlos Pita}{27 Aug 2001} + +\erratum{foldout, column 3, line 3} +Replace \emph{style} with \emph{class}. \reportedby{Christopher von B\"{u}low}{28 Aug 2000} + +% \subsection*{Errors in all Printings} + + + + + +\end{document} + +%try +%try diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/microtex.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/microtex.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..01d800508e8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/microtex.txt @@ -0,0 +1,115 @@ + + LaTeX installation instructions for MicroTeX + + 15 July 1994 + + +SUMMARY +======= + +This file contains instructions on how to install LaTeX for MicroTeX +(uTeX). + +Before reading this file, you should read install.txt, which will +explain how the LaTeX installation works. + +This file describes: + + * How to save any old version of LaTeX. + + * How to unpack the LaTeX distribution. + + * How to create the LaTeX format. + + * How to create latex.exe + + * How to install the LaTeX files. + +These instructions assume that you are using the standard directory set +up supplied by the MicroTeX distribution. We hope that, if your system's +set up differs from this then you will be sufficiently familiar with +your system to make the necessary amendments to these instructions. + + +SAVING ANY OLD VERSION OF LATEX +=============================== + +If you have a copy of LaTeX 2.09, you may wish to save it before +installing the new LaTeX. + +You should make a subdirectory called latex209 in the MicroTeX directory. +Then copy any files called *.sty from the TeX inputs directory +(normally arbortxt\inputs) into this latex209 subdirectory. You should +also rename the LaTeX format file which you use for LaTeX 2.09, usually +lplain.fmt, to latex209.fmt. Finally, rename the current executable +version of latex in \arborxt\bin to latex209.exe + +You should then create a batch file latex209.bat, which temporarily +resets the TEXINPUT environment variable to a path which includes the +latex209 subdirectory before the TeX inputs directory, and then calls +latex209.exe. Check that this batch file works before proceeding. + + +UNPACKING THE DISTRIBUTION +========================== + +To unpack the LaTeX distribution, you should change to the directory +reserved for the installation and run iniTeX on the file unpack.ins +by typing: + + initex unpack.ins + + +CREATING THE LATEX FORMAT +========================= + +To create the LaTeX format, you should run iniTeX on the file +latex.ltx by typing: + + initex latex.ltx + +This will create a file latex.fmt. + +You should copy this to the directory where TeX looks for its format +files, normally the formats subdirectory of arbortxt. + +CREATING THE LATEX PROGRAM + +Finally, create latex.exe by typing: + + preload < mklatex.dat + +PUTTING THE FILES WHERE LATEX CAN READ THEM +=========================================== + +You should move the following files to the TeX inputs directory +(usually arbortxt\inputs): + + latexbug.tex testpage.tex docstrip.tex + *.cls *.clo *.sty *.fd *.def *.cfg + +If you use the MakeIndex program (called makeindx.exe) then you should +also move the *.ist files into the inputs directory. + + +CHECKING THAT THE INSTALLATION WORKED +===================================== + +You should now run LaTeX on ltxcheck.tex. This should produce a +number of `OK' messages. If it produces any warnings, please consult +the `Problems' section of the file install.txt. + +PROBLEMS +======== + +initex requires more conventional memory than does plain tex or latex. +If either of the two steps above that use initex fail, try temporarily +unloading any TSR programs or unnecessary device drivers until you have +created the .fmt file. + + +--- Copyright 1994 Micro Programs Inc and the LaTeX3 project --- +--- All rights reserved. --- + + + diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/miktex.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/miktex.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..85f680a0695 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/miktex.txt @@ -0,0 +1,138 @@ +LaTeX installation guide for MiKTeX + +3 March 1998 + +SUMMARY +========= + +This file contains instructions how to install LaTeX for +MiKTeX for Windows95 and WindowsNT +Before reading this text, please have a look at the file +install.txt, which explains the LaTeX installation. + +This guide assumes you are using the current MiKTeX release +with it's standard directory setup. If your system's setup +is different from the MiKTeX standard, we hope you are +familiar enough with your system to deviate from these +instructions where it's necessary. + +We also assume the use of a shell/editor (e.g. WinEdt) +which you can use for starting different latex-related +programs + + +This file describes: + +* how to prepare the LaTeX installation + +* how to unpack the LaTeX distribution. + +* how to install the LaTeX files. + +* how to create the LaTeX format file. + + +PREPARING THE INSTALLATION +========================== + +Move (do not copy!) the complete directory BASE from +C:\TEXMF\TEX\LATEX\BASE to somewhere out of C:\TEXMF + +Create a new folder in the root-directory of your hard disc, +e.g. C:\UPDATE + +Copy the file BASE.ZIP from floppy into this directory +(in case of FTP transfer save it directly in there) + +Double-click on BASE.ZIP and WinZip will start automatically. +Choose EXTRACT and select C:\TEXMF\TEX\LATEX\ as +extracting-directory + + +UNPACKING THE DISTRIBUTION +========================== + +Start your editor and load C:\TEXMF\TEX\LATEX\BASE\UNPACK.INS + +Start IniTeX (in case IniTeX isn't installed properly in your +editor, try http://www.gap.baynet.de/members/werdenfels.gym/tex/) + +[Alternative way: + +Open DOS-box, change prompt to C:\TEXMF\TEX\LATEX\BASE\ +and type: INITEX UNPACK.INS (--> press RETURN)] + +Delete the file TEXSYS.CFG in C:\TEXMF\TEX\LATEX\BASE\ + +Move the folder LOCAL from the removed BASE-directory +into your new BASE-directory + +Delete (or rename if you're anxious) the file LATEX.LTX +in the old BASE-directory. Instead you can also delete +the entire old BASE-directory + + +PUTTING THE UNPACKED FILES TO WHERE LATEX FINDS THEM +===================================================== + +(not really necessary) + +You can move the files not needed for LaTeX-processes +into C:\TEXMF\DOCS\GENERAL\LATEX. +These are all the files not fitting to following rules: + +latexbug.tex testpage.tex docstrip.tex + +and all files having the extensions + +*.cls *.clo *.sty *.fd *.def *.cfg + + +(also not necessary) + +If you make use of the Makeindex program, move the *.ist files +into the Makeindex input directory, usually +C:\TEXMF\MAKEINDEX\BASE\ + + +CREATING THE LATEX FORMAT FILE +============================== + +push START (at the TASKBAR) --> choose RUN... --> +type: MAKETEXFMT LATEX (--> press RETURN) + +push START (at the TASKBAR) --> choose RUN... --> +type: C:\TEXMF\MIKTX\CONFIG\CONFIGURE --update-fndb +(--> press RETURN) + + +HINTS AND TIPS +============== + +Running IniTeX, MiKTeX will complain about updating the +font-name-database. Don't worry --- will be completed +after the installation. + +To check whether the latex installation works properly, +run LaTeX on the file LTXCHECK.LTX. A number of `OK' +messages should be produced. If it produces any warnings, +please consult the `problems' section of the file install.txt. + + +MEMORY PROBLEMS +=============== + +no problems known + + + + +Contributed by: +Andreas Hirsch <afj@gap.baynet.de> +Dominicus Heinzeller <heinzi@gap.baynet.de> +Stefan Koller <stefan.koller@garmisch-partenkirchen.com> + +Copyright 1998 by Werdenfels-Gymnasium and the LaTeX3 project + + + --- All rights reserved --- diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/modguide.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/modguide.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..e4a4ef53ea0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/modguide.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/modguide.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/modguide.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..bada6fa49a0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/modguide.tex @@ -0,0 +1,412 @@ +% \iffalse meta-comment +% +% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 +% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere +% in this file. +% +% This file is part of the LaTeX base system. +% ------------------------------------------- +% +% It may be distributed and/or modified under the +% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 +% of this license or (at your option) any later version. +% The latest version of this license is in +% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +% version 2003/12/01 or later. +% +% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". +% +% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is +% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional +% information. +% +% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution +% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with +% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. +% +% \fi +% Filename: modguide.tex + +\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/12/01] + +\documentclass{ltxguide}[1995/11/28] + +\newcommand{\reasonsection}[1]{\subsubsection*{\it #1}} + +\newcommand{\nstex}{\textsf{NS-TeX}} + +\setcounter{secnumdepth}{-1} + +\title{Modifying \LaTeX} + +\author{\copyright~Copyright 1995, \LaTeX3 Project Team.\\ + All rights reserved.} + +\date{12 December 1995} + +\begin{document} + +\maketitle + +\tableofcontents + +\begin{abstract} + This document was produced in response to suggestions that the + modification and distribution conditions for the files constituting + the New Standard \LaTeX{} system should be similar to those implied + by Version~2 of the \textsc{GNU} General Public Licence, as + published by the Free Software Foundation. +\end{abstract} + +\section{Introduction} +\label{sec:intro} + +This article describes the principles underlying our policy on +distribution and modification of the files comprising the \LaTeX{} +system. It has been produced as a result of detailed discussions of +the issues involved in the support and maintenance of a widely +distributed document processing system used by diverse people for many +applications. These discussions have involved users, maintainers of +installations that support \LaTeX{} and various types of organisations +that distribute it. The discussions are continuing and we hope that +the ideas in this article will make a useful contribution to the +debate. + +Our aim is that \LaTeX{} should be a system which can be trusted by +users of all types to fulfill their needs. Such a system must be +stable and well-maintained. This implies that it must be reasonably +easy to maintain (otherwise it will simply not get maintained at +all). So here is a summary of our basic philosophy: +\begin{quote} + We believe that the freedom to rely on a widely-used standard for + document interchange and formatting is as important as the freedom to + experiment with the contents of files. + + We are therefore adopting a policy similar to that which Donald + Knuth applies to modifications of the underlying \TeX{} system: that + certain files, together with their names, are part of the system and + therefore the contents of these files should not be changed unless + the following conditions are met: + \begin{itemize} + \item they are clearly marked as being no longer part of the + standard system; + \item the name of the file is changed. + \end{itemize} +\end{quote} + + +\section{The system} +\label{sec:sys} + +In developing this philosophy, and the consequent limitations on how +modifications of the system should be carried out, we were heavily +influenced by the following facts concerning the current widespread +and wide-ranging uses of the \LaTeX{} system. +\begin{enumerate} +\item \LaTeX{} is not just a document processing system; + it also defines a language for document exchange. + +\item The standard document class files, and some other files, also + define a particular formatting of a document. + +\item The packages that we maintain define a particular document + interface and, in some cases, particular formatting of parts of a + document. + +\item The interfaces between different parts of the \LaTeX{} system + are very complex and it is therefore very difficult to check that a + change to one file does not affect the functionality of both that + file and also other parts of the system not obviously connected to + the file that has been changed. +\end{enumerate} + +This leads us to the general principle that: +\begin{quote} + with certain special exceptions, if you change the contents of a + file then the changed version should have a different file name. +\end{quote} + +We certainly do not wish to prevent people from experimenting with the +code in different ways and adapting it to their purposes. However, we +are concerned that any distribution of modifications to the code +should be very clearly identified as not being a part of the standard +distribution. The exact wording and form of the distribution +conditions is thus something that is flexible, but only within the +constraint of keeping \LaTeX{} as a standardised, reliable product for +the purposes described above: the exchange and formatting of +documents. + + +\section{Some examples} +\label{sec:expl} + +Here we elaborate the arguments that have led us to the above +conclusion. + + +\reasonsection{Separate development considered harmful!} +\label{sec:ja} + +In many fields, the use of \LaTeX{} as a language for communication +is just as important as its capacity for fine typesetting; this is a +very important consideration for a large population of authors, +journal editors, archivists, etc. + +Related to this issue of portability is the fact that the file names +are part of the end-user syntax. + +As a real example, the \LaTeX{} `tools' collection contains the +package `array.sty'. A new user-level feature was added to this file +at the end of 1994 and a document using this feature can contain the +line: +\begin{verbatim} + \usepackage{array}[1994/10/16] +\end{verbatim} + +By supplying the optional argument, the document author is indicating +that a version of the file \texttt{array.sty} dated no earlier than +that date is required to run this document without error. + +This feature would be totally worthless if we were to allow an +alternative version of the array package to be distributed under the +same name since it would mean that there would be in circulation files +of a later date, but without the new feature. If the document +were processed using this `alternative array' then it would certainly +produce `undefined command' errors and would probably not be +processable at all. + + +\reasonsection{What's in a file-name?} +\label{sec:jb} + +In a pure markup language, such as SGML, it is reasonably clear that +control over the final presentation lies with the receiver of a +document and not with the author. + +However, the way that \LaTeX{} is often used in practice means that +most people (at least when using the standard classes and packages) +expect the formatting to be preserved when they send the document to +another site. + +For example, suppose, as is still the most common use of \LaTeX{} in +publishing, you produce a document for `camera-ready-copy' using the +class `article' and that you carefully tune the formatting by, for +example, adding some explicit line breaks etc, to ensure that it fits +the 8 page limit set by the editor a journal or proceedings. + +It then gets sent to the editor or a referee who, without anyone +knowing, has a non-standard version of the class file `article' and so +it then runs to 9 pages. The consequence of this will, at the least, +be a lot of wasted time whilst everyone involved works out what has +gone wrong; it will probably also lead to everyone blaming each other +for something which was in fact caused by a misguided distribution +policy. + +It should also be noted that, for most people, the version of the +class file `article' that gets used is decided by a site maintainer +or the compilers of a CD-ROM distribution. To most users, +the symbols \texttt{a\,r\,t\,i\,c\,l\,e} in: +\begin{verbatim} + \documentclass{article} +\end{verbatim} +are just as much part of \LaTeX{}'s syntax as are the symbols +\texttt{1\,2\,p\,t} in: +\begin{verbatim} + \hspace{12pt} +\end{verbatim} +Thus they should both define a standard formatting rather than +sometimes producing 1 more page or a 5pt larger space. + +Users rely on the fact that the command (or menu item) `LaTeX' +produces a completely standard \LaTeX, including the fact that +`article' is the `standard article'. They would not be at all happy +if the person who installed and maintains \LaTeX{} for them were +allowed to customise `article' every second day so as (in her or his +opinion) to improve the layout; or because another user wanted to write +a document in a different language or typeset one with different fonts. + +\reasonsection{\TeX{} itself} +\label{sec:tex} + +We have modelled our policies on those of the \TeX{} system since this +has for some time now been widely acknowledged as a very stable and +high quality typesetting system. + +The distribution policy set up by Donald Knuth for \TeX{} has the +following features: +\begin{itemize} +\item There is a clearly specified method for changing parts of the + software by the use of `change files'. +\item Although arbitrary changes are allowed, the resulting program + can be called \TeX{} only if its functionality is precisely the same + as that of \TeX{} (i.e.~neither less nor more) in all important + areas. +\item There are many files in the system that cannot be changed at all + (without changing the name): examples are the file + \texttt{plain.tex} and the files associated with fonts, including + the Metafont source files. +\end{itemize} + + +\reasonsection{Maintaining complexity} +\label{sec:compl} + +Our experience of maintaining \LaTeX{} has shown us just how complex +are the interactions between different parts of the system. + +We have therefore, with lots of help from the bug reports you send in, +developed a large suite of test files which we run to check the +effects of every change we make. A non-negligible percentage of these +test runs give unexpected results and hence show up some unexpected +dependency in the system. + + +\section{Some assurances} +\label{sec:conc} + +We are certainly not attempting to stop people reformatting \LaTeX{} +documents in any way they wish. There are many ways of customising +incoming documents to your personal style that do not involve changing +the contents of \LaTeX{}'s standard files; indeed, this freedom is one +of the system's many advantages. +The simplest way to achieve this is to replace +\begin{quote} +\verb|\documentclass{article}|\quad by\quad +\verb|\documentclass{myart}| +\end{quote} + +Nor do we wish to discourage the production of new packages improving +on the functionality or implementation of those we distribute. All we +ask is that, in the best interests of all \LaTeX{} users, you give +your superbly improved class or package file some other name. + +\section{Configuration possibilities} +\label{sec:conposs} + +The standard \LaTeX{} system format can be configured in several ways +to suit the needs and resources of an installation. For example, the +loading of fonts and font tables can be customised to match the font +shapes, families and encodings normally used in text mode. Also, by +producing the appropriate font definition files, the font tables +themselves can be set up to take advantage of the available fonts and +sizes. The loading of hyphenation patterns can be adjusted to cover +the languages used; this has to be done as part of making the format +since this is the only stage at which patterns can be loaded. + +A complete list of these configuration possibilities can be found in +the distributed guide \emph{Configuration options for} \LaTeXe{} +(\texttt{cfgguide.tex}). However, as it says there, the number of +configuration possibilities is strictly limited; we hope that having +read this far you will appreciate the reasons for this decision. One +consequence of this is that there is no provision for a general +purpose configuration file, or for adding extra code just before the +|\dump| of the format file. + +This was a deliberate decision and we hope that everyone (yes, that +includes you!) will support its intent. Otherwise there will be a +rapid return to the very situation, of several incompatible versions +of \LaTeX~2.09, that originally prompted us to produce \LaTeXe{}: the +new, and \emph{only}, `Standard \LaTeX'. This will make \LaTeX{} +unmaintainable and, hence, unmaintained (by us, at least). + +\begin{quote} + Therefore you should not misuse the configuration files or other + parts of the distribution to produce non-standard versions of + \LaTeX{}. +\end{quote} + +Some of the allowed configurations can result in a system that can produce +documents that are no longer `formatting compatible'; for example, the +use of different default fonts will most likely produce different line +and page breaks. If you do produce a system that is configured in +such a way that it is not `formatting compatible' then you should +consider carefully the needs of users who need to create portable +documents. A good way to provide for their needs is to make +available, in addition, a standard form of \LaTeX{} without any +`formatting incompatible' customisations. + + +\section{Modification conditions} +\label{sec:modcon} + +It is possible that you need to produce a document processing system +based on standard \LaTeX{} but with functionality that cannot be +implemented by using the approved configuration files and complying +with the restriction on the code that is allowed in them. In other +words, you may need a system which is sufficiently distinct from +Standard \LaTeX{} that it is not feasible to do this simply by using +the configuration options we provide or by producing new classes and +packages. + +If you do produce such a system then, for the reasons described +above, you should ensure that your system is clearly distinguished +from Standard \LaTeX{} in every possible way, including the following. + + +\begin{enumerate} +\item + Give your system a distinguished name, such as \nstex, which clearly + distinguishes it from \LaTeX{}. + +\item + Ensure that it contains no file with a name the same as that of + a file in the standard distribution but with different contents. + (If this is not possible then you must: + \begin{itemize} + \item + ensure that files from the non-\LaTeX{} system cannot be + accidentally accessed whilst using a standard \LaTeX{}; + \item ensure that each file from the non-\LaTeX{} system clearly + identifies itself as a non-\LaTeX{} file on the terminal and in the + log file.) + \end{itemize} + +\item + Ensure that the method used to run your system is clearly +\label{mcon:command} + distinct from that used to run Standard \LaTeX; e.g.~by using a + command name or menu entry that is clearly not \texttt{latex} + (or \texttt{LaTeX} etc). + +\item + Ensure that, when a file is being processed by your system, the + use of non-standard \LaTeX{} is clearly proclaimed to the user by + whatever means is appropriate. + +\item Ensure that what is written at the beginning of the log file + clearly shows that your system has been used, and that it is + not Standard \LaTeX{}. + See the file \texttt{cfgguide.tex} for how to achieve this. + +\item + Clearly explain to users that bug reports concerning your + system should not be sent to the maintainers of Standard + \LaTeX{}. +\end{enumerate} + +\subsection*{Note to system administrators} + +If you install a non-standard (modified) version of \LaTeX{} on a +multi-user site then please, in addition, install Standard \LaTeX{} +and observe the conditions enumerated above, particularly +\ref{mcon:command}. + + +\section{What do you think?} +\label{sec:you} + +We are interested in your views on the issues raised in this document. +The best way to let us know what you think, and to discuss your ideas +with others, is to join the \texttt{LaTeX-L} mailing list and send your +comments there. +To subscribe to this list, mail to: +\begin{verbatim} + listserv@urz.uni-heidelberg.de +\end{verbatim} +the following one line message: +\begin{verbatim} + subscribe LATEX-L <your-first-name> <your-second-name> +\end{verbatim} + +\end{document} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/multitex.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/multitex.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..9bfa5e33612 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/multitex.txt @@ -0,0 +1,198 @@ + LaTeX installation instructions for MultiTeX + + 10 January 1998 + +SUMMARY +======= + +This file contains instructions on how to install LaTeX for MultiTeX on +TOS, MiNT or MagiC. + +Before reading this file, you should read install.txt, which will +explain how the LaTeX installation works. + +This file describes: + + * What do you need. + + * How to save any old version of LaTeX. + + * How to unpack the LaTeX distribution. + + * How to create the LaTeX format. + + * How to install the LaTeX files. + +These instructions assume that you are using the standard directory set +up supplied by the MultiTeX distribution. We hope that, if your system's +set up differs from this then you will be sufficiently familiar with +your system to make the necessary amendments to these instructions. + + +WHAT DO YOU NEED +================ + +You need MultiTeX with a TeX version 3.141. If you don't know the version +doubleclick TEX_L.TTP and INITEX_L.TTP. This will show you the version. + +If the version is 3.14 or less, you should update TeX. You can find version +3.141 at the CSTEX bundle on CTAN (systems/atari). + +Only use filenames at the 8+3 scheme, sometimes MultiTeX produces nice errors +using long or case sensitive filenames! If you are using a case sensitive +filesystem, use only lowercase, because MultiTeX-programs do some changes to +lowercase! I use uppercase in this documentation because Atari does so +traditionally. + + +SAVING YOUR OLD VERSION OF LaTeX +================================ + +If you are currently using the old LaTeX version, 2.09, you may wish +to save it before installing the new version of LaTeX. + +You should make a subdirectory calles latex209 in the MultiTeX directory +(e.g. ...\TEX\LATEX209). Then copy the subdirectories with the styles +and with other input files (normaly STYLES, INPUTS and INITEX) into this +latex209 subdirectory. You should also rename the LaTeX format file +which you use for LaTeX 2.09 (usually latex.fmt into latex209.fmt, +latex.fml into latex209.fml, latexg.fmt into latxg209.fmt and +latexg.fml into latxg209.fml). + + +BEFORE UNPACKING THE DISTRIBUTION +================================= + +You should create some new subdirectories: + ...\TEX\LATEX + ...\TEX\LATEX\BASE + ...\TEX\LATEX\UNPACKED + +Latex needs a number of files to run, for example `article.cls' +contains the `article' document class. However, these files are NOT +themselves the source files produced by the LaTeX3 Project Team. We +write documented sources in `docstrip archive files' which can be +unpacked to produce the files that LaTeX needs. For example, +classes.dtx contains the documented sources for all the LaTeX +document classes, including article.cls. + +The FIRST thing to do is to check whether you need to unpack these +archive files, as follows. + +Before reading any further, you should check to see whether the LaTeX +distribution you have contains the unpacked files. You can do this by +looking to see if you have got the file latex.ltx. If you do, then +you should have all the unpacked files and so you can move on to the +section entitled `Creating the LaTeX format'. + + +UNPACKING THE DISTRIBUTION +========================== + +The unpacking will create and write files into the current TEXOUTPUTS +directory. This helps to prevent it overwriting existing files or +causing problems with your system files. You should set TEXOUTPUTS at +the TeX-Shell (TSH) to ...\TEX\LATEX\UNPACKED (menu entry "Parameter|... TeX"). +Set TEXINPUTS to ".;...\TEX\LATEX\BASE" (iff you find UNPACK.INS at another +directory add this instead of "...\TEX\LATEX\BASE" to ".;" or copy all files at +the directory of UNPACK.INS to ...\TEX\LATEX\BASE). + +The archive files are unpacked by running iniTeX (INITEX.TTP) on the +file unpack.ins. To do this select menu entry "TeX-Projekt|Erzeugen" +and select UNPACK.INS at the file-selector (you have to change "*.INI" at the +file-selector-mask to "*.INS" or "*.*"). + +Note: Using an ATARI ST with 8Mhz this will take about 3-4 hours! + + +CREATING THE LATEX FORMAT +========================= + +You should edit the file TEX_L.OPT at the ...\TEX\FORMATS subdirectory. +Setup the variables to following values: + mem_max=100000 + pool_size=65000 + trie_size=18000 + font_mem_size=34000 +If you have more than 2MB, you may set mem_max to an greater value (e.g. 120000 +or 204800. If you only use english hyphenation pattern, you may set trie_size +to 16000 only. If you use many hyphanation pattern, you should set trie_size to +a value greater than 18000. + +Setup the Shell to use TEX_L.TTP instead of TEX.TTP and INITEX_L.TTP +instead of INITEX.TTP (menu entry "Parameter|... TeX") or the TT-Versions of +these programms. + +Set TEXINPUTS to ".;...\TEX\LATEX\*" (iff you find LATEX.LTX at another +directory add this to TEXINPUTS too, or copy all files at the directory of +LATEX.LTX to ...\TEX\LATEX\UNPACKED). + +To create the LaTeX format, you should run iniTeX on the file +`latex.ltx'. Call menu entry "TeX-Projekt|Erzeugen" and select +LATEX.LTX. + +A hyphenation file such as `hyphen.tex' is read by this run so it +should be accessible by iniTeX. It also needs to be able to read the +`.tfm' font files for the basic fonts. These font files and +hyphenation file(s) should be part of your TeX system (see also INSTALL.TXT) + +If you want e.g. german-hyphenation-pattern read the documentation of +german or babel package (you should put hyphen.cfg, ghyph31.tex and for babel +language.dat to ...\TEX\LATEX or a subdirectory). + +As result you will get a format file `latex.fml' in the +FORMATS-directory. Enter menu entry "Tex-Projekt|Einstellungen" and set +"Format-Vorgabe:" to "latex" or "LATEX". + + +PUTTING THE FILES WHERE LaTeX CAN READ THEM +=========================================== + +Setup the TEXINPUTS-Variable at menu entry "Parameter|... TeX" to +".;...\TEX\LATEX\*" (don't write "...\TEX", write the hole name of your +own TeX-directory, e.g. ".;F:\TEX\LATEX\*"). Setup the additional +TEXINPUTS-Path (after "+") to the directory, you saved your old +LaTeX2.09 to (if you have done). + +If LATEX.LTX and/or TEXSYS.CFG not at ...\TEX\LATEX or a subdirectory of this, +add there directory to TEXINPUTS. + +Setup the TEXOUTPUS-Variable at menu entry "Parameter|... TeX" to your +TeX-output-directory (e.g. "F:\TEX\OUTPUTS" or simply "."). + +You have now installed LaTeX! + + +CHECKING THAT THE INSTALLATION WORKED +===================================== + +To make sure that the installation has worked, you should run the new +LaTeX on the document `ltxcheck.tex'. + +Copy LTXCHECK.TEX to your TEXOUTPUTS-directory. Select LTXCHECK.TEX at +your TEXOUTPUTS-directory as main-document (menu entry +"TeX-Projekt|Hauptdatei") and call TeX (menu entry "Arbeiten|TeX"). + +This will produce a number of messages, each of which should be `OK'. +If any of them are `BAD', then read the notes in texpert.txt. + +If all the messages are `OK' then you are finished! + +Note: If you run LTXCHECK.TEX at another directory than TEXOUTPUTS, + ltxcheck will report not existing errors. + +FINALLY +======= + +Note: If you want to process a *.dtx-file. You have to select it as + main-file and call TeX. Unfortunately the shell deletes the + extension "dtx". So TeX searches for a *.tex-file, cannot find + it and asks for the correct filename. You have to type in the + filename (with extension "dtx") once more. + If you want to call (La)TeX with doubleclick to a *.tex- or + *.dtx-file (without typing in the name twice), you may use the + calltex-program. + + +Copyright 1998 Markus Kohm and the LaTeX3 project. + diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/oztex.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/oztex.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..9a78c38249b --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/oztex.txt @@ -0,0 +1,128 @@ + + LaTeX installation instructions for OzTeX + ========================================= + + March 2002 + +NOTE: LaTeX is installed and ready to use in OzTeX 5.0 or later. +If you have an older version of OzTeX then please upgrade; you can find +download links at OzTeX's web site: + +http://www.trevorrow.com/oztex/ + +This document assumes you have OzTeX 5.0 or later and wish to update +the supplied version of LaTeX. + + +SUMMARY +======= + +Before reading this file, you should read install.txt which explains +how the LaTeX installation works in more detail. + +The following sections describe: + + * How to override the old version of LaTeX. + * How to unpack the LaTeX distribution. + * How to create the LaTeX format. + * How to check that the installation worked. + * Removing unnecessary files. + + +OVERRIDING THE OLD VERSION OF LATEX +=================================== + +All LaTeX-related files are stored inside :TeX:Inputs:LaTeX: but it is +best not to change anything in that folder because your changes will be +clobbered if you upgrade to a new version of OzTeX. Instead, you can +override the supplied version of LaTeX very easily by creating a new +folder called something like "mylatex" and then adding a line like this +in the OzTeX-only section of your Local config file: + + input_folders = hd:mylatex:* $c + +This tells OzTeX to search your folder before the supplied folders. + + +UNPACKING THE DISTRIBUTION +========================== + +To unpack the LaTeX distribution: + + * Put the files downloaded from tex-archive/macros/latex/base into + a base subfolder inside your new LaTeX folder. + + * Start up OzTeX. + + * Select "TeX..." from the TeX menu and use the open dialog to find + unpack.ins in the base folder, but do NOT open the file. Instead, + select Cancel. This sets OzTeX's current folder. + + * Select INITEX from the TeX menu. + + * Type "unpack.ins" in response to the ** prompt and hit Return. + This will start the unpacking process -- it shouldn't take too long. + +If you also downloaded new versions of tools, graphics, psnfss, etc., +you can easily unpack the various *.ins files by ticking the LaTeX +format in the TeX menu and simply dropping a .ins file onto the +OzTeX application. + + +CREATING THE LATEX FORMAT +========================= + +To create a new LaTeX format: + + * Select INITEX from the TeX menu. + + * Type "latex.ltx" in response to the ** prompt and hit Return. + + * After a short while you will be asked to save the LaTeX format. + Save it as latex.fmt in a suitable location inside your new LaTeX + folder and make sure OzTeX searches that location before the Default + format folder by adding a line like this in your Local file: + + format_folders = hd:mylatex:formats: $c + +You might discover at a later date that one or more TeX parameters need +to be increased to typeset your documents. If so, make the parameter +changes in your Local file. Depending on which parameters (see the notes +in the Default file) you might also need to build a new format file. + + +CHECKING THAT THE INSTALLATION WORKED +===================================== + +To check that the installation worked: + + * Move the file ltxcheck.ltx out of the base folder. + (It doesn't matter where you move it, just so long as it is not in the + same folder as the file article.cls. If this file is in the same + folder then LaTeX will definitely be able to read it and so cannot check + if it is possible to read files that are NOT in the current folder.) + + * Tick the LaTeX format in the TeX menu. + + * Drop the ltxcheck.ltx file onto the OzTeX application. + This will run a test of the LaTeX installation, and should produce "OK!" + to a number of tests. If it does not, see PROBLEMS in install.txt. + + * Delete the .log and .aux files created (and move ltxcheck.ltx back to + the base folder if you like). + +You have now installed LaTeX. + + +REMOVING UNNECESSARY FILES +========================== + +After LaTeX has been successfully installed, you might want to delete some +non-essential files to free up space on your hard disk. You can safely +delete all files ending in: + + .ins .dtx .fdd + + +--- Copyright 2002 Andrew Trevorrow and the LaTeX3 project. --- +--- All rights reserved. --- diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/pastex.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/pastex.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..bfc28ff70af --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/pastex.txt @@ -0,0 +1,193 @@ + + + LaTeX installation instructions for PasTeX + + 9 July 1996 + + +SUMMARY +======= + +This file contains instructions on how to install LaTeX for +PasTeX on the Amiga. Before reading this file, you should read +install.txt, which will explain how the LaTeX installation works. + +This file describes: + + * How to save any old version of LaTeX. + + * How to configure LaTeX. + (You can skip this part if you`re new to this.) + + * How to unpack the LaTeX distribution. + + * How to create the LaTeX format. + + * How to install the LaTeX files. + + * What to do if you have any problems. + + + +PRELIMINARIES +============= + +Most of the installation procedure is concerned with creating a so +called format file. This file contains essentially all the macros +that make up the LaTeX package in a format that can be read in very +quickly by virtex. + +This guide assumes that you have an unmodified installation of PasTeX +release 1.3 or higher. If you have made any changes you should be able +to figure out yourself where to deviate from this introduction. + +If you are using PasTeX 1.3 you should install the binaries from +TeX:Bigbin to TeX:bin now. The normal binaries cannot be used with +LaTeX2e. Alternatively you might want to install PasTeX release 1.4. +A "light" version is available on aminet as text/tex/pt14l.lha, +the full release is on the Meeting Pearls III CD-ROM. +As of writing (July 1996), the CD is online at +<URL:ftp://ftp.rz.uni-wuerzburg.de/pub/amiga/mpearls3/index.html>. + +First of all move all of the files that accompanied this document to +a directory that should be outside the TeX: hierarchy. DO NOT copy +them directly to TeX:macros! Most of the installation will take place +in this directory. If the installation was successful you can delete +this directory afterwards. + + +SAVING ANY OLD VERSION OF LaTeX +=============================== + +If you are currently using the old LaTeX version, 2.09, you may wish +to save it before installing the new version of LaTeX. + +The format file is located in the directory TeX:formats and is named +something like lplain.fmt or latex.fmt. If the name is latex.fmt you +should rename it to latex209.fmt. This installation procedure will +create a new file called latex.fmt that would overwrite the old one. + +Now you should save your old style files. Make a subdirectory latex209 +in the directory TeX:macros and copy all files #?.sty from TeX:macros +into this directory. + +If you want use LaTeX 2.09 again for some reason, set the environment +variable TEXINPUTS with something like + +setenv TEXINPUTS .,TeX:macros/latex209,TeX:macros + +Make sure that TeX:macros/latex209 comes before TeX:macros so that +the old style files are used. (The "." refers to the current directory. +If you omit it, files in the current directory will not be found!) +Then call LaTeX with "virtex &latex209" (or "virtex &lplain", if that +was the name of the old format file). + + +CONFIGURING LATEX +================= + +If you have PasTeX release 1.3, you may wish to edit the file +texsys.cfg to have LaTeX work around some quirks in the version +of virtex that comes with it. First find out the actual version +of virtex with the command "version TeX:bin/virtex". +Then edit the file texsys.cfg and insert a line right at the top +containing + +\def\@TeXversion{3.14} + +and, of course, insert your actual version number if it differs. +This change is however purely cosmetical and only affects the +format of warning messages. + + +If at some point TeX runs out of memory it will stop with an error +message. +You can try and make more memory available to TeX by editing the file +TeX:config/tex.cnf. Try to figure out which parameter might have caused +TeX to run out of memory. If the error message said e.g +"Font <foobar> not loaded: Not enough room left", you should look at +the parameter fontmax and/or fontmemsize. A good place to start is +always the pair memmax and memtop. Read the comment in the file for more +information. + +From TeX version 3.0 on you have the possibility to have more than one +set of hyphenation atterns available in a format file. See the file +texpert.txt for more details of how this can be achieved. + + +UNPACKING THE DISTRIBUTION +========================== + +Cd to the directory that contains the distribution files. Check if +there is a file called "latex.ltx". If there is you probably have +got a distribution that already has been unpacked and can skip this +part. If there is a problem with a missing file at some point during +the installation, try unpacking it again anyway. + +If latex.ltx does not exist, the command "initex unpack.ins" will +unpack the distribution. If you have an 68000 based Amiga, now is +the time to go and make some coffee. + + +CREATING THE LaTeX FORMAT +========================= + +When the unpacking procedure is complete type "initex latex.ltx". +This will create the format file. When this is finished, copy it to +TeX:formats. Make sure you do not overwrite an old latex.fmt, +especially if there have been any problems. + + +PUTTING THE FILES WHERE LaTeX CAN READ THEM +=========================================== + +Now you need to install the new style files and everything else LaTeX +needs. Copy the following files to TeX:macros: + + latexbug.tex testpage.tex docstrip.tex lablst.tex + idx.tex nfssfont.tex small2e.tex sample2e.tex + #?.cls #?.clo #?.sty #?.fd #?.def #?.cfg + +If you have MakeIndex installed, copy #?.ist to the MakeIndex inputs +directory. + + +CHECKING THAT THE INSTALLATION WORKED +===================================== + +Now you can check if the installation worked. First cd to another +directory that does not contain any of the distribution files. +Copy the file ltxcheck.tex here and type "virtex &latex ltxcheck" +to the shell prompt. TeX will report that it cannot find a syntax +for the current directory, but that is OK. (If you figure out a way +to refer to the current directory, like UNIX ./, please tell us.) + +It will then check if it can find the file article.cls in the current +directory and issue an error because it will find the file in +TeX:macros. This is actually a good sign. Simply press return to the +question mark. + +It will then check for the version of TeX currently installed. If +you have PasTeX release 1.3, which contained virtex version 3.14, +there will probably be some ^^Js cluttering up the output. + +You can edit texsys.cfg (in the distribution directory) and rebuild +the format file as suggested by the warning text (see the section on +configuring LaTeX). PasTeX release 1.4 cures this problem. See the +`PRELIMINARIES' section for information on availability. + + +PROBLEMS +======== + +If there is any problem during installation, read the section on +configuring LaTeX in this document. Some of the problems that may +occur are covered there. Carefully reread the rest of the document, +then read the document install.txt, especially the `PROBLEMS' section. + +If none of these can solve your problem, try to get some human help. + +--- Copyright 1994-1996 Christian Bauernfeind and the LaTeX3 project --- +--- All rights reserved. --- + + diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/patches.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/patches.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..dc5f12d98eb --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/patches.txt @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ + LaTeX Patches Guide + + 2003/12/01 + + +This document describes the procedure by which changes to the LaTeX +distribution in between the six-monthly releases will be made. + +Such changes will be made only when major problems are discovered and +fixed. Other changes will only be made twice a year, in June and +December. + +Changes which affect the file latex.ltx, and hence the format, are +called `patches to the LaTeX kernel': this concept is described in +detail below. The changes of this type are described briefly at the +end of this file, in chronological order. + +All changes to all files should be listed, in reverse-time order, in +the files called changes.txt: there is one in each distribution +subdirectory. + + +Patches to the LaTeX kernel dated <2003/12/01> +============================================== + +New releases of LaTeX will occur at six-monthly intervals, in June and +December. Between these releases it may be necessary to make small +updates to fix major problems. + +We have made it relatively easy to install updates that affect only +the format---by placing all these changes in one file, called +ltpatch.ltx. + +In order to update your LaTeX format you should put +ltpatch.ltx where it can be read by iniTeX and then run iniTeX on +latex.ltx. You do not need to unpack the latex sources again. + +In this run of iniTeX, the file ltpatch.ltx (if it exists) will be +read just before the format file is `dumped'. This will correct any +bugs and it will modify the opening banner of LaTeX: for example, +from: + +LaTeX2e <2003/12/01> + +to: + +LaTeX2e <2003/12/01> patch level 1 + + +(The ltpatch.ltx distributed with this `full' release of LaTeX + is `patch level 0' which does not change the banner.) + + +--- Copyright 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997 + The LaTeX3 Project. All rights reserved --- + diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/pctex.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/pctex.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..cdf86379d25 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/pctex.txt @@ -0,0 +1,203 @@ + + LaTeX Installation Instructions for PCTeX + + 1994 August 10 + + +SUMMARY +======= + +(Note: LaTeX2e is also available directly from Personal TeX, Inc. with the +purchase of any new PCTeX System or PCTeX Upgrade. To find out how to +contact Personal TeX, see the end of this file.) + +This file contains instructions on how to install LaTeX2e for PCTeX +(either PCTeX for Windows or MS-DOS) from Personal TeX, Inc. + +Before reading this file, you should read `install.txt', which will explain +how the LaTeX2e installation works. + +This file describes: + + * How to save any old version of LaTeX. + + * How to unpack the LaTeX distribution. + + * How to configure LaTeX. + + * How to create the LaTeX format. + + * How to check the LaTeX installation. + + * What to do if you have any problems. + + +SAVING ANY OLD VERSION OF LaTeX +=============================== + +The installation of LaTeX2e is designed to *preserve* the existing LaTeX 2.09 +files. Two versions of LaTeX should be able to coexist on the same computer. +LaTeX 2.09 will typically still stay in the `<drive>:\pctex\latex' +subdirectory, and LaTeX2e will be installed into `<drive>:\pctex\latex2e'. +Later, when you feel comfortable switching completely to LaTeX2e, you can +delete the `<drive>:\pctex\latex' subdirectory to save hard disk space. + +The format file for LaTeX 2.09 is named `lplain.fmt', residing in either +the `<drive>:\pctex\texfmts' or `<drive>:\pctex\texfmts.386' subdirectory. +The format file for LaTeX2e will have the name `latex.fmt', so it will not +write over your existing lplain.fmt file. + + +UNPACKING THE DISTRIBUTION +========================== + +These instructions assume you have already installed PCTeX for Windows or +PCTeX for MS-DOS. + +It is recommended that you create a new subdirectory `<drive>:\pctex\latex2e' +in which to put the LaTeX2e distribution files. IMPORTANT: Do NOT mix the +LaTeX2e files with your existing LaTeX 2.09 files. To create the `\latex2e' +subdirectory, enter at the DOS prompt: + + md <drive>:\pctex\latex2e + +Then change to the `<drive>:\pctex\latex2e' subdirectory and copy the LaTeX2e +distribution files into it. + +You will also need a file with hyphenation patterns. You can copy the one +in your `<drive>:\pctex\texinput' subdirectory. To do this, enter: + + copy <drive>:\pctex\texinput\hyphen.tex <drive>:\pctex\latex2e\. + +Then you need to unpack the LaTeX2e distribution files using Big PCTeX/386. +From within the <drive>:\pctex\latex2e subdirectory, at the DOS prompt, +enter: + + tex386b unpack.ins /i + +If you do not have Big PCTeX/386, you may use PCTeX (tex.exe) or PCTeX/386 +(tex386.exe), but these versions will take much longer to unpack the file. +If you use PCTeX, substitute `tex386b' with `tex' in the line above. If you +use PCTeX/386, substitute `tex386b' with `tex386'. Note: You may want to +consider upgrading to Big PCTeX/386 if you plan on using LaTeX2e. + +CONFIGURING LATEX +================= + +After unpacking the `unpack.ins' file, you will need to modify the system +configuration file, `texsys.cfg', which is used to tell LaTeX2e where to +find input and .tfm files. + +To modify this file, use a text editor to open the file. As you will +find out, by default, all the lines in the file are commented out. + +(1) Search for the text string `\subsection{MSDOS (other)}'. + +(2) Replace `(other)' with `(PCTeX)'. + +(3) A few lines below this, look for the following lines: + + % \def\@currdir{./} + % \def\input@path{% + % {c:/tex/inputs/distrib/}% + % {c:/tex/inputs/contrib/}% + % {c:/tex/inputs/local/}% + % } + +(4) Uncomment these lines by deleting the `%' signs at the beginning of each +one. Then make the modifications as shown below. After modification, these +lines should look like the following: + + \def\@currdir{./} + \def\input@path{% + {c:/pctex/latex2e/}% + {c:/pctex/texinput/}% + {c:/pctex/amstex/}% + } + +IMPORTANT: Do NOT delete the `%' sign in front of `\begin{macrocode}' +and `\end{macrocode}'. + +(5) Now save the changes you have made to `texsys.cfg'. + +IMPORTANT: If you have installed PCTeX on a hard drive other than C:, please +modify the paths in the `texsys.cfg' accordingly. + +CREATING THE LaTeX FORMAT +========================= + +PCTeX for Windows: + +If you are using PCTeX for Windows, you can run INITeX and assign the +LaTeX2e format file to one of the two custom format Toolbar icons, `FMT1' or +`FMT2'. Follow the 3 steps below to do this: + +(1) Copy the file `latex.ltx' to `latex.tex'. + +(2) Then run PCTeX for Windows. Select `Typeset' and `INITeX'. + +(3) In the `INITeX' dialog box, check `Format1' or `Format2'. +Under `Macro file name', enter `latex'; in `Path to input files', enter +`<drive>:\pctex\latex2e'; in `Path to tfm files', you can keep the default +paths. Then click `OK' to create the LaTeX2e format file. + +PCTeX for MS-DOS: + +If you are using PCTeX for MS-DOS, you can create the LaTeX2e format +file by entering the following at the DOS prompt from your \pctex directory: + +tex386b latex.ltx "\dump" /i /pi=c:\pctex\latex2e;c: /pt=c:\pctex\amstfms;c: + +If you are using PCTeX (tex.exe), replace `tex386b' with `tex'. +If you are using PCTeX/386 (tex386.exe), replace `tex386b' with `tex386'. + +CHECKING THAT THE INSTALLATION WORKED +===================================== + +To check that the LaTeX2e installation worked correctly, copy the file +`ltxcheck.tex' from your `\pctex\latex2e' subdirectory into another +directory, for example `<drive>:\temp'. Then from within this directory, +follow the instructions below: + +If you are using PCTeX for Windows, run LaTeX2e on `ltxcheck.tex' by clicking +on the `FMT1' or `FMT2' Toolbar icon, depending on which one you assigned to +LaTeX2e. + +If you are using PCTeX for MS-DOS, enter the following at the DOS prompt: + + tex386b &latex ltxcheck.tex + +After this, you may wish to typeset `usrguide.tex' with LaTeX2e and print +the result. This file documents many of the new commands available in +LaTeX2e. (Remember to typeset the file twice.) + +PROBLEMS +======== + +The names of the basic files in LaTeX2e have been changed since the beta +version. For example, `unpack.ins' is now used instead of `unpack2e.ins'. +For creating the LaTeX2e format file, `latex.ltx' rather than `latex2e.ltx' +is now used. Be sure to use these new file names when unpacking files or +creating the format file. + +If you have other problems with the LaTeX installation, see the `PROBLEMS' +section in `install.txt'. + +If `ltxcheck' produces a `BAD' message, you will typically be able to +figure out from the message what is wrong. If it is not obvious what +caused the `BAD' message, then please consult the section on `ltxcheck' +in `texpert.txt'. + +If you have any problem not resolved by the above, please contact +Personal TeX technical support at: + +pti@crl.com (email) +(415)388-8865 (fax) +(415)388-8853 (voice) + +Personal TeX, Inc. +12 Madrona Street +Mill Valley, CA 94941 + +--- Copyright 1994 (c) Personal TeX, Inc. and the LaTeX3 project --- +--- All rights reserved. --- diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/source2e.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/source2e.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..2cbca0a93cb --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/source2e.tex @@ -0,0 +1,483 @@ +% \iffalse meta-comment +% +% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 +% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere +% in this file. +% +% This file is part of the LaTeX base system. +% ------------------------------------------- +% +% It may be distributed and/or modified under the +% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 +% of this license or (at your option) any later version. +% The latest version of this license is in +% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +% version 2003/12/01 or later. +% +% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". +% +% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is +% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional +% information. +% +% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution +% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with +% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. +% +% \fi + +% This document will typeset the LaTeX sources as a single document. +% This will produce quite a large file (roughly 555 pages) and may +% take a long time. +% +% Some notes on processing this document are contained at the end +% of this document, after \end{document} +% +% DPC 1997/11/17 +% +% First a special index style for makeindex +% + +\begin{filecontents}{source2e.ist} +actual '=' +quote '!' +level '>' +preamble +"\n \\begin{theindex} \n \\makeatletter\\scan@allowedfalse\n" +postamble +"\n\n \\end{theindex}\n" +item_x1 "\\efill \n \\subitem " +item_x2 "\\efill \n \\subsubitem " +delim_0 "\\pfill " +delim_1 "\\pfill " +delim_2 "\\pfill " +% The next lines will produce some warnings when +% running Makeindex as they try to cover two different +% versions of the program: +lethead_prefix "{\\bfseries\\hfil " +lethead_suffix "\\hfil}\\nopagebreak\n" +lethead_flag 1 +heading_prefix "{\\bfseries\\hfil " +heading_suffix "\\hfil}\\nopagebreak\n" +headings_flag 1 + +% and just for source2e: +% Remove R so I is treated in sequence I J K not I II III +page_precedence "rnaA" +\end{filecontents} + + + +\documentclass{ltxdoc} + +\listfiles + +% Do not index some TeX primitives, and some common plain TeX commands. + +\DoNotIndex{\def,\long,\edef,\xdef,\gdef,\let,\global} +\DoNotIndex{\if,\ifnum,\ifdim,\ifcat,\ifmmode,\ifvmode,\ifhmode,% + \iftrue,\iffalse,\ifvoid,\ifx,\ifeof,\ifcase,\else,\or,\fi} +\DoNotIndex{\box,\copy,\setbox,\unvbox,\unhbox,\hbox,% + \vbox,\vtop,\vcenter} +\DoNotIndex{\@empty,\immediate,\write} +\DoNotIndex{\egroup,\bgroup,\expandafter,\begingroup,\endgroup} +\DoNotIndex{\divide,\advance,\multiply,\count,\dimen} +\DoNotIndex{\relax,\space,\string} +\DoNotIndex{\csname,\endcsname,\@spaces,\openin,\openout,% + \closein,\closeout} +\DoNotIndex{\catcode,\endinput} +\DoNotIndex{\jobname,\message,\read,\the,\m@ne,\noexpand} +\DoNotIndex{\hsize,\vsize,\hskip,\vskip,\kern,\hfil,\hfill,\hss} +\DoNotIndex{\m@ne,\z@,\z@skip,\@ne,\tw@,\p@} +\DoNotIndex{\dp,\wd,\ht,\vss,\unskip} + +% Set up the Index and Change History to use \part +\IndexPrologue{\part*{Index}% + \markboth{Index}{Index}% + \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{Index}% + The italic numbers denote the pages where the + corresponding entry is described, + numbers underlined point to the definition, + all others indicate the places where it is used.} + +\GlossaryPrologue{\part*{Change History}% +% Allow control names to be hyphenated here... + {\GlossaryParms\ttfamily\hyphenchar\font=`\-}% + \markboth{Change History}{Change History}% + \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{Change History}} + +% The standard \changes command modified slightly to better cope with +% this multiple file document. +\makeatletter +\def\changes@#1#2#3{% + \let\protect\@unexpandable@protect + \edef\@tempa{\noexpand\glossary{#2\space\currentfile\space#1\levelchar + \ifx\saved@macroname\@empty + \space + \actualchar + \generalname + \else + \expandafter\@gobble + \saved@macroname + \actualchar + \string\verb\quotechar*% + \verbatimchar\saved@macroname + \verbatimchar + \fi + :\levelchar #3}}% + \@tempa\endgroup\@esphack} +\makeatother + +% Produce a Change Log and (2 column) Index. +\RecordChanges +\CodelineIndex +\EnableCrossrefs +\setcounter{IndexColumns}{2} + +% Needed for documentation in ltoutenc.dtx +\usepackage{textcomp} + +\begin{document} + \title{The \LaTeXe\ Sources} + \author{% + Johannes Braams\\ + David Carlisle\\ + Alan Jeffrey\\ + Leslie Lamport\\ + Frank Mittelbach\\ + Chris Rowley\\ + Rainer Sch\"opf} + +% This command will be used to input the patch file +% if that file exists. +\newcommand{\includeltpatch}{% + \def\currentfile{ltpatch.ltx} + \part{ltpatch} + {\let\ttfamily\relax + \xdef\filekey{\filekey, \thepart={\ttfamily\currentfile}}}% + Things we did wrong\ldots + \IndexInput{ltpatch.ltx}} + + + +% Get the date from ltvers.dtx +\makeatletter +\let\patchdate=\@empty +\begingroup + \def\ProvidesFile#1\fmtversion#2{\date{#2}\endinput} + \input{ltvers.dtx} +\global\let\X@date=\@date + +% Add the patch version if available. + \long\def\Xdef#1#2#3\def#4#5{% + \xdef\X@date{#2}% + \xdef\patchdate{#5}% + \endinput}% + \InputIfFileExists{ltpatch.ltx} + {\let\def\Xdef}{\global\let\includeltpatch\relax} +\endgroup + +\ifx\@date\X@date + \def\Xpatch{0} + \ifx\patchdate\Xpatch\else + \edef\@date{\@date\space Patch level \patchdate} + \fi +\else + \@warning{ltpatch.ltx does not match ltvers.dtx!} + \let\includeltpatch\relax +\fi +\makeatother + + \pagenumbering{roman} + \maketitle + \renewcommand\maketitle{} + + \tableofcontents + + \clearpage + + \pagenumbering{arabic} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +% Each of the following \DocInclude lines includes a file with extension +% .dtx. Each of these files may be typeset separately. For instance +% latex ltboxes.dtx +% will typeset the source of the LaTeX box commands. +% +% If this file is processed, each of these separate dtx files will be +% contained as a part of a single document. Using ltxdoc.cfg you can +% then optionally produce a combined index and/or change history for +% the entire source of the format file. Note that such a document will +% be quite large (about 555 pages). +% + + \DocInclude{ltdirchk} % System dependant initialisation + + \DocInclude{ltplain} % LaTeX version of Knuth's plain.tex + + \DocInclude{ltvers} % Current version date + + \DocInclude{ltdefns} % Initial definitions. + + \DocInclude{ltalloc} % Allocation of counters and others. + + \DocInclude{ltcntrl} % Program control macros. + + \DocInclude{lterror} % Error handling. + + \DocInclude{ltpar} % Paragraphs. + + \DocInclude{ltspace} % Spacing, line and page breaking. + + \DocInclude{ltlogos} % Logos. + + \DocInclude{ltfiles} % \input files and related commands + + \DocInclude{ltoutenc} % Output encoding interface + + \DocInclude{ltcounts} % Counters + + \DocInclude{ltlength} % Lengths + + \DocInclude{ltfssbas} % NFSS Base macros + + \DocInclude{ltfsstrc} % NFSS Tracing (and tracefnt.sty) + + \DocInclude{ltfsscmp} % NFSS1 Compatibility + + \DocInclude{ltfssdcl} % NFSS Declarative interface + + \DocInclude{ltfssini} % NFSS Initialisation + + \DocInclude{fontdef} % fonttext.ltx/fontmath.ltx + + \DocInclude{preload} % preload.ltx + + \DocInclude{ltfntcmd} % \textrm etc + + \DocInclude{ltpageno} % Page numbering + + \DocInclude{ltxref} % Cross referencing + + \DocInclude{ltmiscen} % Miscellaneous environment definitions. + + \DocInclude{ltmath} % Mathematics set up. + + \DocInclude{ltlists} % List and related environments + + \DocInclude{ltboxes} % Parbox and friends + + \DocInclude{lttab} % Tabbing tabular and array + + \DocInclude{ltpictur} % Picture mode + + \DocInclude{ltthm} % Theorem environments + + \DocInclude{ltsect} % Sectioning + + \DocInclude{ltfloat} % Floats + + \DocInclude{ltidxglo} % Index and Glossary + + \DocInclude{ltbibl} % Bibliography + + \DocInclude{ltpage} % \pagestyle \raggedbottom \sloppy + + \DocInclude{ltoutput} % Output routine + + \DocInclude{ltclass} % Package & Class interface + + \DocInclude{lthyphen} % Hyphenation (hyphen.ltx). + + \DocInclude{ltfinal} % Last minute initialisations and dump + + \includeltpatch % Corrections distributed after the full release + +% Stop here if ltxdoc.cfg says \AtEndOfClass{\OnlyDescription} +\StopEventually{\end{document}} + +\clearpage +\pagestyle{headings} + +% Make TeX shut up. +\hbadness=10000 +\newcount\hbadness +\hfuzz=\maxdimen + +\typeout{% + \string # Produce change log with^^J% + makeindex -s gglo.ist -o source2e.gls source2e.glo} + + +\PrintChanges + +\clearpage + +% makeindex needs a symbol between the parts of composite page numbers +% but we dont want one, so: +\typeout{% + \string # Produce index with^^J% + makeindex -s source2e.ist source2e.idx} + +\begingroup +\def\endash{--} +\catcode`\-\active +\def-{\futurelet\temp\indexdash} +\def\indexdash{\ifx\temp-\endash\fi} + +\PrintIndex +\endgroup + +% Make sure that the index is not printed twice +% (ltxdoc.cfg might have a second \PrintIndex command) +\let\PrintChanges\relax +\let\PrintIndex\relax + +\end{document} + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +To use this file to produce a fully indexed source code +you need to execute the following (or equivalent) commands: + + latex source2e.tex + + makeindex -s source2e.ist source2e.idx + makeindex -s gglo.ist -o source2e.gls source2e.glo + + latex source2e.tex + latex source2e.tex + + +The makeindex style source2e.ist is used in place of the usual +doc gind.ist to ensure that I is used in the sequence I J K +not I II II, which would be the default makeindex behaviour. + +The third run with latex is only required to get the table of +contents entries for the change log and index. You may speed things up +by using the \includeonly mechanism so as not to typeset the source +files on the second run. This involves changing the file +ltxdoc.cfg +between the latex runs. + +The following unix script automates this. + (It could easily be ported to scripts for DOS or VMS, + rm is ReMove a file, and echo "..." > file writes ... to "file".) + + +After this script (after the second ==============) is a similar script +that will produce the documentation for all the files in the base +distribution that are *not* included in source2e.dvi. This second script +was requested, but before using it, beware it will take a long time! +It may however be modified as required, eg to not typeset the fdd files +or whatever... + +============== +#!/bin/sh + +rm -f source2e.gls source2e.ind source2e.toc + +# First run: +# Create new standard ltxdoc.cfg file +# Pass the (possibly empty) list of arguments supplied on the +# command line to article class. +# +# If you use A4 paper, running this script with argument +# a4paper +# may save about 30 pages. +# +echo "\PassOptionsToClass{$*}{article}" > ltxdoc.cfg + + +# Now LaTeX the file with this cfg file. +# +latex source2e.tex + + +# Make the Change log and Glossary. +# +makeindex -s source2e.ist source2e.idx +makeindex -s gglo.ist -o source2e.gls source2e.glo + + +# Second run: append \includeonly{} to ltxdoc.cfg to speed up things +# (this run needed only to get changes and index listed in .toc file) +# +# Note that the index will not be made incorrect by the insertion +# of the table of contents as the front matter uses a diferent page +# numbering scheme. +# +echo "\includeonly{}" >> ltxdoc.cfg + +latex source2e.tex + + +# Third and final run, to put everything together. +# First restore the cfg file: +# +echo "\PassOptionsToClass{$*}{article}" > ltxdoc.cfg +latex source2e.tex + + +============== +#!/bin/sh + +# Running this script will process all the dtx fdd and *guide.tex +# and ltnews*.tex files in the LaTeX distribution, except the dtx +# files included in source2e.tex. +# (The shell first script in the comments of source2e.tex will +# process those.) + +# Any command line arguments (eg a4paper) are taken as options to the +# article class. + +# This script is likely to take ages! + +echo "\PassOptionsToClass{$*}{article}" > ltxdoc.cfg +echo "\batchmode" >> ltxdoc.cfg + +# The next four lines produce full indexes and change logs +# you may not want those. +echo "\AtBeginDocument{\RecordChanges}" >> ltxdoc.cfg +echo "\AtEndDocument{\PrintChanges}" >> ltxdoc.cfg +echo "\AtBeginDocument{\CodelineIndex\EnableCrossrefs}" >> ltxdoc.cfg +echo "\AtEndDocument{\PrintIndex}" >> ltxdoc.cfg + +# If you do not want any code listings, just documentation, then instead +# of the above four lines, uncomment the following: +# echo "\AtBeginDocument{\OnlyDescription}" >> ltxdoc.cfg + +echo "\PassOptionsToClass{$*}{article}" > ltxguide.cfg +echo "\batchmode" >> ltxguide.cfg + +cp ltxguide.cfg ltnews.cfg + + +for i in *dtx *fdd *guide.tex ltnews*.tex +do +B=`basename $i .dtx` + +if (grep "Include{$B}" source2e.tex >/dev/null ; ) +then +echo In source2e: $i +else +echo latex $i + if (latex $i > /dev/null) + then + echo latex $i + latex $i > /dev/null + echo makeindex -s gind.ist $B.idx + makeindex -s gind.ist $B.idx > /dev/null 2> /dev/null + echo makeindex -s gglo.ist -o $B.gls $B.glo + makeindex -s gglo.ist -o $B.gls $B.glo > /dev/null 2> /dev/null + echo latex $i + latex $i > /dev/null + else + echo "!!! LaTeX ERROR: $i. (See $B.log.)" + fi +fi + +done diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/template.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/template.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..1e80002a2bb --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/template.txt @@ -0,0 +1,198 @@ +<COMMENT> + + This file contains a template for system.txt files. If you want to + write a system.txt file for your TeX implementation, then this is a + good place to start! + + All of the places where you can add customization are indicated by a + tag like <THIS>. The tags are: + + <COMMENT> ... </COMMENT> This material is intended for the author of + a system.txt file. Please delete it before showing it to users! + + <OPTIONAL> ... </OPTIONAL> You may delete this material if you wish. + + <DESCRIPTION> ... </DESCRIPTION> Please write a description here. + + <TEX-IMPLEMENTATION> Replace this with the name of your TeX + implementation, e.g. `FooTeX v1.4'. + + <DATE> Replace this with today's date, e.g. `1 April 1994'. + + <YEAR> Replace this with the current year, e.g. `1994'. + + <AUTHOR> Replace this with your name, e.g. `Jane Doe'. + + Remember, a lot of users will not bother reading install.txt, + they will just be reading your file! + + If you would like to distribute this file to other users of your + TeX implementation, please send it to the project team at the + bugs address given in bugs.txt. + +</COMMENT> + + LaTeX installation instructions for <TEX-IMPLEMENTATION> + + <DATE> + +SUMMARY +======= + +This file contains instructions on how to install LaTeX for +<TEX-IMPLEMENTATION>. Before reading this file, you should read +install.txt, which will explain how the LaTeX installation works. + +This file describes: + + * How to save any old version of LaTeX. + +<OPTIONAL> + * How to configure LaTeX. +</OPTIONAL> + +<OPTIONAL> + * How to unpack the LaTeX distribution. +</OPTIONAL> + + * How to create the LaTeX format. + + * How to install the LaTeX files. + + * What to do if you have any problems. + +<OPTIONAL><DESCRIPTION> + Name any system-specific sections, e.g. `Running LaTeX with FooTeX v + 1.2 or older'. These should appear as sections below! +</DESCRIPTION></OPTIONAL> + +REQUIREMENTS +============ + +In addition to the LaTeX distribution files, you will also need the +following: + +<DESCRIPTION> + Describe what is needed in addition to the distributed LaTeX files. + Don't forget the following, if pertinent. + +* the file `hyphen.tex', or some other hyphenation files (see `Creating + the LaTeX Format', below); + + * the font files (normally .tfm files) for the Computer Modern fonts, + including some non-standard ones (see `Fonts needed', below). +</DESCRIPTION> + +SAVING ANY OLD VERSION OF LaTeX +=============================== + +If you are currently using the old LaTeX version, 2.09, you may wish +to save it before installing the new version of LaTeX. + +<DESCRIPTION> + Describe how to save the old format as `latex209.fmt' and the old + inputs in a directory called `latex209'. You might also describe + how to run the new LaTeX and LaTeX 2.09 in parallel. +</DESCRIPTION> + +<OPTIONAL> +CONFIGURING LATEX +================= + +<DESCRIPTION> + Describe any configuration which has do be done. For example, + LaTeX2e uses more memory than LaTeX 2.09, so you may need to tell + users to increase one of TeX's memory parameters. + + If your TeX implementation requires a texsys.cfg file, you should + describe a sample one, and tell users to cut it out, edit it as + appropriate, and save it as texsys.cfg. For example, under + OzTeX 1.5, an appropriate example texsys.cfg file would be: + + \def\@currdir{:} + \def\input@path{% + {Hard-Disk:TeX:My-inputs}% + {Hard-Disk:TeX:TeX-inputs}% + } + + See ltdirchk.dtx and texpert.txt for more details about texsys.cfg. +</DESCRIPTION></OPTIONAL> + +UNPACKING THE DISTRIBUTION +========================== + +<DESCRIPTION> + Describe how to run iniTeX on unpack.ins. This will not generate + a format file. +</DESCRIPTION> + +CREATING THE LaTeX FORMAT +========================= + +<DESCRIPTION> + Describe how to run iniTeX on latex.ltx. This will generate the + format file latex.fmt so you should tell users to install this file + and make it available to the system. +</DESCRIPTION> + +PUTTING THE FILES WHERE LaTeX CAN READ THEM +=========================================== + +<DESCRIPTION> + Describe how to move the various files into the appropriate places + (folders, directories, etc) necessary to produce a working LaTeX. +</DESCRIPTION> + + GETTING A WORKING LaTeX +======================= + +<DESCRIPTION> + Describe what else needs to be done to get the new version running. + You may also want to give a sample texsys.cfg file. +</DESCRIPTION> + +CHECKING THAT THE INSTALLATION WORKED +===================================== + +<DESCRIPTION> + Describe how to run LaTeX (yes, some users may not have run LaTeX + before!) on ltxcheck.tex. Say that it's going to produce some `OK' + messages, and perhaps some `BAD' warnings. +</DESCRIPTION> + +PROBLEMS +======== + +<DESCRIPTION> + Describe any problems users may come across in this TeX + implementation, and clues on how to cure them! Try copying the + style of the `PROBLEMS' section in install.txt. +</DESCRIPTION> + +<OPTIONAL> + If you have any other problems with the LaTeX installation, see the + `PROBLEMS' section in install.txt. +</OPTIONAL> + + +CLEARING UP +=========== + +<DESCRIPTION> + Describe how to move the various files still remaining into the + appropriate places (folders, directories, etc) and which files can + be safely deleted. +</DESCRIPTION> + +<OPTIONAL> +SYSTEM-SPECIFIC SECTIONS +======================== + +<DESCRIPTION> + Put any other system-specific material here, e.g. `How to install + LaTeX with versions of FooTeX older than 1.2'. +</DESCRIPTION></OPTIONAL> + + +--- Copyright <YEAR> <AUTHOR> and the LaTeX3 project --- +--- All rights reserved. --- diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/tex2.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/tex2.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..09cd388cde5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/tex2.txt @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + LaTeX installation TeX2 information + + 16 September 1995 + + +In order to make a LaTeX format and use it you need, in addition to +the LaTeX source files, a TeX implementation. + +If your TeX is very old, prior to version TeX3, then certain features +will be missing from your system. In particular, you will probably +have no support for `8-bit' input and hyphenation of words with +accented characters. + +Most (perhaps all) TeX implementations are available in versions that +are at least as recent as TeX3 (released in 1989) so the best course +of action is to update your TeX installation before building LaTeX. + +However, if you must for some reason make the LaTeX format by running +the old TeX2 then it is necessary to have a `configuration file' named +fonttext.cfg. The existence of this file will prevent LaTeX trying to +access 8-bit characters, which is not allowed in the old TeX2 version +of TeX. + +If you fail to use such a configuration file, LaTeX will detect that it +is running under TeX2 and stop with the following message (without +making a format file): + +************************************* +* +* You MUST use a fonttext.cfg file! +* As you are still using TeX2!!!!!! +* +* See the documentation file tex2.txt +* +************************************* + + +There is more information about the file fonttext.cfg in the file +cfgguide.tex; but for a minimal configuration that allows LaTeX to +be built on TeX2, just do the following: + + * Copy the standard fonttext.ltx file to fonttext.cfg + * Then edit the file fonttext.cfg as follows: + -- Change the \ProvidesFile call (see below). + -- Comment out all the lines referring to the `T1' encoding (but not + those referring to the `OT1' encoding). + +Thus the resulting file will look something like the following. + +%%% File: fonttext.cfg +\ProvidesFile{fonttext.cfg} + [1995/06/05 v1.0 TeX2 text font setup] + +\input {OMLenc.def} +%%%%% NOT FOR TeX2 \input {T1enc.def} +\input {OT1enc.def} % <- should come after T1 for speed +\input {OMSenc.def} +\fontencoding{OT1} +\DeclareFontEncodingDefaults{}{} +%%%%% NOT FOR TeX2 \DeclareFontSubstitution{T1}{cmr}{m}{n} +\DeclareFontSubstitution{OT1}{cmr}{m}{n} +%%%%% NOT FOR TeX2 \input {T1cmr.fd} +\input {OT1cmr.fd} +\input {OT1cmss.fd} +\input {OT1cmtt.fd} +\DeclareErrorFont{OT1}{cmr}{m}{n}{10} +\newcommand\rmdefault{cmr} +\newcommand\sfdefault{cmss} +\newcommand\ttdefault{cmtt} + +\newcommand\bfdefault{bx} +\newcommand\mddefault{m} + +\newcommand\itdefault{it} +\newcommand\sldefault{sl} +\newcommand\scdefault{sc} +\newcommand\updefault{n} + +\newcommand\encodingdefault{OT1} +\newcommand\familydefault{\rmdefault} +\newcommand\seriesdefault{\mddefault} +\newcommand\shapedefault{\updefault} +\endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/texpert.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/texpert.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..144db463eb5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/texpert.txt @@ -0,0 +1,206 @@ + LaTeX installation TeX expert information + + 1 June 1997 + + +SUMMARY +======= + +This document contains information about the LaTeX installation for +TeX experts. In particular it describes: + + * The checks performed by ltxcheck.tex + + * How to print the LaTeX source. + +For more general information, see install.txt. + +For information on configuring LaTeX see cfgguide.tex. + + +THE LTXCHECK.TEX CHECKS +======================= + +Here is a description of the checks run by ltxcheck. + +1) The \@currdir check. + + It is useful for LaTeX to know the syntax for the `current directory + (or folder)', or `default directory', if the operating system has + such a concept. + + For example, file abc.tex in this directory, or folder, is specified + by: + ./abc.tex on Unix and most DOS/OS2 TeX's, + []abc.tex on VMS + :abc.tex on a Macintosh. + The above possibilities will be found automatically during the + installation. However, if none of these syntaxes works on your + system then the internal macro \@currdir will be set to be empty + and ltxcheck will report this. + + If your system does have a notion of a current directory, you can + define \@currdir in the file texsys.cfg. + + You could also report this to the latex-bug address, so that + later releases can automatically cope with your system. + +2) The file name parser check. + \filename@parse may be defined in texsys.cfg if the default + installation does not define a suitable parser. (In fact no widely + used TeX system should need such a re-definition as the standard + installation should correctly define this command for unix, dos, + atari, VMS, and Macintosh, at least.) + Because of differences in directory syntax, most features of this + command can not be checked in a portable way, however ltxcheck does + check that at least {article.cls} is correctly parsed as base name + article and extension cls. + +3) The \input@path check. + + On some systems TeX cannot check whether a file exists before + trying to input it, unless the filename is expressed as a full path + name, including the directory. On these systems LaTeX needs to be + given a list of directories in which to look for files; the + internal macro \input@path holds this information. + + When run, ltxcheck will try to locate the file article.cls. + If it fails to find this file (and you have placed it in the + `standard input directory') then you must define \input@path in + the file texsys.cfg. + + The files texsys.cfg and ltdirchk.dtx contain examples of how to do + this but only you know the directories and syntax that should be used + for your installation. + + We hope to build up a better collection of examples in future + releases of LaTeX, as it is tested on more TeX systems. + +4) TeX version check. + + The next check tests that you are running a recent version of TeX. + If ltxcheck reports that you have TeX2, then you should try to + upgrade TeX (and rebuild LaTeX) as soon as possible. LaTeX may be + used with TeX2, but certain features will be missing and you will + not be able to use the new (8-bit) font families that are now + available. If you must stick with TeX2, please read the extra + information in the file tex2.txt. + + If ltxcheck reports that your TeX version is older than 3.141, you + will see some strange messages during the installation. This is + because earlier versions of TeX printed certain line-breaks in + messages on the terminal as `^^J' rather than starting a new line. + + LaTeX will work round this bug and thus avoid `^^J' appearing in + error messages, but you should upgrade your TeX as soon as + possible, as other bugs have been fixed, not just line breaks in + messages. + + At the present time (1997) the current TeX version is 3.14159. + +5) Fonts check. + + Finally ltxcheck.tex tests to see if it can find a `representative + sample' of the fonts used by LaTeX. + + Fonts that may cause problems are: + a) The circle fonts. These were renamed some years ago from circle* + to lcircle*, although some sites still have them under the old + name. Also the names are longer than 8 letters which may cause + some problems. + b) The `extra Computer Modern' fonts. The American Mathematical + Society has extended the range of sizes available in the + Computer Modern fonts. LaTeX now assumes that these extra cm + fonts are available. + The fonts are available from a CTAN archive, in the directory + tex-archive/macros/latex/fonts or alternatively as part of the + AMS fonts collection, which also includes many useful + mathematical fonts. + c) The `T1 encoded Computer Modern' fonts. This is the ec or dc font + collection. The new (1995) release 1.2 of the dc fonts changed + most of the file names. For this reason the fd files such as + t1cmr.fd cannot be written to work with the dc fonts of different + releases. LaTeX by default unpacks the fd files for the ec + dc fonts. + If you have an older release of the dc fonts and do not wish to + upgrade then you should unpack the necessary fd files by running + LaTeX on the file olddc.ins (dc older than version 1.2) or + newdc.ins (version 1.2 and 1.3). + As the T1 fd files will have been used when making the format, + you must re-run initex latex.ltx to remake the format if you + update the fd files in this way. + Running ltxcheck will produce a ! BAD LaTeX2e system!! error + message if it detects that the `new' fd files are loaded into + the format, but only the old dc fonts are available, and vice + versa. + If the old fonts are detected, and the `old' fd files are loaded + then no error is generated, but a message suggesting that you + upgrade is produced. + The ec fonts are available from a CTAN archive, in the directory + tex-archive/fonts/ec . + + +6) Files check. + + Finally ltxcheck checks that the main TeX input files that LaTeX + will use when running documents (such as the article class file, + fd files, and main packages such as fontenc) are all available. + + +DOCUMENTATION OF THE CODE +========================= + +To typeset a documented code file (a .dtx file) you simply run LaTeX +on it. The file source2e.tex is a master file which produces the +documented code for the whole LaTeX kernel (but not the standard +packages, classes, or compatibility mode). You need to have LaTeX2e +installed before doing this. + +To configure the appearance of this documentation, you can use a +ltxdoc.cfg file. For example, putting the following line into this +file will format the documentation for A4 paper: + + \PassOptionsToClass{a4paper}{article} + +The doc package, which is used by the documentation files, writes +index files and change-history files that can be processed by the +program MakeIndex. If this program is part of your TeX installation, +you can get an index and history listing for a documentation file +by running the .idx and .glo files through this program. + +For example, in Unix MakeIndex, you should say: + + makeindex -s gind.ist FILENAME + makeindex -s gglo.ist -o FILENAME.gls FILENAME.glo + +source2e.tex needs a special source2e.ist file (in place of gind.ist). +Running makeindex will produce some warning messages about ignored +style specifiers; these can be safely ignored. + +See the comments at the end of source2e.tex for more information. + + +CONFIGURING LaTeX +================= + +In addition to the system-dependent customisation in texsys.cfg, +various other parts of LaTeX can be configured to suit local needs. +Further details can be found in the document cfgguide.tex. We +recommend that you install the standard system before attempting any +further customisation. + +If you are thinking of making other changes to LaTeX, please read the +document modguide.tex as it describes the precautions you need to take +when making modifications in order to ensure that standard LaTeX +remains a stable, maintainable system. + + +FURTHER INFORMATION +=================== + +You will find further information about various aspects of LaTeX in +the distributed files with names <*>guide.tex. You will need +to install the new version before you can typeset these files. + + +--- Copyright 1995-1997 the LaTeX3 project. All rights reserved --- diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/textures.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/textures.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..5ef11a6d42c --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/textures.txt @@ -0,0 +1,1771 @@ +Building LaTeX for distribution with Textures + +Written by Arthur Ogawa (ogawa@teleport.com). +Date: 4 July 1996 +Updated: 4 April 1997 +Updated: 11 February 2004 + +This document describes how to create a distribution kit for +runtime LaTeX for Textures. It is keyed to the file + +$CTAN/tex-archive/macros/latex/base/install.txt + +to which you should refer for general instructions. If you are viewing +this document in QUED/M (recommended), you will find it nicely folded +into hierarchical divisions. + +REQUIREMENTS +============ + +LaTeX R6P1 is built with Classic Textures 1.8, or later with RAM +footprint of 6.5Mb (smaller might still be feasible; try your luck). + +Given a allocation block of 2k (131Mb partition), you can expect to +need free disk space for $CTAN/tex-archive/macros/latex: 60Mb. (Space +for the /latex/contrib directory alone is 44Mb.) Additional disk space +for the development files and runtime files of about 5Mb. + +Font Requirements + +You should have the AMS fonts installed. Blue Sky's LaTeX2e +distribution has a minimal set of fonts for LaTeX2e. If you wish to +typeset in many languages besides English, you should also install the +EC fonts, available as: +$CTAN/tex-archive/systems/mac/textures/fonts/BitmapFonts/EC_(European_CM)_1.0 +. + +YOUR VERSION OF TEX +=================== + +I assume you are using the latest Textures (as of LaTeX R6P1, Textures 1.8 or later). + +HOW THE INSTALLATION WORKS +========================== + + + +SAVING YOUR OLD VERSION OF LaTeX +================================ + +You should already have saved your old version of LaTeX based on information +in the Textures LaTeX2e installation guide. You can have any number of LaTeXs +simultaneously active. + +PICKING UP THE SOURCE OF LATEX +============================== + +(This section is not in install.txt.) When picking up the source files +for LaTeX, you should create a mirror of CTAN + +ftp://CTAN/tex-archives + +thus: + +fonts/ + ams/ + amsfonts/ + amslatex/ + psfonts/ + adobe/ + bh/ + textures/ + tools/ +macros/ + latex/ + base/ (optional if picking up unpacked/) + contrib/ + other/ + supported/ + doc/ + fonts/ (this is a link to fonts/latex, which is standard with Textures) + packages/ + amslatex/ + babel/ + graphics/ + mfnfss/ + psnfss/ + tools/ + unpacked/ (optional if picking up base/) + +You can pick up compressed source on CTAN and decompress locally to +save bandwidth. Be careful to not translate line terminators of any +binary files (e.g., tfm, vf, dvi, or zip) in the process. Alternative: +Textures 1.8 and later will support UNIX line terminators, so you can +pick up the files BINARY and use them without modification. + +You can set the name of the latex directory to "latexRxPy" to +distinguish it from other LaTeX releases in your CTAN mirror. + +I picked files up in April 1997. I concluded them to be +Release 6 (based on the presence of the file unpacked/ltnews06.tex) +at Patchlevel 1 (from an examination of unpacked/ltpatch.ltx). + +In what follows, the files in the CTAN mirror will be referred to via +their UNIX-like path names to distinguish them from files in the +Development folder. In this build, no files are created in any of +these directories (with the possible exception of creating unpacked/ +from base/), and no new resources are created in any of the CTAN +files. Therefore, the runtime kit consists of files copied directly +over from CTAN and generated files (generated by Textures as part of +the build process), the latter always generated in a separate set of +folders. + +BEFORE UNPACKING THE DISTRIBUTION +================================= + +Create the following working directory structure (or duplicate it from +a previous release): + +:LaTeX RxPy Isolates this particular version of LaTeX + Textures.txt This file--update it for use in your next round of work + :Development Generate the runtime files, doc files, etc. + :base run unpack.ins (optional) + :Documentation Generate user-level documentation + :fonts PS_Fonts_NFSS (optional) + :graphics Graphics_Bundle (optional) + :TeX inputs Generate files read by LaTeX at run time + :€LaTeX RxPy hierarchical version of one in :Distribution:TeX inputs: + color.cfg runtime file + graphics.cfg runtime file + ltxdoc.cfg runtime file + :amsfonts alias to :ams:amsfonts:latex + :amslatex alias to :ams:amslatex:inputs + :base aliases of the runtime files + idx.tex + lablst.tex + latexbug.tex + ltnews.cls + ltxguide.cls + minimal.cls + nfssfont.tex + sample2e.tex + small2e.tex + testpage.tex + :contrib + :other + :supported + :packages + :babel gen the runtime files + :graphics gen the runtime files + color.sty + dvi2ps.def + dvialw.def + dvilaser.def + dvips.def + dvipsnam.def + dvipsone.def + dvitops.def + dviwin.def + emtex.def + epsfig.sty + graphics.sty + graphicx.sty + keyval.sty + ln.def + lscape.sty + oztex.def + pctex32.def + pctexhp.def + pctexps.def + pctexwin.def + psprint.def + pstcol.sty + pubps.def + textures.def + trig.sty + :mfnfss gen the runtime files + oldgerm.sty + OT1panr.fd + OT1pss.fd + pandora.sty + Uyfrak.fd + Uygoth.fd + Uyinit.fd + Uyswab.fd + :psnfss gen the runtime files + avant.sty + bookman.sty + chancery.sty + helvet.sty + mathptm.sty + newcent.sty + palatino.sty + pifont.sty + times.sty + :tools gen the runtime files + .tex + afterpage.sty + array.sty + dcolumn.sty + delarray.sty + e.tex + enumerate.sty + fontsmpl.sty + fontsmpl.tex + ftnright.sty + h.tex + hhline.sty + indentfirst.sty + layout.sty + longtable.sty + multicol.sty + rawfonts.sty + s.tex + showkeys.sty + somedefs.sty + tabularx.sty + thb.sty + thc.sty + thcb.sty + theorem.sty + thm.sty + thmb.sty + thp.sty + varioref.sty + verbatim.sty + verbtest.tex + x.tex + xr.sty + xspace.sty + :psfonts based on the new fontinst-based metrics + :adobe aliases of the runtime files + :bh aliases of the runtime files + :tools + :psnfss gen the runtime files + :unpacked aliases of the runtime files + alltt.sty + ansinew.def + applemac.def + article.cls + article.sty + ascii.def + bezier.sty + bk10.clo + bk11.clo + bk12.clo + book.cls + book.sty + cp437.def + cp437de.def + cp850.def + cp852.def + doc.sty + docstrip.tex + exscale.sty + flafter.sty + fleqn.clo + fleqn.sty + fontenc.sty + gglo.ist + gind.ist + graphpap.sty + ifthen.sty + inputenc.sty + latex209.def + latexsym.sty + latin1.def + latin2.def + leqno.clo + leqno.sty + letter.cls + letter.sty + ltxdoc.cls + makeidx.sty + newlfont.sty + next.def + oldlfont.sty + OMLcmm.fd + OMLcmr.fd + OMLenc.def + OMLlcmm.fd + OMScmr.fd + OMScmsy.fd + OMSenc.def + OMSlcmsy.fd + OMXcmex.fd + OMXlcmex.fd + openbib.sty + OT1cmdh.fd + OT1cmfib.fd + OT1cmfr.fd + OT1cmr.fd + OT1cmss.fd + OT1cmtt.fd + OT1cmvtt.fd + OT1enc.def + OT1lcmss.fd + OT1lcmtt.fd + proc.cls + proc.sty + report.cls + report.sty + sfonts.def + shortvrb.sty + showidx.sty + size10.clo + size11.clo + size12.clo + slides.cls + slides.def + slides.sty + syntonly.sty + T1cmdh.fd + T1cmfib.fd + T1cmfr.fd + T1cmr.fd + T1cmss.fd + T1cmtt.fd + T1cmvtt.fd + T1enc.def + t1enc.sty + texsys.cfg + tracefnt.sty + TS1cmr.fd + TS1cmss.fd + TS1cmtt.fd + TS1cmvtt.fd + Ucmr.fd + Ucmss.fd + Ucmtt.fd + Ulasy.fd + Ullasy.fd + :Distribution The files to be distributed to end users + ReadMe Basic installation instructions + :Documentation User guides in ready-to-read format + a.ps + Author Guide + Class Guide + color + Configuration Options + Font Selection + Graphics Bundle + LaTeX News 01 + LaTeX News 02 + LaTeX News 03 + LaTeX News 04 + LaTeX News 05 + Modifying LaTeX + PS Fonts NFSS + :TeX fonts Alias files into Textures' TeX fonts folder + :TeX formats Alias files into Textures' TeX formats folder + :unpacked gen the .fmt and run ltcheck + :TeX inputs Alias folder into Textures' TeX inputs folder + :€LaTeX RxPy + +The general strategy in what follows is to avoid altering or +unnecessarily duplicating the files in the CTAN mirror as one proceeds +with the build. To accomplish this, any file that you open in +Textures, or especially any file that you typeset in Textures, should +be a file that you create expressely for that purpose, generally +somewhere in the :Development folder. Thus, one avoids putting new +resources into the CTAN files. As a byproduct of this technique, it is +simple indeed to know which files are generated files: after +typesetting one of the install files in the :Development folder, any +new files that appear in the same folder will be generated files, and +will need to be moved (somewhere) into the €LaTeX RxPy folder. + +As you generate the files for the distribution, you will not only move +generated files into the €LaTeX RxPy folder, but also leave behind +aliases of these same files; this will facilitate your understanding +of the purpose of each generated file. you can do a Find FileŠ on +any file in the :TeX inputs:€LaTeX RxPy folder: two files will be +found, the second will be an alias of the first and will indicate (by +its location in the hierarchy) which package it belongs to. + +After you complete the generation of the runtime files, you will have +a :TeX inputs:€LaTeX RxPy folder that is completely flat. This is +important to Textures' speed. + +UNPACKING THE DISTRIBUTION +========================== + +Note: If you picked up the unpacked/ directory from CTAN, you do not need to run +the (time-consuming) unpacking procedure here. + +1. To proceed, open the file in :Development:base: called unpack that +contains the single line "\input unpack.ins" and typeset under virtex. +When prompted, navigate to the file base\unpack.ins. The generated +files will all show up in the unpacked directory. + +2. Move all the new files into + +:Development:TeX inputs:€LaTeX RxPy:base: + +And create an alias of latex/base/ltpatch.ltx in this directory. + +3. Save the TeX log into :Development:unpacked: for future reference + +You have now created a latex/unpacked/ that will serve as a vehicle for creating +the LaTeX preformatted macro package in the next step. Any runtime files will be +found in latex/base/. + +CREATING THE LATEX FORMAT +========================= + +1. From Textures, open :Distribution:TeX formats:LaTeX R6P1 (which has +a single line in it: \input latex.ltx\endinput). Make sure +Typeset:Virtex 1.8ß1 is checked, then select File:Make Format. All of +the files required for the run are in the folder unpacked, an alias of +/latex/unpacked. Textures will ask you to help it find latex.ltx; once +you do so, it will find the remainder. + +As part of Make Format, Textures will create an alias of LaTeX R6P1 in +its TeX formats folder and immediately add it to its list of +preformatted macro packages (under the Typeset menu). You will use +this new version of LaTeX to generate further components of the +runtime kit. + +2. The generated preformatted macro package is :Distribution:TeX +formats:LaTeX RxPy, the very file you opened in Textures. Save the TeX +Log in the same file after the \endinput statement following the +suggestion in install.txt. + +PUTTING THE FILES WHERE LaTeX CAN READ THEM +=========================================== + +1. From latex/base and latex/unpacked, move into :Distribution:TeX +inputs:€LaTeX RxPy all of the files specified in base/install.txt +and leave an alias to each file in Development:TeX inputs:€LaTeX +R5P0:base or -:unpacked, respectively. + +To paraphrase those instructions, move the files: +docstrip.tex, idx.tex, lablst.tex, latexbug.tex, nfssfont.tex, +sample2e.tex, small2e.tex, testpage.tex, +and files matching * .cls, * .clo, * .sty, * .fd, * .def, * .cfg +from latex/(base|unpacked)/. + +Note: If you have created your own latex/unpacked/, you will find that +the *.tex files are mostly to be found in the latex/base/ directory +(with the exception of docstrip.tex) and the rest of the files are +mostly to be found in latex/unpacked/ (with the exception of +ltnews.cls, ltxguide.cls, and minimal.cls). Also in this case, most +all the files in latex/unpacked/ fall in this category, with the +exception of the *.ltx files. The latter were generated in order to +build the preformatted macro package and should be moved into the +:Distribution:TeX formats:unpacked: folder. + +2. Put an alias of the folder :Distribution:TeX inputs:€LaTeX RxPy: into +the :Textures:TeX inputs: folder. + +Note that this last step mimics that taken when the end user installs +LaTeX. Note also that when the end user wants to rebuild the +preformattted macro package, they will simply retypeset the file +:Distribution:TeX formats:LaTeX R6P1. + +GETTING A WORKING LaTeX +======================= + +You need do nothing further to use your new LaTeX R6P1 format. + +CHECKING THAT THE INSTALLATION WORKED +===================================== + +1. Open :Distribution:TeX formats:check.tex and typeset it under the +LaTeX RxPy format. For comparison, my result is pasted into that file. + +2. Fonts: I am presently using Constantine Kahn's Textures metric +suitcases named 8r reencoding, LucidaBright psnfss metrics, and +LW35nfss metrics. These metric suitcases are required for the new +psfonts font scheme, which appears to replace packages/psnfss. + +Note that in his own instructions, Kahn specifies adding resources to +Edmetrics and, by extension, to Textures. This should be done by Blue +Sky Research before this kit is distributed. + +For R4P0 and later, ltcheck complains that the ec fonts aren't there. +These fonts may be obtained at +$CTAN/systems/mac/textures/BitmapFonts/EC<version number>. If you are +using the EC fonts, you may want to look at latex/base/ec.ins. + +PROBLEMS +======== + +Please correspond with me if you have any problems: + +mailto: ogawa@teleport.com + +CLEARING UP +=========== + +There is no need to do any clearing up, because the only files +included in the runtime kit are those specifically required at run +time. All of the .dtx, .fdd, etc files remain in the CTAN mirror area, +where you can process them further (for documentation) as you see fit. + +You might want to systematically typeset these documentation files, +thereby creating a prepared documentation set for end-user +distribution. A number of them already appear in /latex/docs; some +further doc files are: + +*.ltx + +begleit.err +compan.err +manual.err + +ltx3info.tex + +FINALLY +======= + +This file is the very <system>.tex file suggested by Team LaTeX. But +it does not end here because preparing a runtime kit involves +additionally creating the runtime files for LaTeX's packages. + +FILES THAT HAVE BEEN CUSTOMIZED FOR THE TEXTURES RELEASE OF LATEX +================================================================= + +Four files customize LaTeX2e to Textures. They are: + +color.cfg +graphics.cfg +ltxdoc.cfg +texsys.cfg (I'm trying out leaving this file out.) +textures.def + +RUNTIME FILES FOR LATEX PACKAGES +================================ + +For each of the subdirectories under latex/packages, you carry out the +following steps. For the purposes of illustration, consider the +graphics package. + +1. In the folder :Development:TeX inputs:packages:graphics, open the +file install, which has a single line: +"\input graphics.ins". + +2. Now open latex/packages/graphics/graphics.ins. +Then typeset "install" under the LaTeX RxPy format. Numerous files are +created in the same folder as "install". + +3. Close graphics.ins and "install". Save the TeX log at the end of +the file "install". + +4. Move all of the generated files into :Distribution:TeX +inputs:€LaTeX RxPy:graphics. + +5. Make aliases of those same files in :Development:TeX +inputs:€LaTeX RxPy:. + +The same series of steps can be carried out for mfnfss, psnfss, and tools but +with the following qualifications: + +babel: This package involves creating a new preformatted macro package +(with embedded hypenation patterns). Exactly which patterns are +preloaded is determined by the builder. I have not included babel in +the runtime kit because the configuration of babel depends on the +needs of the end user. Suggestions? + +graphics: The build will not generate a textures.def. That file is +provided directly in CTAN/macros/latex/packages/graphics/textures.def. +Copy (or alias) that file to :Distribution:TeX inputs:€LaTeX +RxPy:graphics + +psnfss: this package is superseded by the new +CTAN/tex-archive/fonts/psfonts macros. I have accordingly built that +package and moved the relevant files into :Distribution:TeX +inputs:€LaTeX RxPy. I built psfonts, lucida, and mathtime. + +mfnfss: proceed as for graphics. dccr not supported by Textures +installation (no fonts). + +tools: proceed as for graphics. + +amslatex: simply alias the files in the packages/amslatex/inputs directory into +:Distribution:TeX inputs:€LaTeX RxPy:amslatex. + +5. Put in files that customize LaTeX to the Textures environment. These are + +color.cfg +graphics.cfg +ltxdoc.cfg + +You can put them directly in :Distribution:TeX inputs:€LaTeX RxPy. The files +color.cfg ans graphics.cfg apply to the graphics package +and the file ltxdoc.cfg applies to base/ltxdoc.ltx. + +RUNTIME FILES FOR THE PSFONTS PACKAGE +===================================== + +The runtime files for fonts/psfonts is incorporated into the Textures +release of LaTeX. The psfonts package supports typesetting with many +PostScript Type 1 fonts from many different font foundaries. + +The files included are those in the respective tex/ directories and +consist of mainly .fd files. There used to be a clobbering problem +with the .sty files; the tools/ directory no longer contains a psnfss +subdirectory, so things have changed. + +DOCUMENTATION IN TEXTURES FORMAT +================================ + +The DVI files in latex/docs are provided in :Distribution:Documentation:. + +SUMMARY +======= + +The following is a conveniently indented list showing the directory +structure of the development environment and runtime kit for LaTeX. + +:LaTeX RxPy + Textures.txt + :Development + :base + unpack.ins + unpack + unpack TeX Log + :Documentation + :fonts + PS_Fonts_NFSS + PS_Fonts_NFSS.aux + PS_Fonts_NFSS.toc + :graphics + a.ps + Graphics_Bundle + Graphics_Bundle.aux + Graphics_Bundle.toc + :TeX formats + latex + texsys.aux + :TeX inputs + :€LaTeX RxPy flattened alias in :Distribution:TeX inputs: + color.cfg + contrib + graphics + graphics.cfg + ltxdoc.cfg + :amsfonts + amsdtx.cls + amsfonts.sty + amssymb.sty + cmmib57.sty + eucal.sty + eufrak.sty + euscript.sty + Ueuex.fd + Ueuex57.fd + Ueuf.fd + Ueuf57.fd + Ueur.fd + Ueur57.fd + Ueus.fd + Ueus57.fd + Umsa.fd + Umsa57.fd + Umsb.fd + Umsb57.fd + :amslatex + amsart.cls + amsbook.cls + amsbsy.sty + amscd.sty + amsdtx.cls + amsgen.sty + amsintx.sty + amsldoc.cls + amsmath.sty + amsopn.sty + amsproc.cls + amstex.sty + amstext.sty + amsthm.sty + amsxtra.sty + upref.sty + :babel + :base + alltt.sty + ansinew.def + applemac.def + article.cls + article.sty + ascii.def + bezier.sty + bk10.clo + bk11.clo + bk12.clo + book.cls + book.sty + cp437.def + cp437de.def + cp850.def + cp852.def + doc.sty + docstrip.tex + exscale.sty + flafter.sty + fleqn.clo + fleqn.sty + fontenc.sty + gglo.ist + gind.ist + graphpap.sty + idx.tex + ifthen.sty + inputenc.sty + lablst.tex + latex209.def + latexbug.tex + latexsym.sty + latin1.def + latin2.def + leqno.clo + leqno.sty + letter.cls + letter.sty + ltnews.cls + ltxdoc.cls + ltxguide.cls + makeidx.sty + minimal.cls + newlfont.sty + next.def + nfssfont.tex + oldlfont.sty + OMLcmm.fd + OMLcmr.fd + OMLenc.def + OMLlcmm.fd + OMScmr.fd + OMScmsy.fd + OMSenc.def + OMSlcmsy.fd + OMXcmex.fd + OMXlcmex.fd + openbib.sty + OT1cmdh.fd + OT1cmfib.fd + OT1cmfr.fd + OT1cmr.fd + OT1cmss.fd + OT1cmtt.fd + OT1cmvtt.fd + OT1enc.def + OT1lcmss.fd + OT1lcmtt.fd + proc.cls + proc.sty + report.cls + report.sty + sample2e.tex + sfonts.def + shortvrb.sty + showidx.sty + size10.clo + size11.clo + size12.clo + slides.cls + slides.def + slides.sty + small2e.tex + syntonly.sty + T1cmdh.fd + T1cmfib.fd + T1cmfr.fd + T1cmr.fd + T1cmss.fd + T1cmtt.fd + T1cmvtt.fd + T1enc.def + t1enc.sty + testpage.tex + texsys.cfg + tracefnt.sty + TS1cmr.fd + TS1cmss.fd + TS1cmtt.fd + TS1cmvtt.fd + Ucmr.fd + Ucmss.fd + Ucmtt.fd + Ulasy.fd + Ullasy.fd + :contrib + :graphics + color.sty + dvi2ps.def + dvialw.def + dvilaser.def + dvips.def + dvipsnam.def + dvipsone.def + dvitops.def + dviwin.def + emtex.def + epsfig.sty + graphics.sty + graphicx.sty + keyval.sty + ln.def + lscape.sty + oztex.def + pctexhp.def + pctexps.def + pctexwin.def + psprint.def + pstcol.sty + pubps.def + textures.def + trig.sty + :mfnfss + oldgerm.sty + OT1panr.fd + OT1pss.fd + pandora.sty + Uyfrak.fd + Uygoth.fd + Uyinit.fd + Uyswab.fd + :psfonts + :adobe + :agaramon + 8rpad.fd + OMLpad.fd + OMSpad.fd + OT1pad.fd + T1pad.fd + :avantgar + 8rpag.fd + OMLpag.fd + OMSpag.fd + OT1pag.fd + T1pag.fd + :baskervi + 8rpnb.fd + OMLpnb.fd + OMSpnb.fd + OT1pnb.fd + T1pnb.fd + :bembo + 8rpbb.fd + OMLpbb.fd + OMSpbb.fd + OT1pbb.fd + T1pbb.fd + :bookman + 8rpbk.fd + OMLpbk.fd + OMSpbk.fd + OT1pbk.fd + T1pbk.fd + + :courier + 8rpcr.fd + courier.sty + OMLpcr.fd + OMSpcr.fd + OT1pcr.fd + T1pcr.fd + :garamond + 8rpgm.fd + OMLpgm.fd + OMSpgm.fd + OT1pgm.fd + T1pgm.fd + :gillsans + 8rpgs.fd + gillsans.sty + OMLpgs.fd + OMSpgs.fd + OT1pgs.fd + T1pgs.fd + :helvetic + 8rphv.fd + OMLphv.fd + OMSphv.fd + OT1phv.fd + T1phv.fd + :ncntrsbk + 8rpnc.fd + OMLpnc.fd + OMSpnc.fd + OT1pnc.fd + T1pnc.fd + :optima + 8rpop.fd + OMLpop.fd + OMSpop.fd + optima.sty + OT1pop.fd + T1pop.fd + :palatino + 8rppl.fd + OMLppl.fd + OMSppl.fd + OT1ppl.fd + T1ppl.fd + :symbol + Upsy.fd + :times + 8rptm.fd + OMLptm.fd + OMLptmcm.fd + OMSptm.fd + OMSpzccm.fd + OMXpsycm.fd + OT1ptm.fd + OT1ptmcm.fd + T1ptm.fd + :univers + 8rpun.fd + OMLpun.fd + OMSpun.fd + OT1pun.fd + T1pun.fd + univers.sty + :utopia + 8rput.fd + OMLput.fd + OMSput.fd + OT1put.fd + T1put.fd + :zapfchan + 8rpzc.fd + OMLpzc.fd + OMSpzc.fd + OT1pzc.fd + T1pzc.fd + :zapfding + Upzd.fd + :bh + :lubright + 8rhlh.fd + lubright.sty + OMLhlh.fd + OMShlh.fd + OT1hlh.fd + T1hlh.fd + :lucida + 8rhlce.fd + 8rhlcf.fd + 8rhlcn.fd + 8rhlct.fd + 8rhlcw.fd + lucida.sty + OMLhlce.fd + OMLhlcf.fd + OMLhlcn.fd + OMLhlct.fd + OMLhlcw.fd + OMShlce.fd + OMShlcf.fd + OMShlcn.fd + OMShlct.fd + OMShlcw.fd + OT1hlce.fd + OT1hlcf.fd + OT1hlcn.fd + OT1hlct.fd + OT1hlcw.fd + T1hlce.fd + T1hlcf.fd + T1hlcn.fd + T1hlct.fd + T1hlcw.fd + :lucidfax + 8rhlx.fd + lucidfax.sty + OMLhlx.fd + OMShlx.fd + OT1hlx.fd + T1hlx.fd + :lucsans + 8rhls.fd + 8rhlst.fd + lucsans.sty + OMLhls.fd + OMLhlst.fd + OMShls.fd + OMShlst.fd + OT1hls.fd + OT1hlst.fd + T1hls.fd + T1hlst.fd + :tools + avant.sty + basker.sty + bembo.sty + bookman.sty + chancery.sty + charter.sty + garamond.sty + helvet.sty + LMRhlcm.fd + LMRlbm.fd + lucbmath.sty + lucbr.sty + lucfont.tex + lucid.sty + lucidbrb.sty + lucidbry.sty + lucmath.sty + lucmtime.sty + mathptm.sty + mathtime.sty + mtimes.sty + newcent.sty + nimbus.sty + OMLhlcm.fd + OMLhlh.fd + OMLlbm.fd + OMLmtt.fd + OMLplcm.fd + OMShlcy.fd + OMShlh.fd + OMSlb.fd + OMSlby.fd + OMSmtt.fd + OMSplcy.fd + OMXhlcv.fd + OMXlbv.fd + OMXmtt.fd + OMXplcv.fd + OT1lb.fd + OT1lbf.fd + OT1lbs.fd + OT1lbt.fd + OT1unmr.fd + OT1unmrs.fd + palatino.sty + pifont.sty + T1unmr.fd + T1unmrs.fd + times.sty + utopia.sty + :psnfss + avant.sty + bookman.sty + chancery.sty + helvet.sty + mathptm.sty + newcent.sty + palatino.sty + pifont.sty + times.sty + :tools + .tex + afterpage.sty + array.sty + dcolumn.sty + delarray.sty + e.tex + enumerate.sty + fontsmpl.sty + fontsmpl.tex + ftnright.sty + h.tex + hhline.sty + indentfirst.sty + layout.sty + longtable.sty + multicol.sty + rawfonts.sty + s.tex + showkeys.sty + somedefs.sty + tabularx.sty + thb.sty + thc.sty + thcb.sty + theorem.sty + thm.sty + thmb.sty + thp.sty + varioref.sty + verbatim.sty + verbtest.tex + x.tex + xr.sty + xspace.sty + :packages + :graphics + install + install.TeX Log + :mfnfss + oldgerm + oldgerm TeX log + pandora + pandora TeX log + :psnfss + psfonts + psfonts TeX log + :tools + tools + tools TeX log + :psnfss.beta + charter + charter TeX log + lucida + lucida TeX log + mathtime + mathtime TeX log + nimbus + nimbus TeX log + psfonts + psfonts TeX Log + utopia + utopia TeX log + :unpacked + check + check TeX Log + :Distribution + :Documentation + a.ps + Author Guide + Class Guide + Configuration Options + Font Selection + Graphics Bundle + LaTeX News 01 + LaTeX News 02 + LaTeX News 03 + LaTeX News 04 + LaTeX News 05 + Modifying LaTeX + PS Fonts NFSS + color + :TeX fonts + 8r reencoding + AMS virtual metrics + AMS/PS Metrics + Lucida Bright psnfss metrics + LW35 psnfss metrics + phvluc metrics + ptmluc metrics + :TeX formats + LaTeX RxPy + LaTeX RxPy TeX log + :TeX inputs + :€LaTeX RxPy + .tex + 8rhlce.fd + 8rhlcf.fd + 8rhlcn.fd + 8rhlct.fd + 8rhlcw.fd + 8rhlh.fd + 8rhls.fd + 8rhlst.fd + 8rhlx.fd + 8rpad.fd + 8rpag.fd + 8rpbb.fd + 8rpbk.fd + 8rpcr.fd + 8rpgm.fd + 8rpgs.fd + 8rphv.fd + 8rpnb.fd + 8rpnc.fd + 8rpop.fd + 8rppl.fd + 8rptm.fd + 8rpun.fd + 8rput.fd + 8rpzc.fd + afterpage.sty + alltt.sty + amsart.cls + amsbook.cls + amsbsy.sty + amscd.sty + amsdtx.cls + amsdtx.cls 2 + amsfonts.sty + amsgen.sty + amsintx.sty + amsldoc.cls + amsmath.sty + amsopn.sty + amsproc.cls + amssymb.sty + amstex.sty + amstext.sty + amsthm.sty + amsxtra.sty + ansinew.def + applemac.def + array.sty + article.cls + article.sty + ascii.def + avant.sty + basker.sty + bembo.sty + bezier.sty + bk10.clo + bk11.clo + bk12.clo + book.cls + book.sty + bookman.sty + chancery.sty + charter.sty + cmmib57.sty + color.cfg + color.sty + courier.sty + cp437.def + cp437de.def + cp850.def + cp852.def + dcolumn.sty + delarray.sty + doc.sty + docstrip.tex + dvi2ps.def + dvialw.def + dvilaser.def + dvips.def + dvipsnam.def + dvipsone.def + dvitops.def + dviwin.def + e.tex + emtex.def + enumerate.sty + epsfig.sty + eucal.sty + eufrak.sty + euscript.sty + exscale.sty + flafter.sty + fleqn.clo + fleqn.sty + fontenc.sty + fontsmpl.sty + fontsmpl.tex + ftnright.sty + garamond.sty + gglo.ist + gillsans.sty + gind.ist + graphics.cfg + graphics.sty + graphicx.sty + graphpap.sty + h.tex + helvet.sty + hhline.sty + idx.tex + ifthen.sty + indentfirst.sty + inputenc.sty + keyval.sty + lablst.tex + latex209.def + latexbug.tex + latexsym.sty + latin1.def + latin2.def + layout.sty + leqno.clo + leqno.sty + letter.cls + letter.sty + LMRhlcm.fd + LMRlbm.fd + ln.def + longtable.sty + lscape.sty + ltnews.cls + ltxdoc.cfg + ltxdoc.cls + ltxguide.cls + lubright.sty + lucbmath.sty + lucbr.sty + lucfont.tex + lucid.sty + lucida.sty + lucidbrb.sty + lucidbry.sty + lucidfax.sty + lucmath.sty + lucmtime.sty + lucsans.sty + makeidx.sty + mathptm.sty + mathtime.sty + minimal.cls + mtimes.sty + multicol.sty + newcent.sty + newlfont.sty + next.def + nfssfont.tex + nimbus.sty + oldgerm.sty + oldlfont.sty + OMLcmm.fd + OMLcmr.fd + OMLenc.def + OMLhlce.fd + OMLhlcf.fd + OMLhlcm.fd + OMLhlcn.fd + OMLhlct.fd + OMLhlcw.fd + OMLhlh.fd + OMLhls.fd + OMLhlst.fd + OMLhlx.fd + OMLlbm.fd + OMLlcmm.fd + OMLmtt.fd + OMLpad.fd + OMLpag.fd + OMLpbb.fd + OMLpbk.fd + OMLpcr.fd + OMLpgm.fd + OMLpgs.fd + OMLphv.fd + OMLplcm.fd + OMLpnb.fd + OMLpnc.fd + OMLpop.fd + OMLppl.fd + OMLptm.fd + OMLptmcm.fd + OMLpun.fd + OMLput.fd + OMLpzc.fd + OMScmr.fd + OMScmsy.fd + OMSenc.def + OMShlce.fd + OMShlcf.fd + OMShlcn.fd + OMShlct.fd + OMShlcw.fd + OMShlcy.fd + OMShlh.fd + OMShls.fd + OMShlst.fd + OMShlx.fd + OMSlb.fd + OMSlby.fd + OMSlcmsy.fd + OMSmtt.fd + OMSpad.fd + OMSpag.fd + OMSpbb.fd + OMSpbk.fd + OMSpcr.fd + OMSpgm.fd + OMSpgs.fd + OMSphv.fd + OMSplcy.fd + OMSpnb.fd + OMSpnc.fd + OMSpop.fd + OMSppl.fd + OMSptm.fd + OMSpun.fd + OMSput.fd + OMSpzc.fd + OMSpzccm.fd + OMXcmex.fd + OMXhlcv.fd + OMXlbv.fd + OMXlcmex.fd + OMXmtt.fd + OMXplcv.fd + OMXpsycm.fd + openbib.sty + optima.sty + OT1cmdh.fd + OT1cmfib.fd + OT1cmfr.fd + OT1cmr.fd + OT1cmss.fd + OT1cmtt.fd + OT1cmvtt.fd + OT1enc.def + OT1hlce.fd + OT1hlcf.fd + OT1hlcn.fd + OT1hlct.fd + OT1hlcw.fd + OT1hlh.fd + OT1hls.fd + OT1hlst.fd + OT1hlx.fd + OT1lb.fd + OT1lbf.fd + OT1lbs.fd + OT1lbt.fd + OT1lcmss.fd + OT1lcmtt.fd + OT1pad.fd + OT1pag.fd + OT1panr.fd + OT1pbb.fd + OT1pbk.fd + OT1pcr.fd + OT1pgm.fd + OT1pgs.fd + OT1phv.fd + OT1pnb.fd + OT1pnc.fd + OT1pop.fd + OT1ppl.fd + OT1pss.fd + OT1ptm.fd + OT1ptmcm.fd + OT1pun.fd + OT1put.fd + OT1pzc.fd + OT1unmr.fd + OT1unmrs.fd + oztex.def + palatino.sty + pandora.sty + pctexhp.def + pctexps.def + pctexwin.def + pifont.sty + proc.cls + proc.sty + psprint.def + pstcol.sty + pubps.def + rawfonts.sty + report.cls + report.sty + s.tex + sample2e.tex + sfonts.def + shortvrb.sty + showidx.sty + showkeys.sty + size10.clo + size11.clo + size12.clo + slides.cls + slides.def + slides.sty + small2e.tex + somedefs.sty + syntonly.sty + T1cmdh.fd + T1cmfib.fd + T1cmfr.fd + T1cmr.fd + T1cmss.fd + T1cmtt.fd + T1cmvtt.fd + T1enc.def + t1enc.sty + T1hlce.fd + T1hlcf.fd + T1hlcn.fd + T1hlct.fd + T1hlcw.fd + T1hlh.fd + T1hls.fd + T1hlst.fd + T1hlx.fd + T1pad.fd + T1pag.fd + T1pbb.fd + T1pbk.fd + T1pcr.fd + T1pgm.fd + T1pgs.fd + T1phv.fd + T1pnb.fd + T1pnc.fd + T1pop.fd + T1ppl.fd + T1ptm.fd + T1pun.fd + T1put.fd + T1pzc.fd + T1unmr.fd + T1unmrs.fd + tabularx.sty + testpage.tex + texsys.cfg + textures.def + thb.sty + thc.sty + thcb.sty + theorem.sty + thm.sty + thmb.sty + thp.sty + times.sty + tracefnt.sty + trig.sty + TS1cmr.fd + TS1cmss.fd + TS1cmtt.fd + TS1cmvtt.fd + Ucmr.fd + Ucmss.fd + Ucmtt.fd + Ueuex.fd + Ueuex57.fd + Ueuf.fd + Ueuf57.fd + Ueur.fd + Ueur57.fd + Ueus.fd + Ueus57.fd + Ulasy.fd + Ullasy.fd + Umsa.fd + Umsa57.fd + Umsb.fd + Umsb57.fd + univers.sty + upref.sty + Upsy.fd + Upzd.fd + utopia.sty + Uyfrak.fd + Uygoth.fd + Uyinit.fd + Uyswab.fd + varioref.sty + verbatim.sty + verbtest.tex + x.tex + xr.sty + xspace.sty + + +The installation kit for the runtime files is the :Distribution: +folder and its contents. The end user should install by creating +aliases of the contents of the TeX fonts, TeX formats, and TeX inputs +folders in the respective folders of their Textures installation. + +Note in particular that this means putting an alias of €LaTeX RxPy +into their TeX inputs folder, *not* aliases of the *contents* of the +€LaTeX RxPy folder. The object is to ensure that, insofar possible, +the only aliases in the TeX inputs folder are aliases of €-style +folders. + +contrib/ + other/ + adrlist/ + alg/ + apa/ + apacite/ + bg/ + calrsfs/ + chemsym/ + cmcyralt/ + concmath/ + crosswrd/ + dmfonts/ + dotseqn/ + dropping/ + eepic/ + eiad/ + envbig/ + epic/ + floatflt/ + fp/ + fragments/ + fraktur/ + gene/ + grnumalt/ + ipa/ + lastpage/ + lexitex/ + lgreek/ + lifia-th/ + misc/ + mpfnmark/ + newthm/ + ogonek/ + oldstyle/ + psnfss-addons/ + qobitree/ + recipe/ + script/ + seminar/ + siam/ + smallcap/ + swift/ + timesht/ + timing/ + vdm/ + vita/ + williams/ + xymtex/ + yplan96/ + yplan97/ + zed-csp/ + supported/ + a4/ + achemso/ + acronym/ + afthesis/ + aguplus/ + aiaa/ + akletter/ + algorithms/ + altfont/ + answers/ + bbm/ + beton/ + bm/ + booktabs/ + calc/ + calendar/ + camel/ + caption/ + carlisle/ + ccfonts/ + changebar/ + chemcono/ + cite/ + codepage/ + concprog/ + count1to/ + covington/ + curves/ + custom-bib/ + cweb/ + dates/ + deleq/ + dialogl/ + dinbrief/ + draftcopy/ + dtk/ + easy/ + elsevier/ + endfloat/ + envlab/ + eqnarray/ + ethiop/ + euler/ + everysel/ + everyshi/ + exams/ + expdlist/ + export/ + fancyhdr/ + fax/ + feynmf/ + float/ + fncychap/ + foiltex/ + footnote/ + footnpag/ + fribrief/ + g-brief/ + gb4e/ + geometry/ + harpoon/ + harvard/ + hh/ + histogr/ + hyper/ + hyperref/ + ieeepes/ + ifaccong/ + ifacmtg/ + indxcite/ + inputenc/ + isostds/ + jknappen/ + jura/ + koi8/ + koma-script/ + labels/ + levy/ + LH/ + lineno/ + localloc/ + ltablex/ + mailing/ + mapcodes/ + maple/ + mathcomp/ + mcite/ + mdwfonts/ + mdwtools/ + mff/ + mflogo/ + minitoc/ + mlbib/ + monster/ + moreverb/ + mslapa/ + nassflow/ + natbib/ + newalg/ + niceframe/ + nomencl/ + ntgclass/ + numline/ + objectz/ + paper/ + parallel/ + pb-diagram/ + piff/ + pmat/ + pmgraph/ + prelim2e/ + prettyref/ + progkeys/ + program/ + psfrag/ + pslatex/ + psnfssx/ + qsymbols/ + ragged2e/ + rcs/ + rcsinfo/ + refman/ + rotating/ + rotfloat/ + rplain/ + saferef/ + scale/ + semantic/ + setspace/ + shadbox/ + shadethm/ + showlabels/ + siggraph/ + slidenotes/ + songbook/ + ssqquote/ + stmaryrd/ + subeqn/ + subeqnarray/ + subfigure/ + supertabular/ + termcal/ + textfit/ + textmerg/ + thesis/ + tpcmfont/ + tracking/ + treesvr/ + tugboat/ + type1cm/ + uaclasses/ + ucthesis/ + ulsy/ + umlaute/ + underlin/ + unswthesis/ + utthesis/ + uwthesis/ + vector/ + vrsion/ + wasysym/ + xypic/ + yhmath/ + youngtab/ + +Bugs: + +compare p. 10 of the grfguide (Textures vs. dvips): +Replacement bounding box and clipping do not work in Textures. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/truetex.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/truetex.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..ab7d56449b0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/truetex.txt @@ -0,0 +1,263 @@ + + LaTeX installation instructions for TrueTeX for Windows 95/98/NT + + 19 February 1999 + (Revised 31 August 2001) + +SUMMARY +======= + +This file (truetex.txt) is part of the LaTeX distribution, and contains +instructions on how to install LaTeX with TrueTeX for Windows 95/98/NT. + +Since the TrueTeX distribution includes all of the base LaTeX macros, you +should be installing another LaTeX base distribution only to update the LaTeX +base macros. In fact, you may find it more convenient to simply order and +install the lastest TrueTeX update when you want the latest LaTeX; that way +you can get the freshest TrueTeX *and* LaTeX software with the ease and +security of TrueTeX automatic installation. + +Before reading this file, you should review install.txt from the LaTeX +distribution, which will explain how the LaTeX installation works in general. +TrueTeX introduces very few exceptions to that generic process. + +This file describes the following, specifically for TrueTeX: + + * How to create the LaTeX format. + + * How to install the LaTeX files. + + * What to do if you have any problems. + +REQUIREMENTS +============ + +In addition to the LaTeX distribution files, you will also need the file +"hyphen.tex" (English hyphenation) and the .tfm (TeX font metric) files, which +are included in the TrueTeX distribution and should already be installed. + +CONFIGURING LATEX +================= + +TrueTeX is carefully designed and implemented to bring the widest +compatibility with TeX and LaTeX to the Windows environment. We have included +features like virtual fonts and recursive directory searching that many other +implementations omit. The luxury of Windows virtual memory and the voluptuous +allowances in TrueTeX remove the constraints implied by the old TeX memory +limitations. + +The Unix-style configuration to which the LaTeX distribution defaults is +appropriate and compatible with TrueTeX. TrueTeX does not require any special +configuration to run LaTeX, such as a texsys.cfg file. + +Note that the earlier releases of TrueTeX used the directory \TrueTeX\macros +for both plain TeX and LaTeX base macros. Later releases (4.1D and later) +use the standard TeX directory structure (TDS) directory +\TrueTeX\TeX\LaTeX\base. All of the instructions below assume you are using +the directory \TrueTeX\TeX\LaTeX\base for the LaTeX base macros, and you +should substitute the appropriate directory if you have an older release or a +different starting directory. + +The availability of non-English hyphenation in LaTeX is controlled by a +configuration file hyphen.cfg, which you can create to alter the LaTeX +defaults. Creating such a file is explained elsewhere in the LaTeX +distribution, and in references such as _The LaTeX Companion_. If you want to +configure LaTeX for non-English hyphenation, we suggest that you create a +bi-lingual hyphenation configuration, with language 0 (the default) as +English, which will provide compatibility with the LaTeX documentation files, +which are written in English. + +SAVING YOUR OLD VERSION OF LaTeX +================================ + +There are several techniques for retaining the older version of LaTeX. +Usually, the only compelling reason to do so is to insure against trouble with +a failed installation of the new version. If you are brave and reckless, +you can just wipe the old files and start over with the new distribution. + +However, for the more conservative and cautious, if you're not concerned with +being able to actually run the old version in parallel with the new, then we +recommend you create a zip archive of the old macro and format files and then +delete the unzipped versions. Another easy technique which leaves the old +version readily accessible is to rename a subdirectory of the base directory, +for example renaming \TrueTeX\TeX\LaTeX\base to \TrueTeX\TeX\LaTeX\oldbase or +\TrueTeX\TeX\oldLaTeX\base; then re-creating the \TrueTeX\TeX\LaTeX\base +directory to receive the new installation. + +In either case, once you are satisfied that the new LaTeX is working and +complete, you have already separated the old version and made it easy to +delete. + +UNPACKING THE DISTRIBUTION +========================== + +The LaTeX project authors publish their work as a set of distribution files +named with a .ins ("install") extension. Each such distribution file combines +the macros and documentation for a component of LaTeX. Your first step in +installing LaTeX is to unpack these install-files, thereby creating more +compact versions (having the documentation stripped out). + +The unpacking method is unusual: To unpack the LaTeX distribution files, you +run iniTeX (not LaTeX or plain TeX) on unpack.ins, which has a side effect of +writing out a large set of files that make up the LaTeX macros. The procedure +is as follows, running the TrueTeX formatter as iniTeX: + + * Launch the TrueTeX formatter. Select "Cancel" on the file-open + dialog if that dialog appears. + + * Select "Preload" (which might read "Preload=latex" or some other + preloaded format name) from the menu bar. + + * Observe the "Select Preloaded Format File" dialog. Select "Default" + (which indicates you want no file preloaded) and "OK". The "Preload" + item on the menu bar should now read simply "Preload". + + * Select File + Open, navigate to the directory where you have placed the + LaTeX distribution files, and type in the filename you want to + format, namely unpack.ins in this case. + + * Select "Go" to begin the formatting. The formatter window will close + after it finishes, and you can examine the file unpack.log to examine + the messages that might have scrolled by too quickly for you to read. + + This does not generate a format file; the instructions in the next section + create the LaTeX format file. + +CREATING THE LaTeX FORMAT +========================= + +To create the LaTeX format file (latex.fmt) for TrueTeX, run iniTeX on +latex.ltx. The procedure using TrueTeX is as follows: + + * Follow the steps in the previous section to launch the TrueTeX + formatter and select no preloaded format file; except on the last + step, select latex.ltx as the file in the File Open dialog. This + will generate the format file latex.fmt and close the formatter + window. + + * Move the file latex.fmt to the TrueTeX formats directory. Normally this + is c:\truetex\formats (in TrueTeX releases up to and including 4.1C) or + c:\truetex\truetex (in later releases). The drive and top directory + will be different if you chose to install TrueTeX in a different + directory than the default c:\truetex during TrueTeX installation. + +PUTTING THE FILES WHERE LaTeX CAN READ THEM +=========================================== + +Use the following console commands to copy the LaTeX files (which are now +unpacked) to the appropriate inputs directory for TrueTeX (you may want to +paste the following lines into a batch file and run them that way instead of +typing them yourself): + + copy latexbug.tex \TrueTeX\TeX\LaTeX\base + copy testpage.tex \TrueTeX\TeX\LaTeX\base + copy lablst.tex \TrueTeX\TeX\LaTeX\base + copy idx.tex \TrueTeX\TeX\LaTeX\base + copy nfssfont.tex \TrueTeX\TeX\LaTeX\base + copy small2e.tex \TrueTeX\TeX\LaTeX\base + copy sample2e.tex \TrueTeX\TeX\LaTeX\base + copy docstrip.tex \TrueTeX\TeX\LaTeX\base + copy *.cls \TrueTeX\TeX\LaTeX\base + copy *.clo \TrueTeX\TeX\LaTeX\base + copy *.sty \TrueTeX\TeX\LaTeX\base + copy *.fd \TrueTeX\TeX\LaTeX\base + copy *.def \TrueTeX\TeX\LaTeX\base + copy *.cfg \TrueTeX\TeX\LaTeX\base + copy *.ist \TrueTeX\TeX\LaTeX\base + + Note: the LaTeX base directory is \truetex\macros instead of + \TrueTeX\TeX\LaTeX\base in TrueTeX releases 4.1C and earlier. + +CHECKING THAT THE INSTALLATION WORKED +===================================== + +You now have a new working LaTeX installed. If you had a LaTeX icon +specifying "&latex" in the command-line as an option, it should automatically +use the new LaTeX. You should also be able to select the preloaded format +latex.fmt using the Preload item in the formatter menu by selecting the Search +button. + +Launch LaTeX and format the file ltxcheck.tex from the LaTeX distribution. +This will produce some `OK' and the following `BAD' warnings, which you can +ignore: + + "article.cls appears to be in current directory! ... ! BAD: This file + should not be run in a `standard input directory'." + + EXPLANATION: If article.cls is not in the current directory (that is, the + directory where you navigated to open ltxcheck.lts) this can be a false + alarm, due to the fact that LaTeX is not aware that the TrueTeX formatter + (release 4.1C or earlier) did path-searching for input files, even if when + file names indicated the current directory. This lack of awareness does + not affect normal operation of LaTeX. If you are running release 4.1D or + later of the formatter, you should not see this message, unless article.cls + is indeed in the current directory. If you really want to know where the + formatter is finding the file article.cls, select "Debug+Show File Opens" + and run the format of ltxcheck.ltx again. + + "! BAD: No ec fonts found!! ... LaTeX does not require the use of ec + fonts however they are strongly recommended." + + - or - + + "! BAD dc fonts 1.2 or older installed. + Current (as of 1997/01/14) dc font release is 1.3. + These dc fonts may be obtained from CTAN archives, in: + tex-archive/fonts/dc. + They are expected to be replaced by ec fonts very soon." + + EXPLANATION: TrueTeX does not supply the dc fonts release 1.2 or the ec + fonts, although a dc fonts release 1.1 is available. Regrettably, the + later releases of the METAFONT bitmap fonts were re-designed such that the + font name is used to indicate the font's optical scaling, which is an + irrational scheme generally incompatible with scalable font technology such + as is used in TrueType or ATM. (Later releases multiplied optical sizes to + the point that lately there are over 500 EC fonts, which is an impossible + amount of effort to convert to scalable form or to reliably install in + Windows.) If you want to use the TrueTeX dc fonts release 1.1, run the + olddc.ins through initex and move the resulting files to the TrueTeX inputs + directory. + + "The LaTeX2e installation has installed fd files for release 1.2 (or + later) of the dc fonts. However, you appear to have only release 1.1 of + these fonts. You must now generate the correct fd files by running: + latex olddc.ins and then rebuild the format by rerunning: initex + latex.ltx ... ! BAD LaTeX2e system!!." + + EXPLANATION: You no doubt forgot to run olddc.ins through iniTeX before + generating the LaTeX format file. + + "The fd files for the obsolete release 1.1 of the + dc fonts have been loaded into the LaTeX format. + However, you appear to have at least release 1.2 of the dc fonts. + You should generate suitable fd files by running ..." + + EXPLANATION: You probably have the DC 1.2 metric files (*.tfm's, which is + all ltxcheck.ltx is looking for) from some other source. But you won't + have the actual TrueType fonts (not from TrueTeX, anyway; they don't exist, + at least not yet). Leave the selection of the release 1.1 names in place; + *don't* take the advice to "generate suitable fd files". + +PROBLEMS +======== + +If you get error messages regarding missing fonts lcircle10 and lcirclew10, +use the Winodws 95/98/NT console to copy the 8-character names to the longer +names: + + cd \truetex\fonts + copy lcircle1.tfm lcircle10.tfm + copy lcirclw1.tfm lcirclew10.tfm + +You may report additional problems installing LaTeX with TrueTeX to the +publisher's e-mail address given in the "About" dialog of either the TrueTeX +formatter or previewer, which as of this writing is: kinch@truetex.com. + +CLEARING UP +=========== + +Consult the install.txt instructions for removing unneeded LaTeX distribution +files. + + --- Copyright 1997, 1999 Richard J Kinch and the LaTeX3 project --- + --- All rights reserved. --- diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/usrguide.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/usrguide.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..96be0c5a97e --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/usrguide.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/usrguide.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/usrguide.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..c07585982ab --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/usrguide.tex @@ -0,0 +1,1810 @@ +% \iffalse meta-comment +% +% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 +% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere +% in this file. +% +% This file is part of the LaTeX base system. +% ------------------------------------------- +% +% It may be distributed and/or modified under the +% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 +% of this license or (at your option) any later version. +% The latest version of this license is in +% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +% version 2003/12/01 or later. +% +% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". +% +% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is +% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional +% information. +% +% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution +% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with +% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. +% +% \fi +% Filename: usrguide.tex + +\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/12/01] + +\documentclass{ltxguide}[2001/05/28] + +\title{\LaTeXe~for authors} + +\author{\copyright~Copyright 1995--2001, \LaTeX3 Project Team.\\ + All rights reserved.} + +\date{31 July 2001} + + +\begin{document} + +\maketitle + +\tableofcontents + +\section{Introduction} + +Welcome to \LaTeXe, the new standard version of the \LaTeX{} Document +Preparation System. + +This document describes how to take advantage of the new features of +\LaTeX, and how to process your old \LaTeX{} documents with +\LaTeXe. However, this document is only a brief introduction to the +new facilities and is intended for authors who are already familiar +with the old version of \LaTeX{}. It is \emph{not} a reference manual +for \LaTeXe{} nor is it a complete introduction to \LaTeX. + +\subsection{\LaTeXe---The new \LaTeX~release} + +The previous version of \LaTeX{} was known as \LaTeX~2.09. Over the +years many extensions have been developed for \LaTeX. This is, of +course, a sure sign of its continuing popularity but it has had one +unfortunate result: incompatible \LaTeX{} formats came into use at +different sites. This included `standard \LaTeX~2.09', \LaTeX{} built +with the \emph{New Font Selection Scheme}~(\NFSS), \SLiTeX, \AmSLaTeX, +and so on. Thus, to process documents from various places, a site +maintainer was forced to keep multiple versions of the \LaTeX{} +program. In addition, when looking at a source file it was not always +clear for which format the document was written. + +To put an end to this unsatisfactory situation, \LaTeXe{} has been +produced; it brings all such extensions back under a single format and +thus prevents the proliferation of mutually incompatible dialects of +\LaTeX~2.09. With \LaTeXe{} the `new font selection scheme' is +standard and, for example, \textsf{amsmath} (formerly the \AmSLaTeX{} +format) or \textsf{slides} (formerly the \SLiTeX{} format) are simply +extensions, which may be loaded by documents using the same base format. + +The introduction of a new release also made it possible to add a small +number of often-requested features and to make the task of writing +packages and classes simpler. + +\subsection{\LaTeX3---The long-term future of \LaTeX} +\label{Sec:ltx3} + +\LaTeXe{} is the consolidation step in a comprehensive +reimplementation of the \LaTeX{} system. The next major release of +\LaTeX{} will be \LaTeX3, which will include a radical overhaul of the +document designers' and package writers' interface to \LaTeX. + +\LaTeX3 is a long-term research project but, until it is completed, +the project team are committed to the active maintenance of \LaTeXe{}. +Thus the experience gained from the production and maintenance of +\LaTeXe{} will be a major influence on the design of \LaTeX3. +A brief description of the project can be found in the document +|ltx3info.tex|. + +If you would like to support the project then you are welcome to send +donations to the \LaTeX3 Project Fund; this has been set up to help +the research team by financing various expenses associated with this +voluntary work of maintaining the current \LaTeX{} and developing +\LaTeX3. + +The fund is administered by The \TeX{} Users Group and by various +local user groups. Information about making donations and joining +these groups is available from: +\begin{quote}\small\label{addrs} + \TeX{} Users Group, P.O. Box 1239, Three Rivers, CA~93271-1239, USA\\ + Fax:~+1~209~561~4584 \ Email: \texttt{tug@mail.tug.org} + + UK TUG, 1 Eymore Close, Selly Oak, Birmingham B29~4LB, UK\\ + Fax: +44 121 476 2159 \ Email: \texttt{uktug-enquiries@tex.ac.uk} +\end{quote} + +The \LaTeX3{} project has its home page +on the World Wide Web at: +\begin{verbatim} + http://www.latex-project.org/ +\end{verbatim} +This page describes \LaTeX{} and the \LaTeX3 project, and contains +pointers to other \LaTeX{} resources, such as the user guides, the +\TeX{} Frequently Asked Questions, and the \LaTeX{} bugs database. + +Older articles covering aspects of the \LaTeX3 project are also +available for anonymous ftp from the Comprehensive \TeX{} Archive, in +the directory: +\begin{verbatim} + tex-archive/info/ltx3pub +\end{verbatim} +The file |ltx3pub.bib| in that directory contains an abstract of each +of the files. + +\subsection{Overview} + +This document contains an overview of the new structure and features +of \LaTeX. It is \emph{not} a self-contained document, as it contains +only the features of \LaTeX{} which have changed since version 2.09. +You should read this document in conjunction with an introduction to +\LaTeX{}. + +\begin{description} + +\item[Section~\ref{Sec:class+packages}] + contains an overview of the new structure of + \LaTeX{} documents. It describes how classes and packages work and + how class and package options can be used. It lists the standard + packages and classes which come with \LaTeX. + +\item[Section~\ref{Sec:commands}] describes the new commands available + to authors in \LaTeXe. + +\item[Section~\ref{Sec:209}] shows how to process old \LaTeX{} + documents with \LaTeXe. + +\item[Section~\ref{Sec:problems}] contains advice on dealing with + problems you may encounter in running \LaTeXe. + It lists some error messages which are new in \LaTeXe{} and + it describes some of the more common problems and how to cure them, + or where to find further information. + +\end{description} + +\subsection{Further information} + +For a general introduction to \LaTeX, including the new features of +\LaTeXe, you should read \emph{\LaTeXbook} +by Leslie Lamport~\cite{A-W:LLa94}. + +A more detailed description of the new features of \LaTeX, including +an overview of more than 150 packages, is to be found in +\emph{\LaTeXcomp} by Michel Goossens, Frank Mittelbach and Alexander +Samarin~\cite{A-W:GMS94}. + +Packages and programs for producing and manipulating graphics are +discussed at length in \emph{\LaTeXGcomp} by Michel Goossens, +Sebastian Rahtz and Frank Mittelbach~\cite{A-W:GRM97}. + +Solutions for publishing with \LaTeX{} on the World Wide Web are given +in \emph{\LaTeXWcomp} by Michel Goossens and Sebastian +Rahtz~\cite{A-W:GR99}. + +For more information about the many new \LaTeX{} packages you should +read the package documentation, which should be available from the +same source as your copy of \LaTeX. + +There are a number of documentation files which accompany every copy +of \LaTeX. A copy of \emph{\LaTeX{} News} will come out with each +six-monthly release of \LaTeX; it will be found in the files +|ltnews*.tex|. The class- and package-writer's guide \emph{\clsguide} +describes the new \LaTeX{} features for writers of document classes +and packages; it is in |clsguide.tex|. The guide \emph{\fntguide} +describes the \LaTeX{} font selection scheme for class- and +package-writers; it is in |fntguide.tex|. Support for cyrillic languages +in \LaTeX{} is described in \emph{\cyrguide}. + +We are gradually turning the source code for \LaTeX{} into a \LaTeX{} +document \emph{\sourcecode}. This document includes an index of +\LaTeX{} commands and can be typeset from |source2e.tex|. + +For more information about \TeX{} and \LaTeX, please contact your +local \TeX{} Users Group, or the international \TeX{} Users Group (see +page \pageref{addrs}). + + +\section{Classes and packages} +\label{Sec:class+packages} + +This section describes the new structure of \LaTeX{} documents and the +new types of file: \emph{classes} and \emph{packages}. + +\subsection{What are classes and packages?} + +The main difference between \LaTeX~2.09 and \LaTeXe{} is in the +commands before |\begin{document}|. + +In \LaTeX~2.09, documents had \emph{styles}, +such as \textsf{article} or \textsf{book}, and \emph{options}, +such as \textsf{twoside} or \textsf{epsfig}. +These were indicated by the |\documentstyle| command: +\begin{quote} + |\documentstyle|\oarg{options}\arg{style} +\end{quote} +For example, to specify a two-sided article with encapsulated +PostScript figures, you said: +\begin{verbatim} + \documentstyle[twoside,epsfig]{article} +\end{verbatim} +However, there were two different types of document style option: +\emph{built-in options} such as |twoside|; and \emph{packages} such as +|epsfig.sty|. These were very different, since any \LaTeX{} document +style could use the \textsf{epsfig} package but only document styles +which declared the \textsf{twoside} option could use that option. + +To avoid this confusion, \LaTeXe{} differentiates between built-in +options and packages. These are given by the new |\documentclass| and +|\usepackage| commands: +\begin{quote} + |\documentclass|\oarg{options}\arg{class} \\ + |\usepackage|\oarg{options}\arg{packages} +\end{quote} +For example, to specify a two-sided article with encapsulated +PostScript figures, you now write: +\begin{verbatim} + \documentclass[twoside]{article} + \usepackage{epsfig} +\end{verbatim} +You can load more than one package with a single |\usepackage| +command; for example, rather than writing: +\begin{verbatim} + \usepackage{epsfig} + \usepackage{multicol} +\end{verbatim} +you can specify: +\begin{verbatim} + \usepackage{epsfig,multicol} +\end{verbatim} +Note that \LaTeXe{} still understands the \LaTeX~2.09 |\documentstyle| +command. This command causes \LaTeXe{} to enter \emph{\LaTeX~2.09 +compatibility mode}, which is described in Section~\ref{Sec:209}. + +You should not, however, use the |\documentstyle| command for new +documents because this compatibility mode is very slow and the new +features of \LaTeXe{} are not available in this mode. + +To help differentiate between classes and packages, document classes +now end with |.cls| rather than |.sty|. Packages still end with +|.sty|, since most \LaTeX~2.09 packages work well with \LaTeXe. + +\subsection{Class and package options} + +In \LaTeX~2.09, only document styles could have options such as +|twoside| or |draft|. In \LaTeXe{}, both classes and packages are +allowed to have options. For example, to specify a two-sided article +with graphics using the |dvips| driver, you write: + +\begin{verbatim} + \documentclass[twoside]{article} + \usepackage[dvips]{graphics} +\end{verbatim} +It is possible for packages to share common options. For example, +you could, in addition, load the \textsf{color} package by specifying: +\begin{verbatim} + \documentclass[twoside]{article} + \usepackage[dvips]{graphics} + \usepackage[dvips]{color} +\end{verbatim} +But because |\usepackage| allows more than one package to be listed, +this can be shortened to: +\begin{verbatim} + \documentclass[twoside]{article} + \usepackage[dvips]{graphics,color} +\end{verbatim} +In addition, packages will also use each option given to +the |\documentclass| command (if they know what to do with it), so you +could also write: +\begin{verbatim} + \documentclass[twoside,dvips]{article} + \usepackage{graphics,color} +\end{verbatim} +Class and package options are covered in more detail in +\emph{\LaTeXcomp} and in \emph{\clsguide}. + +\subsection{Standard classes} + +The following classes are distributed with \LaTeX: +\begin{description} + +\item[article] The |article| class described in \emph{\LaTeXbook}. +\item[book] The |book| class described in \emph{\LaTeXbook}. +\item[report] The |report| class described in \emph{\LaTeXbook}. +\item[letter] The |letter| class described in \emph{\LaTeXbook}. +\item[slides] The |slides| class described in \emph{\LaTeXbook}, + formerly \SLiTeX. +\item[proc] A document class for proceedings, based on |article|. + Formerly the |proc| package. +\item[ltxdoc] The document class for documenting the \LaTeX{} + program, based on |article|. +\item[ltxguide] The document class for \emph{\usrguide} and + \emph{\clsguide}, based on |article|. The document you are reading + now uses the |ltxguide| class. The layout for this class is likely + to change in future releases of \LaTeX. +\item[ltnews] The document class for the \emph{\LaTeX{} News} + information sheet, based on |article|. The layout for this class + is likely to change in future releases of \LaTeX. +\item[minimal] +\NEWfeature{1995/12/01} + This class is the bare minimum (3 lines) that is needed in a + \LaTeX\ class file. It just sets the text width and height, and + defines |\normalsize|. It is principally intended for debugging + and testing \LaTeX\ code in situations where you do not need to + load a `full' class such as |article|. If, however, you are + designing a completely new class that is aimed for documents with + structure radically different from the structure supplied by the + article class, then it may make sense to use this as a base and add + to it code implementing the required structure, rather than + starting from |article| and modifying the code there. +\end{description} + +\subsection{Standard packages} +\label{Sec:st-pack} + +The following packages are distributed with \LaTeX: +\begin{description} +\item[alltt] +\NEWfeature{1994/12/01} + This package provides the |alltt| environment, which is like + the |verbatim| environment except that |\|, |{|, and |}| + have their usual meanings. It is described in |alltt.dtx| and + \emph{\LaTeXbook}. +\item[doc] This is the basic package for typesetting the documentation + of \LaTeX{} programs. It is described in |doc.dtx| and in + \emph{\LaTeXcomp}. +\item[exscale] This provides scaled versions of the math extension + font. It is described in |exscale.dtx| and \emph{\LaTeXcomp}. + \item[fontenc] This is used to specify which font encoding \LaTeX{} + should use. It is described in |ltoutenc.dtx|. +\item[graphpap] +\NEWfeature{1994/12/01} + This package defines the |\graphpaper| command; this + can be used in a |picture| environment. +\item[ifthen] Provides commands of the form `if\dots then do\dots + otherwise do\dots'. + It is described in |ifthen.dtx| and \emph{\LaTeXcomp}. +\item[inputenc] +\NEWfeature{1994/12/01} + This is used to specify which input encoding \LaTeX{} should use. + It is described in |inputenc.dtx|. +\item[latexsym] \LaTeXe{} no longer loads the \LaTeX{} symbol font by + default. To access it, you should use the |latexsym| package. It + is described in |latexsym.dtx| and in \emph{\LaTeXcomp}; see also + Section~\ref{Sec:problems}. + \item[makeidx] This provides commands for producing indexes. It is + described in \emph{\LaTeXbook} and in \emph{\LaTeXcomp}. + \item[newlfont] This is used to emulate the font commands of + \LaTeX~2.09 with the New Font Selection Scheme. It is described in + \emph{\LaTeXcomp}. + \item[oldlfont] This is used to emulate the font commands of + \LaTeX~2.09. It is described in \emph{\LaTeXcomp}. + \item[showidx] + This causes the argument of each |\index| command to + be printed on the page where it occurs. + It is described in \emph{\LaTeXbook}. + \item[syntonly] This is used to process a document without + typesetting it. It is described in |syntonly.dtx| and in + \emph{\LaTeXcomp}. + \item[tracefnt] This allows you to control how much information about + \LaTeX's font loading is displayed. It is described in + \emph{\LaTeXcomp}. +\end{description} + +\subsection{Related software} + +\NEWdescription{1998/12/01} +The following software should be available from the same distributor +as your copy of \LaTeXe. You should obtain at least the +\textsf{graphics} and \textsf{tools} collections in order to have all +the files described in \emph{\LaTeXbook}. The |amsmath| package (part +of \textsf{amslatex} and formerly known as |amstex|) +and \textsf{babel} are also mentioned in the list +of `standard packages' in section C.5.2 of that book. +\begin{description} +\item[amslatex] Advanced mathematical typesetting from the American + Mathematical Society. This includes the |amsmath| package; it + provides many commands for typesetting mathematical formulas of + higher complexity. It is produced and supported by the American + Mathematical Society and it is described in \emph{\LaTeXcomp}. +\item[babel] This package and related files support typesetting in + many languages. It is described in \emph{\LaTeXcomp}. +\item[cyrillic] +\NEWfeature{1998/12/01} + Everything you need (except the fonts themselves) for + typesetting with Cyrillic fonts. +\item[graphics] This includes the |graphics| package which + provides support for the inclusion and transformation of graphics, + including files produced by other software. Also included, is the + |color| package which provides support for typesetting in colour. + Both these packages are described in \emph{\LaTeXbook}. +\item[psnfss] Everything you need (except the fonts themselves) for + typesetting with a large range of Type~1 (PostScript) fonts. +\item[tools] Miscellaneous packages written by the \LaTeX3 + project team. +\end{description} +These packages come with documentation and each of them is also +described in at least one of the books \emph{\LaTeXcomp} and +\emph{\LaTeXbook}. + +\subsubsection{Tools} + +This collection of packages includes, at least, the following (some +files may have slightly different names on certain systems): + +\begin{description} +\item[array] + Extended versions of the environments |array|, |tabular| + and |tabular*|, with many extra features. +\item[calc] +\NEWfeature{1996/12/01} + Enables the use of certain algebraic notation when specifying + values for lengths and counters. +\item[dcolumn] + Alignment on `decimal points' in tabular entries. Requires the + |array| package. +\item[delarray] + Adds `large delimiters' around arrays. Requires |array|. +\item[hhline] + Finer control over horizontal rules in tables. Requires |array|. +\item[longtable] + Multi-page tables. (Does not require |array|, but it uses the + extended features if both are loaded.) +\item[tabularx] + Defines a |tabularx| environment that is similar to |tabular*| + but it modifies the column widths, rather than the inter-column + space, to achieve the desired table width. +\item[afterpage] + Place text after the current page. +\item[bm] + Access bold math symbols. +\item[enumerate] + Extended version of the |enumerate| environment. +\item[fontsmpl] + Package and test file for producing `font samples'. +\item[ftnright] + Place all footnotes in the right-hand column in two-column mode. +\item[indentfirst] + Indent the first paragraph of sections, etc. +\item[layout] + Show the page layout defined by the current document class. +\item[multicol] + Typeset text in columns, with the length of the columns + `balanced'. +\item[rawfonts] + Preload fonts using the old internal font names of \LaTeX~2.09. + See Section~\ref{Sec:oldinternals}. +\item[somedefs] + Selective handling of package options. (Used by the rawfonts + package.) +\item[showkeys] + Prints the `keys' used by |\label|, |\ref|, |\cite| etc.; useful + whilst drafting. +\item[theorem] + Flexible declaration of `theorem-like' environments. +\item[varioref] + `Smart' handling of page references. +\item[verbatim] + Flexible extension of the verbatim environment. +\item[xr] + Cross reference other `external' documents. +\item[xspace] + `Smart space' command that helps you to avoid the common mistake + of missing spaces after command names. +\end{description} + + +\section{Commands} +\label{Sec:commands} + +This section describes the new commands available in \LaTeXe. +They are covered in more detail in \emph{\LaTeXbook} and in +\emph{\LaTeXcomp}. + +\subsection{Initial commands} + +Initial commands can appear only before the |\documentclass| +line. + +\begin{decl} +|\begin{filecontents}| \arg{file-name} \\ + \m{file-contents} \\ +|\end{filecontents}| +\end{decl} + +The |filecontents| environment is intended for bundling within a +single document file the contents of packages, options, or other +files. When the document file is run through \LaTeXe{} the body of +this environment is written verbatim (preceded by a comment line) to a +file whose name is given as the environment's only argument. However, +if that file already exists then nothing happens except for an +information message. + +Only normal ASCII text characters (7-bit visible text) should be +included in a |filecontents| environment. Anything else, such as tab +characters, form-feeds or 8-bit characters, should not be included in a +|filecontents| environment. + +Tabs and form feeds produce a warning, explaining that they are turned +into spaces or blank lines, respectively. +What happens to 8-bit characters depends on the \TeX{} installation and +is in general unpredictable. + +The |filecontents| environment is used for including \LaTeX{} files. +For other plain text files (such as Encapsulated PostScript files), +you should use the |filecontents*| environment which does not add a +comment line. + +These environments are allowed only before |\documentclass|. This +ensures that any packages that have been bundled in the document are +present when needed. + +\subsection{Preamble commands} +\label{Sec:pre} + +The changes to the preamble commands are intentionally designed to make +\LaTeXe{} documents look clearly different from old documents. The +commands should be used only before |\begin{document}|. + +\begin{decl} +|\documentclass| \oarg{option-list} \arg{class-name} + \oarg{release-date} +\end{decl} + +This command replaces the +\LaTeX~2.09 command |\documentstyle|. + +There must be exactly one |\documentclass| command in a document; and +it must come after the |filecontents| environments, if any, but before +any other commands. + +The \m{option-list} is a list of options, each of which may modify the +formatting of elements which are defined in the \m{class-name} file, +as well as those in all following |\usepackage| commands (see +below). + +The optional argument \m{release-date} can be used to specify the +earliest desired release date of the class file; it should contain a +date in the format \textsc{yyyy/mm/dd}. If a version of the class +older than this date is found, a warning is issued. + +For example, to specify a two-column article, using a version of +|article.cls| released after June 1994, you specify: +\begin{verbatim} + \documentclass[twocolumn]{article}[1994/06/01] +\end{verbatim} + +\begin{decl} +|\documentstyle| \oarg{option-list} \arg{class-name} +\end{decl} + +This command is still supported for compatibility with old files. It +is essentially the same as |\documentclass| except that it invokes +\emph{\LaTeX~2.09 compatibility mode}. It also causes any options in +the \m{option-list} that are not processed by the class file to be +loaded as packages after the class has been loaded. See +Section~\ref{Sec:209} for more details on \LaTeX~2.09 compatibility +mode. + +\begin{decl} +|\usepackage| \oarg{option-list} \arg{package-name} \oarg{release-date} +\end{decl} + +Any number of |\usepackage| commands is allowed. Each package file +(as denoted by \m{package-name}) defines new elements (or modifies +those defined in the class file loaded by the \m{class-name} argument +of the |\documentclass| command). A package file thus extends the +range of documents which can be processed. + +The \m{option-list} argument can contain a list of options, each of +which can modify the formatting of elements which are defined in this +\m{package-name} file. + +As above, \m{release-date} can contain the earliest desired release +date of the package file in the format \textsc{yyyy/mm/dd}; if an +older version of the package is found, a warning is issued. + +For example, to load the |graphics| package for the |dvips| driver, +using a version of |graphics.sty| released after June 1994, you write: +\begin{verbatim} + \usepackage[dvips]{graphics}[1994/06/01] +\end{verbatim} +Each package is loaded only once. If the same package is requested +more than once, nothing happens in the second or following attempt +unless the package has been requested with options that were not given +in the original |\usepackage|. If such extra options are specified +then an error message is produced. See Section~\ref{Sec:problems} how +to resolve this problem. + +As well as processing the options given in the \m{option-list} of the +|\usepackage| command, each package processes the +\m{option-list} of the |\documentclass| command as well. This +means that any option which should be processed by every package (to +be precise, by every package that specifies an action for it) can be +specified just once, in the |\documentclass| command, rather than +being repeated for each package that needs it. + +\begin{decl} +|\listfiles| +\end{decl} + +If this command is placed in the preamble then a list of the files +read in (as a result of processing the document) will be displayed +on the terminal (and in the log file) at the end of the run. Where +possible, a short description will also be produced. + +\NEWdescription{1995/12/01} +\emph{Warning}: this command will list only files which were read +using \LaTeX{} commands such as |\input|\arg{file} or +|\include|\arg{file}. If the file was read using the primitive \TeX{} +syntax |\input |\emph{file} (without |{ }| braces around the file name) +then it will not be listed; failure to use the \LaTeX{} form with the +braces can cause more severe problems, possibly leading to overwriting +important files, so \textbf{always put in the braces}. + + +\begin{decl} +|\setcounter{errorcontextlines}| \arg{num} +\end{decl} + +\TeX~3 introduced a new primitive |\errorcontextlines| which controls +the format of error messages. \LaTeXe\ provides an interface to this +through the standard |\setcounter| command. As most \LaTeX\ users do +not want to see the internal definitions of \LaTeX\ commands each time +they make an error, \LaTeXe{} sets this to $-1$ by default. + +\subsection{Document structure} + +The |book| document class introduces new commands to indicate +document structure. +\begin{decl} +|\frontmatter| \\ |\mainmatter| \\ |\backmatter| +\end{decl} +These commands indicate the beginning of the front matter (title page, +table of contents and prefaces), main matter (main text) and back +matter (bibliography, indexes and colophon). + +\subsection{Definitions} + +In \LaTeX, commands can have both mandatory and optional arguments, +for example in: +\begin{verbatim} + \documentclass[11pt]{article} +\end{verbatim} +the |11pt| argument is optional, whereas the |article| class name is +mandatory. + +In \LaTeX~2.09 users could define commands with arguments, but these +had to be mandatory arguments. With \LaTeXe, users can now define +commands and environments which also have one optional argument. + +\begin{decl} +|\newcommand| \arg{cmd} \oarg{num} \oarg{default} \arg{definition} \\ +|\newcommand*| \arg{cmd} \oarg{num} \oarg{default} \arg{definition} \\ +|\renewcommand| \arg{cmd} \oarg{num} \oarg{default} \arg{definition} \\ +|\renewcommand*| \arg{cmd} \oarg{num} \oarg{default} \arg{definition} +\end{decl} + +These commands have a new, second, optional argument; this is used for +defining commands which themselves take one optional argument. This +new argument is best introduced by means of a simple (and hence not +very practical) example: +\begin{verbatim} + \newcommand{\example}[2][YYY]{Mandatory arg: #2; + Optional arg: #1.} +\end{verbatim} +This defines |\example| to be a command with two arguments, referred +to as |#1| and |#2| in the \arg{definition}---nothing new so far. But +by adding a second optional argument to this |\newcommand| (the +|[YYY]|) the first argument (|#1|) of the newly defined command +|\example| is made optional with its default value being |YYY|. + +Thus the usage of |\example| is either: +\begin{verbatim} + \example{BBB} +\end{verbatim} +which prints: +\begin{quote} + Mandatory arg: BBB; + Optional arg: YYY. +\end{quote} +or: +\begin{verbatim} + \example[XXX]{AAA} +\end{verbatim} +which prints: +\begin{quote} + Mandatory arg: AAA; + Optional arg: XXX. +\end{quote} + +The default value of the optional argument is \texttt{YYY}. +This value is specified as the \oarg{default} argument of the +|\newcommand| that created |\example|. + +As another more useful example, the definition: +\begin{verbatim} + \newcommand{\seq}[2][n]{\lbrace #2_{0},\ldots,\,#2_{#1} \rbrace} +\end{verbatim} +means that the input |$\seq{a}$| produces +the formula $\lbrace a_{0},\ldots,\,a_{n} \rbrace$, +whereas the input |$\seq[k]{x}$| produces the formula +$\lbrace x_{0},\ldots,\,x_{k} \rbrace$. + +In summary, the command: +\begin{quote} + |\newcommand| \arg{cmd} \oarg{num} \oarg{default} \arg{definition} +\end{quote} +defines \m{cmd} to be a command with \m{num} arguments, the first of +which is optional and has default value \m{default}. + +Note that there can only be one optional argument but, as before, +there can be up to nine arguments in total. + +\begin{decl} +|\newenvironment| + \arg{cmd} \oarg{num} \oarg{default} \arg{beg-def} \arg{end-def} \\ +|\newenvironment*| + \arg{cmd} \oarg{num} \oarg{default} \arg{beg-def} \arg{end-def} \\ +|\renewenvironment| + \arg{cmd} \oarg{num} \oarg{default} \arg{beg-def} \arg{end-def} \\ +|\renewenvironment*| + \arg{cmd} \oarg{num} \oarg{default} \arg{beg-def} \arg{end-def} +\end{decl} + +\LaTeXe\ also supports the creation of environments that have one +optional argument. Thus the syntax of these two commands has +been extended in the same way as that of |\newcommand|. + +\begin{decl} +|\providecommand| \arg{cmd} \oarg{num} \oarg{default} \arg{definition} \\ +|\providecommand*| \arg{cmd} \oarg{num} \oarg{default} \arg{definition} +\end{decl} + +This takes the same arguments as |\newcommand|. If \m{cmd} is already +defined then the existing definition is kept; but if it is currently +undefined then the effect of |\providecommand| is to define \m{cmd} +just as if |\newcommand| had been used. + +\NEWfeature{1994/12/01} + All the above five `defining commands' now have \texttt{*}-forms that + are usually the better form to use when defining commands with + arguments, unless any of these arguments is intended to contain + whole paragraphs of text. Moreover, if you ever do find yourself + needing to use the non-star form then you should ask whether + that argument would not better be treated as the contents of a + suitably defined environment. + +\NEWfeature{1995/12/01} + The commands produced by the above five `defining commands' are + now robust. + +\subsection{Boxes} + +These next three commands for making LR-boxes all existed in +\LaTeX~2.09. They have been enhanced in two ways. + +\begin{decl} +|\makebox| \oarg{width} \oarg{pos} \arg{text} \\ +|\framebox| \oarg{width} \oarg{pos} \arg{text} \\ +|\savebox| \arg{cmd} \oarg{width} \oarg{pos} \arg{text} +\end{decl} + +One small but far-reaching change for \LaTeXe\ is that, within the +\m{width} argument only, four special lengths can be used. These are +all dimensions of the box that would be produced by using simply +|\mbox|\arg{text}: +\begin{itemize} +\item [] |\height|\quad its height above the baseline; +\item [] |\depth|\quad its depth below the baseline; +\item [] |\totalheight|\quad the sum of |\height| and |\depth|; +\item [] |\width|\quad its width. +\end{itemize} +Thus, to put `hello' in the centre of a box of twice its natural +width, you would use: +\begin{verbatim} + \makebox[2\width]{hello} +\end{verbatim} +Or you could put \textit{f} into a square box, like +this: + \framebox{\makebox[\totalheight]{\itshape f\/}} +\begin{verbatim} + \framebox{\makebox[\totalheight]{\itshape f\/}} +\end{verbatim} +Note that it is the total width of the framed box, including the +frame, which is set to |\totalheight|. + +The other change is a new possibility for \m{pos}: |s| has been added +to |l| and |r|. If \m{pos} is |s| then the text is stretched the full +length of the box, making use of any `rubber lengths' (including any +inter-word spaces) in the contents of the box. If no such `rubber +length' is present, an `underfull box' will probably be produced. + +\begin{decl} +|\parbox| \oarg{pos} \oarg{height} \oarg{inner-pos} \arg{width} + \arg{text} \\ +|\begin{minipage}| + \oarg{pos} \oarg{height} \oarg{inner-pos} \arg{width}\\ +\m{text}\\ +|\end{minipage}| +\end{decl} + +As for the box commands above, |\height|, |\width|, etc.~may be used +in the \oarg{height} argument to denote the natural dimensions of the +box. + +The \m{inner-pos} argument is new in \LaTeXe. It is the vertical +equivalent to the \m{pos} argument for |\makebox|, etc, determining +the position of \m{text} within the box. The \m{inner-pos} may be any +one of |t|, |b|, |c|, or |s|, denoting top, bottom, centered, or +`stretched' alignment respectively. When the \m{inner-pos} argument +is not specified, \LaTeX\ gives it same value as \m{pos} (this could be +the latter's default value). + + +\begin{decl} +|\begin{lrbox}| \arg{cmd}\\ +\m{text}\\ +|\end{lrbox}| +\end{decl} + +This is an environment which does not directly print anything. +Its effect is to save the typeset \m{text} in the bin \m{cmd}. Thus +it is like |\sbox| \arg{cmd} \arg{text}, except that any white space +before or after the contents \m{text} is ignored. + +This is very useful as it enables both the |\verb| command and the +\texttt{verbatim} environment to be used within \m{text}. + +It also makes it possible to define, for example, a `framed box' +environment. This is done by first using this environment to save +some text in a bin \m{cmd} and then calling +|\fbox{\usebox{|\m{cmd}|}}|. + +The following example defines an environment, called |fmpage|, that is +a framed version of |minipage|. +\begin{verbatim} + \newsavebox{\fmbox} + \newenvironment{fmpage}[1] + {\begin{lrbox}{\fmbox}\begin{minipage}{#1}} + {\end{minipage}\end{lrbox}\fbox{\usebox{\fmbox}}} +\end{verbatim} + + +\subsection{Measuring things} + +The first of these next commands was in \LaTeX~2.09. The two new +commands are the obvious analogues. + +\begin{decl} +|\settowidth| \arg{length-cmd} \arg{lr text} \\ +|\settoheight| \arg{length-cmd} \arg{lr text} \\ +|\settodepth| \arg{length-cmd} \arg{lr text} +\end{decl} + +\subsection{Line endings} + +\NEWdescription{1994/12/01} +The command |\\|, which is used to indicate a line-end in various +places, is now a robust command when used within arguments such as +section titles. + +Also, because it is often necessary to distinguish which type of line +is to be ended, we have introduced the following new command; it +has the same argument syntax as that of |\\|. +\begin{decl}[1994/12/01] +|\tabularnewline| \oarg{vertical-space} +\end{decl} +One example of its use is when the text in the last +column of a |tabular| environment is set with |\raggedright|; then +|\tabularnewline| can be used to indicate the end of a row of the +|tabular|, whilst |\\| will indicate the end of a line of text in a +paragraph within the column. This command can be used in the |array| +environment as well as |tabular|, and also the extended versions of +these environments offered by the \textsf{array} and \textsf{longtable} +packages in the tools collection. + +\subsection{Controlling page breaks} + +Sometimes it is necessary, for a final version of a document, to +`help' \LaTeX\ break the pages in the best way. \LaTeX~2.09 had a +variety of commands for this situation: |\clearpage|, |\pagebreak| +etc. \LaTeXe\ provides, in addition, commands which can produce +longer pages as well as shorter ones. + + +\begin{decl} +|\enlargethispage| \arg{size} \\ +|\enlargethispage*| \arg{size} +\end{decl} + +These commands increase the height of a page (from its normal value of +|\textheight|) by the specified amount \m{size}, a rigid length. This +change affects \emph{only} the current page. + +This can be used, for example, to allow an extra line to be fitted +onto the page or, with a negative length, to produce a page +shorter than normal. + +The star form also shrinks any vertical white space on the page as +much as possible, so as to fit the maximum amount of text on the +page. + +\NEWdescription{1995/12/01} +These commands do not change the position of the footer text; thus, if +a page is lengthened too far, the main text may overprint the footer. + +\subsection{Floats} + +There is a new command, |\suppressfloats|, and a new `float +specifier'. These will enable people to gain better +control of \LaTeX's float placement algorithm. + +\begin{decl} +|\suppressfloats| \oarg{placement} +\end{decl} + +This command stops any further floating environments from being placed +on the current page. With an optional argument, which should be either +|t| or |b| (not both), this restriction applies only to putting +further floats at the top or at the bottom. Any floats which would +normally be placed on this page are placed on the next page instead. + +\begin{decl} +The extra float location specifier: \ \texttt{!} +\end{decl} + +This can be used, along with at least one of \texttt{h}, \texttt{t}, +\texttt{b} and \texttt{p}, in the location optional argument of a +float. + +If a \texttt{!} is present then, just for this particular float, +whenever it is processed by the float mechanism the following are +ignored: +\begin{itemize} +\item all restrictions on the number of floats which can appear; +\item all explicit restrictions on the amount of space on a text page +which may be occupied by floats or must be occupied by text. +\end{itemize} +The mechanism will, however, still attempt to ensure that pages are +not overfull and that floats of the same type are printed in the +correct order. + +Note that its presence has no effect on the production of float pages. + +A \texttt{!} specifier overrides the effect of any |\suppressfloats| +command for this particular float. + +\subsection{Font changing: text} + +The font selection scheme used in \LaTeXe{} differs a lot from that +used in \LaTeX~2.09. In this section, we give a brief description of +the new commands. A more detailed description with examples is given +in \emph{\LaTeXcomp}, and the interface for class- and package-writers +is described in \emph{\fntguide}. + +\begin{decl} +|\rmfamily|\\ +|\sffamily|\\ +|\ttfamily|\\ +|\mdseries|\\ +|\bfseries|\\ +|\upshape|\\ +|\itshape|\\ +|\slshape|\\ +|\scshape| +\end{decl} + +These are font commands whose use is the same as the commands |\rm|, +|\bf|, etc. The difference is that each command changes just one +attribute of the font (the attribute changed is part of the name). +One result of this is that, for example, |\bfseries\itshape| produces +both a change of series and a change of shape, to give a bold italic +font. + +\begin{decl} +|\textrm|\arg{text}\\ +|\textsf|\arg{text}\\ +|\texttt|\arg{text}\\ +|\textmd|\arg{text}\\ +|\textbf|\arg{text}\\ +|\textup|\arg{text}\\ +|\textit|\arg{text}\\ +|\textsl|\arg{text}\\ +|\textsc|\arg{text}\\ +|\emph|\arg{text} +\end{decl} + +These are one-argument commands; they take as an argument the +text which is to be typeset in the particular font. They also +automatically insert italic corrections where appropriate; if you do +not like the result, you can add an italic correction with |\/| or +remove it with |\nocorr|. The |\nocorr| should always be the first or +last thing within the \arg{text} argument. + +\subsection{Font changing: math} + +Most of the fonts used within math mode do not need to be explicitly +invoked; but to use letters from a range of fonts, the following +class of commands is provided. + +\begin{decl} +|\mathrm| \arg{letters}\\ +|\mathnormal| \arg{letters}\\ +|\mathcal| \arg{letters}\\ +|\mathbf| \arg{letters}\\ +|\mathsf| \arg{letters}\\ +|\mathtt| \arg{letters}\\ +|\mathit| \arg{letters} +\end{decl} + +These are also one-argument commands which take as an argument the +letters which are to be typeset in the particular font. The argument +is processed in math mode so spaces within it will be ignored. Only +letters, digits and accents have their font changed, for example +|$\mathbf{\tilde A \times 1}$| produces $\mathbf{\tilde A \times 1}$. + +\subsection{Ensuring math mode} + +\begin{decl} +|\ensuremath| \arg{math commands} +\end{decl} + +In \LaTeX~2.09, if you wanted a command to work both in math mode and +in text mode, the suggested method was to define something like: +\begin{verbatim} + \newcommand{\Gp}{\mbox{$G_p$}} +\end{verbatim} +Unfortunately, the |\mbox| stops |\Gp| changing size correctly in (for +instance) subscripts or a fraction. + +In \LaTeXe{} you can define it thus: +\begin{verbatim} + \newcommand{\Gp}{\ensuremath{G_p}} +\end{verbatim} +Now |\Gp| will work correctly in all contexts. + +This is because the |\ensuremath| does nothing, producing simply +|G_p|, when |\Gp| is used within math mode; but it ensures that math +mode is entered (and exited) as required when |\Gp| is used in text +mode. + + +\subsection{Setting text superscripts} + +\begin{decl} +|\textsuperscript| \arg{text} +\end{decl} + +\NEWfeature{1995/06/01} In \LaTeX~2.09 textual superscripts such as +footnote markers were produced by internally entering math mode and +typesetting the number as a math superscript. This normally looked +fine since the digits in math fonts are the same as those in text +fonts when Computer Modern fonts are used. But when a different +document font (such as Times) is selected, the results look rather +strange. For this reason the command |\textsuperscript| has been +introduced which typesets its argument in the current text font, in a +superscript position and in the correct size. + +\subsection{Text commands: all encodings} + +\NEWdescription{1994/12/01} + One of the main differences between \LaTeXe{} and \LaTeX~2.09 is + that \LaTeXe{} can deal with fonts in arbitrary \emph{encodings}. + (A font encoding is the sequence of characters in the font---for + example a Cyrillic font would have a different encoding from a Greek + font.) + + The two major font encodings that are used for Latin languages such + as English or German are |OT1| (Donald Knuth's 7-bit encoding, which + has been used during most of \TeX's lifetime) and |T1| (the new + 8-bit `Cork' encoding). + + \LaTeX~2.09 only supported the |OT1| encoding, whereas \LaTeXe{} has + support for both |OT1| and |T1| built-in. The next section will + cover the new commands which are available if you have |T1|-encoded + fonts. This section describes new commands which are available in + all encodings. + + Most of these commands provide characters which were available in + \LaTeX~2.09 already. For example |\textemdash| gives an `em dash', + which was available in \LaTeX~2.09 by typing |---|. However, some + fonts (for example a Greek font) may not have the |---| ligature, + but you will still be able to access an em dash by typing + |\textemdash|. + +\begin{decl}[1994/12/01] + |\r{<text>}| +\end{decl} + This command gives a `ring' accent, for example `\r{o}' can be typed + |\r{o}|. + +\begin{decl}[1994/12/01] + |\SS| +\end{decl} + This command produces a German `SS', that is a capital `\ss'. This + letter can hyphenate differently from `SS', so is needed for entering + all-caps German. + +\begin{decl}[1994/12/01] + |\textcircled{<text>}| +\end{decl} + This command is used to build `circled characters' such as + |\copyright|. For example |\textcircled{a}| produces + \textcircled{a}. + +\begin{decl}[1994/12/01] + |\textcompwordmark| +\end{decl} + This command is used to separate letters which would normally + ligature. For example `f\textcompwordmark i' is produced with + |f\textcompwordmark i|. Note that the `f' and `i' have not + ligatured to produce `fi'. This is rarely useful in English + (`shelf\textcompwordmark ful' is a rare example of where it might be + used) but is used in languages such as German. + +\begin{decl}[1994/12/01] + |\textvisiblespace| +\end{decl} + This command produces a `visible space' character + `\textvisiblespace'. This is sometimes used in computer listings, + for example `type \textsf{hello\textvisiblespace world}'. + +\begin{decl}[1994/12/01] + |\textemdash| + |\textendash| + |\textexclamdown| + |\textquestiondown| \\ + |\textquotedblleft| + |\textquotedblright| + |\textquoteleft| + |\textquoteright| +\end{decl} + These commands produce characters which would otherwise be + accessed via ligatures: + \begin{center} + \begin{tabular}{ccl} + \emph{ligature} & \emph{character} & \emph{command} \\ + |---| & --- & |\textemdash| \\ + |--| & -- & |\textendash| \\ + |!`| & !` & |\textexclamdown| \\ + |?`| & ?` & |\textquestiondown| \\ + |``| & `` & |\textquotedblleft| \\ + |''| & '' & |\textquotedblright| \\ + |`| & ` & |\textquoteleft| \\ + |'| & ' & |\textquoteright| + \end{tabular} + \end{center} + The reason for making these characters directly accessible is so + that they will work in encodings which do not have these characters. + +\begin{decl}[1994/12/01] + |\textbullet| + |\textperiodcentered| +\end{decl} + These commands allow access to characters which were previously only + available in math mode: + \begin{center} + \begin{tabular}{lcl} + \emph{math command} & \emph{character} & \emph{text command} \\ + |\bullet| & $\bullet$ & |\textbullet| \\ + |\cdot| & $\cdot$ & |\textperiodcentered| + \end{tabular} + \end{center} + +\begin{decl}[1995/12/01] + |\textbackslash| + |\textbar| + |\textless| + |\textgreater| +\end{decl} + These commands allow access to ASCII characters which were + only available in verbatim or math mode: + \begin{center} + \begin{tabular}{lcl} + \emph{math command} & \emph{character} & \emph{text command} \\ + |\backslash| & $\backslash$ & |\textbackslash| \\ + |\mid| & $\mid$ & |\textbar| \\ + |<<| & $<$ & |\textless| \\ + |>>| & $>$ & |\textgreater| + \end{tabular} + \end{center} + +\begin{decl}[1995/12/01] + |\textasciicircum| + |\textasciitilde| +\end{decl} + These commands allow access to ASCII characters which were + previously only available in verbatim: + \begin{center} + \begin{tabular}{cl} + \emph{verbatim} & \emph{text command} \\ + |^| & |\textasciicircum| \\ + |~| & |\textasciitilde| + \end{tabular} + \end{center} + +\begin{decl}[1995/12/01] + |\textregistered| + |\texttrademark| +\end{decl} + These commands provide the `registered trademark' (R) and + `trademark' (TM) symbols. + +\subsection{Text commands: the T1 encoding} + +\NEWdescription{1994/12/01} + The |OT1| font encoding is fine for typesetting in English, but has + problems when typesetting other languages. The |T1| encoding solves + some of these problems, by providing extra characters (such as `eth' + and `thorn'), and it allows words containing accented letters to be + hyphenated (as long as you have a package like |babel| which allows + for non-American hyphenation). + + This section describes the commands you can use if you have the |T1| + fonts. To use them, you need to get the `ec fonts', or the + |T1|-encoded PostScript fonts, as used by \textsf{psnfss}. + All these fonts are + available by anonymous ftp in the Comprehensive \TeX{} Archive, and + are also available on the CD-ROMs \emph{4all \TeX} and + \emph{\TeX{} Live} (both available from the \TeX{} Users Group). + + You can then select the |T1| fonts by saying: +\begin{verbatim} + \usepackage[T1]{fontenc} +\end{verbatim} + This will allow you to use the commands in this section. + + \emph{Note:} Since this document must be processable on any site + running an up-to-date \LaTeX, it does not contain any characters + that are present only in |T1|-encoded fonts. This means that this + document cannot show you what these glyphs look like! If you want + to see them then run \LaTeX{} on the document |fontsmpl| and + respond `|cmr|' when it prompts you for a family name. + +\begin{decl}[1994/12/01] + |\k{<text>}| +\end{decl} + This command produces an `ogonek' accent. + +\begin{decl}[1994/12/01] + |\DH| + |\DJ| + |\NG| + |\TH| + |\dh| + |\dj| + |\ng| + |\th| +\end{decl} + These commands produce characters `eth', `dbar', `eng', and `thorn'. + +\begin{decl}[1994/12/01] + |\guillemotleft| + |\guillemotright| + |\guilsinglleft| + |\guilsinglright| \\ + |\quotedblbase| + |\quotesinglbase| + |\textquotedbl| +\end{decl} + % A local hack (could be improved): + \newcommand{\fauxguillemet}[1]{$\vcenter{\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle#1$}}$} + These commands produce various sorts of quotation mark. + Rough representations of them are: + \fauxguillemet\ll a\fauxguillemet\gg{} + \fauxguillemet<a\fauxguillemet> + ,\kern -0.1em,\kern 0.05em a\kern -0.05em`` + ,\kern 0.05em a\kern -0.05em` and |"|a|"|. + +\NEWdescription{2001/06/01} + There are therefore some extra short-form ligatures available for + use in documents that will only be used with |T1|-encoded fonts. + + The guillemets |\guillemotleft| and |\guillemotright|% + \footnote{We apologise once again for maintaining Adobe's + enormous solipsism~(sic) of confusing a diving bird with + punctuation marks!} + can be obtained by typing |<<<<| and |>>>>| and |\quotedblbase| + by typing |,,|\,. + + Also, unlike the unexpected results with + |OT1|-encoded fonts, |<<| and |>>| will produce \textless{} and + \textgreater{}. + + Note also that the single character |"| will no longer produce '' + but rather |\textquotedbl|. + +\subsection{Logos} + +\begin{decl} +|\LaTeX|\\ +|\LaTeXe| +\end{decl} + +|\LaTeX| (producing `\LaTeX') is still the `main' logo command, +but if you need to refer to the new features, you can write +|\LaTeXe| (producing `\LaTeXe'). + +\subsection{Picture commands} + +\begin{decl} + |\qbezier[<N>](<AX>,<AY>)(<BX>,<BY>)(<CX>,<CY>)| \\ + | \bezier{<N>}(<AX>,<AY>)(<BX>,<BY>)(<CX>,<CY>)| +\end{decl} +The |\qbezier| command can be used in |picture| mode to draw a +quadratic Bezier curve from position |(<AX>,<AY>)| to |(<CX>,<CY>)| with +control point |(<BX>,<BY>)|. The optional argument \m{N} gives the +number of points on the curve. + +For example, the diagram: +\begin{center} + \begin{picture}(50,50) + \thicklines + \qbezier(0,0)(0,50)(50,50) + \qbezier[20](0,0)(50,0)(50,50) + \thinlines + \put(0,0){\line(1,1){50}} + \end{picture} +\end{center} +is drawn with: +\begin{verbatim} + \begin{picture}(50,50) + \thicklines + \qbezier(0,0)(0,50)(50,50) + \qbezier[20](0,0)(50,0)(50,50) + \thinlines + \put(0,0){\line(1,1){50}} + \end{picture} +\end{verbatim} +The |\bezier| command is the same, except that the argument \m{N} is not +optional. It is provided for compatibility with the \LaTeX~2.09 +|bezier| document style option. + +\subsection{Old commands} + +\begin{decl} +|\samepage| +\end{decl} + +The |\samepage| command still exists but is no longer being +maintained. +This is because it only ever worked erratically; it does not +guarantee that there will be no page-breaks within its scope; and +it can cause footnotes and marginals to be wrongly placed. + +We recommend using |\enlargethispage| in conjunction with page-break +commands such as |\newpage| and |\pagebreak| to help control page +breaks. + +\begin{decl} + |\SLiTeX| +\end{decl} +Since \SLiTeX{} no longer exists, the logo is no longer defined in the +\LaTeX{} kernel. A suitable replacement is |\textsc{Sli\TeX}|. The +\SLiTeX{} logo is defined in \LaTeX~2.09 compatibility mode. + +\begin{decl} +|\mho| |\Join| |\Box| |\Diamond| |\leadsto| \\ +|\sqsubset| |\sqsupset| |\lhd| |\unlhd| |\rhd| |\unrhd| +\end{decl} + +These symbols are contained in the \LaTeX{} symbol font, which was +automatically loaded by \LaTeX~2.09. However, \TeX{} has room for +only sixteen math font families; thus many users discovered that they +ran out. Because of this, \LaTeX{} does not load the \LaTeX{} symbol +font unless you use the \textsf{latexsym} package. + +These symbols are also made available, using different fonts, by the +\textsf{amsfonts} package, which also defines a large number of other +symbols. It is supplied by the American Mathematical Society. + +The \textsf{latexsym} package is loaded automatically in \LaTeX~2.09 +compatibility mode. + +\section{\LaTeX~2.09 documents} +\label{Sec:209} + +\LaTeXe{} can process (almost) any \LaTeX~2.09 document, by entering +\emph{\LaTeX~2.09 compatibility mode}. Nothing has changed, you run +\LaTeX{} in the same way you always did, and you will get much the +same results. + +The reason for the `almost' is that some \LaTeX~2.09 packages made use +of low-level unsupported features of \LaTeX. If you discover such a +package, you should find out if it has been updated to work with +\LaTeXe. Most packages will still work with \LaTeXe---the easiest way +to find out whether a package still works is to try it! + +\LaTeX~2.09 compatibility mode is a comprehensive emulation of +\LaTeX~2.09, but at the cost of time. Documents can run up to 50\% +slower in compatibility mode than they did under \LaTeX~2.09. +In addition, many of the new features of \LaTeXe{} are not available in +\LaTeX~2.09 compatibility mode. + +\subsection{Warning} + +\NEWdescription{1995/12/01} +This \emph{\LaTeX~2.09 compatibility mode} is provided solely to allow +you to process 2.09 documents, i.e.~documents that were written (we +hope, a long time ago) for a very old system and therefore could be +processed by using a genuine antique \LaTeX~2.09 system. + +This mode is therefore \emph{not} intended to provide access to the +enhanced features of \LaTeXe{}. Thus it must not be used to process +new documents which masquerade as 2.09 documents (i.e.~they begin with +|\documentstyle|) but which could not be processed using that genuine +antique \LaTeX~2.09 system because they contain some new, +\LaTeXe{}-only, commands or environments. + +To prevent such misuse of the system, and the consequent trouble it +causes when such misleadingly encoded documents are distributed, the +\emph{\LaTeX~2.09 compatibility mode} turns off most of these new +features and commands. Any attempt to use them will give you an error +message and, moreover, many of them simply will not work, whilst +others will produce unpredictable results. +So don't bother sending us any bug reports about such occurences since +they are intentional. + + +\subsection{Font selection problems} +\label{Sec:fsprob} + +When using compatibility mode, it is possible that you will find +problems with font-changing commands in some old documents. These +problems are of two types: + +\begin{itemize} +\item producing error messages; +\item not producing the font changes you expected. +\end{itemize} + +In case of error messages it is possible that the document (or an old +style file used therein) contains references to old internal commands +which are no longer defined, see Section~\ref{Sec:oldinternals} for +more information if this is the case. + +\NEWdescription{1995/12/01} +One example of the unexpected is if you use one of the new style of +math-mode font changing command as follows: +\begin{verbatim} +$ \mathbf{xy} A $ +\end{verbatim} +You may well find that this behaves as if you had put: +\begin{verbatim} +$ \bf {xy} A $ +\end{verbatim} +everything including the $A$ coming out bold. + +\LaTeX~2.09 allowed sites to customize their \LaTeX{} installation, +which resulted in documents producing different results on different +\LaTeX{} installations. \LaTeXe{} no longer allows so much +customization but, for compatibility with old documents, the local +configuration file |latex209.cfg| is loaded every time \LaTeXe{} +enters \LaTeX~2.09 compatibility mode. + +For example, if your site was customized to use the New Font +Selection Scheme (\NFSS) with the |oldlfont| option, then you can +make \LaTeXe{} emulate this by creating a |latex209.cfg| file +containing the commands: +\begin{verbatim} +\ExecuteOptions{oldlfont}\RequirePackage{oldlfont} +\end{verbatim} +Similarly, to emulate \NFSS{} with the |newlfont| option, you can +create a |latex209.cfg| file containing: +\begin{verbatim} +\ExecuteOptions{newlfont}\RequirePackage{newlfont} +\end{verbatim} + + +\subsection{Native mode} +\label{Sec:native} + +To run an old document faster, and use the new features of +\LaTeXe, you should try using \emph{\LaTeXe{} native mode}. +This is done by replacing the command: +\begin{quote} + |\documentstyle[|\m{options}|,|\m{packages}|]|\arg{class} +\end{quote} +with: +\begin{quote} + |\documentclass|\oarg{options}\arg{class} \\ + |\usepackage{latexsym,|\m{packages}|}| +\end{quote} +However, some documents which can be processed in \LaTeX~2.09 +compatibility mode may not work in native mode. Some \LaTeX~2.09 +packages will only work with \LaTeXe{} in 2.09 compatibility mode. +Some documents will cause errors because of \LaTeXe's improved error +detection abilities. + +But most \LaTeX~2.09 documents can be processed by \LaTeXe{}'s native +mode with the above change. Again, the easiest way to find out +whether your documents can be processed in native mode is to try it! + + +\section{Local modifications} +\label{sec:loc} + +\NEWdescription{1995/12/01} +There are two common types of local modifications that can be done +very simply. Do not forget that documents produced using such +modifications will not be usable at other places (such documents are +called `non-portable'). + +One type of modification is the use of personal commands for commonly +used symbols or constructions. These should be put into a package +file (for example, one called \texttt{mymacros.sty}) and loaded by +putting |\usepackage{mymacros}| in the document preamble. + +Another type is a local document class that is very similar to one of +the standard classes but contains some straightforward modifications +such as extra environments, different values for some parameters, etc. +These should be put into a class file; here we shall describe a simple +method of constructing such a file using, as an example, a class +called \textsf{larticle} that is very similar to the \textsf{article} +class. + +\NEWfeature{1995/12/01} +The class file called \texttt{larticle.cls} should (after the +preliminary identification commands) start as follows: +\begin{verbatim} + \LoadClassWithOptions{article} +\end{verbatim} +This command should be followed by whatever additions and changes you +wish to make to the results of reading in the file +\texttt{article.sty}. + +The effect of using the above |\LoadClassWithOptions| command is to +load the standard class file \textsf{article} with whatever options +are asked for by the document. Thus a document using your +\textsf{larticle} class can specify any option that could be specified +when using the standard \textsf{article} class; for example: +\begin{verbatim} + \documentclass[a4paper,twocolumn,dvips]{larticle} +\end{verbatim} + + +\section{Problems} +\label{Sec:problems} + +This section describes some of the things which may go wrong when +using \LaTeXe, and what you can do about it. + +\subsection{New error messages} + +\LaTeXe{} has a number of new error messages. +Please also note that many error messages now produce further helpful +information if you press |h| in response to the error prompt. + +\begin{decl} +|Option clash for package |\m{package}|.| +\end{decl} +The named package has been loaded twice with different options. If +you enter |h| you will be told what the options were, for example, if +your document contained: +\begin{verbatim} + \usepackage[foo]{fred} + \usepackage[baz]{fred} +\end{verbatim} +then you will get the error message: +\begin{verbatim} + Option clash for package fred. +\end{verbatim} +and typing |h| at the |?| prompt will give you: +\begin{verbatim} + The package fred has already been loaded with options: + [foo] + There has now been an attempt to load it with options: + [baz] + Adding the line: + \usepackage[foo,baz]{fred} + to your document may fix this. + Try typing <<return>> to proceed. +\end{verbatim} +The cure is, as suggested, to load the package with both sets of +options. Note that since \LaTeX{} packages can call other packages, +it is possible to get a package option clash without explicitly +requesting the same package twice. + +\begin{decl} + |Command |\m{command}| not provided in base NFSS.| +\end{decl} +The \m{command} is not provided by default in \LaTeXe. This error is +generated by using one of the commands: +\begin{verbatim} + \mho \Join \Box \Diamond \leadsto + \sqsubset \sqsupset \lhd \unlhd \rhd \unrhd +\end{verbatim} +which are now part of the \textsf{latexsym} package. +The cure is to add: +\begin{verbatim} + \usepackage{latexsym} +\end{verbatim} +in the preamble of your document. + +\begin{decl} + |LaTeX2e command <command> in LaTeX 2.09 document.| +\end{decl} +The \m{command} is a \LaTeXe{} command but this is a \LaTeX~2.09 +document. The cure is to replace the command by a \LaTeX~2.09 +command, or to run document in native mode, as described in +Section~\ref{Sec:native}. + +\begin{decl} + |NFSS release 1 command \newmathalphabet found.| +\end{decl} +The command |\newmathalphabet| was used by the New Font Selection +Scheme Release 1 but it has now been replaced by +|\DeclareMathAlphabet|, the use of which is described in +\emph{\fntguide}. + +The best cure is to update the package which contained the +|\newmathalphabet| command. Find out if there is a new release of +the package, or (if you wrote the package yourself) consult +\emph{\fntguide} for the new syntax of font commands. + +If there is no updated version of the package then you can cure this +error by using the \textsf{newlfont} or \textsf{oldlfont} package, +which tells \LaTeX{} which version of |\newmathalphabet| should be +emulated. + +You should use \textsf{oldlfont} if the document selects math fonts with +syntax such as this: +\begin{quote} + |{\cal A}|, etc. +\end{quote} +Use \textsf{newlfont} if the document's syntax is like this: +\begin{quote} + |\cal{A}|, etc. +\end{quote} + + +\begin{decl} + |Text for \verb command ended by end of line.| +\end{decl} +The |\verb| command has been begun but not ended on that line. This +usually means that you have forgotten to put in the end-character of +the |\verb| command. + +\begin{decl} + |Illegal use of \verb command.| +\end{decl} +The |\verb| command has been used inside the argument of another +command. This has never been allowed in \LaTeX{}---often producing +incorrect output without any warning---and so \LaTeXe{} produces +an error message. + +\subsection{Old internal commands} +\label{Sec:oldinternals} + +A number of \LaTeX~2.09 internal commands have been removed, since +their functionality is now provided in a different way. See +\emph{\clsguide} for more details of the new, supported interface for +class and package writers. + +\begin{decl} + |\tenrm| |\elvrm| |\twlrm| \dots\\ + |\tenbf| |\elvbf| |\twlbf| \dots\\ + |\tensf| |\elvsf| |\twlsf| \dots\\ + $\vdots$ +\end{decl} +These commands provided access to the seventy fonts preloaded by +\LaTeX~2.09. In contrast, \LaTeXe{} normally preloads at most +fourteen fonts, which saves a lot of font memory; but a consequence is +that any \LaTeX{} file which used the above commands to directly +access fonts will no longer work. + +Their use will usually produce an error message such as: +\begin{verbatim} + ! Undefined control sequence. + l.5 \tenrm +\end{verbatim} +The cure for this is to update the document to use the new +font-changing commands provided by \LaTeXe; these are described in +\emph{\fntguide}. + +If this is not possible then, as a last resort, you can +use the \textsf{rawfonts} package, which loads the +seventy \LaTeX~2.09 fonts and provides direct access to them using the +old commands. This takes both time and memory. If you do not +wish to load all seventy fonts, you can select some of them by using the +|only| option to \textsf{rawfonts}. For example, to load only |tenrm| +and |tenbf| you write: +\begin{verbatim} + \usepackage[only,tenrm,tenbf]{rawfonts} +\end{verbatim} + +The \textsf{rawfonts} package is distributed as part of the \LaTeX{} +tools software, see Section~\ref{Sec:st-pack}. + +\subsection{Old files} + +One of the more common mistakes in running \LaTeX{} is to read in old +versions of packages instead of the new versions. If you get an +incomprehensible error message from a standard package, make sure you +are loading the most recent version of the package. You can find out +which version of the package has been loaded by looking in the log +file for a line like: +\begin{verbatim} + Package: fred 1994/06/01 v0.01 Fred's package. +\end{verbatim} +You can use the \m{release-date} options to |\documentclass| and +|\usepackage| to make sure that you are getting a suitably recent copy +of the document class or package. This is useful when sending a +document to another site, which may have out-of-date software. + +\subsection{Where to go for more help} + +If you can't find the answer for your problem here, try looking in +\emph{\LaTeXbook} or \emph{\LaTeXcomp}. If you have a problem with +installing \LaTeX, look in the installation guide files which come with +the distribution. + +If this doesn't help, contact your local \LaTeX{} guru or local +\LaTeX{} mailing list. + +If you think you've discovered a bug then please report it! First, +you should find out if the problem is with a third-party package or +class. If the problem is caused by a package or class other than +those listed in Section~\ref{Sec:class+packages} then please report +the problem to the author of the package or class, not to the \LaTeX3 +project team. + +If the bug really is with core \LaTeX{} then you should create a +\emph{short}, \emph{self-contained} document which exhibits the +problem. You should run a \emph{recent} (less than a year old) +version of \LaTeX{} on the file and then run \LaTeX{} on +|latexbug.tex|. This will create an error report which you should +send, together with the sample document and log file, to the +\LaTeX{} bugs address which can be found in the file +|latexbug.tex| or |bugs.txt|. + + +\section{Enjoy!} +\label{Sec:enjoy} + +We certainly hope you will enjoy using the new standard \LaTeX{} but, +if this is not possible, we hope that you will enjoy success and +fulfillment as a result of the documents which it will help you to +create. + +If you find that the contribution of \LaTeX{} to your life is such +that you would like to support the work of the project team, then +please read Section~\ref{Sec:ltx3} and discover practical ways to do +this. + +\begin{thebibliography}{1} + +\bibitem{A-W:GMS94} +Michel Goossens, Frank Mittelbach and Alexander Samarin. +\newblock {\em The {\LaTeX} Companion}. +\newblock Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1994. + + +\bibitem{A-W:GRM97} +Michel Goossens, Sebastian Rahtz and Frank Mittelbach. +\newblock {\em The {\LaTeX} Graphics Companion}. +\newblock Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1997. + + +\bibitem{A-W:GR99} +Michel Goossens and Sebastian Rahtz. +\newblock {\em The {\LaTeX} Web Companion}. +\newblock Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1999. + + +\bibitem{A-W:DEK91} +Donald~E. Knuth. +\newblock {\em The \TeX book}. +\newblock Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1986. +\newblock Revised to cover \TeX3, 1991. + + +\bibitem{A-W:LLa94} +Leslie Lamport. +\newblock {\em {\LaTeX:} A Document Preparation System}. +\newblock Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, second edition, 1994. + +\end{thebibliography} + +\end{document} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/utf8-test.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/utf8-test.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..96d9ec2f322 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/utf8-test.tex @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ +%% +%% This is file `utf8-test.tex', +%% generated with the docstrip utility. +%% +%% The original source files were: +%% +%% utf8ienc.dtx (with options: `test') +%% +%% This is a generated file. +%% +%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 +%% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere +%% in this file. +%% +%% This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system. +%% -------------------------------------------------------------- +%% +%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the +%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 +%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. +%% The latest version of this license is in +%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +%% version 2003/12/01 or later. +%% +%% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". +%% +%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the LaTeX +%% base system. You may however distribute the LaTeX base system without +%% such generated files. +%% +%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is +%% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional +%% information. +%% +%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution +%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with +%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. +\ProvidesFile{utf8-test.tex} + [2004/02/09 v1.1b UTF-8 support for inputenc] + +\documentclass{article} + +\usepackage[latin1,utf8]{inputenc} +\usepackage[T1]{fontenc} +\usepackage{trace} + +\scrollmode % to run past the error below + +\begin{document} + + German umlauts in UTF-8: ^^c3^^a4^^c3^^b6^^c3^^bc %%% ^^c3^^a4^^c3^^b6^^c3^^bc + +\inputencoding{latin1} % switch to latin1 + + German umlauts in UTF-8 but read by latin1 (and will produce one + error since \verb=\textcurrency= is not provided): ^^c3^^a4^^c3^^b6^^c3^^bc + +\inputencoding{utf8} % switch back to utf8 + + German umlauts in UTF-8: ^^c3^^a4^^c3^^b6^^c3^^bc + +Some codes that should produce errors as nothing is set up +for them: ^^c3F ^^e1^^a4^^b6 + +And some that are not legal utf8 sequences: ^^c3X ^^e1XY + +\showoutput +\tracingstats=2 +\stop +\endinput +%% +%% End of file `utf8-test.tex'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/utf8test.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/utf8test.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..2e91578d212 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/utf8test.tex @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ +%% +%% This is file `utf8test.tex', +%% generated with the docstrip utility. +%% +%% The original source files were: +%% +%% utf8ienc.dtx (with options: `test') +%% +%% This is a generated file. +%% +%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 +%% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere +%% in this file. +%% +%% This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system. +%% -------------------------------------------------------------- +%% +%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the +%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 +%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. +%% The latest version of this license is in +%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +%% version 2003/12/01 or later. +%% +%% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". +%% +%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the LaTeX +%% base system. You may however distribute the LaTeX base system without +%% such generated files. +%% +%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is +%% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional +%% information. +%% +%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution +%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with +%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. +\ProvidesFile{utf8-test.tex} + [2004/02/09 v1.1b UTF-8 support for inputenc] + +\documentclass{article} + +\usepackage[latin1,utf8]{inputenc} +\usepackage[T1]{fontenc} +\usepackage{trace} + +\scrollmode % to run past the error below + +\begin{document} + + German umlauts in UTF-8: ^^c3^^a4^^c3^^b6^^c3^^bc %%% ^^c3^^a4^^c3^^b6^^c3^^bc + +\inputencoding{latin1} % switch to latin1 + + German umlauts in UTF-8 but read by latin1 (and will produce one + error since \verb=\textcurrency= is not provided): ^^c3^^a4^^c3^^b6^^c3^^bc + +\inputencoding{utf8} % switch back to utf8 + + German umlauts in UTF-8: ^^c3^^a4^^c3^^b6^^c3^^bc + +Some codes that should produce errors as nothing is set up +for them: ^^c3F ^^e1^^a4^^b6 + +And some that are not legal utf8 sequences: ^^c3X ^^e1XY + +\showoutput +\tracingstats=2 +\stop +\endinput +%% +%% End of file `utf8test.tex'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/vtex.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/vtex.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..64e913ee6dc --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/vtex.txt @@ -0,0 +1,175 @@ + LaTeX installation instructions for VTeX 4.x + + 1996 June 25 + +SUMMARY +======= + +This file contains instructions on how to install LaTeX for +VTeX 4.x. Before reading this file, you may read +install.txt, which will explain how the LaTeX installation works +in general. + +This file describes: + + * How to save any old version of LaTeX. + + * How to configure LaTeX. + + * How to unpack the LaTeX distribution. + + * How to create the LaTeX format. + + * How to install the LaTeX files. + + * What to do if you have any problems. + + * Possible problems with versions earlier than 4.2 + +REQUIREMENTS +============ + +In addition to the LaTeX distribution files, you will also need the +following: + + * Standard VTeX distribution files + + * Customization files for VTeX fonts + TEXSYS.CFG LV1CMR.FD + FONTMATH.CFG LV1CMSS.FD LV1LCMSS.FD + SFONTS.CFG LV1CMTT.FD LV1LCMTT.FD + LV1ENC.DEF + + These files can be obtained from + http://www.micropress-inc.com/latexcfg.zip + +SAVING ANY OLD VERSION OF LaTeX +=============================== + +VTeX allows LaTeX 2.09 and LaTeX 2E to coexist on the same system. +LaTeX 2E is normally installed in the subdirectory VTEX/L2E, while +LaTeX 2.09 is in VTEX/SRC. + + Because of file name conflicts, you have to ensure that: + + when using LaTeX 2E + * The input directory path lists VTEX/L2E before VTEX/SRC + * The format file field is set to "LATEX" + when using LaTeX 2.09 + * The input directory path lists VTEX/SRC before VTEX/L2E + * The format file field is set to "LPLAIN" + +CONFIGURING LATEX +================= + + To configurate LaTeX 2E for use with VTeX, you have to + <1> copy the customization files listed above into the + VTEX/L2E subdirectory, + <2> insert this directory into the input path *prior* to VTEX/SRC + <3> select the LATEX format in the [Run]/[Typeset] dialog. + + If you are using MicroPress' distribution, <1> and <2> are done + automatically. + + +UNPACKING THE DISTRIBUTION +========================== + + If you are using the MicroPress distribution, all unpacking is done + automatically during the installation. + + If you are usign the CTAN distribution, you should unpack the files + manually: + + assuming that VTEX has been installed in C:\VTEX, + * create subdirectory L2E (C:\VTEX\L2E) + * switch to it + * copy all CTAN distribution files there + * copy all MicroPress customization file there + * append C:/VTEX/L2E to the beginning of the input path + using the [Setup]/[Directories] menu item of the shell. + * run + VTEXWS -i unpack.ins (Windows) + or + VTEX3S -i unpack.ins (DOS) + +CREATING THE LaTeX FORMAT +========================= + + If you are using the MicroPress distribution, this is done + automatically. + + To create format files manually, run + (in the C:/VTEX/L2E subdirectory) + + VTEXWS -i -m LATEX.LTX (Windows, Small TeX) + VTEXWB -i -m LATEX.LTX (Windows, Big TeX) + VTEX3S -i -m LATEX.LTX (DOS, Small TeX) + VTEX3B -i -m LATEX.LTX (DOS, Big TeX) + + Notice that you do not need to issue all four commands. The formats + for DOS and Windows are identical; and, unless you are using a 4mb + machine, you should not use Small TeX at all. + + Technical info: + The names of the format files are LATEX.FM2 and LATEX.FM3 + (small and big versions). The "-i" switch runs VTEX in the + IniTeX mode; the "-m" switch forces creation of the LATEX.EMF + file which is used by the editors for syntax hilighting of + LaTeX documents. + + +GETTING A WORKING LaTeX +======================= + + If you followed all the previous steps, you now have a fully working + installation. + +CHECKING THAT THE INSTALLATION WORKED +===================================== + + To insure that the installation worked, you may want to run + + VTEX## &LATEX ltxcheck.tex + (## is WS, WB, 3S, or 3B, as above) + + you should get a complain about missing dc fonts. At this time, VTeX + distribution does not use dc fonts. If you really need them, you can + obtain them from CTAN. + + +PROBLEMS +======== + + If you run into unexpected problems during the installation, + please contact us for assistance. + + +Email : micropress-inc.com +Http : www.micropress-inc.com +Fax : 1 718 575 8038 +Voice : 1 718 575 1816 +Post : MicroPress, Inc. + 6830 Harrow Street + Forest Hills NY 11375 + + +CLEARING UP +=========== + + If you are short on space, you can delete all files with the + extension .dtx after the installation. + +SYSTEM-SPECIFIC SECTIONS +======================== + + Everything above fully applies to all versions of VTeX starting + with 4.00. + + However, some previous versions did not correctly configure or + detect SliTeX fonts (before 4.14) and AmsTeX fonts (before 4.12). + These problems can be solved by updating the customization files. + + +--- Copyright 1996 by MicroPress, Inc. and the LaTeX3 project --- +--- All rights reserved. --- diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/vtexfree.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/vtexfree.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..df66318c271 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/vtexfree.txt @@ -0,0 +1,192 @@ + LaTeX installation instructions for + VTeX/Free, version 7.30 and above + + 2001-09-19 + +SUMMARY +======= + +This file contains instructions on how to install LaTeX for VTeX/Free +version 7.30 and above. In case you are still running an older +version, upgrading to the latest one is heavily recommended. + +This file describes: + + * How to unpack the LaTeX distribution. + + * How to create the LaTeX format. + + * How to install the LaTeX files. + + * What to do if you have any problems. + +The below instructions refer to VTeX/Free for Linux-x86 (VTeX/Lnx) as +well as to VTeX/Free for OS/2 (VTeX/2). Differences are indicated, +where necessary. Paths are always written in Unix style, i.e., using +slashes. + + +REQUIREMENTS +============ + +These installation instructions assume that you have installed the +VTeX/Free system already and want to upgrade LaTeX to a newer version. + + + +SAVING YOUR OLD VERSION OF LaTeX +================================ + +Back up the contents of the directories texmf/source/latex/base and +texmf/tex/latex/base. + + +UNPACKING THE DISTRIBUTION +========================== + +Copy all the files from the CTAN directory macros/latex/base to the +directory texmf/source/latex/base of your VTeX system. + +Open a shell or OS/2 window and make the above directory the current +one. Then unpack the distribution by executing the command: + + vtexlnx -i unpack.ins (Linux) +or + vtex -i unpack.ins (OS/2) + +NB: If you are still using version 7.3x of VTeX/Lnx, the full path of +the vtexlnx executable, usually /usr/local/vtex/bin/vtexlnx, is to be +specified! + + +PUTTING THE FILES WHERE LaTeX CAN READ THEM +=========================================== + +The next step in the installation of LaTeX is to move the files needed +to run the system into the correct directories (folders). + +The following files are to be moved from texmf/source/latex/base to +the LaTeX input directory texmf/tex/latex/base: + + * latexbug.tex, testpage.tex, lablst.tex, idx.tex, nfssfont.tex + small2e.tex, sample2e.tex and docstrip.tex: + + * the file texsys.cfg, if it exists (this depends on your version + of VTeX/Free) + +and any files whose name ends with: + + * .cls document class files, + + * .clo document class options files, + + * .sty package files, + + * .fd, font definition files, + + * .def files of definitions which may be read by LaTeX while + processing documents. + + * .ltx, the files from which the format can be built. + +You should move to the MakeIndex input directory texmf/makeindex +all files whose name ends with: + + * .ist, MakeIndex style files. + +Please, note that any files existing already in the target directories +must be overwritten! + + +CREATING THE LaTeX FORMAT AND CHECKING THAT THE INSTALLATION WORKED +=================================================================== + +See the LaTeX Local Guide, section "Creating the format file"! + + +PROBLEMS +======== + +The installation should proceed smoothly. However, you may get some +errors. + +`File missing': Some of the files from the LaTeX distribution are + missing. There are a number of possible reasons for this: + + * The files really are missing. + You should get the missing files from the same place you got the + rest of the distribution. If you cannot do this then you should + complain to whoever gave you this distribution. + + * The files are present, but in the wrong directory. See the + section above "Putting the files where LaTeX can read them" + + * The files are present, and in the right directory. Check the + path setttings in the main configuration file (vtex.ini or + vtexlnx.rc, resp.). + +`Font missing': Some of the fonts (.tfm and/or .pfb files) required + by LaTeX are missing. As above, either you have not got the + required files, they have been deleted, or TeX is not able to find + them. Check the main configuration file and the files + texmf/vtex/config/pdf.fm and texmf/vtex/config/ps.fm. + + +If you have any problems installing LaTeX, you should: + + * consult the LaTeX Local Guide and the VTeX/Free manual; + + * if this fails, try asking the ntg-vtex mailing list or a general + TeX mailing list. + + +CLEARING UP +=========== + +You may now be wondering what to do with all the remaining files in +the directory texmf/source/latex/base that are not needed to run +LaTeX. This is, of course, a matter of personal taste and +availability of disk space but here is some guidance. + + * The files ltnews<xx>.tex contain the LaTeX newsletters. You should + run the latest one through LaTeX and nove the resulting PDF file to + the directory texmf/doc/latex/base + + * The files with names of the form <xxx>guide.tex contain reference + information covering (amongst other things) those features new to + this version of LaTeX: they are not intended to be either a user + guide or a complete reference for the system. You should run them + through LaTeX and move the resulting PDF files to the directory + texmf/doc/latex/base, thus replacing the previous versions. + + * The files with extension .dtx, together with source2e.tex, + can be used to typeset the documented source code (see texpert.txt + for further information). + + * The files with extension .fdd contain the documented sources for + the font definition files. + + * The file ltx3info.tex contains information about the LaTeX3 project + and how you can support it. + + * The files with extension .txt contain information about (amongst + other things) copyright, installation, patches and bug-reports; and + those with extension .err contain errata lists for various + publications: see 00readme.txt for further details. + + * The file ltxcheck.tex is used to test the format; therefore you + should keep it if you expect to remake the format before getting + the next full distribution. + + * The files with extension .ins are used to unpack the code from the + .dtx and .fdd files. + + * We recommend that you keep, in the formats directory vtex/fmt, the + transcript file that was produced whilst creating the format; this + file is named latex.log. + + + + --- Copyright 2001 Walter Schmidt and the LaTeX3 project --- + + --- All rights reserved. --- diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/web2ctex.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/web2ctex.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..f92b4165bb7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/web2ctex.txt @@ -0,0 +1,185 @@ + + LaTeX installation instructions for web2c Unix TeX + + 3 June 97 + + +SUMMARY +======= + +This file contains instructions on how to install LaTeX for web2c Unix +TeX. Before reading this file, you should read install.txt, which +will explain how the LaTeX installation works. + +This file describes: + + * Preliminary actions that ease the installation process. + + * How to save any old version of LaTeX. + + * How to unpack the LaTeX distribution. + + * How to create the LaTeX format. + + * How to install the LaTeX files. + + +ESTABLISH DIRECTORY PATHS +========================= + +It helps to set some environment variables to the paths needed by +LaTeX prior to the installation procedure. Also it helps to write the +assignments into a file, which can be saved and used any number of +times. Here is a sample .profile file (for the Bourne sh or a +derivative, see later for csh format), and the command that would use +it. + +# Paths file for installing LaTeX2e. See web2ctex.txt +# 2 June 97 + +LATEXINPUTS=/usr/lib/texmf/texmf/tex/latex/base ; export LATEXINPUTS +LATEXFORMATS=/usr/lib/texmf/texmf/web2c ; export LATEXFORMATS +LATEXBIN=/usr/lib/texmf/bin/i586-linux ; export LATEXBIN +LATEXDIST=/home/Current-Install/latex2e/base ; export LATEXDIST +INDEXSTYLE=/usr/lib/texmf/texmf/makeindex ; export INDEXSTYLE + + source ./.profile + + +You can identify each of these paths by using the find command to look +for one of the files specified in each section below. For example, +LATEXINPUTS can be identified with the following commands. + + cd /usr + find . -name article.sty -print + + +The $LATEXINPUTS directory is where the LaTeX packages and classes are +kept. This is on the TEXINPUTS path. This directory contains the +files: article.sty, report.cls, lablst.tex and ltxguide.cls. + +For csh or a derivative use the command form below, otherwise use the +form shown above in the sample file content above. + + setenv LATEXINPUTS /usr/local/lib/tex/inputs/latex + + +The $LATEXFORMATS directory is where the LaTeX format is kept. This +is on the TEXFORMATS path. This directory contains the files: +latex.fmt, tex.fmt and mf.base. + + +The $LATEXBIN directory is where the LaTeX binary is kept. This is on +the PATH path. This directory contains the files: virtex, kpsetool +and dvips. Note that the required directory is the one actually +containing these files, not one with soft links (i.e., ffff -> gggg) +to these files; look in the directories to be sure. The command + which latex +will give the wrong directory if a soft link is in use. + + +The $LATEXDIST directory is where the LaTeX distribution is kept. +This is normally NOT on a path. This directory contains the files +that you have just acquired and wish to install. + + +The $INDEXSTYLE directory is where the makeindex program looks for its +style files. This directory contains the files with suffix .ist which +can be found with + find . -name *.ist -print + + +SAVING ANY OLD VERSION OF LATEX +=============================== + +If you have a copy of LaTeX 2.09, you may wish to save it before +installing LaTeX2e. + +To begin with, you should save the LaTeX format. + + cd $LATEXFORMATS + mv latex.fmt latex209.fmt + +Then you should save the LaTeX inputs. This will depend on whether +your LaTeX inputs are kept in the same directory as all the other +inputs. If they are, then: + + cd $LATEXINPUTS + mkdir ../latex209 + cp *.sty ../latex209 + +If they are not, and are kept in a separate directory, or if you are +not sure, then: + + cd $LATEXINPUTS + mkdir ../latex209 + cp * ../latex209 + +Finally, you can create a shell script to run the old latex, for +example: + + #!/bin/sh + TEXINPUTS=${LATEX209INPUTS:- \ + .:/usr/local/lib/tex/inputs/latex209:$TEXINPUTS} + export TEXINPUTS + virtex \&latex209 $* + + +UNPACKING THE DISTRIBUTION +========================== + +To unpack the LaTeX distribution, you should: + + cd $LATEXDIST + initex unpack.ins + +This may take 5 or 10 minutes to unpack. + + +CREATING THE LATEX FORMAT +========================= + +To create the LaTeX format, you should: + + initex latex.ltx + +This will create a file latex.fmt. You should install this with: + + mv latex.fmt $LATEXFORMATS + +If you had a latex binary before, it will now pick up the new +format. Otherwise, you should say: + + cd $LATEXBIN + ln virtex latex + + +PUTTING THE FILES WHERE LATEX CAN READ THEM +=========================================== + +To install the LaTeX files, you should: + + cd $LATEXDIST + mv latexbug.tex testpage.tex lablst.tex idx.tex nfssfont.tex \ + small2e.tex sample2e.tex docstrip.tex \ + *.cls *.clo *.sty *.fd *.def *.cfg \ + $LATEXINPUTS + mv *.ist $INDEXSTYLE + +You have now installed LaTeX! + + +CHECKING THAT THE INSTALLATION WORKED +===================================== + +To check that the installation worked, you should: + + cd $LATEXDIST + latex ltxcheck + +This will perform a number of tests, which should all report `OK'. + + +--- Contributed by: David Outteridge <DOUTTERIDGE@bendata.com> +--- Copyright 1997 by David Outteridge and the LaTeX3 project. --- +--- All rights reserved. --- diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/webcomp.err b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/webcomp.err new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..64c885df7c1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/webcomp.err @@ -0,0 +1,300 @@ +\newcommand\erratafiledate{1999/06/05} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% To produce a printed version of this errata file run this file through +% LaTeX. It will unpack a small class file (if not already present) and +% a configuration file with the extension .cfg. You might want to modify +% the setting in this configuration file to print only a partial errata +% suitable for your printed revision of this book, see details in the +% .cfg file. +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + + +\begin{filecontents}{errata.cls} +% Copyright (C) 1997, Frank Mittelbach + +\ProvidesClass{errata} + [1997/12/31 v0.6b Mini class for errata files subject to change (FMi)] + +\LoadClass{article} + +\setcounter{secnumdepth}{-1} +\addtolength\textwidth{5cm} +\addtolength\oddsidemargin{-3cm} + +\addtolength\textheight{36pt} + +\RequirePackage{shortvrb} +\MakeShortVerb{\|} + +\RequirePackage{array,longtable} +\RequirePackage{multicol} + + +\newcommand\erratagetnumber{} +\def\erratagetnumber#1/#2/#3\erratagetnumber{#1#2#3} + + +\newcommand\gobbleerrata{% + \setbox\@tempboxa\vbox\bgroup + \let\endgobble\egroup + \let\hideamp\relax + \let\\\relax\let\par\@@par} + +\newcommand*\hideamp{&} + +\let\endgobble\relax + + +\newcommand\erratastartdate{} +\newcommand\myprinting{} + + +\newcommand\doweprint[2]{% + \ifnum \myprinting < \if!#2!1000 \else#2 \fi + \ifnum \expandafter\erratagetnumber\erratastartdate\erratagetnumber < + \erratagetnumber#1\erratagetnumber \relax + \@tempswatrue + \else + \@tempswafalse + \fi + \else + \@tempswafalse + \fi +} + + + +\newcommand\includedentries{entries after = \erratastartdate} +\newcommand\printedentries{between \erratastartdate\space and} + +\newcommand\showallerrors{% + \renewcommand\includedentries{all errata entries}% + \renewcommand\printedentries{up to} + \renewcommand\doweprint[2]{\@tempswatrue}} + + +\newcommand\displayrevisionfix[2]{% + \if!#2!\textbf{#1}\else\textit{#1}\rlap{\textsuperscript{#2}}\fi} + +\newcommand\norevisionnumbers{% + \renewcommand\displayrevisionfix[2]{\textbf{##1}}} + +\IfFileExists{\jobname.cfg} + { + \input{\jobname.cfg} + \typeout{***************************************************} + \typeout{*} + \typeout{* Configuration file for \jobname.err found } + \typeout{*} + \typeout{* If you wish to generate an errata listing} + \typeout{* containing only errors found after a certain revision} + \typeout{* and/or only errors found after a certain date} + \typeout{* modify the information stored in \jobname.cfg} + \typeout{*} + \typeout{* Current settings are:} + \typeout{*} + \typeout{* \@spaces printing of your book = \myprinting} + \typeout{* \@spaces include \includedentries} + \typeout{*} + \typeout{***************************************************} + } + {} + +%% \erroronpage <page> <line info> <contributor> <date> <fixed in revision> + +\newcommand\erroronpage[5]{% + \endgobble + \doweprint{#4}{#5}% + \if@tempswa + \typeout{Typesetting entry #1 #2 #3 #4}% + \else + \typeout{Ignoring entry #1 #2 #3 #4}% + \expandafter\gobbleerrata + \fi + \hideamp \\% + \displayrevisionfix{#1}{#5} + \hideamp #2 \hideamp (\textsf{#3}) \hideamp +} + +\newcommand\CHAPTER[1]{\endgobble + &\\[4pt]% + \multicolumn{4}{l}{\framebox[10cm][l]{\textbf{\normalsize\strut#1}}} \\} + +\newenvironment{erratalist} + {\begin{longtable}{r>{\raggedright}p{2cm}l>{\raggedright}p{10cm}l}} + {\endgobble\end{longtable}} + +\newcommand\erratatitle[2] + {\begin{center}\LARGE\bfseries + Errata list for #1\\[5pt](\myprinting.\ printing)\\[10pt] + \large Includes all entries found \printedentries\space #2 + \end{center}% + \markright{Errata for #1 (\printedentries\space #2)}% + \thispagestyle{plain}% + \vspace{20pt}} + +\pagestyle{myheadings} + +\AtBeginDocument{\small} + +\setlength\parindent{0pt} +\setlength\parskip{2pt} + +\newcommand\contributor[2]{\makebox[1cm][l]{\sffamily#1} #2\par} + +% some special shortcuts overwriting existing commands: + +\let\u\underline +\renewcommand\>{$\to$} + +\end{filecontents} + + +\begin{filecontents}{\jobname.cfg} +% +% +% Configuration file for the errata listing of +% +% The LaTeX Web Companion +% +% +% \erratastartdate +% +% Specifies the date from which on +% errata entries should be listed. +% +% The format is YYYY/MM/DD. +% +% The default below ensures that all +% entries are typeset. +% +\renewcommand\erratastartdate{1999/05/01} + +% +% \myprinting +% +% Specifies which (revised) printing you +% own. For example, if you have the second +% printing set this to 2 so that errors +% already corrected in that printing will not +% appear in your errata listing. +% +% The default below ensures that all +% entries are typeset. +% +\renewcommand\myprinting{1} +% +% +% \norevisionnumbers +% +% Specifies that all page numbers in the errata are shown in the same +% format (bold face) irregardless of whether or not they are fixed +% in some revision. The default is to print corrected errors in +% italic and add the revision number as a superscript. +% +% +% \showallerrors +% +% With this command you tell the program that all errata entries are +% supposed to be generated. This makes \myprinting and +% \erratastartdate basically obsolete so this isn't turned on by +% default. +% +% +\endinput +\end{filecontents} + + + +\documentclass{errata} + + +\begin{document} + +\erratatitle{The \LaTeX{} Web Companion}{\erratafiledate} + + +\begin{verbatim} +@book(A-W:GR99, + author = {Michel Goossens and Sebastian Rahtz}, + title = {The {\LaTeX} Web Companion}, + substitle = {Integrating {\TeX}, HTML, and XML}, + series = "Tools and Techniques for Computer Typesetting", + publisher = {Addison-Wesley}, + address = {Reading, Massachusetts}, + year = 1999, + ISBN = "0-201-43311-7", + LCCN = "QA76.76.H94G66 1999", + pagenums = {xxii + 522}, + source-infos = {yes}, + bibliography = {yes}, + index = {yes}, + price = "US\$39.95", + note = "With Eitan M. Gurari and Ross Moore and Robert S. + Sutor.", +) +\end{verbatim} + +\begin{list}{}{\setlength\leftmargin{0cm}\setlength\rightmargin{5cm}} +\item[] +The latest version of this file (\texttt{\jobname.err}) can be found +as part of the \LaTeX{} distribution. + +The first column in the table shows the page number of the errata +entry. Superscript numbers in the first column refer to the printed +revision in which this entry was corrected. The second column gives +the precise location, negative line numbers are counted from the +bottom of the page. The third column shows the first finder of the +problem. + +\end{list} + + +\begin{erratalist} + +%======================================================================= +\CHAPTER{Chapter 6} + +\erroronpage{247}{3 para l.5}{MGo}{1999/06/05}{} + GenCod \> GenCode + +\CHAPTER{Appendix B} + +\erroronpage{418}{3 para}{MGo}{1999/06/05}{} + The \texttt{book} element types (lines 10--\u{15}) + +\end{erratalist} + + + +%========================================================================== + +\bigskip + + +\begin{multicols}{3}[Thanks to all who have found errors or + omissions. Listed are the people who found an errata entry first.] +\contributor{MGo}{Michel Goossens} +\end{multicols} + + +If you find further errors please report them to one of the authors +\begin{quote}\ttfamily + sebastian.rahtz@oucs.ox.ac.uk\\ + goossens@cern.ch +\end{quote} +preferable in a form usable for this file, i.e., +\begin{flushleft} +|\erroronpage{|\textit{page-number}|}{|\textit{line-identification}|}{|% + \textit{your-initials}|}{|\textit{date}|}{}| \\ + \hspace*{2em}\textit{description of the the errata} +\end{flushleft} +Here is an example: +\begin{verbatim} +\erroronpage{4}{l.-7}{PMcJ}{1998/06/11}{} + surprisingly \> surprising +\end{verbatim} + + +\end{document} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/webcompg.err b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/webcompg.err new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..58220dd7bdc --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/webcompg.err @@ -0,0 +1,392 @@ +\newcommand\erratafiledate{2000/07/30} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% To produce a printed version of this errata file run this file through +% LaTeX. It will unpack a small class file (if not already present) and +% a configuration file with the extension .cfg. You might want to modify +% the setting in this configuration file to print only a partial errata +% suitable for your printed revision of this book, see details in the +% .cfg file. +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + + +\begin{filecontents}{errata.cls} +% Copyright (C) 1997, Frank Mittelbach + +\ProvidesClass{errata} + [1997/12/31 v0.6b Mini class for errata files subject to change (FMi)] + +\LoadClass{article} + +\setcounter{secnumdepth}{-1} +\addtolength\textwidth{5cm} +\addtolength\oddsidemargin{-3cm} + +\addtolength\textheight{36pt} + +\RequirePackage{shortvrb} +\MakeShortVerb{\|} + +\RequirePackage{array,longtable} +\RequirePackage{multicol} + + +\newcommand\erratagetnumber{} +\def\erratagetnumber#1/#2/#3\erratagetnumber{#1#2#3} + + +\newcommand\gobbleerrata{% + \setbox\@tempboxa\vbox\bgroup + \let\endgobble\egroup + \let\hideamp\relax + \let\\\relax\let\par\@@par} + +\newcommand*\hideamp{&} + +\let\endgobble\relax + + +\newcommand\erratastartdate{} +\newcommand\myprinting{} + + +\newcommand\doweprint[2]{% + \ifnum \myprinting < \if!#2!1000 \else#2 \fi + \ifnum \expandafter\erratagetnumber\erratastartdate\erratagetnumber < + \erratagetnumber#1\erratagetnumber \relax + \@tempswatrue + \else + \@tempswafalse + \fi + \else + \@tempswafalse + \fi +} + + + +\newcommand\includedentries{entries after = \erratastartdate} +\newcommand\printedentries{between \erratastartdate\space and} + +\newcommand\showallerrors{% + \renewcommand\includedentries{all errata entries}% + \renewcommand\printedentries{up to} + \renewcommand\doweprint[2]{\@tempswatrue}} + + +\newcommand\displayrevisionfix[2]{% + \if!#2!\textbf{#1}\else\textit{#1}\rlap{\textsuperscript{#2}}\fi} + +\newcommand\norevisionnumbers{% + \renewcommand\displayrevisionfix[2]{\textbf{##1}}} + +\IfFileExists{\jobname.cfg} + { + \input{\jobname.cfg} + \typeout{***************************************************} + \typeout{*} + \typeout{* Configuration file for \jobname.err found } + \typeout{*} + \typeout{* If you wish to generate an errata listing} + \typeout{* containing only errors found after a certain revision} + \typeout{* and/or only errors found after a certain date} + \typeout{* modify the information stored in \jobname.cfg} + \typeout{*} + \typeout{* Current settings are:} + \typeout{*} + \typeout{* \@spaces printing of your book = \myprinting} + \typeout{* \@spaces include \includedentries} + \typeout{*} + \typeout{***************************************************} + } + {} + +%% \erroronpage <page> <line info> <contributor> <date> <fixed in revision> + +\newcommand\erroronpage[5]{% + \endgobble + \doweprint{#4}{#5}% + \if@tempswa + \typeout{Typesetting entry #1 #2 #3 #4}% + \else + \typeout{Ignoring entry #1 #2 #3 #4}% + \expandafter\gobbleerrata + \fi + \hideamp \\% + \displayrevisionfix{#1}{#5} + \hideamp #2 \hideamp (\textsf{#3}) \hideamp +} + +\newcommand\CHAPTER[1]{\endgobble + &\\[4pt]% + \multicolumn{4}{l}{\framebox[10cm][l]{\textbf{\normalsize\strut#1}}} \\} + +\newenvironment{erratalist} + {\begin{longtable}{r>{\raggedright}p{2cm}l>{\raggedright}p{10cm}l}} + {\endgobble\end{longtable}} + +\newcommand\erratatitle[2] + {\begin{center}\LARGE\bfseries + Errata list for #1\\[5pt](\myprinting.\ printing)\\[10pt] + \large Includes all entries found \printedentries\space #2 + \end{center}% + \markright{Errata for #1 (\printedentries\space #2)}% + \thispagestyle{plain}% + \vspace{20pt}} + +\pagestyle{myheadings} + +\AtBeginDocument{\small} + +\setlength\parindent{0pt} +\setlength\parskip{2pt} + +\newcommand\contributor[2]{\makebox[1cm][l]{\sffamily#1} #2\par} + +% some special shortcuts overwriting existing commands: + +\let\u\underline +\renewcommand\>{$\to$} + +\end{filecontents} + + +\begin{filecontents}{\jobname.cfg} +% +% +% Configuration file for the errata listing of +% +% Mit LaTeX ins Web +% +% +% \erratastartdate +% +% Specifies the date from which on errata entries should be listed. +% +% The format is YYYY/MM/DD. +% +% The default below ensures that all entries are typeset. +% + +\renewcommand\erratastartdate{2000/05/01} + + +% +% \myprinting +% +% Specifies which (revised) printing you own. Currently there is +% only the first printing. +% +% + +\renewcommand\myprinting{1} + +% +% \norevisionnumbers +% +% Specifies that all page numbers in the errata are shown in the same +% format (bold face) irregardless of whether or not they are fixed +% in some revision. The default is to print corrected errors in +% italic and add the revision number as a superscript. Since the +% Handbuch no revision we turn this feature off. + +\norevisionnumbers + +% +% \showallerrors +% +% With this command you tell the program that all errata entries are +% supposed to be generated. This makes \myprinting and +% \erratastartdate basically obsolete so this isn't turned on by +% default. +% +% +\endinput +\end{filecontents} + +\providecommand{\BibTeX}{% + B\kern-.05em{\scshape i\kern-.025emb}\kern-.08em\TeX} +\providecommand{\MakeIndex}{\textit{MakeIndex}} + +\documentclass[ngerman,a4paper]{errata} +\usepackage{ngerman} + +\begin{document} + +\erratatitle{Mit \LaTeX{} ins Web}{\erratafiledate} + + +\begin{verbatim} +@book{A-W:GoossensRahtz2000, + author = "Michel Goossens and Sebastian Rahtz", + title = "Mit \LaTeX{} ins Web", + publisher = Addison-Wesley, + address = {M"unchen: Boston: San Francisco}, + year = 2000, + pagenums = {577 + 26}, + bibliography = {yes}, + index = {yes}, + isbn = {3-8273-1629-4} + } +\end{verbatim} + + +\begin{list}{}{\setlength\leftmargin{0cm}\setlength\rightmargin{5cm}} +\item[] +Die jeweils letzte Version dieser Datei (\texttt{\jobname.err}) ist Teil der +\LaTeX-Verteilung. + +Die erste Spalte der Tabelle enth"alt die Seitenzahl des Fehlereintrags. +Die zweite Spalte gibt den genauen Ort an; negative Zeilennummern sind vom +Seitenende gerechnet. +In der dritten Spalte steht der Entdecker des Fehlers. +\end{list} + +\begin{erratalist} + +\CHAPTER{Vorwort} + +\erroronpage{xvii}{Aufz"ahlung, erster Punkt}{MSc}{2000/06/15}{} + Adobe Acrobat-Format \> Adobe-Acrobat-Format + +\erroronpage{xix}{erster Absatz, vorletzte Zeile}{MSc}{2000/06/15}{} + das ein oder andere \> das eine oder andere + +\erroronpage{xxiii}{zweite Zeile}{MSc}{2000/05/09}{} + \texttt{webcomp.err} \> \texttt{webcompg.err} + +\CHAPTER{Zur deutschen Ausgabe} + +\erroronpage{xxv}{zweiter Absatz, neunte Zeile}{FMi}{2000/07/27}{} + Latex-Begleiter \> \LaTeX-Begleiter + +\CHAPTER{Das Web, seine Dokumente und \LaTeX} + +\erroronpage{9}{Vierter Absatz, letzte Zeile}{CBe}{2000/06/08}{} + mithIlfe \> mithilfe + +\erroronpage{10}{letzte Zeile}{CBe}{2000/06/08}{} + mithIlfe \> mithilfe + +\erroronpage{13}{zweiter Absatz, f"unfte Zeile}{CBe}{2000/06/08}{} + mithIlfe \> mithilfe + +\erroronpage{13}{zweiter Absatz, siebte Zeile}{CBe}{2000/06/08}{} + mithIlfe \> mithilfe + +\erroronpage{16}{zweiter Absatz, vierte Zeile}{CBe}{2000/06/08}{} + mithIlfe \> mithilfe + +\erroronpage{18}{dritter Absatz, vorletzte Zeile}{CBe}{2000/06/08}{} + MithIlfe \> Mithilfe + +\erroronpage{18}{vorletzte und letzte Zeile}{CBe}{2000/06/08}{} + mithIlfe \> mithilfe + +\erroronpage{19}{Abbildung 1.6}{MSc}{2000/05/09}{} + "Ubersetzung fehlt + +\CHAPTER{Portable Document Format} + +\CHAPTER{Der \LaTeX2HTML-"Ubersetzer} + +\CHAPTER{Konvertierung von \LaTeX{} in HTML mit \TeX4ht} + +\CHAPTER{Direkte Darstellung von \LaTeX{} im Web} + +\erroronpage{220}{zweiter Absatz, vorletzte und letzte Zeile}{MSc}{2000/06/15}{} + \TeX{} und \LaTeX-Markup."< \> \TeX- und \LaTeX-Markups."< + +\CHAPTER{HTML, SGML und XML: Drei Auszeichnungssprachen} + +\erroronpage{276}{Punkt 7}{MSc}{2000/06/15}{} + XML solle schnell \> XML sollte schnell + +\CHAPTER{CSS, DSSSL und XSL: Schreiben mit Stil} + +\erroronpage{368}{Abbildung 7.10}{MSc}{2000/05/09}{} + N"achter Freitag \> N"achster Freitag + +\CHAPTER{MathML -- intelligentes Formel-Markup} + +\CHAPTER{Beispieldateien} + +\CHAPTER{Technische Anh"ange} + +\CHAPTER{Fragen der Internationalisierung} + +\erroronpage{514}{Tabellen\-"uber\-schrift~C.1}{MSc}{2000/06/15}{} + Table \> Tabelle + +\erroronpage{515}{Tabellen\-"uber\-schrift~C.1}{MSc}{2000/06/15}{} + Table \> Tabelle + +\erroronpage{516}{Tabellen\-"uber\-schrift~C.1}{MSc}{2000/06/15}{} + Table \> Tabelle + +\erroronpage{517}{Tabellen\-"uber\-schrift~C.1}{MSc}{2000/06/15}{} + Table \> Tabelle + +\erroronpage{518}{Tabellen\-"uber\-schrift~C.1}{MSc}{2000/06/15}{} + Table \> Tabelle + +\erroronpage{518}{Tabellen\-"uber\-schrift~C.2}{MSc}{2000/06/15}{} + Table \> Tabelle + +\erroronpage{519}{Tabellen\-"uber\-schrift~C.2}{MSc}{2000/06/15}{} + Table \> Tabelle + +\erroronpage{520}{Tabellen\-"uber\-schrift~C.2}{MSc}{2000/06/15}{} + Table \> Tabelle + +\erroronpage{521}{Tabellen\-"uber\-schrift~C.2}{MSc}{2000/06/15}{} + Table \> Tabelle + +\erroronpage{521}{Tabellen\-"uber\-schrift~C.3}{MSc}{2000/06/15}{} + Table \> Tabelle + +\erroronpage{522}{Tabellen\-"uber\-schrift~C.3}{MSc}{2000/06/15}{} + Table \> Tabelle + +\erroronpage{526}{letzte Zeile der Abbildung}{MSc}{2000/06/15}{} + Multilinguale \> Mehrsprachige + +\CHAPTER{Glossar} + +\CHAPTER{URL-Verzeichnis} + +\CHAPTER{Literaturverzeichnis} + +\CHAPTER{Index} + +\end{erratalist} + + +\begin{multicols}{3}[Dank an alle, die Fehler oder Auslassungen + gefunden haben. Aufgef"uhrt sind die Entdecker der Fehler.] +\contributor{FMi}{Frank Mittelbach} +\contributor{MSc}{Martin Schr"oder} +\contributor{Cbe}{Claas Beckmann} +\end{multicols} + +Viele andere haben mir Korrekturen f"ur schon bekannte Fehler +geschickt. Vielen Dank an euch alle! + +Wenn Sie noch mehr Fehler finden, schicken Sie bitte eine Notiz an +\begin{quote}\ttfamily + webcompg@oneiros.de +\end{quote} +am besten in einer Form, die in diese Datei eingebaut werden kann, +d.\,h. +\begin{flushleft} +|\erroronpage{|\textit{Seitenzahl-Nummer}|}{|\textit{Zeile-Position}|}{|% + \textit{Ihr-K"urzel}|}{|\textit{Datum}|}{}| \\ + \hspace*{2em}\textit{Beschreibung des Druckfehlers} +\end{flushleft} +Ein Beispiel: +\begin{verbatim} +\erroronpage{xxv}{zweiter Absatz, neunte Zeile}{FMi}{2000/07/27}{} + Latex-Begleiter \> \LaTeX-Begleiter +\end{verbatim} + +\end{document} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/yandytex.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/yandytex.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..1f7c88402c0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/base/yandytex.txt @@ -0,0 +1,181 @@ + + LaTeX installation instructions for Y&Y TeX + + 1996 January 1 + +SUMMARY +======= + +This file contains instructions for installing LaTeX 2e for Y&Y TeX. +It describes: + + * How to install LaTeX 2e from the diskette that comes with Y&Y TeX. + + * How to unpack a new LaTeX distribution obtained from CTAN. + + * How to check the LaTeX installation. + + * What to do if you have any problems. + +INITIAL INSTALLATION OF LaTaX 2e: +================================= + +The Y&Y TeX System comes with a LaTeX 2e diskette that includes an +installation batch file. Included is the LaTeX 2e `format' file as +well as the class files. Just type + + a:install (or b:install) + +with the LaTeX 2e diskette in the diskette drive after installing Y&Y TeX +itself. This will put the files in the standard places. Type a:install -? +to see how you can control where the files are installed. + +The Y&Y TeX System also includes a second diskette with LaTeX 2e packages, +which you can install in toto using the batch file on that diskette. +Alternatively, just unzip the files for individual packages as needed. + +REFRESHING YOUR INSTALLATION OF LaTeX 2e: +======================================== + +If you do at some later time want to refresh your LaTeX 2e installation +using the latest files from CTAN, do the following: + +Find the directory on your machine with the LaTeX 2e files --- in the +standard installation this would be c:\yandytex\latex2e. + +(i) Make this `LaTeX 2e directory' the current directory. + +(ii) FTP the files in directory tex-archive/macros/latex2e/base on CTAN + and put them into your `LaTeX 2e directory' (overwriting older + versions of the files in the process). + +(iii) Run TeX on `unpack.ins.' That is, type `tex unpack.ins.' + This will create around 230 files (in perhaps five minutes or so). + +(iv) Now run ini-TeX on `latex.ltx.' That is, type `tex -i latex.ltx'. + +(v) Finally, move the new `latex.fmt' file to the TEXFORMATS directory --- + in the standard installation this would be c:\yandytex\fmt. + +* You now have an up-to-date LaTeX 2e installation! + +You can, if you prefer, call TeX on `unpack.ins' and ini-TeX on `latex.ltx' +directly from the `TeX Menu' in DVIWindo. But then: + +(i) If you use a common working directory for your DVI files, first disable + this by removing the check mark on the `Working Directory' menu item. + This is to make sure files written by TeX and ini-TeX go right back into + the `LaTeX 2e' directory, rather than into the common working directory. + +(ii) You may need to temporarily change the TEXINPUTS environment variable + (in the [Environment] section of `dviwindo.ini' in the Windows directory) + so that it lists the directory with your LaTeX 2e files first. Otherwise + you run the risk of getting complaints about old versions of files like + `docstrip.tex' being picked up from other directories. + +Note: if you have an old installation this may not work correctly because +the ini-TeX call has some LaTeX 2e names hard-wired in, and these names have +changed. In this case call ini-TeX directly from the DOS prompt as above. + +SOME OTHER HANDY TIPS: +====================== + +Creation of the LaTeX 2e format by ini-TeX requires a hyphenation file. For +English, use the file `hyphen.tex' supplied with the system (in the `LaTeX' +directory, which is typically c:\yandytex\latex). If ini-TeX complains that +it can't find `hyphen.tex,' either make sure that it is in one of the +directories listed in TEXINPUTS, or copy it to the `LaTeX 2e' directory. +(By the way, for multilingual use consider the `babel' package). + +It us useful to create `format specific' TEXINPUTS environment variables. +This is handy when you regularly used several different TeX `formats' +(for example, when you need to run both LaTeX 2.09 and LaTeX 2e for some +reason). Use variables named PLAIN, LPLAIN, and LATEX for plain TeX, LaTeX +2.09, and LaTeX 2e respectively (These go into the [Environment] section +of the `dviwindo.ini' file in your Windows directory). + +Note that in the semicolon-separated list specified for TEXINPUTS (or format +specific variable as described above), you can add \ or \\ to the end of a +directory name in order to get one level or recursive directory searching +respectively. This can be convenient if you have many TeX source files in a +hierarchical directory structure, as for example, the LaTeX 2e packages. + +ADDING LaTeX 2e TO AN OLDER INSTALLATION: +========================================= + +Proceed as above, but make sure to add the `LaTeX 2e' directory to the +list of directores in the TEXINPUTS environment variable. For example, + + TEXINPUTS=c:\yandytex\latex2e;c:\packages\psnfss;c:\texinput + +or create an environment variable called LATEX for this purpose (see above). + +Also, create a new `TeX Menu' entry for LaTeX 2e by holding down the +`Control' key and selecting `LaTeX 2.09' from the `TeX Menu.' Edit the +`Menu Item Name' field to read `LaTeX 2e|F7' (or whatever `hot key' +you want to use), and edit the `Application Call Pattern' to read + + tex &latex @.tex + +(in Windows NT, use + or ^& instead of &). Then click `Add.' + +CHECKING THAT THE INSTALLATION WORKED +===================================== + +To check that the installation worked, run the new LaTeX 2e on the file +`ltxcheck.tex'. You can do this from DVIWindo's `TeX Menu.' Simply select +`LaTeX 2e,' and navigate to `c:\yandytex\latex2e\ltxcheck.tex' (or wherever +you placed your LaTeX 2e source files) in the `Open File' dialog. + +It is highly recommended that you run this test before going on! +The test file will check some basic features of your TeX setup and +either say they are OK or complain and say they are BAD. + +After this, you may also wish to process `usrguide.tex' and print the +result, unless you have already done so (and perhaps `fntguide.tex'). +Also note that LaTeX 2e `packages' each come with their own documentation +(which is likely to be more up to date than `The LaTeX Companion'). + +PROBLEMS +======== + +If you have a very old Y&Y TeX System, then it may be set up for the LaTeX 2e +beta test file names. In this case run ini-TeX from the DOS command line. + +If you have other problems with the LaTeX installation, see the `PROBLEMS' +section in `install.txt'. + +If `ltxcheck' produces a `BAD' message, you will typically be able to +figure out from the message what is wrong. For example, you may not +have the environment variable TEXINPUTS set up to include the new +LaTeX 2e files. If it is not obvious what caused the `BAD' message, +then please consult the section on `ltxcheck' in `texpert.txt'. + +WARNING: When using fonts other than Computer Modern, look out for + font naming problems. For example, with LucidaBright + + LucidaNewMath, \usepackage{lucidbry} will use the actual font + names, while \usepackage{lucidbrb} will use Karl Berry names. + +WARNING: When using fonts other than Computer Modern, look out for font + encoding (character layout) problems. LaTeX 2e directly supports + the old `TeX text' encoding (OT1 -- textext.vec), and the new + `Cork' encoding (T1 -- tex256.vec). Use `\input texnansi' for + TeX 'n ANSI encoding, or `\input ansiacce' for Windows ANSI etc. + +Like LaTeX 2e itself, auxiliary files supplied by Y&Y are at times revised +and improved. Check out the `What's New' section on http://www.YandY.com. + +If you have any problems not resolved by the above, please contact Y&Y at: + +tech-help@YandY.com (email) +(508) 371-2004 (fax) +(508) 371-3286 (voice) + +Y&Y, Inc. +45 Walden Street (snail mail) +Concord, MA, 01742, USA + +--- Copyright 1994, 1995, 1996 (C) Y&Y, Inc. and the LaTeX3 project --- +--- All rights reserved. --- + + |